
aass TG4-/0 ? 
Book ■ T76^ 



\%ajS' 



A 

GRA3I31AR 

OF THE 



SPANISH LANGUAGE, 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 

Eiit iFCrst Jlart 

CoDtainiag' a List of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in "writing 
and books : A Treatise on Pronunciation and Alterations in Orthography, 
founded upon the latest Rules established by the Academy of Madrid T Com- 
parative Rules of the Spanish and English Languages ; A general Scheme of 
the Terminations of Regular Verbs ; An alphabetical List of the IrregulcLT 
Verbs, conjugated in their order ■<, A Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions 
in Spanish ; Lists of the Names of difierent Goun^es, principal Cities and 
Christian Names. 

Eixt Srcontr Jtert 

Containing a Collection of Exercises interlined ; a Vocabulary •, Familial 
Phrases and Dialogues 5 and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. 



TOSSE. 

Second American from the latest Paris Editio::^. 

REVISED, IMPROVED, AND ADAPTED TO THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

BY F. SALES, 

Instructer of French and Spanish at Harcard University Camibridgt. 
PEU DE PRECEPTES, EX BEAVCOUP DE PRATIQUE. 




FIRST PART. 



boston; 
muinroe and francis, 128 washington-street, 

CORKER OF WATER-STREET. 



1825. 







DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT : 

District ClerFs Office. 

BE it remembered, that on the twenty-seventh day of January, A. D. 1825, and 
in the forty-ninth year of the Independence of the United States of America, 
MUNROE AND FRANCIS, of the said District, have deposited in this office the 
title of a book, the right whereof they claim as Proprietors, in the words following, 
to Tvit : 

" A GRAMMAR of the SPANISH LANGUAGE, with Practical EXERCISES. 
The First Part containing a list of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in 
writing 5 A Treatise on pronunciation and alterations in Orthography founded upon 
the latest rules established by the Academy of Madrid •, Comparative rules of the 
Spanish and English Languages ; A general scheme of the terminations of R*^gular 
Verbs j An Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, conjugated in their order 5 A 
Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions in Spanish 5 Lists of the names of differ- 
ent Countries, principal Cities, and Christian Names. The Second Part containing 
a Collection of Exercises interlined ; A Vocabulary ', Familiar Phrases and Dia- 
logues ', and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. By M. JOSSE. Second Ameri- 
can from the latest Paris edition. Revised, improved, and adapted to the English 
Language, by F. SALES, Instructer of French and Spanish at Harvard University, 
Cambridge." 

in conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, " An 
act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and 
books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein men- 
tioned:" and also to an act, entitled, "An act supplementary to an act, entitled 
an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, 
and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein 
mentioned j and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving 
and etching, historical and other prints." 

JOHN W. DAVIS, CkrJc of the District of MasmchusttU' 



TO THE 

LOVERS OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE 

IN THE 

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA^ 

TKIS SECOND EDITION, 

greatly improved and enlarged^ 

OF 

Soss^'is Grammar, 

IS 

RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED, 

BY 

THEIR OBEDIENT SERVANT, 



THE EDITOR. 



HOTXdS. 



Grateful for the approbation that our labours have met 
with in the rapid diffusion of a large edition of this Grammar, 
and encouraged b3Mhe favourable judgment passed on the 
theoretical and practical method observed in this /elementary 
work, by the most distinguished philologists and eminent 
scholars in our country ; we now present to the American 
nation a second edition carefully revised, considerably alter- 
ed, and improved throughout ; particularly in the arrange- 
ment of the Conjugation of the irregularVerbs ; in giving the 
English signification of the Table ot* Prepositions published 
by the Royal Academy ; in prefixing an Article to every 
word in the Vocabulary to denote its gender ; and in assim- 
ilating as far as possible the English phraseology to the 
Spanish, in the Familiar Phrases and Dialogues. 

We have enlarged this new edition by the addition of in- 
teresting Extracts from some of the best Spanish Writers ; 
with specimens of critical, familiar, and commercial Letters ; 
Mercantile Documents ; a Treatise on Spanish Versification, 
translated from the latest Paris edition of Josse's Grammar, 
and a copious Table of Contents ; the whole corrected in 
conformity to the most recent decisions on orthography of the 
Spanish Academy. 

Our earnest purpose having been to render this publication 
extensively useful and acceptable to all classes and ages 
of learners, the public may rest assured that no pains have 
been spared to attain so desirable an object. 

Boston. May, 1825, 



ADVERTISEMENT 

V TO THE 

FIRST EDITION. 



From the first appearance in this metropolis of Jossers 
Grammar, a desire has been entertained of adapting it to the 
English language ; but the little encouragement hitherto 
promised, in the United States, to an undertaking of this kind, 
has delayed its execution. 

This system however has been used, and recommended to 
such learners of the Spanish Language as were well acquaint- 
ed with the French, and we have always had the satisfaction 
to find them well pleased with it, commonly expressing their 
regret, that it had not yet been adapted to the English lan- 
guage. 

The recognition of the North and South American Sov- 
ereignties by our Government, has determined us to make 
the attempt. This glorious act on the part of our nation 
opens such a boundless field for scientific, political and com- 
mercial advantages to the rising generation, that we could not 
deny ourselves the gratification of aiding the generous pur- 
pose by presenting a key^ which will, it is hoped, open an 
easy way to the attainment of knowledge, honours, and 
wealth. 

The English and Spanish Grammars, which we have 
hitherto used, are so irregular and incorrect, that it has re- 
quired the utmost patience and perseverance of both teach- 
er and pupil to wade through them. To this should be add- 
ed the enormous price at which they are imported and sold, 
tending to prevent many a studious youth from acquiring a 
language, not only noble and beautiful, but spoken in so 
many regions of the earth, that the benign rays of the star 
of day are perennially smiling upon and fertilizing some one 
of them. 

This work of adaptation and improvement has been com- 
menced and firrshpd, at different intervals, in the course of 
the last seas nr regular occupations would peimit. 

We bave cb - to perform our task faithfully ; should 



b ADVERTISEMENT. 

our labour meet with approbation, we shall be rewarded ; 
should a contrary fate await it, we shall console ourselves 
with the reflection that our motive was good. In the mean 
time, it is requested that all defects which shall be discovered 
be made known, and any improvements suggested which may 
occur ; so that this grammar in future editions may be ren- 
dered as perfect as possible. 

We have thought proper, i'n order to render this work 
complete, and save an additional expense, to insert the Vo- 
cabulary and Dialogues of Fernandez at the end of the sec- 
ond part, altering the orthography according to the latest 
rules of the Spanish Academy, The object of collections of 
this kind is to teach the most usual words and phrases in 
familiar conversations ; a sure method, after passing carefully 
through the Grammar and Exercises, of learning to speak a 
foreign language with propriety. 



TRANSLATION OF THE PREFACE 

TO THE 
PARIS EDTTIO.X OF 1318. 



The Spanish GrammarSj heretofore published for die 
French people^ do not seem to have attained the end intended 
by their authors. Several of these productions have become 
in some manner obsolete, since the Royal Academy has given 
clear and precise rules for the Castillian Language, which are 
at present generally adopted. The more modern grammars, 
on the contrary, seem to be nothing more than the transla- 
tion of the Grammar of the Spanish Academy. In compos- 
ing them it has been too much forgotten that they are inten- 
ded for the use of Frenchmen. 

A grammar published in London in 1799 by Josse, Mas- 
ter of Languages, reprinted in the same city in lS04and 
1810, is distant alike from both these extremes, and has ap- 
peared to us to unite method with clearness in the exposition 
of the principles and rules compared w^ith the French lan- 
guage. The author has enriched his work with a selection of 
mterhned Exercises accompanied with notes and references 
to the principal rules, which may enable beginners, from the 
outset, to join practice to the study of precepts ; a method of 
rendering the student familiar with the construction and difii- 
cukies of a foreign language whose utility has been fully 
demonstrated. This advantage alone mu>t ensure to the 
Grammar of Josse a preference over those which have pre- 
ceded it. 

Such is the Grammar now offered to the public. By ex- 
tending the knowledge of it in France, we deserve the grati- 
tude of the lovers of the Spanish Language, the copiousness, 
elegance and grandeur of which are too generally acknowl- 
edged, to make it necessary for us to demonstrate its superior^ 
ity over the greater part of European Languages. 



8 ABBREVIATIONS. 

We observe however that, while we have conformed to 
the plan of the author, and have adopted his work, we have 
made numerous corrections, suppressed useless repetitions, 
and made important additions on the subject of Participles, 
Prepositions, the Accent, &c. A few rules which had 
been omitted have been supplied, others have been mod- 
ified, and several parts have been elucidated. Finally, 
the style has been carefully revised, and often rendered 
more concise. ^ 

G. HAMONIERE. 



COMMON SPANISH ABBREVIATIONS. 



A. C. 


A no Cristiano, 


in the year of Christ. 


A. a.s 


Arroba, or arrobas, 


twenty-Jive pounds. 


As. 


Anos 


years. 


A. A. 


Autores, 


authors. 


A. V. E. 


A' V.ra Es.^ia, 


to Y. E. 


Adm.o^ 


Administrador, 


administrator. 


Ag.to 


Agosto, 


August. 


Am. 


Amigo, 


friend. 


An.to 


Antonio, 


Jinthony, 


Ang.o 


Angosto, 


narrow. 


App.coApp. 


^a Apostolico, ca, 


apostolical. 


Art. 


Articulo 


article. 


Arzbpo. 


Arzobispo, 


archbishop. 


At.o 


Atento, 


respectful. 


B. 


Beato, 


blessed. 


b. (in quoting) Vuelta, 


turn over. 


Bj 


Bachiller, 


bachelor. 


B.L.M. 


Beso 6 besa las manos, 


I kiss or he kisses the 
hands, [fo^l* 


B. L. P. 


Beso 6 besa los pies. 


I kiss or he kisses the 


g mo p e 


Beatisimo Padre, 


ntost blessed father. 


C. A. R. 


Cat.« Ap CO Rom.o 


Cath. A post. Rom. 


C. M. B. 


Cuyas manos beso, 


whose hands 1 kiss. 





ABBREVIATIONS. \ 


C. p. B. 


Ciiyos pies beso, 


lohosefeet I kiss. 


Cam.a 


Camara, 


ch^nnher. 


Cap. 


Capitulo, 


chapter. 


Cap-" 


Capitan, 


captain. 


Capp." 


Capellan, 


chaplain. 


Col. 


Columna, 


column. 


Comis. 


Comisario, 


commissary. 


Comp.» 


Compania, 


company. 


Cons.o 


Consejoj 


council. 


Conv.te 


Conveniente, 


convenient. 


Corr.t^ 


Corriente^ 


current. 


O 


Cuando, 


when. 


C.t« C.ta 


Cuanto, ta. 


how much. 


D. or D n or D aDon, Dona, 


mister^ mistress. 


D. D. 


Doctores^ 


doctors. 


D.^ or D.or 


Doctor^ 


doctor. 


D.« 


Dios, 


God, 


D> dha. 


Dicho, dicha. 


saidy ditto. 


Dro. 


DerechOj 


right or didy. 


DicJ^ lO.re 


Diciembre, 


December, 


Dom.o 


Domingo, 


Sunday, 


Ecc.« Ecc.a 


E'clesiastico, 


ecclesiastic* 


Enm.<io, vale Enmendado, 


ammded. valid. 


En.o 


Eneroj 


Jmi^rtf. 


Es mo Es.°^a 


Escelentisimo, ma, 


most excellent. 


Es.no p^co 


Escribano publico, 


Not,y Public, 


Fho, fha, 


Fecho, fecha, 


dated. 


Feb.o 


Febrero, 


February, 


Fol. 


Folio, 


folio. 


F.r 


Fray, Frey, 


brother of certain relig- 


Fran.co 


Francisco, 


Francis, [ious orders 


Frnz. 


Fernandez, 


Fernandez, 


Gue. or gde 


Guarde, 


save. 


Gra. 


Gracia, 


grace. 


Gen.^ or graJ 


. General, 


general. 


Id. 


Idem. 


ditto. 


Igla. 


Iglesia, 


church* 


Il.e 


llustre, 


illustrious. 


Il^mo Jl,nia 


Ilustrisimo, ma, 


most illustrious. 


Inq.or 


Inquisidor, 


inquisitor. 


Intend.te 


Intendente, 


intendant. 


.Jhs. 


Jesus, 


Jesus. 


Jph. 


Josef, Jose, 


Joseph, 



10 


ABBREVIATIONS. 1 


Jn. 


Juan, 


John* 1 


Lib. 


Libro, 


hook, 1 


Lib.5 


Libras, 


pounds. 1 


Lin. 


Llnea, 


liup, 1 


Lic.do 


Licenciado, 


licentiate. 


M. P. S. 


Muy poderosQ Senor 


most powerful Lord. 


M.e 


Madre, 


mothn\ 


Mo"- 


Mayor, 


elder ^ major. 


M.' a.s 


Muchos anos, 


many years^ 


Mag.d 


Magestad, 


Majesty. 


Man. 


Manuel, 


Manuel. 


May. 


Mayordomo, 


Steward. 


Mig.i 


Miguel, 


Michael. 


Mntro. 


Ministro, 


minister. 


Mrd. 


Merced, 


favour^ worship. 


Mm. 


Martin, 


Martin. 


Mras. 


Muestras, 


patterns. 


Mrnz. 


Martinez, 


Martinez. 


Mro. 


Maestro, 


master^ 


Mrs. 


Maravedis, 


maravedis. 


Ms. 


Muchos, 


many. 


M S. 


Manuscrito, 


manuscript. 


MSS. 


Manuscritos, 


manuscripts. 


N. C. M. 


Nro. Cat.o Monarca, 


our Cath. Mon. 


N.S. 


Nuestro Senor, 


our Lord. 


N.S.a 


Nuestra Senora, 


our Lady. 


Nro. nra. 


Nuestro, nuestra, 


our. 


Nov.e 9.fe 


Noviembre, 


November. 


Obpo. 


Obispo, 


Bishop. 


Oct.™ 8.1-e 


Octubre, 


October. 


On. onz 


Onza, onzas, 


ounce y doubloons. 


Ord.n ord.s 


Orden, ordenes, 


order y orders. 


P. D. 


Posdata, 


Postscript. 


P.=^ 


Para, 


for. 


P.« 


Padre, 


father. 


P." 


Pedro, 


Peter. 


P.-^ 


Por, 


for, per, by. 


P.s 


Pies, pesos, 


feet, dollars. 


p.ta 


Plata, 


silver or plate. 


P.te 


Parte, 


part. 


p_to 


Puerto, 


port. 


Pag. 


Pagina, 


page. i 


Pag.t<^ 


Pagamento, 


payment. 





ABRREVIATIONS, H 


PI. 


Plana, 


trowel. 


Pror. 


Procurador, 


attorney. 


Publ.o 


Publico, 


public. 


Prov.or 


Provisor, 


provisor. 


Pral. 


Principal, 


principal. 


P.mo p do 


Proximo pasado. 


last past. 


Q. or q.e 


Que, 


that. 


Q.« 


Quien, 


who. 


Q. S. M. B. 


Quien sus manos besa, 


W. K. Y. H. 


Rl. R.les V.or 


* Real, reales vellon, 


real, reals, silver coin. 


R."io 


Reverendisimo, 


most reverend. 


R.do R.da 


Reverendo, reverenda. 


reverend. 


P. M. Fr. 


Padre maestro fray, 


reverend father and 


R.bi 


Recibi, 


I received. [master. 


Rec.o 


Recibo, 


receipt. 


Resp. 


Respuesta, 


answer. 


S. 


San 6 Santo, 


saint. 


S.to s.*^ 


Santo, Santa, 


holy. 


S. M. 


Su magestad. 


his majesty. 


S/or S.or S.ra Senor, Sefiora, 


Sir, Madam. 


S. S.d 


Su Santidad, 


his Holiness. 


SS. S.res 


Senores, 


gentlemen, Messrs.' 


S. S. s. 


Su seguro servidor, 


your faithful servant. 


Seb." 


Sebastian, 


Sebastian. 


Sep/« or 7.^^^ Setiembre, 


September. 


S.ria Secret.* 


I Secretaria, 


secretary's office. 


S.o Secret.0 


Secretario, 


secretary. 


Ser.«io or "la 


Serenisimo, ma, 


most serene* 


Serv.® 


Servicio, 


service. 


Serv.' 


Servidor, 


servant. 


Sig.te 


Siguiente, 


following. 


SS.^^o 


Santisimo, 


most holy. fment. 


SS.mo 


Santisimo (el sacramento) the hosty the holy sacra-' 


SS.mo P.e 


Santisimo padre. 


most holy Father. 


SS.no 


Escribano, 


notary, scrivener. 


S.S. P.P. 


Santos padres, 


holy fathers. 


Sup.ca 


Suplica, 


entreity, request. 


Sup.te 


Suplicante, 


petitioner. 


Super.te 


Superintendente, 


superintendant. 


Ten.te 


Teniente, 


lieutenant. 


T'esor.o 


Tesorero, 


treasurer. 


Tom. 


Tomo, 


volume. 


Tpo. 


Tiempo, 


time. 



Tral. 


AJsismiiviAriuj 

Tribunal, 


tribunah 


V. M. 


Vuestra Magestad, 


your Majesty, 


Ult.o 


Ultimo, 


last. 


V. V.e 


Venerable^, 


venerable. 


V.A. 


Vuestra Alteza, 


your highness. 


V.B.d 


Vuestra Beatitud, 


your beatitude. 


V. I. 


Vuestra 11."^% 


your grace. 


V.EorV.E 


x.Vuecelencia, 


your excellency. 


V. a 


Verbi gracia, 


for example. 


Vm.Vmd.V 


, Vuestra merced, or lis- 


you^ your worship^ 


Vd.* 


ted. 


your favour. 


V. P. 


Vuestra Paternidad, 


your paternity. 


V.Ra. 


Vuestra Reverenciaj 


your reverence. 


V.S. 


V.^ Senoria or usia, 


your lordshipj honour. 


V. S. [. 


Vuesenoria Uustrisimaj 


your most illustrious 
reverence. 


V.S.d 


Vuestra Santidad, 


your holiness. 


V.on 


Real vellouj 


real ofbulliouy coin. 


Vol. 


Volumen, 


volume. 


V. S. G. 


Vuelva si gusta, 


please turn over. 


Vro. vra. 


Vuestro, vuestra, 


your. 


X.^o 


Diezmo, 


tenth and tithe. 


Xp.to 


Cristo, 


Christ. 


Xpt.«^ 


Cristiano, 


Christian. 


Xptobal;, 


Cristobal J 


Christopher. 



* An 5 is added to these abbreviations when more than one person 
is addressed. 



SPANISH GRAMMAR. 



INTRODUCTION. 

Gra:>imar is the art of speaking and writing correctly. 

Speaking correctly is to speak according to established 
rules, as regards both the pronunciation of letters, syllables 
and words, and the arrangement and combination of these 
words among themselves. 

Writing correctly is to write in conformity to the rule? 
and usage adopted by the best writers. 

We shall first consider words as sounds, show the letters' 
that form them, and succinctly give the rules most proper to 
fix their pronunciation. 

Considering them afterwards as signs of our thoughts, we 
shall examine their nature, and their accidental variations, 
the order they observe between themselves, and the rules 
of their union. 

Most grammarians treat separately upon the rules of 
syntax. It has appeared to us more methodical, precise 
and simple, to place these rules in the chapters relating to 
each kind of \^ ords. From this it follovvs, however, that 
the examples we give for the understanding of the rules 
sometimes precede the knowledge, which they suppose of 
certain parts of speech. But those examples are always 
accompanied by the translation ; which greatly diminishes 
a slight inconvenience, which a second reading of the 
grammar will remove, and which is abundantly compensa- 
ted by the advantage of avoiding frequent repetitions and 
references, a multiplicity of which fatigues and discourages 
beginners. 



14 PRONUNCIATION. 

CHAPTER I. 

Of words considered as sounds. 

Words, considered as sounds, are formed of letters and 
syllables. The only syllables that require explanation are 
gue^ gui ; qne^ q.n ; we shall speak of them at the letter w, 
in which all the difficulty lies. 

The Spanish language reckons twenty-eight letters. The 
following is the order and particular denomination of these 
letters : 



Alphabet 


a? 


b, c, ch, d, e, 


• fi, 


Denomination 


ah, 


bay, thay,* chay, day, a, 


a-fay, 


Alphabet 


g,-^ 


h? h h"^ k, 


1, 


Denomination 


hay,t 


at-chay, e, h6tah,f kah, 


a-lay. 


Alphabet 


n 


m, n, n.f 


O, 


Denomination 


a-lee-ay 


, a-may, a-uay, a-nee-ay, 


«j 


Alphabet 


P? 


q, r, s, t, 


U? 


Denomination 


pay, 


koo, air-ray, a-say, lay, 


oo. 


Alphabet 


V, 


,x, y,^ z,* 




Denomination 


vay. 


a-kiss, e-gree-a-gah, thay 


•tah. 


The letters 


are all of the feminine gender. 




The Spani 


sh language has six vowels, which are 


«, e, 



2, 0, M, ?/. They are called vowels, because they have 
perfect sound of themselves, without being joined to other 
letters. 

The other letters are consonants ^ they are thus called, 
because they cannot form a perfect sound without the as- 
sistance of vowels. 



* Pronounced as tha in the English word thane, 

f g and j are guttuial, and their pronunciation can be learned 
only from a master ; the English combination under them conveys 
the nearest sound possible. 

+ II and n are pronounced as the liquid I and gw in French ; as, 
in treille, vine-arbour ; rtgner, to reign ; avellanayfilhert ) guadaiiap 
sithe. The two last are Spanish examples. 



PRONUNCIATION. 15 



OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS. 

A. — This letter is pronounced as ah in English. Ex. 
Amur, to love ; alba, dawn. 

E. — This letter is pronounced as a in the alphabet in 
English. Ex. Eclipse, eclipse. 

Exceptions. Before r, in the same syllable, e is pro- 
nounced as in the English w^ords, care, snare, Ex. ver, to 
see ; verdadero, true. On the contrary, in verisimiJy 
probable, it is close, because e, in this last word, forms a 
part of the first syllable, and r begins the second. 

I. — This vowel is pronounced as e m English, except 
when it is marked w^ith the acute accent, when it is long, 
and pronounced like ee in English, as in the words, toda- 
via, yet ; origen, origin ; silaba, syllable. 

O. — The o is generally pronounced as in English ; it is, 
however, necessary to observe, that it is sometimes open, 
sometimes close, and sometimes long. It is open, 1st, in 
words of one syllable, when it is not immediately followed 
by another vowel. Ex. Lo, the, it ; no, no, not ; vos, 
you. 2d. At the end of words w^hen it is accented ; for 
example, iu the third person of the singular of the preterite 
definite of regular and several irregular verbs. Ex. Am6, 
he loved ; te?ni6, he feared ; sh'bio, he w^ent up. And this 
must necessarily be distinguished by the pronunciation 
and the accent in the first conjugation, so as not to con^ 
found the first person of the present of the indicative with 
the third of the preterite definite. It is long, whenever it 
is immediately followed by another vowel, as in voi/, I go ; 
hoy, to-day ; dov, I give. In other cases it is close. 

U. — U is pronounced oo. We except from this rule the 
syllables que, qui, gue, giii, in which the u is not sounded. 

Sometimes in the diphthong, gue, gni, the u preserves its 
sound of 00^ as in arguir, to argue ; agiiero, omen. Not 
to leave any doubt in this respect, the Spanish Academy 
writes the u wdth two dots w^henever it must be pronoun- 
ced 00, so that it is very easy for any stranger to see, at the 
first glance, the difference of the pronunciation between 
giierra, war ; and vtrg uenza, shame ; seguir, to follow ; 
3nd argifir^ to ars^ue. 



16 



PRONUNCIATION. 



Y. — This letter is sometimes a vowel and sometimes a 
consonant. It is a vowel when it is preceded by another 
vowelj making with it a diphthong, as in the words lei/^ 
law ; Rey^ King. It is also a vowel, when it is a conjunc- 
tive particle. Ex. Pan y agua^ bread and water. In al- 
most every other case it is a consonant, as in saya^ petti- 
coat ; yerro^ error, &c. The y is no longer joined to con- 



sonants to begin a syllable 
and not yzquierch. 



we must write izquierdoy left- 



OF DIPHTHONGS. 



A diphthong is the union of two vowels /expressing a 
double sound, and pronounced by a single emission of the 
voice ; these are sixteen in number : 



aiy or ay 


ddhais^ 


you gave ; 


hayy there is, there are 


au 


pausa^ 


pause ; 


caustty 


cause. 


ei, or ey 


veis, 


you see ; 


ley, 


law. 


ea 


linea,^ 


line ; 


B67*eas, 


Boreas. 


CO 


inrgineo 


, virginal ; 


cutdneoy 


cutaneous. 


en 


dcnda, 


debt ; 


deiido, 


kinsman. 


ia 


gracia. 


grace ; 


Jidda, 


towards. 


ie 


cielo^ 


heaven ; 


cieno, 


mud. 


io 


precioj 


price ; 


necio, 


fool. 


ill 


ciudadj 


city ; 


viudoy 


widower. 


06 


heroe^ 


hero ; 


aloe, 


aloes. 


oiy or oy 


soiSy 


you are ; 


voy, 


I go. 


ua 


fragua, 


forge ; 


agua, 


water. 


lie 


dneno, 


master ; 


sueno, 


dream. 


ui. or 1(7/ 


riddO) 


noise ; 


muy, 


very. 


7 »/ 

ZIO 


arduo, 


arduous. 


mutiio, 


mutual. 



N. B. When in these combinations the i and u are ac- 
cented, as in brio, efectiia, each vowel forms a distinct 
syllable. 

The TRIPHTHONGS are four ; 



lai 


preciais, 


ieis 


vacieis, 


uai 


sontigiiais, 


net, uey 


ave^ngueis, 



you value. 

you may empty. 

you bless. 

you may search ; 



huey, o\. 



PRONUNCIATION. . ^^ 



OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS. 

B. — B, in the beginning of a word, is always pronounced 
as in English. (See Obs. page 20.) 

C. — C has the sound of t/i in English, as in the word 
thane y before e and i ; and the sound of k^ before a, o^n. 
Formerly the c with the cedilla was used, as in qapato^ 
shoe ; qutano^ such a one ; but it is no longer used ; and 
the z has been substituted in its place : thus we now write, 
zapato^ zutano, 

Ch. — These two letters are pronounced as in English in 
the word cheek ; as, chico^ small ; chocolate^ chocolate. 
In words derived from the ancient languages, it sounds like 
k ; as, Charibdis, Melchisedech. (See Obs. page 20.) 

D. — D is pronounced, in the beginning of a word, as in 
English ; but when the d is between two vowels, it is as 
soft as the th in the words though^ the .; Ex. Dadoy a dye ; 
dedo^ finger. 

F. — F is pronounced as in English. 

G. — G is pronounced as in English before a, o, w. It is 
guttural before e, i. Ex. muger, woman ; elegir^ to elect. 
Before n it has the Latin pronunciation. Ex. digno^ 
worthy. 

H. — The H is but lightly aspirated before we. Ex. hiievo^ 
egg ; hueso, bone. The Academy suppresses it after the 
f, and uses/ instead of ph. Ex. Filosofiay teairo^ philoso- 
phy, theatre ; Filadelfia, Philadelphia. 

The letter h has been retained in many words, though 
not pronounced ; and in several it has taken the place of 
the letter/, formerly used. Ex. fjo, son ; facer, to do ; 
fermosura, beauty, are now wrHten, hijo, hacer, hermosiira, 

J.— J is pronounced guttural before all the vowels. It is 
found before e audi only in tlie words Jesus, Jerusalem, 
Jeremias, and in the diminutives and derivatives of the 
nouns that terminate in ja or jo ; rs, paja, pqjita ; viejo. 
vtejectto ; straw, little straw ; old man, little old nian^ ^ ' 

2** 



18 PRONUNCIATION. 

K. — The K is admitted only in foreign words, and is pro- 
nounced as in English. 

L. — This letter is pronounced as in English. 

LL. — When II occurs in a word, it is liquid, and pro- 
nounced as in the words seraglio and William^ in English. 
Ex. LlagGy wound ; llenoy full ; cahallo^ horse ; llegar^ to 
arrive. 

M. — M and IV are pronounced as in English. 

N. — N having this mark (>^) which the Spaniards call n 
with tilde^ has the same sound as n in onion, minion, &c. 
Ex. Senor, Sir ; ninezy childhood ; ensenar, to teach. 

P and Q — are pronounced as in English. / 

R. — R presei-ves in Spanish its natural pronunciation. 
Ex. razon, reason ; rico, rich : and when it is double, both 
letters must be distinctly heard. Ex. carro, cart ; carrera, 
career ; zurra, flogging. 

S. — S is always pronounced hard, like ss, even between 
two vowels. Ex. sahio, wise ; sebo^ tallow ; famoso, fa- 
mous ; esposo, husband ; sosiego, tranquillity. 

T. — T never loses the sound it has in the alphabet, and 
is always hard. 

V. — The Spaniards often confound the sound of this let- 
ter with that of b ; but the Academy disapproves of it, 
and recommends that it should be pronounced as the Eng- 
lish. Ex. Falentia, valour ; velo, veil ; vil, vile. 

X. — X is pronounced like s when followed by a conso- 
nant, and it is not sounded when followed by c. Ex. Ex- 
trangero, excepto, &c. It is pronounced like ks when it is 
found between two vowels ; as, examinar, existir, sexo. In 
a few words ending in x, it is somewhat guttural. Ex. 
Relox,^ watch ; box, box-tree ^ carcax, quiver. (See Obs. 
page 20.) 

The x is not now used as a guttural letter ; the j is 
used in its place before the vowels a, o, u, and the g before 
e and i. 



Now written rdoj, &c. 



PRONUNCIATION. 19 

Z. — The Tj is only used now before a, o, ii^ and is pro- 
nounced like the c before e and ?*. Ex. zaj^ato^ shoe ; 
zorra^ fox ; zmwzo, juice. 

Observations. 

1st. The Spanish Academy, conforming to the pronun- 
ciation, has suppressed double consonants, when one alone 
is pronounced. In the Spanish books, printed within a fe\\^ 
years, the double letters ss^ff^ bby &c. are no longer found, 
and ccy nn, rr, only when both consonants are sounded ; 
as in the words accesso, ennoblecer^ barro. Double I is to 
be considered only as the sign of the liquid letter /, and not 
as a double consonant. 

2d. But as Spanish books less modern have not follow- 
ed fixed rules, as respects not only doubling the consonants, 
but also the orthography, when the pronunciation does not 
indicate it in an evident manner, we inform beginners, 1st. 
that they ought to have recourse to the latest Dictionaries, 
because their authors have generally adopted the orthogra- 
phy of the Spanish Academy ; 2d. that, in consulting these 
Dictionaries, the scholar should remember, that, if he does 
not find the word at the first search, it is because its or- 
thography has varied, and because the Spanish writers have 
often confounded, and do sometimes still confound the let- 
ters b and v ; s and c ; c and cA, and sometimes q ; c and 
q in the syllables qua, que qui ; c and z ; f and /«, in the 
beginning of a word ; j and g, in the syllables je and ji. 
Some writers use the j entirely for the guttural sound, and 
never the ^ nor x ; but we follaw the decisions of the 
Academy and not the w^hims of every schemer. X, having 
had till lately the guttural sound, was confounded with g^ 
before e, z, and with the 7, which is always guttural before 
all vowels. Instead of looking in the Dictionary for alve- 
irioj ferido, lexosj quando, zelo, cliimia, &c. he should 
K>k for albedrio^ herido^ lejos, cuando^ celo, g^uimia^ &c. 



20 



PRONUNCIATION. 



SYIiliABICAL TABLE. 



Orthographical alterations 
made hy the Royal Acad- 
emy of Madrid, and now 
generally adopted by 
Spanish writers. 



ba,* 


be, bi, 


bo, 


bu. 


raa, rae. 


mi, 


mo 


mu, 


ca, 




CO, 


cu, 


na, ne. 


ni. 


no. 


nu, 




ce, ci, 






na, ne, 


m, 


no. 


nu. 


chat,che,chi 


cho 


,chu, 


pa, pe, 


Pi> 


po. 


pu, 


da, 


de, di, 


do. 


du. 


qiia,f 




quo 




fa, 


fe, fi, 


fo, 


fu, 


que 


,qui 


J 




ga, 




gOj 


S", 


qiie 


,qui 








ge, gi, 






ra,§ re. 


ri, 


ro. 


ru. 




gue,gui 


> 




rra, rre. 


rri. 


rro, 


rrii, 




gue,gui 


> 




sa, se. 


si. 


so. 


su. 


ha, 


he, hi. 


ho, 


hu, 


ta, te. 


ti, 


to. 


til, 


ja? 


je, ji, 


jo? 


J"; 


va, ve, 


vi, 


vo. 


VII, 


ka, 


ke, ki, 


ko, 


ku, 


xa,||xe, 


xi, 


xo. 


xu, 


la. 


le, li. 


lo, 


lu, 


xa, xe. 


xi, 


x6, 


xu, 


Ila, 


He, Hi, 


Ho, 


Uu, 


ya» ye, 


y'h 


yo, 


y«? 










za, ze. 


zi, 


zo, 


zu, 



cua, 



cue, cui, 



ja» g-e, gi, JO, ju, 
xa, xe, xi, xo, xu, 

za, ce, ci, zo^ zu. 



IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS. 

* B is always hard at the beginning- of a word, whatever letter 
may follow it. Ex. barato, cheap ; hendito, blessed ; bravo, brave ; 
bianco, white. In the middle of a word, between twot vowels, b is 
softened into nearly a v ', Ex beber, to drink ; siibir, to go up. Bla, 
ble, he. are always pronounced hard, as in English, whatever place 
they occupy in a word. Ex. Hablar, to speak ; establecer, to estab- 
lish. Bra, bre, he. preceded by a consoriant, are pronounced hard ; 
as, hombre, man ; alambre, wire : but if preceded by a vowel, the 
b is generally softened into almost a v. Ex. Obrar, to act ; abrirj 
to open ; pobre, poor. 

t Chd, chi, h6. with a circumflex, as is stated in page 17, has 
heretofore been used with the sound of kah, kai, in words derived 
from the ancient languages ; but now we use in the place of it, ca, 
que, qui, co, cu ; as, Quimiaj chemistry ; querubin, cherubim ; 
Caribdis, Charibdis. 

i Q is changed into c, in all words where it is followed by ua, uo, 
vCy ui, and we write cuando, when ; cuota, quota ; cuestion, ques- 
tion. 

§ R, in the beginning and middle of words, is pronounced as in 
EngHsh ; as, rio, river ; erario, treasury ; but rr, in Spanish, is pro- 
nounced a little stronger than the r in English at the beginning of 
a word ; as, perro, dog ; Pizarro. 

II Xa, he. used to be guttural, and pronounced like the 7, when the 
vowel, following the x, had not the circumflex accent over it The 
Spanish Academy, in the last edition of their Dictionary, printed in 



PRONUNCIATION. 21 



OF THE ACCENT. 



There is bui one long syllable in each Spanish word. It 
is generally indicated by the acute accent placed upon the 
vowel. But this accent is suppressed, when the long sylla- 
ble may be otherwise known ; except in certain cases, where 
use requires it should be preserved. 

The following are the principal rules established by the 
Spanish Academy, for the use or suppression of the accent 
upon the vov>^el of the long syllable. 

1st. The monosyllable must not be accented, because it 
is long from its nature. 

Exceptions. We accent, 1st. the conjunctions ^, and 6y 
iij or ; and the preposition a, to. 2d. The monosyllable 
tlj he, him ; mi^ me, pronouns personal ; sf, yes, one self, 
affirmative particle or pronoun ; de and si, ( from the verbs 
dar and ser^ to give and to be) to distinguish these mono- 
syllables from eZ, the, article ; mij my, pronoun possessive ; 
fif, if, conditional particle ; Je, of, preposition ; and se, 
himself, &;c. pronoun. 

2d. The accent is suppressed in words of many sylla- 
bles terminated by only one vowel, because their penultima 
is long from its nature. 

Exceptions, 1st. In verbs, in the first and third person 
of the singular of the perfect and future of the indicative, 
the last syllable is long, and receives the accent. Ex. am^^ 
I loved ; am6^ he loved ; amari^ I shall love ; conocij I 
knew ; conocerd^ he shall know, &:c. The accent remains, 

1817, and in their last improved Book on Orthography of 1815, have 
used, instead of the g-uttural x, the letter /, before the vowels a, o, u ; 
and the letter g, before e and i ; but some writers use^ for re before 
h11 the vowels. Ex. jahon, soap ; ge/e, chief ; Megico, Mexico ; 
jugo, juice. The x is preserved only in those wordsjin which it is pro- 
nounced as A"*. Ex. Exagerar^ pronounced eksagerar, to exaggerate. 
The x has also been changed into an s in all the instances in which 
it is followed by another consonant. Ex. EslrangerO) stranger ; 
escepto, except ; escitar, to excite. The object of the Academy, in 
all the foregoing alterations, has been to simplify the orthography, 
and make it conform to the pronunciation as nearly as possible ; 
therefore we have adopted these improvements in the orthography 
and pronunciation throughout this Grammar and Book of Exercise?, 



22 PRONUNCIATION. 

even when we add a pronoun to some one of those words. 
Ex. cogite, I caught thee ; halUUj I found him ; come- 
rdnl), they will eat it. 2d. It is the same with the last 
syllable of the words alldy there 5 caf^, coffee ; dej6y he 
left ; Peruy Bercebu. 

3d. In Spanish words of more than two syllables, the 
two last are often short. We call words of this kind, 
esdrujulosy dactyles. Some of them, as, cdmara., chamber ; 
espiritu^ spirit ; santisimo^ most holy ; take the accent 
upon the antepenultima^ which is accented in the same 
manner in those verbs which are made esdrujulos by the 
annexed pronoun ; as, iniramej look at me ; dyemCj hear 
me ; which, without the adjunction of the pronoun, would 
be written without an accent, miraj look ; oye^ hear. 
Others, compounded of a verb followed by two pronouns, 
and many adverbs, terminated in mente^ have the accent 
upon the syllable preceding the antepenultima. Ex. bus-^ 
camelo^ seek it for me ; dijosenosj people told us ; 
fdrilrnente^ easily. Finally, certain adverbs in mnite, deri- 
ved from esdrujtdos words, receive the accent upon the 
fifth syllable, reckoning from the last. Ex. bdrbaramente, 
barbarously ; intrtpidamente^ intrepidly 5 words derived 
from bdrbaroy intrtpido. 

Sd. The accent is suppressed upon the pemdtima, in 
words of two syllables, terminated with tw^o vowels ; as, 
nao, ship ; se«, let him be ; lea, let him read ; wfo, mine ; 
and in the words terminated in ia, ^e, io^ w«, we, z/o, which, 
considering the two vowels as diphthongs, are classed with 
dissyllables : for instance, India, Julio, July ; agua, water ; 
mutuo, mutual ; <fec. 

Exceptions. The first and third persons of the singular 
of the perfects of the verbs deviate from this rule, sine© 
they always have, as we have said, the last syllable long and 
accented. We must then write lei, I read ; jit, I trusted ; 
temid, he feared ; pidio, he asked, &c. 

4th. Words, terminating in 7/ preceded by a vowel, 
which forms a diphthong, have no accent ; their last syl- 
lable is always long. Ex. Mnley^ convoy, Paraguay, 

5th. In words ending with two vowels, and of three or 
more syllables, the position of the long syllable varies. 1st. 
The last vowel is long, and takes the accent in the words 



PRONUNCIATION. 23 

puntapie^ a kick ; tirapi^, a strap ; and in the first and 
third persons of the singular of the perfect of the indicative 
of verbs ; as, acarret^ I carried ; confinut^ I continued ; 
distribdi^ I distributed ; codiciS^ he coveted ; esceptud, he 
excepted. 2d. The penuhima vowel is long, and receives 
the accent in the nouns and verbs terminated in ae, ia^ ie^ 
io, If a, ue, iio ; for example, prov6e, he provides ; JHosofia^ 
philosophy ; desafioy challenge ; gradiio^ I graduate. 

Exceptions. The accent is suppressed in all the per- 
sons ending in ia^ of the imperfect of the indicative and 
1st conditional tense, because the i is always long. For 
the same reason, we do not accent the penultimate vowel 
of the terminations aCy ao^ au^ ea, eo, oa^ oe, oo. However, 
sometimes these vowels form a diphthong ; then the sylla- 
ble that precedes them is long and receives the accent. 
Ex. Mroe^ hero ; linea^ line ; cutdneo, cutaneous ; pur- 
pureoj purple coloured. If the final vowels za, ie, to, ua^ 
we, 2/0, of words of three or more syllables, form diphthongs, 
it is also the preceding syllable which is long ; but the ac- 
cent is suppressed. Ex. Esperiencia, experience ; distur- 
bio, disturbance ; Nicaragua, 

6th. The last syllable of the words ending with a con- 
sonant is commonl}^ long, and does not receive an accent. 
The acceent is, on the contrary, marked, if the long syllable 
is the penultima, as in the words drbol, tree ; virgen^ vir- 
gin ; mdrtivy martyr ; alf^rez, ensign ; or the antepenulti- 
ma, as in Jupiter, regimen^ AristSteles, 

Exceptions. 1 st. The last syllable of any person singu- 
lar of a verb, ending with a consonant, takes the accent, if 
it be long. Ex. Amards, thou shalt love ; serds, thou shalt 
be, &c. 2d. In patronymick names terminated in z ; as^ 
Perez, Sanchez, Fernandez, the penultima is always long, 
and is not accented. 

7th. The plural of verbs and nouns follows the rule of 
their singular. The only exception is the plural caracttres, 
whose long accented syllable is not the same as in the sin- 
gular, which is cardcter on the penultima. 

Ohservation. 

See [pages 15, 17? 18,] what we have said of the accent 
circumflex and of the diaeresis upon the ii, signs formerly 



24 PRONUNCIATION. 

introduced by the Spanish Academy to fix the pronuncia- 
tion in a few uncertain cases. The circumflex is now en- 
tirely suppressed, in consequence of depriving the x of its 
former guttural sound, and using the j and g in its place ; 
and in consequence of using ca, qiie^ qui, instead of cha, 
che, cMy in words derived from the ancient languages. The 
diaeresis is only used in gue^ gui, to denote that the u must 
be sounded separately from the i. 

OF PUNCTUATION. 

Punctuation is in Spanish the same as in English. How- 
ever, as it often happens in the Spanish language, that 
punctuation alone indicates the interrogative sense of the 
phrase ; and that, if the period be long, the reader is in- 
formed too late by the note of interrogation which follows 
it, the Spanish Academy then makes use of a particular 
mark, causing the phrase to be preceded by the note of 
interrogation reversed. Ex. £No te espanta la cercania 
de un precipicioy que encuhierto con las apariendas de vanas 
seguridades^ sera para ti tanto mas fatal cuanto menos ima* 
ginado ? Art thou not frightened at the vicinity of a 
p-ecipice, which, concealed under the appearance of false 
security, will be the more fatal to thee, as it is less suspected ? 

If, in Spanish, we are not warned by the interrogative 
note, this phrase is only affirmative, thou art not fright en- 
cc?. Sic, Its turn and the transposition of a pronoun do not 
announce at the outset, as in English, that the sense is 
interrogative. The same is true as respects the note of 
admiration ; as, / Vdlgame Dios, cuantas provincias y cuantas 
naciones conquisto I Bless me^ how many provinces and 
nations he conquered ! 



CHAPTER II. 

OF WORDS CONSIDERED AS SIGNS OF OUR THOUGHTS. • 

Words are divided into different classes, which Gramma- 
rians call Parts of Speech ; v/hich are, the Article, Noun, 
Pronoun, Verb, Participle, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunc- 



WORDS. 25 

tion, and Interjection. Of these parts of speech, the last 
four are invariable. The article^ noun, pronoun, and par^ 
ticiple, are declined ; they have genders, numbers, and 
cases. The verb is conjugated ; it has modes, tenses^ num- 
bers, and persons^ as will be seen hereafter. 

We shall speak of the genders and numbers in the chap- 
ter of nouns to which they belong. 

Though, in the Spanish language, nouns do not change 
their terminations in changing their relations, as they do in 
the Greek and Latin tongues, we shall, however, conform 
to the Grammar of the Spanish Academy, which admits 
six cases, to wit : the nominative, genitive, dative, accusal 
tive, vocative, and ablative. 

The nominative is the case that denotes the noun or 
pronoun, which is the subject of a proposition. 

The genitive denotes the person to whom belongs the 
object of which we speak. 

The dative denotes the person or thing towards which 
the action of the, verb is directed, or for which there results 
from it an advantage or disadvantage. 

The accusative represents the person or thing which is 
the direct regimen of the verb or end of its signification 
without preposition, or preceded by one of those which gov- 
ern this case : such as, ante^ contra^ entre, hdcia^ (fee, 
before^ against^ among^ between, towards, &c. 

The vocative serves to call. We place in this case the 
persons to whom we address our speech. 

The ablative serves to express the matter of or manner in 
which a thing is made ; the cause from which it proceeds ; 
or the instrument with which it is done. This case is al- 
ways accompanied by one of the prepositions that govern it ; 
such as, cowj de^ en, por, &c. with, from, in, by, &c. 



CHAPTER III. 

OP THE ARTICLE. 

The Article is a small word placed before nouns, or be- 
fore any other word taking their place, to determine the 
person, the thing, or the action spoken of ; therefore it is 
called definite or determinate. 
3 



26 ARTICLES. 

The article has three genders in Spanish : the masculine, 
feminine, and neuter. For the masculine it is e/, the ; for 
the feminine Za, the ; and for the neuter Zo, the. The two 
first have the two numbers, and the last has only the singular. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLES. 

Masculine Article* 





Singular. 






Plural. 




Norn. 


el, - 


the. 


Nom. 


los. 


the. 


Gen, 


del,* - 


of the. 


Gen. 


de los, - 


of the. 


Dat. 


al,* - 


- to the. 


Dat. 


4 los, - 


- to the. 


Ace. 


el, al, - 


- the. 


Ace. 


los, 4 los'. 


- the. 


Abl 


del,* - 


from the. 


Abl. 


de los, - 


froin the 






Feminine Article. 






Singular. 






Plural. 




Nom. 


la, - 


the. 


Nom. 


las, 


the. 


Gen. 


de la, 


- of the. 


Gen. 


de las, 


- of the. 


Dat. 


a la. 


to the. 


Dat. 


k las, 


to the. 


Ace. 


la, 4 la. 


the. 


Ace. 


las, a las, 


- the. 


Abl. 


de la, - 


from the. 


Abl. 


de las, - 


from the. 






Keuter Article 






Nom. 


lo, . 


the. 


■J 






Gen. 


de lo, 


of the. 








Dat. 


d lo. 


to the. 


>This article has 


no plural. 


Ace. 


lo, - 


the. 








Abl. 


de lo. 


from the. 


3 







We have said in the definition of the article, that it must 
only be placed before nouns substantive, or before any other 
'part of speech that does their office ; from which must be con- 
cluded, that there are parts of speech that, without being sub- 
stantives are sometimes employed as such. Really in these 
phrases el leer megusta, reading pleases me ; preferirlo iitil 
a lo agradablcj to prefer the useful to the agreeable ; ignorar el 



* Del Jind al are abbreviations of dt el and a el, which custom 
has introduced^ and which the Academy has approved, in order to 
distinguish, by this contraction, the genitive, ablative, and dative of 
el, article, from the same cases of el, pronoun. Thus del, al, signify 
of or from the, to the ; and de el, a e/, signify of or from him, to him. 



ARTICLES. 27 

porquCj to be ignorant of the why ; leer is a verb, util and 
agradahle are adjectives, and porque is an adverb ; but 
those words do the office of substantives, and it is for this 
reason that they take the article. 

OF THE USE OF THE ARTICLES. 

Rule I. — The article never admits of any elision in Span- 
ish ; but there are a few feminine nouns that, beginning 
with an «, take the masculine article eL instead of the femi- 
nine la. in order to avoid the disagreeable meeting of two ah. 
Therefore we say el agua^ water ; el ola. the wing ; el alma, 
the soul ; elama^ the mistress ; el ave^ the bird ; el dguila.xhe 
eagle ; el amOj the master ; la agua^ la ala^ &c., would be too 
harsh. But it is necessary to observe. 1st. that this change 
of article is admitted only in the singular, because the clash- 
ing of the two vowels does not take place in the plural ; 
2d. if these nouns are accompanied by an adjective, tkis 
adjective must be put in the feminine : we then say, el 
agua es fria ; el ala derecha ; the water is cold : tlie right 
wing ; and not el agua frio : el ala derecho : 3d. the 
nouns above mentioned are nearly all which usage has per- 
mitted to deviate from the general rule. 

Rule II. — The ai'ticle is placed in Spanish before nouns 
taken in a universal sense^ even before proper names of 
regions, countries, rivers, winds and mountains. Ex. 
la Francia, de la Fraficia, a la Francia^ France, of France, 
to France ; la Castilla. de la Castilla, a la Castilla, 
Castillo, of Castillo, to Castillo ; el Ehro, el Tajo, &c. ; 
because the common norms regiouj provincial rio^ &c. are 
understood. 

Exceptions. — 1st. Those countries are excepted which 
take their names from theu' capital cities. Ex. JS^dpoles 
y Corfu son unos paises muy favorecidos de la naturaleza, 
Naples and Corfu ai-e countries very much favored by na- 
ture ; the names of countries which are under the regimen 
of the preposition en ; as, esid en Espaha^ he is in Spain ; 
vive en Francia, he lives in France ; 3d. those that are 
united by the preposition de to a noun that precedes ; as, 
el reyno de Inglaterra, the kingdom of England ; las ciu- 
dades de Francia y de Alernania, the cities of France and 
Germany ; and, lastly, the article is omitted before the 
names of countries, from which we speak of returning. Ex. 



^o AKTICLES. 

vjielvo de Frusia^ I return from Prussia ; llega de Polo^ 
nia^ he arrives from Poland. 

Remark 1st. Though the name of a country be under 
the regimen of the preposition en or de^ it must be preceded 
by the article when it is personified, or when it is taken in a 
definite sense. Ex. La urhanidad de la Francia, el interes 
de la Inglaterra, the politeness of France, the interest of 
England, &c. 2d. The article is always placed before the 
names of certain distant countries ; as, He go del Japon, de 
la Ckina^ del Peru, I arrive from Japan, from China, from 
Peru. We say : Ir a Indias, or a las Indias ; venir de In- 
dias, or de las Indias, to go to the Indies, to come from the 
Indies. ' 

Rule III. — When the names of kingdoms and provinces 
are preceded in English by a verb expressing the idea of 
coming, returning, going, coming back, sending and sending 
hack^ the preposition a is used in Spanish, corresponding to 
the English to, Ex. Ir a Francia, to go to France \ 
volcert a Inglaterra^ I shall return to England, &c. ; on the 
contrary, a/, zw, in the^ &c. are translated in Spanish, by en^ 
&c. when the preceding verb does not express any motion. 
Ex. Estd en Pans^ he is at Paris ; nacid en Roma^ he was 
born in Rome ; estar^ en casa, I shall be in the house, or 
at home. We however say, — to be at the door, estar a la 
fueria ; to wait for at the door, esperar a la puerta, &c. 

Rule IV. — The nouns Sefior, Senora, Senores, Senoras^ 
Senorito, Senoritos, Senorila, Seroritas, Mister or Sir, 
Mistress or Madam, Gentlemen or Sirs, Masters, young 
Gentlemen, Ladies, Miss, Misses, always take the article, 
except, 1st. whqn they are preceded by one of the pronouns 
possessive mi^ tit, my, thy, &c. and when they are in the 
vocative. We must then say : El senor del Campo, la 
senora Sanclio, la sefiorita Villegas, mi sevora Sane ho, el 
senorito Quiroga ; mi senoriia Villegas ; como estd vm, 
senor don Francisco, or senora dona Francisca ? Mister del 
Campo, Mistress Sancho, Master Quiroga, Miss Villegas, 
my lady Sancho, my young lady Villegas ; how do you do, 
Sir Francis, or Lady Frances ? 

N. B. 1st. When we speak of, or to a person in high sta- 
tion, or to whom w^e owe respect, we use in Spanish these 
words : senor don, senora or sefiorita dona, which must al- 
ways be placed before christian names. Ex. El senor don. 



OP THE ARTICLE. 29 

Pedro B., My Lord Peter B. ; la senora dona Maria A,, My La- 
dy Mary A. — It is necessary to remember that the word Don 
is never employed before a surname or family name. We 
shall then say : El sefior de Matallanas ; la sefiora de 
Villa Torre ; and not, el sefior don de Matallanas ; la senora 
dona de Villa Torre, 

N. B. 2d. Mi senora, mi senorita, are expressions which 
indicate more deference than la senora^ la senorita. 

Rule V. — When one of the words, sir or mister, mistress^ 
or madam, my lord, my lady, sefior^ senora^ are accompa- 
nied with a title, the article is placed before that word, and 
not before the title. The marshal, el sefior mariscal ; the 
duchess, la sefiora duquesa ; the bishop, el sefior obispo. 
But if we use mi sefior, mi sefiora^ the article is placed as in 
English. My lord the bishop, mi sefior el obispo. mi 
sefiora la duquesa. 

Rule VI. — The neuter article is placed only before 
adjectives used as substantives, and taken in an absolute 
indeterminate case : as, se debe preferir lo util a lo agrada^ 
bley we ought to prefer the useful to the agreeable. 



CHAPTER IV. 

OF NOUNS. 

Nouns are either substantive or adjective. The nouB 
substantive expresses the name of a person or thing ; the 
noun adjective expresses its quality. Ex. Un liombre docto, 
a learned man ; una hermosa muger, a handsome woman ; 
liombre and muger, man and woman, are substantives ; doc- 
to and hermosa J learned and handsome, are adjectives. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

The substantive is either common, proper, or collective. 
The substantive common is that which may be applied to 
several persons or several things ; as, general, general ; 
ciudad, city ; reino, kingdom. One may say, un general 
Ingles, mi general Frances, an English general, a French 
general ; la oiudad de Londres^ la ciudad df. Paris > the city of 
3* 



30 NOUNS. 

London^ the city of Paris ; el reino de Francia, el reino de In- 
giaterra.the kingdom of France, the kingdom of Englandj&c. 

The substantive proper expresses a separate idea, a single 
person or thing ; as, Nero^ Farisy Londres ; Nero, Paris, 
London. 

The substantive collective is that which, though in the 
singular, presents to the mind several persons or things, ei- 
ther as making one whole, or as making part of a whole* 
The first is called collective general ; as, eg^rciio, rebano, 
floresta^ army, flock, forest. The second is called collective 
jjartitive ; as, tropa, irtfinidad^ troop, infinity, &c. 

Rule VII. — The noun substantive collective partitive imy 
govern the verb that follows it in the plural ; but the noun 
substantive collective general never governs it in that num- 
ber. We may then say, entraron en Londres una tropa^ 
una infinidad de ladrones ; but we cannot say : el egercito 
perecieroup el rebafio perecieron, 

GENDERS. 

The gender originally denoted only the distinction of the 
sexes as male or female. The masculine designates man or 
the male. The feminine denotes woman or the female. 
Afterwards, by extension, we have attributed the masculine 
or feminine gender to other nouns, though they had no 
relation to either sex : the neuter has since been added to 
them in several languages. 

There are three genders in the Spanish language : the 
masculine^ feminine^ and neuter This last has only a rela- 
tion to vague and indeterminate things : it is applicable only 
to adjectives, and has no plural. Ex. Lo hueno, lo malo, lo 
justo, esto, aquelloy &c. ; the good, the bad, the just, thisy 
that, &c. 

OF NUMBERS. 

Numbers serve to designate one or many objects. There 
are two numbers, the singular and plural. The singular 
designates only one person or thing, as homhre^ man ; 
muoer^ woman ; libro^ book, plmna, pen. The plural de- 
signates many persons or things ; as, los hombreSp men : 
mugeresp women ; librosy books ; plum as ^ pens. 



NOUNS. 31 

OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 

The plural of nouns substantive and adjective is formed 
in Spanish in two different manners^ according to the termi- 
nation of the singular. 

The nouns are terminated either with a sliort vowelj that 
is, not accented ; or with a long vowel^ that is^ accented ; or 
lastly, with a consonant. 

Rule VIII. When the noun is terminated with a short 
vowel, the plural is formed by adding an s to the singular, 
Ex. Carta ^ letter ; cartas^ letters ; llave^ key ; Haves ^ 
keys ; bueno, huena^ good ; huenos, huenas^ good ; &c. 

When the noun terminates with a long vowel or with a 
consonant, the plural is formed by adding es to the singular. 
Ex. Aleli^ gilly-flower ; alelies, gilly-fiowers ; verdad, 
truth ; verdades^ truths ; razon^ reason ; razones^ reasons ; 
hdhil^ able ; hdbileSj able ; feliz^ happy ; felices, happy. 
Maravedi forms its plural in three ways. We say marave- 
dis, maravedi es, aod maravedises. 

N. B. The nouns, both substantive and adjective, which 
terminate with a z in the singular, change z into c to form^ 
their plural, with the addition of the letters es : Ex. Luz^ 
light, iuces ; feliz, happy, felices, &c. 

DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

Substantives masculine of a person, beginning with a 
consonant. 

Singular. 

N. el padre, ------ the father. 

G. del padre, of the father. 

jD. al padre, ------ to the father. 

A. al padre,* ------ the father. 

V. padre, ------ o father. 

Ah. del padre, ------ J^rom the father. 

* Though the observation we are about to make belongs to the 
rules relative to the regimen of verbs, we have thought fit to give it 
here, in order to make known the reason of the difference that ex- 
ists between the accusative of the nouns of persons and that of the 
nouns of things. Whenever a rational being or personified thing is 
the object of this action of the active verb, the verb governs the noun 
in the accusative with the preposition a ; and, as we have already said 
in speaking of the article, al is a contraction of the preposition a and 
of the article eh When on the contrary the object of the actiop of 



32 



NOUNS* 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
Ab. 



los padres, 
de los padres, 
4 los padres, 
4 los padres, 
padres, 
de los padres, 



Plural 



Substantive feminine 
sonant : 



K 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
Ab. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

r, 

Ab. 



la muger, 
de la muger, 
a la muger, 
4 la muger, 
muger, 
de la muger. 



----- the fathers. 

- - - ' - of the fathers^ 
' ' ' ' - to the fathers. 
----- <Ae fathers. 

- - - - - o fathers. 
from the fathers. 

of a person, beginning with a cow- 
Singular. 



las mugeres, 
de las mugeres, 
a las mugeres, 
4 las mugeres, 
mugeres, 
de las mugeres, 



Plural. 



the 


woman. 


of the 


woman. 


to the 


woman. 


the 


woman. 





woman. 


from the woman. 


the 


tcomen. 


of the 


women. 


to the 


women. 


the 


women. 


a 


women. 



from the women. 



Substantives feminine of a person, beginning with an a 
Singular. 



N. 


el 


ama, 


G. 


del 


ama, 


X>. 


al 


ama, 


A 


al 


ama, 


V 




ama, 


Ab. 


del 


ama. 


N. 


las 


amas. 


G. 


de las amas, 


D. 


4 las amas, 


A. 


4 las amas. 


V. 




amas, 


Ab. 


de las amas. 



Plural, 



the 


mistress. 


of the 


mistress. 


to the 


mistre^^s. 


the 


mistress. 





mistress. 


from the mistress. 


the 


mistresses. 


of the 


mistresses. 


to the 


jnistresses. 


the 


mistresses. 


o 


mistresses. 



from the mistresses. 



the active verb is a nonn that expresses an inanimate thin^, the verb 
governs it in the accusative without any preposition. See rule 56 
which refers to this observation. 



>iOCNS. 



33 



Substantive masculine of a thing : 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
Ah. 

N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

r. 

Ab. 



Singular. 



K 


el libro, 


G, 


del libro, 


D, 


al libro, 


A, 


el libro,* ■ 


V. 


libro, 


Ab. 


del libro. 


N. 


los • libros. 


G. 


de los libros. 


D. 


a los libros, 


A. 


los libros. 


V. 


libros, 


Ah. 


de los libros, 



Plural 



the 


book. 


of the 


book. 


to the 


book. 


the 


book. 





book. 


from the hook. 


the 


books. 


of the 


books. 


to the 


books. 


the 


hooks. 





hook^. 


from the books. 



Substantive feminine of a thing : 
Singular, 



la casa, 
de la casa, 
4 la casa, 
la casa, 
casa, 
de la casa. 



Plural 



las casas 
de las casas 
k las casas, 
las casas 
casas, 
de las casas, 



the 


house. 


of the 


house. 


to the 


house 


the 


house. 





house* 


from the house. 


the 


houses. 


of the 


houses. 


to the 


houses 


the 


houses 





houses. 



----- from the houses. 

N. B. Neuter nouns never relate to persons, but only to 
indeterminate things ; as, lo bueno, lo mcdo. lo ail, Tliey 
have neither vocative case, nor plural number, and are de- 
clined with the neuter article. 

DECLENSION OF A NEUTER NOUN. 



N. lo util, - - - ^ 
G. de lo util, - - - - 



the usefuL 

of the useful. 



See the preceding ngte, page 31. 



34 NOUNS. 

D. a lo util, to the useful 

A. lo utilj t^e useful 

Ab, de lo util, from the useful 

Remark, The neuter article is not placed indifferently 
before all adjectives employed as substantives, but only (as 
we have said in rule vi before those that are taken in a 
sense absolutely indeterminate. In this phrase : el homhre 
sahio prefiere siempre lo util a lo agradable, the wise man 
prefers always the useful to the agreeable ; the neuter article 
is necessary before htil and agraclable, because those nouns 
do not express any determinate object. But in the follow^- 
ing phrases : el malo sera castigado, the wicked shall be 
punished ; el azul de este pano es muy subido, the blue of 
this cloth is very lively, — one cannot make use of the neuter 
article, because the nouns substantive that are implied are 
sufficiently determinate ; in truth, it is evident that homhre 
is understood before malo^ and color before azul^ and in 
these cases the article takes the gender of the substantive 
to which it relates. 

OF PROPER NOUNS. 

The proper names of men and women, of cities, towns, 
villa.^es, months, &c. do not take any article, and are de- 
clined by aid of the prepositions de and a, De serves for 
the genitive and ablative, and a for the dative and accusa- 
tive before proper names of men and women, and for the 
dative oniy betore nouns of things. 

DECLENSION OF SOME PROPER NAMES. 

iV. Pedro, Peter, N, Ana, Ann, 

G, de Pedro, of Peter, G, de Ana, of Ann, 

D. a Pedro, to Peter, D. 4 Ana, to Ann, 

A, ci Pedro,* Peter, A, a Ana,* Ann, 

Ab, de Pedro, from Peter, Ab, de Ana, from Ann, 

IV. , Antonio, Antony, N. Londres, London, 

G, de Antonio, of Antony, G, de Londres, of London, 

D. a Antonio, to Antony, D, a Londres, to London, 

A, a Antonio,* Antony, A, Londres, London, 

Ab, de AnXomo from Antony, Ab,de Londres fromLondon, 



See note page 31. 



NOUXS. 35 

OF NOUNS TAKEN IN A PARTITIVE SENSE. 

Nouns taken in a partitive sense, often expressed in En- 
glish by some, any, are always without an article in Spanish. 

Rule IX. Whenever the noun, taken in a partitive sense, 
expresses an object va^ely and in an indeterminate sense, 
it does not take in Spanish a preposition nor an article. Ex, 
Dame pan, give me bread ; como came, I eat meat ; com- 
prart manzanas, I shall purchase apples ; Beho vino, I 
drink w^ine. 

Rule X. When on the contrary the noun is taken in a 
determinate sense, it must be preceded by the genitive of 
the masculine, or feminine ai'ticle, singular or plural, ac- 
cording to the gender and number to which it belongs, or 
simply, by the preposition de, if it does not admit the article. 
Ex. Dame del pan que has comprado, give me of the bread 
that tliou hast purchased ; dame de tu pan, give me of thy 
bread. In the second example, we use only the preposition 
de, because the possessive pronoun tu, does not take the ar- 
ticle. 

Rule XI. If the noun taken in a detenninate sense is in 
the plural, and it should be wished to express only the idea 
of some, a few, this should then be expressed by unos, unas, 
or algunos, algunas ; according to the gender of the noun 
substantive. Ex. Comert unas 6 algunas ciruelas, I shall 
eat plums, that is, some plums ; he comprado algunos lihros, 
I have bought a few books, &c. But if the quantity, instead 
of being limited by the sense of some, is absolutely undeter- 
mined, then some is not expressed. Ex. Tiene may huenos 
lihros, he has very good books. Tenemos amigos, we have 
friends. 

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE ILUy UUa ; <2, OR aU IN 
ENGLISH. 

Singular masculine, 
K ^ A. un amigo, - - - - a friend. 

G. |- M, de un amigo, • • ^ . of ox from a friend. 
D. a un amigo, - - - . to a friend. 

Plural. 

N. Sf A. amigos, - - - - friends, 

G. l" Ah. de amigos, - - - - of ov from friends. 

D. a amigos, - - - - ^ to friends. 



36 NOUNS. 

Singular feminine. 

K Sf A. una monja, a nun. 

O. ^•56. de una monja, of a nun. 

D. 4 una monja, to a nun. 

Plural. 

N.^J. monjas, - nuns. 

G. Sf Ab. de monjas, of nuns. 

D. ^ monjas, -- to nuns. 

General ohsertations upon the genders* 

The proper and appellative names of men, and male ani- 
mals, as also the nouns that express arts, sciences, dignities, 
professions, trades, &;c. fit for men, are of the masculine 
gender ; as, homhre^ man ; caballo^ horse ; patriarca^ 
patriarch ; poeta^ poet, &c. 

Names of females, and of professions, trades, &c. fit for 
females, are of the feminine gender. Ex. muger^ woman ; 
cahra^ goat ; costurera^ seamstress ; ahadesa^ abbess, &c. 

The names of kingdoms, cities, towns, and villages, gen- 
erally take, says the Madrid Academy, the gender of the. 
appellative nouns, expressed or understood, to which they 
refer. For instance, Toledo and Madrid are of the femi- 
nine gender, because the feminine appellative nouns, ciudad 
and villa^ city and town, are understood, the first before 
Toledo^ and the second before Madrid. Fuencarrml is mas- 
culine, because the masculine word lugar^ village, is under- 
stood. The names Cuba and Morea are of the feminme 
gender, because the appellative, isla^ islacd. Is understood 
before the first, and the word peninsula ^ peninsula, before 
the last. However, the Academy adds, some of the names 
above mentioned, when they are not joined to the common 
noun belonging to them, follow the rule of their termina- 
tion. Thus Espana, SueciOy and almost all the names of 
countries ending in a, are feminine ; Ferrol and Viso are 
masculine, theugh the appellattive noun of the two first be 
reino^ kingdom ; that of Ferrol^ ciudad^ city ; and that of 
Viso J villa J town. The same is true in regard to others j 
which practice will make known. 



NOUxVS. 



37 



OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS CONSIDERED WITH REGARD TO 
THEIR TERMINATIONS. 

All nouns ending in «, are feminine, except alhacea, execu- 
tor; anagrama^ anagram ; antipodal antipodes ; axioma^ axiom; 
clima, climate ; msma, chrism ; dia, day ; dilenia, dilemma ; di- 
ploma, diploma ; dogma, dogma ; drama, drama ; epigrama^ 
epigram ; Etna, Etna ; fa, fa, (note of music ;) idioma, 
idiom ; lema, lemma ; mandy manna ; mapa, map ; poema, 
poem ; problema, problem ; sintema^ symptom ; sistema^ 
system ; sofisma^ sophism ; tapahoca, slap given on the mouth ; 
tema, theme ; teorema^ theorem ; and some others. 

All those that terminate in o, are masculine, except mano, 
hand ; and nao, vessel. 

Those that terminate in cion or Hon, are of the feminine 
gender, as, cuestiorij question ; meditacion. meditation ; accion^ 
action ; objecion, objection, &c. These words are the same 
in both languages, except that in Spanish the t of the termi- 
nation tion^ of the English word, is changed into a c, when 
it has the sound of sL 

The nouns that in Spanish terminate in tad or dad^ termi- 
nations that correspond to that of the Latin in tas, and to 
that of the English in ty, are of the feminine gender ; as^ 
humanidadj humanity; puridad ^ purity \ adversidad^ adversity. 
As to the nouns that have other terminations, they are sub- 
ject to so many exceptions, that it is impossible to establish 
in regard to them satisfactory rules. 

SUBSTANTIVES THAT ARE OF BOTH GENDERS, according to the 

decision of the Academy, 

cocJcet J passport. 

anathema. 

- art. 



Albala, 

Anatema, 

Arte, 

Azucar, 

Canal, 

Cisma, 

Cutis, 

Dote, dotes, 

Emblema, - 

Hermafrodita, 

Mar, 



sugar, 

canal, 

schism, 

skill . 

dowry ^ endowments, 

emblem, 

hermaphrodite, 

sea. 



38 NOUNS. 

Margeiij • margin^ bank, 

Nema, seal 

Neumaj^ ----- significant gesture. 

orden, order, 

Puente, ------- bridge. 

Reurna, ------ ^ rheum, 

Tribu, ------- tribe, 

N. B. Tribu, tribe, though of both genders, generally 
takes the masculine. 

OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 

Formation of the feminine of nouns adjective. 

In the Spanish language, as in almost all others, the adjec- 
tive agrees in gender and number with the substantive to 
which it relates. It is then necessary to know the manner 
in which the feminine is formed from the masculine. Of the 
formation of the plural, we have given the rules, when 
speaking of the numbers. 

Nouns adjective, the termination of which is in o, form 
their feminine by changing o into a ; as bueno, buenn, good ; 
alto, alta, high, &c. 

Those that terminate in the masculine, with any other let- 
ter, have generally but one termination for both genders. 
We say then, un hombre alegre, a merry man ; and una mu- 
ger ale g re, a merry woman ; un hombre feliz, a happy man ; 
una muger feliz, a happy woman, &c. 

The following nouns, terminating in the singular, with a 
consonant, are excepted from the above rule, the feminine 
being formed by adding an a to the masculine. Harugan-a, 
lazy ; mamanton-a, a sucking child ; haron-a, sluggish ; 
hampon-a, vain ; as also national adjectives, as ; Frances-a, 
French ; Ingles-a, English ; Aragones-a, Aragonese ; An- 
daluz-a, Andalusian, &c. (See at the end of the Grammar 
the table of names of countries.) Among the adjectives of 
this last class, some are found that terminate in «, and do not 
undergo any change in the feminine ; as, Persa, Persian ; 
Moscovita, Muscovite, &c. 

COLLOCATION ANB AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH 
THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

1st. The adjective is generally placed in Spanish a/ter 
the substantive. 



NOUNS. o\) 

2d. The adjective must always agree in gender and num- 
ber with the substantive that it qualifies. 

3d. When an adjective relates to two singular substantives, 
it must be put in the plural. 

4th. When an adjective serves to qualify in the same 
phrase several substantives of different genders, it is put in 
tjie plural and in the masculine. 

OF NOUNS DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE. 

The Spanish language abounds, like the Italian language^ 
in diminutives and augmentatives. 

Rule XII. There are two kinds of diminutive nouns : 
1st. those that express tenderness, or the gentleness of any 
object whatever, that is small ; and their termination is in 
ito or ico for the masculine, ita or ica for the feminine, 
which are added to the nouns, whether adjective, or substan- 
tive, without altering any thing in them, when they terminate 
with a consonant, but suppressing the last letter, if it be a 
vowel. Ex. Pdjaroy bird ; pajarito, small or pretty little 
bird ; casa, house ; casita^ small, or pretty little house ; 
senor^ sir ; senoritOj young gentleman, or master. From 
this rule should be excepted hueno, buena^ the dimuiiitive of 
which is bonito^ boniia^ and which most often has only the 
meaning of pretty, 

2d. Those which denote contempt or pity, or which lessen 
the object without adding to it the idea of pretty, are gene- 
rally terminated in ziielo^ illo or a7/o, for the masculine, 
zuela^ ilia or cilia for the feminine, according to the forego- 
ing rule respecting diminutives. Ex. Perro^ dog ; perilloy 
ugly little dog ; muger^ woman ; inugercilla, mugerzuela, 
ugly little woman ; ho?nbre, hombrecilh, Jiornbrezuelo, ugly 
little man. 

There are some other dimunitives terminating in ete, in, 
ejo^ but they are very little used. 

Rule XIIL The augmentative nouns add to the positive^ 
the signification of the v/ords big or large, and are formed 
hy adding 0/2, azo^ onazo, or ote for the masculine, and ow«, 
aza, or onaza, for the feminine, following the same rule as 
the dimunitives in regard to the termination. Ex. Hombre^ 
man ; hombron, hombrazo, uombronazo, big or large man ; 
muger, woman ; miigerona, mugeraza, inugeronaza, big or 
large woman ; perro, dog: perron, perrazoy perronazOy big 



40 



NOUNS. 



or Idxge dog ; grunde^ large ; grandon^ grandote, grandazo, 
grandonazo, very big or large and without proportion. 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON TN THE ADJECTIVES. 

The adjectives may qualify the objects either absolutely, 
that is J without any relation to other objects, or relatively, 
that is, with relation to other objects Hence arise three de- 
grees of qualification, to wit : the positive, the comparative, 
and the superlative. 

The positive is the adjective expressed without there be- 
ing a comparison ; as, bueiio good ; malo, bad. 

The comparative serves to establish between the objects 
that are compared a relation of superiority, inferiority , or 
equality. Hence three kinds of comparatives. 

The adjective is in the superlative when it expresses the 
quality either in a very high or in the highest degree ; which 
forms two kinds of superlatives, the one absolute, and the 
other relative, 

OF THE comparatives; 

As a comparison may be made, not only by means of ad- 
jectives, but also by the aid of substantives, verbs, and ad* 
verbs, we shall consider the comparatives in these four 
different cases. The Spanish language participates in this 
part of the Grammar, with the latin tongue, and difficulties 
would doubtless be found in it, should we content ourselves 
with merely treating of comparatives in relation to adjectives. 

OF COMPARATIVES CONSIDERED IN RELATION TO ADJECTIVES. 

Rule XIV. 1st. The comparative of superiority is al- 
ways expressed by mas, more ; and the que following, by 
than, Ex. He is more learned than you, ^l es mas sabio 
que vm, 

2d. The comparative oi inferiority is formed by menos, 
less, followed by que, than, or by no-tan, not so, and the as 
following is rendered by como, Ex. He is less learned than 
his brother, or he is not so learned as his brother ; ^l es 
menos docto que su hermano, or ^l no es tan docto como su 
hermano. 

3d. The comparative of equality is formed by tan-como, 
as-as ; or no-menos que, not less-than. Ex. You are as pru- 
dent as your sisters, vm. es tan prudente como sus hermanas, 
or, you are not less prudent than, &c. vm, no es menos pru- 
dente que, ^c. 



NOUNS, ^^ 

N. B. The following nouns are comparatives from theii* 
nature : mayor, larger, greater ; menor, lesser, snialler ; 
mejor, better; peor, worse; ^i^perzor, superior ; inferior, 
inferior. We also say el mayor, el manor, el mejor, &c. the 
largest, the greatest ; the least, the smallest ; the best ; but 
then these adjectives are superlatives. 

COMPARATIVE OF SUPERIORITY. 

Of the comparative in relation to substantives^ verbs and 
adverbs. 
Rule XV. This comparative before the substantive, the 
adverb, and after the verb, is rendered by mas-qite more- 
than, and admits no preposition after it. Ex. He has more 
prudence than you, tiene mas prudencia que I'W. ; She has 
more science than money, tiene mas ciencia que dinero ; 
we have more enemies than, &c. tenemos mas enemigos que, 
§-c. I esteem thee more than Mary, te estimo mas que a 
Maria; we act more prudently than they, obramos mas pru- 
deniemente que ellos, 

N. B. The foregoing rule perfectly agrees with the En- 
glish construction. More than, less than, followed by a 
noun of number, one, two, three, &c. are translated by mas 
de, and menos de. Ex. She has more than ten guineas, 
tiene mas de diez guineas. She has more than seven broth- 
ers, tiene mas de siete liermanos. We have less than a 
thousand dollars, Tenemos menos de rail pesos. Less than 
20 years, menos de 20 anos. 

Comparative of Inferiority, 

, Rule X\T. 1st. This comparative, considered in relation 
to substantives, may be expressed by less or feicer-than, 
or by so much or so many-as, preceded by the negative not, 
LesS'than is rendered by menos que. Ex. Less prudence 
than, menos prudencia que ; fewer friends than, rutnos ami- 
gos que, (^'c. Not so much or so many -as, is expressed by 
no-tanto,'a,'OS,-as,'Como, according to the gender and num- 
ber of the noun to which, so much, so many relate. Ex. 
I have not so much money as you, no iengo tanto dinero 
como vm, ; Peter has not so much ambition as John, Pedro 
no tiene tanta amhicion como Juan ; Francis has net so 



•42 NOUN^. 

many books as his brother, Francisco no tiene tantos lihros 
como su he7'mano. 

2d. In relation to verbs ; less-than is expressed by menos- 
que ; not-so-much is expressed by no-tanto ; and as^ by cu- 
anto or como. Ex. I do not love him so much as I esteem 
him, no le quiero tanto cuanto or como le estimo ; you study 
less than we, vm. estudia menos que nosoiros. 

Sd, In relation to adverbs ; less-than is rendered by 
menos-que, and not-so or not-so-as by no-tan-como, Ex» 
They act less prudently than you, obran menos prudente- 
mente que vm,, or no obran tan prudentemente como vm. 

N. B. Before participles passive so much-as ; ,as ntnch-as, 
are rendered by tan-como, Ex. He is not so much esteemed 
as he, no es tan estimado como eL — I am as much loved as 
she is, soij tarn amado como ella. 

Comparative of equality. 

Rule XVII. 1st. The comparative of equality, consid- 
ered in relation to nouns substantive, is expressed by as 
mucli-as, as many-aSy or by not less-than. As much, as 
many, is translated by tanto fta-tos-t as , according to the gen- 
der and number of the substantive, and the following as by 
como, Ex. She has as much meekness as her sister, tiene 
tanta dulzura como su hermana ; he acts with as miich rig- 
our as justice, obra con tanto rigor como justicicu Not less- 
Ihan is rendered by no-menos-que, Ex. I am not less hun- 
gry than you, no tengo menos hambre que vm. ; we have not 
fewer protectors than friends, no tenemos menos protectores 
que amigos. 

2d. In regard to verbs ; as much as is expressed by tanto 
cuanto or como, Ex. I punish him as much as he deserves, 
le castigo tanto cuanto or como merece. 

Not-less than is always translated by no-7nenos que, Ex. 
You do not eat less than his brother, vm,no come menos que 
su hermano, 

3d. In relation to adverbs : as-as is rendered by tan-co7no, 
Ex. He sings as well as you, canta tan bien como vm, 

Not-lesS'than is translated by no-meiios-que, Ex. I do not 
write less correctly than he, no escribo menos correciamente 
que 61. 



Of superlatives. 

There are two kinds of supeiiativesj the one absolute and 
the other relative. 

Rule XVIII. The first expresses a quality in the su- 
preme degree, but without comparison; and then the adjec- 
tive is preceded by tnuy^ very ; and if the adjective can 
form its superlative of itself, then, without having recourse 
to WW?/, we add to the positive isimo or isima^ isimos or 
isimaSj according to the gender and number of the substan- 
tive to which it refers, cutting off the final letter of the ad- 
jective, if it ends with a vowel. Ex. Paris is a very beauti- 
ful city. Paris es una ciudad muy hermosa or hermosisima. 

The superlative absolute of the adverbs is likewise form- 
ed by muy ^or by changing einente or amente into isimamente, 
Ex. PrudenUementej prudently, priident-isimamente ; can- 
dida-mente^ candidly, candid-isimamentc, 

N. B. 1st. It is proper to observe that there are adjec- 
tives and adverbs which do not admit the last form of the 
superlative ; consequently when a doubt occurs whether ft 
may be used with any adjective or adverb, the surest wav 
will be to make use of muy with the positive. 

N. B. 2d. From the general rule of absolute superlatives - 
must be excepted a few adjectives that cannot be subjected 
to it, as ; bueno, good ; honisimoj very good ; fuerie^ strong ; 
fortisimo^ very strong. All those that terminate in ble 
change that syllable into hiiisimo^ for the superlative. Ex. 
Ama-ble^ amiable, ama bilisimo ; afable^ afa-bilisimo. The 
following nouns are superlatives in their nature ; 6ptimOj 
pesimo, r,iaximOj minimoj infimOj supremo^ very good, very 
bad, very great^ very small, very low, supreme. 

Rule XIX. The superlative relative expresses a quality 
in the highest degree, by comparison with other objects, 
and it is formed in English by one of these articles or pro- 
nouns, tlie^ of ov from the ^ to the ; mv, thy^ his, her, its, our, 
your, their, followed by most, least, best, icorst ; and in 
Spanish by one of these ; eZ, la^ los, las, del, de la^ de los or 
de las, al, a la, a los or a las ; mi, tu, su, nuestro, vuestro, fol- 
lowed by mas, memos, mejor, menor, peor ; and tliese articles 
and pronouns must agree in gender and number with the 
noun to which they relate. Ex. The most pure and con- 
stant pleasures, los mas puros y constanies placeres. 



44 NOtJNS. 

The adverb forms its superlative relative by lo mas, the 
most ; lo menosy the least ; both which must always precede 
it. Lo is here a neuter article. 

Observations upon the Comparatives and Superlatives, 

Rule XX. The comparatives govern the verb that fol- 
lows the que, than. Ex. He is more learned than he appears, 
il es mas docto que parece, or de lo que parece. 

Rule XXL When the substantive, to which the adjec- 
tive in the superlative relative, refers, is preceded by tha 
definite article and is immediately followed by the adjective, 
then the article is not repeated before inas nor the adjectivq. 
Ex. He was prepared to deal the most terrible marks of his 
resentment, quedo en disposicion de usar de las demonstra- 
ciones mas terribles de su resentimiento (Feijoo.) But if the 
substantive is not immediately followed by mas, most, then 
the article must be repeated. Ex. El hombre que veo es el 
mas docto, Sfc, 

Rule XXH. The superlative relative governs the verb 
that follows the que in the indicative. Ex. The most pow- 
erful prince that has been, el principe mas poderoso que ha 
habido. 

If however, the verb, in English, is in the potential, we 
put it indifferently in the second or third conditionals. Ex. 
The best that I could find, el mejor que hallase or hallara. 

And if it is in the future, we put it in the future conjunc- 
tive, or in the present of the subjunctive. Ex. The least that 
I can or shall be able, lo menos que pueda or pudiere. 

Rule XXHI. Most and least joined to a verb are ren- 
dered by mas and inenos, Ex. He is the man that I most 
love, el es el hombre que mas quiero. 

This is the woman that I least esteem, esta es la muger 
que menos estimo. 

Rule XXIV. 1st. The more-the more, (that is, the more 
repeated in different members of a sentence, the second be- 
ing as a consequence of the first,) are expressed by cuanto 
mas-tanto mas. The more virtuous man is, the more happy 
he is, cuanto ma^ virtuoso es el hombre, tanto masfeliz es. 

2d. The Itss-the less; the more-the less ; the less-the more 
are expressed by cuanto menos-tanto menos ; cuanto mas- 
tanto menos ; cuanto menos-tanto ^mas. 



NOUNS. 



45 



3d. So much the more than, so much the less than, are trans- 
lated by tanto mas que, tanto menos que. 



OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES OF NUMBER. 

Adjectives of number are words that serve for enumera- 
tion. We call them adjectives because their office is to mod- 
ify, Hnd because every noun that modifies is an adjective. 
They are distinguished into two kinds^ the cardinals and or- 
dinals. 

The cardinals serve to designate absolutely and simply 
the various numbers ; the ordinals mark the order of persons 
©r things in relation to the numbers. 

The cardinal numbers are ; 



uno, una, - 

dos, 

tres, 

cuatro, 

cinco, 

seis, 

siete, 

echo, 

nueve, 

diez, 

once, 

doce, 

trece, 

catorce, 

quince, 

diez y seis, 

diez y siete, 

diez y ocho, 

diez y nueve, 

veinte, 

veinte y uno, 

veinte y dos, 

veinte y tres, 

veinte y cuatro, - 

veinte y cinco, - 

veinte y seis, 

veinte y siete, - 

veinte y ocho^ - 



one, 

two, 

three, 

four, 

five, 

six, 

seven^ 

eight, 

nine, 

ten, 

eleven, 

twelve, 

thirteen, 

fourteen, 

fifteen, 

sixteen, 

seventeen, 

eighteen, 

nineteen, 

twenty, 

twenty-one, 

twenty-two, 

twenty-three, 

twenty- four, 

twenty five, 

twenty-six, 

twenty-seven, 

twenty-eight, 



46 



NOUNS. 



veinte y nuevej 

treinta, 

cuareiita 



cincuenta, 

sesenta, 

setenta^ 

ochenta, 

noventa, 

cientOj 

doscientos-as,* - 

trescientos-aSj 

cuatrocientos-as; 

quinientos-as^ 

seiscientos-as^ 

setecientos-as, - 

ochocientos-as, - 

novecientos-as, - 

milj - - - 

dos mil, 

mil y ciento, 

mil y doscientos-as, - 

cien mil, - - - 

doscientos-as mil, 

millon, - - - 



twenty-ninG, 

thirty, 

forty, 

fifty, 

sixty, 

seventy, 

eighty, 

ninety, 

a x}Y one hundred, 

two hundred, 

three hundred, 

four hundred, 

five hundred, 

six hundred, 

seven hundred, 

eight hundred, 

nine hundred 

a or one thousand, 

two thousand, 

eleven hundred, 

twelve hundred, 

a or one hundred thousand 

two hundred thousand, 

million. 



N. B. This last number is not an adjective, it belongs %o 
the class of substantives. 



primero-a, r 

segundo-a, 

tercero-a, 

cuarto-a, 

quinto-a, 

sesto-a, 

septimo-a, 

octavo-a, 

nono-a, 

decimo-a, 

undecimo-a, 

duodecimo-a 



first, 

second, 

third, 

fourth, 

fifth, 

sixth, 

seventh, 

eighth, 

ninth, 

tenth, 

eleventh, 

twelfth, 



* The masculine termination os is changed into as for the feminine, 
t Primero, m, primera, f. &.c. 



NOUNS. 



4V 



(i^cinio tercio, decima tercia, 
decimo cuarto, decima cuarta, 
decimo quinto, decima quinta, 
decimo sesto, decima sesta, 
decimo septimo, decima septima, 
decimo octavo, decima octava, 
decimo nono, decima nona, 
vigesimo-a, - - - 

vigesimo primo-a-a, 
vigesimo segimdo-a-a, - 
vigesimo tercio-a-a, 
trigesimo-a, - - - 

cuadragesimo-a, 
quincuagesimo-a, 
sexagesimo-a, - . - 
septuagesimo-a, - - - 
octogesimo-a, - - - 
nonagesimo-a, 

nonagesimo primo, &c.-a-a, - 
centesimo-a, - - . - 

ducentesimo-a, - - - 
trecentesimo-a, 
cuadragentesimo-a, 
quingentesimo-aj 
sexentesimo-a, 
septengentesimo-a, 
octogentesimo-a, 
nonagentesimo-a, 
milesimo-a, - - - 

antepenultimo-a, 
penultimo-a, - . - 

ultimo-a, postrero-a, 



thirteenth, 

fomteenth, 

fifteenth, 

sixteenth, 

seventeenth, 

eighteenth, 

nineteenth, 

twentieth, 

twenty-first, 

twenty-second, 

twenty-third, 

thirtieth, 

fortieth, 

fiftieth, 

sixtieth, 

seventieth, 

eightieth, 

ninetieth, 

ninety-first, 

a or one hundredth, 

two hundredth, 

three hundredth, 

four hundredth, 

five hundredth, 

six hundredth, 

seven hundredth, 

eight hundredth, 

nine hundredth, 

a or one thousandth, 

antepenultima, 

penultima, 

last. 



Besides these two kinds of numbers, there are yet three 
others that belong to the class of substantives ; these are the 
collective^ distributive and proportional. 

The collective numbers serve to denote determinate quan- 
tities, as ; a dozen, una docena ; half a dozen^ una media 
docenta; a hundred of, una centena ; a thousandth, un mil- 
iar ; a milliov, un millon or cuento. 

The distributive serve to denote the different parts of a 
whole ; as, the half, la mitad ; the thirds el tercio ; a fourth, 
una cuarta, &c. 



48 NOUN&. 

The proportional are those that serve to denote the pro- 
gressive increase of the number of things ; as, the double^ el 
duplo ; the quadruple, el cuadruplo ; the hundredfold^ el cen- 
tuple, &c. 

N. B. All the cardinal numbers are indeclinable, except 
Mnoy one, and the compounds of ciento ; for, we say uno^ 
unay doscientosy doscientaSy Szc* The ordinals form their fem- 
inine by changing o into a. 

ADJECTIVES WHICH, JOINED TO A SUBSTANTIVE, LOSR ONE 
OR MORE LETTERS. 

Rule XXV. 1st. wwo, one; primer o, first '^ iercero, third ; 
postrero^ last ; alguno^ some ; ningunoy none ; buenoy good, 
and maloy bad, wicked, when they are followed by a sub- 
stantive, lose the last vowel, but only in the masculine. Ex. 
Un hombre, one man ; el primer hombrey the first man, &c. 
However, tercero does not always lose it ; for, we say ; el 
tercer dia or el tercero dia ; and both manners of speaking 
are admitted by the Academy. 

2d. CientOy hundred, loses the last syllable before a sub- 
stantive. Ex. Cien hombres, a hundred men ; cien mugeres^ 
a hundred women. 

3d. Grande y great, large, loses the last syllable before a 
substantive which begins with a consonant, whenever it sig- 
nifies great in vieril, in qualities ; but if it only has the sig- 
nification of largt in extent ^ in dimensions^ or if the substan- 
tive that follows it begins with a vowel or h, it loses none of 
its letters. We therefore say, una gran muger, a great wo- 
man ; un gran caballo, a noble horse, if to these words,- 
great, noble, we attach the idea of great in merit, in qualities ; 
but we must say, una grande casa, a large house ; un gran- 
de amigo, a great friend ; un grande almirante, a great ad- 
miral ; un grande odio, a gi-eat hatred. 

4th. Santoy saint, loses also the last syllable before a 
proper name. Ex. San Pedro, San Francisco, &c. We ex- 
cept however from this rule Santo Domingo, Santo Tomas, 
Santo Toribio, and Santo Tome. 

N. B. 1st. It is not necessary, in order that this suppres- 
sion of letters should take place, that the adjective be imme- 
diately followed by the substantive ; for, if we must say 
un hombre, un libroj we must also say, un hdbil hombre , un 



NOUN'S. 49 

huen libro, although in these examples un be separated from 
its substantive by an adjective. 

If the substantive is not expressed, the adjective that re- 
lates to itj does not then lose any letter. Ex. uno 6 dos 
hombres, one or two men ; uno de esos senores, one of those 
gentlemen. In the first example, the substantive hombre is 
understood after uno^ and in the second the word senor ; 
thus we cannot say un 6 dos hombres, un de esos senores. 

N. B. 2d. Whenever the word ciento takes after it anoth- 
er number, it preserves all its letters : we must then say, 
ciento y dos, ciento y cincOy ciento y nueve hombresy and not 
cien y dos, cien y cinco, den y nueve hombres, 

N. B. 3d. In speaking of sovereigns we generally make 
use of ordinal numbers £ls in English, but the article the is 
not expressed in Spanish. Ex. Henry the Fourth, Enrique 
Cuarto ; Ferdinand the Seventh, Fernando Septimo, &c. 

N. B. 4th. When in English the cardinal numbers are 
followed by o^clock, hora, and one w^ishes to tell or ask the 
hour of the day, then the cardinal number must be preceded 
by the article la before una^ hora is understood, and las be- 
fore the other numbers, horas being implied, and the expres- 
sion o'clock, is suppressed ; and if the verb to strike, expres- 
sed in English, is translated into Spanish, it is rendered by 
dar, Ex. What o'clock is it ? que hora es ? one o'clock, 
la una; three o'clock, las tres ; four o'clock, las cuatro ; 
it has struck fi\e o'clock, las cinco dadas ; it has just struck 
six o'clock, Im seis acaban de dar ; seven o'clock is about 
striking, las siete estdn para dar. 

Twelve o'clock at noon, is translated by las dace, or las dace 
del dia, and midnight by las doce de la noche, or media noche. 
In the following examples and others like them, afternoon 
is transited by de la tarde and in the evening by de la noche. 
Ex. At fi^ ^^o ' clock in the afternoon, a ^as cinco de la tarde; 
at eight o'|8^^at ten o'clock in the evening, a las ocho, a 
las diez de la noche ; at six o'clock in the morning, a la seis 
de la manana ; at four o'clock in the morning, a las cuatro 
de la manana, 

N. B. 5th. The verb it is, taken Impersonally in English 
in some of the preceding examples and the like, is not im- 
personal in Spanish ; it agrees on the contrary in number 
5 



50 PRONOUNS. 

with the noun hour understood, and the pronoun it^ is never 
expressed. Ex. It is one o'clock, es la una ; it is two 
o'clock, son las dos; it is half after three, son las ires y mediae 
It wants a quarter of four, son las cuatro menos un cuarto. 

N. B. 6th. In speaking of the days of the month, if we 
express the word dia^ day, it must be preceded by the arti- 
cle, and followed by the ordinal or cardinal number, but 
most commonly by the cardinal. Ex. The twelfth of Janu- 
ary, el dia doce de Enero. If we suppress the word dia, then 
we make use of the cardinal number, preceded by the prep- 
osition a. Ex. The twelfth of January, a doce de Enero, 
We .also say elprimero, el segundo, <^c. cle Enero^ and then 
the word dia is understood. 

This is the way in which letters are dated. 

Madrid, y Febreto 20 de 1822, Cambridge, 20 de Julio de 
1822, Boston^ a l."" de T-bre 1824. 



CHAPTER V. 



OF PRONOUNS. 



Pronouns hold the place of nouns, recall the idea of them, 
and prevent their repetition, which would render the speech 
languid. They are divided into personal, possessive, demon- 
strativey relative, interrogative ^ and indejiniie. 

OF pronouns personal. 

Pronouns personal denote persons, or hold the place of 
persons or personified things. Such, for the first person of 
the singular, are yo, me, mz, I, me ; and, for that of the plu- 
ral, 710?, nosotros, nosotras^ we, us. For the second person — 
Sing. tUy te, ti, thou, thee ; — Plur. vos, vosotros, vosotras, as, 
ye or you. 

For the third person. — Sing. masc. ^/, he, him or it. — 
Masc. plur. ellos, they, them. — Fern. sing. e//a, she or it ; 
fem. plur. ellas, they or them. — Sing. masc. and fern, le^ to 
him, to her, him. (Le is of both genders when it is in the 
dative, and of the masculine only, when in the accusative.) 
Sing. fem. la, her ; plur. masc. and fem. /es, to them ; plur. 
masc. las, them ; plur. fem. /as, them. 



PRONOUNS. 5i 

There is another pronoun of the tMrd person, which is si^ 
oneself, se, himself, herself, itself; it is of the three genders. 
In English oTzese// cannot relate but to the singular; si in 
Spanish may be employed with both numbers without vary- 
ing its termination. It is called reflective, because it denotes 
the relation of a person or thing to him, to her, or itself. 

Among personal pronouns some are used only of persons, 
and others are used alik.e of persons and things. Those of 
the first person are only applied to persons or personified 
things ; those of the third are indifferently used of persons 
and things. 

Pronouns may be nominatives^ and of the direct or indirect 
regiriien. 

They are nominatives when they are the subjects of the 
proposition. In this phrase ; yo hablo^ I speak ; i/o, I, is a 
pronoun nominative, because it is the subject of the propo- 
sition. 

A pronoun is a direct regimen when it is the object of the 
action expressed by the verb ; and it is an indirect regimen 
when it is the end of the action expressed by the verb. In 
these phrases ; Dios le castigard, God will punish him ; mi 
padre te dard su opinion^ my father will give thee his opin- 
ion ; le is the direct regimen, because it is the object of the 
punishment expressed by the verb castigard ; and te put for 
a ti is the indirect regimen, because, instead of being the 
object of the action expressed by the verb dard, it is the end 
of it ; the object is the thing given, that is, his opinion^ and 
the end is the person to whom the opinion is to be given, 
that is, to thee. 

Declension of personal pronouns* 

PRONOUN OF THE FIRST PERSON. 

Singular of both genders, Pron, as regimen,* 

K yo, ^ - - I. 

G. de mi, - - of me, 

D. a mi, - - to me, me, - - tome 
A, 4 mi, - - me, me, - - mt, 

Ab, de mi, - 'from me. 

* We give to these pronouns the denomination oi pronouns used as 
aregimenj (objective pronouns,) because it appears to be more intel- 
ligible and conformable to true principles. 



52 



PRONOUNS. 



Plural masculine. Pron. as Regimen. 
^' Ros,^ nosotrosj - we. 

Cr» de nosotros, - of us. 

D. 4 nosotros, - to us. nos, - - (o us. 
^» 4 nosotrosj - us. nos, - - us. 

Ab. de nosotros, from us. 

Plural feminine. 
N. nosotras, - we. 

G. de nosotras, - of us. 

D. ^ nosotras, - to us. nos, - . ^o us. 
A. 4 nosotras, - us. nos, - - us. 

Ab. de nosotrasj - from us. 

SECOND PERSON. 

Singular of both genders. 
N. tu,t - - thou. 

G. deti, - - of thee. 

£). ^ ti, - - to thee. te, - - to thee. 

A. 4 tl, - - thee. te, - - thte. 

Ah. deti, - -from thee. 

Plural masculine. 

N. voSjf vosotros, ye or you. 

G. de vosotrosj - of you. 

D. 4 vosotros, - to you. os, - - <o you. 

A. k vosotros, - you. os, - - you. 

Ab. de vosotros^ from you. 

* JVb5, is only used by the King-, Dignitaries, and Superior OflScers 
and Tribunals in church and state. 

t We seldom use the pronouns tu in Spanish. However, masters 
use it in speaking- to their domestics, man and wife, parents in speaking- 
to their children, brothers to brothers, lovers to lovers, and friends to 
their friends ; but except in these cases, they are not used in good 
company, and we make use for both genders of u&ted for the singu- 
lar, and of W5^cc?e5 for the plural, putting the following verb in the 
third person. Usted is an abbreviation of vuestra mtrced, which sig- 
nifies your favour, and ustedes, an abbreviation of vuestras mercedes, 
your favours. If these pronouns are followed by an adjective that 
relates to them, this adjective must always take the gender of the 
person to whom we speak. Ex. Sir, are you well .'' senorj estd vm. 
bueno? Madam, I have been told that you are well, senora, me han 
dicho que vm. estd buena. In conversation, we pronounce usted and 
ustedts, but we write vm, and i^ms. 

X Vos is used with persons of high rank ; and superiors use it also 
instead oi tu with their inferiors. 



PRONOUNS. 



53 



Plural feminine. 



N. 


vosotras. 


- 


you. 


G. 


de vosotras, 


- 


ofyou. 


D. 


i vosotras. 


- 


to you. 


A, 


a vosotras. 


- 


you. 


Ab, 


de vosotrasj 


- from you. 



Pron, as regimen. 



OS, 
OS, 



to you. 
you. 



THIRD PERSON. 



Sinorular masculine. 



N. el,* - - he, it. 

G. de el,t - of him, of it. 

D. k el, - to him, to it. 

A. 2b e\, - - Am, it. 

Ab. de el, fromhim,from it. 



le, se, 
le, lo, 



ta him.f 
him.t 



Plural masculine. 

N. ellos, - they. 

G. de ellos, - of them. 

£). a ellos, - to them. les, se, 

A. k ellos, - them. los, 

Ab. de ellos J - from them. 



to them.i 
them,X 



* lastead of the pronouHS of the third person singular and plural, 
masculine and feminine, if we address one or many persons to whom 
we owe much respect, we make use of su merced, and sus merctdes. 
Ex. Su merced estd hueiio ; sus mercedts estdn buenos. 

t Formerly we used to suppress the e of the preposition de, before 
el pronoun ; now thfs contraction is rejected b}' the Academy j it is 
suppressed before eZ, article. (See the note page 26.) 

t As it is easy to confound, in the use of these pronouns, those of 
the dative with'those of the accusative, and as the Spaniards them- 
selves confound them frequently, we have thought the following obser- 
vations necessary. 

A verb may have two regimens, one direct and the other indirect. 
(See the difference of these two regimens, p. 55.) If the pronoun is 
the direct regimen, as in these phrases, / see hitUj I respect her, Hove 
them, all these pronouns are in the accusative, and we must say ; 
lo veo, la respectoy los or las quiero. But, if it is the indirect regimen, 
as in the following phrases, he urote to him a letter, I gave ihetn 
good advice, the pronouns are in the dative, and we must say in Span- 
ish ; le escribio una -carta^ les di buenos conscjos. Le. les. serve in the 
dative for both genders. 
5* 



54 



PRONOUNS. 



Singular feminine, 

Pron, as regimen. 



JV*. 


ella, 




shej it. 




G. 


de ella, 


of 


her, of it. 




D. 


4 ella, 


to her^ to it. 


le, se, 


A. 


^ ella. 




her, it. 


la, 


Ah. 


de ella, fron 


I her 


^^ from it. 










Plural feminine. 


N. 


ellas, 




they. 




G. 


de ellas, - 




of them. 




D. 


4 ellas, - 




to them. 


leSj se, 


A. 


a ellas, - 




them. 


las^ 


Ab. 


de ellas, - 


from them. 





to her.\ 
her.X 



to them.\ 
them.t 



D. 
A. 

Ab 



to himself ^'c. 
himself ^c. 



PRONOUN REFLECTIVE. 

This pronoun has no nominative. 

G. de SI, of oneself himself herself 
themselves. 
a si, to oneself himself herself. se, 
^ si, - to oneself Sfc. se, 

de si, - from oneself Sfc. 

N. B. ] St. When the word mismo, self is united to this 
pronoun, it agrees in gender and number with the noun or 
nouns to which the pronoun relates. Ex. Ellos hahlan de si 
mismos, they speak of themselves ; ellas se condenandsi mis- 
mas, they condemn themselves. 

N. B. 2d. The pronouns mf, ti^ ,sf, me, thee, oneself, 
preceded by the preposition con, with, are changed in Span- 
ish into migOy iigo, sigo, which are united to the preposition. 
Ex. conmigo^ with me ; contigo, with thee ; consigo, with 
him, with her. 

table op pronouns as regimen or objective. 



1st. pers. sing. masc. and fem. 
Ist.pers. plur. masc. and fem. 
'2d. pers. sing. masc. and fem. 
2d. pers. plur. masc. and fem. 





Dative. 


Accusative. 


to me^ me, 


me, 


me. 


to us, us, 


nos. 


nos. 


to thee, thee, 


te. 


te. 


to you, you. 


OS, 


OS. 



} See the note on the preceding page. 



PRONOUNS. 55 

Dative. Accusative. 

3d. pers. sing. masc. & neut. to him, to it, him, it, le, se, le, lo. 

3d. pers. plur. masc. to them, them, les^se, los. 

3d. pers. sing. fern. to her, her, le, se, la. 

3d. pers. plur. fern. to them, them, les, se, las. 

''aL^lurrf rndti; ]tohimself,hersemc. se, 



se. 



ON THE CONSTRUCTION OF PRONOUNS AS REGIMEN, OR 
OBJECTIVE. 

Rule XXVI. The pronouns as regimen, me, no5; ie^ 
OS ; le, lo, les, los ; la^ las, se, must be placed after the verb, 
whenever it is in the infinitive, imperative, or 3, gerund ; and 
in these cases they are united close to the verb^ so as to 
form with it, at least in appearance, a single word. Ex. No 
quiero darlo, I will not give it ; dalo, give it ; ddndolo, in giv- 
ing it. 

In all other cases, the general rule requires that they be 
placed before the verb. Ex. Te digo, I tell thee ; le escH- 
bird, he will write to him. We however find examples of 
pronouns used as regimen placed after verbs in other modes 
and tenses than those mentioned in the preceding rule; as, 
digolo, I say it ; harelo, I shall do it ; suctdeme muchas veces, 
it often happens to me. ^ But as it is practice that must de- 
termine the propriety of this construction, it is best for the 
scholar to follow the general rule, until well versed in the 
language. 

Rule XXVII. The pronouns of indirect regimen, to 
HIM, to her, to it, and to the3i, when they are accom- 
panied by one of the pronouns of direct regimen, 
Zo, la, los, las, must be translated by se, Ex. Se lo dare, I 
will give it to him, to her, to it, to them. 

Rule XXVIII. We use also very elegantly the same 
pronoun se, when, besides the pronouns of direct regimen 
lo, la, &c. the verb has a noun for an indirect regimen, and 
then se is merely an expletive. Ex. Se lo promtto a vm., 
I promise it to you ; se and a vm, stand for to your favour 
separately, therefore it is a repetition to give clearness and 
force to the idea. 

Rule XXIX. This pronoun se is also frequently used 
in Spanish to express the passive of verbs, as in these 
phrases ; se moviS la tierra, the earth was shaken ; la tempes- 
tad St apacigud, the tempest was appeased ; se dobla 6 repite 



o6 



PRONOUNS. 



el clamor, the cries are increased or repeated. In these 
phrases se denotes that the verbs have a passive signification j 
though they retain the active termination. This is like the 
latin ; terra movit ; tempestas sedavit ; clamor ingeminat. 

Rule XXX. — When the pronoun nos^ us, is a direet 
regimen, and is found immediately after the verb that gov- 
erns it in the accusative, this verb, if it is in the first person 
of the plural, loses its final s, Ex. Divertimonos^ we amuse 
ourselves ; amdmonos^ we love one another ; and in the im- 
perative mode, if the second person of the plural is followed 
by oSy you, it loses the d. Ex. Cubrios, cover yourselves. 

N. B. To give more force and energy to th^ phrase, we 
frequently place the pronoun, in Spanish, when it is the ob- 
ject of the action, both before and after the verb ; and in 
this case one of the pronouns is always without the preposi- 
tion, and the other is always preceded by the preposition a ; 
as in the following phrases ; le estiman a ily they esteem 
him ; me han escrilo a mi^ they h^ve written to me ; 3/0 a 
ti no te quiero, I do not love thee. Also, when the verb has 
no other regimen but you^ if this pronoun is rendered by 
vuestra mercedj or vuestras mercedesy we often elegantly 
place before the verb one of these pronouns le, la, los, las, or 
les, according to the gender and number of the person or 
persons which the pronoun represents, and according to the 
case the verb governs. Ex. JSTo le basta a vm, el jpreten- 
der .... it is not sufficient for you to pretend. ... Fa 
lo han dicho, senora ; jamas la visitardn a vm, ; they said, 
madam, they never will see you. 

OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. 

The pro7iouns possessive serve to denote the possession 
of an object. They follow the rules of adjectives. 

In order to render the use of these pronouns more clear 
and striking, we distinguish them into two kinds ; those that 
are always joined to a noun and do not take an article ; as 
m, tUy s^Uy (fee. my, thy, his, &c. Ex. Mi padre ^ my father ; 
tu madre, thy mother ; su hijo, his son ; and those that are 
not joined to the noun, and take the article ; as, el mio^ el 
tiiyoy el suyo^ ^c. mine, thine, his, &c. 



phonouns. 



OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE THAT ARE ALWAYS JOINED TO 

NOUNS. 

These pronouns denote possession^ either as respects one 
person or many. 

Those which, in Spanish, relate only to one person are, 
in the singular, miy my ; tu^ thy ; and in the plural, mis^ 
my ; tus^ thy. 

Those which denote that the possession relates to many, 
are, nuestro^ masculine, Jiuestra, feminine ; nuestros^ mascu- 
line, nuestras^ feminine, our ; vuestro^ masculine, vuestra^ 
feminine, your. For the third person in the singular, su^ his, 
her, or their ; and in the plural sws, his, her or their ; and 
these pronouns of the third person may, in Spanish, relate to 
one possessor, or to many. 



DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. 

N. B. The declension of these pronouns presenting no 
difficulty, it will be sufficient to decline the first and give the 
nominative of the others. They take no article. 







SINGULAR AND 


PLURAL. 










Masculine and 


feminine. 






x^^. 


mi, sing. 


mis, 'plur. 


- 


- 


- 


my. 


G. 


de mi. 


de mis. 


- 


- 


- 


of my. 


D. 


a mi, 


a mis. 


- 


- 


- 


to my. 


A. 


mi, k mi, 


mis, a mis. 


- 


- 


- 


my. 


Ah. 


de mi, 


de mis, 


- 


- 


from my. 



When this pronoun my is used in calling, in addres- 
sing a person or in exclamations, instead of vii. mis^ we 
make use of mfo, m?a, mios^ mias, without an article ; they 
ai^e placed after the noun to which they refer, and take its 
gender and number. Ex. Amigo mio, my friend; hdja mia. 
my daughter ; amigos mios, my friends, &c. 



PRONOUNS. 
SINGULAR AND PLURAL. 

Masculine and feminine. 



Tu, 


tus/* 


- 


. - . tJuj. 


sa, 


SUSjt 


- 


his, her, its. 


nuestro. 


nuestra, oSy 


as, 


your.f 


vuestro. 


vuestraj os. 


aSy 


su, 


SUSj 


- 


- - - their. 


OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE NOT 


JOINED TO NOUNS. 



These pronouns admit the masculine, feminine, and neu- 
ter termination, and relate, as well as the precedhig, to one 
or more persons. Those, that relate to a single person, are : 
el mio, masc. la mia, fem. sing, los mios, masc. las inias, 
fern, plural, mine ; eltuyo masc. la tuya, fem. sing, los tuyos, 
las tuyas, fem. plural, thine. 



* We have said when speaking of personal pronouns, that tu and 
t'O^ are not used in good society. It is the same with the possessive 
pronouns iu and vuestro, in the place of which we make use of de vm. 
in speaking to one person, and of de vms in speaking to several ; and 
we place before the noun substantive one of these articles el, los, la, 
las, according to the gender and number of the noun. Ex. Your son, 
that is, the son of your favour, or of your favours, el liijo de vm. or 
de vms. (vm. if we speak only to the father or to the mother ; vms. if 
we speak to both.) 

t When we speak of a person for whom we wish to show much 
respect, instead of su, we may make use of 5U Merced, su Senoria, su 
Escelencia, according to the rank of the person ; and such a phrase 
as the following; I have seen the Corregidor, and hope to obtain his 
protection (that is the protection of his favour,) is rendered in Spanish^ 
he vista al seiior Corregidor, yespero merecer la proteccion de su merced. 

I Though the pronouns nuestro and vuesiro, seem as though they 
ought to express the idea of more than one person, it happens some- 
times that they relate only to one ; for the king says JSl^uesiro consejo, 
our council ; and in speaking to a person distinguished for his rank 
and authority, we make use of vuesiro, vuestra. We say for example, 
Vuestra Magestad, vuestra Beatitud, vuestra Ilustrisima, vuestra Jllteza^ 
&,c. Your Majesty, your Floliness, your Grace, your Higimess he. 
We use the same pronouns vuestro and vuestra, in speaking to God, to 
the Holy Virgin and the saints. When your is turned by of your 
favour or of your favours, de vm. or de vms., we frequently use the pro- 
nouns su and sus, instead of the article before the substantive. Ex. 
He recivido su carta (or sus cartas) de vm. or de vms.j I have received 
your letter or your letters> 



PRONOUNS. 



59 



Those that relate to several persons, are ; el nuestro^ 
masc. la nuestra^ fern. sing, los nuestroSy masc. las nuestrasy 
fem. plural, ours ; el vuestro, masc. la vuestra, fern. sing, los 
vuestros, masc. las vuestras^iem. plural, yoiu's ; elsuyo^ masc. 
la sui/a, fem. his, hers, theirs ; los suyos^ masc. las suyasy 
fem. his, hers, theirs. 

N. B. These ' pronouns are always preceded by the 
noun to which they relate, and with which they agree in gen- 
der and number ; this noun is that which represents the ob- 
ject possessed, and not the possessor.* 

The following declension will serve as a rule for those 
pronouns that are dechned with the article. 

DECLENSION OF THE PRONOUN, MIO. 

Singular masculine and feminine. 



G. 
D. 
A. 

Ah 



la mia, 

de la mia, 

4 la mia, 

la mia or a la mia, 

de la mia, 



el mio, 
del mio, 
al mio, 
el or al mio, 
del mio. 

Plural masculine and feminine. 
los mios, las mias, 

de los mios, de las mias, 

a los mios, a las mias, 

los mios, or 2b los mios, las mias, or a las mias, 
de los mios, de las mias. 

The following pronouns are to be declined 
manner. 

Singular masculine and feminine. 

la tuva. 



K 
G. 
D. 
J. 

Ab 



El tuyo, 
el suyo, 
el nuestro, 
el ^-uestro, 
el suyo. 



la Suva, 
la nuestra, 
la vuestra 
la Suva, 





mine. 

of mine, 
to mine. 




mine. 


f 


rom mine. 




mine, 
of mine, 
to mine. 




mine. 


from mine. 


in 


the same 


- 


thine, 
his, hers. 


- 


ours. 


- 


yours, 
theirs. 



* This rule requires a particular attention because the English most 
always cause these pronouns to agree with the possessor and not with 
the object possessed. Ex. Is that your sister's book 9 .Yo, it is mine ; 
here is hers', hers, pronoun, refers to sister and not to book ; in Span- 
ish, on the contrary, we must say : es este el libre de su hermana 
de vmS — jYo, es el mio ; he aqui el sitnjo ; suyo is in the masculine be- 
cause it refers to libro and not to hermana. 



00 




PRONOUNS. 






Plural masculine and feminine. 




Los tuyos, 
los suyos, 
los nuestros, 
los vuestros, 
los suyos, 


i 1 1 1 1 
II 1 1 1 


las tuyas, 
las suyas, 
las nuestras, - 
las vuestras, - 
las suyas, 


thine. 

hisyhers. 

ours, 

yours 

theirs. 



Rule XXXI. These last pronouns, mo, tuyo, Sfc. some- 
times accompany a substantive, principally in exclamations, 
or when they are used in addressing a person, but then the 
substantive precedes the pronoun, and does not take an arti- 
cle. Ex. Father ! padre mio ! mother ! madre mia ! come, 
friend, &c. ven^ amigo mio^ Sfc, 

Rule XXXIL When the verb to be is taken in the 
sense of to belong^ we use in Spanish as in English the pos- 
sessive pronoun, mio, mine, tuyoy thine, &c. without the ar- 
ticle, but this pronoun in Spanish agrees in gender and num- 
ber with the thing possessed of which we speak. Ex. This 
book is mine,, este libro es mio ; this house is thine, his, 
theirs, ours, &c. esta casa es iuya^ suya, nuestra, ^c. 

N. B. 1st. When the verb to be, taken in the sense 
of to belong, is followed or preceded by another pro- 
noun or by a noun, this noun or pronoun must be put in the 
genitive. Ex. This book is Mr.B's, este libro es del senor B ; 
this horse is my brother's, este caballo, es de mi hermano ; 
whose house is this, de quien es esta casa ? (see the pronoun 
cuyo, Rule XXXIV.) 

N.B. 2d. This same observation must be regarded for the 
possessive pronoun yours, after the verb to be, when instead of 
vuestro, we should wish to employ vm. and vms, (vuestra 
MERCED and vuestra s MERCEDES,) your favour and your 
favours. Thus, in this phrase ; this book is yours ; if I ex- 
press yours by de vm,, I must say, este libra es de i;?w., sing. 
de usiedes, plural. 

Rule XXXIII. To translate of mine, of thine, of his, &c. 
the Spaniards use commonly the possessive pronouns mio, 
iuyo, sttyo, <^c. placed as in English, but without the preposi- 
tion of, Ex. A brother of his, un hermano suyo ; a friend 
of mine, un amigo mio. 



PRONOUNS. 61 

OF PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE. 

Pronouns demonstrative indicate, and place, as it were, 
under the eye, the person or the thing of which they 
hold the place. They are divided into three kinds. 

The following pronoun designates the object that is near 
the person that speaks. 

Singular masculine and feminine, 
Este, esta, - - - - this. 

Plural masculine and feminine. 
EstoSj estas, - - - - these. 

Neuter. 
Esto, - - - this, this thing, any thing. 

If the object is more distant from the person that speaks, 
than from the one to whom the speech is addressed^* we 
make use of the following pronoun ; 

Singular masculine and feminine. 
Ese, esa, - - ^- - that. 

Plural masculine and feminine. 
Esos, esas, - - - . those. 

Neuter. 
Eso, - - that^ that things any thing. 

The pronouns that follow, express a distant object, both 
from the person who speaks, and from him to whom the 
speech is addressed. 

Singular masculine and feminine. 
Aquel, el, aquella, la, - he that, she that. 

Plural masculine and feminine. 
Aquellos, los, aquellas, las, - they, those. 

Neuter. 
Aquello, ello, lo, - - that, it 

There are also three other pronouns which are com- 
pounded of the preceding and of the adjective otro, otra, 
other. Viz. 



62 



PRONOUNS. 



•Masculine and Feminine, Singular and Plural, 



Estotro, estotra^ estotros, estotras, 
Esotro, esotra, esotros, esotras, 
Aquel otro, aquel- aquellos otros, a- ' 
la otra^ quellas otras^ 

Neuter, 
Estotro, esotroj aquello otro. 



this other y these others, 
that other ^ those others, 

that other, those others, 
this and that other. 



He vchoj she wko^ they who, or that^ are translated 
by 61 que or quien, la que, los or las que^ or by aquel que,^ 
aquella que, aquellos or aquellas que. 

What or that which are translated by lo que^, aquello que. 



OP PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 

Pronouns relative are those that relate to a noun or pro- 
noun which precedes. Some take the article, others do not. 
The following do not take the article. 

Singular masculine and feminine. 
que^ quien/* - - - - toho^ that, which. 

de quien, ' ' ' " f^f whom, whose, 8fc. 
a quien, ------ ^o ivhom, 

a quien or que, whom. 

de quien, - from whom. 

Plural masculine and feminine. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

Ah. 



N, 
G. 
D, 
A, 
Ah, 



que, quienes,? 
de quienes, 
^ quienes, 
a quienes, 
de quienes, 



Lo que, 
de que, 
^ que. 



JSTeuter, 



who, that, which. 

of whom, whose, Sfc, 

to whom. 

whom, 

- from whom. 



that which, what. 



of what, 
to what* 



* Quitn and quienes are applied only to persons and personified 
things ; que both to persons and things. 

t We also use quien in the plural number, says the Grammar of 
the Academy, and it gives the following examples. Los primer os con 
QUIEN topamos eran los gimnosojistas, the first whom we met were the 
gymnosophists. jlqueUos siete sabios a qcien tanto venerd la Grecia, 
those seven sages so much venerated by the Greeks, 



PRONOUNS. 63 

N. B. Whose is translated by the pronoun cuyo, cuya^ 
cuyos, cuyas, following the gender and number of the thing 
possessed, by which this pronoun cuyo must be immediately 
followed, if it is relative, but from which it is commonly 
separated by the verb, wdien it is interrogative. It always 
agrees with the object possessed, and never with the pos- 
sessor. 

CUYO, CUYA, CUYOS, CUYAS. 

Rule XXXIV. The pronoun cuyo is relative and inter- 
rogative, and is used for whose, of which ; but care should be 
taken to observe, as has been already said, that it agrees 
with the thing possessed, and not with the possessor, and is 
applicable in Spanish to persons as well as to things. Ex. 
Whose book is this? cuyo es este libro ? Whose pens are 
those, cuyas son esas plumas ? She is a lady whose qualities 
are known, es una senora cuyas prendas son conosidas, Lon- 
don the streets of which are so wide, Londres cuyas calks 
son tan anchas. 

Rule XXXV. When the pronoun tha% preceded by a 
noun or pronoun to which it relates, may be rendered by 
of whom, in whom, by whoniy for whom, &c. it must be ex- 
pressed by de quien, a quien, en quien, por quien Szc. Ex, 
It is of oneself that one ought to be afraid, de si mismo es de 
quien se ha de tener miedo, that is, of whom &c. It is to 
God that we must have recourse, es a Dios a quien es precise 
de acudiry that is, to whom, &c. 

ANOTHER PRONOUN RELATIVE. 

This pronoun is declined with the article. 

Singular masculine and feminine. 



N. 


el cual. 


la cual. 


wMgIi 


G. 


del cual. 


de la cual. 


ofivhich 


D, 


al cual. 


a la cual, 


to which 


J, 


el cual, al cual. 


la cual, a la cual, 


which 


Ah, 


del cual. 


de la cual. 


'fromwhich. 




Plural ma 


sculine and feminine. 




N. 


los cuales. 


las cuales. 


which. 


G. 


de los cuales. 


de las cuales. 


- of which. 


D. 


a los cuales. 


a las cuales, 


- to which. 


A. 


los cuales, a los cuales, las cuales, a las cuales which. 


Ah, 


de los cuales, - 


de las cuales. 


from which. 



04 



PRONOUNS. 



OF PRONOUNS INTERROGATIVE. 



Pronouns interrogative are those wliich serve to interro- 
gate ; they are declined without the article. 

Singular masculine and feminine. 



N. quien. 


- 


- - - - 


- tvho. 


G. de quien, 


- 


- - - - 


of who?n. 


D. 4 quien^ 


- 


- 


to ichom,^ 


A, quien, a quien, 


- - - - 


whom. 


Ab. de quien, 


- 


- - - - 


- fro7n whom. 


Plural masculine and feminine. 


/ 


quienes, &€. &c. 


- 


. 


loho. 


- 




Neuter, 




N. que. 


. 


- ' 


what. 


G. de que^ 


- 


- 


of what. 


D. a que. 


- 


- 


to what. 


A, que. 


- 


- - - 


ichat. 


Ab, de que, 


- 


, 


- from what. 



Which is translated by cual, cuaJes^ of both genders. Ex. 
You have read these books ; which of the two do you pre- 
fer ? Vm. ha leido eslos libros ; cual de los dos prefer e ? 

What is rendered by que of both genders and numbers. 
Ex. What book do you read, que libro lees? What o'clock 
is it ? que hora es? What fruits will you buy ? que f rut as 
comprard vm, ? 

OF PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 

These pronouns are thus called, because they expre'ss aa 
object vague and indeterminate. All those that are placed 
in this class are not always pronouns, strictly so called, but 
become adjectives when they are joined with nouns, and 
present some particulars which it is essential to make 
familiar. 

* See Rule XXXfV for the pronoun cinjOy-a.-QSj-as.. 



PRONOUNS. 



65 



Xobody, - - ^ - - 

None, - - - - - 

No, not any, (followed by a noun,) 
Not one. 



nadie^ ninguno. 
ninguno, ninguna. 
ninguno^ ninguna, 

ni uno, ni unui 



Neither, 

Both, 

Each, every, 
Each one, 
Every body 

One another, 



Of others, 



— — y — — ^. 
ni uno ni otro^ ni nna ni otra ; plural, 
ni itnos ni otros^ ni iinas ni otras^ 
amhos-as ; nno y otro^iina y otra : plu- 
ral, unos y otros, nnas y otras, 

cada, 

cada uno, cada una, 

todos. 

uno otro. una otra; plural, unos 

otros, Unas otras. 
de otro, de ofros. To others, a otro^ 
a otros ; and if of others is govern- 
ed by a substantive, it is then 
translated by ageno. agena, agenos, 
agenasy according to the gender 
and number of the noun to which 
it relates ; as, the property of oth- 
ers, el bien ageno, ^'c, 

alguien, alguno. 



alguno-a^ os-as. 



Some one, somebody. 
Some, (relating to a noun,) 
Some, r always] oin- > 

ed to a noun H ' unos, unas, algunos, algunas. 

Many, several, - mitchos, muclias. varios, varias, 

Hhosoever, whatsoever, cualquiera/ip\ma.\,cualesquiera," ' "' 
VVhoever, whosoever, . - qui en qui era, 

\vu^^^^^^ ■ - - - siempre que, 

VV hatever, - . aialquiera-que ; por mas que, 
cualqiiiera cosa que ; por mas 

que, ^ 



However, howsoever, 



Even, 



yet. 



> ^ 






Such a one. 
People say. 
People assure, 



fulano, 



aiiu, 

; zutano, a, 

se dice, 

se asegura. 



OBSERVATIONS UPON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

Rule XXXVI. Jny one and any body in interrogative 
pnrases, or m phrases implying doubt, must be expressed 

Itfv^e^ofn. ^^'T^^^^^^^^ ^^^" '^^'^ who know the 
motives of my conduct is there any one who ha^ blamed it ^ 



00 VEIlBS. 

de todos lo's que conocen las motivos de mi^ acetones^ hay acaso 
itnoy 6 J alguno que las haya condenado 1 I doubt that any one 
has blamed it^ dudo que alguno las haya condenado, I 
doubt that an?/ one be as wise ashe^c/wc?o que alguno sea tan 
sabio como ^ly ^c. This office suits him better than ani/ one 
dse ; este empleo le conviene mejor que a cualquier otro. 

Rule XXXVII. Nobody ^ no person whatever is transla- 
ted by ningunOy nadie ; and nothing whatever is translated 
by nada. Ex. Nobody whatever has spoken ill of you to 
me^ NADIE me ha hahlado mat de vm. Whatever genius 
one may have, one cannot^ without application^ excel in 
any thing whatever, yor mas ingenio que uno tenga eu nada 
putde sobresalir sin aplicacion. 

Rule XXXVIII. In Spanish the following pronouns 
nobody J noiie^ not one^ neiiher^ nothing ; nadie ^ ninguno^ ni 
uno, ni uno ni otro, nada, require that the verb be preceded 
by the negative no^ when they are placed after it; but this 
negative is suppressed when they precede it. Ex. He can- 
not excel in anj^ things en nada puede sobresalir^ or no puede 
aobresalir en nada; the first construction is the most elegant, 

N. B. The adverb jamas^ never^, follows the same rule. 



CHAPTER VI. 



OP VERBS. 



The verb is that part of speech which is essentially the 
bond of our thoughts, the soul of all our reasonings, and the 
only one that has the property of pointing out the relation 
that they have with the present, past and future. Its office 
is to express actions, passions and situations. 

There are six kinds of verbs, to wit ; the active, passive, 
neuter, reflective, reciprocal and impersonal. 

The active verb is that of which the regimen is direct, or 
after which one may put alguno, alguna cosa, some one, 
some thing. Amar, to love, is an active verb, because we 
may say, amar a alguno, to love some one, amar la virtud, 
to love virtue, and because in these two phrases the regimen 
is direct, buscavy to seek, is also an active verb, because we 



\EKBS. 6T 

may say, huscar a alguno, buscar alguiia cosa, to seek some- 
body, to look for something. 

The passive verb is that which is formed from the active^ 
takes the direct regimen to form its subject, and always is 
followed by one of these prepositions, roR or de ; as, el honi- 
bre virtuoso es amadu de todos^ the virtuous man is loved 
by every body. 

The neuter verb is that after which we cannot put some 
one, nor some thing, alguno, alguna cosa, Exisih\ dormir, 
to exist, to sleep, are neuter verbs, because we cannot say : 
dormir a alguno, dorniir alguna casa, to sleep some one, to 
sleep something. 

The reflective verb is that of which the subject and the 
regimen are the same person, or, that which is conjugated 
with two pronouns of the same person, expressed or under- 
stood ; Arrepentirse, to repent, is a reflective verb, because 
in order to conjug^ate it, we must make use of two pronouns, 
and say ; yo me arrtpiento, tit te arrepientes, el se arrepi^ 
elite, &c. or, me arrepiento, te arrepientes, se arrepiente, Sfc. 
(and then yo, tu, el are understood,) I repent, thou repentest, 
he repents, &;c. 

The reciprocal verb * is that which expresses the action 
of several subjects that act one upon the other. £x. Los 
verdaderos amigos deben amarse y servirse unos a otros, true 
friends must love and serve one another. 

The impersonal verb is that which is used, in all its tenses 
only in the third person of the singular. Tronar, to thun- 
der, is an impersonal verb, because it has in each tense only 
the third person. We say ; Truena,tronaba, trono, tronard, 
&c. it thunders, it did thunder, it thundered, it will thunder ; 
but we cannot say ; I thunder, thou thunderest, we thunder, 
unless it be in a figurative sense. 

Verbs may be regular, irregular, or defective. 

The regular verbs, in the Spanish language, are those of 
which the radical letters are always the same, and of v/hich 

^ In order that the verb should clearly express i ciprocity, it i§ 
often necessary to add to it the following words, uno a otro, mutua' 
riierde, a porfia, one another, mutually, in emulation of one another. 
In thi- pVira>e, Cicero y Anionio no dejaban de alabarse uno a otro^ 
Cicero and Anthony did not cease to praise one another ; if we should 
not pji ; ,. a otro there would be an equivocation which would leave 
a doubt of the reciprocity of the action. 



08 VERBS. 

the terminations are, in all the tenses, conformable to those 
of the verb that serves as a model for them. 

We call those irregular, which vary in the radical letters, 
or which do not agree, in all the tenses, with the termina- 
tions of the verb, that serves as a model. 

N. B. We understand by radical Utters those which 
precede the termination of the infinitive. We reckon only 
three conjugations in Spanish, the first has the infinitive ter- 
minated in ar, as amarj to love ; the second has it in er, as 
temerj to fear ; the third has it in ir, as subir, to go up. In 
these verbs all the letters that precede ir^ er, and 2r, that is, 
«/«, tern^ and suh^ are radical, and those that follow them in 
all the tenses, as well as in all the persons, form the termina- 
tions. 

Lastly, we call those verbs defective, that Want certain 
tenses or certain persons, w^hich use does not admit. 

There are besides auxiliary/ verbs, so called, because they 
serve to conjugate the others. The Spanish language reck- 
ons three, to wit ; kaber and teller^ to have ; and ser^ to be. 

OF CONJUGATION. 

To conjugate a verb, is to collect or recite all its termina- 
tions, as ; amOj araas^ a?na, &c. I love, thou lovest, he loves, 
&c. ; amaba, amabasy amabaj &c. I did love, thou didst love, 
he did love, &c. 

These different terminations form modes, tenses, numbers 
and persons, 

OF MODES. 

Modes are difterent manners of using the verb. There 
are five, infinitive ^ indicative ^ conditional ^ imperative and 
subjunctive. 

The infinitive expresses indefinitely, and in a general 
manner the action or state that the verb designates. The 
infinitive is consequently neither susceptible of number or 
person ; as, amar^ temer^ snbir^ to love, to fear, to go up. 

The indicative points out and indicates in a direct and 
absolute manner w^hat we aifirm of a person or thing ; as, 
amo y temo at Dios que me crid^ y cuya justicia recompensard 
a los buenos^ y castigard a los malos ; 1 love and fear the 
God w4io created me, and whose justice will reward the 
good, and punish the wicked. 

The conditional is the manner of expressing the afiirma- 
tion depending upon a condition, as ; yo leerla^ si tuviera 



VERBS. ^-^ 



libros, I should read if I had books ; yo hubiera escno una 
carta antes de comer, si nohubiese tenido a visila dd senor 
Conde de Floridablanca, I should have wntten aletter before 
dinner, if I had not had a visit from Count de blorMlanca. 

The imperative expresses the action of commanding, pray- 
ing or exhorting. This mode has but one tense^tliat desig- 
nais the preset in relation to the action of commandmg, 
and the fature in relation to the thing commanded , as, 
lieste libro, give me this book. Venid manana, c.me to- 
morrow. Hdgame vm. el favor de. ..dome the favour of. . . 
This tense ha°s no first person in the singular, because we do 
not command ourselves ; but it has in the plural, because 
then it is rather others than ourselves that we address. 

The subjunctive is a mode which, in order to make sense, 
requires to be preceded by another verb, expressed or un- 
derstood, on which it depends. It depends upon i^ becau e 

it makes sense with and would "ot^^f^ff^.^^V. he 
These words; quisiera que vimese, I should wish that he 
came, make 'sense; but these, gue r.mese, that he came, 
alone and separate, would not make any. 



OF TENSES. 



We shall follow, in the division of tenses, the method re- 
ceived by the most esteemed and approved grammarians; 
and in order to obviate the very serious difficulties which 
the three futures and the three conditionals of the bpanisli 
verbs present, we have thought it best to aeviate from the 
plan followed by the Academy of Madrid. This plan may 
be excellent for the Spaniards who jom, to the study ot 
grammar, a constant practice ; but it is too obscure tor tor- 
eigners, as it deviates too much from the usage of other lan- 
guages, and contains rules which are not sufficiently particu- 
lar. Therefore, instead of comprising the two futures con- 
junctive, the second and third conditional in the subjunctive, 
we shall place the two futures in the indicative, we shall 
piake a mode of the conditional that will have three termi- 
nations, and the subjunctive will have the tenses that it com- 
tnonlv has in other languages. This order aas appeared to 
us the most proper to render obvious the relations that exist 
between the Spanish and English languages. 



(V VERBS. 

OF THE TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE. 

The tenses of the infinitive are the present, the preterite* 
the gerund and the participle. 

The present of the infinitive always designates the present 
time relative to the preceding verb ; as, le veo correrj I see 
him run ; le oi cantar, I heard him sing ; le vere bailar. I 
shall see him dance. 

The preterite on the contrary denotes the past time rela- 
tive to the preceding 'V6rb ; as, creia haberle visto, I thought 
I had seen him. 

The gerund designates 1st. the state of the ^subject, the 
reason or foundation of the action, as in these phrases : 
canta durmiendo, he sings in his sleep ; el emperador de Ale- 
mania, temiendo que la pa? no durase mucho tiempo, licenciS 
muy pocas tropas, the emperor of Germany, fearing that the 
peace would not last long, disbanded only a few troops. In 
the first example, durmiendo, expresses the state of the sub- 
ject ; and in the second, temiendo, expresses the reason or 
grounds of the action of the emperor. 

2d. It denotes a manner or a mean of attaining an end, 
and then it is almost always preceded by the preposition en, 
in. Ex. No espere el homhre ser jamas feliz en dejandose ar- 
rastrar de sus pasiones, no lo puede ser sino en domindndolas. 
Let man never expect to be happy in giving himself up to 
his passions, he can only be so by subduing them. 

3d. It serves to express a condition. Ex. Siendo esto asi, 
volvert d Francia, this being so, I shall return to France. 

4th. It is frequently used v/ith the verb estar, to be, to 
show in a more positive manner that an action is, was, has 
been or will be done at the very time of which we speak. 
Ex. Esfd escribiendo, he is writing ; estaba escribiendo, he 
v/as writing ; estard escribiendo, he will be writing. 

The participle is thus called, because it participates in the 
nature of the verb and that of the adjective. It is of the na- 
ture of the verb, because it has its signification and regimen. 
It is of the nature of an adjective, because it expresses a 
quality. 

The participles are divided into present and past ; into the 
present ; ^s,amante, obedienie, oyente, into jrst ; RS,am-,a'o^ 
obedeciao, oido. The participles of the present have the ter- 



VERBS. 



71 



mlnation in ante, as cnnaiUe, for the first conjugation. Those 
of the second and third have it in ente, as obedient^-, oyente, 

1 he participles present are in use only in part of the 
verbs ; the greater part beinq; rather verbal adjectives than 
participles, because they have not a regimen as their verbs. 
Ex. Oijevte, hearing ; leijentt, reading; are verbal adjectives, 
because we cannot say, oyente el sermon, leijente libros, usage 
not permitting us to give a regimen to these participles. 

The participles past of regular verbs have their termina- 
tions in ado, for the first conjugation ; and in ido, for the 
second and third. Those that do not follow this rule are 
irregular, and are found in their place in the alphabetical list 
which is subjoined. 

There are some verbs that have two participles past, the 
one regular and the other irregular. The first is always 
emplo\'ed with the auxiliary verb haher, to have ; the second 
is never joined to it, but follows the rule of adjectives, ex- 
cept i'lgerto, grafted ; preso, caught ; prescrito, prescribed ; 
provisto. provided ; and 7-0^0, broken ; which are used with 
the auxiliary haber just as well as the regular participle. 

VERBS THAT HAVE TWO PARTICIPLES. 







Part, regular. 


Part, irregular 


Ahitar^ 


to surfeit, 


ahitado, 


ahito. 


Bendeclr, 


to bless, 


bendecido. 


bendito. 


Compeler, 


to compel, 


compelido. 


compulse. 


Concluir, 


to conclude, 


concluido. 


concluso. 


Confundir, 


to confound, 


confundido, 


confuse. 


Convencer, 


to convince, 


convencido, 


convicte. 


Convertir, 


to convert. 


convertido, 


converse. 


Despertar, 


to awake, 


despertado, 


despierte. 


Elegir, 


to choose, to elect 


, elegido, 


electo. 


Enjugar, 


to wipe. 


enjugado, 


enjuto. 


Escluir, 


to exclude, 


escluido. 


escluso. 


Espeler, 


to expel. 


espelido, 


espulse. 


Espresar, 


to express, 


espresado, 


espreso. 


Estinguir, 


to extinguish. 


estinguido, 


estinto. 


Fijar, 


to fix, 


fijado. 


fijo. 


Hartar, 


to satiate. 


hartado, 


harte. 


Incluir, 


to include, 


incluido, 


incluse. 


Incurrir, 


to incur, 


incurrido. 


in curse. 


Insertar, 


to insert, 


insertadoj 


inserto. 



72 


VERBS. 




Invertirj 


fo transpose, 


invertidoj 


ivnerso. 


Ingerir, 


. to ingraft, 


ingeridoj 


ingerto. 


Juntar, 


to join, 
to Clause, 


juntado, 


junto. 


Maldecir^ 


maldecidoj 


maldito. 


Manifestao:, 


to manifest, 


manifestadoj 


manifiesto 


Marchitar^ 


to wither, 


marchitado^ 


march ito. 


Omitir, 


to omit, 


omitido. 


omiso. 


Oprimir^ 


to oppress, 


oprimido. 


opreso. 


Perfecionarj 


to perfect, 


perfecionadoj 


perfecto. 


Prender, 


to seize, to arrest, 


prendidoj 


preso. 


Prescribir, 


to prescribe, 


prescribidoj 


prescrito. 


Proveer, 


to provide, 


proveidoj 


' provisto. 


Recluir, 


to confine. 


recluido, 


recluso. 


Romper^ 


to break. 


rompido. 


roto. 


Soltarj 


to loosen or release, soltado, 


suelto. 


Suprimirj 


to suppress. 


suprimidoj 


supreso. 



There are other participles, the termination of which is 
passive, and the signification active ; such as the following. 



Acostumbrado, 
Agradecido, 
Atrevido, 
Bien cenado, 
Bien comido, 
Bien hablado, 
Callado, 
Cansado, 
Comedido, 

Deseperado, 

Disimulado, 

Entendido, 

Esforzadoj, 

Fingido, 

Leido, 

Medido; 

Miradoj 

Moderadoj 

Negado, 

Ocasionadoj 

Osado, 

Parado 



accustomed. 

gratefid. 

bold. 

who has supped well. 

who has dined well 

who speaks well. 

discreet, 

tiresome, 
prudent. 

in despair. 

dissembling, hypocritical, 

intelligent. 

brave, intrepid. 

deceitful, artful. 

who has read much, well informed. 

cautious, circumspect, 

prudent, regardful. 

moderate. 

destitute of intelligence. 

quarrelsome. 

daring, undaunted. 

sloic, heavy. 



VERBS. 75 

Pai'ecido, - resembling. 

Partido, - liberal^ who shares what he has. 

Pausado, - deliberate. 

Porfiado, - obstinate , stubborn. 

Preciado, - vain , presumptuous. 

Precavido, - cautious. 

Presumido, - presumptuous. 

Recatado, - considerate^ discreet. 

Sabido, - learned. 

Sacudido, - rough^ untractable. 

Sentido, - sensitive^ susceptible. 

Sufrido, - enduring^ patient. 

Trascendido;> - penetrating^ keen minded. 

Valido, - confident, favourite. 

All the participles have also a passive signification, and 
it is the sense of the phrase that determines which of the 
two significations we must adopt. We see, for example, that 
in these expressions, honihre leido^ a well read man ; muger 
leida ; libro leido, a book that has been read; cartaleida : 
the participles lei do ^ lei da ^ have an active signification, when 
they refer to hombre and to muger ; and passive, when they 
refer to libro and to carta. Thus, if I say ; Pedro es un 
hombre cansado and Pedro estd cansado de trabajar, we see 
by the different use of the two verbs, es, estd (See upon 
these two verbs the Rule XLIX,) that the first of these 
phrases signifies, Peter is a tiresome man, and the second, 
Peter is tired of working:. 



OP THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 

The Spaniards reckon eight tenses in the indicative, 
which are the presenty the imperfect, the preterite definite, 
the preterite indefinite, the pretente antenor, the pluperfect, 
the future absolute, and the future anterior. We shall place 
in continuation of these two futures the future conjunctive 
simple, and the future conjunctive compound (though it seems 
they should belong to the subjunctive or conjunctive mode.) 
so as the better to compare them together : and exhibit the 
difference between them. This method will give ten tenses 
to the indicaiive. 



74 VERBS. 

The present denotes that a thing is, or is done at the mo- 
ment we speak ; as, soy, I am ; amo, I love ; subo, I go up. 

The imperfect denotes the past with relation to the pres- 
entj and makes known that a thing was present in a past 
time ; as, yo escribia, or estaba escribiendo cuando mi herma" 
no llegd^ I did write, or I was writing when my brother 
arrived. 

The imperfect serves also to denote habitual actions, or 
actions often repeated in a past time; as yo iba a la comedia 
tl ano pasado dos veces cada semanay I went (used to go) last 
year to the play twice a week. 

It serves also to express the qualities, either gpod, or bad, 
of men who are no more ; as, ^eron era un tirano^ Nero 
was a tyrant ; Enrique cuarto era un rey ben^Jico^ Henry the 
fourth was a beneficent king. 

The preterite may designate, either in a precise or only 
in a vague and indeterminate manner, that a thing has been 
done. 

Thence arise two preterites ; the preterite definite and the 
preterite indefinite. The preterite definite denotes a thing 
done at a time of which nothing more remains ; as, esciibi 
ayer^ I wrote yesterday ; comi el lunes iiltimo en casa dtl 
senor Pitty I dined on Monday last at the house of Mr. Pitt. 

The preterite indefinite denotes a thhig done at a time 
designated in an indeterminate manner, or at a time past but 
of which something yet remains ; as, la muerte de tu herma- 
no me ha afiigido mucho^ the death of thy brother has afflicted 
me much ; he recibido esta semana muchisimas visitas, I have 
received this week a great many visits. 

These two preterites cannot be indifferently used one for 
the other, it is essential to perceive clearly the difference 
that exists between them. In order that we may use the 
preterite definite, it is at least necessary that the time elapsed 
of which we speak should be a lohole day ; as, fui ayer d la 
comedia^ I v/ent yesterday to the play ; vi at rey la semana 
pasada, I saw the king last week. We cannot therefore say, 
€stndi6 esta manana ; escribi hoy, esta semana, este mes, este 
anoy (Sfc. ; I studied this morning, I wrote to day, this week, 
this month, this year, &c. because the morning, the day, the 
week, the month, the year, are not entirely elapsed. On the 
contrary, in order that we may use the preterite indefinite^ 
there must yet remain some part of the time past of which 



VERBS. 75 

we speak ; as, he visto esta manana al 'primer pinior del rey 
de Espana, I have seen this morning the jfirst painter of the 
king of Spain ; hemos visto grandes eventos en este siglo^ 
we have seen great events in this century. 

There is still another preterite which is called preterite 
anterior^ because it expresses a thing past before another in 
a time past ; as, despues que huhe visto al reij^ sail de Madrid^ 
after I had seen the king, I went out of Madrid.— This pre- 
terite is only used after the adverbs of time, despues que, 
luego que^ asi que^ cuando, after, as soon as, so soon as, when. 

The pluperfect is compounded of two past tenses. It de- 
notes a thing not only as past in itself, but also as past in re- 
gard to another thing which is also past ; as, yo hahia ya ce- 
nado cuando entrOy I already had supped when he came in. 

N. B. The futures, as well as the conditionals, present- 
ing to strangers considerable difficulty, we request them to 
pay to the following rules a particular attention. 

OF THE FUTURES. 

There are in the Spanish language four futures ; the fu- 
ture simple or absolute ; the future compound or anterior ; 
the future conjunctive simple, and the future conjunctive 
compound. 

The future absolute denotes that a thing will be, or will 
be done at a time which is yet to come ; as, sf, arnar^ siem- 
pre al Dios que me crio, yes, I shall always love the God 
who created me. 

N. B. This future has often the signification of the impe' 
rative, in the second person ; as, amards a Bios de todo tu 
corazon^ thou shalt love God with all thy heart ; no robards, 
thou shalt not steal. 

The future anterior denotes the future with relation to 
the past, making known that, at the time a thing will happen, 
another shall be past; as, habri acabado mi carta cuando tal 
6 talcosa suceda^ I shall have finished my letter when such or 
such a thing happens. 

These two futures differ in this, that in the future absolute 
the time may or may not be determined ; as, ir6^ 6 irt manor 
na a Bristol, I shall go, or I shall go to-morrow to Bristol. 
On the contrary, in the future anterior, the period is neces- 



VERBS. 



sarily determined ; as, hahr^ comido cuando vmMegiiey I 
shall have dined when you arrive. 

The future conjunctive^ which is so called, because it is 
always joined either to a conjunction or an adverb, or to a 
pronoun that governs it, serves to denote a future action al- 
ways expressed in English by the present of the indicative 
when the verb is preceded by the conjunction sz, if; some- 
times by the present of the subjunctive when the verb is pie« 
ceded by a conjunction that governs it in this mode, and of- 
ten by the future absolute or anterior. 

Rules for using the future conjunctivae. 

Rule XXXIX. AVe use the future conjunctive when the 
verb is governed by the conjunction S2, if ; and when the 
phrase expresses a future action ; as, 720 te digo que vivas, 
ill que mueras ; vive, si pudieres, y muere, si no pudieres 
rnasy I do not tell thee to live or to die ; live, if thou canst ; 
die, if thou canst not do better. 

Rule XL. We make use of the future conjunctive 
whenever the verb is preceded by one of the pronouns 
el que, los que J la que, las que^ lo que ; ^l-que, la-que^ los-que^ 
6;c, or by the adjective cuanto, a, os, as, used in the sense of 
iodo lo que, toda la que, todos los que, todas las que ; de quien 
(a pronoun relative) when it is used in the sense of one of 
the above pronouns ^l que, los que, 6^c, and finally, when the 
verb is governed by the adverb cuando, if these pronouns, 
and this adjective and adverb are themselves preceded by 
another verb expressing an action, which the remainder of 
the phrase causes to depend on choice or chance ; as, elige, 
pues, de estos dos partidos il que mas te agradare, choose 
then of these two measures that which will please thee 
most. — Tenemos ya dtterniinado hacer en ohsequio suyo todo 
Lo auE alcanzaren nutstras fuerzas, we have resolved to 
do in his behalf all that shall be in our power. — Solo po- 
drdn ser delincuentes, los que de vosotros nos juzgaren 
delincuentes, those only can be guilty, who, among you, shall 
judge us guilty, iliaw^/a, lo que g ust ares. ..r^enueva, a nues- 
tro buen ami^o mifino afecto, y a cuantos se acordaken- 
de mi, dirds de mi parte todo lo que quisieres, command 
what you please — renew to our good friend my sincere at- 
tachment, and say from me all that you plq^iSQ to all those 



VERBS. 77 

who shall remember me. (Padre de isla.) VmAeerd 
este libroy cuando quisiere^ you will read this book when you 
please. 

The compound tense of the future conjunctive follows 
the same rules. 

N. B. 1st. The present of the subjunctive may be used 
in almost every one of the above mentioned cases, instead 
of the future conjunctive. 

2d. After the conjunction si, if, the verb expressing a fu- 
ture action is most frequently put in the future conjunctive. 

OF THE CONDITIONAL. 

This mode has in the Spanish language three simple and 
three compound tenses, the terminations of which are in rfa, 
ra and se. We shall call the three first conditionals present^ 
and the three others conditionals past. 

The conditional present denotes that a thing would be, or 
would be done in the present time under certain conditions ; 
as, yo leeria, si tuviera or tuviese libros, I would read if I had 
books. 

The conditional past denotes that a thing would have been 
in a time past under certain conditions ; as, hubiera ido 
aijer a la comedian si hubiese estado bueno. I should have 
gone yesterday to the play, if I had been well. 

Rules for the use of the conditional tetises. 

Rule XLI. The first conditional, the termination of 
which is ria, may be used v/henever the verb is not governed 
by any conj;inction ; which is the case with one of the mem- 
bers in all conditional propositions ; as, leeria todo el dia, si 
mi existencia no dependiera or dependiese de mi trabajo, I 
should read the whole day, if my support did not depend 
upon my labour. Elnumero de lospohres noseria tan gran de^ 
si fuera or fuese menor tl de los avaros, the number of poor 
would not be so great, if that of misers were less considera- 
ble. 

RriLE XLII. The second conditional, the termination of 
which is ra, and the third which is terminated in se^ are used 



wmm 



78 VERBS. 

whenever the verb is governed by a conditional conjunction ; 
aSj siy if; shio, unless; aunque^ though ; bitn que, although ; 
dado quey granting that, &c. or by an interjection expressing 
a desire : Ex. Aunque hubiera or hubiese J3a2, though peace 
should take place. ; Ojald puera or fuese cierto ! Would 
to God it were certain ! If there be in the second member 
of these sentences, another conditional, we should make use 
of the first; as, Si hubiera, or hubiese 6z^ewa/^, seria 
mayor la solidez de los contratos. If there should be good 
faith, the solidity of contracts would be greater. 

Rule XLIII. The second conditional is used with ele- 
gance after the interrogative pronouns, when we use it with 
an exclamation, or to express surprise. Ex. Quien lo creye- 
RA? quien lo imaginara? who would believe it? who would 
imagine it? ^Sin el auxilio de laescritura^drgano de todas 
las ciencias, que hubiera en el mundo sino ignorancia ? with- 
out the aid of writing, the organ of all the sciences, what 
would there be in the world, but ignorance ? 

Rule XLIV. We use the second or third conditional 
after cuando, though, and after the pronouns ^l que, los que^ 
la que^ Sfc, and after cuanto, a, os, a.s, (mentioned in Rule XL. 
when speaking of the future conjunctive,) when they them- 
selves are preceded by a verb expressing an action, which 
the remainder of the phrase causes to depend on choice or 
chance ; as, le dige que iomase, en mi huerta todo lo que, 
or cuanto quisiera, I told him to take in my garden all 
that or whatever he should wish. Prometid darme el dint- 
TO QUE T/o NECESiTARA or NECESiTASE, he promised to give 
me the money that I might want. 

Rule XLV. When a conditional phrase does not begin 
with a conjunction ; such as, sz, aunque , luego que, &c., we 
may make use of the first and second conditional, and say ; 
forluna seria or fuera que Uoviese ; hueno seria or puera 
que lo mandasen. (Grammar of the Academy.) But in such 
a case if there should be another conditional in the second 
member of the phrase, this last must take the third termina- 
tion, as in the preceding examples. It is even necessary to 
observe that in general, when a phrase begins with the sec- 
ond conditional and the first cannot be applied to the second 



VERBS. 79 

member,* we must have recourse to the third, and not re- 
peat the second ; if, on the contrary, it begins with the 
third, we must, instead of repeating it in the second member, 
make use of the second ; as, obligado me viera yo sin duda 
a enmudecer, 6 me coxtentara con ser el debil eco de sus 
elevadas cldusulas, si los nuevos progresos de la Academia no 
ABRiESEN nuevo campo de asuntos al ingenio, no ofreciesen 
a la elocuencia nuevas mieses, S^'c. I should, without doubt, 
find myself obliged to keep silence, or content myself with 
being the feeble echo of his eloquent speeches, if the new 
progress of the Academy did not open to genius new sub- 
jects, and offer to eloquence new harvests, &c. 

N. B. 1st. Whenever the conditional is expressed by 
means of the conjunction sf, the verb that it governs is in 
English in the imperfect of the subjunctive, and this imper- 
fect is always tianslated in Spanish by one of the two con- 
ditionals, according to the rules stated above, when the con- 
junction expresses a future condition ; if on the contrary it 
expresses one already past, the verb is put in Spanish in the 
same tense as in English. Ex. Si yo fuera rico, socorreria 
a los pobres^ if I were rich I would assist the poor ; si 61 era 

* Though Rule XLV. be extracted and faithfully translated from 
the Grammar of the Spanish Academy, we think it might lead to er- 
ror, if we should not give it a little more clearness. We therefore 
observe, 1st. that a conditional phrase mustcontain two propositions; 
the one principal, and the other subordinate. We call a principal 
proposition that after which we place the conjunction, and a subor- 
dinate proposition that which is placed after the conjunction. 
Each of those propositions may contain several members. In this 
phrase ; seria recompensado, n fuera diligentey he would be rewarded, 
if he were diligent ; he would be rewarded \s the principal proposi- 
tion. In the following, seria recompensado y todos le estimariart, si 
estudiara con mas atencion y fuera mas amante de la verdad, he would 
be rewarded and every body would esteem him, if he should study 
with more attention and were more fond of truth ; each of these prop- 
ositions contains two members. 2d. that the Academy, in speaking 
of the second member, understands the whole subordinate proposition; 
for, if it contains several members, the same conditional must be 
used in each one of them ; it is the same with the principal proposi- 
tion, as is seen in the example stated in Rule XLV. obligado me viera, 
^^c, the first proposition of which terminates with these words, a sus 
elevadas clausulas^ and the second begins &t si los nuevos progresos. 
In the two members of the principal proposition, the verbs are in the 
second conditional, and in the subordinate proposition they are in the 
third. 



80 VEPvBS. 

pohre el ano pasado^ no era culpa mia^ if he was poor last year, 
it was not my fault. 

N. B. 2d. It must be seen by the preceding rules and ex- 
ample s^that the second conditional is frequently used to hold 
the place of the first and third ; for we may say indifferently^ 
eltiernpo pudiera or podria ser mejor ; hice que viniera or 
viNiESE. But it is not the same with the first and 
third ; they are so opposed that one cannot be used for 
the other. Therefore, to translate this phrase ; I should 
wish to go to Seville, we may say; yo querria or quisiera 
ir d Sevilla, but not yo quisiese ir a Se villa. 

The conditionals past follow the same rules a^ the condi- 
tionals present, and though the verb governed by the con- 
junction si should in English be in the pluperfect of the in- 
dicative, it must in Spanish be put in the second or third 
conditionals past. Ex. Si lo hubiera or hubiese sabido^ if 
I had known it, or had I known it. 

USE OF THE imperative. 

Rule XL VI. The use of this mode in Spanish is not 
entirely the same as in English. In the latter language, it 
serves not only to command, pray, and exhort, but also to 
forbid ; the Spaniards, on the contrary, express the prohibi- 
tion by means of the present of the subjunctive, and some- 
times by the future. Ex. No hahlesy do not speak; no me 
respondas, do not answer me ; 7io mates ; no maiards ; do 
not kill, thou shalt not kill. 

N. B. The^rs^ person plural of the imperative is always 
like the j^rs^ of the plural of the subjunctive present. 

USE OF THE subjunctive. 

This mode has four tenses, the present, the imperfect, the 
preterite and the pluperfect ; it expresses, as the indicative, 
the present^ past, and future. 

Rules for using the tenses of the subjunctive. 

As it is impossible to establish well defined rules to make 
known in a sure manner the use of the tenses of the subjunc- 
tive, we cannot pretend to determine every case in which 
we must make use of them ; but we will endeavour to es- 



VERBS. 81 

tablish rulesj which will obviate the greatest part of the diffi- 
culties. 

Rule XLVII. The verb that follows the conjunction que^ 
that ; must be put in the indicative, when the verb preceding 
it expresses affirmation in a direct, positive and independent 
manner ; but it must be put in the subjunctive when the 
preceding verb expresses doubt, surprise, fear, admiration, 
uncertainty, desire, hope, will, permission, prohibition and 
command. Thus we say ; se que Esxa malo, I know that he 
is sick ; los ateistas dicen que no hay Dios^ the atheists say 
that there is no God ; because the verb se and dicen express 
a direct and positive affirmation. But we must say ; no creo 
or dudo que este malo, I do not believe or I doubt that he 
is sick. Los ateistas quieren que no haya Dios^ the atheists 
wish that there may not be a God. Deseo que venga^ I do- 
sire that he may come. Jle admiro que no haya llegadoy I 
am surprised that he is not arrived ; because in these phra- 
ses the verbs preceding the conjunction express a doubt, 
desire or surprise. 

N. B. After Ojald^ God grant, an adverb always expres- 
sing a desire, the verb is put in the subjunctive. 

Rule XL VIII. The relatives que^ quien^ cuyo, a^-oSj-as^ 
govern the subjunctive, when the phrase is interrogative or 
negative, or when it expresses a doubt, desire or condition. 
Ex. No conozco una sola muger, cuya alma sea mas sensible 
que la de la senora N., I do not know a woman whose soul is 
more sensible than that of Madam N. 

Remark. See, 1st. the N. B. in continuation of the rules 
relative to the use of the tenses of the future conjunctive and 
the rules that relate to it, (page 77th ;) the rules relative to 
the use of the tenses of the conditional ; and 3d. under the 
head of conjunctions, those that govern the subjunctive. 

OP THE PERSONS AND NUMBERS OF VERBS. 

Yerbs have three persons. The pronouns personal are 
their characteristics. The first person is that which speaks ; 
as, yo amo^ nosotros or nosotras amamos, I love, we love. 
The second person is that to whom we speak ; as, tu amas^ 
vosotros or vosoti^as amaisy thou lovest, you love. The third 
person is that of whom we speak ; as, e^ or ella ama, ellos or 
ellas aman^ he or she loves, they love. 

In ancient authors, the termination of the second person 



S2 VERBS. 

of the plural is in des^ instead of is. Thus, they said and 
wrote amades, amaredes, S^c. instead of amais, amariis, Sfc. 

The verbs have both numbers ; the singular is used when 
the verb has only a single person or thing for its nominative; 
as, j/o, tijy 6ly ella ; and the plural, when it has many ; as. 
nosotros or nosotras, vosotros or vosoiras, ellos or ellas. 

N. B. It is not the same with the Spanish language as 
with the English and French^ in which the verb must always 
be preceded by the pronoun that governs it. In Spanish, as 
in Latin, the terminations generally distinguish the persons, 
consequently the pronouns are generally suppressed. We 
use them with advantage to add energy to the expression, as 
in these examples; tii lo has hecho—'I It is thou who hast 

done it ! yo lo mando, it is I who order it ; tu jies t yo 

iioTGj thou laughest and I weep ; tu no quieres hacerlo ; 
pues lo hart j/o, thou wilt not do it ; well, I shall do it. 

CONJUGATIONS. 

The Spanish language, as we have already said, has but 
three conjugations, which are known by the termination of 
the infinitive. The first has the infinitive terminated in ar ; 
as, am-ar, to love ; the second in er ; as, tem-er, to fear ; 
the third in ir ; as, sub-ir, to go up. It has besides three 
auxiliary verbs, which are so called because they serve to 
conjugate the other verbs in their compound tenses. These 
auxiliary verbs are haber and tenei\ to have ; and ser, to be. 
In conjugating the latter, we add to it estar, an irregular 
verb, translated by the same English verb, to 6e, being of 
such great use, that it is proper to study it, as soon as the 
auxiliary verbs are learnt. 

Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Haber, to have.^ 

INFINITIVE. 

Present. - Haber, - - to have. 

Preterite, - Haber habido, - to have had. 

Gerund. - Habiendo, - - . having. 

Participle, - Habido, - - had, 

* This verb was used formerly as active, to express possession ; 
and in this last acceptation it had the following imperative ; habe tu. 
(now out of use) hay a e/, hdyamos nosotros^ habed vosotros, hay an ellos. 
Now the verb haber is seldom used but as an auxiliary or as au im- 
personal. See its conjugation for this last acceptation. 



VERBS. 



S3 





INDICATIVE. 






Present. 




Yo he, 


- 


. 


I have, 


Tu has, 


- 


. 


thou hast. 


El ha, 


. 


. 


he has. 


Nosotros heiiios,orhabemos. 


- 


we have. 


Vosotros habeis,* - 


. 


. 


you have. 


Ellos han, 


- 


- 


they have. 




Imperfect, 




Yo habia,+ - 


. 


. 


I had. 


Tu habias, - 


. 


„ 


thou hadst. 


El habia, 


. 


. 


he had. 


Nosoti'os habiamos, 


- 


- 


we had. 


Vosotros habiais, - 


_ 


. 


you had. 


Ellos habian, 


- 


- 


they had. 




Preterite definite. 




Yo hube, 


. 


_ 


I had. 


Tu hubiste, - 


. 


_ 


thou hadst. 


El hubo. 


- 


. 


he had. 


Nosotros hubimos, 


- 


. 


we had. 


Vosotros hubisteis, 


_ 


.. 


you had. 


Ellos hubieron, 


- 


- 


they had. 




Preterite 


indefinite. 




Yo he habido. 


. 


. 


I have had. 


Tu has habido, 


. 


- 


thou hast had. 


El ha habido, 


. 


- 


he has had. 


Nosotros hemos habido, - 


. 


ice have had. 


Vosotros habeis habido, - 


. 


you have had. 


Ellos han habido, - 


- 


- 


they have had. 




Preterite anterior. 




Yo hube habido, 


_ 


_ 


I had had. 


Tu hubiste habido, 


- 


- 


thou hadst had. 



* See page 81, what we hare said on the termination of the second 
person plural in ancient authors. 

t The observation in regard to ia, (page 23,) will do for natives 
who are habitually speaking their language ; but to save to the teach- 
er and learner a gread deal of trouble, we shall use the acute accent 
upon the i throughout the conjugations, whea ia do not form a diph- 
^honof. 



M 



Vf:RBS. 



El hubo habido, - - - - 
Nosotros hubimos habido, 
Vosotros hubisteis habido, 

EUos hubieron habido, - - 

Pluperfect. 

Yo habia habido, - - . 

Tu habias habido, - - - 

El habia habido, - - . . 
Nosotros habiamos habido, 
Vosotros habiais habido, 

Ellos habian habido, - - _ 

Future absolute, 

Yo habre, - - - - - 

Tu habras, - - - - - 

El habr4, - - - - - 

Nosotros habremos, - - - 

Vosotros habreis, - - - 

Ellos habran, - - - - 

Future anterior, 

Yo habre habido, - - - - 

Tu habras habido, - - - 

El habra habido, - - - 

Nosotros habremos habido, 
Vosotros habreis habido, 

Ellos habr^n habido, - - - 



he had had, 
we had had, 
you had had. 
they had had. 

1 had had. 
thou hadst had. 
he had had, 
we had had. 
you had had. 
they had had. 

I shall have, 
thou wilt have, 
he will have, 
we shall have, 
you will have, 
they will have. 

1 shall have had. 
thou wilt have had. 
he will have had, 
we shall have had. 
you will have had. 
they will have had. 



Si or cuando, 
Yo hubiere, 
Tu hubieres. 
El hubiere, - 
Nosotros hubieremos, 
Vosotros hubiereis, 
Ellos hubieren, 



Future conjunctive simple. 

If or whetiy 



I have or shall have, 
thou wilt have, 
he ivill have, 
vm shall have, 
you will have, 
they will have. 



Future conjunctive compound. 
Si or cuando, .... If or 7/)hen^ 

Yo hubiere habido, - - . / j^^ve had. 

Tu hubieres habido, - - . thou wilt have had. 
El hubiere habido, - - - he 7mll have had. 



VERBS. 



85 



Nosotros hubi6remos habido, - 
Vosotros hubiereis habido, 
Ellos hubieren habido, - 



we slmll have had. 
you will have had. 
they will have had. 



CONDITIONALS. 



First conditional -present. 

I should have. 



thou iDouldst have, 
he would have, 
we would have, 
you would have, 
they ivould have. 



Yo habria, 
Tu habrias, - 
El habria, 

Nosotros habriamos, 
Vosotros habriais, 
Ellos habrian, 

Second and third conditionals present. 
Si, or cuando, - - - ^ or though^ 

Yo hubiera or hubiese, - - J had or should have. 
Tu hubieras or hubieses, - thou wouldst have. 
El hubiera or hubiese, - - he woidd have. 
Nosotros hubieramoSjOr hubiesemos, we had or should have. 
Vosotros hubierais or hubieseis, you had or would have. 
Ellos hubieran or hiibiesen, - they would have. 

First conditional past. 



Yo habria habido, 
Tu habrias habido. 
El habria habido, 
Nosotros habriamos habido, 
V^osotros habriais habido, 
Ellos habrian habido, 



I shorild have had. 
thou wouldst have had. 
he would have had. 
we should have had. 
you would have had, 
they would have had. 

Second and third conditionals past. 



Si, or cuando, - 
Yo hubiera, or hubiese, ] 
Tu hubieras, or hubieses, 
Ei hubiera, or hubiese, 
Nosotros hubieramos, or 

hubiesemos, - ^"^ -< 

Vosotros hubierais, or ^ 

hubieseis, 
Ellos hubieran, or hubi- 

esen, 
'8. 



If or though^ 
^ I had o r should have 1 
thou jvouldst have 
he would have 



we had or should have 
you would have 
they ivouM have 



r 



m 



S6 



VERBS. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



Yo haya, 
Tu hayas. 
El haya, 

Nosotros hiyamos, 
Vosotros h^yaisj 
Ellos hayan, 

Yo hubiese^ 
Tu hubieses, 
El hubiese, 
Nosotros hubiesemos, 
Vosotros hubieseis, 
Ellos hubiesen, - 



I may liaise, 
thou mayst have, 
he may have, 
we may have, 
you may have, 
they may have. 



Imperfect. 



Preterite. 



I might have, 
thou might est ^ have > 
he might have, 
loe might have, 
you might have, 
they might have. 



Yo haya habido, 
Tu hayas habido, 
El haya habido, 
Nosotros hayamos habido, 
Vosotros hayais habido, 
Ellos hayan habido, 



Pluperfect. 



Yo hubiese habido, 
Tu hubieses habido. 
El hubiese habido, 
Nosotros hubiesemos habido, 
Vosotros hubieseis habido, ■ 
Ellos hubiesen habido, 



I may have had. 
thou mayst have had. 
he may have had. 
we may have had. 
you may have had. 
they may have had, 

I might have had. 
thou might est have had. 
he might have had. 
we might have had. 
you might hove had. 
they might have had. 



Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Teneu, to have^ 
to hold 9 to possess.-'^' 



Present. 
Preterite, 
Gerund. 
Participle. 



INFINITIVE. 

Tener, 

Haber tenido, 
Tenieiido, - 
Tenido, 



- to have J to possess. 
" to have had. 

- having. 

- had. 



* This verb is auxiliary and active. As auxiliary it is seldom 
used. As aclive it denotes possession, and must always be used to 



VERBS. 



sr 



Yo teiigo, 
Tu tienesj 
El tiene, 

Nosotros tenemos, 
Vosotros teneisj 
Ellos tienen, 

Yo tenia, 
Tu teniasj 
El teniaj 

Nosotros teniamos, 
Vosotros tenlaiSj 
Ellos tenian, 



Yo tuve, - 
Tu tuviste. 
El tuvo, 

Nosotros tuvimos, 
Vosotros tuvisteis, 
Ellos tuvierorij - 



Yo he tenidoj * 
Tu has tenido, - 
El ha tenido, 
Nosotros hemos tenido, 
Vosotros habeis tenido, 
Ellos han tenido. 



Imperfect, 



INDICATIVE. 

Pi^esent. 

- - J have, or j^ossess. 
thou hast, 
he has. 
we have, 
you have, 
they have. 

I had. or did possess. 

thou hadst. 

he had. 

loe had. 

you had. 

they had. 

Preterite definite. 

I had, or possessed, 
thou hadst. 

- - - Ae had. 

- ' ' toe had. 

- - - you had. 

they had. 

Preterite indefinite. 

1 have hadjOT possessed 
thou hast had. 

- - Ae has had. 
we have had. 
you have had. 
they have had. 



Preterite anterior. 



Yo hube tenido, 
Tu hubiste tenido, 
El hubo teiiido, 



I had had,or possessed, 
thou hadst had. 
he had had. 



translate the verb to have when this verb is not auxiliary. We say, 
he leido el libro ; I have read the book : but we must say, tengo un 
librOy I have a book ; because in the first example the verb io have 
is auxiliary to the verb to ready and in the second it is active and 
^enot^s possession 



88* VERBS. 

Nosotros hubimos tenidoj - - ive Jiad had, 

Vosotros hubisteis tenido, - - i/ou had had, 

Ellos hubieron teiiido, - - thci/ had had. 

Pluperfect, 

Yo habia tenido^ - - - 1 had had^or possessed, 

Tu habias tenido, - - - thou hadst had. 

El habia tenido, - - - /^e had had, 

Nosotros habiamos tcnidoj - - ive had had, 

Vosotros habiais tenido, - - you had had, 

Ellos habiaii tenido^ - - - they had had. 

Future absolute, 

Yo tendre, ^ - - - I shall have ^or possess, 

Tu tenbras, - - - - thou loilt have. 

El tendra, -^ - - - Ae will have, 

Nosotros tendremos^ - - ^^Je shall have, 

Vosotros tendreis; - - you will have, 

Ellos tendran, - - - they will have. 

Future anterior, 

Yo habre tenidoj - - - J shall have hady or 

possessed, 

Tii habras tenido, . - - thou loilt have had. 

El habra tenido, - - - he will have had, 

Nosotros habremos tenido, - we shall have had, 

Vosotros habreis tenido, - - you will have had. 

Ellos habrdn tenido, - - they will have had. 

Future conjunctive simple, 

Sij or cuandoj - - - X^? or if^hen, 

Yo tiiviere, - - - - I have, or possess, 

Tu tuvieres^ - - - - thou shalt have. 

El tuviere, - « . . fie shall have, 

Nosotros tuvieremosj - - lue shall have. 

Vosotros tuviereis^ - - you will have, 

Ellos tuviereiij ... they will have. 
Future conjunctive compound. 

Si, or en and o, - - -(/? or when^ 

Yo hubiere tenido, - - J Itave had, 

Tu hubieres tenidoj - - thou wilt have had. 

El hubiere tenidoj - - - Ae will have had. 

Nosotros hubieremos tenido, - toe shall have had. 

Vosotros hubiereis tenido, - you will have had. 

Ellos bubieren tenidoj - they will have had* 



VEKBS* 



89 



Yo tendria, 
Tu tendrlas. 
El tendria, 
Nosotros tendriamoSj 
Vosotros tendriaisj 
Ellos tendrian, 



CONDITIONALS. 

First condilional present. 

I should hCiV^j or posscf>.s. 
- - - thou lOQuldst have. 

he woidd hr,ve, 

we should have. 

you would^ave. 

they loould have. 



Second and third conditionals present. 

If, or though J 
I should have, 
thou shouldst have, 
he should have. 



Sij or cuando, 
Yo tuviera, or tuviese, 
Tu tuvieras, or tuvieses, 
El tuviera, or tuviese, 
Nosotros tuvieramos, or tuvi- 

esemos, - - - 

Vosotros tuvieraiSjOr tuvieseisj 



Ellos tuvieraiij or tiiviesen 



we should have, 
you should have, 
they should have. 



First conditional past. 

- - I should have had. 

thou wouldst have had. 
he would have had. 
we should have had. 
you icould have had. 
they would have had. 

Second and third condiiioncds past. 



Yo habria tenido, 
Tu habrias tenido. 
El liabria tenido, 
Nosotros habriamos tenidoj 
Vosotros h?.briais tenido, 
Ellos habrian tenido. 



Si, or cuando, - 
Yo bubiera, or hubiese, ^ 
Ta hubierascor hubieses, 
El habiera, or hubiese, 
Nosotros hubieramosj or 

hubiesemos, - )> 

Vosotros hubierais, or 

hubieseis, 
Ellos hubieraii. or bubi- 

esen, 



If, or though, 
^ I had, or should have 
thou icouldst have 
he tcould have 

<( ice should have 

you would have 

[they icould have 



") 



f^^ 
. ^ 



90 



VERBS. 



Ten tu,^ 
Tenga el, 
Tengamos nosotroSj 
Tened vosotrosj* 
Teiigan ellos^, 



Yo teDga, 
Tu tengasj 
El tenga, 

Nosotros tengamos, 
Vosotros tengais, 
Ellos tengan, 



Yo tuviese, 
Tu tuvieses, 
El tiiviese, 
Nosotros tuviesemos, 
Vosotros tuvieseis, 
Eilos tuviesen, 



IMPERATIVE. 

Present or future, 

have thoUy or possess, 
let him have, 
let us have, 
have you J or ye. 
let them have. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present, 



Imperfect 



1 may have, or possess, 
thou mayst have, 
he may have, 
we may have, 
you may have, 
they may have. 

I might have, or possess, 
thou 7nightest have, 
he might have, 
we might have, 
you might have, 
they might have. 



Preterite. 
Yo haya tenido, - - I may f^ci^e had. 

Tu hayas tenido, - - thou mayst have had. 

El haya tenido, - - he may have had. 

Nosotros hayamos tenido, - u-e may have had, 
Vosotros hayais tenido, - you may have had. 



Ellos hayan tenido, 

Yo hubiese tenido, 
Tu hubieses tenido, 
El hubiese tenido, 



they may have had. 



Pluperfect. 



I might have had, 
thou mightest have had, 
he might have had. 



^ In all the verbs, the 2d person, singular and plural, of the imper- 
ative, takes the termination of the 2d person, sin^. and plur. of the 
present subjunctive, when used with a negation. Ex. Have ihou not. 
no tengas. Have ye notj no tengais. 



VERBS. 



91 



Nosotros hubiesemos tenido, 
Vosotros hubieseis tenidoj 
Ellos hubiesen tenido. 



we might have had. 
you might have had. 
they might have had. 



Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Ser', and Estar, 
meaiwisr also to be. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present, Ser, estar, to be. 

Preterite, Haber sido, haber estado, to have been. 

Gerund, Siendoj estando, being. 

Participle. Sido, '^ estado, been. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 



Yo soy, or 


estoy, 


- 


I am. 


Tu eres, 


estas. 


- 


thou art. 


El es, 


esta. 


- 


he is. 


Nosotros somos, 


estamos, 


- 


we are. 


Vosotros sois, 


estais, 


- 


you are. 


Ellos son. 


estan, 


- 


they are. 




Imperfect. 




Yo era, or 


estaba, 


- 


I urns. 


Tu eras, 


estabas, 


-. 


thou wast. 


El era, 


estaba, 


- 


he was. 


Nosotros eramos. 


estabamos. 


- 


we tcere. 


Vosotros erais, 


estabais, 


-. 


you were. 


Ellos eran, 


estabaD, 


- 


they were. 




Preterite 


defivnite. 




Yo fui, or 


estuve, 


_ 


I was. 


Tu fuiste, 


estuviste, 


» » 


thou wast. 


El fue, 


estuvo, 


« _ 


he was. 


Nosotros fuimos, 


estuvimos. 


« 


we were. 


Vosotros fuisteis. 


estuvisteis, 


. . 


you were, 
they were. 


Ellos fueron, 


estuvieron. 


- 




Preterite indefinite. 




Yo he sido, 


or estado. 


- • 


I have been. 


Tu has sido. 


estado. 


« « 


thou hast been 


El ha sido. 


estado, 


- - 


he has been. 



92 



VERBS. 



Nosotros hemos sido, 


estado. 


ive have been. 


Vosotros habeis sido, 


estado. 


you have been. 


Ellos han sido, 


estado. 


they have been. 


Preterite anterior. 




Yo hube sido, or 


estado, 


I had been. 


Tu hubiste sido, 


estado. 


thou hadst been. 


El hubo sido, 


estado. 


he had been. 


Nosotros hubimos sido 


, estado. 


we had been. 


Vosotros hubisteis sido 


, estado. 


you had been. 


Ellos hubieron sido, 


estado, 


they had been. 




Pluperfect, 


/ 


Yo habia sido, or 


estado, 


I had been. 


Tu habias sido, 


estado. 


thou hadst been 


El habia sido. 


estado, 


he had. been. 


Nosotros habiamos sido,estado. 


we had been. 


Vosotros habiais sido, 


estado. 


you had been. 


Ellos habian sido, 


estado. 
Future absolute. 


they had been. 


Yo serCj or 


estare. 


I shall be. 


Tu ser^s. 


estaras. 


thou wilt be. 


El sera. 


estara. 


he 2vill be. 


Nosotros seremos. 


estaremos, - 


we shall be. 


Vosotros sereis, 


estareis. 


you will be. 


Ellos seran. 


estaran. 
Future anterior. 


they will be. 



Yo habre sido, or estado, 
Tu habras sido, estado. 

El habra sido, estado, 

Nosotros habremos sido,estado, 
Vosotros habreis sido, estado, 
Ellos habran sido, estado, 

Future conjunctive 

Si, or cuando, 
Yo fuere, or 



I shall ahve been, 
thou ivilt have been 
he will have been, 
we shall have been, 
you will have been, 
they will have been.. 



simple. 



estuviere, 

estuvieres, 
estuviere, 



Tu fueres, 

El fuere, 

Nostros fueremoSjestuvieremos, 

Vosotros fuereis, estuviereis, 

Ellos fueren, estuvieren, 



If^ or lolien^ 
I be J or shall be. 
thou unit be. 
he ivill be. 
ice shall be. 
you zmll be. 
they will be. 



VERBS. 



93 



Future conjunctive 
Si, or ciiando, 
Yo hubiere sido, or estado, 
Tu hubieres sido, estado, 

El hubiere sido, estado, 

Nosotros hubieremos sido.estado, 
Vosotros liubiereis sido, estado, 
EUos hubieren sido, estado, 



compound. 

If, or loJien^ 
I have been, 
thou wilt have been, 
he icill hace been, 
ice shall have been, 
you icill have beta, 
they icill have been. 



CONDITIONALS. 

First conditional present, 
Yo seria, or estaria, - I should be. 

Tu serias, estarias, - thou tcouldsi be. 

El seria, estarla, - he would be, 

Nosotros seriamosj estariamos, - we should be. 

Vosotros seriais, estariais, you icould be, 

Ellos serian, estarian, they icould be. 

Second and third conditionals present. 

Si, or cuando, 
Yo fuera or fuese^ 
Tu fueras or fueses. 
El fuera or fuese, 
Nosotros fueramos or fu- 

esemos, 
Vosotros fuerais or fueseis, 
Ellos fueran or fuesen. 



1 



estuviera or estiiviese, 
estuvieras or estuvieses, 
estu\^era or estuviese, 
estuvieramos or estuviese- J> l:;^ 

mos, 
estuvierais or estuvieseis, 
estuvieran or estuviesen, 3 ^r- © 



Yo habrla side, or 



First conditional past. 



estado 
Tu iiabrias sido, estado. 

El habrla sido, estado, 

Nosotros liabriamos sido, estado, 
Vosotros habriais sido, estado, 
Ellos habrian sido, estado. 

Second and third conditionals past 
Si, or cuando, 
Yo hubiera, or hubiese sido, or 



I should have been, 
thou icouldst have been, 
he icould have been, 
ice should have been, 
you icould have been, 
they would have beeiu 



Tu hubieras, or hubieses sido^ 
El hubiera. or hubiese sido, 
Nosotros hubieramos, or hubiesemossido, 
Vosotros hubierais, or hubieseis sido, 
Ellos hubierau. or hubiesen sido, 



estado, 
estado, 
estado, 
estado, 
estado, 
estado. 



•5 2 

> S -=* . 

2 *^ «^ 



1 5*>, *3 w 



94 



VERBS. 



or 



Se tu. 
Sea elj* 

Seamos nosotroSj 
Sfed vosotroSj 
Sean eilosj* 



IMPERATIVE. 

Present or future. 
esta tU; 
este el,* 

estemos nosotros, 
estad vosotroSj 
esten ellos,* 



he thou, 
let him he, 
let us he. 
he you. 
let them 6e. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



or 



este, 
estes. 



Yo sea, 

Tu seas, 

El sea, este, 

Nosotros seamos, estemos, 

Vosotros seals, esteis, 

Ellos sean, esten, 



Yo fuese, or 
Tu fueses. 
El fuese, 

Nosotros fuesemos, 
Vosotros fueseis, 
Ellos fuesen, 



Imperfect. 
estuviese, 
estuvieses, 
estuviese, 
estuviesemos, 
estuvieseis, 
estuviesen, 



- I may he^ 

- thou mayst be. 

- he may be. 

- we may he. 

- you may be, 

- they may he. 

- I might he. 

- thou mightest be. 

- he might be. 

- we might be. 

- you might be. 

- they might be. 



or 



Yo haya sido. 
Tu hayas sido. 
El haya sido, 
Nosotros hayamos sido, 
Vosotros hiyais sido, 
Ellos bayan sido, 



Preterite. 

estad o, J may have been^ 

estado, thou mayst have been. 

estado, he may have been. 

estado, ice may have been. 

estado, you may have been. 

estado, they may have been. 



Yo hubiese sido, 

Tu bubieses sido, estado, 

El bubiese sido, estado, 

Nosotros bubiesemos sido, estado, 
Vosotros bubieseis sido, estado, 
Ellos hubiesen sido. 



Pluperfect. 
or estado, I might have been. 

thou mightest have been, 
he might have been, 
we might have been, 
you might have been, 
they might have been. 



estado. 



* Sea vm., be you, sing. — Sean vms., be you, plural. — and so on 
me the third person in polite style in all the tenses of all the verbs» 



VERBS. 95 

Exiles on the verbs Ser and Estar. 

Rule XLIX. The verb to be cannot be translated ia 
Spanish indifferently by ser or by esta7\ Ser^ joined to an 
adjective, gives it sometimes an entirely different meaning 
from that which estar would give it. It is consequently 
necessary to understand well the use of these two verbs. 
We observe then, that w^e must use the verb ser whenever 
we speak of qualities essential to the subject ; of qualities 
relating to the mind or to the heart ; whenever we speakbf 
an art, a dignity, an employment, a trade, &:c. or of the di- 
mensions of an object ; and finally for the conjugation of 
the passive verbs. Ex. Soy hombre^ I am a man ; somos 
mortales, we are mortal ; son buenas gentes, they are good 
people ; son instruidos^ they are learned ; sois prudenteSy 
you are prudent ; eran caritativos^ they w^ere charitable ; 
ser alto, ckico, gordo, Jlaco, to he tall, shorty fat, lean ; ser 
rey, primer ministro^ general, juez, sastre, zapatero, &;c. to 
be a king, prime minister, a general, a judge, a tailor, a 
shoe-maker, &c. ; ser amado, aborrecido, &c. to be loved, 
hated, &c. 

We make use, on the contrary, of estar whenever we 
speak of the state of health, of being in any place, of an 
emotion or of a sudden and transient sensation. Ex. Estar 
bueno 6 malo, to be well or ill ; estar en casa^ en el jar din, en 
el campo, to be at home, in the garden, in the country ; estar 
enfadado, to be offended. 

Nevertheless, in the following examples and other similar 
ones, we can make use of ser or of estar indifferently ; ser 
or estar del mismo parecer, to be of the same opinion ; ser 
corregidor or estar de corregidor en Madrid, to be corregi- 
dor at Madrid. We must however observe in the second 
example, if we make use of estar, this verb must be follow- 
ed by tho particle de, for, estar corregidor, alcalde, would 
not be Spanish. 

N. B. Ser bueno^ ser vialo, signifies to be good, to be 
bad ; estar bueno, estar malo, signifies to be well or ill ; 
estar iiiejor, to be better, to be better in health ; estar peor^ 
to be more sick, to be worse. 

Rule L. — The verb estar is often used as iti English 
to be, before another verb to signify in a more positive man- 
ner that an action is doing, has been done, or will be done, 
ai the very moment in which we speak or of which we 



96 



VERBS. 



speak ; and then the verb which follows is put in the ger- 
und. Ex. Estd escrihiendoj he writes, that is, he is writing ; 
estabti escribiendo^ he wrote, that is, he was writing ^ 
entonces estardn ' escrihiendo^ they will write then, that is, 
they will then be w^riting. 

A GENERAL SCHEME OF THE TERxMINATIONS OP REGULAR 
VERBS IN THEIR SIMPLE TENSES. 

The figures 1^ 2, 3, signify the first ^ second^ and third 
conjugations. 

All the regular verbs of each conjugation, are easily con- 
jugated by changing the terminations ar^ er, ir^ of the infin- 
itive into those expressed as follows. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Present. 

1. ar, 



er, 



Gei-und. Participle. If there is an active Part. 

ando, ado, ante, 

iendo, ido, iente or yente.* 



2. 

3. 



3. 

1. 

2. 



y«? 



Singular, 
tu. 



1 . aba, 
2.' 



ia, 



are. 



2. ere, 



ire, 



as, 



es, 



aste, 
iste, 

aras, 
eras, 
iras, 



INDICATIVE. 

Present, 



el 
a. 



Plural. 
nosotros, vosotros. 



amos, 
emos. 



iraos, 



abas, aba. 
ias, ia. 



lamos, 



Preterite definite. 



amos, 



imos. 



o. 

io. 

Future absolute, 
ara. aremos, 

era. eremos, 

ira. iremos, 



ais, 
eis, 



,, is, 

Imperfect, 

abamos, ^bais 



lais, 



asteis, 
Isteis, 



are is, 
ereis, 
ireis. 



ellos. 
an. 
en. 
en. 

aban. 
ian. 

aron. 
ieron, 

aran. 
eran. 
iran. 



* See 5th and 6th observations preceding the Conjugation of the 
Irregular Verbs. 



1. 

2.; 



ai-e. 



lere, 



\ERBS. 

Future conjunctive simple. 



ares, 
ieres, 



are. 
iere. 



aremos^ 



lerenios. 



^reis, 
iereis, 



9? 



aren. 
ieren. 



S. 

1. 

3. < 



■ lese, 






CONDITIONALS. 

First conditional present. 



1. 


aria, 


arias. 


aria. 


ariamos, 


ariais, 


2. 


eria, 


erias, 


eria. 


eriamos, 


eriais. 


3. 


iria, 


iras, 


iria. 


irlamos, 


iriais, 






Second and third contitionah pi 


^esent. 


1. 


ara. 


aras, 


ara. 


^ramos, 


drais. 


2. 
3. 


> iera, 


ieras, 


iera. 


ieramos, 


ierais, 


1. 


ase. 


ases, 


ase. 


^semos, 


aseis, 






ase, 



■ lese, 



leses, 



e. 
a. 



lese. 



lesemos, leseis, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

eraos, 
amos, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Pre.se «^ 



ad, 
Sed, 



Singular. 
tu, 
es. 



ariaD. 
erian. 
ii'ian. 



arau. 
ieran. 
asen. 
iesen, 



en. 
an. 
an. 



el. 
e. 



Plural 
nosotros, vosotros, ellos. 



emos. 



ases, 



leses, 



Imperfect, 
ase. asemos, 



eis. 
ais, 



aseis. 



lese. 



lesemos, leseis, 



en. 
an. 



a^en. 
iesen. 



PARADIGMS OF THE THREE €()>' JUGATIOXS, 

First conjugation in ar, 

INFINITIVE. 

Fresent, Ani-ar, - - - to Jove, 

Preterite, Haber amado, » - to hare lojccL 

9 



98 



VERBS. 



Gei^und. Amando, 


- 


loving. 


Participle. Amado, 


INDICATIVE. 

Present. 


loved. 


Yo amoj 


. . - 


I love, or do love 


Tu amas, 


. 


thou lovest. 


El ama. 


- . - 


he loves. 


Nosotros araamos, - 


- . - 


ice love. 


Vosotros amais, 


... 


you love. 


Ellos aman, - 


Imperfect. 


they love* 


Yo amaba, - 


. 


I did, love. 


Tu amabas, 


. . - 


thou didst love. 


El amaba, - 


. . - 


he did love. 


Nosotros amibamos, 


... 


we did love. 


Vosotros am^bais, 


. . - 


you did love. 


Ellos amaban;, 


- 


they did love. 


Preteinte definite. 




Yo ame. 


... 


I loved. 


Tii amaste, - 


... 


thou lovedst. 


El amo. 


- 


he loved. 


Nosotros amamos^ 


- 


7ve loved. 


Vosotros amasteisj 


. . - 


you loved. 


Ellos amaron, 


. 


they loved. 


Preterite indefinite. 




Yo he amado, 


... 


1 have loved. 


Tu has amado^ 


... 


thou hast loved. 


El ha amado. 


... 


he has loved. 


Nosotros hemos amado, 


. 


we have loved. 


Vosotros habeis amado, 


. 


you have loved. 


Ellos hail amado, 


- 


they have loved. 


Preterite anterior. 




Yo hube ainado, - 


... 


I had loved. 


Tu hubiste amado, 


... 


tliou hadst loved. 


El hubo amadoj 


... 


he had loved. 


Nosotros hubimos am ado, 


we had loved. 


Vosotros hnbisteis amado. 


you had loved. 


Ellos hubieron amado. 


- 


they had loved. 



VERBS. 

Plyperfect. 

Yo habia amado, - - I had loved. 

Tu hablas amado, - - thou hadst lovexL 

El habia amado, - - - he had loved. 

Nosotros habiamos amado, - ive had loved. 

Vosotros habiais amado, - you had loved. 

EUos habian amado^ - - tfieij had loved. 

Future absolute. 

Yoamare, .... I shall love. 

Tu amarasj . - - - thou wilt love. 

El amaraj . . . - /^e icill love. 

Nosotros amaremos, - - we shall love. 

Vosotros amareis, - - - you will love. 

Eilos amaran, ... they icill love. 

Future anterior. 

Yo habre amado, ... J shall have loved. 

Tu habras amadoj - - thou wilt have loved. 

El habra amado, - - - /ie will have loved. 

Nosotros habremos amado, - we shall have loved. 

Vosotros babreis amado^ - you will have loved. 

£llos habr^n amado, - - they will have loved. 

Future conjunctive simple. 

Si, or cuandoj If, or tohen, 

Yo amare, - - - - J love, or shall lov^. 

Tu amares, - - - - thou loilt love. 

El am are, - - - - Ae mill love. 

Nosotros ainaremos, - - we shall love. 

Vosotros amareis, .... you will love. 

Ellos amareu, . - ^ they will love^ 

Future conjunctive compound. 

Si, or cuando, If. or when, 

Yo hubiere amado, - - 7 have loved. 

Tu hubieres amado, - - thou wilt have loved. 

El hubiere amado, - - he will have loved. 

Nosotros hubieremos amado, - we shall have loved. 

Vosotros hubiereis amado, - you will have loved. 

EJlos hubieren amado, - they icill have loved. 



99 



100 



VERBS. 



CONDITIONALS. 

First conditional present, 
Yoamaria, - - - - I should love, 
Tu amarias, - - - - thou icouldst love. 
El amaria, - - - - Ae icoidd love, 
Nosotros amariamoSj ^ - we should love, 
Vosotros amarlais, - - you would love. 

EUos amarianj - - - they would love. 
Second and third conditionals present. 



Si, or cuando, 


If, or though, 


Yo amara or aniase, 


I should love. 


Tu amaras amases, - 


thou wouldst love. 


El amara amase. 


he would love. 


Nosotros amaramos atiiasemos,, 


we should love. 


Vosotros amarais amaseis, - 


you would love. 


Elios araaran amasen, - 


they would love. 


First conditional past. 


Yo habria amado, 


i should have loved. 


Tu habrias aniado, 


thou wouldst have loved. 


El habria amado, 


he would have loved. 


Nosotros habriamos amado, 


we should have loved. 


Vosotros habriais amado, 


you would have loved. 


EUos habrian amado, - 


they would have loved* 


Second and third conditionals past. 


Sij or cuando, 


1 C'^S 


Yo hubiera, or hiibiese 








Tu hubieras, hubieses 




o 


^.-^^ 


El hiibiera, hubiese 




r ^ < $ ^ S 


Nosotros hubieramosj hubiesemos 


S 2 ^ 


Vosotros hubieraisj hubieseis 




fe^*^^ 


Ellos hubieran, hubiesen 




\ ISJI 


IMPERATIVE. 


Present or future. 


Amatu,* - . - . 


loi^e thou. 


Ame el, - - - - 


let him love. 



* Verbs in the. imperative require the pronouns governed after 
them, when used affirmatively and before them, as usual, when used 
negatively ; Ex. Love me, amame ; do not love me, no me ames ; 
llerev^e us, recibid nos ; do not receive us, no nos recibais. 



VERBS* 



Wl 



Amemos nosotros, 
Amad vosotroSj 
Amen elloS;, 



Yo arae, 
Tu ames, 
El ame, 

Nosotros amemos, 
Vosotros ameis, 
Ellos amen, 

Yo amase, 
Tu amases, 
El amase, 
Nosotros am^semos, 
Vosotros am^seis, 
Ellos amasen. 



let us love, 

love ye. 

let them love. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



Imperfect. 



Preterite. 



Yo haya amado, 
Tu hay as amado. 
El haya amado, 
Nosotros hayamos amado, 
Vosotros hayais amado^ 
Ellos hayan amado, 

Pluperfect. 
Yo hublese *amado, ^ 
Tu hubieses amado, t 
El hubiese amado, 
Nosotros hubiesemos amado, • 
Vosotros hubieseis amado, 
Ellos hubiesen amado, - 



I 771 ay love, 
thou mayst love. 
he may love, 
we may love, 
you may love, 
they may love. 

I might love, 
thou mightesi love, 
he might love, 
we might love, 
you might love, 
they might love. 

I may have loved, 
thou mayst have loved, 
he may have loved, 
we may have loved, 
you may have loved, 
they may have loved. 



I might have loved, 
thou mightest have loved, 
he might have loved, 
we might have loved, 
you might have loved, 
they might have loved. 



Second conjugation in jeb. 





INFINITIVE. 


Present, 


Tem-er, - 


to fear. 


Preterite. 


Haber temido, - 


to have feared. 


Gerund. 


Temiendo, 


fearing. 


Participle. 


Temido, 


feared. 


9* 







102 



VERBS. 



INDIC4TIVE. 

Present. 



Yo temo, 
Tu temes, 
El teme^ 

Nosotros tememosj 
Vosotros temeis, - 
EUos temen, - 



Yo temiaj 
Tu temiasj - 
El temia^ 

Nosotros temiamos, 
Vosotros temiaisj - 
EUos temian, 



Yo temi, 
Tu temiste, - 
El temio, 

Nosotros temimos, 
Vosotros temisteis, 
Ellos temieron^ 



Imperfect, 



Preterite definite. 



Preterite indefinite. 



Yo he temido, 

Tu has temido, 

El ha temido, 

Nosotros hemostemido, - 

A^osotros habeis temido, - 

EUos han temido, - 



Preterite anterior. 



Yo hube temido, - 
Tu hubiste temido, 
El hubo temido, - 
Nosotros hubimos temido, 
Vosotros hubisteis temido, 
EUos hubieron temido, - 



I fear, 
thou fearest, 
he fears, 
ice fear, 
you fear, 
they fear. 



I did fear, 
thou didst fear, 
he did fear, 
we did fear, 
you did fear, 
they did fear. 



I feared, 
thou fear edst. 
he feared, 
we feared, 
you feared, 
they feared. 



1 have feared, 
thou hast feared. 
he has feared, 
we have feared, 
you have feared, 
they have feared. 



I had feared, 
thou hadst feared, 
he had feared, 
we had feared, 
you had feared, 
they had feared* 



V£JIBS. 103 

Pluperfect, 

Yo habia temido, - - - i had feared, 

Tu habias temido^ - - thou hadst feared. 

El habia temido, - - - Ae had feared, 

Nosotros habiamos temidoj - ice had feared, 

Vosotros habiais temidoj - you had feared, 

Ellos habian temidoj - - they had feared. 

Future absolute, 

Yo temere, - - - - I shall fear, 

Tu temeras, - - - - thou iciltfear. 

El temera, - - - - 7^e icillfear. 

Nosotros temeremoSj - - we shall fear, 

Vosotros temereisj - - - you will fear, 

Ellos teraeran, - - - they will fear. 

Future anterior, 

Yo habre temido, - - - i shall have feared, 

Tu habras temido^ - - thou icilt have feared. 

El habra temido, - - - he will have feared. 

Nosotros habremos temidoj - ive shall have feared. 

Vosotros habreis temido, - you icill have feared 

Ellos habran temido, - - they will have feared. 

Future conjunctive simple. 

Si, or cuandoj ... If or when^ 

Yo temiere, - - - - I shall fear, 

Tu temieres, - - - thou wilt fear ^ 

El temiere, - - - - he will fear, 

Nosotros temieremoSj - - we shall fear, 

Vosotros temiereis, - - you will fear. 

Ellos teuiieren, - - - they will fear. 

Future conjunctive compound. 

Si, or cuando. - - - ^? or when^ 

Yo hubiere temido^ - - I have feared, 

Tu hubieres temido. - - thou wilt have feared. 

El hubiere temido, - - he ivill have feared, 

Nosotros hubieremos temido. - we shall have feared, 

\ osotros hubiereis temido, - you will have feared. 

Ellos hubieren temido, - - they will have feared. 



104 



VERBS. 



CONDITIONALS. 



Yo temeria, 
Tu temerias, 
El temeria, 
Nosotros temeriamos, 
Vosotros temeriais, 
EUos temerian, 



First conditional present, 

I should fear. 



thou woifldst fear» 
he would fear, 
we should fear, 
you would fear, 
tliey would fear. 



Second and third conditionals present, ' 
Si, or cuando, - Jf, or though^ 

Yo temiera or temiese, - If earned, 

Tu temieras or temieses, - thou shouldst fear. 
El temiera or temiese, - he should fear, 

Nosotros temieramos o?'temiesemos,?^e should fear, 
Vosotros temierais or temieseiS; you should fear, 
EUos temieran or temiesen, they should fear. 

First conditional past. 



Yo habria temido, 
Tu habrias temido, 
El habria temido, 
Nosotros habrlamos temido, 
Vosotros habriais temido, 
Ellos habrian temido. 



I should have feared, 
thou wouldst have feared, 
he loould have feared, 
we should have feared, 
you would have feared, 
they iDould have feared. 



Second and third conditionals past, 

Yo hubiera, or hubiese 

Tu hubieras, or hubieses 

El hubiera, or hubiese 

Nosotros hubieramos, or hubiesemos 

Vosotros hubierais, or hubieseis 

Ellos hubieran, or hubiesen 



^ f 


s 


] [ 



-^1 









c 

^ 



IMPERATIVE. 



Teme tu, 
Teraa el, 

Temamos nosotros, 
Temed vosotros, 
Teman ellos, 



Trestnt or future, 

fear thou, 
let him fear, 
let us fear, 
fear ye, 
let them fear. 



VERBS. 



105 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present, 



Yo tema^ 
Tu temaSj 
El tenia, 

Nosotros temamos, 
Vosotros temais^ 
Ellos teman. 



Yo temiesej 
Tu temieses, 
El temiese, 
Nosotros temiesemos, 
Vosotros temieseis, 
Ellos temiesen. 



J may fear, 
thou may st fear, 
he may fear, 
we may fear, 
you may fear, 
they may fear. 



Imperfect. 



I might fear, 
thou might est fear, 
he might fear, 
we might fear, 
you might fear, 
they might fear. 



Preterite. 



Yo haya temido, - 
Tu hayas temido. 
El haya temido, - 
Nosotros hayamos temido, 
Vosotros h4yais temido, 
Ellos hayan temido, 



I may have feared, 
thou mayst have feared, 
he may have feared, ^ 
we may have feared, 
you may have feared, 
they may have feared. 



Pluperfect. 



Yo hubiese temido, 
Tu hubieses temido. 
El hubiese temido, 
Nosotros hubiesemos temido, 
Vosotros hubieseis temido, 
Ellos hubiesen temido. 



J might have feared, 
thou mightest have feared, 
he might have feared, 
we might have feared, 
you might have feared, 
they might have feared. 



Third conjugation in ir. 



INFINITIVE. 



Present. 
Freterite. 
Gerund. 
Participle. 



Sufr-ir, 

Haber sufrido, 
Sufriendoj 
Sufrido, 



to suffer. 

to have suffered. 

suffering. 

suffered. 



106 VERBS. 

INDICATIVE* 

Present. 

Yosufro, - - - - - I suffer. 

Tu sufres, thou sufferest. 

El sufre, he suffers. 

Nosotros sufrimos, - - - we suffer. 

Vosotros sufris, - - - - you suffer. 

Ellos sufren, - - - - they suffer. 

Im-perfect. ^ 

Yo sufria, - ... J did suffer. 

Tu sufrias, - - - - thou didst suffer. 

El sufria, - - - . he did suffer. 

Nosotros sufriamos, - - - ?^Je did suffer. 

Vosotros sufriais, - - - you did suffer. 

Ellos sufrian, ... - they did suffer. 

Preterite definite. 

Yo sufri, - - - - - I suffered. 

Tu sufriste, - - - - thou sufferedst. 

El sufrio, ----- A^ suffered. 

Nosotros sufriraos, - - - tre suffered. 

Vosotros sufristeis, . - - you suffered. 

Ellos sufrieron, - • - - they suffered. 

Preterite indefinite. 

Yo he sufrido, - - . - J have suffered. 

Tu has sufrido^ - - - - thou hast suffered. 

El ha sufrido, - • ^ - he has suffered. 

Nosotros hemos sufrido, - ^ we have suffered. 

Vosotros habeis sufrido, - - you have suffered. 

Ellos han sufrido, - - - - they have suffered. 

Preterite anterior. 

Yo hube sufrido, - - - J had suffered, 

Tu hubiste sufrido, . - - thou hadst suffered. 

El hubo sufrido, - - - Ae had suffered. 

Nosotros hubimos sufrido, - - ive had suffered. 

Vosotros hubisteis sufrido, - - you had suffered. 

Ellos hubierou sufrido^ - - they had suffered^- 



VERBS. 



107 



Pluperfect, 



Yo habia sufrido, 
Tu habias sufrido, 
El habia sufridoj 
Nosotroshabiamos sufrido, 
Vosotros habiais sufrido^ 
EUos habian sufrido. 



I had suffered, 
thou hadst suffered, 
he had suffered, 
we had suffered, 
you had suffered, 
they had suffered. 



Future absolute. 



Yo sufrire, 
Tu sufrirds. 
El sufrira, - 
Nosotros sufriremoSj 
Vosotros sufrireisj 
Ell OS sufrirdn^ 



I shall suffer, 
thou wilt suffer, 
he will suffer, 
we shall suffer, 
you will suffer, 
they will suffer. 



Future anterior. 



Yo habre sufrido, 
Tu habras sufrido, 
El habra sufrido^ 
Nosotros habremos sufridoj 
Vosotros habreis sufrido, 
Ellos habrdn sufrido, - 



I shall have suffered, 
thou wilt have suffei^ed. 
he loill have suffered, 
we shall have suffered, 
you will have suffered, 
they icill have suffered. 



Future conjunctive simple. 

Si, or cuando, If^ or when^ 

Yo sufriere, - - - J suffer. 

Til sufrieres, . - - thou wilt suffer. 

El sufriere^ - - - he will suffer, 

J>fosotros sufrieremos, - - we shall suffer, 

Vosotros sufriereis, - - you will suffer, 

Ellos sufrieren, - - - they will suffer. 

Future conjunctive compound. 



Si, or cuando, 
Yo hubiere sufrido, 
Tu hubieres sufrido. 
El hubiere sufrido, 
Nosotros hubieremos sufrido, - 
Vosotros hubiereis sufrido, - 
Ellos hubieren sufrido, - 



If^ or 7vhen^ 
I shall have suffered, 
thou wilt have suffered, 
he will have suffered, 
we shall have suffered, 
you will have suffered. 
they will have suffered. 



108 



VERBS. 



CONDITIONALS. 

First conditional present* 



Yo sufrifla^ 
Tu sufririas, 
El sufriria, 
Nosotros sufririamos, 
Vosotros sufririais, 
EUos sufririan, 



I should suffer, 
thou wouldst suffer, 
he would suffer, 
we should suffer, 
you would suffer, 
they would suffer. 



Second and third conditionals present. 
Si, or cuando, - - - If , or though^ 

Yo sufriera or sufriese, - - J suffered, 
Tu sufrieras or sufrieses, - thou shouldst suffer. 
El sufriera or sufriese, - he should suffer, 

Nosotros sufrieramos or sufriesemos, we should suffer, 
Vosotros sufrierais or sufrieseis, you should suffer, 
Ellos sufrieran or sufriesen, they should suffer. 

First conditional past. 



Yo habria sufrido, 

Tu habrias sufrido. 

El habria sufrido, 

Nosotros habriamos sufrido, - 

Vosotros habriais sufrido, 

Ellos habrian sufrido, - 



I should have suffered, 
thou wouldst have suffered, 
he would have siffered, 
we should have suffered, 
you would have suffered, 
they would have suffered. 



Second and third conditionals past. 



Si, or cuando. 
Yo hubiera, or hubiese 
Tu hubieras, or hubieses 
El hubiera, or hubiese 
Nosotros hubieramos, or hubiesemos 
Vosotros hubierais, or hubieseis 
Ellos hubieran, or hubi^sen 



o 

'13 



•^ i^ S» 
o '^'^ 



IMPERATIVE. 



Sufre tii, 
Sufra el, 

Suframos nosotros, 
Sufrid vosotros, - 
Sufrsui ellos, 



Present or future, 

suffer thou, 
lei him suffer, 
let us suffer, 
suffer you, 
let them suffer. 



VERBS. 



109 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



Yo sufra, 

Tu sufras, - 
El sufra, 

Nosotros suframos, 
Yosotros sufraisj - 
Ellos sufran, 



Yo sufriese, 
Tu sufrieses. 
El sufriese, 
Nosotros sufriesemos, 
Vosotros sufrieseis, 
Ellos sufrieseiij 



I may suffer. 
thou rnayst suffer, 
he may suffer, 
ice may suffer, 
you may suffer, 
they may suffer. 



Imperfect. 



I might suffer, 
thou mightesf suffer, 
he raight suffer, 
we might suffer, 
you might suffer, 
they might suffer. 



Preterite. 



Yo haya sufrido, 

Tu hayas sufrido. 
El haya sufrido, 
Nosotros hayamos sufrido, 
Vosotros hayais sufrido, 
Ellos hay an sufrido, 



I may have suffered, 
thou mayst have suffered, 
he may have suffered. 
ice may have suffered, 
you may have suffered, 
they may have suffered. 



Pluperfect. 



Yo hubiese sufrido, 

Tu hubieses sufrido. 

El hubiese sufrido, 

Nosotros hubiesemos sufrido, - 

Vosotros hubieseis sufrido, 

Ellos hubiesen sufrido, - 



J might have suffered, 
thou mightest have suffered 
he might have suffered, 
we might have suffered, 
you might have suffered. 
they wight have suffered. 



PARADIGM OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 

Observation. The passive verbs are conjugated always 
and in all their tenses, with the auxiliary ser. to be ; and with 
the participle past of the active verb, which takes the gender 
and number of the subject. 
10 



110 VERBS. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present, 
Ser amad-o or a^ os or as, - - to be loved. 

Preterite. 
Haber sido amad-o or a, os or as, - to have been loved. 

Participle present, 
Siendo amad-o or a, os or as, - - being loved. 

Participle past. ' 

Habiendo sido amad-o or a, os or as. having been loved. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 
Yo soy, tu eres, el or ella es I amy thou art, he or she is 

amado or amada, loved. 

Nosotr-os or as somos, voso- We are, you are, they are 

tros or as sois, ellos or el- loved. 

las son amad-os or as. * 

Imperfect. 

Yo era, tu eras, el or ella era I was, thou wast, he or she 
amado or amada, was loved. 

Nosotr-os or as eramos, voso- We were, you were, they 
tr-os or as erais, ellos or el- 
las eran amados or amadas. 



Preterite definite. 

Yo fui, tu fuiste, el or ella fue I was, thou wast, he or she 

amado or amada. tvas loved. 

Nosotr-os or as fuimos, voso- We were, you were, they 

tr-os o?'as fuisteis, ellos or el- were loved. 

las fueron amados or amadas. 

Preterite indefinite. 

Yo he, tu has, el or ella ha I have, thou hast, he or she 

sido amado or amada, has been loved. 

Nosotr-os or as hemos, voso- We have, you have, they 

tr-os or as habeis, ellos or el- have been loved. 
las han sido amados or ama- 
das. 



VERBS. Ill 

Preiemte anterior. 

Yo hube, tu hubiste, el or ella I had, thou hadst, he or she 

hubo sido amado or amada, had been loved. 

Nosotr-os or as hubimos, voso- Tf^e had, you had, they 

tr-os or as hubisteis, ellos or Jiad been loved. 

ellas hubieron sido amados 

or amadas. 

Pluperfect, 

Yo habia, tu habias, el or ella I had, thou hadst, he or 

habia sido amad-o or a, she had been loved, 

Nosotr-osorashabiamos, voso- TFe had, you had, they 

tros or as habiais^ ellos or had been loved, 

ellas habian sido amados or 

amadas. 

Future absolute. 

Yo sere, tu serds, el or ella I shall be, thou wilt be, he 

sera amad-o or a, or she will be loved. 

Nosotros seremos, vosotros se- We shall be, you will be^ 

reis, ellos or ellas seran they mil be loved. 
cimad-os or as. 

Future anterior, 

Yo habre, tu habr^s, el or ella I shall have, thou wilt have, 

habr4 sido amad-o or a, he or she mil have been 

loved. 

Nosotr-os or as habremos, vo- TFe shall have, you will 

sotr-os or as habreis, ellos or have, they will have been 

ellas habr4n sido amad-os loved. 

or as. 

Future conjunctive simple. 

Si, or cuando, 7 ^ ^ ^ 

Yo fuere, tu fueres, el or ella j g" ^"^ 

fuere amad-o or a, I "f "S -^ 

Nosotr-os or as fueremos,voso- ( ^ ^ ?^ 

tr-os or as fuereis, ellos or ^ M"^ 

ellas fuerea amad-os or as. 3 J^ I s^ '^ 



112 



VERB&. 



Future conjunctive compound. 



Sij or cuandoj "y 

Yo hubiere, tu hubieres, el or j 

ella hubiere sido amad-o or a, | 
Nosotr-os or as hubieremos^ V 

vosotr-os 07' as hubiereis^ el- 

ilos or ellas hubieren sido 

amados or as. 



C ?. «- 
f rv ^ C r^ 



CONDITIONALS. 



First conditional present. 



Yo seria, tu serias^ el or ella 
seria amad-o or a^ 

Nosotr-os or as serlamos, voso- 
tr-os or as serlaisj ellos or 
ellas serian amad-os or as. 



IsJiouldbe, thou wouldst he. 

he or she would he loved. 
We should 6e, yoit would 

he, they would he loved. 



Second and third conditionals present. 



Si, or cuando^ 

Yo fueraorfuesej tu fueras or 
fueses, el or ella fuera or 
, fuese amad-o or a, 

Nosotr-os or as fueramos or 
fuesemos, vosotr-os or as fu- 
erais or fueseis, ellos or ellas 
fueran or fueseii amad-os 
or as. 



? 



3 



Is 

1^^ 






First conditional past. 



Yo habria, tu habrias, el or 
ella habrla sido amad~o 
or a, 

Nosotr-os or as babriamos, 
vosotr-os or as habriais, el- 
los or ellas habrian sido 
amad-os or as. 



I should have^ thou ivouldsf 

have, he or she would 

have heen loved. 
We should have, you ivould 

have J they would have 

been loved* 



VERBS. 11^ 



Second and third conditionals pcist. 
S!j or cuando, '] 

Yo hubiera or hubiese, tu hu- 

bieras or hubieses, el or ella 

hubiera or hubiese sido 

amad-o or a, 
Nosotr-os or as hubieramos or 

hubiesemos, vosotr-os or as 

hubierais or hubieseis, ellos 

or ellas hubieran or hubie- 






«;) 



sen sido amad-os or as. ^ Ji^r^ ^o. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Se amad-o or a, Be thou loved. 

Sea amad-o or a, Let him beloved. 

Seamos amad-os or as, Let us be loved, 

Sed amad-os or as, Be ye loved, 

Sean amad-os or as. Let them be loved, 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
Yo sea, tu seas, 61 or ella sea I may be, thou mayst be, 

amad-o or a, he or she may be loved. 

Nosotr-os or as seamos, voso- We may be, you may be, 

tr-os or as seais, ellos or el- they may be loved, 

las sean amad-os or as. 

Imperfect. 
Yo fuese, tu fueses, el or ella I mightbe,thoumightestbe, 

fuese amad-o or a, he or she might be loved. 

Nosotr-os or as fuesemos, vo- Jf^e might be, you might 

sotr-os or as fueseis, ellos or be, they might be loved. 

ellas fuesen amad-os or as. 

Preterite, 
Yo haya, tu hayas, el or ella I may have, thou mayst 
haya sido amad-o or a, have, he or she may have 

been loved, 
Nosotros or as hiyamos, voso- IVe may have^ ' you may 
tr-os or as hayais, ellos or el- have, they may have 

las hayan sido amad-os or as. been loved. 

10* 



114 VERBS* 

Pluperfect, 

Yo hubiese, tu hubieses, el or I might have, thou mightesi 

ella hubiese sido amad«o have^ he or '^he might 

or a^ have been loved, 

Nosotr-os or as hubiesemoSj We might have^ you might 

vosotr-os or as hubieseis, have, they might have 

ellos or ellas hubiesen sido been loved. 
amad-os or as. 

PARADIGM OP NEUTER VERBS. 

Observation. These verbs take in Spanish as an auxiliary 
in their compound tenses, the verb haber, to have, and the 
participle is indeclinable. In their simple tenses they are 
conjugated like the verbs of the conjugation to which thej 
belong. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present. Llegar,* To arrive. 

Preterite. Haber lle^do, To have arrived. 

Gerund. Llegando^ Arriving. 

Participle. Llegado. Arrived. 

INDICATIVE. 

I 
Present. 

t Lleg-o, as, a, amos, ais, an. I arrive, ^c. 

Imperfect. 

Lleg-aba, abas, aba, dbamos, I did arrive^ <J*c. 
^bais, aban. 

Preterite definite, 
Lleg-ue, aste, 6, amos, ^steis, I arrived, 8fc. 



* This verb without being irregular, takes an u after the g in all 
the persons in which it is immediately followed by an c. This rule 
applies to all the verbs that end in gar : it serves to preserve in all 
the tenses and in all the persons the pronunciation of the g such as it 
is in the infinitive present. 

t We suppress the pronouns, of the use of which the preceding 
conjugations give examples enough. 



VERBS. 115 

Preterite indefinite. 

He llegado, - - - i have arrived. 

Has Uegado, - - - thou hast arrived. 

Ha llegado, - - - Z^e has arrived. 

Hem OS llegado, - - we have arrived, 

Habeis Uegado, - - you have arrived, 

Han llegado. - - - they have arrived. 

Preterite anterior, 
Hube, hubiste, hubo, hubi- I had ^ thou hadst, he or she 
mosj hubisteis, hubieron had, we had, you had, 

llegado. they had arrived. 

Pluperfect. 
Habla, habks, habia, habia- I had, thou hadst, he or she 
mosj habiaisj habian lie- had, we had, you had, 

gado. they had arrived. 

Future absolute. 

Lleg-are, or ards, or ari^ are I shall arrive, 8fc. 
mos, areis, araa. 

Future antemor. 
Habre, habras, habrd, habre- I shall have, thou wilt have, 
mos, habreis, habran lie- he or she will have, we 

gado. shall have, you will have, 

they will have arrived. 

Future conjunctive simple. 
Si; or cuandoj ^ If, or when, I arrive or 

Lleg-are, ares, are, ^remos, > shall arrive, S^c. 
dreis, aren. 3 

Future conjunctive compound. 
Si, or cuando, Ify or when, I have or shall 

JHubiere, hubieres, hubiere, have arrived, Sfc. if or 

hubieremos, hubiereis, hu- when we have or shall 

bieren llegado. have arrived^ Sfc. 

CONDITIONALS. 

First conditional present, 
Lleg-aria, arias, aria, ariamos, J should arrive, ^c 
ariais, arlan. 



116 



VERBS. 



Second and third conditionals present. 

Si, or cuandoj If, or though, 1 arrived or 

Lleg-ara or ase, aras or ases, should arrive, c^c. 

ara, or ase, 
Lleg-aramos or asemos, 4rais If, or though, loe arrived or 

should arrive, ^c. 

First conditional past. 



Habria, habriaSj habria, ha- 
briaraosj habriais, habrian 
llegado. 



I should have, thou wouldst 
have, he or/ she would 
have, we should have, you 
would have, they would 
have arrived. 



Second and third conditionals past. 
Si, or cuando, If, or though, I had, or 



Hubiera or hubiese, hubieras 
or hubiesesj hubiera or hu- 
biese, 

Hubieramos or hubiesemos, 
hubierais or hubieseis, hu- 
bieran or hubiesen llegado. 



should have arrived. 



If, or though, we had or 
should have arrived. 



Llega tu, 
Llegu e el, 
Lleguemos, 
Llegad vosotros, 
Lleguen ellos. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Present or future. 

arrive thou, 
let him arrive, 
let us arrive, 
arrive ye. 
let them arrive* 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

Lleg-ue, ues, ne, uemos, I may arrive^ 8fc. 

ueis, uen. 

Imperfect, 

Lleg-ase, asesj ase, dsemos, I might arrive^ SfC. 

dseis, asen. 



VERBS. 117 

Preterite, 

Haya,hayas, haya,liayamoSj I may have arrived, 8fc, we 

hayais, hayan, llegado. mai/ have arrived, 6f c. 

Pluperfect. 

Hiibiese, hubieses, hubiese, I might have arrived, S^'c, ice 
hubiesemosj hubieseis^hu- might have arrived, Sfc, 

biesen llegado. 

PARADIGM OF REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. 

Observation, Reflective and reciprocal verbs have no 
conjugation peculiar to them. In the simple tenses they are 
conjugated like the verbs of the conjugation to which they 
belong ; and in the compound tenses, like the verb llegar^ 
to arrive ; that is to say, they take haber and not ser as an 
auxiliary and the participle is indeclinable. Nevertheless, as 
the double pronoun, which is found in all the tenses and in 
each person, might present some difficulties, we shall con- 
jugate some tenses of the verb congratularse^ to congratu- 
late oneself, which will suffice both for reflective and recip- 
rocal verbs ; observing however, that the reciprocal 
verbs can be such only in the three persons plural, be- 
cause reciprocity cannot exist but between two persons at 
least. In these plurals, yo me congratulo^ tii te cons^ratulas^ 
el se congratula^ I congratulate myself, thou congratulatest 
thyself, he congratulates himself, the verb is reflective ; and 
in nosott*os nos congratulamos, vosotros os congratidais, ellos 
se congratulaUj the verb can be either reflective or recipro- 
cal : it is reciprocal if these words laios a otros^ each other, 
mutuamente, mutually, can be joined to the verb : it is reflec- 
tive if these words are neither expressed nor understood. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present, 
Congratularse,* to congratulate oneself. 

Preterite, 
Haberse congratulado, to have congratulated oneself. 

* Ail verbs require the objective pronouns to be placed after them 
in the present y and after the auxiliary in the preterite of the Infiniiive' 
mode whether used affirmatively or negatively. 



118 



VERBS. 



Gerund. 
Congratulandose^ congratulating oneself. 

Compound Gerund. 
Habiendose congratulado, having congratulated oneself* 

Participle. 
Congratulado. congratulated. 



Yo me congratulo;, 

Tu te congratulas. 

El se congratula, 

Nosotros nos congratulamos, 

Vosotros OS congratulais, 

EUos se congratulan. 



INDICATIVE. 

Present. ^ 

I congratulate myself, 
thou congratulate st thyself, 
he congratulates himself, 
we congratulate ourselves. 
you congrattdate yourselves^ 
they congratulate themselves. 



The other simple tenses follow the same order. 
Preterite indefinite. 



I have congratulated myself. 

thou hast congratulated thy* 
self. 

he has congratulated himself. 

we have congratulated our- 
selves. 

you have congratulated your- 
selves. 

they have congratulated them- 
selves. 
All the compound tenses follow the same order. 



Yo me he congratulado, 
Tu te has congratulado, 

El se ha congratulado, 

Nosotros nos hemos congra- 
tulado, 

Vosotros OS habeis congra- 
tulado, 

Ellos se han conofratulado. 



IMPERATIVE. 



Congratulate, 

Congratulese, 

*Congratulemonos, 

*Congratulaos, 

ConG^ratulense. 



congratulate thyself, 
let him congratulate himself, 
let us congratulate ourselves, 
congratulate yourselves, 
let them congratulate them- 
selves. 



* The s of the first person plural and the d of the second are al- 
ways suppressed in the imperative in reflected and reciprocal verbs. 



VERBS. 



119 



PARADIGM OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



Present. 
Preterite, 
Gerund. 
Participle. 



Present, 
Imperfect, 
Pret. def, 
Pret. indef. 
Pluperfect, 
Future, 
Future ant. 



INFINITIVE. 



Granizar, 
Haber granizado, 
Granizando, 
Granizado. 



to hail, 

to have hailed, 

hailing. 

hailed. 



INDICATIVE. 

Graniza, 

Granizaba, 

Granizo, 

Ha granizado, 

Habia granizado, 

Granizara, or Granizare, 

Habra granizado, 



it hails, 
it did hail, 
it hailed, 
it has hailed, 
it had hailed, 
it will hail, 
it will have hailed. 



CONDITIONALS. 



Present, 
Past. 



Present, 
Imperfect. 
Preterite, 
Pluperfect, 



Granizaria or granizara, it would hail, 
Habria granizado, it would have hailed. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Que 

Granice, 
Granizase, 
Haya granizado, 
Hubiese granizado, 



that it may hail, 
that it might hail, 
that it may have hailed, 
that it might have hailed. 



Conjugation of the impersonal verb ser menester, 
to be requisite or necessary. 



INFINITIVE. 



Present. 
Gerund, 
Participle. 



Present, 
Imp rfect, 
Pret, def. 
Future, 



Ser menester, 
Siendo menester, 
Sido menester, 



to he necessary, 
being necessary, 
been necessary. 



INDICATIVE. 



Es menester. 

Era menester, 

Fue menester. 

Sera or fuere menester, 



it is necessary, 
it was necessary, 
it was necessary, 
it will be necessary.. 



120 VERBS. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Seria or fuera menesterj it would be necessary. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. Sea menester, it may be necessary. . 

Imperfect. Fuese menester, it might be necessary. 

Conjugation of the imjjersoiial verb habei?. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. Hay,* there is, there are, 

Imperfect. Habla, thtre was, there were* 

Pret. def. Hubo, there was, there were. 

Future. Habra or hubiere, there shall or will be. 

CONDITIONAL 

Habria or hubiera, there should be. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. Haya, there may be. 

Imperfect. Hubiese, there might be. 

N. B. This impersonal is used thus, that it to say in the 
third person singular, even with a substantive in the plural ; 
as, haij un honibre, there is a man ; hubo mwg-eres, there were 
women. The compound tenses are formed by adding the 
participle habido, to the simple tenses. Ex. Ha habido, 
there has or there have been, &c. 

XIST OF SOME IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Infinitive. 3d per s. of the pres. of the ind. 

Amanecer, to begin to be day- Amanece, it begins to be day- 

light, light. 

Anochecer, to begin to grow Anochece, it begins to grow 

dark^ . dark. 

Escarchar, to freeze, to glaze, Escarcha, it freezes, it glazes. 

speaking of dew or rain 

that glazes what it falls 

upon by freezing. 

^ Hay loses the letter y when this word is placed at the end of a 
phrase. Ex. For hay un arlo, we say, un am ha^ it is one year ago. 



VERBS. 121 

Granizar, to hail^ Granizaj it hails, 

Helar, to freeze, Hiela, it freezes, 

Llover, to rain, Llueve, it rains, 

Lloviznar, to drizzle, Llovizna, it drizzles, 

Nevar, to snow, Nieva, it snows, 
Relampaguearj to liglden, Relampaguea, it lightens, 

Tronar, to thunder, Truena, it thunders, 

Obserimtion, Amanecer and anochecer have sometimes 
the three persons; then they signify to arrive, to be, to find 
oneself at the dawn of day or at the fall of night in such a 
condition. Ex. Mi padre amanecid en Pains : amanecid el 
campo lleno de rocio : are as if I said, mi padre llegd d 
Paris cuando amanecid : el campo estfjtba lleno de rocio cuan- 
do amanecid, my father arrived at Paris when the day dawn- 
ed : the fields were covered with dew at the dawn of day. 
Mi amigo amanecid pobre, 6 yo anocheci rico, that is to 
say, mi amigo se halld pobre cuando amanecid, my friend 
was poor when the smi rose, and 1 w^as rich when the sun set. 

List and covjiigations of the irregular verbs ^ arranged 
in alphabetical order* 

IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS. 

N. B. 1st. The verbs marked thust are little used. 

2d. The third conditional not differing at all in its ter- 
minations from the imperfect of the subjunctive, we have 
thought it useless to conjugate it in the conditional, and we 
have contented ourselves with giving it in the subjunctive. 

3d. AVe place in the subjunctive mode the future con- 
junctive simple for the sake of distinctness. 

4th. There are some verbs which undergo slight ahera- 
tions, either in their radical lettters, or in their terminations ; 
but they are not on that account irregular ; they only under- 
go these changes to preserve in the other tenses the pronun- 
ciation analagous to that which they have in the present of 
the infinitive. Of this number are, 1st. the verbs ending in 
car, which change the c into qu when it must be followed 
by an e : as buscar, to seek, busqui, I sought ; busque, bits- 
ques, busque, ^c, that I may seek, that thou mayst seek, 
that he may seek, &;c. 2d. Those ending in gar which take 
11 



122 



VBKB&* 



an u after the g before e, as llegar^ to arrive ; Hegue, I arriv- 
ed: pagar, to pay, pagu^^ I paid, &;c. 3d. Several ending in 
cer and cir which change the c into z before a and o, as 
veneer^ to conquer, venzo ; resarcir, to repair, resarzoj I re- 
pair. 4th. For the same reason delinquir^ to do wrong, 
changes qu into c before a and o. Ex. DelincOy delinca^ de- 
lincamos ; and escogevy to choose, changes the g into j be- 
fore a and o. Ex. Escojo^ escoja. 5th. The verbs which 
terminate in eer, as creer^ to beHeve ; /eer, to read ; poseer^ 
to possess ; proveer^ to provide, in those terminations which 
contain an z, change it into y whenever it is to be joined 
with another vowel, as creij creyd ; lei^ leytron ; poseiypose- 
yei^e ; provei^ proveytremos^ &c. 6th. We must make 
the same change in the verbs ending in w^>, when the u and 
the i make a part of two different syllables. Thus, huir^ to 
fly, makes in the third person of the preterite definite, huy6 ; 
arguir makes arguyO ; constituir makes canstituydy &c. 

N. B. The tenses and persons which are irregular are 
laid down in italics y and o?ily the Jirsi person of the tenses 
which are regular or run on uniformly irregular throughout 
the tense, is expressed. 



Inf. Pres. 

Gerund. 

Participle. 



Aborrecer, 

Aborreciendo, 

Aborrecido, 



to hate to abhor. 

hating. 

hated. 



Ind. Pres. Aborrezco, aborreces, aborrece. 



Imperfect. 
Pret. def 
Future. 
Conditional. 

Imperative. 



Sub. pres. 

Imperfect. 
Future. 



) I hatCyOv 
aborrecemos, aborreceis,aborrecen, ^ abhor. 
Aborrecia, &c. I did abhor. 

Aborreci, &c. J hated. 

Aborrecere, &c. J shall or will hate.^ 

Aborreceria or aborreciera, &c. ? I should or 

^ loould hate. 

Aborrece, aborezca^ hate thou^ 

aborrezcamoSy aborreced, aborrezcan. &:c. 

Que aborrezcayoborezcas^aborrezcay^ that I hate 

[ aborrezcamoSy aborrescais, aborrez- \ or may 

can^j hate. 
Que aborreciese, Szc. that I hated or might hate. 
Si aborreciere, &c. If I hcde or shall hate. 



VEKBS. 



123 



N. B. The irregularity of this verb, of all like it in ecer, 
and of those ending in ocer and acer, consists in taking a 
t before c in the first person singular of the present indica- 
live, in all those of the present subjunctive, in the first of the 
plural, and in the third of the singular and plural of the im- 
perative. The verb hacer is the only exception to this 
rule ; but it has other irregularities, and is found conjugated 
in its alphabetical order. 

Abrir, to open, is irregular only in tlie participle abierto. 



to absolve, 
absolving, 
absolved. 



Infinitive. Absolver, 
Gerund. Absolviendo, 
Participle, Absuelto^ 

Ind,pres, Absuelvo, absuelves^ absuelve, ') I absolve, or 
absolvemos, absolveis, absuelven^ ^ do absolve, 
Absolvia, &c. I did absolve, 

Absolvi, &c. I absolved, 

Absolvere, &c. I shall or ici 11 absolve, 

Absolveria or absolviera, &cc, I sliouhl or ivould 

absolve. 

Absuelve, absudva^ > absolve thou. 

absolvamos,absolved,a6swe/t'a/?, \ See, 

Que absuelva^absuelvas^ absuelva^ ^ that I ab- 

absolvamos, absolvais, aS^z^eZra;?, > solve oxmaij 

J absolve. 
Que absolviese, See that J absolved or might 

absolve, 
Cuando absolviere, &:c. when I absolve or shall 

absolve, 

Abstraer, to abstract, to make an abstraction. See traer. 
Acaecerj to happen, (impersonal.) See aborrecer. 



Imperfect, 
Fret, def. 
Future, 
Condition, 

Imperative, 

SubJ.pres, 

Imperfect. 
Future, 



Infinitive. Acertar, to succeed, to hit the marh. 
Gerund. Acertando, succeeding. 
Participle. Acertado, succeeded. 

Indie, pres, Acierto, aciertas, acierta, ') I succeed, or 
Acertamos, acertais, aciertan, ^ hit the mark, 
Acertaba, &c. J did succeed, 

Acerte, &c. J succeeded. 



Imperfect 
Fret. def. 
Future. 



Acertare, &c. 



I shall or will succeed. 



124 

Condit. 

Imperative. 

Sub» pres* 

Imperfect, 

Future. 



VERBS. 



Acertaria or acertara, &;c 

Acierta^ acierte, 
acerternos. acertad, acierten^ 
Que acierte, aciertes^ acierte, 
acerternos, acerteis, acierten. 
Que acertase, &c 

Si acertare, &c. 



I should or would 

succeed* 

^ succeed thou, 

&c. 

that I succeed^ 

or may succeed. 

that I S2icceededy or might 

succeed. 

if I succeed^ or shall succeed. 



Inf. pres. Acordar, to agree , to iresolve. 

Gerund. Acordando, agreeing. 

Participle. Acordado, agreed. 

Indie. pres. Acuerdo^ acuerdaSy acuerda^ ? I agreCj or 
Acordarnos, acordais, acuerdan^ 5 ^^ resolve. 

Imperfect. Acordaba, &c. I did agree. 

Pret. def Acorde, 8zc. I agreed. 

Future. A cord are, &c. 1 shall or will agree. 

Condit. Acordaria, acordara, I should or icould agree. 

Imperat. Acuerda^acuerde^ > agi^ee thou^ 

acordemoSj acordad, acuerde?!, 5 <^c. 

Sub. pres. Que acuerde, acuerdes^acuerde^ ') that I agree j^ 
acordemos, acordeis, acuerden^ ^ or may agree. 

Imperfect. Que acordase^&c. that I agreed or might agree. 

Future. Cuando acordare, &c. when I agi^ee, or shall 

agree, 

Acordarse, to remember. See acordar. 

Acordar a uno, to make one remember. See acordar* 

Acostarse, to go to bed. See acordar. 

Acrecentar, to increase. See acertar. 



Adherir, 

Adhiriendoy 

Adherido. 



to adhere. 



adhering. 



Infpres. 

Gerund, 

Participle. Adherido. adhered. 

Indie, pres. Adhiero, adhiereSj adhiere, '^ I adhere ^ or do 
adherimos, adheris, adhieren^ 
Adheria, &c. 
Adheri, adheriste, adhiriS, 
adherimos, adheristeis, adhirieron, ^ ed, 
Adherire, &c. J[" shall or 7vill adhere. 



Imperfect. 
Fret. def. 



adhere. 
I did adhere, 
adher- 



Future. 



.A' 



VERBS. 



l^J 



Condition, Adheriria, or adhiriera, &c. / should or 

icould adhere. 
Imperative, Adhiere, adhiera^ ') adhere ihoi/, 

adhiramos, adheridj adhieran^ 5 ^^• 
Subj.pres, Que adhiera,adhieras^ adhiera, ^ that I adhere^ 
adhiramos, adhirais^ adhieran, \ or may adhere. 
Imperfect, Que adhiriesCy &c. that I adhered, or might 

adhere. 
Future, Si adhijnere, &c. if I adhere, or shall adhere, 

Adolecer, to fall or to be sick. See aborrecer. 
Adormecer, to lull asleep. Idem. 
Advertir. to take heed. See adherir. 
tAgorar, to augur, to conjecture. See acordar. 
Agradecer, to take a thing kindly, to acknowledge a henefit. 
See aborrecer. 

5 Alentar, to encourage. See acertar. 

\ Alentarse, to take courage. Idem. 
Almorzar, to breakfast. See acordar. 

Amanecer. (verb imp.) to begin to be daylight. See aborrecer. 
tAmentar, to shoot an arroic. See acertar. 
Amolar, to sharpen. See acordar. 
tAmortecersej to faint ^ to lose courage. See aborrecer. 



Lifn, pres. 

Gerund, 

Participle, 

In die, pres. A n d o, 

Imoerf, 

Fret,^def 

Future. 
Condition, 

Imperative. 
Sub. pres. 
Imperf 
Future, 



Andar, to icalk, to go. 

Andando, walking. 

Andadoj walked, 

&c. J walk, or do walk, 

Andaba. &:c. I did walk. 

Anduve, anduviste^ anduvo, ^ J walk- 

anduvijuos^anduvisteis, anduvieron, ^ ^^' 
Andai'e, &;c. I shall or will icalk. 

Andaria or anduviera, &c. I should or would 

walk. 

Anda.ande.andemos. &;c. icalk thou, &c. 

Que ande, Sec. that I walk or 7nay walk. 

Que anduviese&Q, that I walked ox might walk, 

Cuando anduviere^ &c. ichen I walk, or shall 

walk. 



Anochecer, to begin to ^roic dark. 



See aborrecer. 



126 VERBS. 

Anteponer, to prefer. See poner. 

Antever^ to foresee. See ver. 

Apacentar, to lead sheep to gi^ass. See acertar. 

Aparecerj to appear. /See aborrecer. 

Apercibir^ to prepare, to get ready. See pedir. 

Apetecer, to icish, to long for. See aborrecer* 

Apostar, to lay a wager. See acordar. 

Aporcar, to cover loith earth, (celery, 8{c.) See acordar . 

Aportar, to make a harbor. Idem. 

Aprobar, to approve. Idem. 

tArbolecer^ to become a tree. See aborrecer. ^ 

Arrendar, to let to a tenant ; — to tie (a horse) by the reins. 

See acertar. 
ArrepentirsCj to repent. See adherir. 
Asentar, to sit down, to place, to resolve, to register. See 

acertar. 
Asentir, to consent. See adherir. 
Aserrar, to saw. See acertar. 
Asestar, to aim or point at. Idem. 
Asir, to seize, to take root, (speaking of plants, orfigura* 

tively speaking of persons,) has no irres^ularity but in 

the following tenses, which are very little used. Indicat. 

pres. Asgo, ases, ase, asimos, asis, asen. Imperat. Ase, 

asga, asgamos, asid, asgan. Subj. pres. Asga, asgas, as- 

ga, asgamos, asgais, asgan. 
Asolar, to pull down, to destroy. See acordar. 
Asoldar, tofmmish one icith money. Idem. 
Asonar, to assemble by the sound of bells, to tune. Idem. 
Atenderj to apply oneself ^ to consider ; to regard. See 

entender. 
tAtener, to keep pace with another — to keep one^s word. 

See tener. 
Atentar, to attempt. ...to form an enterprise against the laws 

in a capital concern. See acertar. 
tAterecerse, to get benumbed, to stiffen with cold. See 

aborrecer. 
Aterrar, to throw down on the ground. See acertar. 
Atestar, tofll up. Idem. 
Atormecerse, to get benumbed. See aborrecer. 
Atraer, to attract, to draio over to oneself See traer. 
Atravesar^ to pierce, or bore. See acertar. 
"^Atronar, to thunder, (impersonal) See acordar. 



VERBS. 



UP 



Avenirj to happen, to come unexpectedly, to reconcile a 

difference. See venir. 
' Avenirse, to agree, to be suitable, agreeable. 
Aventar, to fan, to winnow. See acertar. 
Aventarse, to be frightened, (speaking ofajloch) Idem. 
Avergonzar, to make one ashamed. See acordar. 
Avergonzarse, to be ashamed. Idem. 

B. 

Inf, pres, Bendecir, to bless. 

Gerund, Bendiciendo, blessing. 
Participle, Bendito, blessed. 

Indie, pres, Bendigo, bendices^ bendice, ben- 

decimos, bendeciSj bendicen. 
Imperfect. Bendeciaj &;c. 

Fret, def, Bendige, bendigiste, bendijo, bendi- ' 

gimos, bendigisteis, bendigeron, ^ 

Future, Bendecircj (fee. I shall or tcill bless. 

Condition, Bendeciriaj or bendigera, ^c, ^ I should or 

^ would bless. 
Imperative. Bendice, bendiga, ^ bless thouy 

bendigamos, bendecidj bendlgan, ^ ^c. 
Sub, pres. Que bendiga, &c. that I bless or may bless. 
Imperfect, Que bendigese, &c. that Iblessed, or might bless. 
Future, Si bendigere, &c. if 1 bless, or shall bless. 



^ I bless, or 

^ do bless. 

I did bless. 

I blessed. 



C. 

Inf, pres, Caber^ to contain, to be contained, 
Gerund, Cabiendo^ being contained. 
Participle, Cabido, been contained, 
Ind, pres. Quepo, cabes, Szc. I am contained. 

Imperfect. Cabia, &:c. I was contained. 

Fret, def, Cupe, cupiste, cupo, 8fc, I was contained. 

Future, Cabrt, &c. J shall or will be contained. 

Conditional. Cabria or cupiera, &;c. J should or wouM be 

contained. 
Imperative. Cahe, quepa, ~) be thou con* 

quepamos, cabed, quepan, ^ tained, Sfc, 

Sub, pres. Que quepa, ^c, that I be or may be contained. 
Imperfect. Que cupiese, ^c, that I was, or might be 

contained. 



128 



VERBS. 



Future. Cuando cupiere^ &c. 



ivhen 1 be^ or shall be 
contained. 



Inf, pres. Caer, to falL 

Gerund, Cayendo^ falling. 

Participle, Caido, fallen, 

Ind.pres, Caigo, caes, &c. I fall or do fall. 

Imperfect, Caiaj&c. I did fall, 

Pret,perf Cai,caiste,cay6,caimos, caisteisjcayeroiij I fell. 
Future, Caere, &c. I shall or will fall. 

Condition, Caerla or cayera, I should or toould falh 

Imperative, Cae, caiga, \f<^ll thou^ 

caigamos, caed, caigan, ^ &c. 

Que caiga, &:c. that I fall, or may fall. 

Que cayese, &c. that I fell, or might fall. 



Sub, pres. 
Imperfect, 
Future* 



Si 



cayere. 



&c. 



If I fall or shall fall. 



Calentar, to warm, to heat. See acertar. 
Canecer, to groio grayhaired. See aborrecer. 
Carecer, ^o want, to be in icant. Idem. 
Cegar, to blind, to become blind. See acertar. 
C Cenir, to girdle, to surround. See .... pedir. 
< Cenirse, to girdle oneself ; to limit oneself; to restrict 
^ oneself Idem. 

Cerner, to sift, to pass flour through a sieve — to blossom. 

(speaking of vines, of grain, 8^c.) See entendcr. 
Cerrar, to shut, to lock up. See acertar. 
Cimentar, to cement, to lay the foundation. Idem. 

to cook, to bake. 



cooking, 
cooked. 



1 bake or do bake. 



Inf pres. Cocer, 
Gerund. Cociendo, 

Participle, Cocido, 

Ind.pres. Cuezo, cueces, cuece, coce- 

mos, coceis. cuecen, 
Imperfect. Cociaj &c. I did cook. 

Pret.perf Coci, &c, I baked. 

Future. Cocere, &;c. I shall or will cook. 

Condition, Coceria or cociera, &c. I should or would bake. 

Imperative. Cuece cueza, S i,^j^^ ^hou, ^c. 

cozamos, cored, caezan, I ' ^ 

Subj.pres, Que cueza, cuezas, cueza, co- S that I bake, or 
zamoS;> cozaisj cuezan, ^ may bake. 



VERBS. - 129. 

Imperfect, Que cociese, &c. that I baked or might ^ake. 
Future. Cuando cocierej &c. when Ibake, or shall bake. 

X. B. This verb has the same irregularities as Absolver ; 
but we have conjugated it on account of the z which it takes 
instead of the c before a and o. and that we may refer to it 
for the conjugation of similar verbs. 

Colar, to strain^ to jilt er a liquor. See acordcu:. 
Colegir, to collect, to conclude^ to deduce. See pedir. 

N. B. It changes g into j before a and o. 

Collar, to hang, to suspend. See acordar. 

tComedir, ^0 re/ec^; to think, to premeditate, S^e pedir. 

Comedirse, to become polite ; to be ruled by reason. Idem. 

Comenzar, to begin. See acertar. 

Compadecerse, to have pity. See aborrecer. 

Componer, to compose. See poner. 

Comparecer, to appear. Idem. 

Corapetir, to enter into or to be in competition. See pedir. 

Complacer, to please one. See aborrecer. 

Comprobar, to prove, to confirm. See acordar. 

Concebir, to conceive. See pedir. 

Concertar, to concert. See acertar. 

Concordar, to adjust, to conciliate, to be conformable^ like. 

See acordar. 
Condescenderj to condescend. See entender, 
Condoler, to sympathize. See absolver. 



Inf. pres. Conducir, to conduct, to lead. 

Gerund. Conduciendo, conducting. 
Participle, Conducido^ conducted. 

Ind. pres. Conduzco, conduces, &c. I conduct. 

Imperfect, Conducia/&:c. I did conduct. 

Pret, def, Conduge,condugiste, condujo,condu' ) Iconduc- 

gimos, condugisteis, condugeron, \ ted. 
Future, Conducire, &c. I shall or will conduct. 

Condition, Conduciria or condugera, Scc. ^ I should or icould 

\ conduct. 
Imperative, Qo\\d\\cQ,conduzca, ~) conduct 

conduzcamos, conducidj conduzcan, S thou.^c. 



130 



VERBS. 



Sub.pres, Que C07iduzca, &c. 
Imperfect, Que condugese, &c. 
Future. Si condugere. &c. 



^/m^ I conducij or 

7?2«y conduct. 
\ that I conducted^ or 
' might conduct. 
If I conduct or sJiall 
conduct. 



Conferir,, to confer. See adherir. 

Confesar, to confess ; to 01071. See acertar. 

ConnQover, to excite^ to disturb. See enten(|er. 

Conocer, to know. See aborrecer. 

Gonseguir, to obtain. See pedir. 

Cons.^ntir, to consent. See adherir. 

Consolar, to console. See acordar. 

Consonar, to agree ; to be in tune. Idem. 

Constrenir, to constrain. See pedir. 

Contar, to count. See acordar. 

Contener, to contain. See tener. 

Contender, to contest ; to dispute. See entender. 

Contradecir, to contradict. See decir. — N. B. They diffei^ 

only in the second pe^^son singular of the imperative which 

is CoNTRADicE, and not Contradi. 
Contrahacer, to counterfeit. See hacer. 
Contraer, to contract. See traer. 
Contravenir, to act contrary. See venir. 
Controvertir, to dispute on a doubtful subject. See adherir. 
Convalecer, to be convalescent. See aborrecer. 
Convenir, to agree. See venir. 
Convertir, to convert. See adherir. 
Corregir, to connect. See pedir. 
Costar, to cost. See acordar. 
Crecer, to grow. See aborrecer. 
Cubrir, to cover ^ — is irregular only in the participle past 

cubierto. 



D. 



Inf. pres. Bar, 
Gerund. Dando, 
Participle. Dado, 


to give, 
giving, 
given. 




Ind. pres. Doy^ das, &c. 
Imperfect. Daba, &c. 




I give 
I did give 



VERBS. •• 131 

Fret. def. Dij diste, di6^ dimos, disteiSj dieron, I gave, 

Futiire. Dare, &c. I shaU or icUl give. 

Condition, Daria or diera, I should or would give, 

Im erative. Da, de. demos, dad, den, give thou, ^'c. 

Sue. pres. Que de, Sec, that I give or may give, 

ImperfecL Que ditse. &c. that I gave, or might give. 

Future. Cuando diere^ &c. when I give, or shall give. 



Decaer, to decay. See caer. 

Decentai', to cut, to take away a part of a ichole. See acertar. 



Inf, pres. Decir. to tell, to say. 

Gerund. Diciendo, saying. 

Participle. Dicho, said. 

Ind.pres, Di go, dices, dice, ? r o^w ^., ^^ . , 

^ T . 1^7- > i sa}/ or do sau. 

decimos, decis, dicen, 3 ^ 

Imperfect, Decia, ^-c. I did tell. 

Pret. def. Dis[e, digiste, dijo, digimos, dig is- } j .7 

teis, dijeron^ 5 

Future. Dire, dirds, Szc, I shall or will tell. 

Condition, Diria or digera, &zc, I should or would say. 

Imperative, Di, diga, digamos, decid. digan, tell thou, <^'c. 

Sub. pres. Que diga, ^'c, that I say or may say. 

Imperfect, Que digese, (S*c. that I told, or might telL 

Future, Si digere, k'c, if I tell, or shall say. 



Deducir, to deduct. See conducir. 

Defender, to defend. See enteuder. 

Deferir, to defer, to delay. See adherir. 

Degollar, to decapitate. See acordar. 

Demoler, to demolish. See absolver. 

Demonstrar, to demonstrate. See acordar. 

Denegar, to deny ; to refuse. See acertar. 

Denostar, to use any one ill by word or deed. See acordar 

Deponer, to depose, to resign. See poner. 

Derrengar, to break the back. See acertar. 

Derretir, to melt. See pedir. 

Desabastecer, (una plaza,) to strip a place of provisions. 

See aborrecer. 
Desacertar, to err, to mistake. See acertar. 
Desacordar, to disagree. See acordar. 
Desadormecer, to awake. See aborrecer. 
Desalentar, to discourage. See acertar. 



132 VER^s; 

Desaparecer, to disappear. See aborrecen 
Desapretar, to loosen ; to unbind. See acertar. 
Desaprobar, to disapprove. See acordar. 
Desasosegar;, to disturb. See acertar. 
Desatender, to be inattentive. See entender. 
Desatentar, to trouble^ to act giddily. See acertai'. 
tDesatravesar, to disentangle. Idem. 
Desavenir, not to agree^ to be of a contrary opinion. See 

venir. 
Descaecer, to decay, to lose one^s strength, ^ee aborrecer. 
Descender, to descend. See entender. 
Descenir, to ungirdle. See pedir. 
'/"Decimentar, to undermine the foundation. See acertar. 
Descolgar, to takedown^ to slacken. See acordar. 
D^scoUar, to suipass in height, to be taller. Idem. 
Descomedirse, to grow impolite^ to take too much liberty. 

See pedir. 
Descomponer, to disorder, to discompose. See poner. 
Desconsentir, to refuse one^s consent. See adherir. 
Desconcertar, to confound^ to derange. See acertar. 
Desconocerj to disown. See aborrecer. 
Desconsolar, to affiict, to grieve. See acordar. 
Descontar, to discount. Idem. 
Descubrir, to discover — is irregular only in the participle 

past, descubierto. 
Desdecir, to give the lie. See decir, except for the second 
person singular of the imperative which is desdtce and not 
desdi. 
Desempedrar, to unpave. See acertar. 
Desencerrar, to set at liberty. Idem. 
Desengrosar, to diminish, lessen. See acordar. 
Desentender, to pretend ignorance. See entender. 
Desenterrar, to unbury. See acertar. 
Desentorpecer, to awaken, to quicken. See aborrecer. 
Desenvolver, to unwrap, to develope. See absolver. 
Deservir, to clear the table, to oblige, to hurt. See pedir. 
Desfallecer, to faint away. See aborrecer. 
Desflaquecer, to iveakeii, to languish. Idem. 
Desflocar, to ravel, (cloth.) See acordar. 
Desfogarse, to vent one^s passion. Idem. 
Desguarnecer, to unfurnish. See aborrecer. 
Peshacer, to undo. See hacer 



VERBS. 133 

Deshelar, to (have. See acertar. 

Desherrar, to unfetter^ to unshoe (a horse.) Idem. 

Desleir, to dilute, to temper. See pedir. 

Deslucir, to tarnish, to destroy the lustre. Gerund. Deslu- 
ciendo. Part, Deslucido. Indicat. pres. Desluzco, deslu- 
ces, &c. Imperat. Desluce, desluzca. desluzcamos, deslu- 
cid, desluzcan, SuhJ. pres. desluzca, 4*c. 

N. B. All the other tenses are regular and are conjug-:- 
ted like mifrir. 

Desmembrar. to dismember. See acertar. 

Desmentin to contradict. See adherii'. 

Desobedecer, to disobey. See aborrecer, 

Desollar, to skin. See acordar. 

Desovar, to spawn (speaking of fishes.) Idem. 

Despedh'j to send away. See pedir. 

Despedirse, to take leave of. Idem. 

Despedrar, to take away tiu stones. See acertar. 

Despernar, to cut off the legs. Idem. 

Despertai', to awake. Idem. 

Despiacer, to displease. See aborrecer. 

DesplegaTj to display : to unplait. See acertar. 

Despoblar. to unpeople. See acordar. 

Desteiiir, to discolour. See pedir. 

Desterrar, to exile, to banisJi. See acertar. 

Destorcer, to untwist, to straighten. See cocer. 

Destrocar, to exchange back again. See acordar. 

Desvanecerse, to faint away. See aborrecer. 

Desvergonzarse, to lose all shame ; tc want respect. Sec 

acordar. 
Detener, to stop. See tener. 
i'Detraer, to remove, to detract. See ti'aer. 
Devolver. to return : to send back. See absolver. 
Dezmar, to decimate or tithe. See acertar. 
Diferir, to differ. See adherir. 
Digerir; to digest. Idem. 
Disolver; to dissolve. See absolver. 
Disponer. to dispo§e. See poner. 
Distraer. to distract. See traer 
Divertk. to divert. See adherir. 
12 



134 VERBS. 

C Doler, to feel 'pain. See absolver. 

< Dolerse, to he sorry ; to repent; — to feel for others* pain ; 

^ — to compassionate. See absolver. 

Infpres. Dormir, to sleep. 

Gerund. Durmiendo^ sleeping. 
Participle. Dor raid o, slept. 

Ind, pres. Duermo, duermes, duenne, ) I sleep, or do 
dormimos, dormis, duermen. ^ , sleep. 

Imperfect. Dormla, <^c. I did sleep. 

Pret, def Dormi, dormiste, durmid, ? f / / 

dormimos, dormisteis, duivnieron. ^ ' 

Future. Dormire, &c. I shall or will sleep. 

Condition. Dormiria ox durmieraykc. I should or would sleep. 

Imperative. Duerme, duerma. } . .7 ^ 

^ , 1 -J T > sleep thou. Sec. 

durmamos, dormid, duerman, S 

Sub. pres. Que duerma, duermas, duerma, ^ that I sleep or 

durmamos, durmais, duerman, ^ may sleep. 

Imperfect. Que durmiese, &c. that I slept, or might sleep. 

Future. CuaDdo durmiere, &c. when I sleep or shall sleep. 

E. 

Elegir, to choose, to elect. See pedir. N. B. This verb 
changes G into J before A and O to preserve the guttural 
pronunciation of the infinitive. 

Embravecerse, to become furious. See aborrecer. 

Embrutecerse, to become brutish. iSee aborrecer. 

Ernpedrarj to pave. See aceri^r. •> 

Empezar, to begin. Idem. 

Empluvr.ecer, to begin to have feathers. See 'dhorrecer. 

Empobrecer, to grow poor. Idem. 

Eaiporcar, to dirt. See a cord a r. 

Encabellecer, to begin to have hair. See aborrecer. 

Encallecer, to form a callus. Idem. 

Encalvecer, to become bald. Idem. 

Encanecer, to be greijhaired by old age. Idem. 

Encarecer, to raise the price, to exaggerate. Idem. 

Encender, to light afire. See aceriar. 

Encensar, to perfume with incense. See acertar. 



▼ ERBS. 135 

Encerrar, to shut in. Idem. 

Encouiendar, to recommend. Idem. 

Encrudecerse, to become cruel. See aborrecer. 

Encrueitfcer, to irritate, to rtndtr cruel See aborrecer. 

Encontrar, to meet^ to find. See acordar, 

Et^.cordar, to put strings and cords {to an instrument.) Idem. 

Eacubenar, to cover with a blanket. See aceriar. 

Endentecer, to breed teeth. See aborrecer. 

Eiidurecer, to grow hard. Idem. 

Enflaquecer, to gi^ow lean. Idem. 

E.'ifurecerse, to become furious. Idem, 

Erii^randecer, to s^roic, to enlarge. Idem. 

Engreirse, to adorn one's self. See pedir. 

En^rosar, to groic big. See acordar. 

Ea'oquecer, to become mad. See aborrecer. 

Eolucir, to whiten, to do over with plaster. See deslucir. 

Enmendar, to coiTCct, See acertar. 

Eomocecer, to grow young again. See aborrecer. 

Enmobecerse, to grow mouldy. Idem. 

Enmudecer, tc grow dumb, to be silent. Idem. 

Eiinegrecer, to o;row black, to blacken. Idem. 

Ennoblecer, to ennoble. Idem. 

tEonudecer, to set or to kmit, [speakijig of grain, ^'c.) Idem. 

Eorarecer, to rarefy, to become thin. Idem. 

Enriquecer, to enrich. See aborrecer. 

Eorodar, to break upon the wheel. See acordar. 

Eosan^reotar, to make bloody, *S*ee acertar. 

Ensoberbecerse, to s!;rcw proud, »S'ee aborrecer. 

Entailecer, to shoot or bud. Idem. 



Inf.pres. Entender, to understajid. 

Gerund. Entendiendo, understanding. 

Participle. Eotendido, understood. 

Ind, pres. Entiendo, entiendes, eniiende, S^u7iderstand,0T 
enleDdemos^enteDQcis, e7ii"/e?icfe?7, ( do ujiderstcmd. 
Imperfect. Entendia, &c. I did understand, 

Frtt. def Eateodi, &c. I understood. 

Future. Eatendere, <5|'c. I shall or will understand. 

r^o j'/'nv, Entenderia or entendiese, &:<:, ^ I should or would 

understand. 



136 



VERBS. 



Imperative, 
Sub. pres. 

Imperfect, 
Future, 



Entiende, entienda, 
entendamos, entended, eniiendan^ 
Que entienda, entiendas, entienda, C 
entendamos, entendais, €ntie7idan,< 



Que entendiese, &c. 
Si entendiere, &c. 



^ understand 
^ thoUy Sfc, 
that I under- 
stand or may 
(^ understand, 
that I understood or 
might understand. 
If I understand or 
shall understand. 



Enternecer, to soften, to touch, to move^ to pity. See aborrecer 

Enterrar, to bury. See acerlar. 

Entomecer orentuniecer, to swell; tostupify. See aborrecer. 

Entontecerse, to become didl, foolish, Idenj. 

Entorpecerse, to become heavy, lazy. Idem. 

Entrelucir^ to glimmer. See deslucir. 

Entreoir, to hear imperfectly. See oir, 

Entretener, to entertain. See tener. 

Entristeeer, to vex, to make sad. See aborrecer. 

Entullecer, to lose the use of one's limbs. Idem. 

Entumecerse, to swell ; to grow angry {speaking of the sea,) 

Idem. 
Envegecer, to grow old. Idem, 
Enverdecer, to paint in green. Idem. 
Envestir, to invest. See pedir. 
Envolver, to wrap up. See absolver. 
Equivaler, to be of equal value. See valer* 



Inf. Pres, 

Gerund, 

Participle. 

Ind.pres. Yergo, 



Erguir, 

Irguiendo, 

Erguido, 



to erect, to raise, 

erecting, 

erected. 



2/^^^^^ 



Imperfect, 
Pret. clef 

Future, 
Condition, 



gues, yergue, 
erguimos, erguis, yerguen^ 



erect y or do 
erect, 
1 did erect. 



I erected. 



Erguia, &c. 

Ergui, erguiste, irguio, 

erguimos, erguisteis, irguieron^ 

Ergui re, &c. I shall or will erect. 

Erguiria or irguiera^ &c. I should or would erect. 



VERBS. 137 

Imperative. Yergue, yerga, ^ ^^^^^ ^j^ n 

irgamos, erguid, yergan, ^ 
Sub. pres. Que yerga.yergas, yerga, ) that I erect, or may 

irgamosy irgais, yergan, ^ erect. 

Imperfect, Que irguiese, &c. that I erected or might erect. 
Future, Cuando irguire, &c. when I erect or shall erect. 



Inf. pres, Errar, to err, 

Ind.pres, Yerro, y err as, yerra, ^ j ^^,^ ^^ ^^ ^^.^^^ 

erramos, errais, yerren, 5 
Imperative. Yerra, yerre, ? ^^^, ^j ^^_ 

erremos, errad, yerren, ^ 

Sub, pres. Que yerre, yerres, yerre, ^ that I err or 
erremos, erreis, yerren, 3 '^^^h' ^^^^' 

N. B. All the other tenses are rej^ular. 



+Escalentar, to warm. See acertar. 

Escarmentar, to correct oneself. Idem. 

Escaruecer, to mock one. See aborrecer. 

iEsclarecer, to clear up ; to light. Idem. 

Escocer, to smart, to itch painfully. See cocer. 

Escribir, to write. (It has no irregularity but in the participle 

past, escnto.) 
E^^lorzar, to animate, to encourage. See acordar. 
Estat3lecer, to establish. »S'ee aborrecer. 
Estiegar, to scour, rub. See acertar. 

Estremecerse, to tremble, to be frightened See aborrecer. 
Esirefiir, to tie, to bind, to press close, to squeeze. See pedir. 
Espedir, to dispatch. Idem. 
Esponer, to expose. See poner. 
Extender, to spread. See entender. 
Estraer, to export, to extract. See traer. 

F. 

Fallecer, to die. See aborrecer. 
Favorecer, to fa\:our. Ideir). 

J'enecer, to finish, to die, to settle (an account.) Idem 
12* 



138 



VERBS. 



Fortaiecer, to fortify. See aborrecer. 
Forzar, to force. See acordar. 
Fregar, to wash, to clean, to furbish (plate,) 
Freir, to fry. Part, Frito. The rest like pedir. 

G. 

Gemir, to groan. See pedir. 
Gobernar, io govern. See acertar. 
Guariiecer, to furnish. See aborrecer. 

H. 

ilsiher,( impersonal) Indie, pres. Hay fl«c? Ha, there is, 
there are. The rest like the auxiliary verb haber, loith this 
difference, that the former has only the third person singular 
(See the impersonal verbs,) 

N. B. The adverb there is never expressed in this imper- 
sonal verb in Spanish. 

Inf, pres. Hacer, to do, to make. 

Gerund. Haciendo, making. 
Participle, Hecho, done. 

Ind. pres. Hago, haces, &c. I do or make, 

imperfect, Hacia, &c. I did do or make. 

Pret. def. Hice, hiciste. hizo, 7 t tj i 

^ 7- • L- / . • L- • M did or made, 

lucimos, nicisteis, hxcieron, ^ 

Future, Hart, hards, hard, P I shall or will 

hartmos, hartis, hardn^ ^ do or make. 

Condition. Haria or hiciera, &c. I should or would do, 

Imperaiive. Haz, has:a, 1 j 4i o 

^ 7 i_ J / ? do thou, Sec 

hagamos, haced, hagan, ^ 

Sub. pres. Que haga, hagas, haga, ^ that I do or 

hagamos, hagais, hagan, ^ may do. 

Imperfect. Que hiciese, that I made or might make. 

Future. Si hiciere, &c. If I do or shall do. 



Heder, to stink. See en tender. 

Helar, to freeze (impersonal.) See acertar. 

Hender, to cleave^ or split. See entender. 

Herir, to wound. See adherir. 

Herraf, to shoe or to bind about with iron work. See acertar. 



VERBS. 129 

Hervir to boil. See adherir. 
Holgar, to repose^ to do nothing. See acordar. 
Hollar, to trample under feet ; to tread. Idem. 
Humedecer, to moisten. See aborrecer. 

T. 

Impedir, to prevent. See pedir. 

Imponer, to impose. See poner. 

Indisponer, to indispose^ to vex^ — to render incapable^ 8{c. 

See poner. 
Inducir, to induce. See conducir. 
Inferh-j to infer. See adherir. 
Intervenirj to intervene. See venir. 
Introducirj to introduce. See conducir. 
Invernar, to tvinter. See acertar. 
Invertir, to transpose, to overturn^ to subvert the order^ ^c 

See adherir. 
Investir, to invest. See pedir. 
Ingerir or engerir, to graft a tree. Part, ingerto or engerto. 

See adherir. 

Inf. pres. Ir, to go. 

Gerund. Yendo, going. 

Participle. Ido, gone. 

Ind.pres. Voy^vas, va, vamos, vais, van, I go or do go. 
Imperfect. Iba, S{c. I did go. 

Pret. def Fui,fuiste,futfuimos,fuisteis, frier on, Iioent. 
Future. Ire, Sic. I shall or will go. 

Condition. Iria orfuera, &c. I should or would go. 

Imperative. Vt, vaya, > ^^^ „ ^ 

vamos, id^ vayan. 5 

Sub. pres. Que vaya, vayas, vaya, 1 that I go or 

vdyamos, vdyais, vayan, ^ may go. 

Imperfect. Que fuese, fueses, fuese, / that I went or 

fuisemos, fuiseis, fuesen^ \ might go. 

Future. Cuando fuere, ^c. when 1 go or shall go. 

N. B. All the compound tenses of this verb are corrugated 
with the verb haber and not ser. We translate theyi 
I have or am gone, I had or was gone, &c. by he ido, habia 
ido, and not by Soy ido, era ido. 



140 



VER&S. 



Inf,pres» Jugar, to play. 

Ind.pres. Juego, juegasjuega, ^ j .^^ 

jugamosj jugais, juegan^ ^ r J' 

Imperative. Juega, Juegue, 1 j tj^ ^^. 

juguemoSj jugad, juegnen^ S 

Sub, pres. Que JNegue, juegues^ juegue^ ^ that I play or 

juguemoSj jugueis, jueguen^ 5 may play , 

N. B. All the other tenses are regular. / 

L. 

Lucir, to shine. See deslucir. 

LL. 

Llover, to rain (impersonal,) Part. Llovido, rained. See 
absolver. 

M. 

tMagrecer, to grow lean, 

JVlaldecirj to cw^se, Ser bendech'. 

Manifestar, to manifest. See acertar. 

Mantener, to maintain. See tener. 

Medh'j to measure. See pedir. 

Mentar, to mention^ to name. See acertar. 

Mentir, to lie. See adherir. \ 

Mereccr, to merit. See aborrecer. 

Mereiidar, to eat a collation between dinner Mnd supper. See 

acertar. 
Mohecerse^ to make mouldy. See aborrecer. 
Moler, to grind, Par^t. molido. See absolver. 
Morder, to bite. See absolver. 
Morir, to die. Part. Muerto. See dormir. 
Mo'strar/ to shoio, S^e acordar. 
Mover, to move^ to touchy to effect. See absolver. 
Nacer, to be b:jrn. See aborrecer. 
Negarj to deny ; to refuse. See acertar. 
Negrecer^ to blacken, to bec^nne black. See aborrecer. 
Nevar; to snow, {impers,) See acertar. 



VERBS. 

o. 



141 



Obedecer, to ohei/. See aborrecer. 
Oscurecer, to ohscurey darken. Idem. 
Obtener, to obtain. See tener. 
Ofrecer^ to offer. See aborrecer. 



Inf. pres. 

Gerund. 

Participle. 



Oir, 

Oyendo, 

Oido, 



to hear, 
hearing, 
heard. 



ind. pres. 

Imperfect. 
Pret. def. 

Future. 

Condition. 

Imperative. 

Sub . pres. 
Imperfect. 
Future. 



Oigo, oyes, oye, 
Oimos, oisj oyen, 
Oia, &c. 
Oi, oiste, oyo, 
oimos, olsteis, oyeron, 



Oire, &c. 

Oiria or oyera, &c. 

Oye, Oiga, 
oigamoSy oid, oigan, 
Que oiga^ &c. 
Que oyese, &c 
Si oyerej&c. 



> I hear or do hear. 

I did hear* 

> I heard. 

I shall or will hear. 
I shoidd or would hear. 

< hear thouy 8fc. 

that I hear or may hear, 

that I heard or might hear. 

if I hear or shall hear. 



to smell or scent. 

smelling. 

smelt. 



' I smell or do smell. 



Inf. pres. Oler, 
Gerund. Oliendo, 

Participle. Olido, 

Ind. pres. HuelOy hueles^ huele, 

olemosj oleis, huelen^ ^ 
Imperative. Huele. huela. 7 77 -.t c 

olamos, oled, huelan, I ""'" *^"' ^''- 

Sub. pres. Que huela^ huelas^ huela^ ") that I smell or 

olamoSj olais, huelan, ^ may smelL 

N. B. All the other tenses are regular. 

Oponer, to oppose. See poner. 

P. 

Pacer, to feed, to graze. See aborrecer. 
Padecer, to suffer, to endure. Idem. 

S Parecer, to appear. Idem. 

I Parecerse, to resemble* Idem, 



142 



VERBS. 



Inf, pres. 

Gerund. 

Participle, 



Pedir, 

Pidiendoj 

Pedido, 



to ask, to beg, 
asking, 
asked. ■ , 



Ind. pres. Pido, pides, pide, 
^ pedimos, pedis, piden, 

Imperfect. Pedia, &c. 
Pret. def. Pedi, pediste, pidio, 

pedimos. pedisteis, pidieron, 
Future. Pedire, &c. 

Condition. Pediria or pidiera, 8fc. 
Imperative. Pide, pida, 

pidamos, pedid, pidan^ 
Sub. pres. Que pida, ^c. 
Imperfect. Que pidiese^ &c. 
Future. Cuando pidiere, &c 



> I ask or do ask. 

I did ask. 

> I asked. 

I shall or will ask. 
I should 6r would ask. 

^ ask thou, 8fc» 

that I ask or may ask. 

that I asked or might ask. 

when I ask or shall ask. 



Pensar, to think. See acertar. 
Perder, to lose. See entender. 
Perecer, to perish. See aborrecer. 
Perniquebrar, to break the legs. See acertar. 
Perseguirj to persecute, to pursue. See pedir. 
Pertenecer, to belong. See aborrecer. 
Pervertir, to pervtrt. See adherir. 



Inf. pres. Placer, 



Ind. pres. 
Imperfect. 
Pret. def. 
Sub. pres. 
Imperfect. 
Future. 



Me place, 
Placia, 
Plugo, 
Que plegue, 



to please. 

it pleases me. 

it did please. 

it phased. 

that it may please. 



N. 
sons. 



Quepluguiese or pluguiera, that it might please. 
S'l pluguiere. if it shall please. 

B. Placer is only used in the above tenses and per- 
Plegue d Dios ! May it please God ! 



Plegar, to plait or fold. See acertar. 
Poblar, to people. See acordar. 



VERB3. 143 

Inf, pres, Poder, to be able, can, may, 

Geimnd, Fudiendo, being able. 
Participle* Podido, been able, 

Ind.pres. Puedo, puedes^ puede, 5 ^ ^^ ^^^^ or 

podemos, podeis, puederiy \ I can. 

Imperfect, Podia, &;c. / was able or could. 

Pret, def, Pude^ pudiste, pudo, ^ I was able or 

pudifnos, pudisteisy pudieron, ( could. 

Future. PodrS, &c. 1 shall or will be able. 

Condition. Podria, or pudiera^Szc, I should ov would be able. 

Imperative, (wanting.) 

Sub. pres. Que pueda, puedas, pueda, ^ that I can or 
podamos, podais, puedan, ( may be able. 

Imperfect. Que pudiese, &c. that I could or might be able. 

Future. Cua.ndopudiere, &c. when I can or shall be able. 



Inf. pres. Podrir, to rot. 

Gerund. Pudriendoy rotting. 

Participle. Podrido, rotten, 

Ind.pres. Pudro. pudres. pudre. ? r - j 

A ' A i J > 1 rot or do rot. 

podrimos, podris, pudren, 5 

Imperfect. Podria, &;c. 1 did rot. 

Pret. def. Podri, podriste, pudrid^ ^ T - ff fJ 

podrimos, podristeis, pudrieron, ^ ^ 
Future. ^ Podrire, &c. I shall or will rot. 

Condition. Podriria or pudrier a ^ &c. I should or would rot. 
Imperative. Pudre, pudra, > ^^^ ^^^^ 

pudramos, podrid, pudran, ^ ' ^ ' 

Sub. pres. Que piidra^ &c. that I rot or may rot. 

Imperfect. Que pudriese^ &c. that I rotted or might rot. 
Future. Si pudricre, &c. if I rot or shall rot. 

N. B. Most tenses and persons of the above verb can only* 
be used figuratively. 



Inf, pres. Poner, to put ^ to place. 

Gerund. Poniendo, putting. 

Participle. Puesto, put or placed. 

Jnd. pres. Pongo, pones, Szc. I put or do put. 

Imperfect. Ponia, &:c. I did put. 



144 VERBS. 

Fret. def. Fuse, pusiste, puso, ) ^ 

pusimos^ pusisteiSy pusierorij 5 r^^^^^» 

Future, Fondr^y &c. J shall or z^^zV/ put. 

Condition. Fondria^ or pusiera, ^c. IsJiouldor loould put. 

Imperative. Fan, ponga, ^ ^ 

poJigamos^poned^pongan^ ^^ ? 'J*^- 

iSw^. |)re5. Que ponga^ &c. ^Aa^ J^w^ or may put. 

Imperfect. Que pusiese^ &c. that T put or might put. 

Future. Cuando pusiere^ Szc. when I put or shall put. 

Predecir, to predict. See decir. ^ 

Preferir, to prefer. See adherir. 

Proponer, to propose. See poner. 

Prescribir, to prescribe, has no irregularity hut in the par- 

ticiple past^ prescrito. 
Presentir, to foresee^ to have a forecast. See adherir, 
Presuponer, to presuppose. See poner. 
Prevalecer, to prevail. See aborrecer. 
Prevenir, to anticipate, to prepare. See venir. 
Prever, to foresee. See ver. 
Producir, to produce. See conducir. 
Proferir, to utter. See adherir. 

Promover, to promote, to elevate {to a dignity.^ See absolver. 
Proponer, to propose. See poner. 
Proscribir, to banish^ is irregular only in the participle 

past yVROSCKlTO. 

Proseguir, to pursue, to continue. See pedir. 

Probar^ to prove ; to experience ; to tastcp to try. See 

acordar. 
Provenir, to proceed, to issue. See venir. 
Proveer; to provide. *S^ee N. B. 5th. page 121. 

Q. 

Quebrar, to hrealc, to dash in pieces ; to fail, to he a bank- 
rupt. See acertar. 



Inf pres. Querer, to will, to wish^ to love. 

Gerund. Queriendo, willing. 
Farticiple. Querido, willed. 

Ind. pres Quiero, quieres, quiere, ^ I will or wish or 
queremosj quereis;, quieren, ^ do love. 



VEUBS. 145 

Imperfect. Queriaj &c. I did wish. 

Pret, def. Quise^ quisiste^ quiso, ^ I willed ov wish- 

quisimosy quisisteis^ quisieron^ 3 ed^ or loved. 
Future. Querre, &c. I shall or will wish. 

Conditio?!. Querria or quisieray &c. I should ox would icish. 
Imperative. Quiere, quiera, I j^ve thou, 8rc. 

queramos, quered quieran^ 5 
Suh. pres. Que quiera^ quierasy quiera^ 5 that I love or 

queraraosj querais quierariy ^ may love. 

Imperfect. Que quisiese^ &c. that I wished or might wish. 
Future. Si quisiere^ Sic. if I wish or shall loish. 



R. 

Rebolcar or re vol car to tumble, to welter. See acordar. 

Recaer, to fall again. See caer. 

Recocer, to bake again. See cocer. 

Recomendarj to recommend. See acertar. 

Reconocer, to acknowledge. See aborrecer. 

Reconvalecer, to recover from an illness. Idem. 

Recordar, to remember, to call to mind. See acordar. 

Recordarse, to remember. Idem. 

Recostarse, to lie or lean on one side. Idem. 

Recrecer, to groio again. See aborrecer. 

Reducir, to reduce. See conducir. 

Referir, to refer. See adherir. 

Reflorecer, to blossom again. See aborrecer. 

Reforzar, to strengthen, to i^einforce. See acordar. 

Regar, to water. See acertar. 

Regir, to govern. See pedir. 

Regoldar, to belch. See acordar. 

Rehacer, to do again. See hacer. 

Inf pres. Reir, to laugh. 

Gerund. Riendoy lau/^hing. 

Participle. Reido, laughed. 

Ind.pres. Rio, ries, rie. ? t » i 7 « , 

reimos, rels, rien, ^^ ^^^^^ ^^ do laugh. 
Imperfect. Reia, <fec. J did laugh. 

13 



146 



VERBS. 



reimosj reisteis, rieron^ \ ^ laughed. 

Future. Reire, &c. . I shall or will laugh. 

Condition. Reiria or riera^ &c. I should or would laugh. 
Imperative. Rie. ria. } i -, i c 

riamos, reid, rian, 5 ^""^ ' ^""^ 

Sub. pres. Que rm, &c. that I may laugh. 

Imperfect. Que riese^ &c. <A«« J might laugh. 

Future. Cuando riere^ &c. when Ilaugh or sAa// laugh. 



Relucir, to shine. See deslucir. 

Remanecer, to appear^ to come in suddenly, to remain. See 

aborrecer. 
Remendar, to mend, to patchy to botch. See acertar. 
Remorder, to bite again, to cause remorse. See absolver. 
Remover, to remove, to change place. Idem. 
Renacef J to be born again, to revive. See aborrecer. 
5 Rendir, to return, to subject, to enslave. See pedir. 
^ Rendirse, to surrender oneself. Idem. 
Kenegar, to deny, or disown. See acertar. 
Renovar, to renew. See acordar. 
Renir, to scold, to quarrel. See pedir. 
Repetir, to repeat. Idem. 
Reponer, to put again. See poner. 
Reprobar, to reprove. See acordar. 
Requebrar, to cajole or wheedle. See acertar. 
Requerir, to require. See adherir. 
Resentirse, to resent, to be sensible of. See adherir. 
Rescontar, to balance one part of an account with another. 

See acordar. 
Resollar, to breathe. Idem. ^ 

Resolver, to resolve. See absolver. 
Resonar, to resound. See acordar. 
Restablecer, to repair, or restore. See aborrecer. 
Retemblar, to have continual tremblings. See acertar. 
Retener, to detain. See tener. 
Retentar, to be threatened with a relapse, (speaking of 

sickness.) See acertar. 
Rptenir, to dye again. See pedir, 
Retorcer, to twist again, to retort, (an argument.) See 

cocer. 



VER^S. 147 

C RetraersGj to take refuge. See traer. 

I Retraer, to withdraw^ to draw towards oneself. Idem. 
Retrotraer, to antedate, to trace back a thing to a time pre- 
vious to its existence. See traer. 
Reventar, to burst. See acertar. 
Rever, to see again. See ver. 
Reverdecerj to grow green again. See aborrecer. 
Reverter, to return, to overflow. See entender. 
Revestir, to invest. See pedir. 
Revolar, to fly again. See acordar. 
Revolcarse, to wallow. Idem. 
Revolver, to stir, to disturb, to overthrow, to turn over. 

See absolver. 
Rodar, to roll. See acordar. 
Rogar, to pray. Idem. 



Inf.pres. Saber, to know things. 

Gerund. Sabiendo, knowing. 

Participle. Sabido, known. 

Ind. pres. S6, sabes, &c. I know or do know. 

Imperfect. Sabia, &c. I did know. 

Fret. def. Sape, supiste, supo, }. j L- 

supimos, supisteis, supieron, ^ 

Future. Sabr^, 8zc. I shall or will know. 

Condition. Sabria or supiera, &c. I should or would know. 

Imperative. Sabe, sepa. } j ., o 

^ 1 J ^ know thou^ Src. 

sepamos, sabed, sepan, 5 

Sub. pres. Que sepa, &c. that I know or may know. 

Imperfect. Que supiese, &c. that I knew or might know.^ 

Future, Si supiere, &:c. if I knoio or shall know. 

Saber bien, to relish, (speaking of meat, fruit,8fc.^ See saber. 

Inf. pres. Salir, to go out, to walk out. 

Gerund. Saliendo, going out. 

Participle, Salido, gone out. 

Ind. pres. Salgo, sales, &c. I go or do go out. 

Imperfect. Salia, &c. I did go out. 

Pret. def. Sali, &c. 1 went out. 



WP' 



148 VEBB-S. 



Future* Saldrk,^ &c. J ^liall or will go out. 

Condition, Saldria or saliera, &:c. 1 should or would go out. 
Imperative, SaL sal^a, } ^, . ^ 

salgamosy salid, saigaiiy ^ ° ' 

Sub. pres. Que salga^ saigas, saiga, ^ ^Aa^ J ^o o?/^ or 

salgamos, salgais, salgan, ^ may go out. 

Imperfect. Que saliese, &c. that I ivent out or might go out. 
Future. Cuando saliere, &c. when I go out or shall go out. 



Segar, to reap, to mow. See acertar. ' 

Seguir^, to follow. See pedir. 

N. B. This verb and its cojnpounds lose the U before A 
and O : tee sai/ consequently sigo and siga and not siguo and 
sigua. 

Sembrar, to soiv, to strew. See acertar. 

Sentarse, to sit down. Idem. 

Sentir, to feel; to perceive ; to judge ; to regret, ^ec adherir. 

Serrar, to saw. See acertar. 

Servir, to serve. See pedir. 

Sobreponer, to place above. See^ouex.. 

Sobresalir^ to surpass in height; in size ; to excel, ^c. See salir. 

Sobrevenirj to come in imlooked for. See venir. 

Soldarj to solder. See acordar. 



Inf. pres. Soler, to be wont or accustomed to. 
Gerund. Soliendo, being wont to. 
Participle. Sclido, accustomed to. 
Ind.pres. Suelo, s«eles, svele 1 j ^^ ^^^^ ^^, 

solemos, soieis, siielen, \ 
Imperative. Suele, svclu, j ^^ accustomed to. 

solamos, soled, sue Ian, ^ 
Sub. pres. Que suela, suclas, cuela, ^ that I be or may 
solamoSj solais, suelan, ^ be ivont to. 

N. B. This verb is seldom used except in the Ind. pres^ 
and Impeifect which is regular. 



Soltar, to loosen., to untie, to deliver. See acordar, 
•» SolveVj to resolve, to decide. See absolver. 



VERBS. 



149 



Sonar, to resound ^ to echo ^ to ring. iSec acordar. 

Sonarse, (las narices,) to blow one^s nose. Idem. 
Soiiar, to dream. Idem. 
Sonreifj to smile. See reir. 

Sosegar, to repose. See acertar. 

Sosegarse^ to allay one^s passion^ to tranquillize oneself. 
Idem. 

Sostener, to support. See tener. 
Soterrar, to inter, to bury. See acertar. 
Sustraer, to substract. See traer. 
Suponer, to suppose. See poner. 



Temblar, to tremble. See aceitar. 

Tender, to spread, to extend. See entender. 

Tener, to have, to Jiold. (See the auxiliary verbs for the 

conjugation of this verb.) 
Tenir, to dye. See pedir. 
Tentar, to tempt, to feel. See acertar. 
Torcer, to twist. See cocer. 
Tostar, to roast. See acordar, 
Traducir, to translate. See conducir. 

Inf. pres. Traer, to bring. 

Gerund. Trayendo, bringing. 

Participle. Traido, brought, 

Ind. pres, Traigo, traes, &c. I bring or do bring. 

Imperfect. Trala, &c. I did bring. 

Pret.def Trage,tragiste, trajo, ? j ^ j^^ 

Tragimos, tragisteis, trageron, ^ ^ 

Future. Traere, &c. I shall or will bring. 

Condition. Traeria, or tragera, <^c. I should or would bring. 

Imperative. Trae, traiffa, ? 7 • .7 o 

^ . . * V ^ • ? brinff thou, Src, 

traigamosy traed, traigan, ^ * ' ^ 

Sub. pres. Que traiga, ^c. that I bring or may bring. 
Imperfect. Que tragese, ^"c. that 1 brought or might bring. 
Future, Si tragere, 8fc. if I bring or shall bring, 

N. B. Formerly traer had truge, and trugese instead of 
those laid down in pret. def. and imp, subj. 

Transcender, to go^ to pass or ascend beyond* Seeueneert. 

13* 



150 



VIBRIOS. 



Trascender, to discover^ to peiietratej to compreliemt IdeiiL 

Trascolar, to strain, to filter, to penetrate. See acordar. 

Trascordarse de^ to forget. Idem, 

Trasegar, to put topsy tiirvy, to turn up, 8{c, See acertar. 

Trasonarj to dream, to be out ofone^s mind. Sec acordar. 

Traspoiierj to transpose. See poner. 

Trocar, to exchange. See acordar. N. B. This verb changes 

c into qu before e, 
Tronar, to thunder. See acordar. 
Tropezar, to stumble^ to inake a false step, ^ee acertar. 



Inf. pres. 

Gerund, 

Participle, 



Valer, 

Valiendo, 

Validoj 



to be vmrth, 
being icorth, 
been worth. 



Ind, p7*es. 
Imperfect, 
Fret def 
Future, 

Condition, 

Imperative, 

Sub. pres. 
Imperfect, 
Future, 



Valgo, vales, &c. 
Valia, &c. 
Vali, &c. 
Valdre, &c. 

Valdria or valiera, Sz^c, - 

Vale, valga, 
valgamos, valed, valgan, 
Que valga, S^c, that I be or may be ivorth. 
Que valiese, &:c. that I was or might be worth, 
Cuando valiere, ivhen I be or shall be loorth. 



I am iDortJt , 

I was worth. 

I loas worth. 

I shall be worth, 

I should or would 

be worth. 



be thou worth, 8^c, 



to come. 



come. 



Inf, pres, Venir, 
Gerund, Viniendo, 

Participle. Venido, 

fnd. pres. Ve»go, vienes, viene, ? ^ ^^^^^^ ^^. ^^ ^^^^^_ 

V ennnos, venis, viencn, s, 
Venla, &c. I did come. 

Vine, viniste, vino, ^ j ^^^^^^ 

vinimos, vinisteis, vinicron, ^ 
Vendre, &c. I shall or will come, 

rr J ^ • • o ^ ^ should OY WOUld 

Vendria, or viniera, &c 



Imperfect, 
Fret. def. 



Future. 

Condition, 

Imperative, 

Sub, pres. 



come, 
come thou, ^c. 



Ven, venga, 
vengamos, venid, vengan, 
Que venga^ ^x, that I come or may come 



VERB5. IjI 



Imperfect, Que vbiiess, ^'c. thai I came or might come. 
Future, Si viniercj ^'c, if I come or shall come. 



Veuirsej to come away. See venir. 



Lif, pres, Ver^ to see. 

Gerund, Viendo^ seeing. 

Participle, Visto seen, 

Ind, pres, Veo^ ves, &c. I see or do see, 

Lrroeifect, Veia, Szc, I did see. 

Fret, def Vi, &c. I saw. 

Future, Vere, &c. I shallox icill see. 

Condition. Veria or viera, &;c. I should or would see. 

Imperative. ye vea, J see thou, ^c. 

veamoSy ved, vean, ^ ' ^ 

Sub, p^-es. Que t^ea, veaSySic. that I see or ma^^ see. 

Imperfect, Que viese, &c. that J srnt' or might see. 

Future. Cuando viere, &;c. when I see or shall see, 

N. B. In the above verb the v is the onl}^ radical letter. 
See Temer second regular conjugation. 

Verter^ to pour^ to shed. See entender. 
^ Yestir, to dress, to clothe. See pedir. 
^ Vestirse, to dress oneself. Idem. 
Volar^ to fly (with wings,) See acordar. 
Yolcar, to turn, to overthrow. Idem. 
C Volver, to come bach, to return ; to turn, to send back. 
>} See absolver. 
^ VolversCj to become, to change oneself'., to turn about, 

AGREEMENT OF VERBS WITH THEIR SUBJECT. 

We call that the subject of which we affirm some thing, 
and that the attribute which is affirmed of it When we say ; 
elrcy es benefice, the king is beneficent ; the word rei/ is the 
subject of which we affirm the quality ofbenefico, which is 
the attribute. 

Rule LI. The subject is always either a noun or prououn. 
When it is a pronoun, it is almost alwa\^s suppressed in Span- 
ish, both when the phrase is affirmative and negative, as we 
'lave already stated in the N. B. upon the persons and num- 
bers of verbs, page 82. If I have to translate in Spanish the 



152 VERBS. 

words I love, thou lovest, they love, I suppress the pronouns, 
and say, amo, amas, aman ; the termination of each of these 
persons sufficiently indicates the pronoun that belongs to it, 
and which is implied. 

Exception. We often express the pronoun to give more 
energy to the phrase. We must also express it whenever its 
suppression would leave an ambiguity in speech. Ex. Yo 
lo digo, tu lo has hecho, I say it, thou hast done it . . . Pedro 
me quiere t yo le ahorrezco, &c. Peter loves me, and [ hate 
him, &c. ^ 

Rule LII. The subject, whether a noun or pronoun, is 
commonly placed before the verb. Ex. Tu padre llora y 
til ries, thy father weepest and thou laughest. 

1st Exception. In interrogative and imperative phrases, 
the subject is always placed after the verb. Ex. ^ Que pre- 
tenden pues (os nvevos reformadorcs con su sonada igual- 
dad ? What then do the new reformers pretend with their 
chimerical equality ? Hahlen las niciones donde se vieron 
tales tra&tornos ; hable la misma Fi^anria.,, JLet the nations 
where were seen such overturnings, let France herself speak. 

2d Exception. The subject is also placed after the verb, 
in the incidental phrase denoting that we quote the words of 
some one. Ex. SI teneis, decia Luis XI dsu hijo, si tenets 
la desdicha de llegar a ser rey, acordaos de que os debeis 
todo entero a lafelicidad de vucstros conciudadanos ; if you 
have, said Louis XI to his son, if you have the misfortune to 
be a king, remember that you owe yourself entirely to the 
happiness of your fellow-citizens. 

3d Exception. This inversion is also made with great 
advantage whenever it gives elegance, energy, sweetness or 
harmony to speech. Ex. / Dichosos los padres que tienen 
huenos hijos! Happy the fathers who have good children ! 
/ Feliz el reino donde viven los hombres en paz ! Happy the 
kingdom where men live in peace \ These phrases are much 
more energetic than if we said ; los padres que tienen buenos 
hijos son dichosos ; el reino donde los hombres viven en paz 
e$ feliz. 

Rule LHI. Every verb must be of the same number 
and person as its subject. Ex. Yo no s^ lo que digo, lo que 
hago, 8fc. I do not know what I say, what I do, &c. Tu 
hermano no estudia ; tus hennanos no estudian^ thy broth- 
er does not study ; thy brothers do not study. In the firist 



V.ERBS. 153 

example, se, digo and hago are in the singular number and 
in the first person, because the pronoun j/o expressed before 
the first verb, and understood before the others is in the sin- 
gular and first person. In the second, estudia is in the third 
])erson of the singular, because its subject hermano is of that 
person and number, <S:c. 

Of the regimen of verhsp 

The regimen of a verb is a word that immediately depends 
on it, and v/hich restrains or determines its signification. 

A verb may have for its regimen three kinds of words, an- 
other verb, a substantive or a pronoun. 

Of the verb as & regimen. 

A verb governs another in the infinitive either with or with- 
out a preposition ; as, quiero cstudiar^ I wish to stud}^ : 
las lenguas deben aprenderse por principios^ languages must 
be leai'ned by principles ; vengo de coiner , I come from din- 
ner ; vol/ a pasea)\ I am going to walk ; estudia para intrii- 
irse, he studies to instruct himself, &c. 

Rule LIV. In Spanish, the verb temer, to fear, when 
we do not wish the thing expressed by the second verb ; the 
verbs dudar, to doubt ; negar, to deny, forming a negati\ e 
member of a phrase; and the verb impedir, to prevent; pro- 
HiBiR, to forbid ; require the verb, which they govern, to be 
in the subjunctive mood, with the conjunction que, Temo 
que venga^ I fear he will come. No jiiego que tenga razon, 
I do not deny that he is right. hnpidiS que salieseii, he pre- 
vented their going out. 

Rule LV. In Spanish a verb governs another in the 
infinitive by the aid of the following prepositions ; a, de, con^ 
en, hasta, por.para^ entre, tras, sobre, sin, to, of or from, 
with, in or into, till or even, by, for, between, after, on or 
upon, without. Ex. Iremos a pasear despues de corner^ 
we shall go to walk after dinner; vengo de alniorzar, I come 
from breakfast ; gasto la mayor parte del tiempo enjugar y 
divert irme, I spend the greatest part of my time in playing 
and amusing myself. 

It often happens that we elegantly use in Spanish the in- 
finitive with the article eh when governed by another verb. 
Ex. Me gusta el leer novelas. Hike to read novel v 



154 VERBS. 

The Spanish verb acabar, to finish, followed by the prepo- 
sition de^ and governing the following verb in the infinhive, 
means that a thing has just been done or happened. Ex. 
Acabo de oir buenas noticiaSy I have just heard good news. 
Pedro acahaba de salir, Peter had just gone out. 

Andfir and ir^ to go, govern the verb that follows them, in 
the following phrases and others like them, in the gerund, 
without a preposition. Ex. Van or andan cant ando por las 
callesythey go singing in the streets. Loirdn diciendo a todos, 
they will go telling it to every one. / 

Of the noun substantive as regimen of the verb. 

Rule LVI. All active verbs govern in Spanish the noun 
substantive, which is the inSfnediate object of the action that 
is expressed, in the accusative with the preposition a, if this 
noun expresses a rational being or personified object ; and 
without a preposition in all other cases. Ex. amar a DioSy 
to love God ; el rey quiere a su primer ministro^ the kiiig 
loves his prime minister. Amar la virtudy to love virtue ; 
aborrecer el vicio, to hate vice. 

There are some active verbs which govern two nouns at 
the same time, but under different relations. One of these 
nouns is the immediate object of the action expressed by the 
verb, and the other is the end to which it tends. That which 
is the end of it, is always governed by the preposition a. Ex. 
Dare nn libro a Pedro, I shall give a book to Peter. The 
word libro is the object of the action expressed by the verb 
dar^y and Pedro is the end to which it tends. 

Neuter verbs in general have no regimen, because their 
signification does not extend beyond themselves ; as, nacer, 
to be born ; viver^ to live ; crecer^ to grow. 

Reflective and reciprocal verbs govern the personal pro- 
nouns which they have for their regimen in the accusative, 
and these pronouns are placed before or after the verb, ac- 
cording to the rules of objective pronouns. See pages ^b and 
5&. Ex. Jlrrepentirse, to repent ; ^e arrepiente or arrepien- 
tese, he repents, &;c. 

Of objective pronouns^ or those which are the regimen 
of verbs. 

As we already have given all the rules respecting pro- 
nouns, we refer the reader to pages 55^ 56. 



VERBS. 155 

Observations upon verbs. 

1st. The adverbs but or ouIt/, used with a verb are ren- 
dered in Spanish by solo or solamente^ or by no placed before 
the verb and sino after the same verb. Ex. I have but one 
thousand dollars, solo tengo mil pesos or no tengo sino mil 
pesos, 

2d. The Spaniards in order to express the repetition of 
an action, generally make use of the verb volver (which is 
equivalent to the English word again^ always followed by 
the preposition a, which governs the following verb in the in- 
finitive ; and volver is put in the tense and person in which 
the English verb is, which expresses the repetition of the ac- 
tion. Ex. I shall read again this book, volvere a leer este 
libro, 

3d. The pronoun zV, placed in English before the verb 
to be, is often suppressed in Spanish, and sometimes it is 
translated by the pronouns ^Z, tlla, ello. 

It is often suppressed, 1st. in these modes of speaking : it 
is enough, it is little, it is too much, it is dear ; is it enough ? 
is it little ? 8fc, es bastante, es poco, es demasiado, es caro ; 
es bastante ? es poco ? 8fc. 2d. In answers. Ex. Who has 
said that ? it is you, is it Peter, it is he, &c. Quien ha di- 
cho eso ? — es vm., es Pedro, es tl, <^'c. Or, by suppressing the 
verb and the pronoun it, we may say : vm, Fedro, tl, 8^c, 
3d. When the verb to be is followed by a noun substantive 
having after it the pronoun relative who or that ; and then 
these pronouns are translated by ^/ que, la que, los que, las 
que, according to the gender and number of the noun to 
which they refer. Ex. It was the Spaniards who conquered 
Mexico, fueron los Espanoles que conquistaron a Migico. 

In the following phrase and others of the same nature, in 
which the verb becomes the nominative of the verb to be, we 
elegantly use the article el before the verb, and suppress the 
pronoun it. Ex. It is not an easy thing to know men, 7io es 
cosafdcil el conocer d los h ombres* He knows not the value 
of science who despises it, is translated in Spanish thus, quien 
desprecia las ciencias no conoce su valor. 

In these modes of speaking : it is I who, it is thou who, it 
is he who, ^c, have, hast, or has done it or said it, we sup- 
press the pronoun it, ad place the pronoun personal before 
the verb, which is put in the same person as the pronoun that 
precedes it, and who is translated by the relative pronoun 



156 VERBS. 

quien. Yo soy, tii eres, 61 es^ quien lo ha Iiecho, quien lo 
ha dicho. 

4th. To have like, to come very near, are translated by 
estar a pique de, estar en punto de, estarpara, ox f altar poco 
para que. Ex. I had like to have been killed, estuve a 
pique, or d punto de matarme. Thy brother came very 
near falling, poco faltd para que tu hermano cayese, I 
came very near writing to thee this morning, estuve para 
escribirte esta manana. 

N. B. The que after faltar governs the following verb 
in the subjunctive, as may be seen in the above example. 

OJthe agreement of the participle past with the sub- 
ject and with its regimen. 

The participle past may be constructed with haber, tener 
or ser. 

Rule LVIl. — A¥henever the participle past is constructed 
with the verb haber, it neither takes gender nor number. 
Therefore we say ; ellos or ellah- han comprado libros^ they 
have bought books. Los libros que hemos leido, the 
books we have read. 

N. B. Haber de is in English to be obliged to ; Ex. He 
de trabajorj I must work ; and so on through all the tenses. 

Rule LVIII. — When the participle past is constructed 
with the verb tener, and is used only as auxiliary, it takes 
neither gender nor number. Ex Tengo hablado d su madre^ 
I have spoken to his mother, Tengo escrito a mi hermano^ 
I have written to my brother. 

Rule. LIX. — If the verb tener, when it serves to construct 
the participle past, is used as an active verb, the participle 
past agrees in gender and number with its direct regimen, 
Ex. Tengo escrita una carta a mi hijo, I have written a let- 
ter to my son. ha casa que mi tio tiene comprada the house 
that my uncle has bought. 

N. B. Tener que, IS in English to have to ; Ex. I have to 
do, tengo que hacer ; and so on throngh all the tenses. 

Rule LX, — When the participle past is constructed with 
the verb ser or estar, it always takes the gender and number 
of its subject. Ex. Las riqneza^ son apetecidas, riches are 
sought after. Los malos serdn casiigados^ the wicked shall 
be punished. Ella estd sentada, she is seated. 



ADVERBS. 157 

Rule LXI. — The neuter^ rejlective and reciprocal verbs 
form their compound tenses with the auxiliary verb haher^ to 
have ; and the participle past is always invariable when used 
with said auxiliary ; therefore we say, han salido, they 
are gone out ; nos hemos alahado^ we have praised ourselves ; 
Pedro y Juan se han amado siempre^ Peter and John have 
always loved one anothej. 

N. B. Morir^ to die, is conjugated in the compound ten- 
ses, either with /la^er^preceded by two pronouns of the same 
person, one the subject and the other the direct regimen, or 
with estar or ser ; in the first case the participle is invariable ; 
in the second, it takes the gender and number of the subject. 
Ex. Ella se ha muerio^ she has died. Wlos son^ or estdn 
7nuertos, they are dead ; 7ni madre es muerta^ or estd muerta^ 
or se ha muerto^ my mother is dead. 



CHAPTER VII. 

OF ADVERBS. 

The adverb is an indecHnable part of speech, which serves 
to modify the signification of another word, or express a cir- 
cumstance of it. 

N. B. Simple adverbs are generally placed after the verbs, 
and in compound tenses between the auxihary and the parti- 
ciple. 

Adverbs are simple or compound. They are simple, 
when they are expressed in one single word, and compound, 
when they are expressed in several. They are distinguished 
as adverbs of place, time^ order ^ quantity^ comparison, man- 
ner^ doubt^ affirmation^ and negation. 

Adverbs of place serve to denote distances and the situa- 
tions of persons or things ; as aqui, or acd, here where I am ; 
alhi^ there where you are ; alii or aZ/a, there where he is, 
where she is, where they are ; aculld, there, on the other 
side, on the side opposite to where you are ; cerca, near ; 
lejos, far ; donde^ where, (without motion ;) adonde, where, 
(with motion ;) dentro^ in, within ; fuera^ out, without ; 
arriba, up, up stairs ; abajo, down, down stairs ; delante. 
before ; detras^ behind ; encima^ over, above ; dehajo ; 
under, below. 
14 



158 ADVERBS. 

Adverbs of time are those which express some relation to 
time, as hoy^ to-day ; ayer^ yesterday ; mafiana^ to-morrow ; 
ahortty now ; luego^ soon ; tarde^ late ; temprano, early ; 
presto^ quick ; pronto,^ quickly ; siempre^ always ; jamasy 
or nunca^ never ; ya^ already ; mientras^ in the mean time. 

Adverbs of order express the manner in which things are 
arranged, in regard to one another, as primer amente^ firstly ; 
antes, before ; despues, afterwards, &c. 

Adverbs of quantity serve to denote the quantity of ob- 
jects, or their value ; as, mucliOj much ; poco^ little ; muy^ 
very ; liario^ hastante^ enough, sufficiently ; ^tan. so-as ; 
tan is used for tanto before a participle passive. Ex. Quien 
es TAN amado como tl? Who is as much beloved as he ? 
tanto, so much ; cuanfo, how much. 

Adverbs of comparison serve to compare objects together ; 
as, mas, more ; menos, less ; mejor, better ; peor, worse ; 
2nuy, very. N. B. This last adverb placed before a partici- 
ple past stands for much, very much, in English. Ex. Estoy 
MUY contento, or satisfecho, I am much or very much pleased. 
He was much esteemed, era muy estlmado. 

iVdverbs of manner express how and in what manner 
things are done ; they commonly hold the place of a prepo- 
sition and a noun ; (i&, prudentemente,'pY\xdeni\y', elegante- 
mente, elegantly ; which are put for con prudencia, con ele- 
gqncia, with prudence, with elegance, &c. They are also 
called adverbs of g'/ia//^!/, because they are almost all formed^ 
from adjectives, the property of which is to qualify ; the ad- 
verbs formed from adjectives are terminated in mente which 
is added to the feminine of those that terminate in o, and to 
the masculine of those that have another termination, without 
altering any thing in it ; as, constante, constant ; constante- 
mente, constantly ; sutil, subtle ; sutil-mente, artfully ; rico, 
rich ; rica-menfe, richly ; alto, high ; alta-mente, highly, &c. 
There are others, which, not being derived from adjec- 
tives, cannot follow this rule, such as, bien, well; 7nal, ill ; 
asi, thus, &c. 

There are in Spanish only two adverbs of doubt, these are, 
acaso and quizd, perhaps. 

Adverbs of affirmation are ; si, yes ; ciertamcnte, cierto, 
certainly ; verdaderamente,ix\i\y] indubitablemenfe,undonbt' 
edly, &c. 



ADVERBS. 159 

Adverbs of negation are ; ?»o, no, not ; nada^ nothing, &:c., 
and are always placed in Spanish before the verb, and in 
■compound tenses before the auxihary. 

Observations upon jamas, nunca, no, mas, mends and muy. 

1st. Jamas is used in the same sense as nunca ; thus, we 
say ; jamas le hahlarc^ I never shall speak to him ; jamas vi 
tal cosa, I never saw any thing like. It is often joined tQ 
nunca^ por siempre, or para siempre^ to give more strength 
and energy to the phrase ; as, nunca jamas lo hare^ I never 
shall do it ; yor siempre or para siempre jamas me acordare 
de tiy I shall ever remember thee. We see by these exam- 
ples that, when it is joined to ^zz^nca, it signifies never; and 
that on the contrary, it has the signification of eternally^ 
w^hen it is joined to por siempre^ ov para siempre. Jamas is 
EVER, in English, in interrogations. Ex. Do you ever read ? 
Lee vm. jamas ? 

2d. No does not always serve to deny ; this word serves 
sometimes on the contrary to give more force to the affir- 
mation and to make the opposition that exists between the 
two objects compared more striking ; as, mejor es la virtud 
que NO las riquezas, virtue is preferable to riches. 

Remark. Two negative adverbs do not always destroy 
each other in Spanish ; on the contrary, they often serve to 
add to the strength of the negation. Consequently we say ; 
NO he visto a nadic^ I have seen nobody, no hay ninguno, 
there is nobod}^ ; and not, no he visto alguno ; no hay algu- 
no ; but care must be taken to observe that, in order to 
make use in the same phrase of this double negation, no must 
precede the verb, and the other negative must follow it, as in 
the above examples. If any other negative than no precede 
the verb, no is not expressed. We say, and very properly ; 
JAMAS oi voz mas harmoniosa, I never heard a more harmo- 
nious voice ; nada quiero, I wish for nothing; but we cannot 
s^Wy jamas no oi voz mas harmoniosa ; no nada quiero. Fi- 
nally, it is necessary to suppress the negative no, and place the 
negative adverb before the verb, or separate the two negatives 
in such a manner that no should precede the verb, and the 
other negative word should follow it ; as, jamas te hablar^, 
or NO te hahlare jamas, I never shall speak to thee ; nadje 
te Quiere, or no te quiere nadie, nobody loves thee ; the first 



l60 ADVERBS. 

construction is the most elegant. Ninguno. no body, not any 
body. 

3d. When several adverbs terminating in mcnte^ are 
Ibund in the same phrase, all of them except the last, lose 
the termination mente. The object of this rule is to avoid 
repetitions disagreeable to the ear. Instead therefore of say - 
ing ; hahlan sahiarnente ^j elocueniemente ; escribe claramenie^ 
concisamente y legantemente^ we say ; hahJan sahia y elocu- 
cntemente ; escribe clara^ concisa^ y legantemente ; they 
speak wisely and eloquently ; they write clearly, concisely 
and elegantly. 

4th. Mas^ more ; menoSj less ; are also used to qualify 
substantives. Ex. El es mas liomhrey or, menos hombre que 
su hermanOy he is more a man or less a man than his brother. 

5th. May serves also to qualify substantives. Ex. Muy 
amigo mioy very much my friend ; muy senor mioy dearest 
sir ; nuiy caballero^ very much a gentleman. 



CHAPTER VIIT. 



OP PREPOSITIONS. 



Frepositions serve to express or denote the different rela- 
tions which persons or things have with each other ; they 
are fixed and invariable ; and have neither gender nor num- 
ber. Alone, they make no sense ; and in order that they 
may signify something, it is necessary that they be followed 
by a regimen expressed or understood. 

The prepositions most used in the Spanish language are the 
following ; a, anie^ con, contra^ de, desde, en, entre^ hdcitty 
hnstcij para, por, segun, sin, sobre, tras ; to or at, before, 
v/ith, against, of or from, since, in, between or among, towards, 
till or until, for, by or for, according to, without, upon, behind 
or after. Tbey have in Spanish the same use as in English, 
except the prepositions para, por, sobre and tras^ which 
require some observations. 

Observations upon para and por, for^ bij. 

The English preposition by presents no difficulty, it is al- 
ways rendered in Spanish hy por, Ex. The world has been 
created by God ; el mundofut criado por Dios. 



PREPOSITIONS. li)! 

jBut it IS not the same with the English preposhion for, it 
is sometimes rendered by the preposition para, and some- 
times by the preposition por ; and we cannoi use indifferently 
one for the other. The following rules will direct the learner 
respectincf the use to be made of the words ^^ara and por^ ac- 
cordinof to the different cases. 

Rule LXII. — The preposition /or is translated hy para 
when it denotes, 1st. that an action is directed towards a 
person or thing. Ex. This letter is for John, esta carta e$ 
para Juan, 2d. Motion towards a place. Ex. I set out for 
Italy, salgo para Italia. 3d. A particular time, or fixed 
term, to which an action is referred. Ex. We shall leave it 
for to-morrow, lo chjaremos para mahana. 4th. The relation 
that a person or thing has with another. Ex. He has not 
done it ill for a. beginner ; para un principiante no lo ha 
heclio mal, 

N. B. 1st. AVhen the preposition for serves to express 
the end that we propose, it may be translated, either by para 
or por J we say ; I work to gain, trahajo por or para ^-a/mr. 
2d. To be about — is translated by estar para^ and the fol- 
lowing verb is put in the present of the infinitive. Ex. 1 
am about setting out, estoi/ para partir. In respect to — in 
comparison icith — are translated hy para con., — Ex. What is 
the creature in comparison ivithy or in respect to his creator ? 
Ouien es la criatura para con su criador ? Among is ele- 
ganth' rendered in the following phrase, and others like it, by 
para entre. Ex. Among friends compliments are always 
useless, para entre amigos los cumpUniientos son siempre es- 
cusados. Para is also used before some adverbs, for we say ; 
para ahora lo quieroj I wish for it now ; para cuando venga^ 
taken lie shall come ; para dentro de un rues, within a 
month ; para entonces lo ver^mos, we shall then see him. 

Rule LXIII. — The preposition /or is translated hy por 
when it serves to express, 1st. the time that a thing has last- 
ed or wiU last. Ex. I leave Z\Iadrid/or one month, salgo de 
Madrid por un mes. 2d. When it is equivalent to in favor 
of — Ex. I shall speak for thy brother, hablare por tu her- 
mano, 3d. When it signifies in the place of as substitute 
of — Ex. I attend /or my friend, cisisto por mi amigo, 4th. 
When it ser\'es to express an exchange. I woiud give my 
coat /or thine, daria mi vestido por el tuyo. 
14* 



162 



PREPOSITIONS. 



We also use the preposition jpor in the following modes of 
speaking ; iniYie inorning, por la manana ; in\he afternoon, 
por la tarde / such a thing is not yet done, tal cosa estd por 
hacer / to go for, ir por; he goes for wine, va por vino ; to 
pass for, estar tenido por ; — he passes jTor a wicked man, estd 
tenido por malo. 

Observations upon sob re and tras. 

These prepositions sohre and tras are frequently used be- 
fore verbs, which they govern in the infinitive. Ex. Sobre 
ser reo convicto^ qiiiere que le premien, he has been found 
guilty, and yet he wishes to be rewarded. Tras ser cidpado, 
€s 61 que mas levanta el gritOy he is guilty and yet raises his 
voice the loudest. Ir tras, to go after. 

Prepositions tvhich^ in Spanish^ govern the folloxving 
noun in the genitive. 

Before, antes Before the time, antes del tiempo. 

After, despues After you, despues de vm. 

Within, dentro Within tw^o years, dentro de dos anos. 

Except, fuera Except my father, fuera de mi padre. 

Besides, ademds Besides the money, ademds del dinero. 

Near, cerca Near the door, ccrca de la puerta. 

Across, por el medio Across the iields, por el medio de 

los campos. 
At, in the, en casa At my brother's, en casa de mi her- 

mano ; at home, en mi casa ; in thy house, en tu casa ; 

at our home, en nuestra casa. 
Notwithstanding, in spite of, d pesar In spite of you, 

dpesar de vm. 
Opposite, frente a, en f rente de Opposite his house, 

en f rente de su casa. 
By the side of, al lado By the side of the king, al lado 

del rey. 
Behind, detras Behind the chest of drawers, detras del 

armario. 

Upon, encima Upon the bed, encima de la cama. 

Under, debajo Under the bridge, dehajo delpuente. 

The following prepositions govern the dative. 

As respects, en orden d As respects what you say, en or- 

den a In que vm, dice. 



PREPOSITIONS. 



163 



Adjoining, junto Adjoining the garden, junto aljardin. 

Concerning, tocante Concerning this affair, tocante a 

esta pendencia* 

Almost all the other prepositions govern the noun in Span- 
ish in the same case as in English. 

In addition to the preceding directions for the use of 
prepositions, we ought not to omit the following table taken 
from the Grammar of the Spanish Academy, which teaches 
at once how the prepositions govern and are governed. We 
advise students to commit this table to memory. 

TABLE. 



Abalanzarse d los peligros 

abaiidonarse d la suerte 

abocarse con alguno 

abochornarse de, algo 

abog^ar joor alguno 

abordar (uoa nave) a, con otra 

aborrecible a las gentes 

aborrecido de todos 

abrasarse en deseos 

abrirse «, con los amig-os 

abstenerse de la fruta 

abundar de, en riquezas 

aburrido dt las desgracias 

abusar de la amistad 

acabar de venir 

acaecer d alguno 

acaecer en tal tiempo 

acalorarse en, con la disputa 

acceder d la opinion de otro 

accessible d todos 

acertar a, con la casa 

acogerse d sagrado 

acomodarse a, con otro dictamen 

acorapanarse con otros 
acoBsejarse con, de sabios 
acontecer d los incautos 
acordarse de lo pesado 
acordarse con los coTitrarios 
acostuoibrarse a trabajos 
acre de genio 
acreditarse dt necio 
acreditarse con, para alguDo 



to rush on dangers 
to abandon oneself to chance 
to confer with any one 
to be chagrined with any thing 
to plead for any one 
to bring one ship to another 
hateful to the people 
detested by all 
to be inflamed with desires 
to open oneself to one's friends 
to abstain from fruit 
to abound with, or in riches 
weary with one's ill fortune 
to abuse friendship 
to be just come 

something to happen to any one 
to happen at such a time 
to grow warm in a dispute 
to accede to another's opinion 
accessible to all 
to find out the house 
to have recourse to a church 
to conform oneself to another opin- 
ion 
to keep company with others 
to be advised by wise men 
to happen to the unwary 
to remember the past 
to agree with opponents 
to accustom oneself to works 
austere in temper 
to prove one's own folly 
to ^^i credit with one 



164 



PREPOSITIONS. 



acreedor a la confianza worthy of confidence 

acreedor de alguno any one's creditor 

actuarse rfe, en los negocios to acquaint oneself with business* 

acusar (a alguno) de algun delito to accuse any one of any crime 

acusarse de las culpas to accuse oneself of faults 

adelantarse a otros to advance others 

adherirse d otro dictamen to adhere to another opinion 

adolecer de alguna enferraedad to be ill of some disorder 



aferrarse en, con su opinion 
aferrarse (una nave) con otra 
aficionarse «, de alguna cosa 
aSrmarse en lo dicho 
ageno de verdad 
agradable al paladar 
agradecido d los beneficios 
agraviarse de alguno 
agraviarse de la sentencia 
agregarse a otros 
agrio al gusto 
agudo de ingenio 
ahitarse de manjares 
ahogarse en el mar 
ahorcajarse en las espaldas 
ahorrar de razones 
ahorrarse (no) con ninguno 
airarse con alguno 
ajustarse a la razon 
ajustarse con alguno 
alabarse de valiente 
alargarsc d la ciudad 
alegrarse de algo 
alejarse de su tierra 
alimentarse de, con yerbas 
alimentarse de e^peranzas 
alindar con otra heredad 
allanarse d lojusto 
alto de cuerpo 
amable a todos 
amancebarse con los libros 
araante de alguno 
amanarse a escribir 
amoroso con los suvos 



to be positive in one's own opinion 

one ship to grapple another 

to be fond of any thing 

to affirm what has been said 

foreign to truth ^ 

agreeable to the palate 

grateful for benefits 

to be affronted with any one 

to appeal from the sentence 

to unite oneself to others 

sour to the taste 

witty or sharp 

to surfeit oneself with food 

to be drowned in the sea 

to get upon one's back 

to spare words 

not to spare any man 

to be angry v/ith any body 

to be right inclined 

to make it up with any one 

to boast of bravery 

to hasten to the city 

to be rejoiced at any thing 

to leave one'« country 

to subsist upon herbs 

to feed oneself with hopes 

to be contiguous to another's estate 

to submit to what is just 

tall in stature 

amiable to all 

to be fond of books 

a lover of some one 

to be clever in writing 

kind with one's relations 



ampararse de algo, de alguna cosa to take possession of anything 



ancho de boca 

andar con el tiempo 

andar de capa 

andar en pleitos 

andar a gatas 

andar por tierra 

angosto de manga 

anhelar a, por mayor fortuna 

antic ip arse d otro 



wide mouthed 

to accommodate oneself to time 

to walk with a cloak on 

to be litigious 

to go all fours 

to be humbled to the ground 

tight sleeved 

to covet better fortune 

lo anticipate another 



PREPOSITIONS. 



166 



aovar en la libera 
aparar en la mano 
aparecerse a alg^uno 

aparecerse en el camino 

aparejarse para el trabajo 
apartarse de la ocasioii 

apartarse a un lado 
apasioriarse a, de, por alguno 
apearse de su opinion 
apechugar con alguna cosa 
apechugar por los peligros 
apedrear con las palabras 
apegarse a alguna cosa 
apelar de la sentencia 
apelar d otro medio 
apercibirse de armas 
apercibirse a, para la batalla 
apetecible al gusto 
apetecido de, por todos 
apiadarse de los pobres 
aplicarse d los estudios 
apoderarse de la hacienda 
apostar a correr 
apresurarse d venir 
apresurarse por alguna cosa 
apretar por la cintura 
aprobarse en alguna facultad 
aprobado de cirujano 
apropiado para el oficio 
apropiarse d si 

apropincuarse d alguno 
aprovechar en la virtud 
aprovecharse de la ocasion 
apto para el empleo 

apurado de medios 

aquietarse en la disputa 

arder en deseos 

arderse en quimeras 

aimarse de pacieucia 

arrebozarse con algo 

arrecirse de frio 

arreglarse a las leyes 

airegostarse d alguna cosa 

arremeter d,con, contra, el muro 

arrepentirse de las culpas 

arrestarse d todo 

arribar d tierra 

arrimarse d. la pared 

arrinconarse en casa 



to lay eggs on the sea-shore 

to receive with the hand 

to present oneself suddenly before 

any one 
to present oneself suddenly on the 

road 
to prepare for work 
to separate oneself from the occa- 
sion 
to retire on one side 
to be enamoured with an}^ one 
to change one's opinion 
to undertake anything with spirit 
to brave dangers 
to abuse any one with words 

to adhere to anything 

to appeal from the sentence 

to have recourse to another measure 

to provide oneself with arms 

to get ready for battle 

desirable to the palate 

desired by all 

to have compassion on the pooir 

to apply oneself to study 

to take possession of the property 

to lay a wager on a race 

to make haste to come 

to make haste for something 

to take fast hold by the waist 

to be approved in any faculty 

approved as a surgeon 

adapted to the office 

to appropriate to oneself 

to approach any one 

to improve in virtue 

to seize the opportunity 

fit for the employment 

exhausted of means 

to grow quiet in the dispute 

to burn with desires 

to be full of quarrels 

to arm onself with patience 

to muffle oneself up in anything 

to be benumbed with cold 

to conform to the laws 

to be inclined to anything 

to assault the wall 

to repent of sins, faults 

to be enterprizingin everything" 

to arrive at land 

to lean against the wall 
to keep oneself immured 



m-^w 



166 



PREPOSITIONS. 



arrog-arse (algo) d si mismo 
arrojarse a pelear 
arroparse con la capa 
arrostrar d, con los peligros 
asarse de calor 
ascender d otro empleo 
asegurarse de su contrario 
aseotir d otro dictamen 
asesorarse con letrados 
asistir d los enfermos 
asistir en tal casa 
asociarse d, con otro 
asoraarse a, por la ventana 
asparse a gritos 
asparse /?or alguna cosa 
aspero al gusto 
aspero en las palabras 
aspirar d mayor fortuna 
atarse d una sola cosa 
■atemorizarse de, por algo 
atender d la conversacion 
atenerse d lo seguro 
atento con sus mayores 
atestiguar con otro 
atinar ^, con la casa 
atollarse en los caminos 
atraer d si 

atreverse a cosas grandcs 
atreverse con todos 
atribuir d otro 

atribularse en, con los trabajos 
atropellarse en las acciones 
atufarse en la conversacion 
atufarse por poco 
aunarse con otro 
ausentarse rfe Madrid 
avecindarse en algun pueblo 
avenirse con todos 
aventajarse ^ otros 
avergonzarse d pedif 
avergonzarse de algo 
averiguarse con alguno 
aviarse de ropa 
avocar (algunacosa) d si 



Balancear rf tal parte 
balancear en la duda 
balar por dinero 
bambolear en la maroma 
baiiarse en a?ua 



to appropriate anything to oneself 
to rush on to fight 
to cover oneself with a cloak 
to face danger 
to be scorched with heat 
to ascend to another office 
to shelter oneself from one's enemy 
to assent to another's opinion 
to seek council from learned men 
to assist the sick 
to attend such a bouse 
to associate onself with another 
to look out at the wmdow 
to be exhausted with roaring 
to torment oneself for anything 
rough to the taste 
rude in conversation 
to aspire to better fortune 
to tie oneself to one thing alone 
to be afraid of something 
to attend to the conversation 
to keep to the side of safety 
respectful to one's superiors 
to testify with another 
to hit upon the house 
to stick fast in the road 
to attract to oneself 
to animate oneself to great things 
to dare every body 
to attribute to another 
to be afflicted with labour, troubles 
to overhasten actions 
to take pet in conversation 
to be afiVonted at a trifle 
to unite oneself with another 
to absent oneself from Madrid 
to take up one's abode in any town 
to agree with all 

to gain the advantage over other s 
to be ashamed at asking 
to be ashamed of anything 
to agree with any one 
to furnish oneself with clothes 
a superior to call a cause from an 
inferior court to his own. 

B. 

to hesitate on such a side 
to fluctuate in doubt 
to wish for money 
to dance on the rope 
to bathe oneself in water 



PREPOSITIONS. 



167 



barar en tierra 
barbear con la pared 
bastardear de su naturaleza 
bastardear en sus acciones 
batallar con los enemigos 
bajat a la cueva 
bajar de la torre 
bajar de la autoridad 
bajar hdcia el valle 
bajo de cuerpo 
benefice d^para la salud 
bianco de ciitis 
blando de corteza 
blasfemar dt la virtud 
blasonar de valiente 
bordar (alg-o) de, con, plata 

bordar (algo) al tambor 
bordar de pasados 
bostezar de bambre 
boto de punta 
boyante en la fortuna 
bramar de corage 
brear a chasco 
bre^ar con alguno 
brindar con reg-alos 
brindar a la salud de alguno 
bueno de, para comer 
bufar de. ira 

bullir en, por todas partes 
burlarse de algo 



to run aground 

to reach a wall with one's chin 

to degenerate from his nature 

to be degenerated in one's actions 

to fight with the enemy 

to go down to the cellar 

to descend from the tower 

to recede from authority 

to descend towards the valley 

low in stature 

beneficial to the health 

of a white complexion 

of a soft skin, bark 

to blaspheme against virtue 

to boast of bravery 

to embroider any thing in or with 

silver 
to embroider on a tambour frame 
to interweave 
to gape through hunger 
blunt at the point 
to be fortunate 
to roar w^ith anger 
to vex with tricks 
to struggle with any one 
to offer presents 
to toast to any one's health 
good to eat 
to swell with anger 
to move in all parts 
to make a jest of any thing 



Caber de pies 
caber e^i la mano 

caer d, hdcia tal parte 

caer de lo alto 

caer en tierra, en cuenta, en 

error, en tal tiempo, en lo que 

se dice 

caer por pascua 
caer sobre los enemigos 
calarse de agua 
caleutarse a la lumbre 
calificar de docto 

callar (la verdad) a otro 
callar de, por miedo 
caluraniar (a alguno) de injusto 



to be able to stand on one's feet 

to be able to be contained in the 
hand. 

to fall on such a side 

to fall from on high 

to fall upon the earth, to compre- 
hend, to fall into a mistake, to 
fall out at such a time, to under- 
stand what is said 

to fall at Easter 

to fall upon the enemy 

to wet oneself through with water 

to warm oneself at the fire 

to qualify any one as a learned 
man 

to conceal the truth from another 

to be silent from fear 

to calumniate any one as unjust 



168 



PREPOSITIONS. 



dentro de casa 

depender de alguno 

deponer (a alguno) de su empleo 

depositar (algo) en alguna parte 
derivar de otra autoridad 
derreuegar de alguna cos a 
desabrirse con alguno 
desabrocbarse con alguno 

desagradecido a algun boneficio 
desahogarse (con alguno) de su 

pena 
desapropiarse de algo 
drsavenirse con alguno 
desavenirse (unos) de otros 
desayunarse de alguna noticia 
descabezarse en, con alguna cosa 
descalabazarse en alguna cosa 

descansar de la fatiga 
descantillar (algo) de alguna cosa 

descargarse de algnna cosa 
descartarse de algun encargo 
descender a los valles 
descender de buen linage 
descolgarse de. por la muralla 
descollar sobre otros 
desconiponerse con alguno 
desconfiar de alguno 
desconocido d los beneficios 
descontar (algo) de alguna cosa 
descubrirse con alguno 
descuidarse de, en su obligacion 
desdecir de su caracter 
desdecir de lo diclio 
desdenarse de alguna cosa 
desembarazarse de estorbos 
desembarcar de la nave 
desenibarcar en el puerto 
desenfrenarse en vicios 
desertar de las banderas 
desesperar de la pretension 
desfalcar falgo) de alguna cosa 
desgajarse de los montes 
deshacerse d trabajar 
deshacerse de alguna cosa 
deshacerse en llanto 
desmentir d alguno 
desmentir (una cosa) de otra 
desnudarse de pasiones 



within the house 
to depend upon any body 
to depose any body from his em- 
ployment 
to deposit any thing in any place 
to derive authority from another 
to detest any thing 
to have a difference with any body 
to divulge one's own secret to an- 
other 
ungrateful for any benefit 
to communicate one's trouble to 

another / 

to alienate any tbing 
to disagree with any one 
some to disagree with others 
to take notice of any thing 
to labour hard in vain 
to puzzle one's wits to find out enay 

thing 
to relieve oneself from fatigue 
to break off the corner of any 

thing 
to clear oneself from any thing 
to excuse oneself from any charge 
to descend to the vallies 
to come of a good family 
to creep down the wall 
to surpass others 
to disagree with any one 
to mistrust any one 
ungrateftd for benefits 
to discount one sum from another 
to disclose oneself to any one 
to neglect one's obligation 
to deviate from one's character 
to retract what one has said 
to disdain any thing 
to get rid of obstacles 
to unship, unload 
to land in the harbour 
to abandon oneself to vices 
to desert the standard 
to despair of one's pretension 
to take away from another thing 
to fall from the mountains 
to work with anxietv 
to get rid of any thing 
to burst into tears 
to give any one the lie 
one thing to contradict another 
to conquer one's passions 



DEPOSITIONS. 



169 



despedirse de alguna cosa 
despeiiarse de ua monte 
despertar d algilno 
despertar dtl sueno 
despicarse de la ofensa 
despoblarse de gente 
desposarse con alguno 
desprenderse de af^o 
despues de llegar, de alguno, de 

alg^una cosa 
des(|uisciar (a alguno) de su poder 
desquitarse de la perdida 
desterrar (k uno) de su patria 
destrizarse a llorar 
destrizarse de enfado 
desvergonzarse con alguno 
desviarse del camiiio 
desvivirse por algo 
detenerse en dificultades 
determinarse a partir 
detras de la iglesia 
devolver (la causa) aZ juez 
dejar (una manda) d alguno 
dejar de escribir 
dejar (algo) en mano de otro 

diferir (algo) a, para otro tiempo 
dignarse de conceder algo 
dimanar (una cosa) de otra 
discernir (una cosa) de otra 
disgustarse de, con alguna cosa 
disponer de los bienes 
disponerse a caminar 
disputar de, sobre alguna cosa 
disentir de otro dictamen 
distar (un pueblo) de otro 
distinguir (una cosa) de otra 

distraerse de, en la conversacion 
disuadir (a alguno) de alguna cosa 
dividir (una cosa) de otra 
dividir en partes 
dividir entre muchos 
dividir por mitad 
dolerse de los pecados 
dotado de ciencia 
dudar de alguna cosa 
durar hasta el invierno 
durar por mucho tiempo 
duro de corteza 

15* 



to take leave of anything 

to fall headlong from a mountain 

to awake any one 

to awake from sleep 

to be revenged of an affront 

to become unpeopled 

to marry any on p. 

to get rid of something 

after arriving, after any one, after 

any tning 
to ueprive any one of his authority 
to make up for one's loss 
to banish any one from his country 
to consume oneself with weeping 
to consume oneself with anger 
to take liberties with any body 
to lose one's way 
to be anxious for something 
to be stopped by difficulties 
to take a resolution to set out 
behind the church 
to let the cause devolve to the judge 
to bequeath to any one 
to leave off writing 
to deposit something in the hands 

of another 
to defer any thing to another time 
to condescend to grant any thing 
to emanate one thing from another 
to discern one thing fronfanother 
to be disgusted with any thing 
to dispose of goods 
CO prepare oneself to travel 
to dispute on any thing 
to dissent from another's opinion 
to be distantjOne town from another 
to distinguish one thing from an- 
other 
to wander in conversation 
to dissuade any one from any thing 
to divide one thing from another 
to divide in parts 
to divide between several 
to divide into halves 
to repent of sins 
endowed with learning 
to doubt any thing 
to last till winter 
to last a long time 
of a rough skin, bark 



170 



PREPOSITIONS. 

E 



echar (algo) de, en, for tierra 
echar (olor) de si 
elevarse a, hasta el cielo 
elevarse de la tierra 
embarcarse en ne^ocios 



to throw any thing on the earth 

to exhale an odour 

to be exalted to the skies 

to be elevated from the earth 

to be involved in business 



embobarse con^ de, en alguna cosa to be stupefied with any thing 
emboscarse en el monte to lie in ambush on a hill 

embutir (alguna cosa) de algodon to inlay any thing with cotton 



embutir (una cosa) en otra 
enmendarse con la correccion 
enmendarse de, en alguna cosa 
erapaparse en agua 
emparejar con alguno 
emparentar con alguno 
empenarse en una cosa 
empenarse for alguno 
emplearse de alguna cosa 
enagenarse de alguna cosa 
enamorarse de alguno 
enamoricarse de alguno 
encallar (la nave) en arena 



to inlay one thing with another 
to be amended by correction 
to correct oneself in any thing 
to be soaked with watei 
to put one on a level with any one 
to be related to any one 
to pledge oneself to do a thing 
to take part for another 
to employ oneself about a thing 
to alienate any thing 
to be enamoured with any one 
to fall in love with any one 
to run a ship on shore, or on the 
sand 

encaminarse a alguna parte to direct one's course to any part 

encaramarse en,por,sobre la pared to climb up the wall 
encararse a, con alguno to face another 

encargarse de algun negocio to charge oneself with any business 

encasquetarse (algo) en la cabeza to be obstinate in maintaining an 

idea 



encastillarse eri alguna parte 
encajarse e?ij 7?or alguna parte 
encenagarse tn vicios 
encenderse en ira 
enrerrarse e?i su casa 
encharcarse en agua 
encomendarse a Dios 
enconarse con alguno 
enfermar del pecho 
enfrascarse en la disputa 
engolfarse en cosas graves 
engreirse con la fortuna 
enlazar (alguna cosa) con otra 



to fortify oneself in any place 

to busy oneself in any thing 

to be vicious 

to kindle with anger 

to shut oneself up in one's house 

to drink too much water 

to commend oneself to God 

to be irritated against any one 

to have a pain in the breast 

to entangle oneself in a dispute 

to be absorbed in important things 

to become vain with fortune 



to tie one thing close to another 
enredarse (una cosa) con, en otra to interweave one thing with an- 
other 



ensayarse a, joara alguna cosa 
ensayarse en alguna cosa 
entender de alguna cosa 
entender en sus negocios 
enterarse de alguna cosa 
enterarse en algun negocio 



to try to do any thing 
to become expert in any thing 
to understand any thing 
to understand one's business 
to be well informed of any thing 
to be well acquainted with any 
business 



PREPOSITIONS. 



in 



entrar en alguna parte 
entregar (algo) a algnno 
entreineterse en cosas de otro 
enviar (algo) a alg-uno 
eqiiivocarse (una cosa) con otia 
equivocarse en algo 
escaparse de la prision 
escaparse por la ventana 
escarraeatar c?e, con alguna cosa 
escarmentar en cabeza agena 

esconderse en algiino parte 

esconderse de alguno 

escaso de medios 

escribir (cartas) a alguno 

esculpir en bronce 

esmerarse en alguna cosa 

espantarse de algo 

estampar en papel 

estar a la orden de otro 

estar de viage 

estar en alguna parte 

estar en animo de 

estar en lo que se hace 

estar para salir 

estar por alguno 

estar (alguna cosa) por suceder 

estrecharse con alguno 

estrecharse en los gastos 

estrellarse con alguno 



to enter into any part 
to deliver something to some one 
to meddle with another's affairs 
to send something to some one 
to mistake one thing for another 
to be mistaken in any thing 
to escape from prison 
to escape through the window 
to take warning at any thing 
to take warning at another's ex- 
pense 
to hide oneself in any place 
to hide from any one 
limited in means 
to write letters to any one 
to engrave on brass 
to exert oneself in any thing 
to be terrified at any thing 
to print on paper 
to be under another's direction 
to be on a journey 
to be in some place 
to have a mind to 
to know what is doing 
to be ready to go out 
to be in favour of any one 
something to be near happening 
to become intimate with any one 
to restrain oneself in one's expenses 
to fall out with any one 
estrellarse en, contra alguna cosa to dash oneself against any thing 
estribar en alguna cosa to be supported in any thing 

esceder (una cosa) a otra one thing to excel another 

esceder(unacantidad)en mil reales a sum to exceed one thousand rials 
esceptuar(a alguno)^e alguna cosa to except any one from any thing 
esclnir (a alguno) de alguna parte to exclude any one from any place 

6 cosa or thing 

escusarse con alguno to apologize to any one 

escusarse de hacer alguna cosa to excuse oneself from doing any 

thing 
exhortar (a alguno) a tal cosa to exhort any one to such a thing 
eximir (a alguno) de alguna cosa to exempt any one from any thing 
exoneiar (a alguno) de su empleo to dismiss any one from his place 
espeler (a alguno) de alguna parte to expel any one from any place 
esperto en las artes skilled in the arts 

estraer (una cosa) de otra to extract one thing from another 

estraviarse de la carrera to deviate from one s purpose 



facil de digerir 
faUar d la palabra 
faliar de alguna parte 



easy to digest 

to fail in one's promise 

to be missing 



172 



PRfePOSlTlON^. 



falto rfe juicio 
fasridiarse de manjares 
fatigarse de, en, por alguna cosa 
favorable ft, para alguno 
favorecerse de alguno 
fiarse de, en algiino 
fiar (algo) a alguno 
fiel a, C071 sus amigos 
fijar (a^go) en la pared 
flexible a la razon 
fluctuar en, enire dudas 
fortificarse en alguna parte 
franquearse a, con alguno 
frisar(una persona 6 cosa) con otra 

fuera de casa 
fuerte de condicion 
fundarse en razon 



wanting sense 
to be disgusted with victuals 
to long for something 
favourable to some one 
to avail oneself of any one 
to confide in any one 
to trust any thing to any one 
faithful to one's friends 
to fix any thing in the wall 
pliant to reason 
to fluctuate in doubt 
to strengthen oneself in any place 
to open oneself to any one 
to be of the same genius with an- 
other 
out of the house 
of a high temper 
to be founded in reason 



G. 

girar (una letra) a cargo de otro to value upon another 

girar de una parte a otra to reel from one side to another 

girar por tal parte to reel on such a side 

girar 5o6re una casa de comercio to draw upon a commercial house 

gloi iarse de algupa cosa to boast of any thing 

gordo de talle fat or lusty 

gozar de alguna cosa to relish any thing 

graduar (una cosa) de, por buena to pronounce any thing as good 

grangear (la voluntad) d,de alguno to gain the affections of any one 

guardarse de alguno, rfc alguna to guard oneself from any one,frora 

cosa any thing 

guarecerse de alguna persona 6 to take shelter from any person or 

cosa thing 

guarecerse en alguna parte to take shelter in any place 

guarnecer (una cosa) co7if de otra to garnish one thing with another 

guiado de alguno guided by any one 

guiarse por alguno to guide oneself by any (floe 

guindarse por la pared to descend bv the wall 

gustar de alguna cosa to like any thing 

H. 

skilful in documents 

qualified for the employment 

to enable any body to do any thing 

to dwell with any one 

to dwell in such a place 

to accustom oneself to something 

to speak with, or for any one 

to speak of any thing 

to talk gibberish or Greek 

to be ready at any thing 



habii en papeles 

habil para el empleo 

habilitar (a uno) en, para alguna 

cosa 
habitar con alguno 
habitar en tal parte 
habituarse a, en alguna cosa 
hablar con, por alguno 
hablar de, en, sobre alguna cosa 
hablar en griego 
bacer a todo 



PREPOSITIONS. 



ns 



hacer de valiente 

hacer para si 

hacer por alg^uno 

hacerse con buenos libros 

Iiallar (alguna cosa) en tal parte 

hallarse a, en la fiesta 

hartarse de comida 

bench ir (el cantaro) de agua 



to pretend to courage 

to provide for oneself 

to do for any one 

to furnish oneself with good books 

to find any thing in such a place 

to be present at the feast 

to gorge oneself with food 

to fill the pitcher with water 



herir (a alguno) eii la estimacion to hurt any one in his reputation 



herido de la injuria 
hermanar (una cosaj con otra 

hervir (un lugar) c?e, en gente 
hincarse de rodillas 
hocicar en alguna cosa 
holgarse con, de alguna cosa 
huir de alguna persona 6 cosa 
humanarse a alguna cosa 
huinanarse con los iaferiores 



wounded bj' injury 

to make one thing agree with an- 

other 
to be very populous 
to kneel down 

to stumble at any inconvenience 
to rejoice at any thing 
to fly from any person or thing 
to familiarise oneself to any thing 
to be condescending to inferiors 

liumillarse a alguna persona 6 cosa to humble oneself to any person or 

thing 

hundir (alguna cosa) en el agua to plunge any thing into the water 

hundirse en un pantano to sink in a bog 

I. 

fit for anything 
equal to another 
equal in forces 

to make one thing equal with an- 
other 
to instruct any one in anything 

fo compel any one to any thing 
impelled by necessity 



idoneo para alguna cosa 

igual (If con otro 

igual en fuerzas - 

igualar (una cosa) a, con otra 

imbuir (a alguno) c?e, en alguna 

cosa 
impeler (a alguno) a alguna cosa 
impelido de la necesidad 
impenetrable a los mas perspi- impenetrable to the most penetra- 



caces 
impenetrable en el secreto 
impetrar (algo) de alguno 
implicarse con, en alguna cosa 
imponer (pena) a alguna 
imponerse en alguna cosa 
importar a alguno 
importunado de, por otro 
importunar (a alguno) con pre- 

tensiones 



tmg 
impenetrable in secresy 
to obta'n anything of any one 
to intermeddle in anything 
to impose penalties on any one 
to instruct oneself in anything 
to be of importance to any one 
importuned by another 
to importune any one with preten- 



sions 

impresionar (a alguno) co?i/ra otro to impress any one against another 
irapiimir (aigunacosa) en el animo to imprmt any thing on the mind 
impiopio de, en, para su edad unbecoming his age 
impugnar (alguna cosa) a alguno to impugn any one in anything 
impugnado de,por muchos impagnf'd by many 

imputar (la culpa) a otro to impute the fault to any one 



174 



PREPOSITIONS. 



inaccessible d los pretendientes 
inapeable de su opinion 
incansable en el trabajo 
incapaz de remedio 
incesajite en sus tareas 
incidir en culpa 

inciter (a alg^uno) a su defensa 
incltar (a alguno) contra otro 
inclinar (d alg^uno) d la virtud 
incluir en el iiumero 
incompatible con el mando 
incomprehonsibie d los hombres 
inconsecuente en al>^una cosa 
inconstant? fn su proceder 
incorporar (una cosa) d, con, en 

otra 
increible d, para muchos 
incumbir (una cosa) d alg-uno 

incurrir en delitos 

indeciso en resolver 

indig^narse con, contra alguno 

indispon^r (a uno) con uro 

indijcir (a al^uno) d pecar 

inductivo de error 

indultar (a alg^uno) de la pena 

infatigable en el trabajo 

infecto de heregias 

inferior d otro 

inferior en alguna cosa 

inferir (una cosa) de, por otra 

inficionado de peste 

infiel d su amigo 

inflexible d la razon 

inflexible en su dictamen 

inflair en alo^una cosa 

inforraar (d alguno) de, sobre al- 

g-una cosa 
infi'ndir (animo) d, en alguno 
ingrato d los beneficios 
ing-rato con los amigos 
inhflbil para el empleo 
inhabilitar (a alguno) para alguna 

cosa 
inhibir (al juez) de, en el conoci- 

miento 
insensible d las injurias 
inseparable de la viriud 
iosertar (una cosa) en otra 
insinuar (una cosa) d alguno 
insinuarse con los poderosos 



inaccessible to pretenders 

obstinate in one's opinion 

unwearied with work 

irieraediable 

indefatigable in one's labours 

to fall again into a fault 

to incite any one to one's defence 

to incite any one against another 

to incline any one to virtue 

to include in the number 

incompatible with the command 

incomprehensible to men 

to be inconsequent / 

inconstant in one's proceedings 

to incorporate one thing with an- 
other 

incredible to many 

any thing to be incumbent on any 
one 

to incur crimes 

undecided in resolving 

to be angry with any one 

to indispose one with another 

to induce one to sin 

leading to error 

to pardon any one the punishment 

indefatigable in labour 

infected with heresies 

inferior to another 

inferior in anvthing 

to infer one thing from another 

infected with the plague 

unfaithful to one's friend 

inflexible to reason 

inflexible in one's opinion 

to have an influence over anything 

to inform any one of anything 

to encourage any one 

ungrateful for favours 

ungrateful to friends 

unfit for the emi)loyment 

to disable any one for anything 

to inhibit any judge from taking 

further cognizance 
insensible to injuries 
inseparable from virtue 
to ingraft one thing on another 
to insinuate anything to any one 
to insinuate oneself into the favour 

of the great 



PREPOSITIONS. 



175 



insipido al o^usto 
inslstir en, sobre alg^iina cosa 
iiispirar (alj-mia cosa) a algnno 
instruir (a algiino) de, en, sobre al- 

guna cosa 
interceder con alg^uno por otro 

interceder /7or otro, con alguno 

ioteresarse con alguno, por otro 

interesarse en alguna cosa 
internarse con alguno 
internarse en alguna cosa 6 liigar 
interpolar (unas cosasj con otras 
iuterponer (su autoridad) con al- 
guno 
intervenir en las cosas 
intervenir por alguno 
introducirse con los que mandan 

introdiicirse en, por alguna parte 

invadido de, por los contraries 

invernar en tal parte 

invertir (el caudal) en otro uso 

ingerir (un arbol) en otro 

ir de (Madrid) a, hdcia Cadiz 

ir contra alguno 

ir por el caraioo 

ir por pan 

ir tras alguno 



insipid to the taste 

to insist on anything 

to inspire anything to another 

to instruct any one in anything 

to intercede with any one for an- 
other 

to intercede for another with any- 
one 

to interest oneself with any one 
for another 

to interest oneself in anything 

to creep into another's favours 

to look into anything 

to mingle one thing with another 

to interpose one's authority with 
any one 

to intervene m things 

to intervene for any one 

to introduce oneself lo the com- 
manders 

to intrude oneself into any place 

invaded by the enemies 

to pass the winter in such a place 

to invest money into another use 

to ingraft one tree on another 

to go from Madrid to Cadiz 

to go against any body 

to go in the way 

to go for bread 

to go after any one 



jactarse de alguna cosa 
jugar a tal juego 
jugar (unos)con otros 
jugar (alguna cosa) con otra 
juntar (una cosa) g, con otra 
justificarse de algun cargo 
juzgar de alguna cosa 



to boast of anything 
to play at such a game 
to play one with another 
to move one thing with another 
to join one thing to another 
to clear oneself from any charge 
to judge ot anything 



ladear (una cosa) a tal parte 
ladearse (alguno) d otro partido 
lamentarse de la desgracia 
lauzar (algo) d, conira alguno 
largo de cuerpo 
largo de manos 
lastimarsp con, en una piedra 
lastimarse de alguno 



to turn anything on such a side 

to become a turncoat 

to lament the misfortune 

to throw something at any one 

tall in stature 

frui*ful, liberal 

to hurt oneself against a stone 

to take pity on any one 



176 



PREPOSITIONS. 



leer (los pensamientos) d alguno 
lejos de la tierra 
levantar (las maiios) al cielo 
levantar (alguna cosa) del suelo 

levantar (alguna cosa) en alto 

libertar (a alguno) de peligro 

librar (a alguno) dt riesgos 

lidiar con alguno 

ligar (una cosa) con otra 

ligero de pies 

limitar (las facultades) a alguno 

limitado de talentos 

lindar (una posesion) con otra 

llevar (algo) a alguna parte 
llevarse de alguna pasion 
luchar con alguno 
ludir (una cosa) con otra 



to read the thoughts of any one 

far from land 

to raise the hands to heaven 

to raise any thing up from the 
ground 

to raise any thing on high 

to deliver any one from danger 

to free any one from risk 

to dispute with any one 

to tie one thing with another 

lightfooted 

to limit any one's powers 

of slender talents / 

a possession to be adjoining to an- 
other 

to carry something to any place 

to be carried away by some passion 

to wrestle with any one 

to rub one thing against another 

M. 



malquistarse con alguno 
manar (agua) de una fuente 
manco de una mano 
mancomunarse con otros . 

raandar (alguna cosa) d alguno 

manift star (alguna cosa) d alguno 

mantener (conversacion) a alguno 

mantenerse de yerbas 

mantenerse en paz 

maquinar contra alguno 

maquinar en, sobre alguna cosa 

maravillarse de alguna cosa 

mas de cien ducados 

matarse a trabajar 

matarse por conseguir alguna cosa 

matizar con, de r olores 

media no de L:^erpo 

mediar con, por alguno 

mediar entre los contrarios 

Biedii se con sus fuerzas 

medir'se en las palabras 

med) ar en la hacienda 

mejorar de empleo 

mejorar(a alguno)en tercioy quinto 

menor de edad 
menos de cien ducados 
merecer d, de, con alguno 
mesin arse en las acciones 
meter (dinero) en el cotre 



to make oneself hated by any one 
water springing from a fountain 
maimed of one hand 
to unite oneself with others in the 

execution of anything 
to send anything to any one 
to discover anything to any one 
to maintain conversation with one 
to live upon herbs 
to live in peace 
to plot against any one 
to think liard about any thing 
to wonder at any thing 
more than a hundred ducats 
to kill oneself with labour 
t) tire oneself to d* ath for anything 
to shade with colours 
of a rni(l<!]ing stature 
to intt^rcode for any one 
to mediate between enemies 
to act according to one's abilities 
to weigh one's words 
to increase in riches 
to better one's employment 
to meliorate any one's fortune in a 

third and fifth part 
under age 

less than a thousand ducats 
to merit from any one 
to be cautious in one's actions 
to put money into the chest 



I'REPOSITIONS. 



177 



meter (a alguno) en empeiio to put one under the necessity of 

doing a thing 
meter (una cosa) entre otras cosas to put one thing among others 



meterse d gobernar 
meterse a caballero 

meterse con los que mandan 

meterse en los peligros 

mezclar (una cosa) con otra 

mezclarse en negocios 

mirar (la ciudad) a oriente 

mirar par alguno 

mirarse en alguna cosa 

motlerarse en las palabras 

mofarse de alguno 

mojar (alguna cosa) en agua 

molerse d trabajar 

molido de andar 

molestar (a uno) con visitas 

molesto a todos 

montar a caba'.lo 

montar en raula 

montar en colera 

morar en poblado 

morir de poca edad 

fflorir de enf^rraedad 

morirse de frio 

morirse por lograr alguna cosa 

motejar (a alguno) de ignorante 

motivar (la providencia) con ra- 

zones 
moverse de una parte a otra 
rauchos de los presentes 
mudar (alguna cosa) d otra parte to remove any thing to another 

place 
mudar de intento to change one's intention 

mudarse de casa to remove from a house 

murmurar de alguno to murmur against any one 

N. 



to assume government 

to affect the character and dignity 
of a knight, a gentleman 

to mix with the commanders 

to expose oneself to dangers 

to mix one thing with another 

to meddle in business 

the city to face the east 

to look for any one 

to be careful in anything 

to be moderate in words 

to make game of any one 

to wet with water 

to fatigue oneself with working 

fatigued with walking 

to trouble any one with visits 

troublesome to all 

to get on horseback 

to mount a mule 

to get into a passion 

to dwell in a settled place 

to die young 

to die of a sickness 

to be chilled with cold 

to long for obtaining any end 

to censure any one as ignorant 

to persuade (a measure) by rea- 
sons 

to move from one side to another 

many of those present 



nacer con fort una 
nacer (alguna cosa) 

parte 
nacer en las malvas 
Racer para trabajos 
nadar en el rio 
navegar d Indias 
negarse a la communicacion 
nimio en su proceder 
ninguno de los presentes 
nivelarse a lo justo 

16 



to be born to a fortune 
de alguna any thing to spring from any part 



to be born of low parents 
to be born to labour 
to swim in the river 
to sail to the Indies 
to deny oBeself to company 
over-nice in one's conduct 
none of the present 
to direct oneself by justice 



178 



PREPOSITIONS. 



nombrar (a alguno) para el em- 

pleo 
notar (a alguno) de hablador 
notificar (alguna cosa) a alguno 



to appoint any one to the em- 
ployment 
to note any one as a talker 
to notify any thing to any one 



o. 



obligar (a alguno) d alguna cosa 
obstar (una cosa) a otra 
obstinarse en alguna cosa 
obtener (alguna gracia) de alguno 
occultar (alguna cosa) d, de al- 
guno 
ocuparse en trabajar 
ofenderse con^ de alguna cosa 
ofrecer (alguna cosa) a alguno 
ofrecerse a los peligros 
oler (una cosa) a otra 

olvidarse de lo pasado 
opinar en, sobre alguna cosa 
oprimir (a alguno) con el poder 
optar d los empleos 
ordenarse de sacerdote 
orillar d alguna parte 



to oblige any one to anything 

one thing to hinder another 

to be obstinate in anything 

to obtain a favour from any one 

to conceal any thing from any one 

to be occupied with" work 
to be offended at anything 
to offer any thing to any one 
to offrr oneself to dangers 
one thing to have a smell of an- 
other 
to forget the past 
to bold an opinion on anything 
to oppress another by power 
to be a candidate 
to be ordained as a priest 
to draw to any side 



pactar (alguna cosa) con otra 

pagar con palabras 

pagar en dinero 

pagarse de buenas razones 

paladearse con alguna cosa 

paliar (alguna cosa) con otra 

palido de semblante 

palmear d alguno 

parar d la puerta 

parar en casa 

pararse a descansar 

pararse con alguno 

pararse en alguna cosa 

parco en la comida 

paiecer en alguna parte 

parererse a otro 

participar (algo) d alguno 

pnrticipar de alguna cosa 

particularizarse con alguno 

particularizarse en alguna cosa 

partir d Italia " 

partir (algo) con otro 

partir en pedazos 

partir entre amigos 



to make a bargain 

to pay with words 

to pay in cash 

to be satisfied with good reasons 

to please the palate with anything 

to palliate one thing with another 

pale-faced 

to cheer any one with the hands 

to stop at the door 

to stay at home 

to stop to rest oneself 

to stop with any one 

to stop at anything 

sparing in eating 

to appear anywhere 

to resemble another 

to participate anything to any one 

to partake of any thing 

to be singular with any one 

to signalize oneself in any thing 

to set off to Italy 

to share out any thing with another 

to break into pieces 

to share between friends 



PREPOSITIONS. 



ir^ 



partir^or mitad 

pattir por entero 

partirse de Espaiia 

pasar a Madrid 

pasar de Sevilla 

pasar entre montes 

pasar />or el rainino 

pasar por entre arboles 

pasar por cobarde 

pasarse(algunacosa)rfelaineraoria 

pasarse (la fruta) de madura 

pasarse (alg-uno) de letras 

pasearse con otro 

pasearse por el campo 

pecar contra la ley 

pecar de ignorante 

pecar en alguna cosa 

pecar ^or demasia 

pedir (alguna cosa) a algimo 

pedii con justicia 

pedir contra alguno 

pedir de justicia 

pedir en justicia 

pedir por Dios 

pedir /;cr alguno 

pes^ar (una cosa) a otra 

pegar (una cosa) con otra 

pegar contra^ en la pared 

pelarse|?07' alguna cosa 

peligrar en alguna cosa 

pelotearse con alguno 

penar en la otra vida 

penar/?or alguna persona 6 cosa 

pender de alguna cosa 

penetrar hasta las entranas 

penetrado de dolor 

pensar en, sohre alguna cosa 

perder (algo) de vista 

perderse (alguno) de vista 

perderse en el camino 

perecer de hambre 

perecerse de risa 

perecerse por alguna cosa 

peregrinar por el mundo 

perfumar con incienso 

permanecer en alguna parte 

permitir (alguna cosa) a alguno 

permutar (una cosa) con^ por otra 

perseguido de enemigos 

perseverar en algun intento 

persuadir (alguna cosa) a alguno 

persuadirse d alguna cosa 



to divide in halves 

to divide by tens 

to set off from Spain 

to go to Madrid 

to go beyond Seville v 

to pass between mountains 

to pass by the road 

to pass between trees 

to pass for a coward 

to forget any thing 

fruit to begin to decay 

to be very learned 

to take a walk with another 

to walk in the country 

to transjcrress the law . 

to sin through ignorance 

to bf^ faulty in any thing 

to sin through excess 

to ask any thing of any one 

to ask with justice 

to bring an action against any one 

to claim in law 

to sue by law 

to beg for God 

to ask for any one 

to apply one thing to another 

to join one thing with another 

to fasten against the wall 

to be anxious for any thing 

to endanger in any thing 

to scuffle with any one 

to be punished in the other life 

to suffer for any person or thing 

to depend upon any thing 

to penetrate to the entrails 

penetrated with grief 

to think upon anything 

to lose sight of any thing 

to excel in an eminent degree 

to lose one's way 

to perish with hunger 

to die with laughing 

to die for anything 

to wander through the world 

to perfume with incense 

to remain in any place 

to permit any thing to any one 

to exchange one thing for another 

pursued by enemies 

to persevere in any design 

to persuade any one of anything 

to be persuaded of anything 



180 



PREPOSITIONS^ 



persuadirse de, por las razones de to be persuaded by another's rea- 



otro 

pertenecer (una cosa) a alguno 
pertrecbarse de lo necesario 
pesarle (a alguno) de lo que ha 

hecho 
pesado en la conversacion 
pescar con red 
piar/wr alguna cosa 
picar de, en todo 
picarse de alguna cosa 
pintiparado a alguno 
plagarse de granos 



sons 
any thing to belong to any one 
to be furnished with necessaries 
any one to repent of what he has 

done 
dull in conversatioD 
to fish with a net 
to long for anything 
to excel in every thing 
to pique oneself upon anytliing 
like to any one exactly 
to be plagued with pimples 



plantar (a alguno) en alguna parte to set any one in any place 



plantarse en Cadiz 

poblar de arboles 

poblar en buen parage 

poblarse de gente 

ponderar (una cosa) de grande 

poner (a uno) a oficio 

poner (alguna cosa) en alguna 

parte 
poner (a alguno) por corregidor 
ponerse a escribir 
porfiar con alguno 
portarse con decencia 
posar en alguna parte 
poseido de teraor 
postrado de la enfermedad 
postrarse d los pies de alguno 



to be settled in Cadiz 

to fill with trees 

to settle in a good situation 

to be peopled 

to exaggerate anything as great 

to put any one in business 

to put anything some where 

to appoint any one corregidor 

to set oneself to writing 

to be positive with any one 

to conduct oneself vith decency 

to lodge in any place 

possessed by fear 

prostrated by sickness 

to prostrate oneself at another's 

feet 
to be confined to one's bed 
to kneel down on the ground 
preceded by another 
to pique ones self upon courage 
to be precipitated from any place 
preferred to another 
preferred by any one 



postrarse en cama 

postrarse en tierra 

precedido de otro 

preciarse de valiente 

precipitarse de,por alguna parte 

preferido a otro 

preferido de alguno 

preguntar (alguna cosa) a alguno to ask any one any thing 

prendarse de alguno to be taken with any one 

prender (las plantas) en la tierra plants to take root in the earth 

preocuparse de alguna cosa to be prepossessed with anything 

prepararse a, para alguna cosa to piepare oneself for anything 

preponderar (una cosa) a otra to preponderate one thing over 

another 
prescindir de alguna cosa to cut off from any thing 

presentar (alguna cosa) a alguno to present anything to any one 
presentar (a uno) para una pre- to present any one for a prebend 

benda 
preservar (a alguno) de dano to preserve any one from injury 

presidir a otros to preside over others 

presidir en un tribunal to preside in a tribunal 



PREPOSITIONS. 



181 



t>residido de otro 

prestar (diiiero) a alguno 

prestar (la dieta)/>ara la salud 

prestar sobrc prenda 

presurair de docto 

prevalecer (la verdad) sobre la 

mentira 
prevenir (alguna cosa) a alguno 
prevenirse de lo necessario 
prevenirse para un viage 
primero de, entre todos 
pringarse en alguna cosa 
privar (a alguno) de lo suyo 

privar con alguno 
probar a saltar 
probar de todo 
proceder a la eleccion 
proceder con, sin acuerdo 

proceder contra alguno 
proceder (una cosa) de otra 
procesar (a uno) por delitos 
procurar por alguno 
proejar contra las olas 
profesar en religion 
prometer (alguna cosa) a alguno 
promover(a alguno) a algun cargo 
propasarse a, en alguna cosa 
proponer (alguna cosa) a alguno 
proponer (a alguno) en primer 

lugar 
proporcionar (a alguno) para al- 
guna cosa 
proporcionarse a las fuerzas 

proporcionarse para alguna cosa 
prolongar (el plazo) a alguno 
prorumpir en lagrimas 
proveer (la plaza) de viveres 

proveer (el empleo) en alguno 

provenir de otra cosa 
provocar d ira 



presided by another 

to lend money to any one 

the diet to contribute to the health 

to lend on security 

to set up for a man of learning 

truth to prevail over falsehood 

to advise another of any thing 
to provide oneself with necessaries 
to prepare oneself for a journey 
first among all 
to intermeddle in any thing 
to deprive any one of what be- 
longs to him 
to be intimate with any one 
to try to jump 
to taste of every thing 
to proceed to the election 
to proceed with or without circum- 
spection 
to proceed against any one 
one thing to proceed from another 
to proceed against a man for crimes 
to procure for any one 
to row against the waves 
to profess in religion 
to promise any thing to any one 
to promote any one to any office 
to overshoot one's mark in anything 
to propose any thing to any one 
to propose any one in the first 

place 
to fit any one for any thing 

to proportion oneself to one's 
strength 

to fit oneself for any thing 

to prolong the credit to any one 

to burst into tears 

to furnish the fortress with provi- 
visions 

to provide any one with employ- 
ment 

to proceed from something else 

to provoke to anger 



provocar (a alguno,)con malas pal- to provoke any one by scurrilous 

abras language 

proximo a morir 



pujar por alguna cosa 

purgarse de sospecha 

16* 



at the point of death 

to strive for any thing 

to clear oneself from suspicion 



182 



rREPOSITiOxXS. 



Q. 

to lit for t!ie emploj'iuent 

to fit anything to any one 

which of the two ? 

to break any one's hones 

to break any one's heait 

to remain or reside in a place 

to remain standing 

to tarry at home 

to have to proceed farther 

to be bail for any one 

to be reputed a cow^ard 

any thing- falling to n»y share 

to stop short in a discourse 

to complain to any one 

to complain of any one 

to lay one's complaint before the 

judge 
to complain of one's neighbour 
to inflame oue with invective 
to be offended with any word 
to heat oneself for anything 
beloved by one's friends 
which of them ? 
to take anything from any one 
quitar (alguna cosa) de alguna to take anything from any place 
parte 



cuadrar con el encargo 

cuadrar (alguna cosa) a alguno 

cual de los dos ? 

quebrantar (los huesos)a alguno 

quebrar (el corazon) a alguno 

quedar de asiento 

quedar de pies 

quedar ewcasa 

quedar (camino) 2?or andar 

quedar por alguno 

quedar poi^ cobarde 

quedar (una cosa) por mia 

quedarse en el sermon 

quejarse d alguno 

quejarse de alguno 

querelarse a, ante el juez 

querellarse de su vecino 
quemar con malas razones 
quemarse de alguna palabra 
quemarse por alguna cosa 
querido de sus araigos 
quien de ellos ? 
quitar (alguna cosa) a. alguno 



quitarse de quimcras 



to free oneself from whims 

R. 

to be very hungry 

to long to eat 

to establish oneself in virtue 

to scrape from anything 

to importune any one 

to excel in virtue 

to converse with any one 



rabiar de hambre 
rabiar por comer 
radicarse en la virtud 
raer de alguna cosa 
rallar (las tripas) a cualquiera 
rayar con la virtud 
razonar con alguno 
rebalsarse (el agua) en alguna water to stagnate in any place 
parte 



rebatir (una caniidad) rfe otra 
rebajar (una cantidad) de otra 
recaer tn la enfermedad 
recalcarse en lodicho 
recatarse de alguno 



to deduct a sum 
to abate one sum from another 
to relapse into sickness 
to be film in what has been said 
to be cautious of any one 
recavar (alguna cosa) c?e, con al- to obtain anything from any one 

guno 
recetar(medicinas) 6/, ^ara alguno to prescribe medicines for any one 
recetar contra alguno to make a charge against any one 

recibir (alguna cosa) de alguno to receive'any thing from any one 
recibir a cuenta to receive on account 

1 ecibir (a alguno) en casa to receive any oue at home 



PHEPOSITIO^JS. 



185 



recibirse de abogado 

recio de cuerpo 

reclinarse en, sobrt alguna ccsa 

recliiir (a aigiuio) en algmia parte 

lecobrarse de la <3nfeimedad 

recogerse a casa 

recoraendar (alguna cosa) a alguno 

recompensar (agiavios) con bene- 

ficios 
reconcentrarse (el odio) en el co- 

razon 
reconciliar (a uno) con otro 
reconvenir (a alguno) con, de, 

sobre alguna cosa 
recostarse en, sobre la silla 
recudir (a alguno) co7i el sueldo 
redoiidearse de deudas 
reducir (alguna cosa) a la mitad 
redundar en beiieficio 
referirse d al«una cosa 
refocilarse con alguna cosa 
refijg-iarse a, en sagiado 
reglarse a lo justo 
regodearse en, con alguna cosa 
reiv se a carcajadas 
reirse de alguno 
remirarse en alguna cosa 
reemplazar (a alguno) en su em- 

pieo 
rendirse a la razon 
renegar de alguna cosa 
repartir (alguna cosa) a, entre al- 

gunos 
representarse (alguna cosa) a la 

imaginacion 
resbalarse de las manos 
resentirse de alguna cosa 
residir de asiento en alguna parte 
residir en la corte 
resolverse a alguna cosa 
responder d la pregunta 
restar (una cantidad) de otra 
restituirse d su casa 
resultar (una casa) de otra 
retirarse d la soledad 
retirarse del mundo 
retraerse a alguna parte 
retraerse de alguna cosa 
retroceder a, hdcia tal parte 
reventar cZe risa 
reventar por hablar 
revestirse de autoridad 
revolcarse en los vicios 



to be admitted as a counsellor 

of a strong constitution 

to lean upon any thing 

to shut any one up in any place 

to recover oneself from sickiiess 

to retire home 

to recommend anything to any one 

to recompense wrongs with benefits 

to concentrate hatred in the heart 

to reconcile one with another 

to retort on any one with anything 

to recline on a seat 

to pay any one his wages 

to pay oflf one's debts 

to reduce anything to the half 

to conduce to the benefit 

to refer oneself to any thing 

to be refreshed with any thing 

to take refuge in some sacred place 

to conform to what is right 

to delight oneself in anything 

to laugh heartily 

to make a jest of any one 

to examine oneself in any thing 

to take the place of any one in his 

employment 
to yield to reason 
to apostatize from anything 
to share any thing among several 

to represent an\ thing to one's 

imagination 
to slip away from the hands 
to resent any thing 
to be settled in any place 
to reside at court 
to resolve upon any thing 
to answer the question 
to remain one sum from another 
to return to one's house 
one thing to result from another 
to retire into solitude 
to retire from the world 
to take refuge any where 
to escape from anything 
to recede towards such a place 
to burst with laughter 
to burst with a desire of speaking- 
to be invested with authority 
to wallow in vice 



iS4 



PREPOSITIONS. 



revolver contray hdcia, sobre el 

enemigo 
robar (dinero) a alguno 
rodar (el carro) por tierra 
rodear (a alguno) por todas partes 
rodear (una plaza) con^de muralias 
rogar (alguna cosa) a alguno 
romper con alguno 
romper |;or alguna parte 
rozarse (una cosa) con otra 
rozarse en las palabras 



to return to the enemy 

to rob any one of money 

to overset a cart 

to encompass any one on all sides 

to surround a place with walls 

to beg any thing of any one 

to break off with any one 

to break in any place 

to rub one thing with another 

to stammer in one's speech 



saber a vino 

saber de trabajos 

sacar (una cosa) a la plaza 

sacar de alguna parte 

sacar en limpio 

sacrificar (alguna cosa) a Dios 

sacrificarse por alguno 

salir a alguna cosa 

salir con la pretension 

salir contra alguno 

salir de alguna parte 

salir 'por fiador 



to taste like wine 

to be acquainted with trouble 

to take any thing to the market 

to take any thinsr from any place 

to clear up all doubts, to copy fair 

to sacrifice any thing to God 

to sacrifice oneself for any one 

to co-operate in anything 

to obtain one's aim 

to go out against any one 

to go out from any place 

to appear as security 



saltar (una cosa) a la iraaginacion any thing to strike the imagination 



saltar de el suelo 

saltar de gozo 

saltar en tierra 

salvar (a alguno) del peligro 

sanar de la enfermedad 

satisfacer por las culpas 

satisfacerse de la duda 



to leap from the ground 

to leap with joy 

to leap on the ground, on shore 

to save any one from danger 

to recover from sickness 

to atone for one's faults 

to be satisfied for the doubt 



segregar(a alguno) de alguna parte to separate any one from any place 



segregar (una cosa) de otra 
seguirse (una cosa) de otra 
semejar, 6 semejarse (una cosa) 

d otra 
sentarse en la mesa 
sentarse a la silla 
sentenciar (a uno) a destierro 
sentirse de algo 
separar funa cosa) de otra 
ser (una cosa) a gusto de todos 
ser (una cosa) de, para algunos 
servir de mayordomo 
servir en palacio 
servirse de alguno 
sincerarse de alguna cosa 
sisar de la compra 
sitiado de enemigos 



to separate one thing from another 
one thing to follow from another 
to liken one thing to another, to 

resemble 
to sit down to table 
to sit down in the chair 
to condemn one to exile 
to be sensible of anything 
to separate one thing from another 
any thing to be to the taste of all 
any thing to be to or for some one 
to serve as a steward 
to be a servant in a palace 
to make use of any one 
to clear one's self from something, 
to lessen the purchase 
besieged by enemies 



PREPOSITIONS. 185 

sitiar por hambre to lay siege to any one by means 

of hunger 
situarse en algfuna parte to station oneself in any place 

sobrellevar (los trabajos) con pa- lo undergo labours, troubles with 

ciencia patience 

sobrellevar (a alguno) en sus tra- to assist any one in his labours or 

bajos troubles 

sobrepujar (aalguno) enautorfdad to exceed any one in authority 
sobresalir en galas to surpass in dress 

sobresalir entre todos to excel among all 

sobresaltarse de alguna cosa to be started at any thing 

sojuzgado de enemigos - subdued by enemies 

someterse a alguno to submit to any one 

sonar (alguna cosa) d hueca any thing to sound hollow 

sonar (alguna cosa) hdciaidX parte any thing to sound towards such 

a side 
sordo a las voces deaf to the cries 

sordo de un oido deaf w ith one ear 

sorprender (a alguno) con alguna to surprise any oue with anything 

cosa 
sorprenderle en alguna cosa to surprise him in any thing 

sorprendido dt la bulla surprised by the noise 

sospechar (alguna cosa) dt alguno to suspect any one of anything 
sospechoso a alguno suspected by any one 

subdividir en partes to subdivide into parts 

subir a alguna parte to go up to any place 

subir de alguna parte to go up from any place 

subir sabre la mesa to get upon the table 

subrogar (una cosa) en lugar de to substitute one thing instead of 

otra another 

subsistir del auxilio ageno to subsist by others' aid 

subsistir en el dictamen to be firm in an opinion 

sustituir a. por alguno to substitute for any one 

sustituir (un poder) en alguno to -substitute a power to any one 
sustraerse de la obediencia to withdraw one's self from subor- 

dination 
suceder (a alguno) en el empleo to succeed any one in an employ- 
ment 
sufrir (los trabajos) con paciencia to suffer troubles w ith patience 
sugerir (alguna cosa) a alguno to suggest any thing to any one 
sugetarse a alguno 6 alguna cosa to subject oneself to any one, or 

any thing 
suraergir (alguna cosa) en el agua to plunge any thing in the water 
sumirse en alguna parte to sink in any place 

sumiso d la voluntad submissive to the will 

supeditado de los contrarios suppressed by the enemies 

superior « sus enemigos superior to one's enemies 

superior en luces of greater talents 

suplicar de la sentencia to petition against the sentence 

suplicar por alguno to entreat for any one 

suplir por alguno to supply for any one 

surgir (la nave) en el puertQ to ride at anchor in the port 



186 



PREPOSITIONS. 



siirtir de viveres 
suspense de oficio 

suspirar jt?or el mando 
sustentarse con yerbas 
sustentarse de esperanzas 



to supply with victuals 
debarred the exercise of one's em- 
ployment 
to aspire after command 
to feed upon herbs 
to sustain oneself with hopes 

T. 



tachar (a alguno) de ligero 

temblar de frio 

temido de muchos 

temeroso de la muerte 

temible a los contraries 

tempiarse en comer 

tenet (a uno) por otro 

tenerse en pie 

tefiir de azul 

tirar a, hdcia tal parte 

tirar jior tal parte 

tiritar de frio 

titubear en alguna cosa 

tocar (la herencia) a algun© 

tocar en alguna parte 

tocado de enfermedad 

-toinar con^ en las manos 

tomar (una cosa) de tal modo 

torcino de cueipo 

tornar a ale una parte 

tornar de aiguna parte 

trabajar en aiguna cosa 

trabrijar/?or aiguna cosa 

trabajar j9or otro 

trabar de alguno 

trabar (una cosa) con otra 

trabar en aiguna cosa 

trabarse de palabras 

traburarse en las palabras 

traer (aiguna cosa) a aiguna parte 

traer (aiguna cosa) c/e aiguna parte 

tra/icar en drogas 

transferir (aiguna cosa) a otro ti- 

empo 
transferirse a tal parte 
transBgurarse en otra cosa 

transformar (una cosa) en otra 
transitar ;?or aiguna parte 
transpirar joor todas partes 
transportar (aiguna cosa) a aigu- 
na parte 
transportar (aiguna cosa) de aigu- 
na parte 



to accuse any one of levity 

to tremble with cold 

feared by many 

fearful of death / 

dreadful to his enemies 

to be temperate in eating 

to take one for auoiher 

to keep oneself on foot 

to dye in blue 

to draw on such a side 

to drjjw towards such a side 

to shiver with cold 

to wavt^r in any thing 

the inheritance to fall to any one 

to touch one any where 

touched with disease 

to take with, or in the hands 

to take anything in such a manner 

deformed in body 

to turn to such a side 

to turn from such a side 

to work in any thing 

to contend for anything 

to work for another 

to seize any one 

tojoin one thing with another 

to fall on any thing 

to quarrel with any one 

to mistake one's words 

to draw anything to any place 

to draw anything from any place 

to deal in drugs 

to transfer anything to another 

time 
to transport oneself to such a place 
to transform oneself into another 

thing 
to transform one thing into another 
to pass by any place 
to transpire on all sides 
to transport anything to any place 

to transport anything from any 
place 



PREPOSITIONS. 



187 



traspasar(al^una cosa) a alg-uno 
traspasado de dolor 
trasplautar (de una parte) d oti 

tratar con alg-uno 
tratar dt alguna cosa 
tratar en Ian as 
travesar con alguno 

triunfar de los enemigos 
trocar (una cosa) por otra 
tropezar en alguna cosa 



ultimo de todos 

uncir (los bueyes) al carro 

uniformar (una cosa) con otra 

unir (una cosa) a, con otra 

unirse en comunidad 

unirse entre si 

uno de, enire muchos 

util a la patria 

util^a?'a tal cosa 

utilizarse en, con alguna cosa 



to transfer something lo a'nother 
transfixed with grief 
a to transplant from one place to 
another 
to treat with any one 
to treat of anytliing 
to deal in wool 
to behave improperly towards any 

one 
to triumph over the enemy 
to change one thing for another 
to stumble on any thing 

u. 

the last of all 

to yoke oxen to the cart 

to make one thing uniform with 

another 
to unite one thing with another 
to unite in a community 
to be united together 
one among many 
useful to the country 
useful for such a thing 
to make advantage of anything 



vacar al estudio to attend to study 

vaciarse de alguna cosa to be emptied from anything 

▼aciarse por la boca to tell what ought to be kept secret 

vacilar en la eleccion to hesitate in one's choice 

vacilaren^relaesperanzayeltemorto vacillate between hope and fear 
vacio de entendimiento addle-headed 

vagar por el wundo to wander through the world 

valerse de alguno, de alguna cosa to avail oneself of any one, or any 

thing 



valuar (una cosa) en tal precio 
vanagloriarse de alguna cosa 

vecino al trono 

vecino de Antonio 

velar a los rauertos 

velar sobre alguna cosa 

venrerse a alguna cosa 

vencido de los contrarios 

venderse a alguno 

vengarse de otro 

venir a, de por alguna parte 

venir con alguno 

verse con alguno 

verse en altura 



to value anything at such a price 
to be puffed up with pride for any 

thing 
near the throne 
near Anthony 
to w atch the dead 
to watch over anything 
to conquer oneself in anything 
conquered by the enemy 
to sell oneself to any one 
to revenge oneself on another 
to come to, from, or by any place 
to come with another 
to meet any one 
to be in such a latitude, or high 

station 



188 CONJUNCTIONS. 

vestir a la moda to dress in fashion 

vestirse de pane to be dressed in cloth 

vigilar sobre sus subditos to watch over one's subjects 

violentarse a, en alguna cosa to be violent in anything 

visible a, para todos visible to all 

vivir d su gusto to live to one's taste 

vivir con alguno to live with any one 

yivir de limosna to live by alms 

vivir por milagro to live by a miracle 

vivir sobre la haz de la tierra to live without care 

volar al cielo to fly to Heaven 

volar ^or el aire to fly in the air 

volver d, c/e, hdcia^ por tal parte to return to, froi^, towards, by 

such a place 

volver por la verdad to defend the truth 

votar en el pleito to vote in the trial 

votar por alguno to vote for any one 



zabullirse 6 zambullirse en el agua to plunge into the water 
zafarse de alguna persona 6 cosa to avoid any one or any thing 
zambucarse en alguna parte to hide oneself in any place 

zampuzarse en agua to dive into water 

zapateaise con alguno to make a noise with any one 

zozobrar en la tormenta to be sinking in the storm 



CHAPTER IX. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctions serve to join phrases, or parts of phrases 
together. They are indeclinable like the prepositions and 
adverbs. They are distinguished into copulative^ disjunctive^ 
restrictive^ adversative^ conditional^ causative and compar- 
ative. 

The copulative conjunctions serve to bring together seve- 
ral words or several members of a phrase under the same 
affirmation or negation. 

Those denoting affirmation are, 

1st. F, ty and. Ex. El valor y el honor son las dos 
principales dotes que caracterizan al Mroe^ valour and hon- 
our are the two principal qualities that characterise a hero. 
El senor B... e^ un hombre cruel t injusto, Mr. B. is a cruel 
and unjust man. 

2d. Tambienj also ; Ex. Ya que vm, lo quiere^ lo quiero 
tamhieny since you wish it, I also wish it. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 193 

3d. Qucy that ; Ex. Ya si que vm, es amigo mioy I know 
that you are my friend. 

Rule LXIV. — And is translated in Spanish by ^, and 
not by Vj when the following word begins with an i ov y ; as, 
we shall go out at five o'clock, and go to the play, saldrtmos 
a las cincOj e irimos^ d la comedia. 

The conjunctions that denote a negation are ; m, nor ; 
tampoco, neither. Ex. Ni reir, ni llorar puedo, I can neith- 
er laugh, nor weep. Ya que no sales, tampoco ijo saldri^ 
since thou dost not go out, I shall not neither. 

The disjunctive conjunctions denote an alternative, or 
distinction ; as, 6,u; Ex. Juan 6 Francisco, John or Fran- 
cis ; entrar 6 salir, to go in or out ; uno u otro, one or tl^e 
other. 

Rule LXV. — Or is translated in Spanish by ii, if the fol- 
lowing word begins with an o. Ex. Siete ii ocho hombres, 
seven or eight men. 

The restrictive conjunctions restrict, in any manner 
whatever, an idea or a proposition ; as, sine, only, except. 
Ex. No tengo nada que decirle, sino que lo quiero, I have 
nothing to tell him, except that I wish it. 

The adversative conjunctions connect two propositions, 
denoting an opposition in the second as respects the first ; as, 
mas, pero, but ; no obstante, nevertheless, yet, however ; 
cuando, when ; aunque, Men que, though. Ex. Quisiera 
salir, mas nopuedo, I should wish to go out, but I cannot. 
El dinero hace a los hombres ricos, pero no dichosos, money 
makes men rich, but not happy. Habla la verdad, no ob- 
stante nadie le cree, he speaks the truth, yet nobody believed 
him. No haria una injusticia cuando le importara un trono, 
he would not commit an injustice, though it might be worth 
to him Ji throne. No es imprudente, bien que, or aunque 
parezca serlo, he is not imprudent, though he appears to be so. 

The conditional conjunctions connect two members of 
speech by a supposition, or by denoting a condition ; as, 
si, if; como, con tal que, provided. Ex. Si aspiras a ser 
docto, estudia con perseverancia, if thou desirest to be 
learned, study with perseverance. Sabrds estafdbula d las 
doce, como or con tal que la estudies, thou wilt know this 
fable at noon, provided thou study it. 
• The causative conjunctions serve to denote the cause of a 
17 



194 CONJUNCTIONS. 

thing, or the reason for which it has been done, as porque^ 
because ; pues^ pues que^ since. Ex. Dehe el homhre evitar 
la ociosidadj porque es la madre de todos los vicios. man 
must shun idleness, because it is the mother of all vices. 
Leert este librOy pues vm. me dice que es buenOy I shall read 
this book, since you tell me that it is good. 

The comparative conjunctions serve to denote a relation 
or parity between two objects, or two propositions, such as, 
C07W0, as; asz como, just as ; Ex. La belleza escomolajlor 
que se marchita el mismo dia que la vi6 nacer^ beauty is as 
the flower that withers the same day that saw it bloom. 

OP THE CONJUNCTIONS THAT GOVERN THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The conjunctions which govern in the subjunctive the verb 
that follows them, are, para que^ in order that ; ajin de que^ 
to the end that ; a no ser que, a menos que, unless ; antes 
que, before that ; caso que, en caso que, in case that ; aunque, 
though ; aun cuando, although ; bien que, though ; hasta 
grwe, till, until ; dado que, gr^i\t, or suppose that; con tal 
que, como quiera que, provided that ; por mas que, however, 
whatever ; siempre que, whenever ; Ex. Bien que, or 
aunque la ambicion sea un vicio, es no obstante la base de 
muchisimas virtudes, though ambition be a vice, it is never- 
theless the basis ofa great many virtues. Por mas sabios 
que sean, no conocen la causa de este efecto, however en- 
lightened they be, they do not know the cause of this effect. 
El maestro se af ana, para que or aJin de que adelanten sus 
discipidos, the master exerts himself to the end that his schol- 
ars may improve. 

N. B. As we frequently make use of the second future and 
of the second and third conditionals, see the rules 39? 40, 
42, 43, 44, and Ab^page 76 and following. 



CHAPTER X. 

OF INTERJECTIONS. 



Interjections serve to express an emotion, or an affection 
of the mind, or to awake attention. Ah ! ay! lie I 0! Ola I 
ta ! ckito ! ea ! sus ! tate ! The affections of the mind may 
be of grief, sadness, contempt, indignation, joy, or astonish- 
ment ; to express them we may indifferently make use of the 



INTERJECTIONS. 



195 



following interjectionsj ay I ah ! ! for, if we say, — /ay, 
que ijena ! oh, what pain ! /aA, que desgracia ! oh, what 
misfortune ! /o, desdichado de mi ! alas, unhappy me ! we 
may also say, — ;ay que gozo ! ha, what delight ! /a/t, que 
alegria I ha, what joy! lo^felices de nosotros ! ha, how 
happy we are ! O cielo ! oh heavens ! Ha ! he ! Ola ! 
and to ! serve to awaken attention. He ! is also used to 
show that we have not understood what has been said. Ola 
is sometimes an interjection of admiration, and to is hardly 
ever used except to call a dog : it is an abbreviation oitoma^ 
take. — Chito^ hush, serves to impose silence. £a, vamos, 
and suSy come, come on, are used to animate and excite 
courage.— Ta^e, guar da / take care ! serves to prevent one's 
doing or saying something. Viva I huzza ! Ola ! holla ! 
ho ho ! Otra vez ! encore ! vaya ! come ! Quedo f softly ! 
Voto a ! zounds ! ttvme equi ! here I am ! He aqui ! here 
is, here are ! 



NAMES OF COUNTRIES, ISLANDS, CAPES, AND SEAS. 



NOUDS. 

Africa, A'frica, 

Algiers, ArgeL 

America, AmMca. 
Anseatic (cities)^ Ansedticas^ 

(ciudades). 
Antilles(The),/^/i^z7Za5 (Las). 
Arabia, Arabia, 

Andalusia, Andalucia, 
Asia, Asia, 

Austria, Austria. 

Asturias, Asturias. 
The Azores, Las Azoras. 
The Atlantic, El Atldntico. 
The Baltic, El Bdltico. 
Barbary, Berheria (costa de). 
Botany Bay, Bahia Botdnica 
Bavaria, Baviera, 

Biscay, Vizcaya. 

Bohemia, Bohemia. 
Brazil, Brasil. 



Adjectives. 

African, Jifricano. 



Algerine, 
American, 



Argelino. 
Americano. 



Anseatic, Ansedtico. 



Arabian, 

Andalusian, 

Asiatic, 

Austrian, 

Asturian, 



A'rahe. 

Andaluz. 

Asidtico. 

Jiustriaco. 

Asturiano. 



Berberisk, Berberisco. 



Bavarian, 
Biscay an, 
Bohemian, 
Brazilian, 



Bdvaro. 
Vizcaino. 

Bohemo. 
Brasileno. 



196 



PROPER NAMES 



Brittany, Bretana. Briton, Breton. 

Burgundy, Borgona. Burgundian, Borgones 

British Channel (The), Man- 

cha (La). 
Canary Islands, Canarias (Islas.) 
Cape of Good Hope, Cabo de Buena Esperanza. 
Cape Horn, Cabo de Homos. 



Catalonia, 


Cataluna. 


Catalonian, 


Catalan. 


China, 


China. 


Chinese, 


Chino. 


Castile (Old and New), Ca^ 
tilla (la vieja y nueva). 


Castillian, 


Castellano. 


Cantabria, 






Cdntabro. 


Chili, 


Chile. 


Chilian, 


Chileno. 


Colojnbia, 


Colombia. 


Colombian, 


Colombiano, 


Corsica, 


Corcega. 


Corsican, 


Corso. 


Dauphiny, 


Delfinado. 


Dauphin, 


Delfino. 


Denmark, 


Dinamarca. 


Dane, 


Dinamarquesi 


Deux-Ponts, 


Dos Puentes. 






Egypt, 


Egipto. 


Egyptian, 


Egipcio. 


Estremadura 


, 




Estrameno. 


Europe, 


Europa. 


European, 


Europ6o. 


England, 


Inglaterra. 


English, 


Ingles. 


Fernandez massafuero, Pernanadez mas a 


Ifuera. 


Finland, 


Pinlanda. 


Finlander, 


Finlandes. 


Finisterre (Cape), Finistiert 


-a (Cabo.) 




Flanders, 


Plandes. 


Flemish, 


Flamenco. 


France, 


Prancia. 


French, 


Prances. 


Franche Comte, Franco Condado. 




Georgia, 


Jorgia. 


Georgian, 


Jorgiano. 


Galicia, 


Galicia. 


Galician, 


Gallego. 


Germany, 


Alemania. 


German, 


Aleman. 


Granada. 






Granadino. 


Greenland, 


Groenland. 


Greenlander. 


Groenlandes. 


Greece, 


Grecia. 


Greek, 


Griego. 


Holland, 


Holanda. 


Hollander or 


Dutch, Holandes 


Hungary, 


Hungria, 


Hungarian, 


Hungaro. 


Iceland, 


Islanda. 


Icelandic, 


Islandes. 


Ireland, 


Irlanda. 


Irish, 


Irlandes. 



Indies (East and West), Indias (Orientates y Occidentales.) 
Ionian (Islands), lonicas (Islas.) 
Italy, Italia. Italian, Italiano. 

Japan, Japon. Japanese, Japones. 



PROPER NAMES. 



197 



Leon, 

Lombardy, Lomhardia, Lombard, 

Levant, Levante, Levantine, 

Madeira, Madera, 

Mauritius, Mauri cio. 

Malta, Malta, 

MediterraneanjMec^/ferraneo 

Mexico, Megico, Mexican 

Morocco, Marruecos, Moorish, 

Murcia. 

Navarre, Navarra, Navarrese, 

Newfoundland, Tierra Nueva, 

Normandy, Normandia, 

Norway, Norvega. Norwegian, 

Naples, Ndpoles, Neapolitan, 

Netherlands, Paises bajos. Dutch, 

Pacific (Ocean,) Pacifico {Oceano,) 



Leones, 

Loj?ibardo. 

Levantino, 



Maltese, Maltes. 



Palatinate, 

Persia, 

Peru, 

Picardy, 

Piedmont, 

Poland, 

Portugal, 



Palatmado. 

Persia, 

Peru. 

Picardia. 

Piamonie, 

Polonia, 

Portugal, 



Palatine, 

Persian, 

Peruvian, 



Megicano, 

Moro. 

Murciano, 

Navarro. 



Norvegiano. 

JSapolitano, 

Holandes, 

Palatino. 

Persa, 

Peruano, 



Piedmontese, Piamontes. 

Pole, Polaco. 

j^„-_, ^„.. Portuguese, Portugues, 

Provinces (United,) Provincias (Unidas,) 
Provinces (of River la V\a.te,)Provincias[del rio de laPlata,) 

Argentine, Argentino. 

Prussian, Prusiano. 

Porto Rican, Puerto Riqueno. 

Rhodian, Rodiano, 

Ragusian, 



Prussia, 
Porto Rico, 
Rhodes, 
Ragusa, 
Red (Sea,) 
Russia 



Prusia, 

Puerto Rico, 

Rodas, 

Ragusa, ^ 

Rojoj Bermejo (mar,) 

, Rusia, Russian, 

St. Vincent (Cape,) San Vicente (Caho,) 
St. Domingo, Santo Domingo. 



Raguses. 



Sardinia, 

Savoy, 

Saxony, 

Scotland, 

Sicily, 

Sweden, 



17* 



Cerdena. 

Savoya. 

Saxonia, 

Escocia. 

Sicilia. 

Suecia. 



Sardinian, 

Savoyard, 

Saxon, 

Scotch, 

Sicihan, 

Swede, 



Ruso. 



Sardo. 

Savoi/ardo. 

Saxon. 

Escoces. 

Siciliana. 

Sueco. 



198 



PROSPER NAMES. 



Switzerland, Suiza. Swiss, Suizo. 

Sound (The,) S mda (La.) 

Spain, Espana. Spanish, EspanoL 

Tartary, Tartaria, Tartar, Tdrtaro, 

Table Bay, Bahiade Tabla. 

Turkey, Turquia, Turk, Turco, 

United States, Estados Unidos» 

Valencia, Valencian, Valienciano^ 

Venezuela, Fenezuela, Venezuelian, Venezolano, 

Zealand, Celanda. Zealander, Celandes. 



NAMES OF CITIES, MOUNTAINS AND RIVERS. 



Aix-la-Chapelle, Aquisgrana 


. Coblentz, Coblenza. 


Alicant, 


Alicante. 


Constantino- Constantinopla. 


Alps (The,) 


Alpes (Los.) 


pie. 


Antwerp, 


Amberes. 


Copenhagen, Copenhague. 


Antioch, 


Antioquia. 


Corunna, Coruna. 


Andes (The,) 


Andes (Los.) 


Chimborazo, Chimborazo. 


Amazon(The 


y)Amazonas 


Dover, Duvre. 




(Las.) 


Dresden, Dresde. 


Appenines 


Apeninos {Los 


,)Downs (The,) Dunas (Las.) 


(The,) 




DanubefThe,) Danubio, (El.) 


Basle, 


BasiI6a. 


Edinburgh, Edinburgo. 


Bayonne^ 


Bayona. 


Florence, Florencia. 


Berne, 


Berna. 


Genoa, G6nova. 


Bordeaux, 


Burdtos. 


Geneva, Ginebra^ 


Bilboa, 


Bilbao. 


Gibraltar Gibraltar (Es- 


Boulogne, 


Bolona. 


( Straits of,) trecho de.) 


Breslaw, 


Breslao. 


Hague (The,) Haija (La.) 


Bruges, 


Brvjas. 


Hamburgh, Hamburgo. 


Brussels, 


Bruselas. 


Havana, Habana. 


Buenos Ayres 


, Buenos Aires. 


Leipzig, Lipsia. 


Cairo, 


Cairo (El) 


Liege, Lieja. 


Calais, 


Cales. 


Leghorn, Liorna. 


Cape Fran9ois, GwaWco (eh) 


Lille, Lila. 


Cape Horn, 


Cabo de Hoimos. London^ Londres. 


Cherbourg, 


Cherburgo. 


Lyons, Leon (de Francia.) 


Cologne, 


Golonia. 


Lisbon, Lisboa. 





PROPER NAMES. 


195 


MarseilleSj 


Mar sella. 


Roncesvaux, 


Roncesvalles. 


Mountain 


Sierra (More 


- Rome, 


Roma. 


(Brown) 


na,) 


Rhone (The,^ 


Rh6dano (El.) 


Mentz, 


Maguncia. 


Saragossa, 


Zaragoza. 


Meiise, 


Mosa. 


Stockholm, 


Stocolmo. 


Nile (The,) 


Nilo (El) 


Seville, 


Sevilla. 


New York, 


Nueva York. 


St. Andero, 


Santander. 


New Orleans 


NaevaOrleans 


. Seine (The,) 


Sena (La.) 


Petersburgh 


Petersburgo 


Scheld (The, 


) Escaldo (El.) 


(St.) 


(San.) 


Trent, 


Trenta. 


Philadelphia, 


Filadelfia. 


Thames(The 


,) Tamisa (La.) 


Pyrenees( The^) Pi intos (Los 


.^Venice, 


Venecia. 


Providence, 


Providencia. 


Vienna, 


Viena. 


Prague, 


Praga, 


Warsaw, 


Varsovia. 




CHRISTIAN NAMES, MOST USED. 


Albert, 


Alberto. 


Dominico, 


Domingo. 


Alexander, 


Alejandro. 


Dorothy, 


Dorot6a. 


Alexis, 


Alexo. 


Edward, 


Eduardo. 


Alphonso, 


Alphonso. 


Eugene, 


Eugenio. 


Ambrose, 


Ambrosio. 


Eusebius, 


Eiesebio. 


Andrew, 


Andres. 


Eustach, 


Eustaquio. 


Ann, 


Ana. 


Faustus, 


Fausto. 


Antony, 


Antonio. 


Ferdinand, 


Fernando. 


Athanasius, 


Atanasio. 


Florent, 


Florencio. 


Augustin, 


Agustin. 


Firmin, 


Fermin. 


Augustus, 


Augusto. 


Francis, 


Francisco. 


Bartholomew 


, Bartolomt. 


Fulgence, 


Fulgencio. 


Basil, 


Basilio. 


Gaetan, 


Cayetano. 


Benedict, 


Benito. 


George, 


Jorg^. 


Bernard, 


Bernardo. 


Gregory, 


Gregorio. 


Blaise, 


Bias. 


Grace, 


Gracia. 


Boniface, 


Bonifacio. 


Henry, 


Enrique. 


Camillus, 


Camilo. 


Hilarius, 


Hilario. 


Candid, 


Cdndido. 


Hyacinthus, 


Jacinto. 


Casimir, 


Casimiro. 


Ignatius, 


Ignacio. 


Catherine, 


Catalina. 


Innocentius, 


Inocencio. 


Charles, 


Carlos. 


Isidorus, 


Isidoro. 


Christopher, 


Cristoval. 


James, 


Jaime, Biego, 


Clement, 


Clements. 




Santiago. 


Dyonisius, 


Dionisio. 


Januarius, 


Genaro. 



200 


PHOPER NAMES. 




John, 


Juan. 


Paulin, 


Paulino. 


Jane, 


Juana. 


Philip, 


Felipe, 


Jerome, 


Geronimo, 


Peter, 


Pedro. 


Joachinij 


Joaqnina^ 


Pius, 


Pio. 


Joseph, 


Jos6, 


Raymond, 


Raimitndo. 


Josephine, 


Josefina, 


Re my. 


Remigio. 


Just, 


Justo, 


Roch, 


Roque. 


Lawrence, 


Lorenzo 


Richard, 


Ricardo. 


Lazarus, 


Ldzaro. 


Rose, 


Rosa. 


Leander, 


Leandro, 


Rupert, 


RupertOy 


Leonard, 


Leonardo. 


Robert, 


Roberto. 


Luke, 


Lucas, 


Saturnin, 


Saturnino. 


Lewis, 


Luis. 


Stephen, 


EstMan. 


Mark, 


Marcos. 


Sixtus, 


Sesto. 


Marcellus, 


Marcelo. 


St. Telmo, 


San Telmo 


Margaret, 


Margarita. 


Thaddeus, 


Tadio. 


Mary and Ma 


' Maria. 


Theodore, 


Teodoro. 


ria, 




Theresa, 


Teresa. 


Matthew, 


Mat^o. 


Thomas, 


Tomas. 


Michael, 


Migtiel. 


Victoria, 


Victoria. 


Monique, 


MSnica. 


Victorianus, 


Victoriano 


Narcissus, 


Narciso. 


Vincent, 


Vicente. 


Nicasius, 


Nicasio. 


WilHam, 


Giiillermo. 


Patrick, 


Patricio. 


Walter, 


Gualteroc 


Paul, 


Pablo. 







END OP THE FIRST PART. 



A 

GRAMMAR 

OF THE 

SPANISH LANGUAGE, 

WITH 

PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 

Efit iFtrst jpart 

CoQtainingf a List of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in writings ; 
A Treatise on Pronunciation and Alterations in Orthog-raphy, founded upon 
the latest Rules established by the Academy of Madrid ; Comparative Rules 
of the Spanish and English Lang-uages ; A general Scheme of the Termina- 
tions of Regular Verbs 5 An alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, conju- 
g-ated in their order ; A Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions in Spanish 5 
Lists of the Names of diflferent Countries, principal Cities and Christian 
Names. 

2Cii0 Secotttr J^art 

Containing a Collection of Exercises interlined ; a Vocabulary with Familiar 
Phrases and Dialogues •, and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. 

BY M. JOSSE. 

Second American from the latest Paris Edition. 

SETISED, IMPROVES, AND ADAPTED TO THE ENGLISH LANGVACE, 

BY F. SALES, 

Instmcter of French and Spanish at Harvard University, Camhridge^ 



SECOND PART. 



BOSTON : 

MUNROE AND FRANCIS, 128 WASHINGTON-STREET, 

CORNER OF WATER-STREET. 
1825. 



DISTRICT OF MASSACnUSBTTS, TO WIT : " 

District Clerks Office. 

BE it remembered, that on the twenty-seventh day of January, A. D. 1825,. and 
in the fortv-ninth year of tlie Independence of the United States of America, 
MUNROE AND FRANCIS, of the said District, have deposited in this office the 
title of a book, the right whereof they claim as Proprietv>rs, in the words following-, 
to wit : 

" A GRAMMAR of the SPANISH LANGUAGE, with Practical EXERCISES. 
The First Part containing a list of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in 
writing j A Treatise on pronunciaton and alterations in Orthography, founded upon 
the latest rules established by the Academy of Madrid ; Comparative rules of the 
Spanish and English Languages 5 A general scheme of the terminations of Regular 
Verbs ; An Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, conjugated in their order ; A 
Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions in Spanish ; Lists of the names of differ- 
ent Countries, principal Cities, and Christian Names. The Second Part containing 
a Collection of Exercises interlined 5 A Vocabulary, with familiar Phrases and Dia- 
logues 5 and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. By M. JOSSE. Second Ameri- 
can from the latest Paris edition. Revised, improved, and adapted to the English 
Language, by F. SALES, Instructer of French and Spanish at Harvard University, 
Cambridge." 

In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, " An 
act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and 
books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein men- 
tioned :" and also to an act, entitled, " An act supplementary to an act, entitled 
an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, 
and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein 
mentioned j and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving 
and etching, historical and other prints." 

JOHN W. DAVIS, Chrl- of tht District of Massachusetts. 



SPANISH EXERCISES, 



TO THE FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES ESTABLISHED BY 
THE ACADEMY OF MADRID. 



References to the Rules ivhich are to serve for their translation ; 
notes explanatory of the idiomatic differences between the two 
languages y and of all the important difficulties. 



EXPLANATION of the SIGNS which are found in the Spanish Exercises. 



m. Masculine. 

f. Feminine. 

n. Neuter. 

p.. Plural. 

irr. Irregular. 

* The star denotes that the word, 
under which it is found, must not be 
translated. 

1-2-3-4 &.C. The numbers indicate 
the order in which words must be pla- 
ced in Spanish. 

Two or three English words, having 
the same number, are expressed by the 

N. B. Having made known, in all the Exercises, the rules to which they re- 
late, we advise the scholar never to translate before he has read over carefully 
the rules and examples referred to. If he consults them with attention, we feel 
confident that he will easily overcome any difficulties the translating may present. 



Spemish under them between paren- 
theses. 

Two or more English words put 
within a parenthesis, thus, ( ) are ex- 
pressed by the Spanish placed under 
them. 

The gender of nouns is not laid 
down when the article definite is not 
required ; but is, however, put down, 
whenever there is an adjective or a 
pronoun agreeing with the noun, inde- 
pendently of any article. 



EXERCISE I. 

See Rules L mid IL and the gender of nouns , 
p. 27, 28 of the Grammar. 

The man, the woman, the child, the husband, 

homhre^m. muger^f. nifio, niy inarido^m, 

the wife and the maid. The book, the paper, 

esposa y criadaji. libra, m. papel^m, 

the pen, the ink and the penknife. The table^ 

pluma, f. tinta, f. cortaplmnas, m. mesa, f. 

the chair, the chamber, the door and the window, 

silla, f. cuarto, m. puerta, f. ventana^t 



204 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 



The 
The 



city, the house, 
ciudady f. 
country, 
campo^ m 
grass, 
hierba^ f. 



The city, the house, the palace and 
casa^ f. palaciOy m. 

the husbandman and the 
lahrador^ ni. y 
the hay, the straw and 
heno^m, paja^L 

The sheep, the fleece, the cow, the milk and the butter. 
ovejaj f. tusouj m. vaca^ f. leche^ f. manteca^ f. 
The heifer, the calf and the bull. The oak, the elm, 



the shop. 

tiendaj f. 

shepherd. 

pastor J m. 

the corn. 

trigOyia, 



toro^ m. encina^ f. olmo^ m. 
The chesnut, the apple and 



becerra^ f. ternero^ m. 
the poplar and the willow. 

alamo, m. sauce , m. castano,m, 

the pear-trees. The chesnut, the apple and the pear. 

peraly m. castana, f. manzana, f. per a, f. 

The cock, the hen, and the chicken. The horse, 

galloyvn. gallinaji, polio, m. caballoyin. 

the mare and the jack. The loaf, the meat, the fish, 

yegua^L asno,m. partem, carne^f. pescado^m. 

the wine, the cider and the beer. The chocolate, 

vino,m. cidra^L cerveza^L chocolate, m. 

the tea and coffee. The sugar, the salt, and the pepper. 



cafe, 



m. 



t6, m. 
France ; 
Francia,f, 
Andalusia. 
Andalucia 
the bird, the wing, the Eagle 

ave, f. ala, f. dguila, f. 

Africa, Asia, (see page 195.) 



azucar,m. saLf. pimienta,f, 

Germany, Russia, Navarre, Biscay and 

Alemania, f. Rusia,L Navarra,f, Vizcaya,L 

The master, (l) the mistress, the soul, 

f. «mo,m. ama,f. alma,f, 

the wing, the Eagle and the water, 

ala, f. dguila, f. agua^ f. 



EXERCISE II. 



See Hide IL page 27 ; Unles III. and IV. page 28 ; 
the two JV*. B. folloxvingf and Rules V. and VI. 
page 29. 

The kingdom of France, the king of England, the 
reino,m. rey,m. Inolaterra, 

(1) The following are nearly all the nouns that take ihe article 
el for lai. See 1st rule. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 205 

queen of Portugal. The province of Navarre. The 
reina^f, Portugal, provincia^L Navarra, 

bay of Biscay. I (shall go) to Italy. Thou (wilt come) to 
bahia^f, Yo irt Tit vendrds 

England. He (will return) to Spain. I (shall send) to 

El volverd Yo enviarS 

Catalonia. I am in the garden. He (will be) at home. (1) 
Cataluna. Yo estoy jardin,m. El estard 
We (shall be) at the cellar. Mr. de Campo, Madam 
Nosotros estartmos hodega^L Senor Senora 

Solis and Miss Rosas. The servant of the Count de 

Senorita criado^ m. Conde^ m. 

Norofia, and the chambermaid of the marchioness de 
Norona camarera^L marquesa^f, 

Montehermoso. Sir, the Countess is in the garden. Miss 

Condesa^L estd 
Frances Pedreras. The bishop of Saint Andero. Mr. 
Francisca obispo^ m. 

Francis Peredo, secretary of the consulate of the city of 
Francisco secretario consulado, m. 

Saint Andero. Mr. Velasco, knight of the royal order of 

cahallero real 6rden^ f. 

Charles Third, member of the supreme (2) council of 
Carlos Tercero, miembro supremo consejo,m. 

Castille and of the royal academy of history. The good, 
Castilla academia^i, historia,f, bueno^n. 

the useful and the agreeable. The sweet, the sour and 

util, n. agradqblcy n. dulce^ n. agrio^ n. 

the bitter. 
amargo^ n. 



EXERCISE III. 

See Rule VIILpage -SI, and the gender of nouns con- 
sidered in regard to their terminations. 

The men, the women, the children, the husbands, the 
wives and the servants. The books, the pens and the pen- 

(1) In this phrase and others similar, the word ca^a never takes 
an article. Consequently, we say; estar en casa ; ird casa) and not 
estar en la casa ; ir d la casa, 

(2) Adjectives generally follow substantives. See p. 38. 

18 • 



206 SPAlsriSH EXEUCISES. 

knives. The chambers, the tables, the chairs, the doors and 
the windows. The towns, the houses, the palaces and the 
shops. The fields, the husbandmen and the shepherds. 
The sheep and the cows. The heifers, the calves and the 
bulls. 

The oaks, the elms, the poplars and the willows. 
The chesnut trees, the apple trees and the pear trees. 
The cocks, the hens and the chickens. The horses, 
the mares and the asses. The roses and the gilliflowers. 

rosa^ f. / aleli^ m. 

The maravedis, the sous and the louis. The kingdoms 

maravediym. sueldo^m. luis^m, 

of France and Spain, the provinces of Normandy and 
Picardy.(l) Messrs. Peter and John Pineda. My ladies de 

Pedro Juan 

Isla. The young ladies Mary and Frances de Villatorre. 

Maria 
The sisters of the young ladies Floridablanca. The 

hermana^ f. 
brothers of the Count de Melendez Valdes. The poem 
hermano^m, 

of the Araucana, by Alphonso de Ercilla. The climates. 

Monso clima^xti. 

The dogmas of religion. The epigrams of Messrs. 

dogma^ m. religion y f. epigrama^ 

John de Iriarte and Joseph Iglesias. Truth is 

Jost verdadyf. es 

a celestial* manna.* An action worthy of praise. The 
?/w(2) celeste mandyin. accion^f. digno alahanza, 
ambition of men. The observations. The humanity 
ambicionyf. observacionyf. humanidadyL 

and generosity of ^sensible souls'. The purity of the 

generosidadyf, sensible al?na,f. pureza^L 

heart. . Constancy in adversity. The amiability, 
corazon^m. constanciayf. en adversidadjf, amabilidadyi, 

the simplicity and the goodness of Mrs. Wilson. 
simplicidad, f. bondad^ f. 



(1) See page 195, and following. 

(2) Uno always drops the o, when it is followed by a masculine 
substantive. Una, feminine of uno never drops any letter. (See Rule 
XXV, page 48. 



SPANISH EXERCISES* 207 



EXERCISE IV. 

See the formation of the feminine of noxms adjective^ 
their collocation^ and their agreement with the sub- 
stantive, page 38 and 39. 

The climate of Spain is (l) warm. The houses 

es caliente, casa^ f. 

of Paris are high. The English women are handsome. 

Paris son alto. Ingles mugeryi, hermoso 

Emulation is a passion worthy of a noble souL Virtue is 
emulacion, f. pasion, f. digno noble almaS, virtud^ f. 

amiable. Idleness is despicable. Bread is dear. Man 
amable, pereza^i, despreciable, pan.m. cava, 
is mortal. Prudence is a precious virtue. Madam Vial is 

mortal, prudencia^f, precioso 
a charming woman. Miss Peredo is sensible, charitable, 
agradable sensible caritativo 

pretty and well educated. Holland is a rich country. 
Undo bien criado, Holanda^i, es rico pals^vn. 

The sister of the corregidor is happy and his brother is 

corregidor^m, es feliz su 

unhappy. The cousin of Peter is slothful, and the niece 

infeliz, prinm^f, haragan sobrina^. 

of x\ndrew is idle. My Lord (2) the prince of Peace is 

Andres liolgazan. principe^m, Paz.f, 

a Biscayan, and my lady the duchess of Alraaviva is an 
* Viscaino, duquesa, f. * 

Andalusian. The wife of Mr. Charles Ponteverde is an 
Andaluz. esposa,L Don * 

Aragonese. The servant of the Spanish consul is an 
Aragones, criada,f, Espanol consul, m, 

English woman. The father, the Hi other and the 
Ingles padre, m. madre, f. 

children are sick. The brother and sister are idle. 
nino, m. estdn ser 

The ink, the pens and the paper are dear. The window 
and the door are shut. The house is high, large and well 
cerrado, es alto,grande bien 

(1) See Rule XLIX page 95, when we ought to translate the verb 
to be by ser, ajid when by estar. 
(?) 'See Rule V, page 29. 



208 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

adorned. The garden and the parterre of the duke de 

adornado. huerto^ m. Jardiii, m. 

Alcudia are well cultivated. The country (1) house of 

son cultivado, 

the father of Miss Louisa Alameda^ is pretty but small. 
Luisa es Undo pero pequeno. 



EXERCISE V. 
See Rules IX. X. and XL page 35. 

The English drink beer, good wine, excellent tea, and 

beben cerveza^ bueno vino^m . excelente 

eat potatoes. I have (2) sugar, coffee, and cream. Bread, 

comen patata, Yo tengo aziicar^ cq/e, nata^ 

meat and water are things necessary to man. We have 

cosa necesario ienemos 

pens, paper and ink. Take bread and butter of Nicolas. 

pluma, papel, tinta. Toma manteca Nicolas. 

I will give^ you* some cherries that I have bought. 

dar6 te guinda, f. que he comprado. 

Tomorrow I (shall make) visits : I (shall go) to see some 

manana har^ visita irt a ver a 

friends. Mr. Augustin Vial has* lent^ me* some books. 

omigOyXn. Don Agustin ha prestado me libro^m. 

The father of Miss Puente has good friends and 

Senorita amigo^m, 

excellent protectors. The friend of Madam Torres 
escelente protector amiga^ f. 

gives wise and prudent advice to your sister. I have 
da sabio prudente consejo tu tengo 

white stockings, blue shoes, and a grey hat. 
bianco media^L azid zapato^m, pardo sombrero, m, 

(1) The word country is pals, and is rendered by cafnpana only 
>vhen we speak of the great extent of level, open country ; and when 
it relates to troops and armies j in the other cases it is rendered by 
campo. We say then a country house, wia casa de campo. The 
lields are rich, sonricos los campos. 

(2) The verb to have is rendered by iener whenever it denotes the 
possession of an object, and by liaber wben it is an auxiliary. See 
the rotes to the conjugation of'Uiese two rerbsy pages 82 and 86. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 209 



EXERCISE Yl. 



See Rules XII, XIII, XIV, XV, XVI and XVIL 

puges 39, 40, 41, 42. 

The brother of Charles Martinez de Irujo, Secretary . 
Carlos Secretario 

of the embassy to London has a pretty little country 

emhajada, f, en tiene 

house, and the son of his Excellency (l) my lord i\\Q 
jMarquis del Campo has a litde parrot and a pretty little 

papagayo, m. 

cage. This young gentleman is well educated. I have 

jaula^ f. criado^ tengo 

some litde birds and a pretty little squirrel. Mr. D. is 

an ugly little man and his wife is an ugly little woman. 

sii esposa 
Peter is more wise and more prudent than John ; but less 

sabio prudente Juan 

ingenious than he. Mr. de Casa Nueva is richer than his 

hdhil tl 

cousiU; but his cousin is not so proud as (2) he. The 

primo^ m. orgulloso 

city of London is more populous than that of Paris. 

Londres pohlado la 

The streets of London are wider than those of Madrid. 

calle, f. anclio las 

He is more lazy than his brother. I am more tranquil 
perezoso Estoy tranquilo 

here than in the garden. She is not so happy as her 
aqui 
sister. Madam Costillas is not so old as Madam Delpuente. 

viejo 
What a large woman ! what a large, ugly man ! The 
que 

(1) His excellency my lord cannot be translated literally in Spanish: 
translate as if it was //le inost excellent lord and sa.y el escele7iiisimo 
seilor — and add Don when the christian name of the person is ex- 
pressed. 

(2) See in the grammar , after Rule XIV, page 40, the note relative 
to the manner of translating as in the different degrees of comparison. 

18* 



210 SPANISH EXERCISES, 

Spanish soldier is not less brave than the Turk. The 

Biscayans and the Catalonians are brave and (1) intrepid. 

Fizcainos Catalan^ m. intr^pido 

You are as lively as he. He is as learned as his eldest' 

Tu eres vivo tl dodo mayor 
brother.' 



EXERCISE VII. 

Upon the preceding Rules. ^ 

Mary is as amiable as her sister. We are as poor as 

somos pobre 
they. They are as rich as thy father. I have as many 
ellas Ellos son tengo 

friends as thou. (2) She has as many admirers as 
tu, Ella adorador, m. 

formerly. Thy brother has as many books as I. Thy 

antes. 
brother has more children than thou. We have more 
pleasures than labour. They have more than ten 
diversion trahajo tienen diez 

guineas. (3) I have v/ritten more than ten letters (to-day.) 
guinea he escrito carta hoy 

My brother is more than twenty years old. I am not 

tener veinte ano * 

more than twelve years old. Thou hast less pride than 

doce * orgullo 

they. Thou ait not so(4) tall as J. Peter is not so old as 
ellos, alto viejo 

his friend. He does not eat less meat than bread. He 

* come 

drinks less water than wine. Red wine is less agreeable 
behe tinto agrad ihle 

to the taste than white. This little chamber is prettier 

gusto, m. bianco, TU. Este cuarto 

than mine. This small apple is better than the others. 
manzana, f. otro. 

(1) See Rule LXTV, page 193. 

(2) As many, before a substantive is rendered by the adjective 
lanto-a, os-as See Rule XVII, page 42. 

(3) See the N. B, of Rule XV, page 41. 

(4) See the collocation of the negation, page 159 v 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 211 

We have not so much fruit in our garden this year as 

tenemos fruta,f. este ano 

last year. Mr. B. has not so much wit as the Countess de 
iiltimo ingenio, m. 

la Puebla. I have less money than the Marquis of D. ; 

dinero 
but I have as much honour and not less religion than he. 
honor ^m, religion el. 

The garden and parterre of the Marquis de Mondejar^ 
knight of the royal order of Charles Third, ai'e larger 
cahallero real drden^t Tei^cero son 

than ours, (l) The wine of Mr. V. is bad, but that of 

nuestro. ^^alo il 

Mrs. P. is worse. Peter studies as much as his brother^^ 

estudia 
and makes greater progress than he. Miss Sophia Mar- 

hace progreso Sofia 

tinez talks much more than her- sister Frances, but her 

habla mucho Francisca 

^ster talks better than she. 
ella. 



EXERCISE VIII. 

Continuation of the degrees^ of Comparison. — See Rules 
XIV, XV, XVI, XVII, XVIII and XIX, and the 
JS^B. of Hide XVIII, pages 40, 41, 42, 43. 

The lazy sleep more and do not work as much as the 
duermen^ * trahajan 

diligent. I translate better English into French than 
diligente. traduzco el 

French into English. (2) The French dance better than 
el bailan 

the Spaniards. The Biscayans, the Andalusians, and the 

tdndaluz, m. 
Catalonians are excellent soldiers, and pass for the best, 

soldado pasan por 

(1) Seethe N. B. of Rule XIV, page 41. 

(2) In this phrase the adjectives English and French although they 
are used as subst.intives, take the masculine article which agrees 
with the word idioma which is understood. (See the remark follow- 
lag the declension of the noun neuter, page 34.) 



212 SrANISH EXERCISES. 

the most courageous and the most faithful in the kingdom. 

valeroso leal de {1) 

The Spanish mountaineers are very strong and almost all 
montanes^ m. fuerte casi todo 

very tail. Lille, capital of French Flanders, is a very 

alto. Lila capital Flandes, f. sing, 

handsome city. The new house of the Spanish consul is 

nuevo consul 

very large and very well ornamented. The youngest 

adornado, menor 

sister of Mr. Henry Milbourne is very pretty and very 

Don Enrique 

amiable. John's cousin speaks very correctly and writes 

primo^m, hahla correctamente escribe 

very elegantly. Lying is the most abject of all vices. 

elegantemente, Mentira^f, bajo vicio,m. 

The marquis de la Roja is my best friend and your most 

mi vuestro 

cruel enemy. The Luxembourg was not the least pleas- 
cruel enemigo, Luxemhurgo 

ant of the walks in Paris. The wise man will' alw^ays act' 

paseOyin, * siempre ohrard 

very prudently. My brother studies the history of Eng- 

estudia historia^ f. 
land as often as he can. The dog is a very faithful (2) 

piiede, 
animal, and perhaps the most faithful of all animals. 
animal^ m. quizd 

Your sister is very amiable, and a very good woman (3) 
Vuestro 

The servant of my (brother-in-law) is very strong. 
criado^ m. cunado 



EXERCISE IX. 

See Rules XX, XXI, XXIL XXIII, XXIV, and the 

preceding, paee 44. 

The good employment of time is one of the things that 
empleoyia, iiempOym, 

(1) hi after the superlative is translated by de, del, de In, Szc. 

(2) The superlative absolute of Jiel is irregular, it i$ fidelisimo. 

(3) Seethe N.B,2d. of Rule XVII I, page 43. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 213 

contribute most (l) to the happiness of man. The 
coniribuyen dicna,f, 

amateurs say that Mr. de Ja Motte is one of those who 

aficionado yin, die en los que 

have laboured most for the academy of -Vlusic. Francis 
h^Ltrabnjado para academiaA. musica^L 

^^^t most learned man in the city, and Philip the most 
^^r instruido de 

(2) ignorant man in the kingdom. Temperance renders 

ignorante de Sohriedad, f. hace 

the most simple food very agreeable. The most innocent 
simple alimento^m, agradahle, inocente 

pleasures are always the most pure and the most constant. 
placer^ m. son siempre puro * constante. 

The daughter of the Count de Colomera is the hand- 

hija 
somest woman in INladrid. The most barbarous nations. 
de Madrid. harharo pueblo^. 

The most just commandmest. Charles is one of the most 

Justo 7nandamie?ito.m. Carlos es 
learned men in Paris. He is my best friend. Socrates 
was one of the most enlightened philosophers of his 
era instruido Jilu^ofo. m. su 

century. Peter. Paul and Antony are three good children, 
siglo. Pablo Antonio soji tres 7nucJmcho,m, 

but Antony is the best of all. J\Ir. B. is the most prudent 
man that I have seen. (3) The cousin of the Cai^inal 
visto Cardenal 

de Lorenzana is the most learned man that has appeared 

docto pared do 

at Rome. Miss Villegas is more amiable than I thought 
en Roma. _ de lo que creia 

(4.) The flatterer is always more dangerous than he 

adulator, m. peligroso deloque 

appears. Ingratitude will always be the vice the most 
■parece, Ingratitnd, f. * sera 

unworthy of a well-bred and sensible man. The Count 
indi^no nacido sensible. 



(1) See Rule XXIII, pa?e 44. 

(2) See Rule XXL pa£:e^44. 

(3) See Rule XXII. pasfe 44. 

(4) See Rule XX. page 44. 



214 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

de Fernan-Nunez is the man whom I esteem the most^ 

Nunez estimo * 

and Mrs. A. is the woman whom I respect the least. 

rcspeto^ 
The richer a man is, the more he desires to be so. The 

desea * serlo. ^^ 
lazier he (shall be,J the more ignorant will he be. mK^ 
perezoso sera ignorante * sera* ^|V 

shorter time is, the more precious it is. The more- 
breve precioso ^ 

scarce a thing is, the dearer it is. The more just and 
raro • justo 

beneficent a prince is, the more faithful are the subjects ; 
hentfico vasoUo^ m. 

and the more faithful the subject is, the more constant 

constante 
and secure is the happiness of the kingdom. 
seguro es die/la^ f. 



EXERCISE X. 

See the numeral adjectives j and Rule XXV^ as well as 
the jy.B. which relate to it^ from page 48 to 50. 

I have only one sister, four brothers, one uncle, five aunts 
tengo tioy m. tia 

and eight nieces. France was, before the revolution 
sobrina era^ antes de revolucion^f, 

(that is), before the new division decreed by the 
esto es niievo division^, decredato par 

national assembly divided in regard to religion, 
nacional asambUa^i, dividido en cuanto religion, f. 

into eighteen archbishoprics, and subdivided into one hun- 
en arzobispado subdividido * 

dred and twelve bishoprics. In regard to the civil 
obispado civil 

administration, it was divided into thirty-two governments 
adtninistracion^f,* era gobierno 

or provinces. In regard to justice it was divided into. four 
6 provincia justiciar f. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 21D 

i^Teat councils and thirteen parliaments. (There were) then 
consejo parlamento habia entonces 

in France thirty-nine academies and literary societies ; 

academia literario 

nfteen in the north, eight in the middle, and sixteen in the 

jiorte, m. centro^ ra. 

s^y|. The academies of Paris, which were the principal 

m^Ksdiajn. principal 

onW, were seven (in number^) (l) the French academy^ 

the academy of Inscriptions and Belles-Lettresj the academy 

incripcion, f. lei r as. f. 

of Sciences, the academy of Painting and Sculpture, the 
denciaj f pintura, f. escultura, f. 

academy of Architecture, the academy of Surgery, and the 

arquitectura. f. ciriigia 

academy of Writing. The French revolution commenced in 

escritura, f. principio 

one thousand seven hundred and eighty-nine. The king- 
dom of France was the most ancient of all the modern 
era antiguo mo demo 

States. It commenced in the year foui^ hundred and 

est ado J m. * 

twenty, and (there are reckoned in it ' sixty-seven kings : 
se Client an en el rei/, ra. 

the first wsis Pharamond, and the last Louis the Sixteenth. 
The large house next mine, is not new. Saint Ignatius, (2) 
vecino mio Ignacio. 

founder of the Jesuits was a Spaniard. 
fundador Jesuita.m, era * 



EXERCISE XI. 

Continuntion of the preceding rules and of the A*. B^ 
wTiicli relate to them. 

Louis the fourteenth was one of the greatest kings of 
fue 
France, and merited the epithet of Great. Petw the 
merecio epiteto, m. 

(1) Instead of expressing: in number, translate this phrase as if it 
was seven only ; and say^ era'/i siete. 

(-2) I capital is always written J in manuscripts. 



210 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

first, czar or emperor of Russia, was a mathematician, 

czar emperador Rusia * matemdtico^ 

a philosopher, a great general, an excellent admiral, a 
* fiUsofo * * almirantey * 

profound politician, an historian, pilot^ architect ; 
insigne politico^ * historiadovj piloto, arquitectOy 
in a word, he was a rare genius, a wonderful g enj^s , 
en una paiabra ingenio^ m. portentoso 



genius, 
ri^ui 



Clovis first, fifth king of France, and the first chris 

cristiano 
king, began to reign towards the end orthe year four 

principid d reinar cerca del Jin^ 
hundred and eighty one : he reigned thirty years/ Of 
all the reigns of the kings of France, the longest has 

reiiiado^ m. largo 

been that of Louis fourteenth, the sixty fifth king : it 

lasted seventy two years. Charles fifth was 

dur6 

contemporary of Francis first, kingof France,and the pope 
contemporaneo Francisco papa^m. 

Sixtus fifth was that of the great Henry fourth. George 
Sesto lo era . Jorge 

third, king of England,was crowned in* Westminster abbey* 
fu6 coronado ahadia, f 

the twenty-second of September one thousand seven hun- 
dred and sixty one. James second, banished to France, 

Santiago desterrado 

died the sixth of August one thousand seven hundred and one. 
muriS Agosto ^ 

I received on Monday last (1) a letter from my friend Mr. 

* lunes carta, f. 

Abel ; it was delayed fifteen days, see the date of it (2) : 

* astrasado de ved 

Paris, twenty-second of June one thousand eight hundred and 

Junio 
three. What o'clock is it ?(3) Sir, it is eleven, or three 

Que 

(1) The names of the week take the article, then we must say : el 
lunes ultimo J or pasado> 

(2) Of it must not be translated, or we must turn it by 5U, which 
corresponds to no iii English. 

(3) See the JV.jB.4th and 5th of Rule XXV. page 48. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 217 

quarters past eleven. (Give me) my watch, it is twelve 
cuarto * Dame (1) 

o'clock and you said it was but (2) eleven. Where wast 

tit decias Endondeestabas 

thou at ten o'clock ? I was at home. (3) Well, return 

Bien vuelve 
at one o'clock. Sir, it is one o'clock. I know it : go to 

Yo se^ lo* vete{A) 
]Mr. Arco's and (tell him) that I expect him here at nine 

dile espero^ lo^ a qui d 

o'clock in the morning, or at four o'clock in the afternoon. 

de mafiana^i, de tarde. 

He (will tell) thee no doubt whether he can come in the 

dird^ te^ si?i jiuda si puede venir 

morning or in the evening. (5) 



EXERCISE XU. 



On the pronouns personal and possessive, and on the 
anxilianj verbs ser and estar, to be ; haber and 
TENER, to have. 

See in the Grammar the declension of these pronouns, 
page 51 and following, 57 and following ; the conjugation of 
the auxiliary verbs, page 82 and following ; the obervations 
on haber and tenei^ at the beginning of then- conjugation, and 
Rule XLIX relative to the difierent uses which must be 
made of se?' and estar^ to be; page 95. 

(1) Dame is the compound of the verb and pronoun : it is the same 
with vet e' and dile. Custom ha-, willed, that whenever the pronoun 
governed by the verb, is put after it, it should be joined to the verb. 
Instead then of writing, da me, di le, we write dame, dile, it happens 
even very frequently that two pronouns are joined to the same verb 
as in these phrases t send it to me, enviamelo ; I wish to tell it to 
you, quiero decirtelo. 

(2) Translate that it was but, as if it was, that it was only^ que 
tran solo. 

(3) See Rule III, page 28. 

(4) To Mr. Arco's, is, a la casa del Senor Arc9. .^ 

(5) Par la manana 6 par la tarde, 

19 



218 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

N. B. We place the objective pronouns after the exer- 
cises on the three regular conjugations^ persuaded that the 
scholar will find less difficulty in them after having familiar- 
ised himself with the auxiliaries and regular verbs. 

Infinitive. 

To have a new coat. To be tall, short, fat, lean. 

vestido, m. alto, pequeno, gordo^fiaco. 

Having good friends, good patronage (1). Haying beer^ out 

protecion, f. fuera 

of temper. To be sick or well (2). To have been 

humor. 
indisposed. To be occupied. To have genius. To be 
indispuesto. ocupado, ingenio. 

wise, prudent, amiable. Having had patience. Having been 

paciencia. 
Consul of the French republic. To have been a Senator. 
* * Senador. 

To be Corregidor of the City of Cadiz. To be in the 

Corregidor 
country. To have been all day at home. 
campo, ra. 

Indicative present, 

I have a book of geography and one of mathematics (3). 

geografia matematica, sing. 

I am very happy, and my brother is very unhappy. We 

have excellent wine and they have no beer. You were 

cerveza. 
diligent last year and now you are lazy. They have a large 

aliora 
garden (4) and many flowers ; they are very well cultivated. 
jardin, m. flor, f. cultivado. 

Thou hast more money than T, but I have more goods 
diner o pero rnercaderia 

than thou. Thou art more learned than thy brother, but thy 
brother is less proud than thou. 

(1) See Rule XI. page 35. 

(2) See Kule XLIX. page 95. 

(3) See Rule XXV. page 48. 

(4) See Rule XXV. part 3, page 48. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 219 



EXERCISE Xin. 



Imperfect 

I had*and I have still the works of the best Spanish 
» todavia ohra.S. -v 

authors. Thou hadst the grammar and dictionary of the 
autor. m. gramdtica^ f. diccionario, m, 

academy : thou wast well pleased. We had also the 
academia, f. contento. tamhien 

(poetical works) of the Count de Norona and Air. John Melen- 

poesia, t. Norona Don 

dez Valdesj the two best modern* Spanish' poets.' 

Preterite definite. 

Thou wast very well satisfied with the poem of the Count 

satisfecho de poema^ m. 

de Norona on death, and with the odes of Anacreon by 

sobre muerteS. de oda,f. Anacreon por 

Alelendez Valdes : they are truly excellent poetry^^Ve 

* verdaderamente 

had fine weather y^terday. Thy cousin had a rich 

hello " ayer, primo.m. 

present. My brothers and sisters were charhable : they 
presente.m. caritativo ; 

had compassion on the unfortunate. 31y mother (was in 

compasion de tener 

trouble; last week, she was very sad ; we pitied her. 
pesadumbre tener Idsiiina de 

Preterite indefinite. 

I have had much vexation, and I have been very sick. 
Thou hast had three masters. (1) and thou hast been well 
instructed. They have had (a great deal of money. They 
insfruido mucJio dinero. 

have been prodigal. My neighbour hdts been very sick. 
prodigo vecino 

(1) Master, used to signify a man who has people dependent 
upon him. a landlord or master of a house or an estate, must be 
translated by arno or dueiio ; but when it expresses the idea of a 
man who teaches some art or science, then it is rendered by maestro 



220 SPANISH EXERCISES. 



Preterite anterior. 



When I had been fifteen days in the town of Bilboa. 

Bilbao* 
When we had had our passport. When the wine had been an 

pasaporte^ m. 
hour in the bottle. (As soon as) you had been a month 
botella^m. Luego que mes^m. 

at Paris. (As soon as) he had had his money. 
en Luego que ^ 



EXERCISE XIV. 

Pluperfect, 

I had had a reward for diligence, and thy brother had 
premio^xn, de diligencia 
had the first reward for memory. My master (1) had been 

de memoria, 
satisfied with me ; I had been diligent and attentive. Thy 
satisfecho de atento, 

brothers and thy sisters had been studious, they had had 

estudiosQ 
praises. We had been rash. Thou hadst had much bold- 
elogio, temerario, 

ness. They had been timid. We had had good motives. 
timido, motivo. 

Future absolute. 
Our cousins will have to-morrow pens and good paper, 
they will be occupied. My sister and I will be diligent. Wa 
shall have friends. The English will always be good 

siempre 
seamen. The French will perhaps never be as powerful as 
marinero quizd jamas poderoso 

they on the sea ; but they will* always be^more^ so* on land, 
por * mar ; mas lo por tierra. 

Thou wilt be taller than thy friend Francis, but thy f.icnd 

alto 
will be more ftesby than thou. 
gordo 



(1) See the note hi the pfeceding^ page. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 221 

Future anterior. 

I shall have had my books. Thou wilt have been happy. 

feliz. 
We shall have been more civil. The enemies will not 

civil, 
have been victorious ; they will not have had any success ; 
victorioso ; ^ suceso ; 

they will have been conquered. General B. will have been 

vencido, 

victorious. You will have had generals, commanders, in a 
victorioso. coniandante. 

word; courageous and intrepid chiefs, and you ^ill have 

intrepido gefe^ 
been yourselves valorous and invincible. 

invencible. 



EXERCISE XV. 

See Rule XXXIX. and XL. p. 76. Future conjunct 
tire simple aud future cojijuuctive compound. 

Tf 1 have money, they (will rob me of it.) [l) I am sure 
7?ie lo rohardn 
:hat if I have patience, I shall have success. Thou wilt be 

paciencia^ 
rewarded if thou art attentive. If the war /^ long, many 
recornpensado gaerra^t. largo. 

towns will be destroyed. If the enemy has the imprudence 
arruinado. imprudencia^i, 

to put his threats in execution, he will be vanquished, if 
de poner amenaza egecucion^ vcncido, 

you are all, in the moment of attack, faithful to your 

monientOj m. ataqueAH. fiel 
prince, to your country, to the laws of honour. I {shall obtain^^ 

patria ^^y^i. honor yin. lograre 

the pardon of my fault, (as soon as) my uncle shall have ^^ 

perdon^m. culpa, luego que tio 

solicited^ it.* 
Bolicitar lo. 

(1) In this phrase and others similar, we put in the second future, 
oly the verb governed bv the conjunction. 

19* 



222 SPANISH EXERCISES* 



Firsts second^ and third conditionals present. See 
Rules XLI. XLIL XLIII. XLIV. and XLV. pa-^ 

ges 77 a7id 78. 

I should have better patronage than thy friend. You 

pj^oteccion 

would have more scholars if you were more learned. 

discipulo instruido. 

Their father would be happier if he was less avaricious. 

avaro. 
Man would be less unhappy if he was less ambitious. Thou 

ambicioso, 
wouldst not be sick if thou ivast more prudent. Who 

quien 
would have believed that the war loould have lasted ten 

creido durado 

years? It would be just that he should be severely 

* justo severamente 

punished. Your children would not be so ignorant if they 
castigado, igjwrante 

were more studious. Although we should have peace, 1 

estndioso. Aunque paz, 

'should not go) to England. I should be better (1) if I 

no iria 
was in the country. They would be more active if they 

activo 
loere younger. 
j6ven. 



EXERCISE XVI. 

On the firsts second^ and third conditionals present and 
past. See Rules XLI. XLIL XLIIL XLIV. and 

XL F. pages 77 and 78. 

The day would have been much finer, if the sun had not 

soly m, 
lieen so hot. The writings of Voltaire would have been 
ardiente, obra, f. 



(1) To be wtll or ill^ is translated as if it was to be good or bad, 
rstar bucnoj cstar malo ; and to be better j esiar mejor. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 223 

generally admired if they had contained a wiser and 
gentratmente admirado si contenido 

more religious philosophy. If the works of Rousseau were 

religioso filosofia^ f. ohra, f. 

more moral, they would be less dangerous, and would not 

peligroso^ 
have done (so much) harm. If your husband was less 

caasado tanto mah 

violent and less jealous, you would be happier. If men 
violento celosoy 

icere not so unjust, the number of the unfortunate would not 

injustOj numero 
be so great. The effects of the revolution would not have 

grande, 
been so cruel, if the depravity of manners had not been 

depravacion^i, costumbres^L 
so great in England, z/* licentiousness had not been (so much) 

Ucencia, f. tan 

countenanced, (/" irreligion had not been so general (1). If 
favorecidoj irreligion^ f. general. 

the Spanish language, if its beauties, its riches, icere more 

langua^ f. belleza, riqueza, 

known, the literature of this country would have more 
conocido, liferatura, f. pais, m. 

amateurs. If your brother was better informed than you 
aficionado, fut 

last year (2), it was your fault (3). The miser would 

ayaro,m. 
never be contented i^he had not in his coffers treasures to 

cofre tesoro para 
feed his insatiable cupidity. 
alimentar insaciable codicia. 



(i; See Rule XLV. p. 78. 

(2) See the N. B. 1st, following Rule LXV. page 79. 
(3j It, canDot be translated in this phrase ) therefore say, tra 
culpa vuestra. 



224 SPANISH EXERCISES. 



EXERCISE XVIL 

Imperative,(i) 

Have, my friends (2), patience and perseverance. Let 
paciencia perseverancia. 

him have a good dictionary and a grammar better than yours. 

diccioiiario, m . gramdtica, f. 
Let them be less lazy. Let the virtuous man be rewarded, 

virtuoso recompensado , 

let the wicked man be punished. (3) Let us have prudence 
castigado, prudcncia 

and wisdom. Let your brother be more discreet, and let 

sabiduria, discreto 

them have more prudence. Have pity on the poor and 

Idstima de po6rc,m.pL 
unfortunate. Be good, charitable and beneficent. 
caritativo benefico. 

Subjunctive present. 

That I may have riches.(4) That I may be generous. That 
Que 
I may not be ambitious. Although we may not be avaricious. 

ambicioso, aunque 
(In order that) he may have servants, and that he may not 

para que 
be unhappy. In order that our enemies may not have 
any partizans in this country, and that we may be victorious. 

* partidario este 
Although our troops may have excellent officers. In order 

tropas^L ojicial. 

that we may all be friends of our king and of our country. 

patritty f . 

(1) See the note to the conjugation of the auxiliary verb haber. 
p. 82 of the grammar. 

(2) See Rule XXXI, p. 60. 

(3) In English, when the verb is in the third person of the impe- 
rative, and has a noun for its nominative, this noun always precedes 
it ; on the contrary in Spanish, it is always placed after the verb ; 
Ex. write ; sea el hombre virtuoso^ <^c. 

(4) See Conjunctions, page 194e 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 225 

I Be not so negligent. (1) Be not a slanderer. Have no 

* maldiciente. 
I pride. Be not impious. 
\orgullo, impio. 

Imperfect, 

That I might have friends. Although the Count de Na- 
I ranja might not be prodigal. That their children might not 

ss)^ prodigo, 
be libertine. Before your father and your uncle had a 

disolufo antes que 
garden. Before thou wast at Madrid. That the kingdom 
of England might not be in danger. Before the traitors 
estar peligro, traidor^m. 

were arrested; before they were in prison. (2) 

cdrcel, f. 



EXERCISE XVm. 

Preterite, 

Although I have had the pleasure of . . . Before your father 
gusto f m. 

has had news from your mother. Before he has been ill treated. 

noticia^ maltraiado. 

I do not believe that the marchioness de Angosse has ever been 

creo que 
pretty, nor that her daughter has ever been ugly. Your sister 

feo 
is very gay, although she has been sick (so long.) Miss de 

alegre ianto tiempo, 

Costillas has been very amiable, before she Aoshad (so many) 

antes que 
admirers. The number of wise and virtuous men is very 
adorador, numero^ m. sahio vii^tuoso 

small, although they have always been esteemed. 
reducido^ estimado. 

Pluperfect, 
If I had had good wine, I should not have been so sick. 
x\lthough the war had been very long, the peace lasted but 
aunque largo paz^ L duro 

(1) See Rule XLVf. p. 80. 

(2) In prison must be translated as if it was in the prison. 



226 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

one year. (1) Your children were not very good yesterday, 

ayer 
although they had been punished the day preceding. Your 

castigar dia^m., precedent e, 
nephew was very ignorant before he had been at the 
sobrmo^m, antes que en 

university. 
tmiversidady f. 



EXERCISE XIX. 

ON THE REGULAR VERBS. 

Indicative present, imperfect^ preterite definite^ preter- 
ite indefinite^ preterite anterior and pluperfect. 

I speak to men of my country. Thou answerest thy father. 
hahlar pais^m. responder a 

He (comes up) to (2) speak to his master. (3) We will 

subir 
speak of the revolution of Constantinople. We will answer 
the Marquis de las Rojas. You call my son and my daugh- 

llamar 
ter ; (4) but they refuse to come up. I fasted, last year, 

rehusar de ayunar 

every Friday. I drank nothing hut water, and thou fearedst 
todos los viernes. heher temer 

that I should be sick. (5) He allowed his children games 

permitir a j^ego 

of exercise and dexterity. The governor of the City of 

egercicio destreza, gohernadoVym, 

Cadiz supped yesterday with the Commissary of the Navy, (6) 

cenar Comisario, m. * 

We pretended that the Corregidor was sick ; but to-day I 
pretender hoy 

(1) But, taken in the sense of only, is translated into Spanish by 
solo or solamente, or by no placed before the verb and sino placed 
a^ter this same verb. See p. 155 of the grammar, what relates to it. 

(2) See on the prepositions the rules which relate to por and para, 
P'ige 160 and following of the grammar. 

(3) See exercise XIII, page 219, note 1. 
(4; See Rule LVI, pasre 154. 

(5) See Rule LIV, page 153. 

(6) The article the cannot be translated in this phrase: we say, 
tl comisario de manna^ de guerra, and not de la marinay de la guerra 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 227 

am sure that he is well, (1) that he judged yesterday a 

seguro juzgar 

criminal and sentenced him to be whipped. I bought 
reo, m. condenar a azotar, comprar 

yesterday two dozen of pears, and we have eaten them 

docena pera^ comer 

already. John, why hast thou breakfasted so late ? Sir, 

9/a porque almorzar tarde ? 

(it was) eight o'clock when I took my cup of chocolate. (2) 

eran tomar chocolate. 

Thou frightenedst me when thou knockedst at my door. (3) 

espantar cuando 
My father was very well satisfied with me when he had 

de 
spoken to my masters, and he rewarded me. We had dined, 

recompensar corner^ 

sung and danced when Miss Peredo arrived. We had 
cantav hailar llegar, 

promised to write to my aunt. Messrs. Isla and Valdes had 
prometer de escrihir tia. 

procured an excellent place for a son of Madam de Legarra. 
procurar empleo Madama 



EXERCISE XX. 
Rule XXXIX. and XL. page 76. 

Future ahsolutt, future anterior, future conjunctive simple, 

and future conjunctive compound. 

If the next winter is as cold as the last, the poor will 

invierno^ m. frio idtimo, 

suffer very much. We will remedy the evil if it is possible. 

padecer . remediar mal^m.^ posihle, 

Shalt thou not sell (4) thy wine this year ? He will shear 

vender esquilar 

(1) See exercise XV, page 222, note 1. 

(2) Cup, speaking of chocolate is translated by gicara and not by 
taza. 

(3) To knock ai the door is translated by llamar a la puerta and 
not'by^eg-ar d la puerta. 

(4) In interrogative phrases, when the nominative of the verb is 
one of the personal pronouns, the pronoun is suppressed in Spanish ; 
and in conversation the interrogation is caused to be understood by 
the inflexion of the voice. 



228 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

his sheep (in the) beginning of the spring. Thy father 

oveja^iph al principioy primavera^f. 

has assured me that, if thou a)'t diligent and studiest with 
asegurar estudiar con 

attention, thou shah have the gold watch that he has prom- 
atencion, oro reloj^m. 

ised thee. The physician has advised me (not to) go out 

midico^m, aconsejar de no salir 

to-morrow, if the sun is as hot as it has been to-day. I shall 

mananaj sol^m, ardiente lo hoy 

speak to your sister, when she shall have received the visit 

recibir visita^L 
and the good advice of her aunt. We shall not omit, in this 

consejo, m. omitir 

critical circumstance, (anything) that prudence, duty and 
critico circunstanciayf, nada deloque ^ obligacion^f, 
honour shall prescribe (to us) for the safety of our country. 
honor^m, prescrihir nos para seguridadyf. 
They will write (to me) all that shall happen (to them) 

escribir me todo lo que acontecer les 
while I shall be absent. Thou wilt do, my child, all that 
mientras ausente, hards 

thy masters shall command thee ; thou (wilt be silent) when 

mandar callar 

they shall speak (1) and thou wilt answer when they shall 
question thee. If thou breakfastedst to-morrow with the 
interrogar 

Marquis de las Estrellas, thou wilt not forget, I hope, to 

olvidar, lo espi rar de 
speak of my law-suit. Tell Mr. Joseph Mor de Fuentes 

pleito^ m. Di a Don 
when thou shalt meet him, that I wish to write to his son, 

encontrar desear * escribir 

but I (don't know) where he lives. 
ignorar donde vivir, 

(1) See Rule XL. page 76. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. ^29 



EXERCISE XXI. 

See Rules XLl XLII, XLIIl XLIV and XLV, and 

the cV. B. 1st. and 2d. pages 11, 78, 79, 80. 

Firsts second and third cGnditionals present and j^ast. 

If man occupied himself {l) a little more with his own 

ocitparse un poco de propio 

afiairs, and meddled ^ little less with those (of others), he 

negocioym. meterse(2) ageno (^3) 

would live happier. If men (gave themselves up) less to 

vivir entregarse 

their passions^ if they would (suffer themselves to be) 

pasion, dejarse 

persuaded more by the counsels of reason and of virtue, if 
persuadir mas consejo^va, razon^i. 

they respected as they ought, the sacred rights of 
respectar coma lo deber sagrado derecho.m. 

of innocence, in a word, if they respected themselves, the 

inocencia^L en una palabra respetarse a si mismos 

manners would not be so corrupted^ the victims of crime 
costumbreS. corromper victima^f. crimen^xn. 

would not be in so great a number, and the most cutting 
en * niimero agudo 

remorse would not torment their souls. (4) The archbishop 
of Toledo permitted yesterday the Countess de Almaviva 

Toledo 
and her children to take in his garden whatever they pleas- 

hijo detomar 
ed, (5) If 1 wrote the revolution of Algiers, \f I painted its 

pintar 
injustices, its cruelties and its horrors under the reign of 
injusticia, crueldcid horror en reinado 

(1) Rulf> XLII, p 77. 

(2) To mtctdle icUli is translated as if it was to put oneself in, con- 
sequeDily i/:it}i (host must be rendered by en las. 

(3) Others is rendereil in Spanish by ageno,-a,-os,-as, which, as an 
adjective, agrees with the substantive to which it relates. (See pro= 
nooQs indefinite, p 65. of the grammar.) 

(4) Rule XLli. p. 77. 

(5) Rule XLV. page 78, to please, gustar, 

20 



230 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

the cannibal Roland, I should use. colours as black 

antropSfago^m. Rolando usar(l) color negro 

as was his soul. 1 should esteem. Mr. B. if he loved more 

lo est? mar (2) 

his wife, if he treated her with more attention and kindness, 
tratar la con atencion bondad 

and if he loved himself (3) a little less. Who ivould ever 

si amarse a si mismo Qtiien 

have imagined^ before having seen it, that Cesar would 

pensar antes de haherlo visto Cesar 

have perished by the hand of Brutus. (4) It;, woidd be 

muerto de Bruto, * 

good and useful (5) that all governments should protect 

util gobierno^m, proteger 

the ayts and sciences. If I was rich, if I was powerful, 

arte^ f. ciencia. poderoso 

I would fly to the assistance of all those who implored my 

volar socorrOj m. los que implorar 

assistance. (6) He promised to lend me all the books 
asistencia. deprestarme (7) 

that he should buy. If the French were brave before the 

comprar, eran antes de 

revolution (8) they are not less so now. 

lo 



EXERCISE XXII. 

See Rule XLVII. XLVIIL page 81. 

Im^peraiive ; present, imperfect^ preterite and pluperfect 

of the subjunctive. 
My friends, the enemy threaten you ; show who you 
amenazar as ; mostrar 

(1) Usar takes the preposition de ; say then, de color es. 

(2) See Rule LVl, page 154. 

(3) In this same phrase himself being directly governed by the 
active verb to love, it must be preceded by the preposition a, say 
then se amara a si mismo. (See Rule LVI, page 154.) 

(4) See Rule XLIII, page 78. 

(5) Rule XLV, page 78, and observe that placing good and useful 
before the verb, the phrase is infinitely better in Spanish. 

(6) See Rule XLIV, page 78. 

(7) The verb to lend^ being in the infinitive, the pronoun me must 
be placed Sifier prestar and be joined to it ; prestarme is then a com- 
pound of the verb and the pronoun. (See Rule XXVI, page 55.) 

(8) See the N. B. 1st of the Rule XLV, page 79. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 231 

are: (take up) arms, fly to meet him, attack him with 

tomar arnia^ volar le atacar 

courage, fight with intrepidity, and the victory is yours,{l) 

valor ^ comhatir intrepidez, victoria^i. 

Let US prove to our neighbours, that, if they have valour, we 

probar vecino,m* 

have (at least) as much as they. Let them fear the 

a lo menos 
patriotism of a nation ready to shed even the last 
patriotismo^m. nacioriyf, pi^onto derramar hasta 
drop of its blood for its government and its liberty. God 
gota^L sangrepara gohierno lihertad, Dios 

grant that the war may not last long. Speak more softly, 
quiera durar muclio. ^^{jo, 

thou hast already interrupted me twice. Let us promise to 
ya interrumpir dosveces, prometerde 

study, and let us study with more attention, and our master 
estudiar maestro 

will be pleased. Eat some cherries, they are very good. 

contento. comer guinda^f. 

Open the door for my father, he has already knocked 
Abrir puerta, f. llamar 

twice. I hope the physician will cure our poor patient. I 

desear medico, m. curar enfermo^m. 

fear that my father and mother will not pardon my sister the 

perdonar 
fault that she has committed. I hoped that you would have 
culpa^f.que cometer. esperar 

permitted your son to come and dine with me, (2) They 

de venir a comer 
sang and danced, although I teas speaking to you. He 
cantar hailar aunque 

would have been offended (3) if we had revealed his secret. 
enfadarse 

(1) See Rule XXXI, pa^e 60. 

(2) The verbs to come, to go, to return, venir, ir, volver, followed 
by another verb, require in Spanish to be followed by the preposition 
a, which is placed immediately before the verb which it governs. See 
for the manner of translating with me, ivith thee, with oneself, the 
N. B. 2d, following the personal pronouns, pae:e 54 of the Grammar, 

(3) The verb to be offended being reflective is conjugated in Span- 
ish in the compound tenses with the verb haber and not'ser. (See 
Rule LXI. page 157 ) 



232 SPANISH EXERCIi?ES. 

Let us never speak ill of (any body.) Let us always respect 
raal nadie siempre respetar 

the reputation of (every body.) My son continued to study, 
todoSy continuar 

although he had dismissed his master. I shall sup with 
despedir cenar 

appetite, although I have dined well. He is always in good 

apetito de 

humour, provided he drinks and eats well. 

himor^m, con tal que btber comer bien. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

In all the preceding exercises, we have made it our duty, in 
order to render the labour easier to the scholar, to follow all 
the rules in their order, to cite them even in almost all the 
phrases and to refer to them as often as possible, persuaded 
that there can be no better way of familiarising the scholar 
with the principles of a language, than by obliging him to 
have recourse to them, to stud} them and to reflect on them 
at the very monifnt he makes the application of them. 
Now that we have already been over the greatest part of 
these rules, we think it will not be useless to exercise oneself 
anew on the same rules by the translation of some exercises 
which will embrace them all. We shall not cite them, in 
order to render it necessary to consult with a more consider- 
ate and deeper attention the grammar and notes of the pre- 
ceding exercises. We shall pass afterwards to the other 
rules. 



EXERCISE XXIIL 

On the preceding Rules. 

A state is not flourishing but by the purity of its laws, 

estadoyin, no jloreciente sino pureza^f. ley^ 

the security of its commerce, the holiness of its religion, 

comercio, santidad, f 

and the respect and love which the sovereign inspires in 
respeto, m. amor soberano^m. inspirar a 

his subjects. The intimacy of two virtuous hearts is the 

vasallo. intimidad, f. corazon 

gordian knot which nobody can untie. The unhappy 
gordiano nudo^m.qite nadie infeliz 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 233 

person is not wholly (to be pitied j) if virtue remains to 

enteramente de compadecersey quedar 

him in his misfortune. Romances are a poison for the 

infortunio. novela, f. venenojm.para 

heart, they corrupt it (by degrees,) and finish by 
cori^omper poco a poco acabar por 

destroying entirely all its sensibility. Maternal tenderness 

desti^uir del todo sensibilidad^t maternal 

is a debt that all mothers ought to pay to nature. Let 

deuda^L madre^i, deher * pagar naturaleza^L 

us regulate our gifts by prudence, and our desires by 

reglar don^m . conforme a 
wisdom. Esteem is durable only when it is founded on 
sabiduriayf. durable cuando fundar sobre 

virtue. A sensible heart receives soon or late, even in 

sensible recibir tarde 6 temprano aun 

this world its reward. To speak little, to observe much, to 
mundo,m, recompensa, * poco^ * observar muchoy * 

think maturely, and act prudently, are almost certain 
pensar maduramente, obrar prudent emente^ casi cierto 
proofs of innocency of soul, rectitude of mind and purity of 
pruebdyf, inocencia,f, alma^f, rectitud^i. ingenio^m, pureza^L 
manners. 
costumbreSy f. 



EXERCISE XXIV. 
On the vreceding Rules. 
M. de la Rochefoucault says with much reason that 

dice con razon.f. 

self-love is the greatest of all flatterers. Silence is the 
amor propio^ mayor adulador,m. sile?icio,m. 

safest part for him who mistrusts himself. Ihe world 
seguropartef, tl que desconfiar de 
rewards more frequently the appearances of merit than 
recompensar frecuentemente aparienciayi, meritOyXa, 
merit itself. Avarice is more opposed to economy than to 

mismo. opuesto economia^f, ' 

liberality. Envy is more irreconcileable than hatred. 

libpralidadyi. envidia^f, irreconciliable odioyxn. 

The soul is an emanation of the Divinity. The soul, 

emanacionyt divinidadS, 

20* 



234 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 



thought and the faculty of speaking, says the Count de 

pensamiento^m. facultadjf, 

BuiTottj do not depend on the form, nor the organisation of 

dependerde forma^i. organizacion^f, 

the body, thei/ are gifts which the Creator has granted 
cuerpo^m, * don^m, conceder 

solely to man, and not to other animals. The clearest 
dnicamente otro animal^m, ciaro 

proof of this truth, is that although the ourang outang has 
prueha^i, aunque orang-utango 

the body, the limbs, the senses, the brain and the tongue 
miejnbro^m, sentido^m, lengua^L 

entirely similar to those of man, nevertheless he 
enteramente semejante los sin embargo 

speaks not, he thinks not. The empire of man over ani- 

piensa imperio sohre 

mals is a lawful empire that no revolution (l) can 
legitimo que ninguno jmede 

destroy ; it is the em[)ire of mind over matter, and it is not 
destruir * espiritUyf, materia^i, * 

only a right given by nature, and a power 
solamente derecho^m. dado por naturalcza^f. poder^m, 

founded on its unalterable laws, but a gift of God, by 
fuiidar iiialterahle ley^ sinotamhien Dios^ 

which man can at every moment perceive the excellence of 
elcval jjuede cada instante recoiiocer escelencia/. 
his being. (There are) many Jews in Asia and in Africa. 

ser Half Judio. m. 

The catholic religion reigned alone before the French revo- 

catolico dominar solo dates de 

lution, in Italy, in France, in Spain, in several States of 

Italia^ mucho estado 

Germany and in the greatest part of Poland. France is the 

maijor parte Folonia, 
most ancient of the kingdoms of Europe. Germany was 

antiouo reino^ m. Europa, 

formerly called Germania from these Teutonic words, ger 

an es Uamarse Germania teuionco voz^ f. 

and //^a;?, which signify man of courage, (warlike man.) 
que sigmjicar valor ^ guerrero 



(1) See Rule XXXVIII, page 66. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 23 J 

EXERCISE XXY. 

On the preceding Rules. 

Mr. Benedict Jerome Feijoo of the order of Saint Ben- 
Don Benito Geronimo orden^m, San 

edictj and member of the council of his Majesty, was the 

miemhro^ consejo, m. magestad, 

first of all the Spanish writers who dared (l) to attack 

escritor^ m. atreverse atacar 

openly the prejudices of his nation. Mr. Thomas de 

abiertamenie preocupacionS. Don To7?ias 

Iriarte is a Spanish poet justly celebrated ; his translations 

of Virgil and Horace are excellent, and his literary fables 

Virgilio Horacio literario fdhula 

are productions of the most subtle genius and of the most 

prodnccion sutil i?igemo,m. 

delicate taste. The Spanish language is very rich ; it is 
esquisifo gusto ^m. langua^ f. * 

much more noble, much more majestic and much more 
mucho majestuoso 

expressive than the Italian language. The Don Quixote of 
espresivo Italiano 

Michael Cervantes is the best romance that has ever been 
Miguel 7ioveIa, f. 

written. All those who have read the poem of the Araucana 
xscrito, los que leido poema,m, 

^fy Ercilla, make a pompous panegyrick of this work^ 
por hacen pomposo elogio^ m. obra, f. 

particularly of the speech of Colocolo so much extolled 
parti cularmente arenga^i. celeb r ado 

by Voltaire ; it (is found) in the second Canto. The more 

* hallaj^se Canto^m, 

foreigners cultivate the Spanish language, the more beautiful 
est7^a?igero,m.cultivar 
they find it. Lope de Vega is a very great poet, and without 

sin 
doubt the best that Spain has produced. Charles fourth, 
duda producir, Carlos 

(1) If we translate to dare by atreverse, a refiective verb, we must 
place the pronoun before the verb and say : se atrevio a. 



236 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

Catholic king of Spain, (was born) at Naples, the twelfth 

CaiSlico nacer en Ndpoles, 

(1) of November of the year one thousand seven hundred 

Noviembre * 

and forty-eightj and began to reign the fourteenth of 

* 7/ principiar 

December of the year one thousand seven hundred and 
diciembre * * 

eighty-eight ; he was proclaimed king at Madrid the seven- 

y proclamar en 

teenth of February of the following year. ^ 

fehrero siguiente 



EXERCISE XXVI. 

On the preceding Rules and on Rules XXXI. XXXII, 
and XXXIII, page 60. 

At what hour did* my mother dine* yesterday ? At one 

comi6 
o'clock. At what hour did she (take a collation ?) (2) At 

mcrendar 
six o'clock and she supped at nine. When dost thou expect, 
cenar esperar 

my friend, to receive news from thy son ? I desire very 

* recibir noticia desear 

much to know how he does ; he is a good child One of 
mucho^ saber como estar ^ mmhacho^m. 

my friends, who arrived (the day before yesterday) from 

llegar ante ayer 

Madrid, has assured me that he was very well last week, 
asegwar me que semana^L 

Here are very handsome houses. Yes, my friend, they are 
He aqui si 

truly very handsome : the first belongs to the Marquis de 
ciertamente Marques^ m. 

(1) The twelfth may be translated by en doce or by el dia doce. 

(2) We have said in the N. B. on the persons and numbers of the 
verbs, that the nominative personal pronouns arc almost always sup- 
pressed in Spanish : this rule must be observed, whether the phrase 
is interrogative or not. (See note, p. 82 of the grammar.) 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 2S7 

Blanco, the second is mine, the third is my brother's, and the 
foivrth the Count de Isla's ; this large garden is also his, and 

tambien 
the other is mine. Let us (go into) mine, we will gather 

entrar en coger 

some flowers. Who would have thought that the weather 
alguno flor.f. Quien creer tiempo 

would have been so fine to-day? If thy brother had more 
patience, he would have more success in his undertakings. 

fortuna empresa. 

If (any one) asTcs for me, (take care) to answer that I 

preguntarpor cuidado de 

am not at home. If the Irish - - instead of attacking the 

Irlandes^m. en lugar de atacar 
city of Dublin by day, had attacked it by night, Ireland 
de diuy de noche, Irlanda.fy 

would have run great perils ; for, it appears that the 

correr peligro; pues parecer 

malcontents were well provided with arms and ammunition. 
malcontento^m, proveer de arma municion 

I speak of the insurrection of the end of July of the year 

insurreccion^t Jin,m, Julio 

one thousand eight hundred and three. 



EXERCISE XXVIII. 

Oil the preceding Rides. 

Study, be diligent and docile, and your masters will reward 
dScil 
you ; but, if you are lazy, they will punish you. I do not 
understand what the countess has said, although she has 
comprender lo que dicho, 

repeated it thrice. We should have invited thy friend to 
repetir lo conmdar 

dine with thee, if he had come{l) yesterday to the party. If 

venir tertuUa^ f. 

you consoled the afflicted, if you assisted the unfortunate, 
afligido^m. socorrer pobre,m, 

(1) The verb to come, venir being a neuter verb, is not conjugated 
in Spanish in the compound tenses with the auxiliary ser but with 
haber. (See Rule LXI, page 157.) 



^^^ SPANISH EXERCISES. 

if you shared with them your superfluity, you would thus 
repartir entre superjlao^m. a»i 

acquire treasures of benedictions. M. Luis de la Plata 

tesoro bendicion Don 

pretends (to be) very poor, although he is the richest man in 
ser pobrcy de 

the city. I shall dine (to-morrow) with my friend the count 

man ana 
de Isla, (there will be) (a great many) people and after din- 

hahrd mucha gente despues de 

ner we shall play cards and we shall dance aljl night ; we 

jugar a los naipes hailar noche, f. 

shall sing also ; and I wish very much (1) that the Marquis 

tambien desear 

de Mondejar and the duchess de Almodovar would sing the 
duet of Zemire and Azor. Mr. Charles Tuerto bought a 
duo,m, 
house last week, and he sold it at ten o'clock in the 

semdua^i. vender la de 

morning. Where didst thou dine yesterday ? At thy 
maimnaj f. Donde en casa de 

brother's, and 1 shall dine to-morrow with the Duke de 

duque^ m. 
Alcudia, at his country house. Hast thou breakfasted ? yes, 
en almorazar si 

my friend 5 I breakfasted at eight o'clock, or half past 
eight. (2) 6 



EXERCISE XXVIII. 

On the preceding Rides* 

The Swiss are very strong, very courageous and very 
fciithful men. A band of robbers attacked the Count de 

tropa^ f. lodron atacar 

Fernan Nunez and the Marchioness de Ariza, and obliged 

Nunez ohligar 

them to give all their money and their jewels. (3) I lost 

les a dar ^OT/a. perder 

(1) Mucho is indeclinable when joined to a verb, and is declined 
thus mucho-a-os-as when joiner' to a substantive. 

(2) Say, at eight and a half struck, a las oc/io y media dadas, 

(3) See Rule VII. page 30. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 239 

yesterday my little dog, hast thou found him ? No : if [ had 

hatlar lo 
found him, I should have sent him (to thee) immediately. 
enviar lo te inmediatamente , 
Hast thou seen the little country house that my mother has 

visto 
bought ? It is very pretty, we shall always have in the yard 
comprar * patio ^m, 

a large dog capable of terrifying the most daring robbers. 

perroyin. capaz de amedrenfar . osado 

A mother said one day to her children : practise virtue, 

decid hijo practicar 

detest vice, love study, be generous without prodigality, 
aborrecer sin prodigcdidad 

wise and religious without affectation, and you will be happy, 

religioso sin afectacion^ 
not only in this life, but also in the life (to come.) The 

solamente en mas tambien futuro, 

miser is a martyr of the devil or an anchorite who, 
avaro mdrtir demonio^va 6 anacorttayin. que 

by his abstinence and his continual inquietudes acquires 
abstinencia continuo ans^ustia^i. adquirir 

rights to hell ; his heart is always divided between the 
derecho injiernoy m. partir 

desire of preserving and that of accumulating. He is 
deseo, m. conservar tl amonionar tener 

hungry and eats not, he is thirsty and drinks not, he 
Jiambre comer tener sed beber 

(has need) of repose and takes none, he is 7iever free (1) 
necesitar * descanso no lo tomar libre 

from alarms. Before the revelation, the whole universe was 

sobresalto, antes de revelacion^f, universo^m, 

a temple of idols : each vice was a divinity. 
tem^plo, m, idolo cada vicio deidad, f. 

(1) See the observations, p. 159 of the grammar. 



240 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE XXIX. 

ON PRONOUNS. 

See Rules XXVI. XXVII. XXVIIL XXIX. and 

XXX. pages 55 and 56. 

I will send thee to-morrow morning the books I prom- 
enviar manana por la manana 
ised thee ; if they please thee, I advise thee to buy them ; 

gustar aconsejar de comprar 

thou wilt find them at Messrs. Munroe & Francis's. Mr. 
hallar en la lihreria de Don 

Luis de Villa Real has assured us that Miss Sophia Hermo- 

asegurar Sofia 

sa is at Cadiz : write to her, and invite her to come and 

escribir convidar de venir a 

pass some time with us. I have received two letters for 
pasar alguno recibir para 

my brother. I will send (1) them to him at his country 
house without opening them. I will write to him myself 

abrir 
to-morrow, and I will enclose these two letters in mine. 

estas 
Let us defend ourselves, (2) my friends^ (3) let us defend 

defender 
ourselves with courage against the enemy who attacks us 

con corage contra que acometer 

and pretends to conquer us ; let us repulse him with vigour, 

pretender * veneer rechazar 

and let us force him to confess that our valour and our 

obfigar (4) confesar 
attachment to our country, and to the religion of our fathers, 
qficion^ f. 

(1) See Rule XXVII, p. 55. 

(2) See Rule XXX. page 56. 

(3) In these apostrophes : my frienff, my friends ^ my father, my 
mother, my brother, my sister, he. — the possessive pronoun may be 
suppressed, excepting v\ hen they are accompanied with a seniiment 
of joy or sorrow : in these cases the pronoun is expressed with ad- 
vantage, and is placed after the nouns ; and instead of the pronoun 
mi, we make use of mio without an article. 

(4) See the N. B. 4th which precedes the list of the irregular verbs^ 
p. 121 of the Grammar. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 241 

render us invincible. Thy brothers are very unjust and very 
hare invencihle. muy injusto 

ungrateful. A thousand times I have succoured them in 
ingrato, * vez socorrer 

their misfortunes, never has Madam Vial assisted them, 
infortHnirt, asistir 

nevertheless, they love her, they see her, and it appears that 

no obstante visitar * parecer 

they detest me, (l) 
detestar 



EXERCISE XXX. 

On the preceding Rules. 

Somebody advised Philip, the father of Alexander, 

Algimo aconsejar dF'^lipe * Jilejandro 

to banish from his dominions a man who had spoken ill of 

de eciiar estado que 

him ; I shall (take good care not) to do it, answered he, 

guardarse bien de hacer responder 
he would go every where and speak ill of me. When a 

ir(portodaspartesjd decir mal cuando 

Roman general triumphed, a herald said to him from 
romano general^m., triunfar^ heraldo^m. decir de 

time to time, remember that thou art mortal. Let us 
cuando en cuando ^ acuhdate mortal. 

alway submit with resignation to the decrees of 
siempre someterse resignacion decreto^ m. 

providence. Lend me thy book, I will return it to thee 
promdencia^i. Prestar volver 

to-morrow ; do not refuse it to me. (2) No, I cannot refuse 

manana rehusar puedo 

it to thee. Lend thy fan to thy sister, and present it to 

abanico presentar 

her politely. Thou knowest Mrs. D. T. S. ; the count and 

corttsmente conocer 

I were speaking (3) of her ; and we said that she is well 

decir 



(1) See the N. B. of Rule XXX. page 56^ 

(2) See Rule XLVI. page 80. 

(3) See Rule L. page 95. 
21 



242 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

informed J that she speaks several languages and that she is 
instruidoy miicho 

very amiable. All those who know her say (the same) 

Todos los que otro tanto 

of her. Where is Mr. de A. ? Do not speak to me of him, 

Donde 
I detest him. Here are pears and apples, eat some, they 
detestar He aqui pera manzana, algunoy 

are excellent. I shall buy some more to-morrow and I will 

comprar 
send jou some. 



EXERCISE XXXL 

On the preceding Rules. 

If they carry thy brother's servant to prison, he will not 

Si llevar criado,m, car eel ji. 

(come out) of it to-morrow. He is already there. I assure 

saldrd ya alii, asegurar 

you that I shall not go to see him there. The viscount de 

irt ver alia. vizconde 

Isla has bought a country house. I shall dine with him 

comprar 

to-morrow: he* will' speak' (to me)^ of it* : it is new, 

large, and well ornamented ; it is a palace. My son learned 

adornado * palacio^m. apj-ender 

last year all the fables of La Fontaine, but he has already 

7/a 
forgotten the greatest part of them. Twelve robbers were 
olmdar mayor ladron 

stopped last month in the wood of V.... they were tried 
arrestar bosqiie^m. jnzgar 

(the day before yesterday) by the criminal tribunal, which 
anttayer por criminal tribunal ^m. que 

condemned six of them to be hanged. (How many) children 

ahorcar cuanto hijo 

has your sister ? she has two, one son and one daughter. 
Thy (pocket handkerchiefs) are very handsome, but I have 

panuelo,m. mas 

some that are at least as handsome and as good. 
que dlomenos 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 243 

(Shall we go) to the garden to-day ? go there now if you 

Irtmos id aliora 

icish ; (as for me^) I shall not go; for, I come from it. 
querer yo * pues tl 

John, open my chest, thou wilt find in it ten louis, take 
ahrir annario^m. ha liar litis, m. tomar 

them, I give them to thee. (There were) yesterday fifty 

doxj hahia 

persons at the party at Madam ViaPs. 
en en casa de 



EXERCISE XXXII. 

On the pronouns demonstrative 9 relative^ interrogative 
and indefinite^ and on the preceding Rides. 

Whose garden is this ? (1) Whose houses are these ? 
Whose palace is this ? This garden is ?7ime,(2) these houses 
are the prime minister s^{S) and the palace is the king'>s. 

primer ?nimstro 
Who is there. (4) Some one knocks at the door ; John, 

llamar a 
open it. Give me this book and take that, I shall send to 
abrir dar tomar enviar 

them this cage and this bird. This man is (looking for) thee. 

jaula, f. pdjaro^ m. huscar 

He who was speaking to thee is one of my best friends, and 
she who is with him is the friend of thy sister. Has thy son 
paid too dear for his hat ? Yes, he paid twenty five 
pagar par somhrero^m., si 

pounds for it. The (young man) whose talents (5) we ad- 

por joven talentos, m. 

mire is hardly twenty five years old : he will be without 

te7ier ^ sin 

doubt one of the first painters in Europe. Of all vices, that 
duda pintorym.de vicioyin. 

which degrades man most is intemperance. Who* are^ 
degradar horrachera^ f. 

(1) See Rule XXXIV. page 63. 

(2) See Rule XXXH. page 60. 

(3) See Rule XXXU. page 60. 

(4) T/iere, is not translated in this phrase : 

(5) See Rule XXXIV. page 63. 



244 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

you* speaking^ of?' of those of whom we were speaking 

two minutes ago, of those two gentlemen whose credulity 

ha J cahallero credulidad^L 

you condemned (so much). — Yes, yes, I condemned their 

condenar tanto 
credulity, and I shall endeavour to undecieve them on the 

procurar * desenganar sobre 

conduct of their sons. — Well; open their eyes on the 
conduct a, f^ 

scandalous conduct of these poor (young people) who, if 
escandaloso joven / 

their parents do not correct them, will run insensibly to 

padres castigar correr 

their ruin. 
ph'dida. 



EXERCISE XXXIIL 

Oti the Preceding Rules. 

Hast thou seen this parterre ? (Look at) these flowers : 
visto jardin^m, Mirar flor^i, 

this and that are in my opinion, the two handsomest. 

a parecery 

Here is a rose the colour (1) of which I admire. This is 
He aqui color ^ m. 

not less handsome ; it is fresher than that the brilliancy 

* fresco aquella brillo^m, 

of which you admire (so much.) If the Turkish fleet 

Turco flota^L 
attacks that of the English, it will find men to whose courage 
atacar Ingles^ * hallar valor^ia. 

and superiority, she may be obliged to yield. I advise thee, 

* podrd ohligar de ceder, aconsejar 
my friend, to study grammar, the rules of which are so 

de estudiar gramatica^. regla^ f. 
necessary. I shall speak to-morrow to those gentlemen, and 
necesario, 

shall tell them to present a petition to the prime minister 
dire de presentar suplica, f. 

(2) See Rule XXXIV. page 63. 
I 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 245 

whose power equals almost that of the king. He who 

poder,m. igualar tl aqiiel 

was speaking to me yesterday, when my father came into 

entrar en 
my room, is much more learned than thou thinkest. (1) 

cuarto,m, instruido piensas 

What seekestthou? Whom* are MheseMadies^ looking* 

hvscnr mirar 

at?' What* are 5 they ^ talking^ about?* (Here are) two 

que acerca de He aqui 

pinks : lohich of the two (2) shall I give thee ? This pleases 
clavel^ m. dar gustar 

me more than that. And what sayestthou of these tulips ? 

dices tulipan^m. 

They are superb : I shall take some (of them.) Take, my 

magnifico tomar alguno * 

friend, as many as you wish (of them,) (3) I am very glad 

quieras * 
that they please thee. (4) 
gustar 

EXERCISE XXXTV. 

On the preceding pronouns. 

At zvhat hour shall we dine (5) ? At* half * after' two.* 

media y 
Shall we play after dinner ? Yes. — At what game ? 
jugar de spues de Si j^^go 

At chess. Somebody asking one day a (witty man) if he 

agtdrez^ m. preguntar ingenio 

was a nobleman, the latter answered : Noah had three sons, 
* noble r es ponder : No^ 

(1) See Rule XX page 44. 

(2) See after the declension of the interrogative pronouns,page 64 
of the grammar, the manner of translating which in Spanish. 

(3) vds many as, instead of being translated by tanto a-os-as como is 
rendered much better in this phrase and others similar by cuanto-a-os-as. 

(4) / am very glad that must be translated as if it was / rejoice 
very much that ... me alegro mucho de que . . . and the following- 
verb roust be put in the piesent of the subjunctive. 

(5) See after pronouns interrogative (page 64 of the grammar) how 
we must translate what, kc, 

21* 



246 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

I do not know from ivJiich I have descended. Knowest 

s6 descender. Canocer 

thou art]/ of these gentlemen, an?/ of these ladies ? Have you 

cabaUerOy 
any of these works ? Replace all these portraits, each in 
ohra^L volved d poner ret rata, m en 

its place- (We must) give to each one what belongs to him. 

Itigar. Es menester lo que pertcnecer 

Alexander wished that the* beasts ^ ei?e«'and the walls of the 
Alejandi^o qinso animaljm. muralla^L 

cities should testify each in their way, their grief for the 
ciudadyf, a mode, por 

death of Hephestion. Each country has its customs. 

Efestion. pais 

(Let us put) every thing in its place. I doubt if any one 
pongamos dudar que alguno 

has ever known men better than La Bmyere. Has any one 
conocer algaien 

ever spoken more ingenuously than La Fontaine? His house 
(would suit) him better than any body. Do not unto others^ 
convendria a cualquiera. Hagais a 

what you would not that they should do (unto you.) 

q nereis hag an os 

{^Some people^ do not open their mouths but at the expense 
alguno abrir la bocays'mg.sino d * espensas 

of others. He icho has no education resembles a body 

educacioji semejarse d cuerpo^m, 
without a soul. 
sin * alma. 



EXERCISE XXXV. 

On the preceding Rules. 

The people always suffer from the wars which princes 

pueblo^m. sufrir^sing. principe^m. 

make against each other. They have killed each 

se hacen los unos a los otr^os. matarsc 

other. Many are deceived {V) in wishing to deceive others. 

en queriendo * 

(1) Instead of are deceivedj say ; see themselves deceived^ se ven 
enganados. 



SPANtSH EXERCISES. , [J 

Whatever you write (l) avoid useless repetitions. 

C ualquiera cosa que evitar iniitil rcpeticion. 

To whomsoever we speak, we ought to be polite. We ought 

quien qniera dehtr * cortes. 

never to speak ill of (any body) in their absence. In 
* nadie ausencia, d 

whatever he employs himself C) he always works with 

dedicarse trahajar 

taste. Those who do not occupy themselves in ani/ thing 
gusto, at up arse nada de 

Siood and useful, appear to me very despicable. Customs 
iitiL parecer desprcciiible.costumbreS 

are not the same in all countries. We ougbt not to associate 
pais\ m. ^ frecuentar 

with the impious, we ought ere/? to avoid them as public 
* "*" evitar publico 

pests. (No one) knows if he is worthy of love or hatred. (3) 
peste,f, nadie saber disno amor odio. 

yone of these ladies (will go) to the play. The treaties 

ird comedia. f. 

are null. The good man has^ (no where)' a more tranquil 

nulo, (eji ningunaparte) 

retreat, where he can be more at liberty than in his soul. 
retiro^mAonde puede en 

No reverse ^ought to) disturb true friendship. One is not 

contratiempo alterar uno 

always master of his passions. ^There are' defects that 

dueho pasion. Hay deftcto 

we conceal carefully. When we have had the misfortune 
ocultar cuidadosamente, desdichaA\ 

to otlend any body, we ought to laboiur to make him 
de ofender a a/o-uieu^ trabajar hacer 

forget the displeasure that we have caused hun. What do 
olvidar disgusto.m. causar ^ 

they say of the negotiations ? They affirm that peace is made. 
se dice negociacionyi. asegurar hecho* 

(1) See the pronouns indefinite, pages 64 and 6-5 of the grammar. 
{2) See the X. B. 4th relative to verbs ending in car and gar, 
which precedes the irregular verbs. Grammar pag"es 121 and 122. 
(3) See Rule XXXVIIl, page 66. 



248 .- SPANISH EXEKCISES. 



OBSERVATIONS. 



The second person singular, as well as that of the plural, 
being very little used in good society, and as they cannot be 
made use of but in speaking to a friend or to a person over 
whom we have authority (see the observation on the pronoun 
of the second person^ after its declension^ page ^2^) it will 
be proper to begin in the following exercise to substitute the 
words vm. and vms. for the pronouns of the second persons, 
which is not difficult. 

When the pronoun t/ou is addressed to one person only, it 
is changed into your favour ^ vuestra merged, wliich is pro- 
nounced usTED and is written vm., and when it is addressed 
to more than one person, it is changed into your favours^ 
vuESTRAs MERCEDES, which is prououuced usTEDEs, and 
written vms. In the first case the verb is put in the third 
person singular, and in the second, in the third of the plural. 

Vm. and vms. are of both genders, that is to say, they are 
used equally in speaking to men and women. 

It is well to observe that the words vm. and vms, are not 
repeated in Spanish as often as you in English : we do not 
repeat them excepting when they are so distant that it would 
be difficult to know them as nominatives to the veib. Ex. 
You say that yoii know and that you love Miss Villigas, that 
is, your favour says that he knows and loves Miss Villegas ; 
VM. dice que conoce y ama a la Senorita Villegas. And if 
the prononn you is followed by this possessive pronoun yoiir^ 
it must be rendered by the pronouns of the third person his 
and their^ su or sus. Ex. You have sold all your gold and 
silv er plate, that is, your favour has sold all his gold and sil- 
ver plate ; vm. ha vendido toda su vagilla de oro y de plata. 
Your when not preceded by you is changed into these words 
of your favour^ which are preceded by the substantive to 
which your refers, and this substantive takes the masculine 
or feminine, singular or plural article, according to its gender 
and number. Ex. Your brother came to see me, su hermano 
DE VM. vino a verme^ that is, the brother of your favour y ^c. 
I have received yoar letters, he recihido la carta de vm. 
that is, I have received the letter of your favoi>r or worship. 

In addressing God and speaking to crowned heads, we 
make use of the second person plural in Spanish. Ex. O 

DioSy vos sois mi verdadero padre. Admjtuj, Gran 

Carlos y con benigno rostro^ con oidos propiciosj y corno 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 249 

prenda de nuestro afecto^ de nuestra veneracioriy lealtad y 
rendimiento a la Magestad^ este escrito^ que con tanta mayor 
confianza dedicamos a vuestro nomhre^ cuanto conocemos 
que nada os es mas grato y decoroso^ nada parece mas real 
y mas digno de un Boihon que los pensamientos capaces de 
fomentar y ennoblecer las artes y la sabiduria, — Academ- 
ical discourse. 

In the first part of the exercises we have enabled the 
scholar to exercise himself on all the parts of speech, from 
the article, to the auxiliary verbs and the three regular conju- 
gations inclusively. We have introduced in it very few neu- 
ter, reflective and reciprocal verbs, because our intention has 
always been to begin this second part with exercises on the 
rules that belong to them. We have also avoided, as much 
as possible, introducing irregular verbs in the first part, in 
order to give the scholar time to study them. Their 
great number is enough to frighten one at the first glance ; 
but we are soon encouraged, if we reflect, 1st. that the four 
hundred and eighty-three or eighty-four irregular verbs are 
reduced, in a manner, to thirty -five, by which all the others are 
conjugated: 2d. that they are almost all regular in their 
irregularities. Indeed, if we examine one or two of these 
verbs, we shall find that a little reflection renders the difficul- 
ty very trifling. Jlcordar^ to remind, to resolve, is irregular ; 
the irregularity consists in changing the o into lie in the three 
persons singular and the third plural of the three present 
tenses, that is, of the present of the indicative, of the present 
of the imperative, and of the present of the subjunctive. 
All the other persons and all the other tenses are regular. 
The irregularity of the verb aborrecer to abhor, consists in 
placing a z before the c whenever the latter is to be followed 
by an o or an a ; the o and a are found only in the three 
present tenses as above stated ; there is then no irregularity 
but in these three tenses, and all the others are regular. Let 
the scholar study these verbs attentively and judiciously, and 
they will not present any serious difficulty. — In the following 
exercises, we shall make known the irregular verbs by these 
letters, zVr, whenever they are in a person subject to irregu- 
larity, and they will be found in their places in the Alphabet- 
ical List, beginning at page 122, which canijot be too often 
consulted by students. 



250 SPANISH EXERCISES. 



EXERCISE XXXVL 



On the neuter^ reflective^ reciprocal (i^id impersonal 
verbs. See Rule LXL page 157. 

I have walked all day. My brother and sister have 
pasearseil^ 
amused themselves very much in the garden of the English 
divertirse ^ 

Consul. My uncle has assured me that you (were vexed) 

enfadarse 
yesterday with the prime minister. The "Germans have 

primer Jileman^ m. 

defended themselves well against the English. The French 
defender se 

had fought like desperadoes. Your mother will be 

pelear coma desesperado. haber 

(gone out) when we arrive. The dancing* master' of Mr. 

salir bade 

Luis Angelo had arrived when we entered. I should 
Luis llegar entrar. 

have repented very much having spoken to Messrs. 

nrrepentirse de 

de Callenuevaif they had been pronounced guilty. Rejoice, 

dcclorar culpable, alegrarse^ 
my children, your father is much better, (2) he is out of 

fuera 
danger. My nephew does not cease to torment and afflict 

sobrino, dejar de atormentarse 

liimself. It rained, hailed, lightened and thundered 

* Hover ^granizar^relampaguear tronar 

yesterday almost all day. (There were) yesterday more than 

casi diay m. 

sixt}^ persons at the party at the Countess de Torillo's^ and 

en en casa de 

to-morrow (there will be) at least two hundred at Madam 

a lo rnenos Madama 

Terranueva's. 

(1) The pronoun se which is found joined to the verb in the infini- 
tive, always denotes that It is reflective, or reciprocal. 

(2) See the N. B. of Rule XLIX. page. 95. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 251 



EXERCISE XXXVII. 



On the neuter^ reflectedf reciprocal, impersonal and 
irregular verbs. 

Messrs. Cojo and Giboso disputed last Monday (1) for 
dis put arse * 

about an hour. Your cousin told me yesterday that his 
cerca de primo decir ^irr. 

mother would not return from her country seat till 
volver dntes de 

next weekj although she had already arrived. T abhor 

prdximo aborrecer,irr. 

and my sister abhors like me false philosophy. I desire that 

como yo Jibsofia^ f. desear 

you would abhor it also. Can you. Sir, do me the 

sub. pres. Po der ^irr. hacer 

pleasure to lend me ten louis ? I cannot : if I could I 
favor, m, de prestar luis 

would do it willingly. - - The servant of Mr. Cafias 

ha cer, irr, de may buena gana. 
has been judged and declared innocent. What do you 

juzgar declurar 

think of what I have told you ? At what hour do you 
pensar,\rr, decir, irr. A"" 

wich that your children should - - bi^eakfast? I 
querer^wv. almorzar, irr. subj. pres. 

breakfast at seven o'clock, and I wish that they should break- 
fast, and that you should alP breakfast* at eight. Go, my 

ir, irr. 
children, go and study till breakfast is ready. I 

a hasta que almuerzo, m. este pronto. 

A;woz/; that it will not be so 6e/bre half an hour. (2) None 
s«6er,irr. * estar lo * 

can - recollect without horror the bloody* scenes* 
poder^xxx. acordarse sin horror de saiigriento escena,(, 
which the revolution of Morocco produced in the years one 

producir, irr. ^ 

(1) The days of the week take the article, say therefore; el lunes 
ultimo, or pasado. 

(2) Before is here translated by «n?e5 de....sdLy, antes de media hora ; 
an is suppressed,. 



252 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

thousand five hundred and eighty-two and eighty-three. 

I say and I repeat it every day that our posterity will 

decir^m, repetir^ixv. nieto^pX.m. 

scarcely believe such atrocities. I bring yoUj gentlemen, a 
apinas creer atrocidad, traer^wY, 

book that you will read with pleasure ; I desire that you 

leer gusto ; demar 

would bring me also, or that you would send me that 

sub pres. tambien^ enriar H 

which you have promised me. I (go out) every day about 
pro meter salir^WY, hdria 

one o'clock : do me the favour to send it to me before that 

Jiacer^ixv, de 

hour. 



EXERCISE XXXVIII. 

Continuation of the ireceding Rides. 

The truly ^ christian^ man* blesses the hand of 

verdaderamente cristiano bendtcir^wv, 

God, even when it chastens him : let us follow his example^ 

aun cuando * castigar seguir^irregemplo^m, 

and let us bless, (in the midst) of our misfortunes the God of 

en medio infortunio 

goodness who has given us being and who preserves it to us. 

dar ser, m. conscrvar 

I fear this child will fall, (1) tell him to stop. (2) Your 

catr, irr. decir^hr detener server, 
father wishes that you should conduct, (l) your sister to 

querer, irr. conducir, irr, 

school by the same road that you conducted (l) her 
escuela^t por mismo cammoj m. 
yesterday. I say and I repeat every day that nothing is (3 ) 

repetir, irr. nada 

so rare, as a true friend. In summer, almost all Spaniards 

verano, casi 
sleep (after dinner ;) it is the heat which requires that 

dormir^irr, de pues de comer * exiglr 

(1) Pat caer in the subj. pres. and conducir l?i in the same tense., 

(2) Translate the phrase as ii it was, tell him that he stopjpres. sub. 

(3) See Rule XXXVIII. page 66. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 253 

they should do it. It lightens and thunders often 

hacer yirr, * tronar^vcv. frecueniemente 

in Spain ; it rains there very rarely in the southern 
* rara vez mediodia^m. 

provinces, and in the northern provinces the rain is almost 
provinciayf. norte^m, lluvia^i, 

continual from the month of October till the end of April. 
continuo desde mes^m, octubre hasta Jin^ra, abril. 
Where are'' you* going/ Margaret? I (am going) into the 
Adonde ir, irr. Margarita ? en 

garden, 1 shall gather some flowers, and I shall go and carry 
coger flor, f. a Uevar 

them to the Countess de Dupuy ; I should desire you 

desear 
would come with me, but I fear that your mother (1) does 

venir^ irr. 
not wish you to (go out). — I (am going) to ask her. — 
que vm, salir, irr.p.subj. preguntdrselo. 

Well, go and return quickly. My mother consents 
Bien, volver^nv, pronto. consentir^vcv. 

that (2) I should go with you, provided that (2) 1 bring her 
en que con tal que traer /irr. 

some flowers, and that (2) we do not (go out) before (2) I 

salir yirr. antes que 
knoio my leison in geography. 
saber y irr. lee ton de geogrufia. 



EXERCISE XXXIX. 
See Rules LI. LIT. LIII. and LIT. pages 151, 152, 153. 

I have just heard that the countess de Villegas has lost a 
acabo de oir 
son, it is the queen's surgeon who has killed him. The Mar- 

* reina^i, cinjrinoym, morir^in, 

chioness de Costillas is also dead, and she (is to be buried) 

se ha de enterrar 

(1) YO'ir mother^ is politely translated in Spanish, 5U 5eilorc^mac?re : 
your father, su sefior padre, &lc. 

(2) See conjunct, gov. the subj. p. 194. 

22 



254 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 



the day after to-morrow at her country seat. I am very poor 

en casade campo, 
and thou art very rich. (1) I am not more indebted (2) to 
Philip my father, said often Alexander, than to Aristotle, 
Felipe decia Alejandro^ Aristdfeles, 

my preceptor : if I owe my life to one, I owe virtue to the 

preceptor : deber al 

other. Do you believe what (was told you) this morning ? 

creer le decian 

What? that Mr. Peredo is dead? [ believe and I know* 

muerio ' saber^irr, 

even* that he is very well. What is my son doing ? He is 
aun hacer ? 

writing. (3) — Where is he ? He is in his room. — And this 
escribir. donde 

morning what was he doing when you was with him ? He 
was studying geography. I thought that he was drawing. — 

geografia^ f. dibujar. 

No, sir, but he will do it while you are breakfasting. I fear 
mientras almorzar, temer 

that you deceive me. Let us go and write the letters of 

e/i^anar, sub. pres. iV,irr.a escribir 
which I spoke (to thee.) Sir, I hnve written them. (4) 

escribir 
(There are) some men who repeat (5) everywhere all that 
Jiaber ^impers. repetir,\rr.(por todas partes) lo qtie 

they hear. We will go and dine, when you please. (6) Let 

oir^ irr. a gustar, 

us go and walk first, we shall dine with more appetite. My 

a antes, apeiito. 

son has just arrived from the wharf, where he has been 

acaba de llegar 7/iMe//e,m. donde 

walking an hour and a half. Do not forget, Francis, that I 

* olvidary Francisco^ 

have ordered thee to return to-morrow. (7) 
mandar de volver manana, 

(1) See the exception to Rule XI. page 152. 

(2) Say : I do not owe more. . . . JYb deho mas. 

(3) See Rnl« L. page 95. 

(4) See Rule LIX. page 156. 

(5) Say ; que andan repitiendo, or que van repitiende, for^wko repeat. 

(6) See Rule XL. page 76. 

(7) See Rule LVIII. page 156. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 



EXERCISE XL. 



On the preceding Rules and on Rules LVIL LVIIL 
LIX. LX. and LXL pages 156, 157. 

I have all the works of Mr. Thomas de Iriarte, I have 
ohra. f. Don Tom as 
read them, and they please me very much. I like also 

gustar Me gustan 

very much (1) the writings of Calderon and Lope de 

ohra, f. 
A'ega ; I bought them fifteen days ago. and I paid ver\' 

comprar ha, pagar 

dear for them. Spanish books were so scarce in Boston. 

por 
that the lovers of that language could hardly procure any. 

aficionado a poder encontrar 

I should wish to read the poem of la Araucana by Alonzo 
quererArr. Alonso 

de Ercilla; but I do not know if I shall (be able) 

saber, irr. poder^, 

to find it in this city. I do not believe that you can find 
* encontrar creer 

it at the bookstores ; but one of my friends, who has in his 
library ten or twelve thousand volumes of the best French. 
hihlioteca tomo 

Englishj Spanish, German and Italian works, has often 

ohraS, 
spoken to me of this poem: I will ask (him for it.) telling 

pedir se lo decirArr, 
him that you wish to read it ; and I am persuaded that, if 

desear * estar persuadido 

he has it, he will not refuse it to me. (How much) do you 

rehusar cuanto 

think I have paid for the two hundred bottles of Burgundy 

pagar por botella^f. 

wine that I have bought ? One hundred and twenty pounds 

* libra 

(1) The verb fo h'A'e, gustar: is used impersonally ; as. h gust 
la musica italiana^ he likes Italian music. .\os gusta el Espafiol, tv© 
like the Spanish 



256 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

Sterling ? They did not cost me but one hundred pounds. 

esterlina ? costar 

they are not dear. The wine being so old and so good, I 

rajicio 
would willingly have paid a hundred and fifty pounds. 

de huena gana 
The letter which I have written to your mother to announce 
carta^ f. escrihir^\n\ para anunciar 

to her that Miss Sydney is dead, will be delivered to-morrow 

entregar 
to Mr. Montague, who (is going) to see her at her country 

ir^ irr. en 

house, and has offered to carry it to her. 
ofrecer de llevar 



EXERCISE XLI. 

On the Ailxerhs^ the Prepositions, and the preceding 
Rvles. See jiage 157 and the following observations 
on adverbs. 

N. B. In Spanish the adverbs are generally placed after 
the verb, and in compound tenses after the participle, except 
the negative and interrogative adverbs, which are placed 
before the verbs, and before the auxiliaries in compound 
tenses. 

The arts and sciences have never been more cultviated 

arte^L ser cultivar 

than they are now : but never also have they been more 

lo ahora : 
encouraged than they are. (There is) no country where 
proteger lo, hay 

the laws are more just and wise, and where justice is 
sean sou 

administered with less partiality than in France. The vir- 
administrar parcialidad 

tuous man is more estimable reduced even to the most 

redttcido aun 
extreme misery than the man without honour and without 
estremo miseria^L sin 

religion, living in the greatest opulence. It is not riches 
vivir mayor opidenciuy^' * No son 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 257 

that command esteem, but honour and virtue. Indigence 

grangear estimacion^i. mas si indigtncinS, 

was neve"!' and never can be criminal, hut by being the 

criminal^ con ser 

effect of crime. There is nothing so common as the name 
efecto.m. crimen ^m. comun 

of friend ; nothing however so rare as true friendship. 
sin embargo amistad^ f. 

(It is said) that the Hon. Mr. W. speaks learnedly^ prudently 

se dice doctamente. 

and eloquently, (1) Professor H. writes and speaks correctly 

elocuentemente, 
and elegantly. Modesty, candour and virtue are, in a 

eleganteme?ite. candor, m. 

woman, preferable to beauty. (2) When we hear men say 
mejor hermosura, f. o/r, irr. decir 

to us every day : gentlemen, we are wholly yours ; we are 

cada " ^ de vm, 

entirely devoted to your service : let us believe that it is 

creer * 

almost always as if they said : we might (be useful) to you, 

cast decir: poder^n\ servir 

but (we will do nothing about it.) 
710 lo haremos 



EXERCISE XLII. 

On the Conjunctions and preceding Rules. See Bules 
LXILLXIII.LXIV and LXV. pages 161, 162, 193. 

William second, king of England, was killed while 

matar estando 
hunting, with an arrow hy Walter, his favourite, in the 
en caza, de saetazo Gualtcro^ valido de 

year eleven hundred and one. The battle of Masura, in 

mil ciento batalla^ f. Masura, 

Egypt (was fought) in the year twelve hundred and fifty- 
darsey irr. mil dos cientos 

(1) See page 160 of the grammar, Sd observ. 

(2) Translate this phrase as if it was : modesty. 4"C, art better in a 
woman than beauty, 

22* 



258 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

Saint LouiSj king of France, after having fought with a 

despues de pelear 

heroic courage, was made prisoner by the army of the 

valorem. kacer/in\ egtrcito^m, 

Saracens commanded by Malec Sala. Having been 
Saraceno mandar 

ransomed, he resumed the conquest of the Holy^ Land ;' 
rescatavj volver a conquista^L Santo lieiTa^f, 
but the plague having introduced itself into his army, the 

peste^ f. introducirse 

greatest part of his troops perished with it, and iie perished 
mayor percer de 

(with it) himself. Punishments (ought to) be for the 

* castigo^m. deber 

wicked, the rewards for the good. I shall (be absent) 
7nal0y m. recompensa^ f. ausentarse 

next week for some days, and on my return my son can 

a vnelta podrd 

depart ybr Madrid, or if he prefers it, delay his journey till 
salir preferir yirr. dejar viage para 

Spring. (1) (Every body) says that, for a (young man) of 
la todoSj^V decir, irr. jdven^xa, 

fourteen, your nephew is prodigiously learned. Your father 

afios^ sobrino instruido. 

is on the point (2) of (setting out) for the capital : he 

partir 
intends to speak to the minister for your brother and to 
tener dnimo de ministro^ ra. 

endeavour to obtain a place /or him. Mr. D. speaks Latin, 
procurar * lograr empleo, m. 
French, Spanish and English. (3) Charles and Ignatius, his 

IgnaciOy 
brothers, are also very learned. Do you know where Mr. 

tambien dodo, saber^wv, 

Francis Ordonez is now ? No, Sir ; I know that he is no 
ahora 



(1) See pages 160 and 161 of the grammar, the different modes of 
translating /or. 

(2) See the N B. 2d of Rule LXII. page 161. 

(3) See Rule LXIV. page 193. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 239 

longer a canon of the Cathedral of Saint Andero ; and I 

mas ^ canonigo catedraJd, 

believe that he is archbishop or bishop. (1) 

creer arzobispo obispo. 



EXERCISE XLUL 

On the Conjuncthns, the Interjections^ and the pre- 
ceaivg Rules, 

I shall not (go out) to day unless it ceases raining. AI- 
salir, irr. * dejar de Hover, 

though beauty is much (sought for) in women, yet it is very 

miiy deseado * 

often - - dangerous and productive of very great 
frecuentemente peligroso productivo 

evils. This war will be very long, unless the powers of the 
mah 

north coalesce. The Spanish Academy has established /or 
norte^m. ligarse, (2) establecer 

pronunciation clear and precise rules, that there might 
pronunciation,f. claro preciso regla^f. afiri que * 
not remain the least doubt on so essential a point. Woe 

quedar dada^. Ay 

to those who suffer themselves (to be dragged away) by the 
de dejarse arrastrar de 

torrent of passions! Alas ! I am ruined. (How unfortunate 
torrente^m. pasisn^i. estar perder, desdichado 

I am !) courage ! courage ! after the combat, victory. 
de mi ! espiritu ! comhate^m, victoriaS, 

Passing (last evening) in the street of Saint Charles, I heard 
Pa^sar ayer noche calle^f, Carlos, ozVjrr. 

repeated on all sides these cries : fire ! fire ! I hastened my 
repetir por parte grito,m. adelantar el 

steps, and on entering the neighbouring street, I met a 
pasoj alentraren vecino encontrar 

poor woman who melted into tears and did not cease to 
deshacerse en Idgrimas de 

repeat these words : My God, how unfortunate I am I Ah ! 

VQZ, f. 

(1) See Rule LXV. page 193. 

(2) See Grammar, page 121, M. B. 4. 



260 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

my childj my poor child ! where art thou? the house of this 
woman was then almost reduced to ashes, and the child 

entonces cast reducir ceniza^ 
whom she lamented had been a victim to the flames, it was 
llorar * victima de llama^i, * tenei" 

only three years old. (Poor little one !) exclaimed I, what 

* Pobrecito f esclamar 

sorrow, what a misfortune for a mother ! I endeavoured to 
dolor^ * desdicha \ procurar * 

console her, I gave her some money ; but all was useless : 
consolar dar,irr, dinero^m. ^ 

she was inconsolable ; ah ! said she to me, thanking me, 

inconsolable ; decir dar gracias 

(God grant) you may never experience a similar 
Dios quiera que esperimentar * semejante 

misfortune. 
de^icha. 



EXERCISE XLIV. 

On the preceding Rules. 

Madam Luisa de Legarra arrived yesterday from Ma- 
drid, and brought me letters from some of my friends. I 

^?'aer,irr. alguno 

shall go and walk, after dinner, and Mary will come with 

ir d venir^ivY, 

me. For whom is that ribbon ? for me or for thee ? it is for 

cinta, f. 
thee, I shall buy another for me, dost thou know Miss M.... ? 

conocer 
do I know her ! certainly : and I assure thee that I love her 
si ciertamente : asegnrar querer ^irr. 

and esteem her very much. And dost thou love me also ? (1) 
Yes, I love thee (very much) and shall never forget thee. 

muchisimo 
What did the Marquis de Rojas want? He asked me how 

querer ? preguntar 
you did, and then he (went away.) I received last week 

estavj despves zVse, irr. recihir 

a letter from Mr. John Roca ; it ended thus : and do me the 
Don * acabar hacer, \rr. 

(1) See the N.B. of Rule XXX. page 5d. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 26 1 

iavoLir to believe that I dim forever (l) your sincere friend. 
favor ^XQ.» de creer^ 

Scc, You know him, (as well as) his brother Augustus. 
como tamhien Augusto. 

Well, tell me if you have ever known men more worthy of the 
bien, decir,in\ jamas 

esteem and affection of those who associate with them. — 
estimacion.L afecto^m* frecuentar * 

Never ; and I assure you that I love them both with all my 
Nimca; asegurar a amhos 

heart. I say as much of them and I say it with pleasure. 

otro tanto 
The man who has passed his youth in amusing himself , (2) 

pa^sar juventud 
repents of it (sooner)^ or^ (later.)' My children spend 
ello lemprano tarde. emplear 

two or three hours every day in studying history. Playing 

a jugar 

and walking, you will not inform yourself. A man of 

instridrse 
genius (ought to) cultivate his talents to frender himself) 
ingenio deber taIento,m.para hacerse 

useful to society. I like reading and study, (S) I do not 

sociedad^L megusta 
like the company of Miss B., I fear she will come. 

que t*ewiV,pres.subj. 



EXERCISE XLV. . 

On the preceding Rules. 

My husband solicits the place of officer in the queen's 
soiicitar empleo.m. oficial 
regiment; but I fear that the king will refuse it to him. The 
regimiento.m, rekusar, sub pres. 

Governor promised us yesterday to come to-day to the 

prometer de 

party, but we fear that his occupations will prevent - - - 
tertulia,{, ocupacion impedirjwY.^wh.i^Yes, 

(1) See these words, pag-e 159 of the g^rammar. 

(2) See Rule LV. page 153, 

(3) See Rule LV. and the remark that follows it, page 153a 



262 SPANISH EXERCISES. 

our having the pleasure to see him. (Is there) any news ? 
quetengamos gusto^m, de ver Hay noticia^ f. 

No; there is none, (1) (How many) persons are there below ? 

abajo ? 
(How many) ladies and (how many) gentlemen ? There 

caballero ? 
are ten ladies and nineteen gentlemen; and there were 
yesterday forty-two persons at the Marchioness de 

en casa de 
Torino's ; the assembly was very brilliant. (It is) a great 

brillante. es^ 
misfortune for a man not* to* have' friends. (2) Who 
desdicha^i, el 

has done that ? It is I. (2) Who has written this letter ? 

liacer^ irr. carta f. 

It is you, I believe. Read, my child, and read again (3) 

creer, Leer^ 
the maxims of La Rochefoucault, they are fine and suitable 
mdximaf. hermoso propio 

to give a very great knowledge of the human heart. I 
a dar conocimiento, m. 

cannot (go out) to-day, I have too bad a headache. (4) 
poder,irr. salir 

Sir, your father (has but just) gone out (5) he will return 
acabar de volver 

in two hours. The archbishop of Toledo was like to 
dentro de estar para 

die (6) (last evening) of an indigestion. (It is) only an hour 
morir a noche indigestion^ f. hay 

since the Marchioness de Costillas told me of it. I have 
que decir /irr. * 

written two lines to him to express to him (how much) 
esaibiryin. renglon . para espresar 



(1) See Rale XXXVIII. page QQ. 

(^) See page 155 of the grammar, 3d. observation, &,c. 

(3) See page 155 of the grammar, 2d. observation. 

(4) To translate these words, we must render them in this manner, 
iJu head pains me too much ; me duele demasiado la cabeza. These 
modes of speaking ; to have a pain in the eyes, in the teeth, ^c. are 
rendered in the same manner, as, me dolia un ojo, un diente, S/'C. 

(5) To have or to be but just, is, acabar de, governing the next verb 
in the present of the infinitive Ex.^cabo de salir , I have just gone out 

(6) See page 156; 4th. observation. 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 263 

I am grieved by this accident. (1) I am very much grieved 

?ne pesa * 
(by it) myself; I shall go and see him after dinner. Do me 

* a despues de, Hacer^vcr, 

then the favour to tell him that this evening we will go, 
paes favor ^m.de nocke,L 

seven or eight friends (of us) and keep him company. 
* a hacer 

(1) Say : bow much grieves me this accident ; and so, in all the 
tenses used as impersonal verbs ; as, le pesaba, he was grieved ; nos 
pesard, we shall be grieved ; me ha pesado, I have been grieved ; nos 
gusto J we liked ; les ha gv^tado, they have liked , ie habria gustado, 
thou wouldst have liked, kc. 



A VOCABULARY, 

Containing such words as most frequently occur in 
familiar conversation^ and ought therefore to be 
known by students. 



N. B. Jn nouns of the same gender and number as the preceding 
one, the space of the article to be applied is left blank. 



The parts of the human body. 


La punta de la 


tip of 


— Las partes del cuerpo 


nariz, 


the nose. 


humano. 


Las ventanas ? 
de la nariz, ^ 


nostrils. 


La cabeza, ^ * head. 


Los cafios de la nariz, gristle 


cor onilla/ crown of the 




of the nose. 


head. 


dientes, 


teeth. 


mollera, mould of the head. 


colmillos. 


eye-teeth. 


frente, forehead. 


Las muelas, 


grinders. 


Las sienes * temples. 


El nervio 


the optic 


La oreja ear. 


optico, 


nerve. 


ternilla, gristle. 


labio. 


lip. 


ceja, eye-brow. 


paladar, 


palate. 


cuenca del ojoj ) corner of 
El lagrimal, 5 the eye. 


La quijada, 


jaw. 


cerviz, hinder part of. 


bianco white of 




the neck. 


del ojo, the eye. 


nuca, nape of the neck. 


celebio, or cerebro, brain. 


garganta, 


throat. 


cogote, back of the neck. 


barriga, 


belly. 


hueco de hollow of 


mano, 


hand. 


la oreja, the tar. 


mufieca. 


wrist. 


timpano del drum of 


pal ma de 


palm of 


oido, the ear. 


la mano, 


the hand. 


Los pirpados, eye-lids. 


barba, 


chin. 


Las pestanas, eye-lashes. 


Las barbas, 


beard. 


La nifia del (jo, eye-ball. 


costillas. 


ribs. 


tela del o'pyjilm of the eye. 


ingles. 


groin. 


megilla, cheek. 


juntas de 


joints of 


boca, mouth. 


los dedos, 


fingers. 


encia, gum. 


Los dedos de los 


pieSy toes. 


lengua, tongue. 


El gaznate, 


gullet. 


nariz, nose. 


seno, 


bosom* 



VOCABULARY. 



265 



El pecho, 

estomago, 

pelo, 

vello, 

cuelloj 

brazOj 

codo, 

sobaco, 

espinazo, 

ombligo, 
La yema del dedo, 



El 



breast* 
stomach, 
hair, 
down, 
neck, 
arm, 
elbow, 
arm-pit, 
hack-bone, 
navel, 
hrawn of 
the finger, 
una, nail, 

rodilla, knee, 

pierna, leg, 

pantorrilla, ca/fq/^^e leg, 
espinillaj shin-bone, 

planta del pie^ sole of the 
foot, 
garganta del pie^ instep, 
piel, skin, 

pulgar, thumb, 

dado indice, forefinger, 
dedo del corazon middle 
finger, 
dedo aniilar, fourth 

finger, 
dedo menique, ) little 
or auricular, 3 finger. 



muslo, 
jarrete, 
tovillo, 
pie, 
talon, 
Las espaldas, 
Los horabros 
lados, 



23 



thigh, 

ham, 

ancle, 

foot. 

heel, 

hack, 

shoulder a. 



muscle. 



The interior parts of the hu- 
man body, — Partes interi- 
ores del cuerpo humano. 

El raurecillo 1 
musculo, ^ 
nervio, nerve, 

tendon, tendon^ sinew. 
La grasa, or gordura, fat. 
membrana, membrane, 
vena, vein, 

artery, 
gristle, 
bone. 



El 



aneria, 

ternilla, 

hueso, 

menllo, ^ 
La medula, > marrow. 
El tuetano, j 

casco, la calavera, skull. 
Las espinillas, shin-bones. 
La espaldilla, shoidder-bone, 

canilla del brazo, arm-bone. 
El hueso sacro, or rump 



La rabadilla, 
El esqueleto, 

corazon, 
Los bofes, 

pulmones, 

livianos. 
El higado, 

bazo, 
Los rinones, 

sesos, 
El estomago. 



hone, 
skeleton, 
heart, 

lungs. 

liver, 
spleen, 

kidneys, 
brains, 

stomach. 



La boca del estomago, pit of 
the stomach, 
Los lomos, loins. 

Las tripas, guts, 

Los intestines, intestines, 
Lamadre,lamatriz,^ u,o»j&. 
El utero, 



266 



VOCABULARY. 



La vegiga, 
sangre, 
colera^ 
fleraa^ 
El quilo, 
La leche, 
saliva^ 



bladder. 

blood, 

clioler, 

phlegm. 

chyle, 

milk. 

spittle. 



The Jive senses. — Los 
sentidos. 



cmco 



La vista, 

El oido, 

olfatOj 

gusto, 

tacto, 



sight, 
hearing. 

smell. 

taste, 
feeling. 



Ages. — Edades. 

La ninez, childhood. 

infancia, infancy. 

puericia, boyishness. 
adolescencia, adolescence. 

juventudj youth. 

virilidad, manhood. 
senectud, ^ 
vejez, S 



old age. 



Qualities of the body. — Cali- 
dades del cuerpo. 



Defects in the humanjbody. — 
Defectos del cuerpo huraano. 



La fealdad, 
Las arrugas, 

pecas, 

laganas, 
La verruga, 
El lunar, 
La nube en el ojo. 



La salud, 
fuerza, 
debilidad, 
hermosura, 
fealdad, 
garbo, 
brio, 



El 



health. 

strength. 

weakness. 

beauty. 

ugliness. 

good presence. 

sprightUness. 



deformity. 

wrinkles. 

freckles. 

blear eyes. 

wart. 

mole. 

a pearl in 

the eye. 

tickling. 

cataract. 



blindness. 



Las cosquillas. 

La catarata, 
ceguedad, or 
ceguera, 3 

magrura, leanness. 

El ciego, blind. 

tuerto, one-eyed. 

cojo, lame. 

La cojez, lameness^ 

El tartamudo, stammerer. 

La corcova, crookedness* 

El calvo, bald- 

romo, flat-nosed* 

estropeado, crippled* 

tullido, lame of the limbs* 
zurdo, left-handed* 

bizco, bisojo, squinting* 
manco, lame of one hand. 



mudo, 
sordo, 



dumb, 
deaf. 



men.-— 
vicios, buenas 



rico talle, fine stature. 



Virtues and vices, good and 
bad qualities of 
Virtu des y 

y malas calidades de los 
hombres. 

El recatado, cautious ^modest. 
diestro, dexterous. 

docil, docile. 





VOCABULARY. 


267 


El galan. 


gallant. 


El misericordioso 


, merciful. 


simple, 


harmless. 


paciente, 


patient. 


agudoj 


sharp. 


religioso, 


religious. 


vivo. 


sprightly. 


ambicioso. 


ambitious. 


SUtll, 

chocarrero. 


subtle, 
buffoon. 


avariento, } 
avaro, 5 


covetous. 


necio, 


foolish. 


soberbio, 


proud. 


astuto, 


crafty. 


bipocrita. 


hypocrite. 


loco. 


mad. 


cobarde, 


coward. 


malicioso, 


malicious. 


holgazan, 


idle. 


teraeroso. 


fearful. 


altivo. 


haughty. 


espajitadizo, 


easy to be 


chismoso. 


tale-bearer. 




frightened. 


adulador. 


flatterer. 


valiente. 


brave. 


goloso. 


glutton. 


tonto, 


stupid. 


desleal. 


treacherous. 


fantastico, 


fantastical. 


desagradecidc 


, ungrate- 


embustero, 


deceitful. 




ful. 


grosero, 


clownish. 


inhumano. 


inhumane. 


revoltoso, 


mutinous. 


insolente. 


insolent. 


bien criado, 


well-bred. 


lujurioso, 


lewd. 


cortes, 


courteous. 


porfiado, 


positive. 


grave, 


grave. 


perezoso, 


slothful. 


justo, 


just. 


prodigo. 


prodigal. 


prudente, 


discreet. 


vano. 


vain. 


desvergonzado, impudent. 


mugeriego, 


given to 


fogoso, 


jiery. 




women. 


impertinente 


^impertinent. 


atrevido, 


bold. 


importuno, 


ti oublesome. 


colerico, 


passionate. 


ligero, 


light. 


rabioso, 


outrageous. 


descuidado, 


careless. 


alegre. 


merry. 


temerario. 


rash. 


ufano. 


arrogant. 


afable, 


affable. 


indeciso. 


irresolute. 


amigable. 


friendly. 


celoso, 


jealous. 


bizarro, 


brave. 


adultero, 


adulterer. 


caritativo, 


charitable. 


rufian. 


ruffian. 


casto, 


chaste. 


matador. 


murderer. 


constante, 


constant. 


salteador, highwayman. 


devoto. 


devout. 


jurador, 


swearer. 


diligente, 


diligent. 


calumniador. 


slanderer. 


fiel, 


faithful. 


murniurador. 


censurer. 


generoso. 


generous. 


hechicero. 


sorcerer. 


humilde, 


humble. 


tramposo. 


cheat. 



:zob 


VOCABULARY. 


El incestuoso, 


incest?tous. 


El pan de cebada, barley/ 


ladron, 


thief 


bread. 


ratero; 


pickpocket. 


pan de avena, oaten bread. 


mentiroso, 


liar. 


pan de mijo, millet bread. 


perjuro, 


perjurer. 


pan de maiz, indian corn 


periido, 


perfidious. 


bread. 


profano. 


profane. 


pan de levadura, leavened 


rebelde. 


rebel. 


bread. 


sacrllego, 


sacriligeous. 


biscocho, biscuit. 


traidor, 


traitor. 


La migaja de pan, crumb of 


malvado, 


perfidious. 


^ bread, 
masa, * dough, 
torta, cake or loaf. 


Of eating and 


drinking, — 


rosea, bread made like 


Del comer 


y beber. 


a roll. 
El bunuelo, fritter. 


La comida, 


dinner. 


La empanada, tart or pye. 


cena, 


supper. 


carne, meat. 


El almuerzo. 


breakfast. 


El cocido, boiled meat. 


La merienda, 


luncheon. 


asado, roasted meat. 


colacion, 


collation. 


estofado, stewed meat. 


El banquette, entertainment. 


La carne frita, fried meat. 


convidado, 


guest. 


carbonada, broiled meat. 


Gonvite, 


feast. 


pepitoria, giblets. 


La hambre, 


hunger. 


El picadillo, hash. 


sed, 


thirst. 


La cecina, hung meat. 


El borracho, 


drunkard. 


El pernil, el jamon, ham. 


buen bebedor, hard 


carnero, mutton. 




drinker. 


La vaca, beef 


buen apetito 


1 goodap- 


El cordero, lamb. 


Las buenas ganas, ^ petite. 


La ternera, veal. 


El gloton, 


glutton. 


El |3uerco, pork. 


pan, 


bread. 


cabrito, kid. 


pan bianco, 


lohite bread. 


torhio, bacon. 


pan candial, 


the whitest 


La pierna de carnero, leg of 




bread. 


mutton. 


pan bazo, 


brown bread. 


El brazuelo de shoulder of 


mollete. 


hot loaf. 


carnero, mutton. 


pan fresco, 


new bread. 


lomo, loin. 


pan de todo trigo, wheaten 


pecho, breast. 




bread. 


Las manos de carnero, sheep^s 


pan decenteno, rr/ehread. 


trotters^ 



VOCABULARY. 



269 



La rueda de ternera, filht 


asadura, 


of veal, 
the pluck. 


salchicha, 


sausage. 


El salchichon 


big sausage. 


La raorcilla, 


blood pudding. 


longanizaj 
El pastel, 
caldo, 


long sausage, 
pasty, 
broth. 


La sopa, 
El potage, 
Las papas, 

piiches, 
El pisto, 


soup. 

pottage. 

^ any sort 

\ 0/ pap, 

jelly-broths. 



La carne fiambre, cold meat, 

leche, rnilk, 

nata, cream. 

El suero, ichey. 

La raanteca, butter. 

El queso, cheese, 

queso fresco, new cheese. 

curds, 

rennet. 



El huevo empollado, egg 
with a chicken in it, 
Los huevos de pescado,^ the 
spawn of fsh. 
huevos megidos, yoiks oj 
eggs stewed with 
wine and sugar. 
huevos y torreznos, col- 
lops and eggs. 
huevos revueltos, butter- 
ed eggs. 
La tortilla de huevos. omelet. 
Los huevos de yolks of eggs^ 
fahriquera, in shells of 

sugar. 
huevos hilados, siceet 
e^gs spun out. 
El sazonamiento, seasoning. 
La salmuera, 
Las especias. 



requesoD, 
cuajo, 
La cuajada, 



El huevo. 

La yema de 
huevo, 



milk hardened 
with rennet, 
the egg. 
the yolk of 
an egg. 
clara de huevo, the white 
of an egg. 
El huevo blando, soft egg. 
huevo duro, hard egg. 
huevo fresco. new egg, 
huevo en cascara, egg in 
the shell. 
huevo cocido, boiled egg. 
huevo asado, roasted egg. 
huevo estrellado, fried 
eorg. 
huevo huero, addle egg. 
23* 



La piniienta, 
El gengibre, 
Los clavillos, 
La canela, 

Duez moscada, 

flor de especia, 

mostaza, 
El agraz, 

vinagre, 

aceite. 
La sal. 
El azucar. 
Los escabeches. 

dulces, 

almibares, 

alraibar, 

contites, 
Las conservas, 

mermelada. 



bridle, 
spices, 
pepper, 
ginarer. 
cloves, 
cinnamon, 
nutmeg, 
mace, 
mustard, 
verjuice, 
vinegar, 
oil. 
salt, 
sugar, 
pickles, 
sweetmeats, 
conserves, 
sugar boiled, 
comfits, 
conserves, 
marmalade. 



perada, pears preserved. 



270 



VOCABULARY. 



Las alcorcillaSj ^ aniseed 

pastillas, ^ sugar. 

La naranjadaj candied 

oranges. 
El turron, sweetmeat, 

Los barquillos 6 las suplica- 
ciones, sweet wafers, 

bunuelos, PHffs. 

La bebida, drink. 

El vinoj wine, 

vino puro, |??/re wine, 
vino vueltOj pricked wine, 
vino moscatelj muscatel! 
ivine, 
vino tinto, re^ z^^me. 

vino bianco, 2^?/iz*ife wine, 
vino aloque, pale wine, 
vino clarete, claret loine, 
vino dulce y 5?^ee^ aw^/ 
picante, s7iar/9 wine, 
vino anejo, oW z^^me. 

vino ligero, light wine, 
vinazo, strong loine, 

malvasia, malmsey, 

agua pioj mixture of must 
and water. 
La hez del vino, wine lees. 
El aguardiente, hrandy. 

La cerveza, beer, 

sidra, cidrr, 

aloja, mead^ methegUn, 
El chocolate, chocolate. 

te, J^ecz. 

La limonada, lemonade. 

mistela, anise brandy. 



scarlet. 



El pafio tinidido, shorn cloth 
La grana 

escarlata, 

raja, 
El sayal, 
La frisa, 

estamefia, 

estofa, 

tafetan. 



El cafe, 



coffee. 



Of Clothes, — De los vestidos. 



rash clothe 

sackcloth. 

frieze, 

serge, 

stiff: 

taffety. 

satin, 

velvet, 

damask, 

brocade. 

grogram, 

gauze, 

drugget, 

crape, 

camblet. 



El pano, 
pano fino 



cloth. 
, fne cloth. 



El 

raso, raso liso, 
tercio pelo, 
damasco, 
brocado, 
gorgoran. 
La gasa, 
Las lanillas, 
El cendal, 

camelote, 
La tela de oro, cloth of gold, 
shag, 
cotton, 
fustian, 
muslin, 
flax, 
linen, 
cambrick. 
holland. 
French linen, 
hemp, 
ticken, 
calico, 
felt, 
canvass, 
sailcloth, 
baize, 
wool, 
worsted, 
silk, 
buckram, 
ajeivel, 
a buckle, 
loops on coats. 



El tripe, 

algodon, 

fustan. 
La muselina, 
El lino, 

lienzo, 

cambray. 
La holanda, 
El ruan, 

canamo, 

terliz, 

calicut, 

fieltro, 

angeo, 
La lona, 

bay eta, 

lana. 
El estambre, 
La seda. 
El bocaci, 
Una joya. 

hebilla, 
Los alamares, 



VOCABULARY. 



271 



Un ojal, a biiiton-kole. 

I^a bordadura, embroidery 
Un botoD, 
Una franja, 
Un flueque. 



a button, 
a fringe, 

lace. 



Las puutasj > 
Los encageS; ^ 
Una cinta, a ribbon, 

Un listottj a broad ribbon, 
pasamano, gold or sil- 
ver lace, 
ribete, an edging, 

sombrero, a hat. 

La copa del sombrero, the 
crown of the hat, 
ala 6 falda del sombrero, 
the brim of the hat. 
El torzal 6 la trencilla, the 
hat'band. 
£1 plumage, feathers, 

Un bonete, a cap, 

gorro de noche, a night- 
cap, 
Una gorra, an old fash- 

ioned cap, 
caperuza, a sot^t of cap, 
montera, a hunting cap, 
camisa, a shirt, 

almilla, chupa, a waist- 
coat, 
Los calzoncillos, drawers, 
Un jubon, a doublet, 

Una manga, a sleeve, 

manga perdida, a hang- 
ing sleeve. 
Las faldillas de jubon, the 
skirts of a waistcoat, 
Los calzones, breeches, 

Una balona, a band, 

a neckcloth. 



Una agujeta, 

faltriquera, 
Un bolsillo, 
Las medias, 

ligas, 
Los zapatos, 

escarpines. 
Las chinelas, 
Un borcegui, 
Las botas, 

polainas, 

espuelas, 
Los punos. 
Las vueltas, 
Los vueltos, 
Un tahali, 
Unos tiros, 
Una espada, 
daga, 
capa, 
casaca, 
Un guante, 

cenidor, 
L^na peluca, 
Un peluquin, 

panuelo, 



a point, 

a pocket, 

a purse, 

stockings, 

garters^ 

shoes, 

socks, 

slippers, 

a buskin. 

boots, 

spatterdashes, 

sjna^s, 

' cuffs or ruffles, 

a shoulder-belt, 
a icaist-belt, 
a siDord, 
a dagger, 
a cloak. 
a coat. 
a glove. 
a girdle, 
a round icig, 
a bag icig. 
a pocket hand- 
kerchief, 
Una ropa, 1 

Un ropon, > a gown, 

Una bRta, j 

ropa de levantar, ct 

morning gown. 

Un pellico, ^ a shepherd^s 

Una zamarra, \ jerkin. 



For women, — Para mugeres. 



Un corbatin, 
cuello, 
coleto. 



a collar, 
a buff coat. 



Vn tocado, 
Una cofia, 

escofia, 
Un manto, 



a head dress, 
a cap, 

a veil 



272 



VOCABULARY. 



Una saya, ^ 
basquina, ^ 
Un guardapiesj 
Unas enaguaSj 
Un avantal, } 
devantalj ^ 
guardasolj 
quita sol, 
reloj, 
Unas tablillas, 
Un espejo, a 
Uiia bugeta, 
Un manguito, 
Una cotilla, 
camisa, 
mantilla^ 
bata, 
Un chapin, 
Unos zarcillosj 



a hIacJc goivn 
or petticoat, 
') an upper 
5 petticoat, 

an apron, 

a parasol, 

an umbrella, 

a watch, 

tables, 

looking-glass, 

a little box, 

a muff, 

stays, 

a shift, 

a mantle, 

a gown, 

a clog. 



Unos pendientes, 
La gargantilla, 
Unas manillas, \ 
Unos braceleteSj [ 
Unas sortijas, ^ 
Unos anillos, ^ 
Las pedrerias, 

Un abanico, 



pendants, 
necMace. 

bracelets. 



rings, 

'precious 
stones. 
a fan. 



Las calcetas, thread stockings. 
El peinador, coi/ibing cloth. 



Los pafiales, 

Una faja, 
Los juguetesj 
Una cuna, 



swaddling 

clouts, 

a roller, 

play-things, 

a cradle. 



ama de leche. 



I^os diges, 



a wet 

nurse, 

toys. 



[The beasts, fowls, fishes, fruits, herbs, roots, Sfc, that are 
eatable, will be found under their respective names. — 
Los animales, aves, peces, frutas, yerbas, raices.&c. comes- 
tibles, se hallaran debajo de sas nombres respectivos.] 



Beasts, — Bestias. 


Un corderico, 


a lambkin. 






burro, 1 




Una bestia mansa, 


a tame 


borrico, > 


an ass. 




beast. 


asno, } 




bestia feroz, 


a wild 


Una burra,borrica, a she ass. 




beast. 


Un puerco, > 


a hog. 


El ganado, 


cattle. 


marrano, ^ 


ganado mayor, 


large 


lecbon, 


a pig. 




cattle. 


javali, 


a wild boar. 


Un toro, 


a bull. 


Una haca, 1 
haquilla, \ 


a pony^ a 


ternero 6 becerro, a calf. 


colt. 


Una ternera, 


a heifer. 


Un b'-falo, 


a buffalo. 


Un buey, 


an ox. 


Una yegua. 


a mare. 


carnero, 


a sheep. 


yegiiecilla, a young mare. 


Una oveja, 


a ewe. 


Un caballo. 


a horse. 


Un cordero, 


a lamb. 


camello, 


a camet 



VOCABULARY. 



273 



Un gato, a cat. 

garanon^ a stallion, 

caballo castrado, a geld- 
ing. 
caballo entero, a stone- 
horse > 
caballo corredoFj a race- 
horse. 
caballo de mano, a led 
horse. 
caballo de posta^ a post 
horse. 
. caballo de alquiler, a hack- 
ney horse. 
caballo rebelde, a restive 
horse. 
caballo desbocado, a hard- 
mouthed horse. 
caballo medroso, a start- 
ing horse. 
caballo tropezador, a stum- 
bling horse. 
caballo que sacude, a jolt- 
ing horse. 
caballo asmatico, a bro- 
ken winded horse. 
caballo indomito, a horse 
that cannot be tamed. 
caballo saltador, a leaping 
horse. 
caballo bayo, a bay horse. 
baj o castano, a chesnut 
bay. 
bayooscuro, abrownbay. 
bayo dorado, a bright bay. 
picazo, a pyed horse. 
rucio rodadoj a dapple 
grey. 
de color de ga- cream- 
muza, colour. 

alazan. a sorrel. 



Un alazan tostado, a dark 
sorrel. 
overOj a white and red 
spotted horse. 
rubican, a grey horse. 
Una cabra, a she goat. 

Un cabrito, a kid. 

cabron, a he goat. 

perro, a dog. 

perro de caza, a hound. 
perro de muestra, a set- 
ting dog, 
sabueso, a blood hound. 
podenco, ^ a setting 
perdiguero, ^ ^^^* 

perro callado, a hound 
that does not open well. 
perro bajo, a terrier. 

galgo, a greyhound. 

lebrel, a sort of fierce dogs^ 
resembling grey hounds y 
common in Ireland. 
perro ventor, a finder. 
perro de agua, a water- 
or lamedillo, dog. 

mastin, a mastij^, 

perro de a shepherd^ s 
pastor, dog. 

perro velador, a house dog. 
perrillo de falda, a lap- 
dog. 
alano 6 dogo, a bull-dog. 
barbudillo, a spaniel. 

perro raposero, or jateo, 
small setting dog 
for fox hunting. 
gozque, 1 little dog kept 
gosqiiejo, ^ in a house. 
conejo, a rahbit. 

Una hacanea, a pad. 

Un muleto, a young mule. 



274 



VOCABULARY. 



Uii mulo, a he-mule. 

Una mula, a she-mule, 

Un potrOj a colt. 

pollino, an ass^s colt. 

ciervo, a stag. 

venado, a deer. 

gamo, a fallow deer. 

cachorro de ciervo, a 

fawn. 

Las astas de ciervo, the horns 

of a deer. 

El rastro 6 las pisadas de ci- 

ervo, the track of a stag. 

Una comadreja, a weasel. 

Un tejon, a badger. 

Unagamuza, a wild goat. 

cabra montes, a roebuck. 

Un gato de algalia, a civet-cat. 

Una dama, a doe. 

ardilla, a squirrel. 

Un elefante, an elephant. 

Una fuina 6 gardona, a martin. 

Un mono, a monkey. 

glrnio, an ape. 

arminio 6 armino, an er 
mine. 

erizo, a hedge-hog. 

Una liebre, a hare. 

liebrecilla, a leveret. 
Un liron, a dormouse. 

Una rata, a rat. 

zorra 6 raposa, a fox. 
Un raton, a mouse. 

topo, a mole. 

Una hiena, a hyena. 

Un leopardoj a leopard. 

leon, a lion. 

Una leona, a lioness. 

Un leoncillo, a lion's whelp. 

lobo, a wolf. 

lobo cervalj a lynx. 

©so, a bear. 



Un osillo, a bear's cub. 

Una pantera, a panther. 

Un rinoceronte, a rhinoceros. 

tigre, a tiger. 

j avail, puerco a wild 

montes, boar. 

Las navajas 6 los colmillosde 

j avail, the tusks of a wild 

boar. 

El navajal de j avail, the soil 

of a/wild boar. 

La jabalina, a wild sow. 



Creatures that creep on the 
earth. — Animales que se 
arrastran. 

Una serpiente, a serpent. 

serpiente alada, a flying 

serpent. 

Un dragon, a dragon. 

4spid, an asp. 

Una CLilebra, a snake. 

Un cocodrillo, a crocodile. 

caiman, an alligator. 
Una largartija, ^ 

salamanquesa, > a lizard. 
Un lagarto, j 

Una vibora, a viper. 

Un viborezno, a young viper. 



Amphibious creatures. — Ani- 
males anfibios. 

Un bivaro or castor, a bea- 
ver or castor. 
Una nutria, or nutra, an otter. 
Un hipopotamo, a river- 
horse. 
Uj;ja tortuga, a tortoise. 



VOCABULARY. 



275 



Un galapagOj a land tortoise, 
Una foca, sea calf. 



Insects, — Sabandijas. 

Una arafia, a spider, 

arafiuela, a little spider, 
carcoma, a wood worm, 
a caterpillar, 
a handivorm, 
a toad, 
a beetle, 
a snail, 
an anty a pis- 
mire, 
a frog, 
a cricket, 
an insect that 
spoils vines. 
a louse, 
a nit. 
aflea, 
a bug, 
a locust. 



Una mariposa, a butterfly, 
vaquilla de dios, a lady- 
bird, 
Un zancudoj a gnat, 

enjambre, a swarm. 



oruga, 

Un arador, 
sapo, 

escarabajo, 
caracol, 

Una hormigaj 

rana, 
Un grilloj 
revoltonj 

piojo, 
Una liendre, 
pulga, 
chinche, 
langosta, 
Un escorpion, 

alacran, 
Una tarantula, 
polilla, 
mosca, 
abispa, 1 
Un abispon, \ 
Una abeja, 
Un moscon, 
Una moscada, 
Un z^nganOj 



a scorpion, 

a tarantula, 

a moth, 

afly, 

a wasp, 

a bee, 

a great fly, 

a drone, 
Una mosca de berro, gadfly, 
cigarra, a grasshopper. 
tabano, a hornet, 

lucerna or luciernaga, a 
fire-fly. 



Birds, — Aves. 



an eagle. 



an eaglet. 



Una aguilaj 

Un aguilucho, 

buitre, a vulture. 

esmerejon, a merlin, 
gavilan, a sparroic-hawk. 

mochueloj a horn-owl, 

halcon, a falcon, 

torzueloj a male falcon. 



girifalte, 

alcotan, 

sacre, 

Una garza, 
garzota, 

Un milano, 



a gerfalcon, 

a tanner, 

a sacre, 

a lpero7i. 

a small heron, 

a kite. 



Cuervo, a crow or raven, 

Una corneja, a rook, 

calandria, a lark. 

Un aguzanieve, a wagtail. 



canario, 
gilguero, 
Un mirlo ^ 
Una merla, > 
mirla, j 
Un pinzon, 
ruisenor, 
verderon, 
papagayo, 
lore, 
Una cotorra, 
urraca, 
Un grajo, 
Una lechuza, 



a canary bird, 
a linnet. 



a blackbird. 

a chaffinch, 

a nightingale, 

a green-bird, 

> a parrot, 

a magpie, 
a daw, 
an owl. 



276 



VOCABULARY. 



Un murcielago^ a hat. 

Uii mochuelo, liorn-owl. 

Una comaya, a night-raven, 
Un grajo, a chough, 

Una ohoXdiC^ihxdiS^a goat Slicker, 
Un 4nade, a wild duck, 

Una cerceta, 
Un chorllto, 



Cuervo marino, 



a teal, 
a curlieu, 
a cormo- 
rant, 
a duck, 

a goose. 



patOj 

ganso, ^ 

dnsar J > 

^nsaro, ) 

cernicaloj a kestril, 

Una fulga, a moor-hen, 

Un avion, a martin, 

Una ^fabiota, a gvll, 

Un somorgujon, a diver. 

Una chocha, ') a loood- 

gallinaciegaj ^ cock, 

Un tordo, a thrush. 

estornino, a starling, 

Una codorniz, a quail. 

Un capon, a capon. 

gallo, a cock. 

Una gallina, a hen. 

Un polio, a chicken. 

Una polla, a pullet. 

uL^pTva, \ ^ ^"^^'^y- 

Un francolin, a godicit. 

faisan, a pheasant. 

zorzal, a thrush. 

hortolano, an ortolan. 

gorrion, a sparrow. 
Una perdiz, a partridge. 

Una paloma, a dove. 

Un pichon, a pigeon. 

palomino, a young pigeon. 
Una tortola, a turtle dove. 



Un alcion, a king-Jisher. 
Una golondrina, a swallow. 

Un avestruz, an ostrich. 

Una cigiiena, a stork. 

Un cuclillo, a cuckoo. 

cisne, a swan. 

petirojo, a red-robin, 

Una grulla, a crane, 

pezpita, a wagtail, 

Un abuillo, ^a lapwing, 
Una oropendola, a witwall, 

Un vencejo, a martlett, 

abejaruco, a titmouse. 

Una abutarda, a bustard. 

Un tor do loco, an owsel. 

pelicano, a pelican. 

fenix, a phenix. 

chirlo, a woodpecker, 

pico verde, a green beak, 

frailillo, a plover, 

reyezuelo, a wren. 

mergo, a puffin. 



Parts of a Bird. — Partes de 
una Ave. 



El pico, 
Una pluma. 
La pkimaza, 

ala. 
Las penolas, ^ 



the beak. 

a feather, 

the doivn. 

wing. 

. ^ quills. 

plumas, ^ ^ 

El pie, the foot. 

La cola, the tail. 

El buche, the craw. 

Las gar r as, ') claws ^ or tal- 

unas, ^ ons. 

La rabadilla, the rump. 

pecb^iga. the breast, 
entrepechuga, the brawn. 



VOCABULARY. 



277 



Fishes. — Feces. 



Un alburnoj 

sabaloj 
Una anchova, 
angiiila, 
ballena, 
Un barbo, 

mero, 

luso, 
Una carpa, 
Un calamarejo, 



a bleak, 

a shad. 

an anchovy* 

an eel, 

a whale, 

a barbel 

a halibut. 

a pike, 

a carp, 

a calamary. 



talpaire^ a miller^s thumb, 
caballo marinoj a sea' 
horse. 



congno, 

delfin, 

dorado, 
El doradillo, 
Un lenguado, 
Una langosta, 
Un esturion, 

gobio, 

harenque, 
Una ostra, ? 
Un ostion, ^ 
Una lamprea, 

langostilla, 
Un lobo, 
Una sard a, 

marsopa, 
Elabadejo, 
La merluza, 
El bacallao, 
Una almeja, 

ortiga pez, 

perca, 
Un pulpo, 
Una raya, 

liza, 
Una sardina, 
Un salmon, 
24 



a conger, 

a dolphin. 

a gilt-back, 

the gold-Jish. 

a sole. 

a lobster, 

a sturgeon. 

a gudgeon, 

a lierring, 

an oyster, 

a lamprey, 

a prawn, 

a bass, 

a maokarel. 

a porpoise. 

poor jack, 

fresh cod. 

dried cod, 

a muscle. 

a stinging 

fish. 

a perch. 

a polypus. 

n thornback. 

a skate. 

a vilchard. 



Una trucba, trout, 

gibia, cuttle-fish. 

tenca, a tench, 

Un atun, a tunny fish, 

L^na tremielga, a cramp fish, 

Un rodaballo, a turbot. 



Parts of a fi.sh,-- 


-Partes de 


un 


pez. 




El hocico, 




the snout. 


Las agallas, 
alas, 
escamas, 




the gills, 

the fins, 

the scales. 


espinas, 
La concha. 




the bones, 
the shell. 


Los huevos de 


pez 


, the hard 
row. 


La leche, 


the soft row. 



Trees. — Airholes. 
Un albaricoque, an apricot- 
tree, 

almendro, an almond-tree. 

durazno, a nectarine-tree. 

guindo, a cherry-tree. 

cerezo, a heart cherry- 
tree. 

castano, a chesnut-tree. 

cidro, a citron-tree. 



membrillero. 



serval, 
Una palma, 

higuera, 
Un azufeifo, 

gran ado, 

limon. 
moral, 
nispero, 



a quince- 
tree, 
a service-tree. 
a palm-tree, 
a fig-tree, 
ajujub'tree, 
a pomegranate- 
tree, 
a lemon-tree, 
a mulbei^ry-tree. 
a medlar-tree. 



salmon. avellano. a hazeJ-nut4ree. 



278 



VOCABULARY. 



> a peach-tree. 



Un nogal, a walnut-tree. 

.J > an olive-tree. 
aceituno, 3 

acebuche, a loild olive- 
tree. 
naranjo, an orange-tree. 
alberchigOj 
persigOj 
cirueloj a plum-tree. 

peral, a pear-tree. 

manzano, an apple-tree. 
41amo negro, hlack pop- 
lar-tree. 
dlamo bianco, white pop- 
lar-tree. 
a cedar-tree, 
an alder-tree. 



cedro, 
sabucQ, 
Una encina, 
Un roble, 
El cornizo, 
cipres, 
ebano, 
arce, 
La haya, 
El fresno, 
acebo, 
tejo, 
laurel, 



an oak-tree. 

the cornil-tree. 

the cypress-tree. 

the ebony-tree. 

the maple-tree. 

the btech-tree. 

the ash'tree. 

the holm-tree. 

the yew-tree. 

the laurel-tree. 

alcornoque, the cork-tree. 

olmo, the elm-tree. 

pi no, the pine or fir-tree. 

Un plantano, a plane-tree. 

sauce, a iclllow-tree. 

Una teja, a linden-tree. 



Shrubs. — Matas, 

El agno casto, agnus castus. 

aliso, the lote tree. 

bilsanio, the balsam. 

boj, the box-tree. 

La madre selva, the honey- 
stickle. 



La zarzamora, the black' 
berry bush. 

hiniesta, broom. 

uva espina, gooseberry- 
bush. 

adelfa. yedra, ii^y. 

El brusco, butcher^s broom. 
La regaliz, liquorice. 

El alhocigo, the pistachio- 
tree. 

romero, ^ rosemary. 

rosal, rose-tree. 

La sabina, savin. 

El tamariz, tamarisk-tree. 
La alheiia, privet. 

vifia, vine. 

labrusca, wild vine. 



Una 



parr? 



a wall vine. 



El mirto, arrayan, myrtle. 
Una pan a de corinto, currant- 
tree. 

Fruits. — Frutas. 
Un albericoque, an apricot. 
Una almendra, an almond. 
Un madrono, a wild straw- 
berry. 
a nectarine. 
a cherry. 
a heart-cherry. 
a chesnut. 
a citron. 
Un niembrillo, a quince. 

Una serba, service-apple. 
Un datil, date. 

higo, a fig. 

Una breva, early fig. 

azufaifa, ajujub. 

granada, apomegranate. 
Un limon, a lemon. 

Una mora, a mulberry. 

niezpola, a medlar. 

avellana. a hazel-nut. 



durazno, 
Una guinda, 
cereza, 
castaiia, 
cidra, 



VOCABULARV. 



279 



Vns. nuez, a walnut, 

aceituna, an olive, 

naranja, • an orange, 
ciniela, a plum, 

cirnela pasa. a prune, 
^ pera, a pear, 

bergaiuota, ahergamot. 
manzana, an apple, 

camuesa. a pippin. 

maiizana de San Juan. Sf, 
John^s apple. 
Un melon, a melon. 

Una bellota, an acorn. 

algarroba, a carob, 

alcaparra, a caper, 

zarzamora. a hlackherrij, 
Un tamarindo, a tardarind, 
pinonj a kernel of pine- 
trees, 
Una uva, a grape. 

cascara de nuez, &:c, a 
shell of a nut, ^'c. 
tela de granada. film of 
a pomegranate. 
Un pimpollo, a sucker^ or 
sprout of a vine. 
sarmiento, a twig of a 
vine. 
La yema de vina, the hud of 
a vine. 
Los zarcillos de la vid, the 
tendrils of a vine. 
L'n pampano, a vine branch. 
renuevo, a young shoot 
of a vine. 
racimo de uvas, a bunch 
of grapes, 
Una pepita de la uva, a grape- 
stone, 
Podar, to prune a vine. 

Cavar, to lay open the roots, 
Rodrigar, to prop a vine. 

L! rodrigon, the prop. 



Terciar la viaa, to dig a 

third time about a vine. 
Rozar, to weed. 

Vna raiz, a root. 

Las bebras de raiz, the fibres 
of a root. 
arraigar. to take root. 
El tronco. the trunk of a tree. 
L n renuevo. a spi'ig. 

La corteza del arbol, the bark. 
El zumo. the sap. 

moho, the moss. 

ramo, the branch. 

Una hoja, a leaf 

El hueso de fruta. the stone 
of fruit. 
Las moiidaduras de fi'uta, the 
parings of fruit. 
El pezon, tJie stalk. 

ingerir, to ingraft. 

ingerir de canuto, to inoc- 
ulate, 
Vn ingerto, a ^raft. 

La pepita, the seed of fruit. 



Corn and its parts, — Trigos 
y sus partes. 

El trigo, reheat. 

El candial. the best wheat. 

trigo rubion, red wheat. 
La escandia, bearded wheat. 
El lierren, 2nesim. 

La espelta, spelt. 

El centeno, rye. 

La cebada, barley, 

a vena, oats. 

El arroz, rice. 

mijo, millet. 

maiz, Indian corn. 

Las legumbres, puke. 

Un alverjon, a great vetch. 
Los garbanzos, Spanish peas» 



280 



VOCABULARY. 



Las judias 
Los guisantes, 
Una haba^ 

leiiteja, 
Un altramuz, 
Un frijol^ 
Las cicerchaSj 
La c^scara. 
El hollejo. 



kidnei/'beans. 

peas, 

a horse bean, 

a lentiL 

a lujpine. 

French bean, 

loild tares, 

the shell, 

the husk. 



RootSy plants, and herbs, — 
Raices, plantas; e yerbas. 



El agenjo, 
apio, 

eneldoj 
anls, 
La alegria, 



ivonmvood, 

celery, 

garlic k, 

dill. 

aniseed, 

sesame. 



Los armuelles, orach or gold- 
en flowers, 
L^na alcachofa, an artichoke, 
Un esp^rrago, asparagus. 
El abrotano, southernwood. 
La acelga, white beet, 

Un bledo, a blite. 

La borraja, borage. 

Las zanahorias, carrots. 

La voleza^ ') 
El periRjjio, ^ 
Un bongo, ? 
Una seta, ^ 

chirivia, 

chicoria, ^ 

endivia, > 

escarola, j 

col, berza, 
Un repollo, round head cab- 
bage. 
Una berza crespa, a savoy. 
Un broton, a sprout, 

Una coliflor, a cauliflower. 

calabaza, a pumpkin. 
Un pepino, a cucumber. 



chervil. 

a mushroo7n. 

a parsnip, 

succory, 
endive. 

a cabbage. 



Un culantro, coriander. 

culantrillo, capillaire. 

peregil marino, samphire. 

mQ.sinerzo, garden cresses. 

Una escalona, a scallion. 

espinaca, spindle. 

Un hinojo, fennel. 

hoblon, hops, 

Una lechuga murciana 6 cer- 

raja, a cabbage-lettuce, 

lechuga cresj^a, a curled 

lettuce. 



a turnip. 

a turnip field. 

an onion, 

sorrel. 

long sorrel. 

parsley. 

a leek. 

pwslain. 

rampions. 

rocket. 

rue. 

sage. 



Un nabo, 
nabal, 
Una cebolla, 
acetosa, ^ 
acedera, ^ 
romaza, 
El peregil, 
Un puerro, 
Una verdolaga, 
Unos ruiponces, 
Una roqueta, 
ruda, 
salvia, 

criadilla de tierra, a 
truflle. 
mejorana, siceet marjo- 
ram. 
Un agarico, agarick. 

Una agrimonia, agrimony. 
El acihar, juice from the aloes. 
La angelica, angelica. 

celidonia, celandine. 

betonica, betony. 

bistorta, snakewort. 

manzanilla, camomile. 
El culantrillo de pozo, 7naid- 
en hair. 



La centinodia, 

verbasca, ^ 

El gordolobo, 5 



centinody. 

wolf blade, or 

great lung 

wort. 



VOCABULARY. 



281 



La amapola, poppi/. 

El dictarao, dittany. 

La coniza pulguera, fleabane. 
El eleboro, hellebore, 

tartago, spurge. 

La geociana, gentian. 

El camedrio de agua, ger- 
mander. 
La grama, dog's grass, 

yer ba puntera, house-leek. 
El belenoj hen bane, 

marubio, horehound. 

La matricariaj feverfew. 

Las malvas, mallows. 

La corona de rey, melilot. 
El torongil, 

mercurial. 
Las milhojasj 
Un ciento en rama, 
El corazoncillo. 



balm, 
mercury, 

> milfoil, 

St, John^s 



nardo, 
tabaco, 
o re Of an o, 



La hio 



worty or grass, 

spikenard, 

tobacco, 

zmld marjoram, 

fig-tree. 



parietaria, y 77., 

^. 1 . , ' >. 'Delator 11, 
viariola, S 

cepa caballo, 1 ground 

una de asno^, ^ thistle, 

dormidera, P^PPV' 

rosa montesj peony. 

El platano, plantain, 

polipodioj polypody, 

T ^ ""n' r- bishopswort. 
La neguilla, ^ ^ 

verba cidrera, briony. 



El poleo, 



pennyroyal. 



La sanguinariaj bloodwort, 

sanicula, sanicle. 

El satirion, ragwort. 

La saxifraga, saxifrage. 



La escabiosa, scabivorf, 

escamonea, scammony, 
cebolla albarrana, ir?7d' 

sena, senna. 

yerba cana, groundseL 
Valeriana^ valerian, 

verbena, vervain. 

El lianten, grass plantain. 
anco, 6 siete en rama. sept- 

' foil 

acanto, ^ 

La blanca urcina, > bearsfoot. 

yerba giganta, j 

El aconito, wolfsbane. 

Las ovas del mar, sea-weed. 

La cola de caballo, horse-tail. 

El espliesfo, } , , 

r 11 r- lavender. 

La alhucema, ^ 

El amor del bortelano, ? bur- 



Los lampazos; 



dock. 



Las rabacas, water-parsley. 

El tamarizsilvestre, tamarisk 

shrub. 

asarabacara, 

calaminto, 



La caiia, 

doiiadilla, 
El canamo, 

lino, 
La cicuta. 
El comino, 



asarabacca. 

cat-mint. 

a reed. 

muWsfern, 

hemp. 

fax, 

hemlock. 

cummin. 



La yerba de ciervo, 

fodder. 
El helecho, fern. 

La palomilla, fumitory 



Los amores secos, 
El trebol, ^ 

El yesgo, danewort, 

junco^ 



clover 

grass, 

dwarf 

elder. 

rush. 



24# 



282 



VOCABULARY. 



La cerraja, 
mandragora, 
yerba moraj 
correhoelaj 
ortiga. 

El ruibarboj 

La velesa. 

El alazor, ~) 



soW'thistle, 

mandrake, 

nightshade. 

knot-grass, 

nettle, 

rhubarb, 

peppenvort, dit- 

tander. 



Colours, — Colores. 

Adjectives agree with Substantives, 

Morado, purple. 

Un color de aurora, aurora-- 

colour. 



saffron, 
azatrarij J^ -^ 

La jabonera, soap-wort, 

alfalfa, darnel^ or cockle. 

La albahaca, siveet basil, 
yerba buena, mint. 

El serpol, wild thyme, 

tomilloj thyme. 



Blanco, 



La rosa, 



white. 



Color de ladrillo, brick-colour. 



Azul, 

Azul cefeste, 

Azul turqui, 

Columbino, 

CetirOj 



Flowers, — Flores. 

El amaranto, velvet-flower. 
La anemone, anemone. 

El Jacinto, hyacinth. 

jazmin, jessamine. 

La jonquillaj jonquil, 

azucena, the lily, 

maya, the daisy. 

El narciso, daffodil, 

clavel, la clavellina, the 
pink, 

aleli, gilliflower. 

La espadafia, flag-flower, 

campanula, blue-bottle. 

Vellorita, the cowslip. 

El ranunculo, ranunculus. 



blue. 

light blue, 

dark blue, 

dove colour, 

lemon colour. 



Color gamuza, light yellow. 
Color de cereza, jilemot. 
Color encendido,^a/?jecoZo?^r 
Color de fuego, fire colour. 



Carmesi, 


crimson. 


Pardo, 
Ceniciento, 


grey, 
ash colour. 


Amarillo, 
Encarnado, ^ 


yellow. 


Colorado, > 


red. 


Rojo, ) 

Escarlata, Grana, scarlet. 


Leonado, 
Negro, 
Anaranjado, 
Aceitunado, 


tawny. 

black, 

orange colour. 

olive colour. 


Color de rosa, 


rose colour. 


Bermejon, reddish. 
Verde, green. 
El matiz de colores, the shade 
of colours. 



Color de mar, 



the rose. 



sea green. 



cien hojas, the hundred 
leaf rose, 

taravilla, marigold. 

El girasol, sun-flower, 

tulipan, the tulip. 

La violeta, the violet. 



Farts of a kingdom. — Partes 
de un reyno. 

Una provincia, a province. 
ciudad, a city, 

villa, a town, 

aldea, a village. 



Un capullo, a rose-bud, Un lugar, a small place, 



•VOCABULARY. 



283 



Parts of a city. — Partes de 
una ciudad. 



Una casa, 

tienda, 

iglesia, 

capilla, 

Un altar 

palacio, 

hospital, 



a house. 
a shop, 
a church 
a chapel, 
an altar, 
a palace, 
an hospital. 



La casa de la villa, or del a- 
yuntamientOj the town house. 
Un tribunal, a court of justice 
arsenal, an arsenal. 

Una academia, an academy. 
Un colegio, a college. 

Una calle, a street. 

Un callejon, an alley. 

Una calleja, callejuela, a lane. 
Un mercado, a market. 

Una carniceria, a slaughter- 
house. 
encrucijada, a cross way. 
lonja,bolsa, an exchange 
carcel, a prison. 

Los muros, las murallas, walls 
puertas, gates. 

fortificaciones, fortifica- 
tions. 
Una plaza, a square. 

ptazuela, a little square. 

Of the inhabitants of cities. 
De los moradores de una 
ciudad. 
Un nino, 

muchacho, 
Una muchacha, 
Un mozo, mocito, 
hombre. 



Un manco, lame of one hand. 

ciego, blind. 

sordo, deaf. 

zurdo, left-handed. 

magistrado, a magistrate. 

noble, ) J J 

, . . T > a nobleman. 

hidalgo, S 

cabaliero, knight^ or gen- 
tleman. 
tendero. a shopkeeper. 
mercader, a trader. 

comerciante, } a mer- 
negociante, ^ chant. 
El poblacho. 



vulgacho, 
La plebe, 

canalla, 
Un artesano, 

mecanico. 



Una muger, 
Un viejo, 
Una vieja, 
Un cojo, 



the populace, 
the mob. 



the rabble. 

a tradesman. 

a mechanic. 

jornalero, a journeyman. 

labrador, a farmer. 

Una labradora, a farmer^ s 

wife J or daughter. 

Un aldeano, a countryman. 

Una aldeana, a countrywoman 

Un picaro, 

esclavo, 

platero, 

librero, 

impresor, 

barbero. 



a league. 

a slave. 

a goldsmith. 

a bookseller. 

a printer. 

a barber. 



a child. 

a boy. 

a girl. 

a youth. 

a tnan. 

a woman. 

an old man. 

an old woman. 

lame of one leg. 



mercader de seda, a mer- 
cer. 
mercader de lienzo, a lin- 
en-draper. 
mercader de pano, a wool- 
len draper. 
sastre, a tailor. 

Una costurera, a seamstress, 
a mantua-maker. 
Un sombrerero, a hatter. 
calcetero, a hosier. 

zapatero, a shoemaker. 



284 



VOCABULARY. 



a midwife. 



Un remendon^ a cohler. 

herrero, a blacksmith, 
albeitar, a farrier. • 

cerrajero, a smith. 

Una lavandera, a laundress, 
comadre, 
partera, 

Un partero, a man-midwife, 
medicoj a jjhysician, 

embustero, a cheat, 

charlatan, a quack, 

eirujano, a surgeon, 

saca muelas, a dentist, 
silleroj 
carpintero, 
peon, 



albanil, 

pintor, 

panadero, 

carnicero, 

frutero, 



a saddler, 

a carpenter, 

a labourer, 

a bricklayer, 

a painter, 

a baker, 

abutcher, 

a fruiterer. 



Un ganapan, ^ 

esportillero, > aporter. 
mandadero, ) 
remendon de vestidos, a 
botcher, 
tatarabuelo, a grandfa- 
ther's grandfather. 
bisabuelo, great grand- 
father, 
a grandfather, 
a father. 



abuelo, 
padre, 
Una madre, 
Un hijo, 
Una hija, 
Un nieto, 



Una verdulera, an herb ivoman 
Un pastelero, a pastry cook, 
tabernero, a vintner, 

cervecero, a brewer. 

mesonero, an innkeeper. 
relogero, a watchmaker. 
pregonero, a crier. 

joyero, a jeweller. 

boticario, an apothecary. 
buhonero, a pedlar. 

vidriero, a glazier, 

carbonero, a collier, 

Jardinero, a gardener, 
letrado, a lawyer, 

procurador, a solicitor ^ 
an attorney, 
abogado, a counsellor at 
law, 
juez, a judge, 

earcelero, a jailer, 

verdugo, a hangman. 
cerero, a tvax-chandler. 



a mother, 
a son. 
a daughter, 
a grandson. 



bisnieto, a great grandson 

hermano, a brother. 

cuuado, a brother in law. 

pad astro, a stepfather. 

Una madrastra, a stepmother. 

Un suegro, a father in law. 

Una nuera, a daughter in law 

Un yerno, a son in law. 

prinio hermano, a cousin- 

german. 

tio, an uncle. 

sobrino, a nephew, 

prime segundo, a second 

cousin, 

a husband, 

a wife, 

a bridegroom, 

a bride. 



marido, 
Una muger, 
Un novio, 
Una novia, 
Un desposado, one betrothed. 



ahijado, 
padrino, 
Una madrina, 
Un compadre, 1 
Una comadre, ^ 
Un companero, 



a godson. 
a godfather. 
a godmother, 
a father and 
mother inGod 
a partner. 



camarada, a companion, 
cofrade, a brother of the 
same pious society. 



VOCABULARY. 



285 



Un mellizo, a twin, 

Una cofradia, a guild, or so- 
ciety, 
tertulia, a society^ a dub. 
comunidadja community* 
Un huerfano, an orphan, 
soltero, a bachelor, 

heredero, an heir. 

ayo, a tutor. 

cur ad or, a guardian. 

Una viuda, a widow. 

Un herraano de leche, a fos- 
ter brother. 
hijo de lapiedra,esp6sito, 
6 echadizo, a foundling. 
nino supuesto, a supposi- 
titious child, 
bastardo, a bastard. 

hijo natural, 6 de ganancia, 
a fiatural son. 
Una doncella, a maiden, 

muger casada, a mar- 
ried woman, 
pwri6?i, a lying-in woman 
ama de leche^a wet nurse. 
ama de Haves, a house- 
keeper. 
manceba, a concubine. 

Of a house, and all that be- 
longs to it. — De una casa, 
y todo lo perteneciente 4 
ella. 
Una case, a house. 

Un solar, aground of a 
house. 
cimiento, a foundation. 
Una pared, a wall, 

Un tabique, a light wall. 
patio, a court, or yard. 
La fachada, the front. 

Un alto,andar,a story or floor. 
portal, a porch. 



Una ventana, a icindow. 

Un entresuelo, a low floor. 
zaquizami, or cielo, a del- 
ing ; also the place be- 
tween the ceiling and 
the roof of a house ; a 
cockloft. 
desvan, a garrets 

arteson, an arched ceiling. 
a vault. 
a stair case. 
a step, 
a roof 
tiles, 
bricks, 
slates, 
the door. 



> 



a passage, 
a court-yard, 
a back yard. 

a chamber. 

a room^ 
a chamber. 



Una boveda, 

escalera, 

Un escalon, 

tejado. 

Las tejas, 

Los ladrillos 

Las pizarras, 

La puerta, 

Un pasadizo, 

corral, 

trascorral, 

Una cimara, 

Un aposento, 7 

Una pieza, 

Un cuarto, | 

Una estancia, ) 

antic^mara, an anficham- 

ber. 

trascuadra, a backroom. 

sala, a hall. 

Un corredor, a gallery. 

retrete, a closet. 

estudio, a study, 

armario, ') i j 

TT 1, ' S> a cupboard. 
Una alhacena, 5 ^ 

Un guarda ropa, a wardrobe. 
Una alcova, an alcove. 

Un balcon, mirador, a balcony 
Una azotea, the flat roof of a 
house, a terrace. 
Un caraaranchonj a cockloft. 
L^na torre, a tower. 

bodega, un sotano, a cel- 
lar.. 



286 



VOCABULARY. 



Una reposteria, a builef^^s 

room, 

despeasa^ a pantry, 

cocina, a kitchen, 

caballeriza, a stable, 

perreria, a dog kt nnel, 

Uii palomar^ a dove-house, 

gallinero, a hen roost, 

jardiD, a garden, 

parque, a park. 

La privada, necesaria, the 

prwy, 

coronilla del edificio, the 

top of the building. 

El ripio, rubbish, 

Una ripia, a shingle. 

El ala de tejado, the eaves 

of the roof 

La canal, the gutter. 

El umbral, the threshold. 

Los bastidores de la puerta, 

the frame of the door. 

El postigo, the side door, 

Los quicios 6 goznes, hinges, 

Una cerradura, a lock. 

Un candadoj a padlock. 

El pestilloj the bolt of a lock, 

Un cerrojo, a bolt, 

Una Have, a key, 

ventanilla, a little win- 

doic, 

aldaba, a latch. 

La tranca de una puerta, the 

bar of a door. 

Las guardas de la llavcj the 

wards of a lock. 

El cafiuto de una Have, the 

pipe of a key. 

La vidriera, the glass of a 

loindow. 

Las rejas de una ventana, the 

bars of a ivindoio. 



Una escalera de caracol, a 
winding stair case. 
Los rellanoSj 6 las mesetas de 
escalera, the landing- 

places of stairs. 
El descanso de una escalera, 
the resting place of stairs. 
Una grada,un escalon, a step. 
escalera secreta, back- 
stairs, 
^ a beam, 
a girder^ or 
main beam, 
Una tabla, a board. 

Un crucero, a rafter. 

ladrillo, a brick. 

La pared maestra, the main 
wall. 
pared de en medio, the 
party wall. 
Una pared de cal y canto, a 
wall of lime and stone, 
Un tabique, a partition tvall. 



yiga, 
Un vigon, 



La cal, 



lime, or plaster. 



argamasa, mortar. 

encostradura de una pared, 

the plaster of a zoall. 

El yeso, fine white lime, 

jalbegue, white wash. 

Una mesa, a table, 

Un banco, a bench, 

Una silla, a chair. 

silla de brazos, a?i arm 

chair, 

Un taburete, a chair without 

back or arms to it. 

sitial, a stool. 

banquillo, a bench. 

Una caja, a box. 

area, un arcon, a chest, 

Un cajon, a case of drawers, 

tirador, a drawer. 



VOCABULARY. 



287 



Un escritorio, a scrutoire, 
Una Ccanaj a bed, 

Un Ifccho, a couch* 

Un^ arni'idura or un made- 
raj e de caraa, a bed-stead* 
El cielo de cama, the bed's 
teste?'. 
Las cortinas de cama, the bed- 
curtains. 
El roda pies. the fringe of 
a bed. 
Un tapete^ una alfombraj a 
carpet. 
Las sabauas, the sheets. 

El cobertor, counterpane. 
Las almohadaS; pillows. 

La tapiceria, tapestry. 

Una pintura, a picture. 

Un espejo, a loohing-glass. 
candelero, a candlestick. 
Las despabiladeras, snuffers. 
Vim arana, a branch of crys- 
tal to hold many candles. 
La yesca, tinder. 

L'na pajuela, a match. 

Un pedernal^ a flint. 

eslabon, the steel to strike 
fire icith. 



Una chimeneaj a chimney, 
Un respii'adero, 6 canon de 



rinal, 



a chamber-pot. 



chimenea, 

Los morillos, 
El fuelle, 
Las tenazaSj 



colchon, a mattress. 

Una colcha, a quilt or cov- 
erlet, 
Un catre, a cot. 

Una cama de viento, afield 
bed. 
La testera de cama, the bed's 
head. 
Las columnas de cama, the 
bed posts. 
Un gergon, a straw-bed, 

Una estera, a ?nat„ 

Un calentador de cama, a 
warming-pan. 



the flue of a 

chimney, 

the andirons, 

the bellows, 

the tons^s. 



Unapala orun badil, a shovel. 
Un guardaluego, a fender, 
biombo, askreen. 

urgador, atizador , a poker, 
Una olla, a porridge-pot, 
cobertera, a pot-lid. 
El asa, the ear of a pot, 

Un puchero, a pipkin, 

cu char on J a ladle, 

L'na caldera, a kettle, 

Un escalfador. ') a chaflng 
braserillo, ^ dish. 

Las trebedes, a trevet, 

L'n horuilloj a cooking-stove, 
homo, an oven, 

Una sarten, a frying pan. 
Un cazo. a sauce pan. 

Una cazuela, a littlepan, 
espumadera, a skimmer^ 
Las parrillas, a gridiron, 

Un coladero, a sieve. 

rallo, a grater, 

Una mechera, a larding pin, 
Un asador, a spit, 

L^na aceitera, alcuza, an oil- 
pot, 
vinagera, a cruet, 

Un almirez.mortero, a ?nortar, 
Una mano de mortero, a pes- 
tle, 
redoraa, a vial, 

Vn sumidero, a sink, 

cantaro^ a pitcher, 

bachi, a close-stool pari. 
Una albornia, a great earth- 
en pan. 



288 



VOCABULARY. 



Una herrada, ? a huchet or 
Un cubo, 3 pail. 

Una Cuba, a tub. 

La legia, colada, lye. 

Eljabon, soap. 

La levadura, leaven. 

Una rod ilia, a coarse cloth. 
Un estropajo, a disJiclout. 
La pala del horno, the peel of 
the oven. 



harina, 
El salvado, 
Una artesa, 
Los man teles, 
Una servilleta, 
Un aguainanil, 



meal, flour. 

bran. 

a tray. 

table clotlis. 

a napkin. 

a water-jug. 



Una almof ia, an earthen jug. 



toalla, 
Los platos, 
Un cuchillo, 

tenedor, 

salero, 

plato grande, 



a towel. 

the plates, 

a knife, 

afork, 

a salt-cellar. 

a dish. 



Una escudilla, a porringer, 
cuchara, a spoon. 

Un tajador, a chopping block, 

jarro, a mug. 

Una taza, a cup. 

salvilla, a salver. 

Un fiasco, a flask. 

Una botella, a bottle. 

Un vaso de vidrio, a tumbler. 
Una fuente, un gran plato, a 
basin. 
Un monda dientes, > a tooth 

escarba dientes, ^ pick, 

mayordomo, a steward. 

trinchante, a carver, 

secretario, a secretary. 

camarero, a chamberlain. 

dispensero, a purveyor. 

capellan,. a chaplain. 

limosneroj an almoner. 



Un page, a page. 

lacayo, afootman. 

cochero, a coachman, 
mozo de caballos, a groom. 
caballerizo, a gentleman 
of the horse. 
copero, a cup-bearer. 
maestre sala, a sewer. 
bodeguero, , 
repostero, ' 



a butler. 



halconero, 
cocinero, 
galopin, 
portero, 
El huesped, 
amo de casa, ' 



a falconer. 

a cook. 

a scullion. 

a porter* 

the host or 

landlord. 



Of country affairs. — De las 

cosas del campo. 

Una alqueria or quinta, a 

country house or farm house. 

Un quinteroj a farmer. 

^y^^o, ' a cow-keeper. 



vaquero, ^ 

porquero, 

pastor, 

zurron, 

cayado, 



Una honda, 
Un hortelano, 
jardinero, 
cavador. 



a swine-herd. 

a shepherd. 

a scrip. 

a shepherd^s 

crook. 

a sling. 

a gardener, 

a digger, 

vifiadero, a vine dresser. 

arado, a plough. 

Una azada, ? ^ ^^^ 7 

J J 1 ' >- a spade, 

Un azadon, ^ ^ 

labrador, a husbandman, 

Una esteva, ? a plough 

mancera, ^ handle. 

reja de arado, a plough 

share. 

El rastrillo, the harrow. 



VOCABULARY. 



289 



Un sembrador, a soicer. 

escardadorj a weeder, 

rozador, a weeding hook, 

segador, a reaper, 

Una guadafia, a sithe, 

Un trillo, a jlail, 

Una horca^ a fork, 

Un bieldo, a winnowing fan, 

pescador, a fisherman, 

Una red barredera,a drag-net, 

Una vara, eana para pescar, 

a fishing rod, 

Un sedal de caiia, a fishing' 

line. 



anzuelo, 

cazador, 

cebo, 
La liea, 
Una jaula, 
Un obrero, 1 

jornalero, \ 



afish-hook, 

a huntsman, 

a bait, 

bird lime, 

a cage, 

a day'ia- 

bourer. 



asneroj a keeper of asses, 
paisano, a countryman, 
campoj afield, 

Una tierra entre dos surcos^ 
a ridge, 
Un surco, a furrow. 

El trigo en yerba, green corn. 
La tierra inculta, landuntilled, 
Un montCj > a mount^ a 

Una montafia, \ mountain, 

Un cXdo; \ « '^•«^'' ^'^^' 
cerro, a rising ground. 



valle, 

abisrao, 

Una zanja, 

laguna, 
Un pantano, 
Una Uanura, 


a valley, 

an abyss, 

a ditch, 

a lake, 

a marsh, 

a plain. 


pena, roca, 
Un pefiasco, 
25 


a rock, 
a great rock. 



Un despenadero, a precipice^ 

Una selva, a forest, 

Un bosque, a wood. 

Una esplanada, esplanade^ 

mata, a bush. 

zarza, a bramble, 

espina, a thorn. 

Un prado, a meadow, 

vergel, afiower garden. 

Una huerta, an orchard. 

Un jardin, a garden. 

Uua era en un jardin, a bed 

in a garden. 

glorieta, a bower. 

almaciga, a seed plot. 

bobeda de parras, a vine 

arbour. 

Un laberinto, a labyrinth, 

Una gruta, a grotto. 

cascada, a cascade. 

fuente, a fountain. 

Un chorro de agua, a water^ 

spout. 

El pilon de una fuente, the 

vase of a fountain. 

Una encanada, ) an aque- 

Un acueducto, ^ duct. 

La hortaliza, all sorts of 

herbage. 

Una planta, a plant. 

El camino real, the highway, 

Una senda, vereda, a path. 

pisada, un rastro, a track. 

cabalgadura, a saddle 

beast. 

Un carromato, a waggon, 

carro, a cart. 

Una rueda, a wheel. 

EI rayo de una rueda, the 

spoke of a 2vh eel. 

Las llantas, ) the felloes of 

cambas, 5 cl wheel. 



290 



VOCABULARY. 



El cubo de una rueda^ the 

nave of a wheel, 

egOy the axle-tree. 

La estaca, the pin of a wheel. 



Una calesa, 

litera^ 
Las andas, 
Un coche, ^ 
Una carroza, ^ 
Una cesta, 

rastra, narria, 

canasta, 



a chaise, 
a litter, 
the shafts. 

a coach. 



a basket. 

a sledge. 

a basket. 

espuerta, a dirt-basket. 

Un chirrion, a dung-cart. 

Una banasta, a great hamper. 

alforja, a wallet. 

bolsa, a purse. 



Un costal, saco. 



a sack. 



Unamaleta, a portmanteau. 
Un talego, a bag. 

Una valijaj a cloak bag. 

Un zurron^ abudget or pouch. 



Of the Churchy and things 
belonging to it. — De la 
Iglesia, y cosas pertene- 
cientes ^ ella. 



La nave, the 

El cimborio, 
La cupula, 
El pinaculo, 

com, 
La capilla, 
Un atril. 
La sacristia. 
El campanario, 
Una campana. 
El badajo, ') 
La lengiieta, 5 

pila, 
El hisopo, , 



aisle of the 
church. 

the dome. 

the pinnacle. 

the choir. 

the chapel. 

a desk. 

the vestry. 

the belfry. 

a bell. 

the clapper 

of the bell. 

the font. 

the sprinkler. 



El confesionario, 
Una tribuna, 
El cimenterio, 



the confes-- 
sion-box. 
a tribune or 
gallery, 
the church- 
yard. 

osario, the charnel. 

Un altar, an altar. 

frontal, an antipendium, 
ornato, an ornament. 

El tabernaculo, > the tab.er^ 
sagrario, ^ nacle. 

Un palio, a canopy. 

El mantel del altar, the altar- 
cloth. 
Un misal, a mass-book. 

Una sotana, a cassock. 

sobrepelliz, a surplice. 
Uh roquete, a short surplice. 
bonete, a cap. 

Una mitra, a mitre. 

Un b^culo, a crosier. 

patriarca, a patriarch. 
arzobispo, an archbishop. 
obispo, a bishop. 

obispado, a bishoprick, 
Una diocesis, a diocese. 

Un coadjutor, coadjutor. 

sufraganeo, suffragan. 
sacerdote, a priest. 

El sacerdocio, priesthood, 
Un diacono, a deacon. 

subdiacono, a subdracon. 
acolito, one that serves 
the priest at the altar 



lector, 
clerigo, 
prelado, 
abad, 

Una abadesa, 
abadia, 

Un canonigo, 
dean, 



a reader. 

a clergyman^ 

a prelate. 

an abbot. 

an abbess. 

an abbey. 

a canon. 

a dean. 



VOCABULARY. 



291 



IJn prevoste, a provost, 

arcediano, anarchdeacon, 
chtintre, a precentor. 

maestro de coro, a mas^ 
ter of the choir. 
cantor, a singer. 

sacristan, a vestry keeper. 
prebendadoj a preben 



cura, 

Una parroquia, 

Un vicario, 
oficial, 
promotor^ 

Una encomienda^ 



dary. 

a parson. 

a parish. 

a vicar. 

an official. 

a promoter. 

a thing 



given in commendam 
El bautismo, baptism. 

La confirmacion^ confirma- 
tion. 
El matrimonio, matrimony. 
Comulgar, to receive the 

sacrament. 
Los ordenes sacros, holy or- 
ders. 
Una ceremonia, a ceremony. 
La rijbrica, the ruhinc. 

El ritual, the ritual. 

oficio divinOj divine ser- 



salterio, 
Un salmo, 
La antifona^ 
Unalecion, 
Un versete, 

sermon, 
La meditacion, 

oracion vocal, 



vice, 

the psalter. 

a psalm. 

antiphon. 

a lesson. 

a verse. 

a sermon. 

meditation. 

vocal 

prayer. 

mental 



oracion mental, 

prayer. 

to preach. 

to catechise. 



Enterrar, ^ 
Sepultar, ^ 
La escomunion, 

suspension, 
Un entredicho, 
La irregularidad 
Descomulgar, 

Una catedral, 

La conventual, 

Una parroquial. 

El advientOj 
La cuaresma, 
Las temporas, 
Una vigilia, 
Un ayuno, 



to bury. 

excommuni- 
cation, 
suspension, 
an interdict, 
^irregularity, 
to excommu- 
nicate, 
a cathedral 
church, 
the church of 
a convent, 
a parish 
church, 
advent, 
lent, 
ember-weeks, 
an eve. 
. a fast. 



predicar, 
catequizar. 



Things relating to War. — 
Cosas pertenecientes a la 
guerra. 

La artilleria, artillery. 

Una pieza de artilleria, } a can- 
Un canon, J non. 

El tren de artilleria, the train 
of artillery. 
La boca de canon, the mouth 
of a cannon. 
El fogon, the touch-hole. 

La culata del canon, the breech 
of a gun. 
curena, ^ the carriage of 
Elafuste, ^ a gun. 

Cargar, to load. 

Apuntar, to level. 

Disparar, to fire, 

Un tiro de canon, a cannon- 
shot. 



292 



VOCABULARY. 



Desmontar un canon, to dis- 
mount a gun, 
Enclavar un canon, to spike 
a gun. 
Una culebrina, a culverin. 
Un falconete, a falconet, 
Un pedrero, a paterero, 

canon entero, a ivhole 
cannon. 
medio canon, ^a/fcawwo?z. 
petard o, a petard, 

Una bomba, a bomb. 

bombarda, a bomb-ketch. 
Un mortero, a mortar-piece. 
Una granada, a grenade. 

Un mosquete, a musket, 

Una carabina, a carabine. 
escopeta, a firelock. 

pistola, a pistol. 

balaj a bullet. 

La polvora, powder. 

Una mecha, a match, 

Un pedernal, a flint. 

Una flecha, an arrow, 

Un dardo, a dart. 

Una javalina, a boar-spear, 
honda, a sling, 

Un arco, a bow, 

Una hacha de armas, a battle- 
axe, 
lanza, a lance, 

alabarda, a halberd. 
partesana, a partisan. 
pica, apike. 

Un alfange, a scimetar. 

Una espada, a sivoj^d. 

El puno de la espada, the han- 
dle of a sword. 
porno de la— the pommel of. 
La guarnicion de \di-the hilt of 
hoja, the blade, 

Un puiial, a poniard, 

Una bayoneta, a bayonet. 



a helmet. 



Un yelmo, 
Una celada, 

daga, a dagger. 

Un niorrion, a morrion. 

La visera,fA6^ vizor of a helmet. 
El gorjal, la gola, the gorget. 
Un peto, a breast-plate. 

Una coraza, a cuirass. 



El espaldar, 
Un coselete, 
brazalete. 



the back-plate. 
a corslet. 
^ armour for 
the arms. 
escarcelon, armour from 
the waist to the thighs, 
Unas hinojeras, armour for 
the knees. 
Un broquel, a buckler. 

escudo, a shield, 

Una adarga, a target. 

cota de malla, a coat of 
mail. 
Un general, • a general. 
teniente general, a lieu- 
tenant general. 
sargento mayor de batalla, 
a major general, 
maestro de campo, ) a col- 
coronel, ) onel, 

sargento mayor, a major. 
capitan, a captain, 

teniente, a lieutenant, 
corneta, a cornet, 

alferez, an ensign, 

sargento, a serjeant. 

cabo de escuadra, a cor- 
poral. 



cuadrillero, 

soldado, 

caudillo, 

tambor, 

pifano, 

Una trorapeta, 

Un atabal, 



a brigadier, 

a soldier, 

a chief 

a drum, 

ttfife, 

a trumpet, 

a kettle drum. 



VOCABULARY. 



293 



Un soldado de a caballo, a 
trooper, 
soldado de^ pie, > afoot 
infante, ^ soldier. 

granadero, a grenadier. 
dragon, a dragoon, 

piquero, a pike-man, 

mosquetero, a musqueteer, 
fusilero, afusileer. 

La infanteria, the infantry, 
caballeria, the cavalry. 



Los batidores, 
Las murallas, 
Los muros, 
Una almena, 
El parapeto, 
Un Castillo, 
fuerte, 
Una fortaleza. 



Un artillero, 
bombardero, 



a gunner, 
a bombard- 
ier, 
ingeniero, an engineer, 
minero, a miner, 

gastador, a pioneer, 

Una centinela, a centinel. 
La vanguardia, the vanguard. 
El cuerpo de batalla, the main 
body of the army. 
La retaguardia, the rear. 
El cuerpo de reserva, the 
corps de reserve. 
cuerpo de guardia, the 
corps de guard, 
ala, the icing of an army. 
Un batallon, a battalion, 
regiraiento, a regiment. 
Una companla de caballos, a 
troop of horse. 
companla de infanteria, 
a company of foot, 
hilera, a rank, 

fila, a file. 

Un escuadron, a squadron. 
mochilero, a soldier^s boy. 
bagage, a baggage. 

vivandero, a sutler. 

partido, a party. 

Los corredores, the forlorn 
hope, 
25* 



discoverers. 

walls, 

a battlement, 
the parapet, 
a castle, 
a fort, 
a fortress. 
fortificacion, a fortifica- 
tion. 
torre, a tower. 

ciudadela, a citadel. 
Un bastion, a bastion, 

Una Cortina, a curtain. 

media luna,an half moon, 
tronera, loop hole. 

Un terraplen, a rampart. 
caballero, a cavalier. 
rebellin, a ravelin. 

La contra escarpa, counter 
scarp, 
a barrier, 
afausse 
braye, 

Un foso, a ditch. 

repecho, a breast-icork. 

Una garita, a centry-box. 

casamata, casemate. 

galeria, 



Una barrera, 
falsa braga, 



Un corredor, 



gallery. 



La estrada cubierta, the co- 
vert way. 



Un ceston, 
Una estaca, 
Un reducto, 
Una atalaya, 



a gabion. 

a palisade, 

a redoubt. 

a place to dis- 



cover, or the per- 
son who discovers, 
raanta, a mantlet or cover 
for men from the shot, 
fagina, a fascine, 

mina, a mine. 



294 



VOCABULARY. 



Una contra-mina^ a counter- 
mine, 
trinchera, a trench. 

El real, the camp. 

Las vitLiallas, provisions, 
municiones, ammunition, 
Un bisono, a recruit, 

pecoreroj a marauder, 
Una contra marcha, a coun- 
ter-march, 
escaramuza, a skirmish, 
batalla, a battle. 

Un sitio, a siege, 

cuartelj quarter. 

Una encamisada, a camisado. 



salida, 
Batir, 
Una brecha, 

escalada, 
Un asalto, 
La llamada, 
capitulacion, 



a sally, 
to hatter. 
a breach, 
an escalade, 
an assault, 
the chamade, 
the capitu- 
lation, 

guarnicionj the garrison, 
Tocar la caja, to beat the 
drum, 
Levantar gentCj, to raise men. 
Pagar el sueldo^ > to pay the 
el pre, ^ soldiers, 

Batir la estrada, to scour the 
country, 
Levantar el sitio, to raise the 
siege, 
Marchar a banderas desple- 
gadaSj to mach with fly- 
ing colours, 
Reforzar el egercito, to rein- 
force the army, 
Tocar a recoger, to sound a 
retreat, 
Entregar una plaza, to sur- 
render a place. 



Commercial terms. — Voces 

mercantiles. 
Un abarcador, a monopoliser. 
monopolista,ri?2 engrosser. 
Abonar, to credit. 

El acarreo, porte, carriage, 
acarreto (hilo,) pack- 
thread. 
aceptar una letra, to ac- 
cept a bill. 
Una accion, a share^ stock. 
La accionde empujar, 6 tirar, 
hallage. 
Un acreedorjCre^ifor; acree- 
dor hipotecarioj mortga- 
gee ; el que da la hipoteca^ 
mortgager ; acreedor im- 
portuno, a dun ; valista, 
6 acreedor por vale, cred- 
itor for a note or bilL 
La aduana, custom-house. 
Un ajuste, bargain ; ajuste 
de cuentas, a settlement, 
a la buelta, carried over. 
dXmdiCeDi ^storehouse J ware- 
house^ magazine. 
Una almoneda, sale by auc- 
tion. 
Alquilar, to hire. 

Una ancla de la esperanza, a 
sheet anchor. 
A.' quien su poder hubiere, 
to his or their assigns.^ 
Una arbitracion, sentencia de 
jueces arbitros, umpirage. 
Las arraSj 6 la dote, earnest 
money, 
Un arrendador, a farmer that 
hires. 
El arrendamiento, hiring^ 
fanning, 
Arrendar, to farm • 

Un arribo, an arrival 



VOCABULARY. 



Un aseguradoFj an insurer* 
Asegurar, to insure, 

Un asiento, an entry. 

La averia^ average, 

averia y capa, primage 
and hat money, 
Un balance, saldo, a balance, 
banco, hank, 

banquero, hanker, 

Barato, ^ cheap, 

Los bienes propios, real or 
personal property, 
bienes habidos y por ha- 
ber, goods had and to he 
\ had, 
Un calabrote, a short cable, 
cambio, exchange^ change, 
Negociar una letra de cam- 
bio, to negociate a bill of 
exchange, 
Un capital, caudal, stocky cap- 
ital, 
Cargar el temporal, to in- 
crease a heavy storm, 
Caro, dear, 

Una carta, cuenta, a bill, 
carta, letter ; el porte de 
cartas, postage ; portador, 
penny 'post man ; paquete 
de cartas, packet of letters, 
Cerrar una carta, to make up 
a letter ; sellar una carta, 
to seal a letter ; un sobre 
escrito de carta, direction, 
\judL maleta para cartas, mail, 
\jn caudal, a stock, 

caudal destinado, a fund. 
La caja^ cash ; un cajero, 
cashier^ cash-keeper ; dine- 
ro en caja, cash on hand. 
El libro de caja, cash-book, 
Un certificado, certificate, 
Certificar, to certify. 



Un ciento, cent : dos 6 tres, 
&c.por ciento, two or three. 
&c per cent. 

El cobrador, receiver ; co- 
brar, to receive ; cobracloi 
de sisa, exciseman ;— de de- 
rechos de muelle, wharfin" 

La comision, commission, 
Un campanero, partner, 

Vndi compaiiia, partnership, 
compra, purchase ; un 
com^Y?(doY ^buyer J purchas- 
er ; comprador, 6 vende- 
dor de acciones, stock- 
jobber, 
Un corapromiso, compromise. 
La comunicacion, intercourse. 
El conocimiento, bill of lad- 
ing. 
La consignacion,cows?^wmf ??f . 
El consumo, consumption, 
Contado (dinero de contado) 
ready money. 
El contenido, contents, 

Un contrabandista, smuggler. 
contrabando, contraband, 
IJns, contrata de fletamento, a 
charter party of f -eight. 
contribucion, an assess- 
ment or tribute. 
copia, a copy. 

Un corredor, or corredor de 
oreja, broker ;— de carabios, 
exchange-broker. 
El correo, the post office. 
La correspondencia, corres" 
pondence, 
Un correspondiente, a corres- 
jjondent, 
Corriente, current. 

La costumbre, custo7n. 

El credito, credit. 



296 



VOCABULARY. 



. La cuenta, hill^ account ; su- 
mar una cuenta, to cast up 
an account ; pedir cuenta, 
to call to an account ; pa- 
gar a cuenta, to pay a 
part of an account, 
Los danos, damages. 

La data 6 fecha, date, 

dar, 6 dejar a fletOj to let 
out a vessel on freight, 
Debajo de cubierla, under 
deck. 
El derecho, duty^ custom ; 
derechos de entrada, duties 
of importation ; dros. de 
estraccion, of exportation; 
dros. de muelle, wharfage ; 
cobrador de los dros. del 
muelle, wharfinger, 
Los derechos de embarque, 
loharfage. 
La descarga, unlading. 

El descuento, discount ; de- 
volucion de dros. de entra- 
da, drawback. 
Un desembolsoj disbursement, 
Desempaquetar, unstoicing, 
Despachar, to sellj send^ 
dispatch ; despachar un 
correo, to send an express ; 
despachar mercaderias, to 
sell goods ; despacho de 
ad nana, clearance ^ cocket ; 
despacho, expedition, 
De todo nos hacemos cargo, 
ive have taken due notice 
of all. 
La deuda, debt. 

El deudor, debtor. 

El diezmo, tenths tithe ; diez- 

mero, tithe gatherer. 
El dinero, money ; dinero con- 
tado 6 de contado, ready 



money ; dinero Cercenado, 
6 cortadoj clipped money ; 
dinero en caja, cash ; dine- 
ro prestado, money lent. 
Un domicilio, adomicil, 

Una dote, dowry, a woman^s 
portion, 
Unas arras, a pledge. 

Los dros. municipales, town^s 
fees. 
Un duplicado, / duplicate. 
dueno, owner. 

Unos efectos, effects. 

Un envoltorio, 6 una harpil- 
lera, wrapper. 

empefio, pawn,, pledge. 
Encima de la barra, over 
the bar. 
Un endosador, an endorser, 
encargado de, agent for, 
endoso, endorsement. 

En testiraonio de verdad, in 
testimonium veritatis. 
La entrada, entry; drDS.de en- 
trada, duty of importation. 
El equivalente, equivalent. 
escasos de despacho, hea- 
vy articles, 
Escribir, to ivrite ; la escritu- 
ra, hand'tvriting, bond, en- 
gagement ; escritura de ar- 
rendamiento, hase ; un es- 
critorio, counting-house, 
Estrenar, to hansel. 

La exigencia, exigency. 

estraccion, exportation, 
Un estracto, extract, abridge- 
ment, 
estractor, extractor. 

La estorsion, extortion. 

Un factor, factor, 

Una factura, factoria, invoice^ 
factory. 



VOCABULARY. 



297 



La falta, faulty vmnt^ ei^ror, 
falla de pagarhentOj non- 
payment. 
Un fardoj a bale, 

fardo pequefio a truss, 
Una feria, ' a fair, 

Un fiador, surety^ hail, 

fiador hipotecario, morU 
gager, 
fiel jTfiedida 6 peso, stand- 
ard measure^ or ivtight, 
Unas fijaderas para papeles, 
Jilesfor papers, 
Fletar, to freight a ship. 

El flete, freight, 

fie tad or, freighter ^ 

fondo, 6 caudal, 6 accion. 
fundsy share or stock, 
forcejo, struggle, 

ganador, gainer. 

La ganapcia, gain. 

El ganapan, porter, 

Los gastos, charges J expenses, 
generos, goods. 

Las guardas, custom-house of- 
ficers "^ guardas vijiadores, 
tides-men^ tide-waiters, 
Una gruesa 6 mucha mar, a 
heavy sea, 
Un guarda de navio, a tides- 
man, 
Una guia, a permit, 

hacienda ruin, trash of 
goods, 
harpillera, ? 

Unenvoltorio, 5 ""•«^^^''- 

Hilo acarreto, packthread. 

Una hipoteca, a mortgage, 

junta de sanidad, board 

of health. 

El importe ; importe liquido, 

proceeds y neat proceeds. 



Insolvente, insolvencia, in- 
solvent^ insolvency. 
El interes, ' interest, 

introductor de generos, 

importer of goods, 
inventario, inventory, 
juez, jitdge, 

juez arbitro, referee^ um- 
pire^ arbitrator, 
Los juros, fies^ interest. 
El lacre, sealing-wax, 

Una lancha, a lighter, 

lanchada, embarque en 
lancha, lighterage. 

Una letra de cambio, a bill of 
exchange^ a draft ; nego- 
ciar una letra de cambio, to ^ 
negociaie a bill of ex- 
change ; sacar, librar, 6 
tirar una letra, to draw a 
bill ; aceptar una letra, to 
accept a bill ; protestar una ' 
letra, to protest a bill, 
Un legajo de cartas, a bundle 
of letters, 
Un libro de tienda, shop book; 
borradorcillo, small note- 
book for memorandums ; 
borrador, a day-book, dia- 
rio 6 jornal, a journal ; li- 
bro. mayor, a ledger ; libro 
de caja, cash-book ; copi- 
ador, 6 libro de copias de 
cartas, a letters-book ; libro 
de muestras,« pattern card. 
Lalicencia, license ^permit, 
losa vidriada, Dutch ware, 
maleta para cartas, mail* 
Un marchante, a customer, 
marinero, seaman* 

Las mercaderias, ? goods, 
mercancias, S wares. 



298 



VOCABULARY. 



Un mercader por mayor, a 
wholesale dealer, 
monopolista, monopolist, 
pnerto, a port or harbour, 
Un nmtlle, wharf ; derechos 
de mu'41e, wharfage ; su 
cobrador, its icharfinger, 
Un negociante de generos es- 
trangeros, importer of for- 
eign goods, 
Un negociante de acciones, a 
stock-jobber, 
Una oblea, a wafer. 

obligacionj a bond, 

obligaciones, contracts, 
Un ofrecedorj bidder ; mayor 
oferente, higher bidder. 
La orilla, the shore, 

Pagar 4 cuenta, to pay on 
account ; un pagamento, 
payment ; falta de pago, 
non-payment ; un pagare, 
a promissory note. 
Un paquete, parcel, 

paquete de cartas, a pack- 
et of letters. 
Para las costas de, for the 
cost of, 
Pedir cuenta, to call to an 
account. 
Las perdidas, losses. 

El peso bruto, gi^oss iveight, 
peso limpio de rey, neat 
weight, 
poco mas 6 menos, there- 
about, 
Una petaca, bundle, hamper, 
roll, 
poliza de seguros, policy 
of insurance, 
ponerlas cosasen orden, 
to set things in order. 
El portador, bearer^ porta- 



dor de cartas, penny-post^ 
man ; porte de cartas^ 
postage. 
Los portes, porterage. 
El precio, p?'2ce, r«^e; la su- 
bida de precio, enhance- 
ment, rise of price. 
El premio, premium, interest, 
Un prestamo, dinero prestado, 
a loanymoney lent. 
El primage, parte de fletes de 
navio, primage, 
Una promesa, a promise. 
protesta, a protest. 
Protestar una letra, to protest 
a bill or draft. 
Protestar una, dos y tres y 
las mas voces en derecho 
necesarias, to protest in the 
most effectual manner pos- 
sible against 

El provecho, profit. 

La puntualidad, punctuality, 
Un quebrado, a banh^upt, 
Una quiebra, a bankruptcy. 
Que se dira, which will be 
mentioned. 
La quinquilleria, hardware, 
Un quintal, a hundredweight, 
Una quitanza, a release. 

El recambio, re-exchange, 
recibo, receipt. 

Regatear, to cheapen. 

La remesa, the remittance. 



renta, 
riqueza. 



El riesgo. 



income, 

wealthi 

risk. 

Romper sobre la costa, to 

break on the shore. 

La ropa, clothes. 

ruin hacienda, trash of 

goods. 



VOCABULAHY. 



299 



Sacar las mercaderias, to un- 
stow, 
Saiio de quilla y costados, 
tight ^ stanch^ and strong. 
El seguro, insurance, 

Sellar una carta, to seal a 
letter, 
Ser de cuenta, to he on ac- 
count. 
La sisa, excise, 

Su cobrador, the exciseman 
Un sobre escrito, a direction, 
sobrestante de tierra, land- 
overseer. 
La sobreestada, demurrage, 
subasta,almonedaj sale by 
auction. 
Sumar una cuenta, to cast up 
an account. 
La subida de precio, en- 

hancement, 

suscripciottj subscription. 
El suscriptorj the subscriber, 
Surgir, to ride at anchor, 
Un talego de moneda, mon- 
ey-bag. 
La tara, the tare, tret, 

tasacionj the set rate, 
tasa, assize, 

Un tendero, a shop-keeper, 
libro de tienda, shop-book, 
Una tienda, a shop, 

Un tenedor de libros, a book- 
keeper. 
La toneleria, cooperage, 

Un tratante, a trader. 

negociante, a merchant, 
Tratar, to deal or trade, 

Un trato, 6 negocio, business 
or traffick. 



Un vendedor, seller. 

La venta, sale, 

Un valor, value, worth, 

Los vigiadores de rentas, 

inspectors, tides-men, 

Una cumplida, las restantes 

de ningun valor, one being 

fulfilled, the others to stand 

void, 

Un uso, usance. 

La usura, usury. 

Un usurero, a usurer. 

La gerga : especie de estera 

para enfundar generos, a 

mat. 

Navigation. — Navegacion. 
Un navio, una nave, 6 nao, 
a ship, 
de linea, a ship of the line, 
Un navio de guerra, a man 
of war, 
Un navio marcbante 6 una 
fragata, a merchant ship, 
Un navio ligero, a light vessel, 
Una galera, a galley, 

galeaza, a galeasse. 

Un galeon, a galleon, 

Una galeota, a galleot, 

fragata de guerra, a frig- 
ate. 



Un saique, 
Una carraca, 
Un fuste, 
Una pinaza. 



a saick. 
a carrack, 

afuste, 
a pinnace. 



barca de pasage, afer- 
ry-boat. 



Un tributo, 
trueque, 
Trocar, 



tribute, 
exchange, 
to barter. 



goleta, 
canoa, 
piragua, 
gondola, 
Un esquife, 
Una balandra, 
Un bergantin. 



a schooner. 

a canoe. 

a pirogue, 

a light boat, 

a skiff, 

a sloop, 

a brig. 



300 



VOCABULARY. 



UnalauchajUhbote, a launch. 
barqueta, ^ 

barquilia,> aboaU 

Un batel, ; 

bagel, barcoj buque, vessel. 
Una balsa, a raft^ afloat. 
La capitana/^Af? admiral ship. 
almiranta, the vice-admi- 
ral. 
armada, the royal fleet. 
^otRy the fleet of merchant 
men. 
Una escuadra, a squadron. 
A^bordo, aboard. 

La popa, the poojjy stern. 
proa, the prow or head. 
Una tartana, a tartan. 

Un brulote, ajiieship. 

patache, a tender^ a pc- 
tach. 
Una faluca, falua, a felucca. 
barca, a coasting fish- 
ing vessel. 
La sentina, the well. 

El lastre, ballast. 

mastil, irbol, the mast. 
4rbol m^yor, the main- 
mast. 
La gabia, the rovnd top. 

El trinquete, the fore-mast. 
La mesana, the mizen-mast. 
La carlinga del ^rbol, the step 
of the mast. 
verga, entena, the yard. 
El estribor, starboard. 

babor, larboard. 

Gobernar el navio, to steer. 
El barlovento, windward. 
sotavento, leeward. 

Remolcar, to tow. 

Escoltar, convoyar,fo convoy. 
Una vela, a sail. 

vela mayor, the main-sail. 



La vela de gabia, the top-sail. 
El juanete, the top-gallant 
sail. 
La vela'de mesana, the mizen- 
sail. 
vela de trinquete, the fore- 
sail. 
cevadera, the sprit sail. 
vela latina, lateen or shoul- 
der of mutton-sail. 
Un remo, ^ an oar. 

La pala de remoj the blade of 
an oar. 
Unpractico, a pilot. 

Las troneras, the port holes. 
empavesadas, the net- 
tings. 
Un gallardete, a pendant. 
Una banderola, a banner. 
bandera, the colours. 
La brujula, the compass^ 

punta de la proa, the stem. 
puente, cubierta, the d< ck. 
Las escotillas, the hatches. 
El timon, the helm. 

La quilla, the keel. 

Una ancla, 4ncora,aw anchor. 
amarra, mooring. 

maroma, a rope. 

Un cable, a cable. 

La sonda, the sounding lead. 
Un piloto, a mate. 

guardian, a boatswain. 
raarinero, a sailor. 

corsario, a privateer. 
armador, a ship owner. 
Una camara, a cabin. 

Un camarote, a birth. 

Una tormenta, a tempest. 
borrasca, a storm. 

bonanza, fair weather. 
calma;^ cahn. 



VOCABULARY. 



301 



El viento en popa, the ivind 

full astern, 

viento largo, fair wind. 

Coger el viento, to ply to 

icindward, 

Ir a la bolina, to tack upon a 

wind, 

Irse a fondo, a pique, to sink. 



The year anditsparts^^c. 

El ano y sus partes, &c. 

Un ano, 

Un mes 



Una semana, 

Un dia, 

Una noche. 

La maiiana, 

La tarde, 

Una hora, 

Un minuto, 

Un memento, 

La prinjavera. 

El verano, 

El otofio, 

El invierno, 

La salida del sol, the suii-ris- 

El ponerse del sol, 

La aurora. 



a year, 

a month, 

a week, 

a day, 

a night, 

the morning, 

the ei^ening, 

an hour, 

a minute, 

a moment, 

the spring, 

the summer, 

the autumn, 

the winter. 



the sun- 
setting, 
the dawn. 
El mediodia, noon. 

La media noche, midnight, 
Un cuarto de hora, a quarter 
of an hour, 
Una media hora, half an hour. 
Tres cuartos de hora, three 
quarters of a?i hour. 
Hoy, to-day, 

Ayer, yesterday. 

El dia antes de ayer, the day 
before yesterday, 
26 



El dia despues de mafiana, 
the day after to-morrow. 

The months^ — Los meses, — 
are mascidine. 



Enero, 

Febrero, 

Marzo, 

Abril, 

]Mayo, 

Junio, 

Julio, 

Agosto, 

Setiembre, 

Octubre, 

Noviembre, 

Diciembre, 



January, 

February, 

March, 

April, 

May, 

June. 

July, 

August, 

September, 

October, 

'November, 

December, 



The days of the week, — Los 



dias de la 
masculine, 

Lunes, 

Martes, 

Miercoles, 

Jueves, 

Viernes, 

Sabado, 

Domingo, 



semana, — are 

Monday, 

Tuesday, 

Wednesday, 

Thursday, 

Friday. 

Saturday, 

Sunday, 



The holidays of the year, — 

Dias de fiesta del ano. 
El primer dia del Ano, New 
Yearns day. 
El dia de ^eyes ^Twelfth-day, 
La Cuaresma, Lent, 

Las Cuatro temperas, the Em- 
ber-weeks, 
El domingo de Ramos, Palm- 
sunday, 
Viernes Santo, Good Fri^ 
day 



302 



VOCABULARY. 



La pascua de resurreccion, 

Easter-day. 

pascua del Espiritu Santo, 

Whit'Sunday, 

EI dia de Difuntos, All'Souh- 

day. 

dia de todos los Santos, 

Ml'SaintS'day , 

La pascua de navidad, Christ* 

mas. 

vigilia, the Eve. 



east wind. 



Winds^ — Vientos, — are maS' 

culine. 
El norte, north wind. 

sud 6 sur, south wind. 

este, ') 

levante, ^ 

poniente, oeste^ west wind. 

nordeste, north-east wind. 

noroeste, north-west wind. 

vendaval, south-west wind, 

sudeste, south-east wind. 

sudoeste, south-west wind. 



Table of the current Money in Spain. — Tabla de las Mone^- 
das de Espana. 

La pieza mas pequena de moneda de Espana se llama Mara- 
vedi, del cual resulta la Tabla siguiente. 



Copper, or Billion. — Cobre^ 

6 vellon, 

2 maravedises hacen un 

ochavo. 

2 ochavos un cuarto. 

2 cuartos una mota, 6 

dos cuartos. 



* 8| cuartos 



Silver. — Plata. 

un real, 
t lOI diez cuartos y medio y 
medio maravedi, octava 
parte de un Peso duro. 



I 17 cuartos 
§21 1 cuartos 

II 34 cuartos 



2 reales. 

2 1 reales. 

4 reales 6 una 

peseta. 



^42^ cuartos 5 reales 6 pese- 
ta columnaria. 
85 cuartos 10 reales 6 me- 
dio duro. 
170 cuartos 20 reales 6 un 
peso duro. 



Gold— Oro. 



20 reales 
40 reales 

80 reales 
160 reales 

320 reales 



escudillo de oro. 

doble escudillo 

de oro. 

doblon de oro. 

media onza de 

orOjU 8 duros, 

una onza, 6 I6 

pesos duros. 



* 5 Cents. f 6 Cents, t 10 Cents. § 12^ Cents. j| 20 Cent*, 
or a Pistareen. If 25 Cents, 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



303 



Military words of Command, — Palabras militares de Man- 
damiento. 



Formense, 
Atencion, 
Armas al hombro. 



fall in. 
attention, 
shoulder 
arms, 
Figen bayonetas, fix bayo- 
nets. 
Presenter! las armas, present 
arms. 



Aparejen, 

Fresenten, 

Fuego, 

Ceben, 

Carguen, 

Saquen baqueta. 



Ataquen, 



make ready, 
present, 
fire, 
prime, 
load, 
draw ram- 
rods, 
ram down cart- 
ridge. 



Cesen el fuego, cease firing. 
Marchen, march. 

Alto, halt. 

Linea d la izquierda, left into 
line. 
Conversion ^ la derecha, 

right wheel. 
Conversion ^ la izquierda, 

left wheel. 

Conversion atrds 4 la derecha, 

right backwards wheel. 

Conversion atras i la izquier- 

da, left backivards wheel. 

A la derecha frente, right 

face. 

A la izquierda frente, left 

face. 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Sentencias Cortas y 



Familiares.- 
Phrases. 



'Short and Familiar 



I. Acerca de pedir algo. 

Le suplico ; le ruego, deme 
vm. ; hagame el favor de 
darme 
Traigame 
Se lo agradezco 
Le doy las gracias 
Vaya 4 buscarme tal cosa 
Luego, en este instante 
Querido Senor, hagame vm. 

este gusto 
Concedame, senorajCste favor 

Se lo suplico 

Se lo pido encarecidamente 



T. About asking any thing. 

I beseech you .; pray^ give 

me ; do me the kindness to 

give me 
Bring me 
1 thank you for it 
I give you thanks 
Go and fetch me such a thing 
Presently J this moment 
Dear Sir^ do me this pleaS' 

ure 
Dear Madam^ grant me this 

favour 
I beseech you for it 
I earnestly beg it of you 



304 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



II. Espresiones tiernas. 

Mi vida 

Mi queridoj 6 mi querida 

Mi alma 

Mi dueno. 

Mi queridito, mi queridita 

Mi corazoncito 

Lumbre de mis ojos 

Cielo mioj nifia de mi alma 

Hija de mi corazon 

A^ngel mio 
Estrella mia 
Bien mio 

III. Acerca de agradecer y 
eumplimentar^ y mostrar 
amstad. 

Viva usted muchos aiios 

Le devuelvo las mas vivas 

gracias 
Gustoso lo hare 
De todo mi corazon 
De muy buena gana 

Lo estimo 

Soy de vm. 

Soy sii servidor 

Su muy humilde servidor 

Vm. me favorece miicho 

Se toma vm. demasiado Ira- 
bajo 

No hallo ninguno en servirle 

Es vm. muy atento y muy 
cortes 

Que deseavm.? que me man- 
da vm. ? 

Ordeneme con toda libertad 

Sin cumplimiento 



II. Expressions of kindness. 
My life 

My dear 

My soul 

My love^ my lord or master 

My little darling 

My little heart 

Dear siceet hearty light of my 
eyes 

My most beloved,, my heav- 
en, pupil of my soul 

My dearest child, child of my 
heart 

My angel 

My star 

My blessing 

III. Of thanking and com- 
plimenting, and showing 
kindness. 

I thank you, may you live 
many years 

I return you the most heart- 
felt thanks 

I will do it cheerfully 

With all my heart 

Heartily, with a very good 
ivill 

I am obliged for it 

1 am yours 

1 am your servant 

Your very humble servant 

Yon are very obliging, you 
favour me much 

You take too much trouble 

Ifnd none in serving you 
You are very civil and kind 

What do you wish ? what do 

you command me ? 
Command me with full liber t if 
Without compliment 



FAMILIAH PHRASES. 



S05 



Sin ceremonia 
Le amo de corazon 
E' yo correspondo 4 vm. co- 
mo debo 
Haga cuenta sobre mi 
Mandeme vm. 
Honreme con sus preceptos 

Tiene vm. algo que man- 

darme ? 
No tiene vm. sino hablar 
Disponga de su servidor 
Solo aguardo sus preceptos 
Demasiado honor me hace 
Degemonosde cumplimientos 
Entre amigos honrados, se 

escusan cumplimientos 
Al Sefior Don — le beso las 

manos 

Dele vm. muchas espresiones 

mias 
No faltare 
Pongame vm. 4 los pies de la 

Senora 

Muchas memorias a la Se- 

fiorita 
Pase vm. adelante, le voy a 

seguir 
Despues de vm., Caballero 
Se bien lo que le debo 
Vamos, Sefior, pase vm. 
Lo hare para obedecerle 
Para solo agradarle 
No soy amigo de tantas cere- 

monias 
No soy cumplimentero 
Es lo mejor 
Tiene vm. razon 
26* 



Without ceremony 

I love you sincerely 

And 1 return it as I ought 

Rely or depend upon me 

Command me 

Honour me with your com- 
mands 

Have you any thing to com- 
mand me ? 

You have but to speak 

Dispose of your servant 

I only wait your commands 

You do me too much honour 

Let us forbear compliments 

Between honest friends ^ com- 
pliments are excused 

Present or give my respects 
to Mr. D — . or I kiss the 
hands of Mr. D — . 

Remember my love to him^give 

him many expressions of mine 

1 7v ill not fail 

Pi^esent my respects to my la- 
dy^ or put me at the feet of 
Madam 

Remember me to Miss, or 
7nany remembrances to Miss 

Go before, I am going to fol- 
low you 

After you, Sir 

I know well ivhat I owe you 

Come, Sir, pass on 

I will do it to obey you 

Only to please you 

I am not fond of so many 
ceremonies 

I am not ceremonious 

It is the best 

You are in the right 



306 



FAMILIAR PHRASIiS* 



IV. Acerca de afirmar^ ne^ 
gary consentiry Sfc, 

Es verdad 

Es esto verdad ? 

Demasiado verdad 

Para tratar verdad 

En efecto, es asi 

Quien lo duda? 

No hay duda 

Creo que es asi 

Creo que no 

Digo que si 

Digo que no 

Apuesto que si 

Va que no 

Por mi vida 

A^ fe de caballero 

A^ fe de hombre de bien 

Por mi honor 

Creame vm. 

Se lo puedo decir 

Se lo puedo afirmar 

Apostara algo 

Se burla vm. ? 

Habla vm. de veras ? 

Lo digo muy de veras 

Lo adivino vm. 

Lo acerto vm. 

Bien le creo 

Se le puede creer 

Eso no es imposible 

Pues, en hora buena 

Poco ^ poco 

No es verdad 

Aquello es falso 

Nada de eso hay 

Es incierto 

Es mentira 

Es una falsedad 

Me burlaba, chanceaba 

Lo decla de chanza 

Sea en hora buena 



IV. Of affirming, denying, 
consenting, &c. 

It is true 
Is this true ? 
Too true 
To tell the truth 
Really y it is so 
Who doubts it ? 
There is no doubt 
I believe it is so ^ 
I believe not 
I say it is 
I say it is not 
I lay it is 
I lay it is not 

Upon my life 

As I am a gentleman 

As I am an honest man 

Upon my honour 

Do believe me 

I can tell it to you 

I can affirm it to you 

I could bet something 

Do you jest ? 

Do you speak in earnest ? 

I say it quite in earnest 

You guessed at it 

You hit it 

I truly believe you 

One may believe you 

That is not impossible 

Well^ let it be so 

Softly y fair and softly 

It is not true 

That is false 

There is no such thing 

It is untrue 

It is a lie 

It is a falsehood 

I did jest ; I was joking 

I said it in jest 

Let it be so; well and good 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



3or 



No me opongo a ello 
Estamos de acuerdo 
Dicho y hecho 
No lo quiero 

V. Acerca de consultary 6 
considerar. 

Que se ha de hacer ? 

Que haremos ? 

Que me dice vmd. que haga ? 

Que remedio hay para eso ? 

Que partido hemos de tomar ? 

Hagamos esto 6 eso 

Hagamos una cosa 

Mejor sera que yo.... 

Aguarde vm un poco 

No seria mejor, si ?.... 

Degeme hacer 

Si estuviera en su lugar 

Es lo misrao 

Viene ^ salir ^ lo mismo 



I do not oppose it 
Wt are agreed^ in accord 
Said and done 

I will not have it^ I do not 
want it, I do not wish for it 

V. Of consulting^ or consid- 
ering. 

What is to he done'? 
What shall we do ? 
What do you tell me to do ? 
What remedy is therefor that! 
What course are ive to take ? 
Let us do this or that 
Let us do one thing 
It will be better that I.,., 
Wait a little 

Would it not he better, iff,,.. 
Let me do 

Were I in your place 
It is the same 

It comes to turn out to the 
same 

VI. Del comer y del heber. VI. Of eating and drinking. 

I have a good appetite 
I am hungry 
1 am starving 

It seems to me that it is three 
days I have eaten nothing 
Eat something 
What do you like to eat ? 
1 could eat a little of any- 
thing 
Give me something to eat 
I have eaten enough 
I am satisfied 
Will you eat still more ? 
I have no more appetite 
lam dry 

lam dying with thirst 
1 am very thirsty 
Give me to drink 



Tengo buen apetito 

Tengo hambre 

Me muero de hambre 

Me parece que ha tres dias 

que nada he comido 
Coma vm. algo 
Que gusta vm. comer ? 
Comiera un poco de cualqui- 

era cosa 
Deme vm. algo de comer 
He comido bastante 
Estoy satisfecho 
Quiere vm. comer aun mas ? 
No tengo mas apetito 
Tengo sed 
Me muero de sed 
Tengo mucha sed 
Deme vmd. de beber 



308 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Viva vm. muchos anos 

Gustoso beberia una copita 

de vino 
Beba vm^ pues 
He bebido bastante 
No puedo beber mas 
Mi sed est^ apagada 

VII. Del ir, venir^ moverse^ 

De donde viene vm. ? 

A^ donde va vm. ? 

Vengo de — Voy k — 

Sub a 5 bage 

Entre vm., saiga vm 

Pase vm adelante 

No se mueva, no se menee 

Estese ahi 

Acerquese de mi 

Retirese vm. 

Vayase 

Vaya un poco atr4s 

Venga vm. aca 

Aguarde vmd. un rato 

EsperemOj agu^rdeme 

No vaya tan de prisa 

Va vm. muy a prisa 

Quitese de delante de mi 

No me toque vm. 

Dege eso 

Porque ? 

Asi lo quiero 

Estoy bien aqui 

La puerta est4 cerrada 

Ahora estd abierta 

Abra vm. la puerta 

Abra vm. la ventana. 

Cierre la ventana 

Venga vm, por aqui 

Vaya vmd, por all4 

Pase vmd. por aqui 

Pase por alia 



I thank yov^ may you live 

many years 
I could drink with pleasure a 

glass of wine 
Drink then 
i have drank enough 
I can drink no more 
My thirst is allayed 

VII. Of going, coming, stir- 
ring, &fc. 

Whence do you come ? 

Where do you go ? 

I come from — lam going to— 

Come up, come down 

Come in, go out 

Come forward 

Do not move, do not stir 

Slay there 

Come near to me 

Retire, ivithdraw 

Go away, begone 

Go back a little 

Come hither 

Wait a little 

Wait for me 

Do not go so fast 

You go very fast 

Get away from before me 

Do not touch me 

Leave that 

Why ? 

I wish it so 

I am well here 

Ihe door is shut 

Now it is open 

Open the door 

Open the window 

Shut the window 

Come this way 

Go that way 

Pass this way 

Pass that way 



FAMILIAR PHRASE?. 



309 



Que busca vm. ? 
Que perdio vm. ? 

YIIL Del hahlar^ clecir^ 
obrary ^c, 

Hable vm. alto 

Habla vm. muy bajo 

Con qnien habla vm. ? 

Me habla vm. ? 

Digale algo 

Habla vm. Espafiol ? 

Sabe vm. el castellano ? 

Algo lo entiendo y hablo 

Que dice vm. ? 

Que ha dicho vm. ? 

No digo nada 

No he dicho nada 

Calle vm. 

C a Home 

Ella no quiere callar 

No hace mas que hablar y 

charlar 
He oido decir, que — — 
Me lo ban dicho 
Lo dicen por ahl 
Todos lo dicen 
El Sefior 4, me lo dijo 
Madama no me lo ha dicho 
Se lo dijo a vm. ? 
Se lo dijo ella ? 
Cuando lo oyo vm. decir ? 
Hoy me lo han dicho 
Quien se lo dijo ? 
No lo puedo creer 
Que dice el ? 
Que dice ella ? 
Que le ha dicho ? 
No me dijo nada 
No me ha dicho noticia alguna 
El Senor B. me dijo nuevas 
No se lo diga vm. 
Se lo dire 
No se lo dire 



What do you loohfor? 
What did you lose ? 

Vni. Of speaking, saying , 
acting, &c. 

Speak loud 
You speak very loio 
With whom do you speak f 
Do you speak to me ? 
Tell him something 
Bo you speak Spanish ? 
Do you know the Cast Hi an ? 
I understand and speak it a 
What do you say ? [little. 
What have you said ? 
I say nothing 
I have said nothing 
Hold your tongue, he silent 
lam silent, 1 hold my tongue 
She will not hold her tongue 
She does nothing but prattle 
and tattle 

I have heard, that 

They have told me so 

They say so abroad 

Every one says so 

Mr, A. told it me 

The lady has not told it me 

Did he trll it to you ? 

Did she tell it you ? 

When did you hear it, say ? 

To-day, they have told it to mt 

Who told it to you ? 

I cannot believe it 

What does he say? 

What does she say ? 

What has he said to you? 

He said nothing to me 

He has not told me any news 

Mr, B. told me news 

Do not tell it to them 

I will tell it to him 

I loillnot tell it to her 



319 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



No le diga vm. palabra 
Se lo callare 
Callelo vm. bien 
Ha dicho vm. eso ? 
Noj no lo he dicho 
No lo dijo vm ? 
No lo han dicho? 
Que esta vm. haciendo ? 
Que ha hecho vm. ? 
No hago nada 
No he hecho nada 
Acabo vm. ? 

No acabo vm. ? 

Que esta haciendo el ? 

Que hace ella ? 

Que quiere vm. ? que manda 

vm, ? 
Que es lo que le hace falta } 
Que pide vm. ? 
Respondame 
Porque no me responde vm.? 

IX. Dc/ oir^ escuchar^ 8fc. 

Oiga vm., Don N. ' 

Oigo, senor 

Me oye vm. ? 

No le oigo 

No le puodo oir 

Hable mas alto 

Oiga, venga ac^ 

O^fgole 

Escuchole 

Eslese quieto 

No ha^a ruido 

Que ruido es este ? 

No nos podemos oir hablar 

Que zarabra arma vm. alia I 

Me quiebra la cabeza 

Me aturde vm. 

Es vm. Bduy molesto 



Say not a toord to Jiim 

I will keep it from him 

Keep it well to yourself 

Have you said that ? 

Noy I have not said it 

Did you not say so ? 

Have they not said so ? 

What are you doing? 

Wkat have you done ? 

I do nothing 

I have done nothing 

Hare you done ? did you fin- 
ish ? 

Have you not done? 

What is he doing ? 

What does she do ? 

What do you wish^ what do 
you command? 

What is it that you want ? 

What do you ask ? 

Answer me 

Why donHyou answer me ? 

IX. Of hearing, listening, &c. 

Hearken, Mr. N. 

I hear, Sir 

Do you hear me ? 

I do not hear you 

I cannot hear you 

Speak louder 

Hark ycy come hither 

I hear you 

I listen to you 

Be quiet, be still 

Do not make a noise 

What noise is this? 

We cannot hear one another 

speak 
What a thundering noise yoxi 

make there I 
You break my head 
You stun me 
You are very troublesome 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



SU 



X. Del entender y compren- 
der, 

Le entiende vm. bien ? 

Ha entendido vra. lo que ha 

dicho ? 
Entiende vm. lo que dice ? 

Me entiende vm. 

Le entiendo bien 

No le entiendo 

Entiende vm. el Espanol? 

No lo entiendo 

Lo entiendo un poco 

Lo entiende el Senor ? 

No lo entiende 

Me ha entendido vm. ? 

No le he entendido 

Ahora le entiendo 

Cuando no habla vm. tan de 

prisa 
El no pronuncia bien 
Parece tartaraudo 
Ne se le entiende lo que dice 



XI. Acerca de preguntar, 

Como dice vm. ? 

Que es esto ? que hay ? 

Que se dice ? 

Que quiere decir eso ? 

Que quieren ellos decir ? 

De que sirve aquello ? 4 que 

bueno ? 
Que le parece ? que tal ? 

A^ que viene aquello ? 
Digame vra., se puede saber? 
Se le puede preguntar ? 
Que me pregunta vm. ? 
Como, Senor ? 
Que se ha de hacer ? 



X. Of understanding and 

comprehending. 

Do you understand Mm well f 
Have you understood what 

he has said? 
Do you understand what he 

says ? 
Do you understand me ? 
I understand you well 
I do not understand you 
Do you understand Spanish? 
1 do not understand it 
I understand it a little 
Does the gentleman under^ 

stand it ? 
He does not understand it 
Have you understood me? 
1 have not understood you 
Now I understand you 
When you do not speak sofa%t 

He does not pronounce well 
He seems a stammerer 
One does not understand 
what he says 

XI. About asking a question. 

How do you say ? 
Whafs this ? what is there ? 
What do people say ? 
What means that? 
What do they mean ? 
What is the use of thatf 

whafs that good for ? 
TThat do you think of it f 

how do you like ^t "^ 
To what purpose hi > J ? 
Tell mCy may one knotv ? 
May one ask you f 
What do you ask of me? 
How^ Sir ? 
What is to be done ? 



312 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Que desea vm. ? 
Que gusta vm. ? 
Lo que quisiere 
Suplicole me responda 
Porque no me responde? 

XII. Acerca de saber, 

Sabe vm eso ? 

No lo se 

No se nada de ello 

Ella bien lo sabia 

Acaso no lo sabia el ? 

Supuesto que lo supiese 

No sabra nada de ello 

Que ! no ha sabido nada de 

ello? 
No supo jamas de esto 
Antes de vm. lo sabia yo 
Es asi 6 no ? 
No que lo sepa yo 

XIII. Del conocer, olvidar^ 
y acordarse. 



Le conoce vm. ? 

La conoce vm. ? 

Les conoce vm. ? 

Las conozco 

No los conozco 

Nos conocemos 

No nos conocemos 

No le conoce vm. a el? 

Creo que le he conocido 

La he conocido 

Nos hern^ conocido 

Le cono , o de vista 

La con^2,co de nombre 

El me canocia muy bien 

Me conoce vm. ? 

He olvidado su nombre 

Me ha olvidado vm. ? 



What do you wish 9 
What do you choose ? 
What you please 
Pray, do answer me 
Why donH you answer me ? 

XII. Of knowing or having 
a knowledge of things. 

Do you know that ? 

I do not know it 

I know nothing of it 

She knew it well 

Did he not perchance know 

Suppose he knew it [it ? 

He shall know nothing of it 

What ! has he known nothing 
of it? 

He never knew of this 

1 knew it before you 

Is it so or not ? 

Not that I know of 

Xni. Of knowing or being 
acquainted with pers^.ns, 
forgetting and remember- 
ing. 

Do you know him ? 

Do you know her ? 

Do you know them ? 

I know them 

I do not know them 

We are acquainted 

We do not know one another 

Do you not know him ? 

I believe I haije known him 

I have known her 

We have known one another 

I know him by sight 

I know her by name 

He knew me very well 

Do you know me ? 

I have forgotten your name 

Have youforgotten me ? 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



313 



Le conoce ^ vm. ella ? 
Le conoce ^ vm. el Seiior ? 
Parece que no me conoce 
Bien me conoce el Senor ? 
Ya no me conoce 
Me olvido del todo 
Ya no me conoce ella 
Tengo el honor de ser cono- 

cido de el 
Se acuerda vm. de eso ? 
No se me acuerda, no me acu- 

erdo de ello 
Muy bien lo tengo presente 
H^gaselo acordar 

XIV. jDe la edad^ de la vida^ 
de la muerte^ 8fc. 

Que edad tiene vm. ? 
Que edad tiene su hermano ? 
Tengo veinte y cinco afios 
Tiene veinte y dos anos 
Tiene vm. mas aiios que yo 
Empieza 4 envejecer 
Que edad tendra vm. ? 
Estoy bueno, que es lo esen- 

cial 
Esta vm. casado ? 
Cuantas veces ha estado vm. 

casado ? 
Cuantas mugeres ha tenido 

vm, ? 
Tiene vm. aun padre y madre 

vivos ? 
Mi padre murio 
Mi madre ha muerto 
Dos anos ha que perdi £ mi 

padre 
Mi madre se ha vuelto & casar 
Cuantos hijos tiene vm.? 
Cuatro tengo 

Hijos 6 hijas, varones 6 hem- 
bras } 

27 



Does she know you ? 

Does the gentleman Icnowyou't 

It seems he does not know me 

The gentleman knows me well 

He knows me no more 

He quite forgot me 

She knows me no more 

I have the honour to be known 

to him 
Do you remember that ? 
I do not remember ity I do 

not recollect it 
I do remember it very well 
Remind him of it, 

XIV. Of age, life, death; 
&c. 

How old are you ? 

How old is your brother 9 

I am five and twenty 

He is twenty-two years old 

You are older than I 

He begins to grow old 

How old may you be ? 

I am welly that is the chief 

thing 
Are you married? 
How many times have you 

been married? 
How many wives have you 

had ? 
Have you a father and moth- 
er still alive ? 
My father is dead 
My mother is dead 
I lost my father two years 

ago 
My mother has married again 
How many children have you? 
I have four 

Sons or daughters^ males or 
females? 



314 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Tengo im hijo y tres hijas 

Cuantos hermanos tiene vm.? 
No tengo ninguno vivo 
Todos murieron 
Todos hemos de morir 
Cada hora es un paso h^cia 
el tumulo 

XV. De una aya y su Se- 
norita. 

Esta vm. aun en la cama? 

Duerme vm. ? 

Despierte ; que pesada es vm. 

Es vm. muy dormilona 

No est4 aun despierta ? 

Levdntese ligero 

Acaso es ya hora de levan- 

tarse ? 
Sin duda lo es 
Ahora dardn las nueve 

Est4 vm. levantada ? 
Esta su hermana levantada ? 
Vamos, despache vm. 
Porque no se da mas prisa ? 

Cuidado 

Se caerd vm. 

Por poco se cae 

Acerquese de la lumbre 

Abriguese bien 

Se resfriara vm. 

Ya estoy acatarrada 

Vistase luego 

Peinese 

Pongase las medias 

C^lcese los zapatos 

Tome esta camisa blanca 

Lavese las manos, la boca, y 

la cara 
Limpiese los dientes 
Sus peines estdn sucios 



I have one son and three 

daughters 
How 7nany brothers have you? 
I have none living 
They are all dead 
We must all die 
Every hour is a step towards 

the grave, 

XV. Of a Governess and her 
young ^lady. 

Are you in bed still ? 

Do you sleep ? 

Awake ; how heavy you are 

You are very sleepy 

Are you not awake yet ? 

Rise quickly 

Is it perchance already time 

to rise ? 
It is so undoubtedly 
Nine o^clock ivill presently 

strike 
Are you up ? 
Is your sister up ? 
Comcy make haste 
Why do you not make more 

haste ? 
Take care 
You will fall 
You came near falling 
Come near the fire 
Clothe yourself warm 
You will catch cold 
I have a cold already 
Dress yourself directly 
Comb your hair 
Put on your stockings 
Put on your shoes 
Take this clean chemise 
Wash your hands ^y our mouthy 

your face 
Clean your teeth 
Your combs are dirty 



FAMlLfAR PHRASES. 



315 



Acordonenie la cotilla 


Lace my stays 


Ayiideme vm 


Help me 


Porque no me asiste ? 


Why donH you help me ? 


Acabo vm. ya ? 


Have you already done ? 


Aim no 


Not yet 


Que pesada es vm. 


How tedious you are 


Diga siis oraciones 


Say your prayers 


Hable alto 


Speak loud 


Empiece 


Begin 


Vamos adelante 


Let us go on 


Acabe vmd. 


Make an end 


Adonde esta su libro de ora- 


Where is your prayer-book ? 


ciones ? 




Traiga su Biblia 


Bring your Bible 


Busquela presto 


Look for it quick 


Lea vm. un capitulo 


Read a chapter 


Adonde acabo vm. ayer ? 


Where did you leave of yes- 



Aqui me pare 

No tiene vm. bien su libro 

Lea poco a poco 

Deletree esa voz 

Vm. lee muy de prisa 

No lee vm. bien 

Lee muy despacio 

No^aprende vm. nada 

No observa nada 

No estudia vm. 

No aprovecha nada 

Es vm. muy perezosa 

Que murmura vm. all4 

Vuelva 4 empezar 

No sabe vm. su lecion 

Esta es su lecion 

Deme otra lecion 

Porque me habla vm. Ingles? 

Hable vm siempre Espanol 

Quiere vm. almorzar ? 

Que gusta vm. para su almu- 

erzo ? 
Comerd vm. pan y manteca } 



terday ? 
I stopt here 
You do not hold your book 

well 
Read slowly 
Spell that word 
You read very fast 
You do not read well 
You read very slow 
You learn nothing 
You observe nothing 
You do not study 
You do not improve any 
You are very idle 
What do you mutter there ? 
Begin again 

You do not know your lesson 
This is your lesson 
Give me another lesson 
Why do you speak English 

to me ? 
Speak always Spanish 
Will you breakfast ? 
What will you have for your 

breakfast ? 
Will you eat bread andbutter? 



316 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Diga vm. lo que quiere mas 
Acabe de almorzar 
Almorzo ym. ya? 

Tome su labor 
Muestreme su labor 
Eso no esta bueno 
Rehaga todo aquello 
Tiene una aguja buena ? 
Tiene vm. hilo ? 
Dege su labor 
Vaya a jugar un poco 
Vuelva & trabajar cuando ha- 

ya jugado 
Vaya a pasearse en el jardin 
No se caliente 
Vuelva presto 
Es bora de comer 
Sientese d la mesa 
Vamos, tome vmd. una silla 
Pongase la servilleta 
Adonde estan su cuchillo, su 

tenedor y su cuchara? 
Rece antes de empezar 
Coma vm sopa 
Gusta vm. carnero ? 
Quiere gordo 6 magro ? 
Le gusta la gordura ? 
Le gusta a vm. salsa ? 
Digame su gusto 
Coma, no come vm. 
fie aqui una ala de polio 
Coma vm. pan con su carne 
Ha bebido vm ? 
Pida de beber 
Es esta carne sabrosa ? 
Quieie vm. comer mas ? 
Ha comido vm. bastante ? 
Le gusta el queso ? 
De vm. las gracias 
Vaya 4 bailar 
Ha bailado vmd. ? 
Kgercitese bien 



Sai/ what you like best 

Finish your breakfast 

Have you breakfasted al- 
ready ? 

Take your woi^k 

Shoiv me your work 

That is not right 

Do all that over again 

Have you a good needle ? 

Have you any thread ? 

Leave your ivork 

Go and play a little 

Come again to icork ivhen 
you have played 

Go and walk in the garden 

Do not overheat yourself 

Come again quickly 

It is dinner-time 

Sit down to the table 

Come, take a chair 

Put on your napkin 

Where are your knife^ your 

fork and your spoon ? 
Say grace before you begin 
Eat some soup 

Will you have some mutton ? 

Will you have fat or lean^ 

Do you like fat ? 

Do you like sauce ? 

Tell me your taste 

Eaty you do not eat 

Here is the wing of a chicken 

Eat bread with your meat 

Have you drank ? 

Ask for drink 

Is this meat agreeable ? 

Will you eat more ? 
Have you eat enough ? 
Do you like cheese? 
Give thanks 
Go to dance 
Have you danced ? 
Exercise yourself well 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



317 



Vaya, dance vm. un minuete 
No danza vm. bien 
Tengase derecha 
Levante la cabeza 
Haga la cortesia 
Mireme vmd. 
Que esta vm. mirando ? 
Se fue su maestro ? 
Ha acabado vm. ya ? 
Vaya ahora k cantar 
Lleve su libro consigo 
Vuelva a trabajar cuando ha- 

ya acabado 
Ha cantado vm ? 
Tiene lecion nueva ? 
Cante vm. una arieta 
Cante vm. una cancion 
Canta vm. bonitamente 
Toque vm. el clave 6 piano 

Ahora la guitarra 

Su prima no vale nada 

Esta su guitarra templada ? 
Sabe vm. templarla ? 
Aun esta destemplada 
No tiene vm. bien su guitarra 

Vaya vm. a aprender el Es- 

panol 
Donde est4 su gramatica ? 
Busque su libro 
Que lecion tiene vm ? 
Que dialogo ha leido ? 
Repita su lecion 
No la sabe vm. 
Nada ha aprendido 
Lea delante de mi 
No pronuncia vm. bien 
Aprendio vm. su lecion de 

memoria ? 
No tiene vmd. memoria 
27* 



Come^ dance a minuet 

You do not dance well 

Stand upright 

Hold up your head 

Make a curtesy 

Look at me 

What are you looking at ? 

Is your master gone ? 

Have you done already ? 

Go now and sing 

Carry your book with you 

Come again to work lohen 

you have done 
Have you sung? 
Have you a new lesson ? 
Sing an air 
Sing a song 
You sing prettily 
Play on the harpsichord or 

piano 
Now the guitar 
Your chantrel is good for 

nothing 
Is your guitar in tune ? 
Do you know how to tune it f 
It is still out of tune 
You do not hold your guitar 

well 
Go and learn Spanish 

Where is your grammar ? 

Look for your book 

What lesson have you ? 

What dialogue have you read? 

Repeat your lesson 

You do not know it 

You have learned nothing 

Read before me 

You do not pronounce well 

Have you learnt your lesson 

by heart ? 
You have no memory 



318 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



No torn a vm. trabajo 

Que quiere para merendar ? 

— para cenar ? 
Venga a cenar 
No se engolosine en la fruta 
Estara vm. mala 
La fruta no le sienta bien 
Es tiempo de acostarse 
Desnudese lue^ro 
Rece 
Levantese manana temprano 

XVI. Del pas6o. 

Hace muy bello tiempo 
Este dia claro y sereno convi- 

da al paseo 
No parece nube alguna 

Vamos d pasear 

Vamos d tomar el aire 

Quiere vm. dar una vuelta ? 

Gusta vm. venir conmigo ? 

Respondame, digame si, 6 no 

Vamos pues, me gusta 

Le acompaiiare 

Adonde iremos ? 

Vamos al Parque 

Vamos 4 los prados 

Iremos en coche ? 

Como le gustare 

Vamonos a pie 

Tiene vm. razon 

Eso es saludable 

Se gana apetito andando 

A^nimo, vamos, andemos 

Por donde iremos ? 

Por donde quisiere 

Por aqui 6 por alii 

Vamos por aqui 

A^ mano derecha, 4 la derecha 

A" mano izquierda, 4 la izqui- 
erda. 



You take no pains 

What ivillyou have for tun" 

cheon ? — for sapper ? 
Come to supper 
Do not eat too much fruit 
You will be sick 
Fruit does not suit you 
It is time to go to bed 
Undress yourself presently 
Say your prayer^ 
Rise early to-morrow. 

XVL Of walking. 

It is very fine weather 

This clear and serene day in- 
vites to walk 

There does not appear any 
cloud 

Let us go and walk 

Let us go and take the air 

Will you take a turn ? 

Do you wish to come with me ? 

Answer mc^ tell me yes^ or no 

Let us go then, I wish it 

I ivill accompany you 

Where shall lue go? 

Let us go to the Park 

Let us go to the meadoios 

Shall we go in a coach ? 

As you please 

Let US go on foot 

You are in the right 

That is healthy 

Walking gets one an appetite 

Cheer up, come, let us walk 

Which umy shall toe go ? 

Which way you please 

This umy or that 

Let us go this way 

On the right hand, to the 
right 

On the left handy to the left 



FAMILIAR PHRASE**. 



319 



Quiere vm. ir por agua? 
Adonde esta el barco ? 
Adonde estan los barqueros? 
Entre vm. en el barco 
Solo atravesaremos el rio 
El agua est4 muy mansa y 

apacible 
Empieza d moverse 
Adonde quiere vm. desem- 

barcar, abordar ? 
Estamos cerca de la orilla 
Para tu el barco 
Pasemos la vista sobre estos 

campos y prados 
Que verdura tan hermosa 
Estos prados est^n esmalta- 

dos con variedad de fiores 
Que prospecto tan hermoso ! 
Este lugar es muy ameno 
Los drboles echan flores 
Los resales empiezan ^ echar 

capullos 
Aun no estan abierlas estas 

rosas 
Crece el trigo 
Prometen mucho los panes 

Las espigas son muy largas 
Ya el trigo esta maduro 
Esta es una bella Uanura 
Estas sombras son muy apa- 

cibles 
Que todo tan hermoso 
Me parece que estoy en un 

paralso terrenal 
No oye vm. la dulce melodia 

de las aves ? 
El canto suave del ruisenor 

Aun no estamos en Mayo 
Anda vm. demasiado presto 
No le puedo seguir 
No puedo ir tan de prisa 



Will you go hy water ? 
IVhere is the boat ? 
Where are the boatmen ? 
Step into the boat 
We ivilljust cross the river 
The waJer is very smooth and 

calm 
It begins to move 
Where will you laiid^ hoard? 

We are near the shore 

Stop the boat 

Let us cast our sight upon 

these fields and meadows 
What a fine green 
These meadows are enamelled 

with a variety offiowei^s 
What a beautiful prospect ! 
This place is very pleasant 
The trees are blooming 
The rose-bushes begin to bud^ 

or throto out buds 
These roses are not blown yet 

The corn grows 

The cornfields are very prom- 
ising 

The ears are very long 

The wheat is already ripe 

This is a fine plain 

These shades are very pleas- 
ant 

Wliat a fine tout ensemble 

Methinks I am in an earthly 
paradise 

Do you not hear the sweet 
melody of birds? 

The sweet warbling of the 
nightingale ? 

We are not yet in May 

You walk too quick 

I cannot folloio you 

I cannot go so fast 



S20 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



No me es posible alcanzarle 

Es vra» un pobre caminante 
Le suplico, ande un poco mas 

despacio 
Descansemos un rato 
No vale la pena 
Esta vm. cansado ? 
Estoy molido 
Acostemonos en la yerba 
Metemo que este humeda 
Como puede ser ? no ha Uo- 

vido 
Basta la humedad de la noche 

Ni aun quiero sentarme en el 

suelo 
Pasemos pues a esa selva 

Entremos en ese bosque 
Que sitio tan gustoso ! 
Que idoneo para estudiar ! 
He aqui tres paseos 
Que bien plantados est^n es- 

tos arboles ! 
Se inclinan unos h^cia otros 
Estos Arboles hacen bella 

sombra 
Que espesa esta esa arboleda! 
Los rayos del sol no la pueden 

penetrar 
He aqui hermosos huertos 
Hay mucha fruta 
Veo manzanas, peras, avella- 

nas, guindas 
Antes quisiera nueces 6 cas- 

tanas 
Estos albaricoques y persigos 

me hacen venir el agua a 

la boca 
Bien me comiera algunas de 

estas ciruelas 



It is not possible for me tt^ 

keep up with you 
You are a sorry zvalker 
Pray^ go a little slower 

Let us rest a little 

It is not worth the while 

Are you tired ? 

I am very much tired 

Let us lie down upon the grass 

1 am afraid it is damp 

How can it be ? it has not 

rained 
The dampness of the night is 

sufficient 
Nor ivill 1 even sit upon the 

ground 
Let us walk then into that 

wood 
Let us go into that grove 
What a pleasant place ! 
How fit for study ! 
Here are three walks 
How well these trees are 

planted ! 
They bend towards each other 
These trees make a fine shade 

How thick that grove is ! 
The sun-beams cannot pierce 

through it 
Here are fine orchards 
There is a great deal of fruit 
I bee apples^ pearsy filberts^ 

cherries 
I had rather have walnuts or 

chesnuts 
These apricots and peaches 

make my mouth water 

I could really eat some of 
these plums 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



321 



Cuanta cuesta la libra de 

guindas ? 
Ocho cuartos 
Compremos algunas 
Me temo que nos mojemos 
Reparo que el tiempo empie- 

za a anublarse 
Volvaraonos 
Empieza a ser tarde 
Se pone el sol 
-No corra vm. 
Aguardeme un poco 
VamoSj vamos. si estu\iere 

cansadoj descansara cenan- 

do 
Y aua mejor en la cama 

XVII . Del tiempo. 

Que tiempo hace ? 

Hace buen tiempo ? 

Hace mal tiempo ? 

Hace calor ? 

Hace frio ? 

Luce el sol r 

Hace bello tiempo 

Hace mal tiempo 

£1 tiempo esta seco. hume- 
do, lluvioso, tempestuoso, 
ventoso 

Es tiempo inconstante y vari- 
able 

Hace gran calor. mucho frio 

El tiempo esta claroysereno 

Luce el sol 

Hace un tiempo oscmo 

El cielo esta cargado de cu- 
be? 

Las nubes son muy espesas 

Llueve ? 

Xo; creo que no 

Empieza a Hover 

Aun no llueve 

Presto llovera a cantaros 



If^kat costs a pound of cher- 
ries '? 

Five cents 

Let us bui/ some 

I am afraid ice shall be wet 

I observe the weather begins 
to grow cloudy 

Let us go back again 

It begins to be late 

The sun is settinsr 

Do not run 

Stay for me a little 

Come^ come, if you be weary, 
you will rest yourself at 
supper 

dnd yet better in bed. 

XVn. Of the weather. 

Hoic is the weather ? 
Is it f lie weather? 
Is it bad weather ? 
Is it hot ? 
Is it cold? 
Does the sun shine? 
It isfne weather 
It is b'i<i weather 
It is dry J wet^ rainy, stormy^ 
windy wecuker 

It is unsettled and changeable 

weather 
It is very hot, very cold 
It is clear and serene weather 
The sun shines 
It is dark weather 
It is cloudy, the sky is over^ 

cast 
The clouds are very thick 
Does it rain ? 
IVo, I believe not 
It hegifis to rain 
It does not rain yet 
It will soon rain in torrents 



322 



FAMILIAR PHRASES, 



Ya llueve 

Solo es un aguacero 

Pasara luego 

Me temo que tendremos agua 

No tema vm.j no tenga miedo 

Es una nube que pas a 

Todo el dia llovera 

Mucho lo dudo 

Presto acabara de Hover 

Pong^monos al abrigo 

No hay nada que temer 
Solo es agua 

Tiene vm. miedo del agua? 
Solo temo echar a perder mi 

vestido 
Ya tenemos agua 
No debemos salir con este 

tiempo 
Graniza 6 apedrea 
Graniza muy recio 
A bora nieva 
Que ! nieva ? 

Mire vm. esos grandes copos 
Iliela tambien 
Noj que desbiela 
Creo que hiela muy fuerte 
Es bielo muy duro 
El liielo se derrite 
La nieve se bace agua 
Cae aguanieve 
Corre una borrasca grande 
Atruena 
ReLimpaguea 
Solo alumbran los reldmpa- 

gos 
Corre mucho viento 
Hace mucho viento 
El viento viene muy frio 
Se mud 6 el viento 
El viento cae 
Paso la tormenta 
EI tiempo se aclara 



It rains already 

It is but a shower 

It ivill be over presently 

lam afraid we shall have rain 

Do not fear ^ be not afraid 

It is a flying cloud 

It loill rain all day 

I question it mucJi 

It will soon cease to rain 

Let lis put ourselves under 

shelter 
There is nothing to fear 
It is but water 
Are you afraid of tvater ? 
I fear only to spoil my 

clothes 
It rains already 
We must not go out in such 

7 ve at her 
It hails 

It hails very hard 
Noio it snows 
What ! does it snow ? 
Look at those great flakes 
It freezes also 
Noy it thaws 

I think it freezes very hard 
It is a hard frost 
The ice is melting 
The snow melts away 
There is a sleet falling 
There is a great storm 
It thunders 
It lightens 
The flashes of lightning alone 

light 
The wind blojos hard 
The wind blows high 
The wind blows very cold 
The loind is changed 
The windfalls 
The storm is over 
The weather clears up 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



323 



El cielo empieza ^ aclararse 
Se abre el tiempo, empieza 

a serenarse 
Dividense las luibes ; desapa- 

recen y desvaneceiise poco 

a poco 
Ya vemos lucir el sol 
Veo elarco iris, el arco celeste 
Es serial de buen tiempo 
Hace una neblina miiy espesa 
No nos podemos ver 
He alii una niebla que se levanta 
Pero el sol empieza a disiparla 

XVIII. De la hora. 

Que hora es ? 
Yea vm. que hora es ? 
Digame que hora es ? 
No sabe vm. que hora es ? 

Es temprano 

No es tarde 

Nos volvereraos a casa ? 

Hay bastante tiempo 

Solo es medio dia 

Es cerca de la una 

Ahora dio la una 

Es la una y cuarto 

Es la una y media 

Es la una y tres cuartos 

Es cerca de las dos, 6 daran 

las dos 
No he oido el reloj 
Han dado las seis 
Son las siete al sol 
Acaban de dar las siete 
Las ocho han dado 
Cerca de las diez 
Es cerca de las doce de la 

noche, 6 media noche 
Como lo sabe vm.r 



The sky begins to clear up 

The weather settles, it begins 
to be fair again 

The clouds divide, or break 
asunder; they disappear 
by degrees and vanish 

We now see the sun shine 

I see the rainbow 

It is a sign of fair weather 

There is a very thick mist 

We cannot see one another 

There is a fog rising 

But the sun begins to dis- 
perse it, 

XVIII. Of the time of day. 

What o^ clock is it ? 
See what o'^ clock it is ? 
Tell me lohat o^clock it is ? 
DonH you know what d^ clock 

it is ? 
It is early 
It is not late 
Shall we return home ? 
There is time enough 
It is but tivelve o^clock, (at 

noon) 
It is almost one 
It struck one now 
It is a quarter past one 
It is half an hour past one 
It is three quarters past one 
It is near two, or it is upon 

the stroke of two 
I have not heard the clock 
It has struck six 
It is seven by the sun 
It struck seven just now 
It has struck eight 
About ten o^clock 
It is near twelve o^cloclc^ or 

midnight 
HoiD do you know it ? 



324 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Da el reloj 

Lo oye vm. dar ? 

No creo que sea tan tarda 

Mire su reloj 

Adelanta mucho 

Atrasa 

No anda, est^ parado 

De le vm. cuerda 

Vea vm. que hora es al reloj 

de sol 
Los cuadrantes no concuerdan 
La mano esta quebrada 
Adonde esta su reloj de repe- 

ticion ? 
No la halloj esta estraviado 

XIX. De las estaciones del 
ano. 

Que estacion le gusta mas ? 
La primavera es la mas agra- 

dable de todas 
Toda la naturaleza se anima 
El tiempo esta muy templado 

Ni hace demasiado calor, ni 

demasiado frio 
A^rden entonces todos los ani- 

males en amor 
No hay primavera este ano 
Los tiempos estan revueltos 
Es un invierno moderado 
Nada adelanta 

La estacion esta muy atrasada 
Tenemos un estio muy calo- 

roso 
Oh, que calor ! 
Haceun calor escesivo 
Que tiempo tan pesado ! 
No puedo con tanto calor 
Estoy sudandoj hecho agua 

Me muero de calor 
Jamas tuve tanto calor 



The clock strikes 

Do you hear it strike ? 

I do not think it is so late 

Look at your watch 

It goes too fast 

It goes too slow 

It does not go, it is stopped 

Wind it up 

See what o^ clock it is by the 

sun-dial 
The sun-dials do not agree 
The hand is broken 
Where is your repeater ? or 

repeating watch ? 
1 do not find it, it is mislaid, 

XIX. Of the seasons of the 
year. 

What season do you like best? 
Spring is the most pleasant 

of all 
All nature is animated 
The weather is very mild, 

temperate 
It is neither too hot, nor too 

cold 
All creatures then make love, 

or burn with love 
TJiere is no spring this year 
The times are disordered 
It is a inoderate winter 
Nothing comes forward 
The season is very backward 
We have a very hot summer 

How hot it is ! 

It is excessively hot 

What heavy weather ! 

I cannot endure so much heat 

I am perspiring, all over in a 

perspiration 
I am dying with heat 
I never was so Iwt 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



325 



Es muy bello tiempo para los 

frutos de la tierra 
Tendremos mucho heno 

La cosecha seri muy abun- 

dante 
Hay abundancia de fruta 
Todos los irboles han produ- 

cido mucho 
Nos hace falta un poco de 

agua 
La' cosecha est^ cerca 
Empiezan a segar los trigos 
Se han segado los prados 
Es menester recoger los panes 
Estamos en la canicula 
Paso ya el verano 
El otono, la calda de las ho- 

jas, le ha sucedido 
La vendimia se acerca 
Hermosa vendimia tenemos 
Vendimiaremos en tres 6 

cuatro dias 
Los vinos seran buenos este 

ano 
Las vifias han dado bien 
El vino ser4 barato 
Es preciso recoger los frutos 

atrasados 
Las manzanas y peras de in- 

vierno 
Los dias se han acortado mu- 
cho 
Las mananas son frias 
El invierno viene acercandose 

Muy presto es noche 
Las tardes son largas 
Empieza la lumbre & recrear 

No me gusta el invierno 
Los dias son muy breves 

28 



It is veryjine weather for the 
fruits of the earth 

We shall have a great deal 
of hay 

The harvest will he very plen- 
tiful 

There is abundance of fruit 

All the trees have produced 
much 

We want a little rain 

Harvest time draws near 
They begin to reap the wheat 
The meadows have been mowed 
We must get in the corn 
We are iri dog-days 
The summer is already gone 
Autumn^ the fall of the leaves^ 

has taken its place 
Vintage draios near 
We have a very fine vintage 
We shall gather grapes in 

three or four days 
Wines will be good this year 

The vines have borne well 
Wine will be cheap 
We must gather the late pro- 
duce 
Winter apples and pears 

The days have grown very 

short 
Tlie mornings are cold 
Winter comes on drawing 

near 
It is very soon night 
The evenings are long 
Fire begins to be pleasant^ 

or agreeable 
Winter does not please me 
The days are very short 



S26 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Ya no es de dia i las einco 
No se ve 4 las cinco 
Empieza a anochecer 4 las 

cuatro 
Amanece 4 las siete 
No se sabe en que pasar el 

tiempo 
Este invierno es muy frio, 

muy aspero 
Se acuerda vm. del grande 

invierno ? 
Jamas vi invierno tan frio 
Erapiezan 4 crecer los dias 
Los dias son un poco mas 

largos 
Casi no hemos tenido invi- 
erno 
La primavera ya viene 4 re- 

gocijar la naturaleza 

XX. De la ida a la escuela* 

De donde viene vm. ? 

De mi casa. De casa 

Adonde va vm. tan de prisa? 

Voy 4 la escuela 

Venga conmigo 

Aguarde un poco 

V^monos, le suplico 

Porque juega vm. andando ? 

No se entretenga 

Llegaremos bastante presto 

Que hora es ? 

Cerca de las siete 

Aun no ha dado el reloj 

Despachemos 

Quien viene ahi ? 

Es uno de nuestros condisci- 

pulos 
Iremos los tres juntos 
Vamonos a prisa 

XXI. En la escuela, 
Sientese en su lugar 
Cuelgue su sombrero 



It is no longer light at Jive 

One does not see at Jive 

It begins to groiv dark at 

four 
The day breaks at seven 
One knows not in what to 

spend one^s time 
This is a very cold^ very 

sharp winter 
Do you remember the hard 

winter ? 
I never saw so cold a winter 
The days begin to lengthen 
The days are a little longer 

We almost have had no win- 
ter 

The spring comes already to 
revive or rejoice nature 

XX. Of going to school. 
From where do you come ? 
From home. From my house 
Where are you going so fast? 
I am going to school 
Come with me 
Stay a little 
Let us gOy I pray you 
Why do you play as you go ? 
Do not amuse yourself 
We shall arrive soon enough 
What o^ clock is it ? 
Almost seven 
The clock has not struck yet 
Let us make haste 
Who comes there ? 
It is one of our schoolfellows 

We will go all three together 
Let us go away fast 

XXI. In the school. 
Sit down in ymtr place 
Hang up your hat 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



327 



Adonde esta su libro ? 
Lea su lecion 
Estudie su lecion 
Aprenda su lecion de memoria 
Nada hace sino jugar 
Le anotare 
Se lo dire al maestro 
A cab 6 vm. ? 
Auu no he acabado 
Que esta escribiendo ? 
Escribo mi egercicio 
Todo lo he escrito 
No me mueva 
Haga me un poco de lugar 
Vm. tiene bastante lugar 
Vaya atras un poco 
Un poco mas arriba 
Algo mas abajo 
Sirvase de darme un libro 
Adonde empezamos ? 
Hasta donde decimos ? 
Hasta aqui 
Cual es su tarea ? 
De quien es este libro? 
Sabe vm. su lecion de memo- 
ria? 
Aun no 

Apunteme vm. 
Ha de leerla tres veces 
Quien lo ha dicho ? 
El Senor A. lo mando 
Tiene vm. pluma y tinta ? 
Escriba vm. su egercicio 
Lo escribiovm. mal 
Lea vm. su lecion 
Diga su lecion 
Le azotardn 
Merece vm. azotes 
Porque llega vm. tan tarde ? 
Tuve que hacer 
Que negocio le detuvo ? 
A^ que hora se levanto ? 
A^ las ocho 



Where is your book ? 

Read your lesson 

Study your lesson 

Get your lesson by heart 

You do nothing but play 

I will set you up 

I will tell it to the master 

Have you done ? 

I have not Jinished yet 

What are you writing ? 

I am writing my exercise 

I have written it all 

Do not jog me 

Make a little room for me 

You have room enough 

Go a little farther 

•3 little higher 

A little lower 

Be pleased to give me a book 

Where do we begin ? 

How far do we say ? 

Thus far ^ so far 

Which is your task ? 

Whose book is this ? 

Do you know your lesson by 

heart ? 
Not yet 
Do prompt me 

You must read it three times 
Who has said so ? 
Mr. A, ordered it 
Have you pen and ink? 
Write your exercise 
You wrote it ill 
Read your lesson 
Say your lesson 
You will be flogged 
You deserve the whip 
Why do you arrive so late? 
I had to do 

What business detained you ? 
At what hour did you rise ? 
At eight o\lock 



328 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Porque se levanto tan tarde ? 

Es vm. un flojon 

Quedese en su sitio 

Quitese de mi lugar 

Porque me rempuja asi? 

Quien le toca ? 

No se enoge vm. 

Me quejare al maestro 

Digaselo, si quisiere 

Poco me importa 

Sencr, no me quiere dejar 

quieto 
Me agarro el libro de las ma- 

nos 
Hace burla de mi 
Me tiro de los cabellos 
Me da patadas 
Me empuja fuera de mi lugar 
No hay tal 
Que bulla es esta? 
Tomen este muchacho y den- 

le una mano de azotes 
Senor, perdoneme vm. 
Suplicole, Senor, perdoneme 

esta sola vez 
Portese pues mejor en ade- 

lante 



Why did you rise so late ? 

You are a sluggard 

Remain in your place 

Get away from my place 

Why do you push me so ? 

Who touches you ? 

Do not be angry 

I will complain to the master 

Tell it to him J if you will 

I care little ^ 

Sir, he wotiH let me alone 

He snatched the booh from 

my hands 
He mocks me 
He pulled me by the hair 
He kicks me 

He thrusts me out of my place 
There is no such thing 
What noise is this ? 
Take this boy and give him a 

good whipping 
Sir J pardon me 
Pray, Sir, forgitw me this 

once alone 
Behave then better for the 

future 



Dialogos Familiaresj Espanoles e Ingleses. 
Familiar Dialogues, Spanish and English. 



Didlogo I. Acerca de saluda/ 
t informarse de la scdud 
de alguno, 

BcjENos diasj Senor 
Yo se los deseo 4 vm. 
Buenas tardes, Caballero 
Buenas noches, Senor 
Servidor de usted 
Como esta vm. ? 
Bueno, para servir a vm. 



Dialogue L Of saluting and 
inquiring after any one's 
health. 

Good morning, Sir 
I wish you the same 
Good afternoon. Sir 
Good night, Sir 
Your servant 
How do you do ? 
Very well, at your service 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



320 



Como va ? como lo pasa ? 
Sienipre al servicio de vm. 
Y a vm. SenoFj como le va ? 

Muy bien, gracias ^ Dios 
Estoy bueno para servir a vm. 
Varaos pasando 
Me alegro mucho de verle 
Me alegro de verle con salud 
Agradezcoselo infinito 
Viva vm. muchos afios 
Como esta el Senor su her- 

mano ? 
Estaba bueno la ultima vez 

que le vi 
Esta bueno, gracias 4 Dios 
Creo que le va bien 
Ayer noche estaba bueno 
Me alegro de eso 
Donde esta ? 
En el campo 
En la ciudad 
En casa 

Ha salido poco bace 
Se alegrara de ver a vm. 
Celebrara mucho saber que 

vm goza de perfecta salud 
Vm. le favorece mu^ ho 
Tambien encontrara vm. con 

el mas sincero reconocimi- 

ento 
Soy su servidor 
Como esta la Senorita? 
Esta buena 

Creo que estd muy buena 
No esta muy buena 
Esta algo malita 
Ayer manana estaba indispu- 

esta 
Hela aqui que viene 
Senorita, a los pies de vm. 

28* 



How are you ? How goes it ? 
Always at your service 
And you^ Sir, how is it with 

you? 
Very well, thank God 
I am very well at your service 
Pretty well ; so, so 
I am very glad to see you 
I rejoice to see you in health 
1 thank you very much for it 
I am obliged to you 
How does your brother do ? 

He was well the last time 1 

saw him 
He is icell, thank God 
I believe he is well 
He was icell last night 
I am very glad of it 
Where is he ? 
In the country 
In the city 
At home 

He is just gone out 
He tvill be glad to see you 
He will be very happy to hear 

you enjoy perfect health 
You are very polite 
You will also meet with a 

most sincere return 

I am his servant 

How is the young lady ? 

SUe is icell 

I believe she is very well 

She is not very well 

She is a little unwell 

She was indisposed yesterday 
morning 

Here she is coming 

MisSy your most humble ser- 
vant 



330 



FAMILIAE tJlALOGUeS. 



Sei vidora de vm., Senor 
Como ha estado vni.j desde 

que no la he visto ? 
Siempre bien, gracias k Dips 
Como sehalla vm? 
Muy bien 

Me da gusto de saberlo 
De corazon lo agradezco 
Pero como le va ahora ? 
Asi, asi; pasando 
No he pasado buena noche 

Lo siento muchisimo 

Es un dolor 

Yo la compadezco mucho 

No puedo yo lisongearme 

mucho de salud 
Que ha tenido vm. ? 

Mi estomago ha estado des- 

compuesto 
Parece que estd vm. buena 

ahora 
Asi, asi, para servir 4 vm. 
Como estdn en casa ? 
Est4n nuestros amigos de la 

corte, del campo, de la vil- 
la, buenos ? 
Todos est an buenos, menos 

mi madre 
Que le duele ? 
Que enfermedad tiene ? 
Tiene calentura, dolor colico, 

tos 
Le duele la cabeza 
Desde cuando ? 
Desde media noche empezo 

4 padecer 
Deseo que se mejore pronto 
Puedo yo servirla de algo ? 
Puede mandarme con toda 

satisfaccion 



Sir, I am your servant 
How have you been, since I 

saw you last ? 
Always well, thank God 
How do you find yourself? 
Quite well 

I am pleased to knoio it 
I thank you heartily 
But how is it ivith you now ? 
Pretty loell ; so/so 
I have not passed a good 

night 
I am very sorry for it 
J regret it very much 
1 sympathise much with you 
I canH boast much in point 

of health 
What has been the matter 

with you ? 
My stomach has been a little 

out of order 
It seems you are now well 

So, 50, at your service 
How do they do at home ? 
Our friends at court, in the 

country, in town, are they 

well? 
They are all well, except my 

mother 
What ails her ? 
What is her complaint ? 
She has a fever, the eholic, a 

cough 
S'le has the head-aeke 
How long since ? 
Since midnight she began to 

suffer 
I wish her to improve speedily 
Can I serve her in any thing 
She may command me with 

full confidence 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES- 



SSI 



La Senora nunca ha dudado 

del favor de vm. 
Suplico a vm. que no me ol- 

vide 
Eso queda de mi cuenta 
Ha raucho tiempo que esta 

mala? 
No ha mucho 
Deseo qne se mejore 
La Senora sabe may bien el 

favor de vm. 
Se alegrara de ver a vmd. 
Soy muy servidor suyo 
Siento no tener tiempo de ver- 

la hoy 
Sientese vmd. un rato 
De veras no puedo 
Esta vm. muy de prisa ? 
Volvere manana 
No puede vm. esperar un 

poco? 
Tengo negocios urgentes 
Solo vengo para saber como 

estaban vms. 
Rinda vm. mis repetos a su 

herraano 
Encomiendeme a mi Senora 

su madre 
Sus ordenes seran puntual- 

mente obedecidas 
Digale vm- cuanto siento sa- 
ber su indisposicion 
Lo hare sin falta 
Vaya vm. con Dios 
Quede vm. con Dios 
Estimo mucho esta visita 
Buenas noches, Caballero 
Senora, Felices noches 

Dial. It. Acerca del hahlar 
Espanol. 

Aprende vm. el Espanol ? 
Si, Senor; algun tiempo hace 



Madam never has doubted 

your goodness 
I beg you will not forget me 

Tliat lies to my account 

Is it long sines she has been 

ill ? 
It is not long 

I wish she may groiv better 
My lady is sensible of your 

kindness 
She will be glad to see you 
I am her most humble servant 
I am sorry I have not time to 

see her to-day 
Sit down a little 
Indeed I cannot 
Are you in great haste ? 
I will come again to-morrow 
Cannot you stay a little ? 

I have earnest business 

1 only come to know how you 

were 
Present my best regards to 

your brother 
Present my respects to my la^ 

dy your mother 
Your orders shall be punctU' 

ally obeyed 
Tell her how sorry I am to 

know her indisposition 
I shall do it without fail 
Farewell 
Good bye 

I thank you for this visit 
Good nighty Sir 
Good nighty Madam 

Dial IL Of speaking Span- 
ish. 

Do you learn Spanish ? 
YeSy Sir^ some time since 



332 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES* 



Yo me empeno en aprenderlo 

Vm. hace muy bien 

Es una lengua muy util y 
hermosa 

Es tambien muy graciosa, 
llena de sal y espresion 

Me ban dicho tambien que es 
mas varonil y copiosa que 
la Fiancesa 

No obstante, la Francesa es 
mas de moda 

Si los EspaFioles hubieran cul- 
tivado su lengua como los 
Ingleses, en estos dos ulti- 
mos siglos, sin duda que se- 
ria mucho mas de moda 

Por la superioridad de su 
diecion, y la suavidad de 
su estilo 

Porque su pronunciacion no 
tiene mas de 27 sonidos 

Porque cada letra se debe 
pronunciar 

Y siempre con el mismo so- 
nido 

Porque su pronunciacion se 
puede esplicar suficiente- 
mente en una pagina de 
duodecimo 

Tambien se puede adquirir 
con facilidad en una bora 

No hay estudiante que en la 
primeralecion no la pueda 
con facilidad aprender 

Esta en su poder, con 8 le- 
ciones, el leerla corriente- 
mente, y con 20 entender 
perfectamente cualquier li- 
bro con la ayuda del dic- 
cionario 

No tiene declinacion sino pa- 
ra li)s pronombres perso- 
nales 



I endeavour to learn it 

You do very well 

It is a very useful and very 
fine language 

It is also very witty ^ full of 
humour and expression 

I have been told it is also 
7nore manly and copious 
than the French 

Notwithstanding ythe French 
is more in fashion 

Had the Spaniards cultivated 
their language as the Eng" 
lish have, in these two last 
centuries J no doubt it would 
be much more in fashion 

For its superiority of diction 
and suavity of style 

Because its pronunciation has 
only tiventy-seven sounds 

Because every letter is to be 
pronounced 

And always with the same 
sound 

Because its pronunciation 
may be sujficiently explain' 
ed in a duodecimo page 

It may also be easily acquir' 
ed in an hour 

There is no learner that in 
the first lesson may not 
easily learn it 

It is in his poiver^ with eight 
lessons, to read it fluently^ 
and with twenty to under^ 
stand perffcily any book 
with the help of a diction- 
ary 

It has no declension but for 
the personal pronouns 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



353 



No tiene mas de Ires verbos 

auxiliares 
Casi constantemente guarda 

la natural precedencia de 

las palabras 
La preposicion nunca se en- 

cuentra sino delante de su 

propio caso 
Todas sus irregularidades se 

pueden con facilidad cor- 

regir 
Por esto la lengua Espanola 

es la mas propia para 

aprenderse por arte 

Y la mas proporcionada para 
las Universidades, tratados 
y comercio 

Toda su brillantez se descu- 
brio en el siglo l6° — 

Y entonces se hablaba mas 
comunraente que ninguna 
otra lengua 

Los autores Espanoles de 
aquel siglo hicieron enton- 
ces y aun hacen ahora, asi 
en verso corao en prosa, 
una muy brillante figura 

Ahora tambien hay muchos 
libros nuevos 

Escritos en el reinado de 
Carlos III. 

Que yo no cito, porque son 
muchos 

La primera lecion me mostro 
lo muy facil que es esta 
lengua 

Por mlj yo gusto mucho de 
ella 

Porque facil ita nuestros medi- 
os de fomentar el mas im- 
portaate comercio que po- 
aeemos 



It has no more than three 

auxiliary verbs 
It preserves almost constant- 

ly the natural pi^ecedence 

of words 
The preposition never is met 

with but before its own case 

All its irregularities may be 
easily corrected 

For -this reason the Spanish 
language is the most pro- 
per to be learned by art 

And the most proper for the 
Universities J treaties^ and 
commerce 

All its brilliancy appeared in 
the l6th century 

And it wa^ then more com- 
monly spoken than any oth- 
er language 

The Spanish writers of that 
century then made and yet 
make, both in verse and 
prose y a very brilliant fig- 
ure 

There are also now many new 
books 

Written in the reign of 
Charles III 

Which I do not quote, because 
they are very numerous 

The first lesson convi?iced me 
of the great facility of 
this language 

For my part^ I like it very 
much 

Because it facilitates our 
means of encouraging the 
most important trade w^ 



334 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Digo el de Espafia y las 
Americas 

Pero no empiece vm. sin un 
buen maestro 

Porqiie un mal habito no es 
facilde dejar 

Se dice, que vm. habla muy 
bien el Espanol 

Entiendolo medianamente 

Que libros lee vm. para apren- 
der el Espanol ? 

La Gramatica de Josse, y 
los Egercicios por el mis- 
mo Autor 

Es natural de Espana y hom- 
bre muy docto 

Leo tambien las Cartas Mar- 
ruecas, Gil Bias de Santilla- 
na, y la historia de la con- 
quista de Megico, por Solis 

Porque no lee vm. Don Qui- 

jote ? 
Mi maestro me dijo que no 

era libro para principiantes 
Que razon tiene ? 
Porque hay en el muchos mo- 

dos de hablar anticuados 
De que diccionario se sirve 

vm. 
Del de Neuman en 2 tomos 

Svo., y de el de Gattel, en 

2, 18mo. 
Q^e api'ende vm. de memo- 

ria } 
Aprendo algunas voces del 

vocabulario 
Digame vm., como se llama 

aquello ? 

Creo que se llama . 

Muy bien J y esto ? 
Peronoestudia vm. alguna co- 

sa ademas del vocabulario ? 



I mean that 7vith Spain arid 

North and South America 
But do not begin without an 

able master 
Because an evil habit is not 

easily removed 
It is saidy that you speak 

very well the Spanish 
I understand it pretty well 
What books do ypu read to 

learn Spanish? 
The Grammar of Josse^ 

and the Exercises by the 

same Author 
He is a native of Spain and 

a very learned man 
I read also the Cartas Mar- 

ruecasy Gil Bias of SantiU 

lana^ and the history of the 

conquest of Mexico^ by 

Sol IS 
Why do you not read Don 

Quixote ? 
My master told me this was 

not a book for beginners 
What is the reason ? 
Because it contains a great 

many obsolete idioms 
What dictionary do you make 

use of? 
Of the dictionary of New- 

man^lw. ^wo,^ and that of 

Gattely 2v. 1 mo. 
What do you get by heart ? 

1 learn some words in the vo- 
cabulary 
Tell tnCy how is that called ? 

I believe it is called-- — 
Very well, and this ? 
But do you not study any 
thing else besides tcords ? 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



335 



Si, Senor, los egemplos de 
las reglas de la gramatica 
El libro de egercicios, frases 
familiaresj y algunos dia- 
log os 
Va vm. aprendiendo bien 
Agradezco a vm. que me ali- 

ente 
Pronuncio bien ? 
Bellamente, elegantemente 
Solo le falta mas pr^ctica 
Nada se adquiere sin trabajo 

Por poco que se aplique vmd., 

sabra muy presto el Espa- 

fiol 

Eistoy convencido de esto 

Me ban dicho que vm. enten- 

dia muy bien el Castellano. 

Quisiera que fuese verdad 
Supongo que desea vm. saber 

esta hermosa lengua 
Lo ha de suponer asi, por- 

que, en efecto, lo deseo 
Bien, le voy 4 ensefiar el 

modo de hablar en poco el 

Espafiol 
Se lo agradecere mucho 
El metodo mas facil para 

aprender una lengua, es 

hablarla 4 menudo 
Pero para hablarla, es me- 

nester saber algo de ella 
Ya sabe vm. bastante 
Solo se algunas palabras de 

las mas necesarias, y algu- 
nas sentencias breves 
Esto basta para empezar a 

hablar 
Si eso fuera asi, presto sa- 

bria la lengua 
No tenga vm. dudade ello 



Yes, Sir, the examples of the 

rules of the grammar 
The book of exercises, fa- 
miliar phrases, and some 

dialogues 
You are learning well 
I thank you for encourage 

ing me 
Do I pronounce well? 
Excellently, elegantly 
You only want more practice 
Nothing is acquired without 

pains 
However little you apply, 

you will very soon know 

Spanish 
1 an convinced of it 
I have been told you were 

well versed in the Spanish 

language 
I should wish it were true 
I suppose you have a mind 

to know this fine language 
You ought to suppose it so; 

for, indeed, I wish it 
Well, I am going to teach 

you the way to speak Span- 
ish in a short time 
I shall be much obliged to you 
The easiest loay to learn a 

language, is to speak it 

frequently 
But to speak it, one must 

know something of it 
You know enough already 
I know but a few words most 

necessary, and some short 

phrases 
This is enough to begin to 

speak 
If it ivere so, I should soon 

knoiv the language 
Do not have any doubt of it 



S36 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



No entiende vmd. lo que le 

digo ? 
Lo entiendo y comprendo muy 

bien 
Pero tengo mucha dificultad 

en hablar 
No tengo facilidad en hablar 
Esto viene con el tiempo 
Tengo cortedad de hablar, 

por no esponerme ^ decir 

disparates 

No se enfade por esto 

Poca paciencia tengo 

Hace mucho tiempo que vm. 

aprende ? 
Dos meses ha que empece 
Es muy corto tiempo 
No le dice su maestro que de- 

biera siempre hablar ? 

Muy ^ menudo me lo dice 
Porque pues, no quiere vm. 

hablar ? 
,Con quien he de hablar ? 
Con todos los que le hablen 
Quisiera hablar, pero no me 

atrevo 
Creame vm., sea atrevido, 

hable siempre, bien 6 mal 
Sobre todo, no omita vm. 

ocasion de hablar cuando 

la encuentre 
Hablando es, corao aprende- 

mos 4 hablar 
Ha pensR/3o vm. muy bien 
Seguire pues su consejo 
Har4 vm. muy bien 

Di^l. III. Para hablar Ingles, 

Senor, es vm. Espanol ? 
Si, Senor, para servirle 



Do not you understand what 

I say to you ? 
I understand and comprehend 

it very well 
But I find it very hard to 

speak 
I have no facility in speaking 
This comes in time 
I am bashful to speak ^ for 

fear of exposing myself to 

utter nonsense^ or impro- 
prieties 
Do not be discouraged for 

that 
I have little patience 
Is it long since you have been 

learning ? 
It is two months since Ibegan 
It is a very short time 
Does not your master tell you 

that you should always 

speak ? 
He tells me so very often 
Why will you not speak 

then ? 
With whom shall I speak ? 
With all those that speak to you 
I should toish to speak, but I 

dare not 
Believe me, be confident^ 

speak always, well or ill 
Above all, omit no occasion 

of speaking when you 
find it 
It is by speaking, that we 

learn to speak 
You have judged very right 
I shall follow your advice then 
You will do very well. 

Dial. III. To speak English. 

Sir, are you a Spaniard ? 
Yes, Sir, at your service 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



337 



De que parage de Espaiia es 

vm. ? 
De Madrid, de Toledo, de 

Sevilla, &c. 
De que ciudad ? 
De Cadiz 
Cuanto tiempo hace que esta 

vm. en Inglaterra ? 
Hace mas de un ano 
Habia vm. Ingles ? 
Hablo lo un poco 
Pero mas entiendo de lo que 

hablo 
La lengua Inglesa es muy 

dificulcosa para los £spa- 

fioles 
La Espafjola no es dificil pa- 
ra los Ingleses 
Estoy persuadido de lo con- 

trario 
Con dificultad lo creo 
La esperiencia nos lo muestra 

todoslos dias 
La pronunciacion del Espa- 

fiol es mucho mas facil que 
la del Ingles 

Ellos pronuncian todas las le- 
tras como las escriben 

Conazco a varies Ingleses que 
pronuncian muy bien el 
Castellano 

Apenas se podr^ hallar un 
E>panol entre cieuto que 
pronuncie bien el Irgles 

Los Ingleses se coinen la mi- 
tad de sus voces 

Dan un solo sonido ^ tres 6 
cuatro letras 

Pero en Espanol cada letra 
tiene su sonido 
29 



What part of Spain are you 
from ? 

From Madrid, Toledo, Se- 
ville, Sfc. 

Of what city ? 

Of Cadiz 

How long have you been in 
England? 

It is more than a year 

Do you speak English ? 

I speak it a little 

But I understand it better 
than 1 speak 

The English language is very 
difficult for Spaniards 

The Spanish is not difficult 

for Englishmen 
1 am persuaded of the con- 
trary 
I hardly believe it 
Experience shows it to us ev- 
ery day 
The pronunciation of the 
Spanish is a great deal 
more easy than that of the 
English 
They pronoujice all the letters 

as they write them 
I know several Englishmen 
who pronounce t/ie Spanish 
very well 
One can hardly find one 
Spaniardin a hundred who 
pronounces English well 
The English clip or eat up 

half their words 
They give a single sound to 

three or four letters 
But in Spanish each letter 
has its sound 



338 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES?. 



De suerte que la dificultad 
no parece igual de ambos 
lados 

El Espanol tiene la ventaja 

Y aun la difficultad es menos 
para la gente moza 

Porque los jovenes son como 
cera blanda, en que se ina- 
prime facilmente todo 

Didl. VIII. Del hacer una 
visitapor la manana* 

Quien esti ahi ? 

Gente de paz, abra vmd. la 

puerta 
Adonde est^ tu amo ? 
Estd en la cama 
Duerme aun ? 
No, Sefior, esti dispierto 
Esti levantado ? 
Aun no ; quiere vm. entrar en 

su cuarto ? 
Aun en ia cama ? 
Me recogi i noche tan tarde, 

que no me he polido levan- 

tar mas temprano 
Que hizo vm. despues de ce- 

nar ? 
Como paso vm. la noche ? 

Jugamos & los naipes 
A' que juego ? 
Jugamos 4 los cientos 
Es un juego muy de moda 
Luego nos fuimos al baile 

Hasta que hora se estuvo 

vmd. alii ? 
Hasta media noche 
A' que hora se acosto vmd. ? 
A^ la una de la noche 



So that the difficulty does not 
appear equal on both sides 

The Spanish has the advan- 
tage 

And the difficulty is yet less 
for young people 

Because young people are 
like soft wax J on which one 
easily impresses any thing. 

Dial. VIII. Of making a 
morning visit. 

Who is there ? 

A friend^ open the door 

Where is your master ? 

He is in bed 

Does he sleep yet ? 

Noj Sir^ he is awake 

Is he up ? 

Not yet ; will you step into 

his chamber ? 
Still in bed? 

I retired so late last nighty 
that I could not get up 
earlier 
What did you do after sup- 
per? 
How did you spend the even* 

ing ? 
We played at cards 
At what game ? 
We played at piquet 
It is a game much in fashion 
Afterwards we ivent to the 

ball 
Till what o^clock were you 

there ? 
Till midnight 

What time did you go to bed? 
At one in the morning 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



339 



Ne estrafio que vm. selevante 

tan tarde 
Que hora puede ser ? 
Que hora le parece que es ? 

Han dado las diez 
Levantese vm. presto 
Daremos una vuelta en el 

parque luego que este vmd. 

vestido 



I do not wonder you rise su 

late 
What o^clocJc may it be ? 
What o'clock do you think 

it is ? 
It has struck ten 
Rise quickly 
We will take a turn in the 

Park as soon as you are 

dressed. 



Diil. IX. Del almorzar. Dial IX. Of breakfasting. 



Quiere vm. almorzar ? 

Es tierapo de desayunarse ? 

Que gusta vm. para su almu- 

erzo ? 
Pan y manteca ? 
Molletes calientes ? 
Leche: tostadas? chocolate ? 
No ; todo eso es bueno para 

nifios 
Traiganos otra cosa 
Gustan vms. de jamon ? 
Si, traigalo, que cortaremos 

una tajada 
Ponga una servilleta en la me- 
sa, y denos platos, cuchillos 
y tenedores 
Lave los vasos 
De un asiento al Senor 
Tome vm. una silla y sientese 
Acerquese de la lumbre 
Estare bien aqui, no tengo 

frio 
Gustan vms. de huevos fres- 
cos? 
Han de ser pasados per agua 

6 fritos ? 
Quite ese plato grande 
Coma vm. salchicha 
Probemos el vino 
Destape esa botella 
No tengo tirabuzon 



Will you breakfast ? 
Is it breakfast time ? 
What do you wish for your 

breakfast ? 
Bread and butter ? 
Hot loaves ? 

Milk? toasts? chocolate? 
No ; all that is fit for chiU 

dren 
Bring us something else 
Do you wish for ham ? 
Yes, bring it, we will cut a 

slice of it 
Lay a cloth upon the table, 

and give us plates, knives 

and forks 
Rinse the tumblers 
Give the gentleman a seat 
Take a chair and sit down 
Come near the fire 
I shall be well here, I am not 

cold 
Will you have new laid 



Must they be boiled or fried? 

Take that dish away ? 
Eat some sausage 
Let us taste the tcine 
Uncork that bottle 
I have no corkscrew 



340 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Dome de beber 
Como lo halla vm. ? 
Que le parece 4 vm. ? 
Es bueno, no es malo 
De de beber al Senor 
Acabo de beber 
No come vm. 

Tanto he comido, que no 
tendre ganas a medio dia 

Se burla vm. ? nada casi ha 
comido 



Give me to drink 
How do you like it f 
What do you think of it ? 
It is good, it is not bad 
Give the gentleman drink 
I have just drank 
You do not eat 
I have eaten so much, that I 

shall have no appetite at 

noon / 

Do you Jest ? you have eaten 

scarcely any thing. 



D\k\ X. Antes de la comida. Dial, X. Before dinner. 



Es ya tiempo de comer ? 

Son cerca de las tres 

Es hora do comer 

Se atraso hoy la comida hasta 

las cuatro 
Quiere vm. hacer hoy peni- 

tencia con nosotros ? 
Si vm. quiere cenar bien^ 

venga a comer a mi casa 
Ponga la mesa, el mantel 
Traiga la comida 
Ponga los saleros y los platos 

en la mesa 
Lave, limpie los vasos 
Pongalos sobre el aparador 
Corte unos pedacitos de pan 
Ponga las sillas al rededor de 

la mesa con sus almohadillas 
Quien asiste a la mesa ? 
Han venido todos los convi- 

dados 6 huespedes ? 
Aun no, algunos faltan 
Donde estan los cuchillos, 

tenedores y cucharas ? 
Estan sobre el aparador 
Solo le he convidado para go- 

zar de su compariia 
Hara vm. penitencia 
Mande servir la cqmida 



Is it already dinner time ? 

It is near three o^ clock 

It is time to dine 

Dinner was put off to-day 

till four 
Will you make penance with 

us to-day ? 
If you wish to sup heartily, 
come and dine at my house 
Lay the table, the cloth 
Bring the dinner 
Put the salt'cr liars and plates 

upon the table 
Rinse or cleanse the tumblers 
Set them upon the side-board 
Cut a few slices of bread 
Set the chairs round the ta- 
ble ivith their cushions 
Who waits at the table ? 
Are all the invited persons 

or the guests come ? 
Not yet, some are wanting 
Where are the knives, forks, 

and spoons ? 
They are upon the sidv'^board 
I have invited you only to en- 
joy your company 
You will make penance 
Call for th^ dinner 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUE S4 



^41 



Aun no esti pronta 

Ya esta. la comida on la moea 

Solo aguardan a vm., Senor 
Tocaron la campana 
Sientese vm. ^ la mesa 
Tome el primer asiento 
No permitire que este sentado 

alii 
Aqui se sentara vm. 
En verdad qne no lo hare 
Vamos, degemonos de cum- 

plimientos 
Para que tanta ceremonia ? 
Mas llaneza se ha de usar 

entre los amigos 
Vaya un poco mas atras, que 

tengamos lugar 
Bien cabemos todos 
Es monster que quepamos 
Tenemos mas huespedes de 

lo que pensabamos 
Faltan aqui dos cubiertos 
Muchacho, ve a buscar dos 

servilletas 

Dial. XI. Comiendo. 

he gusta ^ vm. la sopa a la 

Francesa? 
Si, como el caldo este bien 

hecho 
A mi, deme vm. de nuestra 

buena oUa 
Venga un poco de pan casero 
Tome vm. pan bianco 
Mas quiero este 
Este pan esta mohoso 
Pero este es muy sabroso 
Muchacho, danos pan tierno 
Raspa este pan 
Quiere vm. la corteza de en- 

cima 6 la debajo ? 
29* 



It is not yet ready 

The dinner is already on the 

talrio ^ 

Sir, they only wait for you 

They rung the bell 

Sit down to the table 

Take thejirst place 

I will not suffer you to sit 

there 
You will sit here 
Indeed I shall not do it 
Come, let us forbear compli' 

ments 
Why so much ceremony ? 
More freedom should be used 

among friends 
Go a little farther back, that 

we may have room 
There is room for all 
We must all find place 
We have more company than ( 

we thought 
Two covers are wanted here 
Boy, go and fetch two nap* 

kins. 

Dial XI. At Dinner. 
Do you like French soup ? 

Yes, provided the broth is 

well made 
As for me, give me some of 

our good olla 
Bring a little household bread 
Take white bread 
I like this better 
This bread is mouldy 
But this is very sweet 
Boy, give us new bread 
Rasp this bread 
Do you wish the upper or 

under crust? 



342 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Gusta vm. de este cocida ? 

Me servire a mi mismo 

Danos el plato grande 

Esta carne es muy sustanciosa 

Sij lo creo 

No come vra.j Senor 

Perdoneme vm., que como 

tanto como dos 
Que buenos principios ! 
Por ml, yo alabo este convite 

comiendo bien 
Pero aun no ha bebido vm. 
Muchacho, da de beber al 

Senor 
Echa de beber 
Llena la copa 
Sefiora, brindo por la salud 

de vm. 
Buen provecho haga 4 vmd. 
Senor, a la salud de sus ami- 

gos 
A' todos sus gustos 
A" sus inclinaciones 
Mucho favor me hace vm. 
Como halla vm. esta cerveza ? 
Es bastante buena 
Quiero probarla 
La hallo muy amarga 
Me quejare al cervecero 
Quite todo esto del medio 
Sirvan los segundos principios 
Es vm. buen bebedor y mal 

comedor 
No ve vm. que como y bebo 

bien 
Vamos, Senor, coma vm. de 

lo que gustare mas 
No lengo apetito 
Que le parece de esta lengua 
de buey, del picadillo, del 
guisado ? 



Will yon have some of ihi^ 

hailed meat ? 

If you please 

I loill help myself 

Give us the dish 

This meat is very juicy 

Yes^ I think so 

Sir, you do not eat 

Excuse me, I eat as much as 

two 
What a fine first course ! 
For my part, I commend this 

entertainment by eating ivell 
But you have not drank yet 
Boy, give the gentleman some 

drink 
Pour some drink 
Fill the glass 
Madam, I drink your health 

I thank you 

Sir, to the health of your 

friends 
To all your pleasures 
To your inclinations 
You are very kind 
How do you like this beer ? 
It is pretty good 
I laish to taste it 
I find it very bitter 
I will complain to the brewer 
Take away all these things 
Serve up the second course . 
You are a great drinker and 

a small eater 
Do you not see I eat and 

drink loell 
Come, Sir, eat of what you 

like most 
I have no appetite 
What do you say to this 

neafs tongue, to the min* 

ced meat, to the fricassee ? 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



S4S 



Quiere vm. que le sirva de 
estas perdices, de ese ca- 
pon, de los polios, 6 galU- 
netas ? 

Lo que 4 vm. le gustare 

Que quiere vmd. mas, un alon 
6 una pierna ? 

Para mi es todo uno 

Coma vm. algunos rabanos 
para aguzar el apetito 

La hambre es la mejor salsa 

Ya he comido demasiado 

Denos mostaza 

A^ donde esta el raostacero ? 

Ya ve vm. que mesa tenemos 

No gastamos delicadeza 

Esto no se llama comer 

Tengo mucha sed 

Deme una copa de vino 

Vamos, Senor, por la salud 
del Presidente 

Vivan el Egercito y la Ar- 
mada 

Viva el Gobernador 

Le correspondere con mucho 
gusto 

Bebamos todos 

El vino es rauy esquisito 

Que le parece esta empanada 
de pichones? 

Esta muy buena y rauy bien 
sazonada 

Sabe vm. trinchar ? 

Trincho medianamente 

Le servire a vm. 

Conozco lo que le gusta 

Acertare con su gusto 

A todos sirve vm. y se olvida 
de si mismo 

Quite ese plato, venga el 
otro 



Shall I help you to a piece of 

these partridges^ of that 

capon, of the chickens or 

woodcocks ? 
What you please 
Which do you like best, a 

wing or a leg ? 
It is all one to me 
Eat some radishes to sharpen 

your appetite 
Hunger is the best sauce 
Ihave eaten too much already 
Give Its some mustard 
Wliere is the mustard-pot? 
You see now what table we 

keep 
We use no dainties 
This is not called eating 
I am vei^y thirsty 
Give me a glass of wine 
Come, Sir, to the health of 

the President 
Huzza for the Army and 

Navy 
Huzza for the Govemour 
1 will pledge you with a great 

deal of pleasure 
Let us all drink 
The wine is very exquisite 
How do you like this pigeon 

pie ? 
It is very good and very well 

seasoned 
Can you carve ? 
1 carve pretty well 
I will help you 
1 know what you like 
1 shall hit your taste 
You help every body andfo'r^ 

get yourself 
Take away that dish, bring 
the other 



344 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Nos da vra. una comida de 
Rey, en lugar de un convite 
de amigo 

Pruebe de estos alcauciles 

Dame ese cuchillo 

Esta carne est a fria 

Recalientala en el brasero 

Hagame el favor de un poco 

de morcilla 
Esta carne esta cruda 
Corteme vmd. un poco de 

vaca 
Quiere vm. carnero, vaca 6 

tern era ? 
Lo que gustare, Senor 
Asado 6 cocido ? 
Coma vm. zanahorias, nabos, 

chirivias y berza 6 col 
Tome vm. mostaza 
Le dare brazuelo 6 pierna de 

carnero ? 
Mas quiero un poco de lomo 

de ternera 
Vaya este plato al rededor de 

la mesa 
Ya ve vm.j Senor, como nos 

tratamos 
Este es el mejor plato de la 

mesa 
Aun no se le ha llegado 
Voy a probar de el 
Buen provecho haga a vmd. 
Le gusta d vmd. la leche co- 

cida ? 
Gusto mucho de cuajada, na- 

tilla y queso fresco 
Coma vra. de este manjar 

bianco 
Vaya un poco del estofado 
Las empanadas de carne nu- 

tren mas que las de man- 

zanas 



You give us a king^s feast ^ 
instead of a friendly en- 
tertainment 

Try these artichokes 

Give me that knife 

This meat is cold 

Warm it again on the cha- 
fing dish 

Favour me with a piece of 
pudding / 

This meat is raw 

Cut me a small 'piece of beef 

Will you have mutton^ beef 

or veal ? 
What you please, Sir 
Roasted or boiled meat ? 
Eat some carrots, turnips, 

parsnips and cabbage 
Take some mustard 
Shall I help you to some 

shoulder or leg of mutton? 
I prefer a piece of the loin 

of veal 
Let this dish go round the 

table 
Sir, you now see how we fare 

This is the best dish at table 

It has not yet been touched 
I am. going to taste it 
Much good may it do you 
Do you like boiled milk? 

1 am very fond of curdsy 

cream and new cheese 
Eat of this blanc-manger 

Take some of the stewed fneat 
Meat pies nourish more than 
apple-pies 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



345 



Que bellos postres ! 

La fruta corresponde 4 todo 

lo demas 
Ha recogido vm. las frutas 

mas esquisitas de la es- 

tacion 
Esta pasta 6 masa es muy li- 

gera y bien hecha 
La torta es muy buena 
Dame cerveza fuerte 
Da un plato limpio al Senor 

Siento no tengamos algo rae- 

jor 
He comido muy bien 
Creo que todos ban acabado 
Degemos la mesa 
Quita la mesa 
Demos gracias a Dios 
Vamos a dar un paseo en el 

jardin 
Vamos en hora buena 
Tengo muchq sueno 
Soy muy amigo de hacer la 

siesta 

Dial. XIL Para comprar 
lihros, 

Tiene vm. algimlibro nuevo ? 

Si, Senor; que especie de li- 
bros quiere vm. ? 

Le gustan a vm. libros de 
historia, de matematicas, 
de filosofiaj de teologia, 
de medicina, de derecho ? 

Noj Senor, busco libros de 
poesia 

Le puedo proveer de ellos en 
todas lenguas 

Pues tengo todos los poetas 
Griegos, Latinos, Espa- 
noles, Italianos, Franceses, 
e Ingleses 



What a fine dessert ! 

The fruit corresponds icith 

all the rest 
You have collected the most 
exquisite fruits of the sea- 
son 
This pastry is very light and 

well made 
The tart is very good 
Give rae some strong beer 
Give a clean plate to the 

gentleman 
I am sorry we have nothing 

better 
I have dined very icell 
I think every body has done 
Let us leave the table 
Remove the table 
Let us say grace 
Let 7is go and take a turn in 

the garden 
Let us go with all my heart 
1 am very skepy 
I am very fond of talcing a 
nap after dinner. 

Dial Xn. To buy books. 

Have you any new book? 

Yes^ Sir; what sort of books 
do you wish ? 

Will you have books of his^ 
tory, mathematics J philos- 
ophy, divinity^ physic, or 
laiD ? 

No, Sir, lam looking for po^ 
etical works 

I can furnish you with them 
in all languages 

For I have all the Greeks 
Latin, Spanish, Italian, 
French, and English poets 



346 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Muchos tengo yo de estos 
Que poetas necesita vra. pues 

comprar ? 
Virgilio en Latin, las coraedi- 

as de Calderon, y el Teatro 

de Feijoo en Espanol 
Tiene vmd. el Paraiso Per- 

dido de Milton, 6 las obras 

dramaticas de Shakspeare, 

en Ingles ? 
Tengo menester de la Gra- 

matica Italiana de Venero- 

ni, de los Egercicios de 

Bottarelli, y de las Come- 

dias de Goldoni 
Tiene vmd. la Gramatica Es- 

panola del Seiior Josse, y 

la de la Acaderaia ? 
Ti^ne vmd. la Historia de 

Inglaterra, de Francia, de 

Espanay de Italia? 
Todos esos libros tengo 
De que tamno son ? 
Los tengo en Folio, Cuarto, 

Octavo y Duodecimo 
H^garae vm el favor de en- 

senarmelos 
Los quiere vm. encuaderna- 

dos en badana, becerro, 6 
cordoban ? 
Los quiere vm. dorados e in- 

titulados ? 
No hay necesidad de eso 
No los compro para adorno, 

sino para leerlos 
Esta em uadernadura no es 

buena 
No esta bien cosido este libro 
Ahi tiene vm. otro en su lugar 
Cuanto pide vm. por este li- 
bro? 
Le costard a vm. dos pesos 
Esto es demasiado 



I have many of them 

What poets do you want then 

to purchase ? 
Virgil in Latin, the plays of 

Calderon, and the Theatre 

ofFeijdo in Spanish 
Have you Milton^s Paradise 

Lost J or the plays of Shak- 

speare in English? 

I have need of VeneronVs 
Italian Grammar, Botta- 
rellPs Exercises, and Got- 
doni^s Comedies 

Have you the Spanish Gram^ 

mar of Mr. Josse, and that 

of the Academy? 
Have you the History of 

England, France, Spain 

and Italy ? 
I have all those books 
Of 20 hat size are they ? 
1 have them in Folio, Quarto, 

Octavo and Duodecimo 
Do me the favour to show 

them to me 
Will you have them bound in 

sheep, calf, or morocco 

leather? 
Will you have them gilt on 

the back and lettered? 
There is no occasion for that 
1 do not buy them for orna- 

ment, but to read them 
This binding is not good 

This book is not well sewed 
There is another in its stead 
How much do you ask for 

this book? 
It will cost you two dollars 
This is too much 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



347 



Es el precio ultimo 

Le dare ^ vm. veinte reales 

Me sale 4 mas de lo que vmd. 

me ofrece por el 
Es muy caro 
Le aseguro 4 vm. que me 

cuesta peso y medio sin la 

encuadernadura 
No querr^t vm. que pierda en 

mis libros 
Muy al contrario, quiero que 

gane algo 
Es preciso pues que me de 

veinte y cuatro reales 
Ahi los tiene vm., no reparo 

en una cortedad 
No necesita vm. otros libros ? 
Por ahora no 
Pero he menester de papel 

plumas, tinta, lacre, y o- 

bleas 
No vendo nada de eso 
Pero lo hallara vm. todo en 

la tienda proxima que es 

de un papelero 
A' DioSj Senor 
Muy servidor de vm., cabal- 

lero 
Hagame vm. el favor de acor- 

darse de mi para otra vez 
Siempre esperimentar^ muy 

buen trato 
Lo espero 

Dial XIII. Del alquilar un 
alojamiento. 

Senor, quiere vm. hacerme 
un favor ? 

De muy buena gana, que me 
manda vm. ? 

Que venga vmd. conmigo, pa- 
ra alquilar un alojamiento 



It is the lowest price 

I will give you twenty rials 

It turns out to me more 
than you offer me for it 

It is very dear 

I assure you it costs me one 
dollar and a half without 
the binding 

You will not wish me to lose 
by my books 

Quite to the contrary , I wish 
you to gain something 

You must then give me four- 
and'twenty rials 

There you have them^ I do 
not mind a trifle 

Do you not want other books? 

Not at present 

But I have occasion for pa- 
per ^ pens, ink, sealing-wax^ 
and wafers 

I sell nothing of that 

But you willfnd it all at the 
next shop which is a Sta- 
tioner^s 

Farewell, Sir 

Sir, your most humble ser- 
vant 

Do me the favour to remem- 
ber me again 
You will alicays experience 
good treatment 

I hope so. 

Dial. XIII. Of hiring a 
lodging. 

Sir, will you do me a favour ? 

Very willingly, what do you 

command me ? 
That you would go with me 

to hire a lodging 



348 



PAMILIAK DIALOGUES. 



Le acompanare adonde qui- 

siere 
Vamos a la calle de Santiago 
Le voy siguiendo 
Aqui hay una cedula 4 esta 

puerta que dice cuartos de 

aiquilar 
Llame vm. 4 la puerta 
Quien es ? 
Gente de paz 
Con quien quiere vm. hablar ? 

Con el amo 6 ama de casa 

Aqui esta mi Senora 
Senora, tiene vm. cuartos de 

aiquilar ? 
Si, Senor, quiere vm. verlos ? 

Vine con esa intencion 

Cuantos aposentos necesita 
vm. ? 

Quiero uu comedor 6 sala, 
una alcobaj un gabinete pa- 
ra rai, y un desvanpara mi 
criado 

Han de ser sus cuartos alhaja- 
dos 6 no ? 

Han de ser alhajados 

Hagame el favor de esperar 
un rato en esta sala baja, 
mientras voy por las Haves 

Muy bien, Senora, aguardo 

Quiere vm. tomarse el traba- 
jo de subir ? 

Seguiremos 4 vm., Senora 

Esta es la vivienda del primer 
alto 

Ahi tiene vm. una cama muy 
buena y limpia 

Bien ve vm. que hay todo lo 
preciso en ui^ cuarto alha- 
jado 



I shall wait on you wherever 

you please 
Let us go into St, James^ street 
1 follow you 
Here is a bill at this door 

which says rooms to let 

Knock at the door 

Who is there ? 

A friend, peaceable people 

Whom do you wish to speak 

with ? 
With the master or mistress 

of the house 
Here is my Lady 
Madam, ham you any rooms 

to let ? 
Yes, Sir, do you wish to see 

them ? 
I came on purpose 
How many apartments do 

you want ? 
I want a dining-room., a bed-- 

chamber, a closet for my- 

self, and a garret for my 

manservant 
Must your rooms be furnish* 

ed or not ? 
They must be furnished 
Be so kind as to wait a mo- 

ment in this lower parlour^ 

while I go for the keys 
Very well, Madam, Pll wait 
Willy 071 take the trouble to 

go vpf 
We will follow you. Madam 
This is the apartment on the 

first floor 
There you have a very good 

and clean bed 
You see that there is every 
thing necessary in a fur- 
nished room 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



349 



Como mesa, espejo. sillas, al- 

fombras, alacenasj escapa- 

rates, &c. 
Pero adonde esta el gabinete ? 
Aqui esta, y es bastante capaz 
Me cuadra muy bien este alo- 

jamiento 
Mealegro mucho 
Cuanto pide vra. por semana ? 
Nunca alquilo mis cuartos 

sino por mes 6 por ano 
Bien, los tomare por mes ; 

cuanto es el precio de 

ellos ? 
Jamas tuve menos de diez 

guineas al mes por estos 

dos cuartos 
Son demnsiado caros 
Ha de considerar vm. que 

este es el mas hermoso bar- 
rio de la ciudad 
Y que esta vm. 4 un paso de 

la corte 
Para que vea vm. que no soy 

amigo de regatear, le dare 

ocho guineas por ellos 

Es demasiado poco, no sabe 
vm. la renta que pago por 
esta casa 

Nada me importa saberlo 

Pero en ima palabra, partire- 

mos la diforencia 
Yo le aseguro que pierdo 
Pero siento que vm. se vaya 

Y por el desvan de mi criado^ 
cuanto he de pagar por 
mes ? 
Me dara vm. dos guineas 
No dare mas de guinea y 
media 
30 



As table^ looking-glass ^chairs ^ 
carpetSy closets, p7'esses, ^c. 

But where is the closet ? 
Here it is, and is large enough 
These apartments suit me very 

well 
I am very glad of it 
How much do you ask a week ? 
I never let my apartments but 

hy the month or year 
Well, I shall take them hy 
the month ; what is the 
price of them ? 
1 never had less than ten 
guineas a month for these 
two rooms 
They are too dear 
You ought to consider that 
this is the finest ward of 
the city 
And that you are within a 

step of the court 
That you may see that I do 
not like haggling, I will 
give you eight guineas for 
them 
It is too little, you do not 
know the rent I pay for 
this house 
It is no concern of mine to 

know it 
But in a word, we toill divide 

the difference 
I assure you that I lose 
But I (nn sorry to have you 

go away 
And for my man'^s garret, 
how much must I pay a 
month ? 
Yov will give me two guineas 
I shall give only one guinea 
and a half 



350 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



No es bastante, pero lo hare 

por vm.5 sea asi 
No vale la pena de pararse 

en semejante cortedad 
Pero digame vm., no puedo 

yo comer aqui con vm.? 
Sij Senor, bien puede vm. 
Cuanto toma por semana de 

cada huesped ? 
A^ razon de ocho guineas al 

mes 
Y cuanto toma vm. por cuar- 

to y comida juntos ? 
Cinco libras por semana 
Pues, empezare manana 
Cuando gustare 
Buenas noches, Senora 
Buenas se las de Dios, Sefior 

Diil XIV. Del informarse 
de alguno, 

Quien es ese caballero ? 
Es un Ingles 
Le tuve por un Frances 
Se ha enganado vm. pues 
Sabe vm. donde vive ? 
Vive en el barrio de la corte 

Tiene casa ? 

No, Senor, vive en cuartos 

alhajados 
En casa de quien aloja? 
Vive en casa de fulano, en la 

calle de 

Que edad tiene ? 

Creo que tiene veinte y cinco 

anos 
No me parece tan viejo 

No puede ser mas mozo 
Es casado ? 
No, Senor, es soltero 
]Est4n sus padres vivos ? 



It is not enough^ hut I will do 

it for you J let it be so 
It is not worth while to dwell 

on so small a matter 
But tell me, may I not hoard 

here ivith you ? 
Yes^Sir, you may 
How much do you take from 

each boarder a-week ? 
At the rate of eight guineas a 

month 
And how much do you take for 

hoard and lodging together ? 
Five pounds a-week 
Welly I shall begin to-morrom 
When you please 
Good nighty Madam 
Good nighty Sir, 

Dial. XIV. Of inquiring 
after one. 

Who is that gentleman ? 
He is an Englishman 
I took him for a Frenchman 
Then you have mistaken 
Do you know where he lives ? 
He lives in the ward of the 

court 
Does he keep house ? 
Noy Siry he lives in lodgings 

At whose house does he lodge ? 
He lodges at Mr. such a oncy 

in the street of 

How old is he ? 

I believe he is five and twenty 

years of age 
He does not appear to me 

so old 
He cannot be younger 
Is he married ? 
No, Siry he is a bachelor 
Are his parents living ? 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



351 



Su madre aun vive, pero su 

padre murio dos anos ha 

Tiene herraanos y hermanas ? 

Dos hermanos y una hermana 

tiene 
Est4 su hermana casada ? 
Si, Sefior 
Con quien ? 

Con el Conde de 

Era pues partido rico 
Tuvo sesenta mil pesos de 

dote 
Es hermosa? 
No es fea 
Es bastante bonita 
Esta algo picada de viruelas 

Pero tiene mucho entendimi- 

ento 
Es muy ingeniosa 
Habla este caballero la lengua 

Espafiola ? 
Aunque es Ingles, habla tan 

bien Espafiol, que los Es- 

pafioles le creen Espanol 

Habla Italiano conao los Ita- 

lianos mismos 
Entre los Alemanes pasa por 

Aleman 
Como puede saber tantas len- 

guas diferentes ? 
Goza de una memoria feliz y 

ha viajado mucho 

Ha estado dos anos en Paris, 
seis meses en Madrid, ano 
y medio en Italia, y un 
afio en Alemania 

Ha visto todas las cortes de 
la Europa 



His mother is still alive ^ but 
his father died two years ago 

Has he any brothers and sis- 
ters ? 

He has two brothers and a 
sister 

Is his sister married ? 

Yes, Sir 

To whom ? 

To the Earl of 

She was then a rich match 

She had sixty thousand doh 
larsfor her portion 

Is she handsome ? 

She is not ugly 

She is pretty enough 

She is a little pitted with the 
small pox 

But she has a great deal of 
understanding 

She is very able^ very witty 

Does this gentleman speak 
the Spanish language ? 

Although he is an English- 
man, he speaks Spanish so 
well, that the Spaniards 
think him a Spaniard 

He speaks Italian like the 
Italians themselves 

He passes for a German 
among the Germans 

How can he know so many 
different languages ? 

He enjoys a happy memory 
and has travelled a great 
deal 

He has been two years at 
Paris, six months at Mad- 
rid, a year and a half in 
Italy, and a year in Ger- 
many 

He has seen all the courts of 
Europe 



352 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Cuanto tiempo ha que le 

conoce vm. ? 
Al rededor de tres anos ha 

que tengo el honor de 

conocerle 
Donde hizo vm. conocimiento 

con el ? 
En Roma le conoci 

Es de bella estatura 

Ni demasiado alto, ni demasi- 

ado chico 
Se puede decir que es hombre 

garboso 
Siempre anda muy aseado y 

bien compuesto 
Se viste muy bien 
Es bien parecido, tiene buen 

aire 
Tiene bella presencia, y el 

aspecto noble 
Nada disgusta en sus modos 

Es cortes, afable, urbano con 

cualquiera 
Tiene mucho entendimiento, 

y es muy festivo en conver- 

sacion 
Danza bellamentej esgrime y 

monta mny bien 
Toca la flauta; el clave, la 

guitarra, el piano y otros 

muchos instrumontos 

En una palabra, es un cabal- 
lero cumplido y perfect© 

For el retrato que vm. hace 
de el, me da gana de cono- 
cerle 

Le procurare su conocimi- 
ento 



How long is it siiice yoii 
know him? 

It is about three years since I 
have the honour of being 
acquainted with him 

Where did you make ac- 
quaintance with him ? 

I got acquainted with him at 
Rome 

He is of a fine stature 

He is neither too tall, nor too 
short 

One may say he is an elegant 
man 

He is always very neat and 
very fine 

He dresses very well 

He is very genteely he has a 
good air 

He has a fine presence^ and a 
noble look 

"Nothing is disagreeable in 
his manners 

He is civily courteous, com- 
plaisant to every body 

He is very sensible, and is 
very sprightly in conver- 
sation 

He dances beautifully , fences 
and rides very loell 

He plays upon the flute ^ the 
harpsichord, the guitar, 
the piano and several other 
instruments 

In a word, he is an accom- 
plished and perfect gentle- 
man 

By the picture you make of 
him, you give me a desire 
to know him 

I will procure you his ac- 
quaintance 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



353 



Se lo agradecere k vm. mu- 

cho 
CuaDdo quiere vm. que va- 

yamos a visitarle juntos? 
Cuando a vm. le gustare 
A^ que hora se puede verle 

en su casa ? 
A^ cualquiera hora puedo 

verle, pues es muy amigo 

mio 
Vamos pues a verle mafiana 

por la mafiana 
Sea en hora buena 
De todo mi corazon 
Cuando le conviniere 
A^ Dios, Caballero 
Servidor de vm. 
Soy muy suyo 
Tonga vm. buenas noches 
Muy buenas se las de Dios 

Did!. XV. Del partir. 

Sefior, vengo k despedirme 

de vm. 
Porque quiere vm. irse ? 
Se acerca la hora de comer 
No puede vm. comer con 

nosotros ? 
Se lo estimo mucho, no me es 

posible hoy 
Porque ? que negocios tiene 

vm. ? 
No tengo mucho que hacer, 

pero he de ir 4 comer a casa 
Ha convidado vm. ^ alguno a 

comer 4 su casa } 
No, pero he prometido ^ un 

caballero Ingles, que no 

sabe el Espafiol, de ir con 

el a comprar algunas me- 

nudencias 
A^ que hora le espera vm. ? 
30* 



I shall he much obliged to you 

for it 
When win youhave us go and 

wait upon him together ? 
When you please 
At what o^clock may one see 

him at home ? 
I can see him at any time^for 

he is my intimate friend 

Let us go then and see him 

to-morrow morning 
I will ; well and good 
With all my heart 
When it suits you 
Farewell^ Sir 
Your servant 
I am truly yours 
I wish you a good night 
I wish you the same. 

Dial XV. Of departing. 

Sir^ I come to take leave of 

you 
Why will you go away ? 
Dinner ti?ne draws near 
CanH you dine with us ? 

I thank you for it, it is not 

in my power to-day 
Why ? what business have 

you ? 
I have not much to doj but I 

must go and dine at home 
Have you invited any body 

to dine at your house ? 
Noy hit I have promised an 

English gentleman^ who 

does not know Spanish, to 

go with him to buy some 

trifles 
At what hour do you expect 

him? 



354 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, 



Le aguardo a las dos 

Esta vm. seguro de que venga? 

No lo se de cierto ; pero ha- 
biendoselo prometido, es 
preciso que este en casa 

Tiene vm* razon 

Ne le quiero pues detener 

Vaya vm. con Dios, seividor 

suyo 
Quede vm. con Dios 
Muchacho, abre la pueita 

al Senor 
Muy bien la abrire yo 
Pero no tiene vm. la Have 
Que ! echa vm. la Have a la 

puerta ? 
Asi lo acostumbramos 
Suplicole me ponga 4 los 

pies de mi Senora su her- 

mana 
No faltare a ello, Senor 
Cuando nos volveremos 4 

ver? 
Manana, si Dios quiere 
Vendre a visitaile 
Hagame este favor 

Dial. XV L De noticias. 

Que se dice do bueno ? 
Que noticias tenemos ? 
No se ninguna 
Que se dice de nuevo ? 
Sabe vm. alguna novedad ? 
Que noticias corren ? 
No hay ninguna 
No he sabido nada de nuevo 
Ha leido vmd. los papeles ? 
He visto los Times, la Cro- 
nica, el Morning Fast 

Que se dice en la ciudad ? 
No se habia de nada 



I expect him at two o'clock 
Are you sure he will come 1- 
I do not knoiv it for certain ; 
but having promised it to 
him, it is necessary 1 should 
be at home 
You are in the right 
I will not detain you then 
Farewell, your servant 

Good bye 

Boy, open the door for the 

gentleman 
1 will open it myself 
But you have not the key 
How ! do you lock your 

door ? 
So is our custom 
I beg you would present my 

respects to your sister 

Sir, 1 will not fail to do it 
When shall we see one another 

again ? 
To-morrow, if it please God 
I loill come to visit you 
Do me this favour. 

Dial XVI. Of news. 

What is said good ? 

What news have we ? 

I know none 

What do people say new ? 

Do you knoio any news ? 

What news are spread ? 

There is none 

1 have heard nothing new 

Have you read the papers ? 

I have seen the Times, the 

Chronicle, the Morning 

Fost 
What do they say in the city ? 
They talk of nothing 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



355 



He oido decir, he sabido que 

Esta es buena noticia 

No ha oido vm. hablar de la 

guerra ? 
No se dice nada de ella 
Se habla de un sitio 

Se dice que esta sitiada 

Se ha levantado el sitio 
Pero han vuelto a ponerle 
Ha habido algun combate 

naval ? 
Se decia, pero salio falso 

Al contrario, hablan de una 

batalla 
Esta novedad requiere confir- 

macion 
Quien se la coraunico ? 
De buena parte me viene 

El Senor N . . . . me la dijo 

Cree vm. que tengamos pa- 
ces ? 

Hay mucha apariencia 

Para conmigo, creo que no 

En que se funda vm. ? 

En que veo que los ^nimos 
de entrambas partes estan 
muy poco inclinados a la 
paz 

Sin embargo todos necesitan 
de la paz 

Sobre todo los comerciantes 
y mercaderes 

La guerra hace mucho dano 
al comercio 

Sin duda, la paz es mas ven- 
tajosa al comercio 

Que se dice en la corte ? 

Se habla de armar una flota de 

veinte navios de guerra 
Hablan de una espedicion 



I heard, I have knoicn that 
This is a good piece ofneics 
Have you not heard speak of 

the war ? 
Nothing is said of it 
They talk of a siege 

They say that is besieged 

They have raised the siege 
But they have laid it again 
Ha^ there been any sea- 

fight? 

They said so, but it proved 
false 

On the contrary, they talk 
of a battle 

This news requires confirma- 
tion 

Who communicated it to you? 

It comes to me from good aU" 
thority 

Mr, iV . . . . told it me 

Do you think we shall have a 
peace ? 

There is a great probability 

For my part, I believe not 

What grounds have you ? 

Because I see the minds of 
both parties are very little 
inclined to peace 

Every body wants peace^ 
however 

Especially merchants and 
traders 

War does a great detriment 
to trade 

Without question, peace is 
more advantageous to com- 
merce 

What do they say at court ? 

They talk of fitting out a 
fleet of twenty men of war 

They talk of an expedition 



356 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Cuando se cree que la escua- 

dra saldra ? 
No se dice, no se sabe 
Adonde ira la Princesa ? 
Unos dicen a Windsor, otros 

a Kew 
Que dice la Gaceta? 
No la he leido 
Hablandole sinceramente, los 

designios de la corte son 

tan secretes que nadie 

puede saberlos 
Poco se me da de los nego- 

cios de estado 
No me meto jamas en arre- 

glar el estado 
Hablemos de noticias parti- 

culares 
Como esta el Senor D . . . . ? 
Cuando le ha visto vm. ? 
Ayer le vi 

Es verdad lo que dicen de el ? 
Que se dice de el ? 
Dicen que rino al juego 

Con quien ? 

Con un caballero Frances 

Han peleado ? 

Si, Senor, pelearon 

Esta herido ? 

Dicen que salio herido mor- 

talmente 
Lo siento, es hombre de bien 

Sobre que rifieron ? 

Lo ignoro enteramente 

Se dice que le desmintio 

No lo puedo creer 

Ni yo tampoco 

Sea lo que fuere, presto se sa- 

br^ 
En su casa lo preguntare 



When do they think thejleet 

will sail? 
It is not said, it is not known 
Where will the Princess go ? 
Some say to Windsor^ others 

to Kew 
What says the Gazette ? 
1 have not read it 
To speak freely y the designs 

of the court are so secret , 

that nobody can know them 

I care little about state af 

fairs 
I never meddle with settling 

the nation 
Let us talk of private news 

How is Mr, D . . ..? 

When have you seen him ? 

I saw him yesterday 

Is what is said of him true ? 

What do they say of him ? 

They say that he quarrelled 
at the game 

With whom ? 

With a French gentleman 

Have they fought ? 

Yes J Sir, they fought 

Is he wounded? 

They say he came out mortal- 
ly wounded 

I am sorry for itj he is an 
honest man 

About what did they quarrel ? 

I am quite ignorant of it 

They say he gave him the lie 

I cannot believe it 

Nor I neither 

Be what it may, it will soon 
be known 

I will inquire about it at his 
house 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



'^bl 



Dial. XVII. Entre dos ami- 
gos. 

Que ! es vm. ? 

De donde viene^ que no me 

mira vmd. ? 
Cierto que no reparaba en 

vm. 
No le veia 
Pasa vm. cerca de mi, me 

toca con el codo, y no me 

ve ? 
Iba cavilando en algo 

Pensaba vm. quizas en su 

querida 
Oti'os negocios tengo en mi 

cabeza 
Que negocios ? 
Hallandome escaso de dine- 

ro, voy d ver 4 un sugeto 

que me debe 
E" iba pensando, sobre si le 

mandaria arrestar en caso 

de no pagarme 

Vive lejos de aqui ? 
-V cuatro pasos de aqui 
Esta vm. cierto de hallarle 

en casa ? 
Creo que le hall are a estas 

horas 
Se estara vm. mucho tiempo ? 
No un cuarto de hora 
Despache vm. pues, que le 

voy a esperar en este cafe 

Estare con vm. luego 

Ya de vuelta ? 

Como lo ve vm. 

Le hall^ vm, ? 

Si, Senor 

Le pago a vm. ? 



Dial XVir. Between two 
friends. 

What / is it you ? 

How comes it, that you do 

not look at me ? 
Indeed I did not take notice 

of you 
I did not see you 
You pass close by me, touch 

me with your elbow, and do 

not see me ? 
I was cogitating about some- 
thing 
Perhaps you icere thinking 

of your love 
I have other business in my 

head 
TV hat business ? 
Being in 2vant of money, I 

am going to see a person 

who owes me 
And I was thinking whether 

I should cause him to be 

arrested in case he does not 

pay me 
Does he live far from here ? 
Four steps from here 
Are you sure to find him at 

home? 
I believe I shall fi?id him at 

this time 
Shall you stay long ? 
Not a quarter of an hour 
Make haste then, 1 go and 

wait for you in this cafee- 

house 
I shall be zmth you presently 
Are you returned already ? 
Jls you see 
Did you fin d him ? 
Yes, Sir 
Did he pay you f 



358 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Gracias & Dios 

Lo celebro mucho 

Pero si no le hubiera pagado, 

yo le hubiera prestado di- 

nero 
No le hubiera faltado dinero 

Mi bolsa estaba a su servicio 

Se lo estimo mucho 

Nos quedarnos aqui ? 

N05 vamos a beber una bo- 

tella, para pasar media hora 

juntos 
En hora buena, pero quiero 

pagarla yo 
Cuando se haya bebido ha- 

bl^aremos deeso 
Vamonos 
Le voy siguiendo 

Didl. XVIII. Del escribir 
una carta. 

No es hoy dia de correo ? 

Porque? 

Porque he de escribir una 

carta 
A' quien escribe vm. ? 
A^ mi hermano 
No est4 en la ciudad ? 
Noj Senor, est4 en el campo 
En que campo ? 
En las aguas de Tunbridge 
Cuanto tiempo hace ? 
Quince dias 
Deme vmd. una hoja de papel 

doradoj una pluma y tinta 
Entre vm. en mi gabinete, y 

hallara sob re la mesa reca- 

do de escribir 
No hay plumas 
Ahi estdn en el tintero 

Nada vales 



Thank God 

I am very glad of it 

But if he had not paid you^ 

1 would have lent you 

money 
You should not have wanted] 

money 

My purse was at your service 
I am much obliged to you 
Shall we stay here ? 
Noy let us go and drink a 

bottle y to pass half an hour 

together 
With all my hearty but I will 

treat you 
We will talk of it when we 

ha^'e drank it 
Let us go away 
I am following you. 

Dial. XVIII. Of writing a 
letter. 

Is not this a post-day ? 

Why ? 

Because I have a letter to 
write 

Whom do you write to ? 

To my b? other 

Is he not in town ? 

Noy Sir, he is in the country 

In what part of the country ? 

He is at Tunbridge-wells 

How long since ? 

A fortnight 

Give me a sheet of gilt pa- 
per ^ a pen and ink 

Step in my closet^ and you 
will find upon the table 
what is necessary to write 

There are no pens 

There they are in the, ink- 
stand 

They are good for nothing 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



359 



AUi hay otras 

No estan cortadas estas plu- 

mas 
Adonde esta su corta plumas? 
Sabe vm. cortar plumas ? 
Las corto a mi modo 
Esta no es mala 
Es bastantemente buena 
Mientras acabo esta carta, ha- 

game vmd. el favor de ha- 

cer un pliego de estos pa- 

peles 
Que sello quiere vm. que le 

ponga ? 
Sellela vm. con mis armas 6 

con mi cifra 
Que lacre le he de poner ? 
Ponga vm. rojo 6 negro, no 

importa 
No bastaran obleas? 
Es lo mismo 
Ha puesto vm. la fecha ? 
Creo que si, pero no he fir- 

mado 
Que dia del mes tenemos ? 
El diez, el veinte, &c. 
Pliegue vm. esta carta 
Pongale el sobrescrito 
Cierrela vm. y sellela 
Adonde esti la arenilla ? 
En la salvadera 
Deseque su escritura con 

teleta 
Como envia vm. sus cartas ? 
Las remito por el harriero, 6 

por el correo 
Mi criado las llevara al cor- 
reo, si vm. gustare confi- 

drselas 
Lleva las cartas del senor al 

correo, y no te se olvide el 

franquearlas 
No tengo dinero 



There are some others 
These pens are not inade 

Where is your pen-knife ? 

Can you make pens ? 

I make them after my fashion 

This is not had 

It is good enough 

While I finish this letter, be 
so kind as to make a pack- 
et of these papers 

What seal will yon have me 

put to it ? 
Seal it with my coat of arms 

or loith my cypher 
What imx shall I put to it ? 
Put either red or black, no 

matter 
Will not wafers suffice ? 
It is all one 

Have you put the date ? 
I believe I have, but I have 

not signed it 
What day of the month is this} 
The tenth, the twentieth, Sfc. 
Fold up this letter 
Put the superscription to it 
Close it and seal it 
Where is the sand? 
In the sand-box 
Dry your writing with hlot^ 

ting-paper 
How do you send your letters ? 
I send them by the carrier, 

or by the post 
My man shall carry them to 

the post, if you will trust 

thtm to him 
Carry the genthman^s letters 

to the post ofire, and do 

not forget to free them 
I have no money 



360 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Ahl le tienes, ve presto y 

vuelve luego 
Estare de vuelta en menos de 

medio cuarto de hora 
Ha llegado el correo ? 
Ahora acaba de Uegar 
Hay cartas para mi ? 
Creo que si 

Porque no las has traido? 
Ann no se entregaban 



There is some^ go quick and 
come back immediateiy 

I will he back in less than 
half a quarter of an hour 

Has the mail come ? 

It is just arrived 

Are there letters for me ? 

I believe so 

Why did you not bring them ? 

They were not^ delivered yet. 



Di^l. XIX. Del trocar. Dial, XIX. Of exchanging. 



Quiere vm. trocar su reloj ? 

Con que ? 

Con mi espada 6 espadin 
En hora buena. pero cuanto 
me dara vm. de vueha ? 

Cuanto me pide vm. ? 
Me dara vm. doce pesos 

En cuanto aprecia vm. su 

reloj ? 
En treinta y seis pesos 
No vale tanto 
Es viejo 

Lo confiesoj pero anda bien 
No le volvere yo nada 
Mi espada vale tanto como su 

reloj 
Ciemmente se burla vm. 
No, Sewor 
Que espada es esta ? 
Acabo ie comprarla en la 

espaderia 
Es la gudrnicion de cobre 

dur-ido ? 
Bella pregunta no ve vm. que 

es de platH s;>bixdorada ? 
Es el pu'io de plata ? 
Sin duda que lo es 



Will you exchange your 

watch ? 
For what ? 
For my sword 
With all my heart, but how 

much will you give me in 

return ? 
How much do you ask me ? 
You will give me twelve dol- 
lars 
What do you value your 

ivntch at ? 
At thirty -six dollars 
It is not worth so much 
It is old 

I own it J but it goes ivell 
I loill return you nothing 
My sword is worth as much 

as your watch 
You joke surely 
No, Sir 

What sword it this ? 
I have just bought it at the 

stcord cutler^s 
Is the hilt of gilt copper ? 

A fine question ! do not you 

see it is silver gilt ? 
Is the hilt of silver ? 
Without doubt it is so 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



361 



Cuanto 1<3 costo a vm. este 

espadin ? 
A^ como le sale ? 
JVIe cuesta treinta pesos 
Me ha de dar vm. pues seis 

pesos de vuelta 
No lo hare por cierto 
Bien, degese de ello 
Vea vm. si quiere trocar 

igual por igual.f^ 
Buena esta esta ! 
No es tan facil enganarrae 

como le parece 
Pues, vayasinnada de vuelta 
Hecho, en hora buena 

Dial. XX. De losjuegos en 
general; y -primer o de tl 
de los dados, 

Juega vm. algunas voces? 
^\^ Senor, pero jamas juego 

sino para dlvertirme 
Mas, me parece, que el juego 
es una diversion muy peli- 
grosa 
'^i, cuando se juega mucho 

dinero 
Pero siempre juego poco di- 
nero 
Con que la perdida 6 ganan- 

cia es una €ortedad 
Juega vm. 4 los juegos de 

suerte, 6 de habilidad ? 
Que enti«nde vm. por juegos* 

de suerte ? 
Juegos de naipes, dados, &c. 
Y por los de habilidad ? 
El agedrez, las damas, los 

bolos, el truco, &c. 
Juega vm. mucho d los da- 
dos ? 
Muy rara vez 
Porque ? 
31 



How much did this sword cost 

you ? 
What does it come to you at ? 
It costs me thirty dollars 
You must give me six dollars 

to boot then 
I will not do it certainly 
Well, leave it 
See whether you wilt change 

even ? 
This is a good one ! 
It is not so easy to take me 

in as you think 
Well, exchange even 
Done, with all my heart. 

Dial XX. Of gaming, in 
general ; and first of that 
of dice. 

Do you play sometimes ? 
Yes, Sir, but I never play 

only to divert myself 
But, methinks, gaming is a 

vci J dangerous diversion 

Yes, when one plays deep, 

high, or for much money 
But I alio ays play for a small 

matter or little money 
And so the loss or gain is in- 
considerable 
Do you play at games of 

chance, or of skill? 
What do you mean by games 

of chance ? 
Games at cards, dice, 8fc. 
And by those of skill? 
Chess, draughts, bowls, bil- 
liards, ^c. 
Do you play a great deal at 

dice ? 
Very seldom 
Why ? 



362 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, 



Porque hay muchos trampo- 

sos muy astutos 
Se corre mucho riesgo con 

esos rateros, pues parecen 

hombres de forma 
Tienen dados falsos 
Vaya, a que juego jugaremos? 

A^ el que vm. quisiere 
Jugaremos k los naipes? 
Como le gustare 
Juguemos al hombre, d los 

cientos 
Vayan los cientos 
Es un juego muy de moda 
Denos dos barajas y unos 

tantos 
Que jugaremos ^ cada juego ? 

Juguemos un peso para pasar 

el tiempo 
Jugamos partida doble ? 
Como quisiere 
Cuantos tantos me da.vm. ? 
Me pide vm. tantos yjuega 

tambien como yo 
Est^ cabal esta baraja ? 
No, le falta un naipe 
Quite vmd los naipes bajos 
Veamos quien da 
Soy mano 
Vm. da el naipe 
Barage vm. las cartas 
Todas las figuras estan juntas 

De vm los naipes 

A'' mi me falta una carta 

Vuelva vm. ^ dar 

Levante vm. 

Tiene vm. sus cartas ? 

Creo que est^n cabales 

Ha descartado vm. ? 

Cuantas toma vm. ? 



Because there are many dex- 
terous sharpers 
One runs a great danger with 
those cheats, because they 
appear like gentlemen 
They have loaded dice 
Welly what game shall we 

play at ? 
Which you please 
Shall we play at cards ? 
As you please ' 
Let us play at ombre, at 
piquet ^ 

Let us play at piquet 
It is a game much in fashion 
Give us two packs and some 

counters 
What shall we play each 

game ? 
Let us play a dollar to pass 

away time 
Do we play lurches ? 
As you please 

What odds do you give me ? 
You ask me odds and you 

play as well as I 
Is this pack whole ? 
No, a card is wanting to it 
Throw out the low cards 
Let us see who deals 
I have the hand 
You deal the cards 
Shuffle the cards 
All the court-cards are to- 

get her 
Deal away 
I want a card 
Deal again 
Cut, rise 

Have you your cards? 
I believe thpy are exact 
Have you discarded ? 
How many do you take in ? 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



363 



Tomolas todas 

No, dejo una 

Tengo mal juego 

Ha de tener vm bello juego, 

pues yo nada tengo 
Mi juego me apura 
Diga vm su juego 
Cuanto de punto ? 
Cincuenta, sesenta, &c. 
Bueno, buen punto 
No sirven 

He descartado la partida 
Sesta mayor, quinta al Hey, 6 

cuarta de caballo, tercera 

a la sota 6 de diez 
Otro tanto tengo, igual 
Tres ases, tres reyes, &c. son 

buenos ? 
No, tengo un catorce 
Tengo catorce de caballos 
Vaya jugando 
Juego copa, espada, oro, 

basto 
El as, el rey, el caballo, la 

sota, el diez, el nueve, el 

ocho, el siete 
Hago un pique, repique, ca- 
pote 
Gano los naipes 
Tengo siete bazas 
He perdido 
Ha ganado vm. 
Me debe vm. un peso 
Me lo debia vm. 
Estamos pues en paz 
Vaya otra partida 
En bora buena, con mucho 

gusto 

Dial. XXI. Del jugar al 
agtdrez. 

En que emplearemos la tar- 
de? 



I take them all 

Noy I leave one 

I have bad cards, a bad game 

You must have good cards, 
since I have nothing 

My cards puzzle me 

Call your game 

How much is your point ? 

Fifty, sixty, ^c. 

Good, it is a good point 

They are not good 

I have laid out the game 

Asixieme major, a quint to the 
king, or quart to the queen, 
a tierce to the knave or ten 

Ihave just as much, it is equal 

Are three aces, three kings, 
8fc. good? 

No, 1 have fourteen 

I am fourteen by queens 

Play on 

I play a heart, spade, dia- 
mond, club 

The ace, the king, the queen, 
the knave, the ten, the nine, 
the eight, the seven 

I make a pique, repique, a 
capot 

I loin the cards 

I have seven tricks 

I have lost 

You have won 

You owe me a dollar 

You owed it to me 

We are then even, quits 

Let us play another game 

With all my heart, with great 
pleasure 

Dial. XXI. Of playing at 
chess. 

How shall we spend the after- 
noon ? 



364. 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Juguemos al agedrez 

JuguemoSj en hora biiena 

Pero juega vm. mejor que yo 

Es vm. mas fuerte que yo 

Nolo crea vm. 

Me ha ganado vm. siempre 

No jugare mas con vm., si no 
me diere alguna ventaja 

Es preciso que me de un alfil 
y la mano 

En verdad que no puedo, ju- 
ega vm. tan bien como yo 

Vea vm. si quiere jugar i la 
par 

Muy bien, lo hare una vez 

Cuanto jugaremos ? 

Siempre juego poco dinero 

Vaya medio peso cada juego 

Juego primero 
Tomo este peon 
Me alegro, pues voy a tomar 
este alfil y darle jaque 

Roque me llamo 

Nada gana vm. en eso, pues 

ci su roque 6 torre me llevo 

con mi caballo 
Pero como resguardara \~m. 

6b su reina ? 
Dandole jaque y mate con ml 

aliil y mi roque 
He perdido el juego, ya no 

puedo mover el rey 
Me debe vm. pues medio peso 
Asi es 

Pero vm. me lo debia antes 
Bien, estamos en paz 
Denos vm. un tablero 
Juegue vm. primero 
Soplo este peon 
Haga darna este peon 



Let us play at chess 

Let us play, I am ivilling 

But you play better than I 

You are an over-match for me 

Do not think it 

You always have beat me 

I icill play no more with you, 

unless you give me some odds 
You must give me a bishop 

and the move , 
Indeed I cannot, you play as 

tvell as I do 
See if you have a mind to 

play even 
Well, Iivill do it for once 
What shall ice play for ? 
I ahvoys play for a small 

matter 
Let us play for half a dollar 

a game 
I have the move 
I take this pawn 
I am glad of it, fori am go- 
ing to take this bishop and 

check you 
I castle 
You get nothing by that ; for 

I take your rook or castle 

with my knight 
Bat how will you save your 

que en ? 
By checkmating you with my 

bishop and rook 
I have lost the game, I can 

no longer move the king 
You owe me half a dollar then 
It is so 

But you owed it me before 
Then, we are quits or even 
Give us a draughts-board 
I give you the move, play first 
I huff this man 
King that man 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



365 



Cuantas damas tiene vm. ? 
Tengo dos 

Coma vm, este, que luego co- 
mere tres 
Pierdo el juego 

Dial XXII. Del jugar a la 
pelota, 

Vea vm. que bello dia hace 

Aprovechemonos de este dia 
tan hermoso 

Que haremos hoy ? 

El buen tiempo nos convida 
a jugar 6 4 pa sear 

En que juego hemes de en- 
tretenernos ? 

El de pelota es el mejor pa- 
ra el egercicio 

Pero es juego mas de invier- 
no que de verano 

Sudaremos menos, si jugamos 
con raquetas 

Vamos al juego de pelota 

Jugaremos con palas 

Hagaraos la partida 

Esta vm. commigo 

No importa como estaraos 

Este esta con nosotros 

Es vm. mejor jugador que yo 

Estese cada uno en su lugar 

Mantengase detras de mi, y 

cojala pelota 
Paso por encima de mi 
La cogi en el aire 
Rechace la pelota 
Es vm. mal companero 
No ha ganado vm. aun 
Aun puede vm. perder 
Tenemos la superioridad 
Perdio vm., ganamos 
Cuanto jugamos? 
31* 



How many kings have you ? 

I have two 

Take this^ then I shall take 

three 
I lose the game. 

Dial XXII. Of playing at 
tennis. 

See what a fine day it is 
Let us improve this so fair a 

day 
What shall ive do to-day ? 
Thejine weather invites us to 

play or to walk 
What play shall we amuse 

ourselves at ? 
That of tennis is the best for 

exercise 
But it is a play fitter for 

ivinter than summer 
We shall perspire less, if we 

play with rackets 
Let us go to the tennis-court 
We will play with battledoors 
Let us make the match 
You are with me 
It is no matter who and who 
He is on our side 
You are a better player than 1 
Let every one stand at his 

place 
Stand behind me^ and catch 

the ball 
It flew over me 
I caught it in the air 
Strike the ball back 
You are a bad second 
You have not beat yet 
You may lose yet 
We have the best of it 
You have lost^ we have won 
What did tee play for ? 



266 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, 



Dos pesos 

Ha puesto vm. en el juego ? 

No, pero ahi esta mi dinero 

Es lo mismo 

Mariana jugaremos otra vez 

Cuando vind. quisiere 

Dial. XXI If. I)e las diver- 
siones del campoy particu- 
larmente de la caza y de 
la pesca, 

Senor, me alegro de ver a 

vm. ; adonde ha estado tan 

largo tiempo ? 
Adonde se mete vm.? 
Dos meses ha que estamos 

en una casa de campo 
Ha venido vm. a la ciudad 

para quedarse ? 
No, Senor, vuelvo matiana 

por la manana 
Como pasa vm. su tiempo en 

el campo ? 
Parte de el empleo enestudiar 
Pero cuales son sus diver- 

siones, despues de sus ne- 

gocios series ? 
Voy tal vez a cazar 
A^ que caza ? 
A^ voces a la caza del venado, 

4 voces de la liebre 
Tiene vm. buenos perros ? 
Tenemos muchos perros de 

muestra 
Dos galgos, dos galgas, cua- 

tro jateos, y tres perdi- 



No caza vm. aves ? 

Caza vm. a voces con la es- 

copeta ? 
Si, JSefior, muy a menudo 
Sobre que tira vm. ? 



Two dollars 

Have you staked? 

Noy but there is my money 

It is all one 

To-morrow we will play again 

When you please. 

Dial XXni. Of country 
sports, especially of hunt- 
ing and fishing. 

Sir, I am overjoyed to see 
you ; where have you been 
so long a while ? 

Where do you keep yourself? 

We have been these two 
months at a country-house 

Are you come to town to 
stay ? 

Noy Sir, I go back to-morrow 
morning 

How do you pass your time 
in the country? 

I bestow a part of it on books 

But which are your diver- 
sions, after your serious 
busiriess ? 

I go sometimes a hunting 

What do you hunt ? 

We sometimes hunt a stag, 
sometimes a hare 

Have you good dogs? 

We have a large pack of 
hounds 

Two grey-hound dogs, two 
grey-hound bitches, four 
tenners, and three setting- 
dogs 

Do you not go a fowling ? 

Do you go a shooting some- 
times ? 
Yes, Sir, very often 
What do you shoot at ? 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



367 



Sobre todo genero de caza, 

como perdices, faisanesj 

gallinetas, conejos, Szc. 
Tira vm. al vuelo la pieza 6 

corriendo ? 
De ambas maneras 
Corao coge vm los conejos ? 
A' veces con redes, y a veces 

4 escopetazos 
Y las codornices ? 
Soleraos tomarlas con una 

red y un perro perdiguero 
Es vm. amigo de pescar ? 
Muchisimo 

Pesca vm. a menudo con red ? 
Muy raras veces 
Mas quiero pescar con la 

cafia y anzuelo 
La pesca y la caza son diver- 

siones muy nobles 
El Rey mas rico y mas pobre 

de Europa no se divierte 

en otra cosa 
Un dia quiza pensaran sus 

ministros que sus vasallos 

estan anualmente dando 4 

sus vecinos millones por 

pescado salado y bediondo 
Tienen no obstante muy bu- 

enos peces en sus costas 
Pero no toman el trabajo de 

curarlos 
Esto sucede por falta de ani- 

mar la pesca 
Y de otros muchos motives 
Coge vm. muchos peces en 

su estanque ? 
Que hace vm. cuando no caza 

6 pesca ? 
Jugamos a la bola, al truco, 

6 a los bolos 
Segun esto, no puede vm. es- 

tar cansado del campo.^ 



Ml manner of game, as part- 
ridges, pheasants, sand- 
pipers, rabbits, ^c. 
Do you shoot fiying or run- 
ning ? 
Both ways 

How do you catch rabbits ? 
Sometimes with nets, and 

sometimes with a gun 
And the quails ? 
We catch them most commonly 
with a net and a setting-dog 
Do you like fishing? 
Extremely 

Do you fish often with a net ? 
Very seldom 
I prefer fishing with a line 

and hook 
Fishing and hunting are 

very noble diversions 
The richest and poorest king 
of Europe has no other 
diversion 
One day perhaps their minis- 
ters will think of their sub- 
jects giving aioay yearly to 
their neighbours millions 
for stinking salt-fish 
They have notwithstanding 
very goodfish on their coast 
But they do not take the trou- 
ble to cure it 
This arises from not giving 
encouragement to fisheries 
And from many other causes 
Do you catch much fish in 

your pond ? 
What do you do when you 

neither hunt nor fish? 
We pifiy at bowls, at bil- 
liards, or nine-pins 
According to this, you cannot 
be tired with the country ? 



368 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Asi le parece d vm. y es lo 

contrario 
Ya empiezo a desear la ciu- 

dad, y espero presto pa- 

sarme 4 ella 

Dial. XXIV. Del ir a la 

corned la. 

Se dice que hoy representan 

una pieza nueva 
Es comedia, tragedia, opera, 

6 entremes? 
Es una tragedia 
Como la lltiman ? 

La 

Quien es su autor ? 

El Senor 

Es esta la primera represen- 

tacion ? 
No, Senor, ya se ha represen- 

tado tres veces 
Este es el dia del autor 
Como se recibio en las pri- 

meras representaciones 
Con universal aplauso 
El autor era ya celebre 

Y esta ultima tragedia ha au- 

mentado mucho su fama 
Iremos a verla ? 
De muy buena gana 
Yoy a mandar al cochero 

que apronte el coche 
Iremos a un aposento ? 
En hora buena, pero mas 

quisiera ir al patio 
Porque ? 
Porque podemos ver y oir 

mejor all^ que en los 

palcos 
Que tal le parece la sinfonia? 
Muy buena me parece 
Los corredores est^n ya llenos 



So it seems to you^ and it is 

otherwise 
I already begin to long for 

the city^ and I hope short- 

ly to proceed to it. 

Dm/. XXIV. Of going to 
the play. 

They say there is a new play 
acted to day / 

Is it a comedy J a tragedy^ an 
ojjera, or a farce ? 

It is a tragedy 

How do they name it 

The 

Who is its author? 

Mr. 

Is this the first representa- 
tion ? 

Noy Sir, it has been already 
acted three times 

This is the author\s night 

Ho7v was it received on the 
first representations ? 

With universal applause 

The author was already fa- 
mous 

And this last tragedy has 
much increased his fame 

Shall we go and see it ? 

With all my heart 

I am going to bid the coach- 
man to get the coach ready 

Shall we go to a box ? 

As you please^ but I had 
leather go to the pit 

WJiy ? 

Because we can see and hear 
better there than in the 
boxes 

How do you like the overture ? 

I think it is very fine 

The galleries are full already 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, 



369 



Y como vni. lo ve, estamos 
muy apretados en el patio 

No cabeii las damas en los 

aposentos 
Nunca vi la casa tan llena 
Estas Senoras estan muy 

bien vestidas 
Ye vrn. aquella senora en el 

apcsento del Rey 
Jamas he visto rostro tan her- 

moso en mi vida 
Quien es ? 
La Duquesa de 

Y quien es la Senora joven 
que esta con ella? 

Su hermana, la Senora de 

Pero ya se levanta la cortina, 

escuchemos 
Tendremos antes el Prologo 

El segundo acto esta acabado 
Las escenas estan muy bellas 

Don es muy buen actor 

Este es el ultimo acto 
Acabose la pieza — como le 

gusta a vmd. ? 
MuchisimOj me parece esce- 

lente tragedia y muy bien 

representada 
Tuvo grande aplauso 
Abora tendremos el Epilogo 
Quien lo dice ? 

La Senora 

Lo dice con mucho animo 
Quiere vmd. qnedar para ver 

la Pantomima ? 
No, ya la he visto, y como es 

tarde, haremos mejor de 

irnos 
De todo mi corazon 
Iremos a la O^pera manaiia 



And as yon see, we are very 
much crowded in the pit 

The ladies cannot be contain- 
ed in the boxes 

I never saw the house so full 

These ladies are very well 
dressed 

Do you observe that lady in 
the King^s box 

1 never have in my life seen 
so beautiful a face 

Who is she ? 

The Duchess of 

And who is that young lady 
who is with her ? 

Her sister, Lady 

But the curtain 7'ises cdready^ 
let ns attend 

We shcUl first have the Pro- 
logue 

The second act is over 

The scenes are very fne 

Mr. - — is a very good actor 

This is the last act 

The piece is over — how do 
you like it ? 

Very much ; I think it an 
excellent tragedy and very 
well performed 

It recieved great applause 

Now for the Epilogue 

Who speaks it ? 

Mrs. 

She speaks it ivith great spirit 

Will you stay to see the Pan- 
tomime ? 

No, I have seen it already^ 
and as it is late, we had 
better go away 

With all my heart 

We will go to the opera t^ 
morroiv. 



370 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES, 



Dial. XXV. Del vestirse. Dial. 



XXV. Of dressing 
oneself. 



Senor Maestro, trae vm. mi 

yestido entero? 
Si, Senor, aqui est^ 
Le estaba aguardando ; prue- 

bemelo 
Quiere vm. probar la casaca ? 
Veamos si esta bien hecha 
Creo que le gustar^ 4 vm. 
Me parece muy larga 
Ya no se llevan tan cortas 

como antes 
Se usan largas ahora 
Abotoneme vm. 
Me ajusta demasiado 
Es preciso que ajuste bien 
Este vestido le coge muy bien 

el talle 
No son las mangas demasiado 

largas y anchas ? 
No, Senor, van muy bien 
Se llevan ahora muy largas y 

anchas 
Los pantalones son demasia- 
do cortos 
Los calzones son muy estre- 

chos 
Es la moda 
Deme la chupa 
Le va muy bien este vestido 

Pero las medias no vienen 
con este pano 

Que le parece demi sombrero? 

Es un castor hermoso 

Que galon le pondra vm. ? 

Un galon de oro con una he- 
billa de diamantes 

Me compro vm. las ligas co- 
mo le dige? 

Si, Senor, ahi estan 



Master, do you bring my full 

suit of clothes? 
Yes, Sir, here it is 
I was icaiting for you ; try 

it on me 
Will you try the coat ? 
Let us see if it is well made 
I believe it will ptease you 
It seems to me very long 
They do not wear them now 

so short as formerly 
They wear them long now 
Button me 
It is too close 
It ought to be very close 
This suit fits your shape very 

well 
Are not the sleeves too long 

and too wide ? 
No, Sir^ they fit very well 
They wear them now very 

long and wide 
The pantaloons are too short 

The breeches are very strait 

It is the fashion 

Give me the waistcoat 

This suit becomes you very 

well 
But the stockings do not 

match this cloth 
What do you say to my hat ? 
It is a beautiful beaver 
What lace will you put to it ? 
A gold lace with a diamond 

buckle 
Did you buy me the garters 

as I told you ? 
Yes, Siry there they are 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



371 



Son estas medias de seda de 

Paris 6 de Londres ? 
Son de Francia 
Cuanto las venden ? 

Tres pesos el par 

Es bastante barato, siendo 

tan finas 
Muchacho, ha venido el za- 

patero ? 
No, Senor, no ha venido 
Corre pues k su casa, y dile 

que me traiga mis zapatos 
Senor, aqui esta, le encontre 

en el camino 
Son estos mis zapatos ? 
Si, Sefior 
Pongamelos vm. 
Estan muy ajustados 
Me aprietan un poco 
Pongalos en la horma para 

ensancharlos 
Bastantemente se ensancha- 

ran llevandolos 
Esta piel da de si como un 

guante 
Siento muy bien que me las- 

timaran 
Mis callos lo padeceran 
Me duelen mucho los pies 
El empeine de este zapato no 

vnle nada 
El talon es demasiado bajo 
Las suelas no son bastante fu- 

ertes ni gruesas 
Hagame vm. otro par 
Es vm., Senor, muy dif icil de 

contentar 
Quiere vm probar otro par 

que trage por acaso ? 
En hora buena 
Creo que le iran bien 
Mi pie esta mas descansado 



Are these silk stockings from 

Paris or London ? 
They are from France 
How much do they sell them 

for ? 
Three dollars a pair 
It is cheap enough^ being so 

fine 
Boy J is the shoemaker come ? 

Noy Sir^ he is not come 

Run then to his house, and 

hid him bring me my shoes 
Sir, here he is, I met him on 

the way 
Are these my shoes f 
Yes, Sir 
Put them on me 
They are too tight 
They pinch me a little 
Put them on the last to widen 

them 
They will widen enough by 

wearing them 
This leather stretches like a 

glove 
If eel very sure that they will 

hurt me 
My corns will suffer for it 
My feet ache much 
The upper-leather of this shoe 

is good for nothing 
The heel is too low 
The soles are neither strong 

nor thick enough 
Make me another pair 
You are. Sir, very hard to 

please 
Will you try another pair 

which I brought by chance? 
lam willing 

I believe they ivillfit you 
My foot is more at ease 



372 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Cuanto valen estos zapatos ? 

A^ como los vende vm. ? 

Dos pesos y medio 

Es demasiado caro 

Es precio hecho 

Es uii zapato bien hecho y 

bien cosldo 
Hagame otro par como este 

Tome mi medida 
Ahi tiene su diiiero 
Viva vm. muchos anos, ca- 
ballero 

Di41. XXVI. Del hahlar a 
un n^ozo de caballos. 

Almohaza mi caballo 
Estriega y limpiale bien con 

un manojo de paja 
Mi caballo esta sin herra- 

duras 
Le faltan dos herradurras 
Llevale 4 casa del herrador 
Mandalo herrar 
Llevalo despues al rio 

Le has dado de beber? 

Sij Senor 

Dale su pienso de cebada 

Paseale esta tarde 

Dale tambien salvado 

Ha comido su cebada ? 

E^chale paja ahora 

Ensilla mi caballo y tr^emelo 

Tomale por el freno 
No le hagas correr 
No le recalientes 
Esta can sad o ? 
Quitale el freno 
Ponle en la caballeriza 



What are these shoes worth .^ 

How much do you sell them at? 

Iwo dollars and a half 

It is too dear 

It is ajixedprice 

It is a shoe well made and 

well stitched 
Make me another pair like 

this 
Take iny measure 
There is your ntoney 
May you live many years. Sir 
1 thank you, Sir. 

Dial. XXVI. Of speaking 
to a groom. 

Curry my horse 

Rub and clean him loell with 
a loisp of straw 

My horse is unshod; is with- 
out shoes 

He IV ants two shoes 

Take him to the farrier 

Get him shod 

Lead him afterwards to the 
river 

Have you watered him ? 

Yes, Sir 

Give him his allowance of 
barley 

Walk him this afternoon 

Give him also some bran 

Has he eaten his barley ? 

Give him now some straw 

Saddle my horse and bring 
him to me 

Take him by the bridle 

Do not make him run 

Do not overheat him 

Is he tired ? 

Unbridle him 

Put him in the stable. 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



373 



Diil. XXVII. De ir a un 
viage. 

Vengo a despedinne de vin. 

y a recibir sus ordenes 
Adonde va vin., Senor ? 
Voy a Madrid 
Cuando parte vm.? 
En este instante 
Va vm. a caballo 6 en coche ? 

A^ caballo 

Muchacho, traeme mi caballo 

Aqui esta, Senor 

Esta bien almohazado ? 

Muy bien, Seaor 

Cuantas les^uas hav de aqui a 

M 1? 

Diez leguas 

Son leguas largas ? 

No, Senor, son las mas cortas 

de Espana 
Le parece a vm, que poda- 

mos caminar tanto hoy ? 
Sin duda, no es tan tarda 
Daran presto las doce 
Tiene vm. bastante tiempo 

para llegar antes de po- 

nerse el sol 
Hay buen camino ? 
Muy hermoso 

Ningun pantano se encuentra 
Pero tiene vm. bosques que 

atravesar y rios que pasar 
Hay peligro en el camino 

re d r 
IS'o se h3bla de que bay a la- 
drones en los bosques ? 

No se dice nada de esto 
No hay que temer nada ni de 
dia ni de noche 
32 



Dial XXVII. Of going on 
a journey. 

I come to bid you farewell 
and take your co nmands 

Where are you goings Sir '? 

I am going to Madrid 

When do you set out ? 

Presently ; this minute 

Do you go on horseback or 
in a coach ? 

On horseback 

Boy, bring me my horse 

Here he is, Sir 

Is he well curried? 

Very well, ^Sir 

How many leagues is it from 
here to M ? 

Ten leagues 

Are they long leagues ? 

JSo, Sir, they are the shortest 
in Spain 

Do you think we can travel 
so far to day "? 

Without doubt ^ it is not so late 

Twelve o'clock will soon strike 

You have time enough to ar- 
rive before the sun sets 

Is there a good road? 
Very fine 

You meet with no quagmire 
But you have woods to go 

through and i^ivers to cross 
Is there any danger upon the 

highway? 
Do you hear whether there 

are any highioaymen in the 

woods ? 
There is no talk of it 
There in nothing to fear either 

by day or night 



374 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Es un camino en que anda 

gente siempre 
Que camino he de tomar ? 
Cuando este vm. cerca de la 

primera aldea, tomara 4 

mano derecha 
He de subir el monte ? 
Noj Senor, degelo vm. a la 

izquierda 
Es el enmino dificultoso en 

losbosques ? 
No, Sefior ; vaya vm. siempre 

derecho, no se puede estra- 

viar 
Adonde encontraremos el 

rio ? 
A' la salida del bosque 
Se puede vadear, es vade- 

able? 
No, Sefior, se pasa en un barco 
Vamos, caballeros, montemos 
A^ Dios, Senores 
Dios les de buen viage 
Les doy muchas gracias 
JVo quiere vm. echar un 

trago ? 
Como vmd. gustare 
Vaya, 4 su buen viage 



It is a road where you always 

meet with people 
Which ivay must I tales ? 
When you are near the first 

village^ you will take to the 

right 
Must I go up the hill? 
No, Sir, leave it to the left 

Is the way di^cult through 

the 2coods ? 
No, Sir ; go straight along, 

you cannot lose your way 

JVhere shall we come to the 

river ? 
As you come out of the wood 
Can one ford it, is it forda- 

hie? 
No, Sir, people ferry it over 
Come, gentlemen, let us mount 
Farewell, gentlemen 
I wish you a good journey 
I give you many thanks 
Will you not take the parting 

glass ? 
As you please 
Come, to your good journey. 



Di41. XXVIII. En una po- Dial XXVIII. In an Inn. 



Where is the best inn in the 

city ? 
At the sign of the White 

Horse 
In what part of the town 

is it? 
Near the principal church 
Can we lodge here ? 
Yes, Sir, we have fine cham- 

hers and good beds 
Let us alight, gentlemen 



Donde estd la mejor posada 

de la ciudad ? 
Al signo del Caballo Blanco 

En que parage de la villa 

est4 ? 
Cerca de la iglesia mayor 
Podremos alojarnos aqui ? 
Si, Senor, tenemos bellos cu- 

artos y buenas camas 
Apeemonos, Senores 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



375 



Donde esta el mozo de cabal- 

los ? 
Aqui estoy, Sefior 
Toma nuestros caballos 
Llevalos a la caballeriza 
Cuidalos bien 
Veamos, ahora, que nos dar4 

vm. de cenar ? 
Vean vms., Senores, lo que 

mas gustaren 

Denos media docena de pi- 
chones, dos perdices, seis 
codornices, un buen capon 
y una ensalada 

Tendre cuidado de todo ; no 
se inquieten vms. 

No quieren vms. otra cosa ? 

N05 basta con esto ; pero de- 
nos buen vino y fruta 

Les aseguro que les dare 
gusto 

Quieren vms. ir 4 ver sus 
aposentos ? 

Si, llame ^ su camarero 

Al umbra a estos Senores que 
suban 

Haganos cenar cuanto antes 

Antes que se hayan quitado 
las botas, estara la cena 
pronta 

A donde estan nuestros laca- 
yos ? 

Ahi suben con sus balijas 

Han traido nuestras pistolas ? 

Si, Sefior, aqui estan 

Quita mis botines y ve des- 

pues a cuidar de nuestros 

caballos 
IJama para cenar 



Where is the hostler. 



or 



groom '. 
Here 1 am, Sir 
Take our horses 
Lead them to the stable 
Take good care of them 
ISoWy let us see J ivhat ivill yon 

give us for supper ? 
See yourselves, gentlemen, 

what you have most a 

mind to 
Give us half a dozen pigeons, 

a brace of partridges, six 

quails, a good ca^on and 

a sallad 
I will take care of all ; do 

not trouble yourselves 
Will you have nothing else ? 
No, that is enough ; hit give 

us good ivine and fruit 
I shall please you, I warrant 

you 
Will you go and see your 

chambers ? 
Yes, call your chamberlain 
Light the gentlemen that they 

may go up stairs 
Give us our supper as soon 

as possible 
Before your boots are pulled 

off, supper will be got 

ready 
Where are our servants ? 

There they are going up with 
your portmanteaux 

Have they brought our pis- 
tols? 

Yes, Sir, here they are 

Pull off my boots and then 
go and take care of our 
horses 

Call foi^supper 



376 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Senores, la cena estd pronta, 

est4 en la mesa 
Vamos, Senores, a cenar, 

para poder acostarnos tem- 

prano 
Sentemonos a la mesa 
Vm. no come nada ; que 
tiene ? 
No tengo ganas, estoy cansado 
Estoy molido 
Estare mejor en la cama que 

en la mesa 
Tome vmd. dnimo 
Si se siente malo vayase a 

acostar 
Mande calentar su cama 
Que no les impida de cenar, 

voy ^ descansar 

Ha menester vm. algo ? 
Nada quiero sino descansar 
Tengan vms. buenas noches 
Trae los postres^ y di 4 la 

patrona que venga ^ ha- 

blarnos 
Aqui viene 
Senores, les gusta a vms. la 

cena ? 
Si, Sefiora, pero ahora es 

menester satisfacer a vm. 
Cuanto hemos gastado ? 
Que hemos de pagar ? 
El escote no sube mucho 
Vea vm. cuanto le debemos 

por nosotros, nuestros cria- 

dos y caballos 
Por la cena, la cama y el al- 

muerzo 
Todo importa diez pesos 
Me parece que es demasiado 
Al contrario, es muy barato 



Gentlemen^ supper is ready » 

it is on the table 
Let us go to supper, gentle- 

men, that we may go to 

bed early 
Let us sit down at table 
You eat nothing ; lohat ails 

you? 
I have no appetite, lam tired 
I am bruised all Qver 
I shall be better in bed than 

at table 
Take courage 
If youjind yourself ill go to 

bed 
Get your bed icarmed 
That I may not hinder you 

from sapping J I am going 

to rest 
Do you want any thing ? 
I want nothing but rest 
I wish you a good night 
Bring ike dessert, and bid 

the landlady come and 

speak with us 
Here she is coming 
Gentlemen, are you pleased 

with your supper ? 
Yes, mistress, but now we must 

satisfy you 
How much have rve spent ? 
What have we to pay ? 
The reckoning is not high 
See how much we owe you for 

ourselves, our men and our 

horses 
For the supper, bed and 

breakfast 
All amounts to ten dollars 
I think it is too much 
On the contrary, it is rer^ 

cheap 



T\ 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



377 



Maga vm. mismo la cuentaj 

y hallara que no les pido 

demasiado 
Pagareraosle mafiana por la 

mafiana despues del almu- 

erzo 
Como vms. quisieren 
Denos sabanas limpias 
Las sabanas que les envio son 

rauy buenas 
Buenas noches, Sefiora 
Buenas noches les de Dios a 

vms., caballeros ; servidora 

de vms. 
Necesitan vms. de algo ? 
Nad a nos hace falta 
Solo que se haga buen fuego 
Las noches son muy frias 
Es menester cuidarse en 

viage 

Didl. XXIX. Para hahlar 
con los empleados en la^ 
aduanas, 

Traen vms. algo contra las 
ordenes de su magestad, 
del soberano, 6 de la re- 
publica ? 

No, yo no tengo contrabando 
alguno 

Tengo solamente algunos 
efectos que pagan impues- 
tos, y voy 4 declararselos 

Cuanto debo pagar por esto ? 

Es menester darme sus Haves 
Helas aqui. Hagame vmd. 
la gracia de despacharme 
luego, porque tengo mucha 
prisa 
Se lo estimare mucho 
32* 



Reckon yourself^ and you will 
find that I do not ask you 

too much 
We will pay you to-morrow 

morning after breakfast 

As you please 

Let us have clean sheets 

The sheets I send you are 

very good 
Good nighty landlady 
Good nighty gentlemen ; I am 

your servant 

Do you want any thing ? 
We are in want of nothing 
Only that a good fire be made 
The nights are very cold 
One must take care of one^s- 
self on a journey. 

Dial XXIX. To speak with 
the officers in the custom- 
houses. 

Do you bring any thing con- 
trary to the decrees of his 
majesty, of the sovereign^ 
or republic ? 

No, I have no contraband 
goods at all 

I have only some good^ that 
pay duty, and I am going 
to manifest them to you 

How much have I to pay for 
this ? 

You 7nust give me your keys 

Here they are. Be so kind 
as to expedite me directly, 
for I am in great haste 

I shall be much obliged to you 
for it 



378 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUESr 



Ahi tiene vmd. la Have del 
candado ; he aqui la Have 
de la cerradura 

Hagame vmd. la gracia de 
buscar con precaucion, 
porque hay muchas cosas 
que pueden quebrarse 

Ha acabado vmd. ? 

No emplomara vmd. ahora el 
haul y los cofres, para que 
no me los registren otra 
vez ? 

No podria vm., en lugar de 
registrarrae aqui en esta 
puerta, venir a hacerlo en 
la fonda, 6 en la casa 
adonde voy a posar ? 

Gracias, paselo vmd. bien. 
Dios guarde 4 vmd., S°^ 

Di41. XXX. Para una per- 
sona estraviada en una 
ciudad. 

No me haria vmd. el favor de 
decirmCj si estoy lejos del 
barrio de San Francisco, 6 
de la calle de San Pablo ? 

Hay muy lejos de aqui a ? 

Busco la posada del Senor 
6 de la Senora 

Por que lado debo ir ? 

Despuesj dare vuelta a la de- 
recha o a la izquierda ? 

Es aqui que vive el Senor ? 

Quisiera vm, darme su direc- 
cion ? 

Podria vmd. senalarme el 
camino que debo tomar, 
para ir a casa del Se- 
nor ? 



JViere is the key to the pad- 
lock ; here is the keij to 
the lock 

Do me the favour to search 
with care, for there is much 
brittle ivare therein 

Have you done ? 

IFill you not put a lead stamp 
now upon the trunk and 
chests, that ihey may not 
be searched again? 

Could not you, instead of 
searching me here at this 
gate, couie and do it at the 
inn, or house where I am 
going to lodge ? 

1 thank you, farewell. Your 
servant, Sir, 

Dial. XXX. For a person 
who has lost bis way in 
a city. 

Would you not oblige me so 

far as to tell me, whether 

I am a great ivayfrom the 

Ward of St. Francis, or 

Street of St. Paul? 

Is it far from here to ? 

I am looking for the resi- 
dence of Mr. —, or 

Madam 

Which way must I go ? 

Shall I turn, afterwards, to 
the right or left ? 

Does Mr, — — live here ? 

Would you favour me with 
his address ? 

Could you point out to me the 
way 1 must take, in order 
to go to the house of 
Mr. ? 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



Quiere vrnd. conducirme al- 
ia, le pagare bien ; le 
dare 

Pase vin. adelantPj yo le se- 
guire 

No vaya tan a prisa 

Couduzcame vm. por el ca- 
riiino fflcis corto 

Esta calle esta embarazada, 
tomemos otro camino 

Llame vra. ud coche de al- 
quiler 

Cochero, quereis Uevarme ? 

Moro en la calle de 

Dial. XXXI. Un miliiar 
vencedor estableciendose 
en una casa de los venci- 
dos, y hahlando a Jos due- 
nos de la casa. 

No tengais miedo, somos In- 
gleses, x\lemauesj Rusos, 
Franceses, &c. Nuestro 
caracter nacional puede 
sisegiiraros de uuestra gen- 
erosidad, y la obediencia 
que debemos a nuestro so- 
berano es un segundo fia- 
dor. Los vencidos que se 
someten no son para noso- 
tros sino amigos desdicha- 
dos 

Entregaos con seguridad a 
vuesti'as ocupaciones or- 
dinarias ; os prometemos 
seguridad, atenciones, so- 
siego, proteccion y ayuda, 
si necesitareis de ella 

Si mi gente os diere algun 
motivo de queja. recorred 
^ mi con confianza, yo no 



V/ill i/ou lead me tliere, I will 
pay you handsomely ; i 
icill give you 

Go before. I will follow you 

Do not walk so fast 
Lead m^ the shortest way 

This street is obstnicted^ let 

us take another way 
Call for a hackney-coach 

Coachman, will you drive me ? 
I live in the street of . 

Dial, XXXI. A military 
man victorious, quartering 
in a house of the conquer- 
ed, and speaking to the 
masters of the house. 

Don't fenr^ ice are English" 
men, Germans^ Russians, 
Frenchmen, i{c. Our nor 
tional character may as^ 
sure you of our generosity^ 
and the obedience we owe 
to our sovereign is a dou- 
ble pledge, A subdued 
enemy is considered by us 
only as an unfortunate 
friend 

Give yourselves up icith secu- 
rity to your customary 
business, ice promise you 
safety, mildness, tranquil- 
lity, protection and assist- 
ance Af you should want any 

Ifniy people should give you 
any cause of complaint, 
come openly to me ^ I will not 



580 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



sufrire que se pase algo 
que pueda daros disgusto 

No tengais raiedo, un soldado 
valeroso no es temible sino 
en el campo de batalla 

Camaradas, comportemonos 
como hombres de valor ; 
respetemos la desdicha y 
no ocasionemos aqui ni al- 
boroto ni desorden 



suffer any thing to happen 
that may he disagreeable 
to you 

Be not afraidy a brave sol- 
dier is dreadful only on 
the field of battle 

Comrades^ let us behave our- 
selves as bi^ave men ; let us 
respect the unhappy and 
cause here neither trouble 
nor disorder. ' 



FA'BULAS. 



N- B. In looking for words in the Dictionary, the student 
should bear in mind the observations made in pages 17, 18, 
19 and 20, in regard to pronunciation and orthograph\\ 

Remember that the Spanish Academy considers ch^ II and i) 
as distinct characters from r, I and n^ and in its Dictionary 
you must look through all the words beginning with these 
simple characters, before you find those commencing with tb*: 
aforesaid compound. 



Fdbula Primera. 
Los Animates en consejo juntos para elegir un Rey, 

Habiendo muerto el leon, todas las aves y bestias se con- 
o^regaron a su cueva para condolerse con la reina viuda, que 
hacia resonar sus lamentos y gritos en los montes y bosques. 

Despues de los acostumbrados cumplimientos, procedieron 
todos a la eleccion de un rey, la corona del difunto monarca 
fue colocada en medio de la asamblea. 

Su apareute heredero eia demasiado joven y endeble para 
obtener la dignidad real, a la que tantos animales mas fuertes 
que el pusieron su deraanda. 

Degenme crecer un poco, dijo su alteza, y entonces esperi- 
mentareis que puedo llenar el trono, y con el tiempo, hacer 
felices 4 mis subditos. Entretanto estudiare las acciones 
heroicas de mi padre, con la esperanza de que algun dia, po- 
dre serle igual en gloria. 

Por mi parte, dijo el leopardo, insisto en mi derecho a la 
corona, por la mayor semejanza que tengo al ultimo rey 
entre todos los candidatos. 

Yo, por otro lado, grito el oso, sostendre que se me hizo 
injusticia, cuando su magestad .anterior se me prefirio : soy 
tan fuerte, intrepido, y sangriento, como era; y ademas, soy 
maestro de un arte que el jamas pudo adquirir, cual es, el 
trepar por los arboles. 

Yo apelo, dijo el elefante, al juicio de esta augusta asam- 
blea, si alguno de los presentes puede con algun colorido jac- 



382 FABLES* 

tarse de ser tan alto, de tan noble presencia, tan robusto, 6 
tan circunspecto como yo. 

Yo soy la mas noble, y la mas herniosa criatura entre todos 
vosotros, dijo el caballo. 

E/ yo soy la mas politica, dijo la zorra. 

E^ yo soy el mas veloz en correr, dijo el corzo. 

En donde encontrareis, dijo el mico, un rey mas agradable^ 
mas ingenioso, y mas divertido que yo ? Yo divertiria con- 
tiniiamente a mis vasallos, y soy ademas el mas semejante al 
hombre, que es el Seiior del Universo. ^ 

El papagayo interrumpiendole, hizo su arenga : supuesto 
que vm. se alaba de su semejanza al bomb re, me parece que 
puedo yo alabarme con mucha mas justicia Toda la seme- 
janza de vm consiste en su hocico feo y algunos gestos ridi- 
culos ; peroyo puedo hablar como un hombre, e imitar su len- 
guage, senal indicativa de su razon. y su mayor adorno. 

Guardad vuestra maldita garuUa, replico la mona : hablais, 
es cierto, pero no como hombre ; repetis sierapre una misma 
cosa sin entender una sola palabra de lo que decis. 

Toda la asamblea se rio de estos dos rivales imitadores del 
genero humano, y confirieron la corona al elefante, porque 
era fuerte y sabio ; y no solo era exento del barbaro natural 
de las bestias de rapina, sino tambien de la vanidad y amor 
propio de que muchos estan tocados, siempre pareciendoles 
6 fingiendo ser lo que, en la realidad, no son. 



Fibula Segunda. 
EI Dragon y las Dos Zorras* 

Un dragon guardaba con ansia un tesoro innienso en una 
cueva profunda ; nunca doimla de dia ni de noche, para 
asegurarlo. 

Dos zorras aduladoras, artificiosas, y picaras de profesion, 
se introdugeron en su gracia con sus lisonjas fastidiosas. 
Ambas eran sus intimas araigas. 

Los que son mas corteses y oficiosos no son siempre los 
mas sinceros. Le rmdieron sus obsequies con la mayor su- 
mision : admiraron sus fantasias ociosas ; convinieron con el 
en sus ideas, y se burlaron de su credula tonteria 

Finalmente, quedose un dia dormido entre sus confidentes: 
le ahogaron, y tomaron posesion de su tesoro, 



FABLES. ' 383 

Era preciso repartir el pillage ; un pwnto muy deli carlo, y 
no era faol Je ajustaise. porque dos villages no convienen 
sino en la egecucion de sus delitos. 

Una de ellas empczo a exliv)rtar en estos terminos : de que 
nos servir4 todo este dinero r \Jn gazapo nos seria un botin, 
6 presa mvis agradable : no podenios hacer una coraida de 
estos doblones, son muy indigestos. Los hombres son muy 
loco>, en dejarse arrebatar de riqaezas tan imaginarias ISo 
seamos nosotras criaturas tan insensatas, conio ellos lo son. 

La otra pretendio que estas reflexiones ia habian hecho 
una impresion fuerte, y la aseguro que en lo venidero estaria 
contepta de continaar una vida filosofica, y como Bias llevar 
su tesoro todo consigo. 

Al parecer, ambas estaban dispuestas a abandonar su tesoro 
mal adquirido : pero ambas se quedaron a la mira, hasta que 
se despedazaron. 

Al espirar la una dijo a la otra, que estabatan mortalmente 
herida como ella: que querlas hacer con todo aquel oro ? 
Lo mismo que td te proponias hacer con el, replico la otra. 

Siendo informado un viajador de su pendencia, las dijo, 
que eran tontas. Asi lo es el mayor numero del genero hu- 
mano, replico una de las zorras. Tampoco a vosotros puede 
servir de coraida, y con todo, os asesinais unos a otros por el 
dinero. 

Nosotras, las zorras, hemes sido bastante sabias, 4 lo menos 
hasta aqui, para mirar al dinero como una cosa inutil. Lo 
que habeis introducido entre vosotros como una conveniencia, 
es vuestra desgracia. Dejais un bien sustancial, solamenle 
por seguir un bien fantastico. 



Fabula Tercera. 
Las Dos Zorras, 

Una noche entraron dos zorras furtivamente en un galli- 
nero : mataron el gallo, las gallinas, y los polios; despues de 
esta matanza, empezaron a devorar su presa. 

Una que era joven y sin reflexion, propuso comerlos todos 
de una vez ; la otra vieja y codiciosa queria ahorrar para 
otro dia. 

Hja, dijo la vieja, la esperiencia me hizo sabia ; en mi 
tiempo he visto mucho mundo. No consumamos a la vez 



384 FABLES. 

prodigamente todo nuestro caudal : tuvimos buen suceso, y 
debemos cuidar de no mal gastarlo. 

Replico la joven, estoy resuelta a recrearme mientras lo 
tengo por delante, y saciar mi apetito por toda una semana ; 
por lo que toca a venir aqui mafiana, es cuento : eso es espo- 
nernos : manana vendri aqui el amo, y por vengar la rauerte 
de sus polios, nos dor4 con una tranca en la cabeza. 

Despues de esta replica, cada una de ellas obra como le 
parece maspropio. 

La joven come hasta que revienta^sin poder apenas arras- 
trarse 4 su cueva antes de morir. La vieja que le parecio 
mucho mas prudente gobernar su apetito, y ser frugal, fue el 
dia siguiente al gallinero, y la mato el labrador. 

Asicada edad tiene suvicio favorito : los jovenes son fo- 
gosos e insaciables en sus placeres ; y los viejos incorregi- 
bles en su avaricia. 



Fibula Cuarta. 
El Lobo y el Cordero, 

Habia un rebafio de ovejas, que paclan seguras de todo 
mal en un cercado ; todos los perros dormian, y sns amos 
tocaban la gaita rural con sus companeros bajo de un alamo 
frondoso. 

Un lobo hambriento vino al redil i registrarlos por las 
rendijas. 

Un cordero inesperto, y que nunca habia estado fuera, 
entro en conversacion con el. 

Y le dijo, que es lo que tu quieres aqui, lobo ? 

Un poco de esta yerba fresca, le respondio el lobo. Bien 
sabes que no hay cosa mas agradablp, que matar la h'lnibre en 
un prado verde esnialtado con flores, y apagar la sed en una 
fuenle transparente. Aqui encuentro copia de uno y otro, 
que pucde uno desear mas ? por mi parte, yo amo la filosof la 
que nos en^ena a contentarnos cou poco. 

Es vrrdad pues, replico el cordero, que tu te abstienes de 
la carne de las bestias, y que un poco de yerba te satisface ? 
Si es asi, vivamos como hermanos y pabteraos juntos. 

El cordero, luego, salto del redd al prado en donde el 
grave filosofo le despedazo, y de una vez le devoro. 

Desconfiate siempre de IriS lenguas lisongeras de lo& que 
se jactan de su propia virtud. Forma tu juicio segun sus 
acciones; y no segun sus palabras. 



EPrTOME DE LA HISTORIA DE ESPANA. 



(Sacado de la^ Cartas Marruecas de Don Jose' Cadalso, Carta III.) 

" La peninsula^ llamada Espafia, solo esti contigua al con- 
tinente de Europapor el lado de Francia de la que la separan 
los moDtes Pirineos. Es abundante en oro, plata, azogue, 
hierro, piedras, aguas mineralesj ganados de escelentes cali- 
dades, y pescas tan abundantes como deliciosas. Esta feliz 
situacionla hizo objeto de la codicia de los fenicios y otros 
pueblos, Los cartagineses, parte por dolo, y parte por fuer- 
za, se establecieron en ella ; y los romanos quisieron com- 
pletar su poder y gloria con la conquista de Espana ; pero 
encontraron una resistencia, que parecio tan estrana como 
terrible ^ los soberbios duenos de lo restante del mundo. 
Numancia, una sola ciudad, les costo catorce anos de sitio, la 
perdida de tres ejercitos, y el desdoro de los mas famosos 
Generales, hasta que reducidos los numantinos a la precision 
de capitular 6 morir, por la total ruina de la patria, corto nu- 
mero de vivos, y abundancia de cadaveres en las calles (sin 
contar los que habian servido de pasto 4 sus conciudadanos 
despues de concluidos todos sus viveres) incendiaron sus ca- 
sas, arroj^ron sus mugeresj ninos y ancianos en las llamas, y 
salieron a morir en el carapo raso con las armas en la mano. 
El grande Escipion fue testigo de la ruina de Numancia, pues 
no puede llamarse propiamente conquistador de laciudad : 
siendo de notar que Luculo, encargado de levantar un ejer- 
cito para aquella espedicion, no hallo en la juventud romana 
reclutas que llevar, hasta que el mismo Escipion se alisto para 
animarla. Si los romanos conocieron el valor de los espafioles 
como enemigos, tambien esperimentdron su virtud como 
aliados. Sagunto sufrio por ellos un sitio igual al de Numan- 
cia contra los cartagineses ; y desde entonces formaron los 
romanos de los espaiioles el alto concepto que se ve en sus 
autoresj oradores, historiadores, y poetas. Pero la fortuna 
de Roma, superior al valor humano, la hizo sefiora de Es- 
pana, como de lo restante del mundo, raenos algunos mon- 
ies de Cantabria, cuya total conquista no consta de la his- 
33 



386 



EPITOME. 



toria, de modo que no pueda dudarse. Largas revoluciones 
inutiles de contarse en este parage trajeron del norte enjam- 
bres de naciones feroces, codiciosas y guerreras, que se es- 
tablecieron en Espana : pero con las delicias de este clima 
tan diferente del que habian dejado, cayeron en tal grade de 
afeminacion y flojedad, que a su tiempo fueron esclavos de 
otros conquistadores venidos del medio dia. Huyeron los 
godos espafioles hasta los montes de una provinciaj hoy Ua- 
inada Asturias: y apenas tuvieron tiempo de desechar el sus- 
to, llorar la perdida de sus casas y ruina de su reino, cuando 
salieron mandados por Pelayo, uno de los mayores hombres 
que la naturaleza ha producido. 

Desde aqui se abre un teatro de guerras que duraron cerca 
de ocho siglos. Varios reinos se levant^ron sobre la ruina 
de la Monarquia Goda Espanola, destruyendo el que querian 
edificar los moros en el mismo terreno, regado con mas san- 
gre espanola, romana, cartaginesa, goda y mora de cuanto se 
puede ponderar con horror de la pluma que lo escriba, y de 
los ojos que lo vean escrito. Pero la poblacion de esta pe- 
ninsula era tal, que despues de tan largas guerras y tan sangri- 
entas, aun se contaban veinte millones de habitantes en ella. 
Incorporaronse tantas provincias, y tan diferentes, en dos 
coronas, la de Castilla y la de Aragon ; y ambas en el ma- 
trimonio de Don Fernando y Dona Isabel, Principes que seran 
inmortales entre cuantos sepan lo que es gobierno. La re- 
forma de abusos, aumento de cieijcias, humillacion de los 
soberbios, amparo de la agricultura y otras operaciones seme- 
Vantes form^ron esta Monarquia : ayudoles la naturaleza con 
un nijmero increible de vasallos insignes en letras y armas ; y 
se pudieron haber lisongeado de dejar i sus sucesores un 
imperio mayor y mas duradero, que el de Roma antigua 
(contando las Americas nuevamentedescubiertas,) si hubieran 
logrado dejar su corona ^ un heredero varon. Negoles el 
cielo este gozo & trueque de tantos como les habia concedido ; 
y su cetro paso d la casa de Austria, la qual gasto los tesoros, 
talentos y sangre de los Espafioles en cosas agenas de Espana 
por las continuas guerras, que asi en Alemania, como en 
Italia tuvo que sostener Carlos I. de Espana 5 hasta que 
cansado de sus mismas prosperidades 6 tal vez conociendo con 
prudencia las vicisitudes de las cosas humanas, no quiso espo- 
nerse ^ sus reveses, y dejo el trono a su hijo Don Felipe II. 
Este Principe, acusado por la emulacion, por ambicioso } 
politico como su padre, pero menos afortunado, siguiendo los 



CHISTES. 387 

proyectos de Carlos, no pudo hallar los mismos sucesos aim 
d costa de ejercitos, de armadas y de caudales. Murio de- 
jando a sii pueblo estenuado con las guerras, afeminado con 
el oro y plata de America, disminuido con la poblacion de un 
mimdo nuevo, disgustado con tantas desgracias, y deseoso de 
descanso. Paso el cetro por las raanos de tres Principes 
menos activospara manejar tan grande Monarquia, y en la 
muerte de Carlos II. no era Espana sino el esqueleto de 
un gigante/' 



CHISTES. 

Un hombre discreto preguntando a su hijo de donde venia, 
pues era tan tarde, le respondio : Padre, yo vengo de ver 
a uno de mis amigos. De tus amigos, le respondio el padre 
sorprehendido. Tu tienes pues tantos amigos ! Oh ! como 
has hecho siendo tan joven para alcanzar muchos ; pues que 
yo en mas de sesenta aiios no he podido encontrar uno. 



El Caballero Tomas Moro, famoso Canceller de Ingla- 
terra, puesto en prision por Enrique octavo, dejo crecer sus 
cabellos y barba, y viniendo un barbero para cortarlos y afei- 
tarlo ; amigo, le dijo ; el Key e yo pleiteamos sobre mi 
cabeza ; e yo no quiero hacer el raenor gasto en este pleito, 
sin saber antes quien de los dos ha de disponer de ella. 



Luis doce, Rey de Francia, cuando era sino Duque de Or- 
leans, habia padecido muchos pesares de dos personas que 
hablan sido favoritos en el reinado precedente. Uno de sus 
aliegados procuraba inspirarle que lesmostrase resentimiento. 
No, respondio su Magestad, que indigno es 4un Rey deFran- 
cia tomar parte en la venganza del Duque de Orleans. 

Conrado tercero,Emperador, despues de haber tornado Mu- 
nickj determine pasar los hombres a filo de la espada, permiti- 
endo solo 4 las mugeres salir de alii, pudiendo Uevar sobre el- 
las sus muebles mas preciosos. Estas mugeres aprovechando 
la ocasion tom^ron sobre sus hombros d sus maridos, asegu- 
rando eran sus mas preciosos muebles. Esto agrado tanto al 
Emperador, que no solo perdono a los habitantes, sino tam- 
bien 4 su Principe que habia destinado a la muerte. 



^88 GHISTES. 

La Reina Isabela observando la bella gracia de un noble 
Espaiiol en un torneo, le pregunto un dia que le digese ab- 
solutamente el nombre de su Dama. El Espanol lo resistio 
algun tiempo. En fin cediendo 4 su curiosidad, prometio a 
su Magestad enviarle su retrato. El dia siguiente hizo pre- 
sentar a su Magestad un paquetillo, donde la Reina no ha- 
Uando sino un espejito, quedo sonrojada al punto. 



Los cortesanos del Rey Filipo le aconsejaban que se ven- 
gase de un hombre que haina hablado mal de el. A''ntes es 
nienester saber, si yo no le he dado razon, dijo Filipo: y 
habiendose averiguado que 1 1 tal hombre jamas habia recibido 
cosa alguna, le ejsvio ricos presentes. ^upo el Rey poco 
despues que el mismo lo llenaba de alabanzas. Mirad pues^ 
dijo a los cortesanos, que yo se mejor que vosotros apaci- 
guar una lengua mala. 



Continuando las disputas entre Francisco primero, Rey de 
Francia, y Enrique octavo, Yiey de Inglaterra ; resolvio 
este de enviar al primero un Embajador portador de pala- 
bras fieras y amenazas, para lo cual hizo elecion del Obispo 
Bonner en que tenia gran confianza. Este Obispo le dijo 
que ponla su vida en gran peligro, si daba tales recados d un 
Rey tan altivo como Francisco primero. No temas, le dijo 
el Rey, que si el Rey de Fr-ancia hiciese tal, yo haria caer 
rauchas cabezas de Franceses que estan aqui. Pase por ello, 
sefior ; pero cual de esas cabezas me vendria tan bien sobre 
los hombros como esta, poniendo el dedo k su sien. 



Cuando el Mariscal de la Ferte hizo su entrada en Metz. 
losjudios que alii erem tolerados se presentaron al cumplimi- 
ento con todo habitante ; y anunciandolos en la anticdmara : 
no quiero verlos, dijo: porque ellos liicieron morir k nuestro 
Sefior. Que no entren de ningun modo. Dijeronles pues 
que no podian ver a su Escelencia. A que repHcaron senti- 
dos, pues traian un presente de cuatro mil doblones. Lo que 
dicho inmediatamente a su Siscelencia; oh bien! diles que 
entren ; que estos pobres diablos seguramente no lo conocian 
cuando lo crucificdron. 



CORRESPONDENCIA MERCANTIL. 
COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 



Cartas de Comercio, y Mode- 
los de una Factura, un Co- 
nocimientOj una Cuenta, 
Letras de €ambio, Cai^ta 
Promisoria y Carta de 
Crtdito^ 

Pi'opuesta para una Corres- 
pondencia. 

Mijico^ 1 de Enero de 1825. 

Muy Sefior raio, como esta 
es la primera vez que tengo el 
honor dedirijirme a vm., es- 
pero que me perdonar^ la li- 
bertad que me he tornado. 

El ventajoso caracter que 
mi buen amigo el Sefior Don 
N. me ha dado de su persona 
y casa de vm., me anima 4 
pensar en una corresponden- 
cia mercantil que pueda ser 
ventajosa 4 vm. como a mi. 

Pero ante todas cosas^ ne- 
cesito me ifranquee vm. el fa- 
vor de darme una relacion de 
los pesos y medidas que co- 
munmente se usan en Ingla- 
terra, porque creo que se dife- 
rencian mucho de los de este 
pais. 

Yo estimare esta relacion 
como un favpr particular, y 
vm. puede confiar en mi sin- 
ceridad y prontitud que le 
servire en cuanto dependa de 
mis facultades. 
' 33* 



Commercial Letters, and 
Models of an Invoice, 
Bill of Lading, an Ac- 
count, Bills of Exchange, 
Promissory Note and Let- 
ter of Credit. 

A Proposal for a Corres- 
pondence. 

Mexico, January, 1, 1825. 
Sir^ 

As this is the first time 
I have the honour of ad- 
dressing you^ you will^ I 
hope^ excuse the liberty I 
have now taken. 

The honourable character 
my worthy friend Mr, N has 
given me of your person and 
house, encourages me to think 
of a commercial correspon- 
dence which may be to our 
mutual advantage. 

But before this, I must beg 
the favour to give me an ac- 
count of the weights and 
measures which are com- 
monly used in England, as I 
believe they differ materi- 
ally from those in this coun- 
try. 

I shall esteem this as a par- 
ticular obligation, and you 
may rely upon my sin canity 
and readiness to serve you 
in whatever lies in my power. 



i90 



COxMMERClAL CORRKSPONDENCE. 



Esperando que vm. me hon- 

re con su favorable respuesta, 

qiiedo rogando a Dios me 

guarde su vida muchos anos. 

B. L. IVL de vm. 



In the expectation of your 
honouring me ivith a favour- 
able answer^ I re?nain, 

Your obedient and 
humble bervajit. 



S^r. Don . 

Boston^ Febrero, 1825. 

Muy Senor mio; me es 
muy apreciable el favor que 
he recibido de vm. en la del 
1^ del ult°5 en la que me 
manifiesta los deseos que tiene 
de entablar conmigo una cor- 
respondencia mercantil ; yo 
me tendre por dichoso si pue- 
do eorresponder a las espe- 
ranzas de vm., y a la idea li- 
songera que se ha servido 
tomar de mi casa y familia. 

Vm. no ignora, que noso- 
tros los comerciantes debemos 
vivir de nuestra profesion, y 
promo ver nuestros intereses 
en cuanto sea compatible con 
el honor y la equidad. 

Yo admiio la proposicion 
de vm., y en prueba de mi 
reconocimiento, remitire a 
vm., por el primer buque que 
saiga de este puerto para ese, 
varias partidas fabricadas en 
este pais, y al precio mas bajo 
que se pueden dar ; la nomi- 
ua de ellas, juntamente con 
los precios, iran insertas en 
las facturas. 

Espero seran del gusto de 
vm ,y que serviran de motivo 
para nuestro mayor conoci- 
mleoto y trato ; y este vm. 



Mr. . 

Boston, February, 1825, 

Sir, 
I am most a'greeably fa- 
voured by yours ofthefrst 
ulf", wherein you show a de- 
sire to commence a commer- 
cial correspondence with me ; 
I shall think myself happy 
if I can answer your expec- 
tations^ and the flattering 
idea you have been pleased to 
form of my house and family j 



You well know, that we 
merchants must live by our 
profession, and promote our 
interest as far as is consis- 
tent with lionour and equity, 

I accept your proposal, and 
as a proof of my acknowl- 
edgment, I will send you, by 
the first vessel that sails from 
this port to your place, sun- 
dry parcels manufactured 
here, and at the lowest price 
that can be afforded; the 
particulars thereof, together 
with the prices, will be insert" 
ed in the invoices. 

I hope they will prove to 
your satisfaction, and be the 
foundation of our farther 
acquaintance and dealing ; 



CORRESPONDENCIA IMEHC AM IL. 



391 



seguro de que cualquiera cosa 
que confie a mi cuidado, sera 
ejecutada y manejada con el 
mayor candor y fidelidad : y 
si estas raercaderias como las 
que puede vm. necesitar en 
adelante, al tiempo de enfar- 
delarlas 6 de cualquier otro 
modoj sufriesen alguna ave- 
rla, se hara la correspondiente 
rebajajdandome vm. el aviso. 

Incluyo a vm. muestras de 
otras producciones que pue- 
den tener despacho en ese 
roercado ; y en este caso, po- 
dre proveerle de todo cuauto 
necesite. 

Si vm. puede hacerme re- 
tornos comodos con sus vinos 
esquisitos, aguardiente, y fru- 
tos ; como tambien dos zur- 
rones de cochinilla, y 20 
quintales de barrilla, se le dara 
a vm. su comision ; el con^e- 
taje, almacenasgo y todos los 
demas gastos de puerto se 
pagaran a parte. 

En consecuencia de las 6r- 
denes de vm., le envio un es- 
tado de las pesas y medidas 
de Inglaterra ; y ademas la 
diferencia de las monedas de 
Espana y las nuestras. To- 
cante a la subida, y baja de 
los cambios y fondos, se infor- 
mar4 vm. por nuestros papeles 
publicos, 

Quedo rogando ^ Dios 
me guarde su vida mu- 
chosafios. B.L. M.de 
vm. Su atento amigo. 



and assure yourself that what- 
ever you trust to my charge , 
shall be -performed and man- 
aged with the greatest can- 
dour and fidelity imagina- 
ble ; and if these goods or 
those you may want hereaf- 
ter^ should suffer any aver- 
age in the packing or other- 
wise, proper allowance will 
be made, upon notice. 

I herewith send you a sam- 
ple of other staple commodi- 
ties ichich may ansicer your 
market; in that case, you 
may be furnished icith every 
article you want. 

If you can conveniently 
make returns in some of your 
exquisite wines, brandy, and 
fruits ; as also two zeroons 
of cochineal, and of kelp* 
20 quintals, you shall have 
your commission ; broker- 
age, storage and all oth- 
er port-charges will be paid 
apart. 

Pursuant to your orders, I 
send you a statement of the 
iceights and measures used 
in England ; as also the dif- 
f en nee of the value of coins 
between Spain and ours. Of 
the rise and fall of exchange 
and stocks, you may be in- 
formed by our public pa- 
pers, 

I remain your obedient 
humble servant, and 
respectful friend. 



^ Kelp se llama tarabien barilla eu Inglei. 



592 



COMMERCIAL DOCUMENTS* 



FACTURA. 



Factura de las Mercaderia^ embarcadas per el S^"*. Don 
Agustin S. para los Sefiores Crist dval B, t hijos de Cadiz, 4 
bordo del Navio nombrado el CisnCj su Capitan Martin £)., 
destinado para dicho Cadiz, por orden y cuenta de los 
dichos Senores, siendo numeradas y marcadas como sigue, 

A saber : 
) 2 Zurrones de Cochinilla - - - 
• 75 Quintales de Azafran - - - 
> 315 Cajas de iVzucar - - - - 




Suraa, $ 
Derechos y Gastos - - - 
Comision a 5 por ciento - 

Suma total, $ 



Salvo Yerro y Omision. 
Boston y Abril 9, de 1825. R. D. T. 



Un Conocimienfo, 

LondreSy FehrerOj 1825. 

Yo vecino de 

Maestro que soy del biien 
Navlo (que Dios salve) nom- 
brado N. N.j que al presente 
esta surto y anclado en el rio 
Tamesis, puerto de Londres, 
para con la biiena ventura 
seguir este presente viage al 
puerto de Cadiz ; conozco 
haber recibido, y tengo car- 
gado dentro del dicho mi Na- 
vio debajo de cubierta, de vos 
N. N., seis fardos de baqueta 
de Moscovia, siete dichos de 
pano Ingles, ocho de estofas, 



A Bill of Lading. 

London, February, 1825. 
Shipped hy the Grace of 
God in good order and well 
conditioned, by Mr. (or Mes- 
srs.) N. iV. in and upon the 
good ship called N. iV., where- 
of is master under God, for 

this present voyage, 

now riding at anchor in the 
river Thames at London, and 
by God's aid bound for Ca- 
diz : to wit ; six bales of 
Russia leather, seven ditto of 
English cloths, eight ditto oj 
stuffs, nine ditto of bays, ten 
ditto of says and serges, five 



DOCUMENTOS MERCANTILE: S. 



393 



INVOICE. 



Invoice of Merchandize shipped by Mr. Augustin S. for 
Messrs. Christopher B. & Sons of Cadiz, onboard the 
Ship named Swan^ her Master Martin D., bound to said 
Cadiz, per order and account of the said Gentlemen, being 
numbered and marked as follows, 

to wit : 
1 2 Zeroons of Cochineal - - - 
► 75 Quintals of Saffron - - - 
( 315 Boxes of Sugar - - - - 




Amount, ^ 
Duties and Charges - - 
Commission at 5 per Cent. 

Totals $ 



Errors and Omissions excepted. 
Boston, 9th April, 1825. R. D, J\ 



nueve de bayetas, diez de 
anascotes y sargasj qiiinientas 
piezas de lienzo superfine de 
ia fabrica de Irlanda, setenta 
dichas de batistas, cincuenta 
tablas de manteles adamasca- 
dos y cincuenta docenas de 
servilletasj un cajon de hoja 
de lata, dos de laton 6 azofar, 
tres de acero, cuatro quintales 
de cobre, seis cajas de relojes 
de faltriquera y dijes, seis 
cajones de quinquilleria 6 bu- 
honeriaj siete de herramientas 
de corte, todo enjuto y bien 
acondicionado, numerados y 
marcados con la marca al 
margen. Con lo cual prome- 



hmidred pieces of superfine 
Irish linen, seventjj ditto of 
cambric, fifty diaper table 
cloths, and fifty dozen of 
napkins, one chest of tin, two 
ditto of latten or brass, three 
ditto of steel, four quintals of 
copper, six boxes of watches 
and trinkets, six chests of 
hardware, seven ditto of edge 
tools, all in good order and 
condition, marked and num- 
bered as in the margin ; and 
are to be delivered in the like 
good order and condition (the 
dangers of the seas only ex- 
cepted) in the aforesaid port 
unto Mr, IS. K or Messrs, 



394 



COMMERCIAL DOCUMENTS* 



to, y me obligo, llevdndome 
Di: s en buen salvamento con 
el dicho mi Navio al espresa- 
do puertOj de acudir y entre- 
gar, por vos y en vuestro 
n ombre, dichos generos igual- 
mente enjutos, y bien acon- 
dicionados (salvo los peligros 
del mar) k Don N. N. 6 4 los 

Senores 6 4 quien alii 

por el fuere parte : pag^n- 
dome de flete ^ razon de 
cuarenta shelines esterlines 
por cada tonelada, con diez 
por ciento de capa y averia. 
Y en fe de que asi me obligo 
d cumplir, os doy tres conoci- 
mientos de un tenor, firmados 
de mi nombre, por mi 6 mi 
escribano; el uno cumplido, 
los otros no valgan. Fecha 
en Londres a primero de 
Febrero de 1825. 



Cadiz ^ Marzo, 1825. 
Muy Senor mio. He reci- 
bido la estimada de vm. del 
primero de Febrero con el 
conocimiento de diversas mer- 
caderias embarcadas abordo 

del Navio llamado el , 

todo lo cual ha sido debida- 
mente recibido en buena or- 
den y condicion : los generos 
son todos de mi satisfaccion, 
y espero que tendran pronto 
despacho. Inclusa va una 
letra de cambio contra los 

Senores , de esa ciu- 

dad, quemonta a uso* 

y medio, que vm. se serviri 



, or his or (their) as^ 

signs ^ he or (they) paying 
freight at the rate of forty 
shillings per ton, with the usu- 
al p?nmage and average* In 
witness tvhereof the said 
Commander or his clerk has 
signed three bills of lading y 
all of this tenor and date ; 
one of 2chich bfing fulfilled^ 
the other two to stand void» 
Dated in London, the 1st day 
of February, 1825. 



Cadiz, March, 1825. 

Sir, 

The favour of yours of the 

1st February came safe to 

hand with the bill of lading 

of sundries shipped on board 

the ship called the , 

all of which are duly re- 
cieved in good order and 
condition: I have found the 
goods to 7ny mind, and I 
hope will suit our market. 
You will receive herewith a 
Bill of Exchange on Messrs. 

— — , of your city, to the 

amount of — , at one 

and a half usance, lohich be 



The uso is two months in Spain. 



DOCUMENTOS MERCANTILES. 395 

cargar ^ mi cuenta ; el saldo pleased to place to my cred- 

que aun resta se remitira sin it ; the balance which re- 

dilacion a su tiempo. mains due shall be punctually 

Quedo rogando 4 Dios remitted in its time. 

guarde 4 vm. muchos aaos. I have the honour to be 

B. L. M. de vm. Respectfully , 

Su mayor servidor. Your humble servant. 

A' D . To Mr. . 

Del Comercio de Londres. Merchant in London. 



Cadiz, a los 5^". IV. F. 

Paris a 24 de Marzo de 1825. 

Muy S^«^ mios : confirmo a vms. mi ult^ de 8 del pas^^. ; 
despues recibo las muy favorecidas de vms. 29 del mismo 2 
y 4 del cor^®. en que me incluyen una letra de . . . . francos 
a cargo del S^^. N. del la q®. les he dado credito. Tengo 
aun en mi poder la letra de cambio del S^r. B. de q^. procu- 
rare el pago. No habiendole hallado en su casa, le he 
hecho avisar p*. q^. me haga el pago de ella 4 su termino. 
Por lo q«. mira a la otra remesa de vms. contra los S^^^. A y 
comp., no la han aceptado aun, suplicandome que aguarde 
hasta el lunes que es el dia de correo de Espana : asi lo he 
hecho ; veremos el resultado, y en caso q®. no la paguen, se 
la devolvere a vms. con la protesta al correo prox*. 

Las cambiales 4 largos dias pierden aqui un 5. p. 100 al 
afio, y aun medio p. 100 al mes ; y asi lo ha entendido el S°^ 
A. en la negociacion de la letra que vms. han librado con- 
tra el ; si estuviera en mi mano, podria obtener un lucro de 
ella en el pag^o. de enero con medio p. 100 de beneficio, de- 
ducido la rebaja. Doy a vms. gracias por la orden que se han 
servido dar a su casa de Paris, p^. q®. pague por mi ... d los 
S'*^^ P.J les he abonado de conformidad en su cuenta. Remito 
d vms. aqui adjuntas 3 letras de cambio 4 60 dias de vista. 
Una a cargo del S<^»*. Don E. por, fr. 3,000 
Otras dos sobre los S^^^ H. y comp. 

de 1000 cada una, 2,000 



5,000 



Perdida 4 1 p. 100, 50 

Sirvause vms. hacerlas aceptar y abonarme de 4,950 por 
su importe, deducida la perdida. Interin quedo rogando 4 
Dios guarde a vuestras Mercedes muchos afios como desea, 

Su mayor servidor. X. 






,• 


O O 




o o 


o o 






>§ 


s- 


^ 


.i2 cC 


^ 






(U o 




■•T3 i^ 




^ 3 




i^fS 




•S s 




es 4( 




p=:2 


H 


8g 




GS rH 


Q 




P^ 


Ph 




c 


u^ 


o 


c^ — 


1 





o 
o 

o 

GO 



o 






o 
'a 

g 







^N 










O 


O 


o 






o 


o 


^ 






o 


o 


o 


vCd 




c^ 


T-H 


CO 




=^ 




^ 








c« 








O 


















j-i 










03 


d 


OJ 








fcuo 


s 






b3 


5 


H 






^ 


o 








0^ 


13 








ns 


s 








CO 


s 








cc 


o 








•5^ 


•s? 








OQ 




d 




8 


8 




• 




rH 


rH 




^ 




s 






C 




Oh 


"^ 




o 




____ 


__^ 




Q 










q:) 


G^ 








^O 


00 


rzj 






« 


1-^. 


S>4 


R 





o 



2 
O 



o 
It 



00 

at 



O 

o 



O 
Q 
O 
<3 



H>^ 


O O 


O 




• «»» 


o o 


c 






o o 

TH G^ 


o 


E^ 


a 


^ 


=€^ 


Q 






^ 






NvT 








?s 






c\ 


•h,^ 








^ 






C^ J^ 




■'-^^ 




fesftn 








-^ ^ 




ss 




^2 




.^ 




b-^ 




CO 








vi 


E^ 








o o 






<» 


(N T=i 






12^ 






1 






&■ 








«o 




u4 

G^? 1^ 




§ 




00 '^ 




eo 




^ a. - 








^ 








o o 


o 


1 




o o 








o o 


^ 


■^ 




GN} tH 


CO 






=^ 


=^ 


^ 






• 


CO 


O 
•** 




5: 




. . 




!^ 






»*«*^ 


> 




iT^'^ 




Esq 




5s •«* 


E? 






OQO 








2 2 




00 




H H 




T-^ 


c5 








^ 2 




^S' 




o o 




^ 


t; 


tH »-I 




■s 


J.' 


eS - 




ci 


^ 






1 










•»c 












GSJ f^ 




f^ 


1*0 


00 •?» 








"4^ 







DOCUMENTGS MERCANTILES. 



397 



Letra de Cambio, 
La Primera. 

Londres, 1825. 
For .£400 esterlinas, 
_V dos usos a uso y me- 
dio, 6 a echo dias vista ■ se 
servira vm mandar pagar por 
esta mi primera de cambio a 

Don , 6 a su orden. cua- 

tro cientas libras esterlinas, 
valor recibido de D. N. X.^ 
que sentara vm. como por 
aviso. M. N. 

.V Don. . 

Comerciante en Cadiz. 



A Bill of Exchange. 
The First 

London, 1825. 

For <£400 sterling. 
At double usance (or at 
usance and a half, or at eight 
days sight) pay this my first 

bill of exchange to Mr. , 

or order, the sum of four hun- 
dred pounds sterlings value 
received of Mr, A; iV. and 
place it to account as per 
advice. M. iV= 

To Mr. . 

Merchant in Cadiz. 



Primera. 

Aviso de una Letra de Cam- 
bio. 

Londres 1 de Enero de 1825. 

Muy Senor mio. Hoy mis- 
mo he librado contra vm. una 
letra de cambio, a uso y medio, 

a favor de Don , 6 a su 

orden, por la cantidad de cua- 
trocientas libras esterlinas, 
que me hara vm. la fineza de 
honrar, y cargar a mi cuenta. 

Quedo rogando a Dios me 
guarde su vida mnchos anos. 
B. L. M. de vm. 

s. s. s. 

A' Don , 

DeLcomercio de Cadiz. 



Prima, 

Advice of a Bill of Ex- 
change. 

London January 1, 1825. 

Sir. 

I have this day draicn on 

you a bill of exchange^ at 

one and a half usance^ in 

favour of Mr. , or 

his order, for four hundred 
pounds sterling, which I besr 
you to honour, and place 
to my account. 

I have the honour to he, 
Sir, respectfully, 
your obedient servant. 
To Mr. - — , 
Merchant in Cadiz. 



La Segunda. The Second. 

Londres. 1825. London, 1825. 

For £400 esterlinas. For £400 steiling. 

A' dos usos se ser\ira vm. At double usance pay this 

pagar por esta mi segunda my second bill of Exchange 
34 



398 



COMMERCIAL DOCUMENTS. 



de cambio (no habiendolo 
hecho por la primera) ^ Don 
N. N. 6 a su orden cuatro ci- 
entas libras esterlinas^ &;c. 
EI Endoso. 
Paguese 4 Don N. N. 6 
a su orden, valor en 
cuenta con, (6 valor 
recibido de) dicho. 



Cai'ta Promisoria. 

LondreSy 1 d& Eneroj 1825. 

A^ uso y medio contado 
desde la presente data, pro- 

meto pagar a Don , 6 ^ 

su orden, la canti(iad de 

, por valor recibido 

en dinero contado, 6 en ge- 
neros a mi satisfaccion. 

A. B. 
£ 



(Jirst not paid) to Mr. 
N, N. or order, the sum of 
four hundred pounds ster- 
ling j Sfc, 

The Endoj^sement, 
Fay to Mr. N. N. or his 
order, value in ac- 
count with, (or value 
received from) the said. 



Prommissory Note. 

London, January 1, 1825. 

^t one and a half usance 
after date, I promise to pay 

to Mr. , or his order, 

the sum of- , for val- 
ue received in ready money, 
or in goods to my satisfac- 
tion, 

A.B. 
£ 



Carta de Crtdito. 

Londres, 1 de Enero de 1825. 

Muy Senor mio. Vmd. 

recibira esta de la mano del 

Sefior Don -, (que pasa a 

viajar por diversas partes de 
Europa) y me nara la firleza 
de provaerle de cartas de re- 
comendacion para las princi- 
pales ciudades de Espana ; su 
objeto es salir de aqui inmedi- 
ataraente para esa. Creo 
que tendra vmd. mucho gusto 
en tratarle por ser un caba- 
Uero igualmente distinguido 
por su merito personal y por 
su nacimiento ; por lo que, es- 
pero que vm. le franquee la 



Letter of Credit. 

London, January 1, 1825. 
Sir, 

You will receive this by the 

hands of Mr. , (who is 

upon his travels into divers 
parts of Europe) and I beg 
you will provide him icith 
recommendatory letters to the 
principal cities in Spain : his 
design is to set out from 
hence for your city immedi- 
ately, I think you will be 
pleased with his occjijamt- 
ance, as he is a gentleman 
equally distinguished for his 
personal merit and birth; be 
so kind, therefore, to give 



DOCEMENTOS MERCANTILES. 



399 



mas generosa recepcion, y du- 
rante su estada en esa ciudad 
le sirva con todo el acatami- 
ento que este en su poder. 
Al mismo tiempo me hara 
vm. el favor de franque- 
arle sobre doble recibo el 
dinero que necesite hasta 

la suma de que podra 

vm. reembolsar cargandolo a 
mi cuenta, enviandome uno 
de sus recibos. Espero 
que vm. me desempenara 
como amigo en este asunto ; 
y mientras, 

Quedo rogando a Dios me 
guarde su vida muchos anos. 
B. L. M. de vm. 

s. s. s. 

^^ Don 5 

Banquero de Cadiz. 



Mm the best reception^ and 
serve him as effectually as in 
your power during his abode 
in your city. You will also 
do me the favour to supply 
him on his double receipt with 
what money he may have oc- 
casion for, to the amount of 

5/0?^ which you may 

reimburse yourself by charg- 
ing it to my account, and 
transmitting one of his re- 
ceipts to me. I hope you will 
attend to this my request as a 
friend^ arid in the mean time, 
I have the honour to be, 

Respectfully, 

Your obedient servant. 

To Mr. , 

Banker in Cadiz. 



Confinnncion de la anterior 
enviada por cl Correo. 

Londrcs, 1 de Enero, 1825. 

^Iny Sefior mio. Con esta 
data he escrito 4 vm. otra 
que le entregara el Sefior 

, caballero Ingles, con 

cuya casa tengo la mayor in- 
timidad ; y deseando servirle 
per su cuenta he tomado con 
gusto esta ocasion que se me 
ofrece : Por tanto con ei ma- 
yor empeno suplico a vmd. le 
procure todas las diversiones 
e informes, de forma que se 
halle gustoso eii esa ciudad. 
Tambien se servira vm. de 
franquearle todo el dinero que 
piderej hasta la cantidad de 



Confirmation of the preced- 
ing sent by the Post. 

London, January 1, 1825. 
Sir, 
I wrote to you this day a 
letter which will be delivered 
to you by Mr. , an En- 
glish gentleman, with ivhose 
family I am very intimate : 
and desirous of serving him 
on his own account I have 
embraced ivith pleasure this 
opportunity lohich offers. I 
therefore most earnestly re- 
quest of you to procure him 
such diversions and informa- 
tion as may render his stay 
in your city agreeable. You 
will also please to supply him 
ivith all the money he may 



400 



CHOICE LETTERS. 



tomandolerecibodoble aslc to the amount of 



por lo que le entregue ; imo 
de los cuales me enviard, y lo 
cargard a mi cuenta. Inclu- 
sa va su firma para que vui. 
la conozca, y la honre como 
coresponde. Yomelisonjeo 
de que vm. tendra mucho 
gusto en lograr el coiiocinii- 
ento de un bellojoven cabal- 
lero, que ha recibido la mejor 
educacion. 

Qnedo regando a Dios rae 

guarde su vida muchos ano?. 

B. L. M. de vm. 

s. s. s. 

Sor. Don . Cadiz. 



taking of him a double re- 
ceipt for the same^ one of 
which you will send to me^ 
and you will charge it to my 
account. 1 have enclosed here- 
in his signature^ that you 
may know it, and conduct 
yourself accordingly, I flat- 
ter myself you toill be much 
pleased in enjoying the ac- 
quaintance of a sensible 
young gentleman J who has 
had an excellent education. 
I have the honour to be, 
Most respectfully y 
Your obedient servant. 
Mr. . Cadiz, 



Cartas crlticas de un Moro viajante en Espana^ 
For Don Jose^ Cadalso. 

CARTA 1. 

De Gazel a Ben-Beley. 

AUN no me hallo capaz de obedecer a las nucvas instan-^ 
cias que me haces sobre que te remita las observaciones que 
voy haciendo en la capital de esta vasta raonarqufa. Sabes 
tu cuantas cosas se necesitan para formar una verdadera idea 
del pais en que se viaja ? Bien es verdad, que habicndo 
hecho varies viages por'Europaj me hallo mas capaz, 6 poi 
mejor decir, con menos obstaculos que otros Africanos ; 
pero aun asi he ballad o tanta diferencia entre los Europeos. 
que no basta el conocimiento de uno de los paises de esta 
parte del mundo, para juzgar de otros estados de la misma. 
Los Europeos no parecen vecinos, aunque la esterioridad 
los haya uniformado en mesas, teatros, paseos, ejercito, y 
lujo : no obstante las leyes, vicios, virtudes, y gobierno soi, 
simiamente diversos, y por consiguiente las costumbres pro- 
pias de cada nacion. 



CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 401 

Auii dentro de la Espanola hay variedad increible en el 
caracter de sus provincias. Un Andaluz en nada se parece 
a un Vizcaino ; un Catalan es totalmente distinto de un 
Gallego ; y lo mismo sucede entre un Valenciano y un Mon- 
tafies. Esta peninsula, dividida tantos siglos en diferentes 
reinos, ha tenido siempre variedad de trages, leyes, idiomas, 
y raonedas. 

Acabo de leer la Historia de Espana, y me pai-ece que de 
la relacion se puede inferirjloprimero ; que esta peninsula no 
ha gozado una paz que pueda Uamarse tal en cerca de dos 
mil anoSj y que por consiguiente es raaravilla, que aun ten- 
gan yerbas los campos, y aguas las fuentes. Lo segundo; 
-qne habiendo sido la religion motivo de tantas guerras coh- 
tra los descendientes de Tarif, no es mucho que sea objeto 
de todas sus acciones. Lo tercero ; que la continuacion de 
^Bstar con las armas en la mano, les haya hecho mirar con 
desprecio el comercio e industria raecanica. Lo cuarto ; que 
de esto mismo nazca lo mucho que cada noble en Espana se 
envanece de su nobleza. Lo quinto ; que los muchos cau- 
dales adquiridos rapidamente en Indias, distraen a muchos 
de cultivar las artes mecanicas en la peninsula y de aumen- 
tar su poblacion. 

Las demas consecuencias morales de estos eventos pollti- 
cos las iras hotando en las cartas que te escribire sobre estos 
asuntos. 



CARTA IL 

Del mismo al mismo. 

El atraso de las ciencias en Esjjana en este siglo quieu 
puede dudar que precede de la faha de protection que ha- 
llan sus profesores ? Hay cocheros en Madrid, que ganaa 
trescientos pesos duros ; pero no hay quien no sepa que se 
ha de morir de hambre, como se entregue a las ciencias, es- 
ceptuadas las de pane lucr<jndo^ que son las unicas que dan 
de comer. 

Los pocos que cultivan las otras, son como los aventure- 
ros Vv^luntarios de los ejercitos que no lie van paga y se es- 
ponen mas. Es un gusto oirlos hablar de matematicas, flsica 
moderna, historia natural, derecho de gentes, antigiiedadesj 
y letras humanas, a veces con mas recato que si hicieran 



402 CHOICE LETTERS* 

moneda falsa. Viven en la obscuridad y mueren como vi- 
vieron, tenidos por sabios superficiaies en el concepto de los 
que saben poner setenta y siete silogismos seguidos sobre^ si 
los cielos son flaidos 6 solidos. 

Hablando pocos dias ha con un sabio escolastico de los 
mas condecorados en sii carrera, le oi esta espresion con 
motivo de haberse nombrado a un sugeto escelente en mate- 
maticas, si en su pais se apUcan muclio a esas cosillas, como 
matemdticas, lenguas orientales, fisica, derecho de gentes, y 
oiras semejantes* Pero yo te aseguro, Ben-Beley, que si 
sefialasen premios para los profesores, premios de honor 6 
de interesj 6 de amiDos, que progresos no harian ! Si hubiese 
siquiera quien los protegiese, se esmerarian sin mas estimulo 
positivo ; pero no hay protectores. 

Tan persuadido esta mi amigo Nuno, de esta verdad, que 
hablando de esto, me dijo : en otros tiempos, alia cuando me 
imaginaba, que era util y glorioso dejar fama en el mundo, 
trabaje una obra sobre varias partes de la literatura que ha- 
bia cultivado, aunque con mas amor que buen suceso. Quise 
que saliese bajo la sombra de algun poderoso, como es natu- 
ral a todo autor principiante. Oi a un magnate decir^ que 
todos los autores eran locos : d otro, que las dedicatorias 
eran estafas : a otro, que renegaba de el que invento el pfipel ; 
otro se builaba de los hombres que se imaginaban saber al- 
go : otro me insinuo, que la obra que le seria mas acepta, 
seria la letra de una tonadilla: otro me dijo, que me viera 
con un criado suyo, para tratar de esta materia ; otro ni me 
quiso hablar : otro ni me quiso responder ; otro ni me quiso 
escuchar : y de resultas de todo esto tome la determinacion 
de dedicar el fruto de mis desvelos al mozo que trafa el agua 
4 casa. 



CARTA III. 

Del mismo al inismo. 

Cuando hice el primer viage por Europa, te di noticia de 
un pais que llaman Francia, y esta mas alia de los montes 
Pirineos. Desde Inglaterra me fue muy fdcil y corto el 
transito. Registre sus provincias septentrionales ; llegue 4 
su capital, pero no pude examinarla a mi gusto, por ser cor- 
to el tiempo que podia gastar entbnces en ello, y ser mucho 
el que so necesita para ejecutarlo conprovecho. 



CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 403 

Ahora he visto la parte meridional de ella, saliendo de 
Espafia por Cataiuna, y entrando por Guipuzcoa, internan- 
dome hasta Leon por un lado, y Burdeos por otro. 

Los Franceses estan tan mal queridos en este sigloj como 
los Espanoles lo eran en el anterior ; sin duda, porque nno y 
otro sigJo ban sido precedidos de las eras gloriosas respecti- 
vas de cada nacion, que fue la de Carlos Y para Espaaa, y 
la de Luis XIV" para Francia. Este ultimo es mas reciente; 
con que tambien es mas fuerte su efecto ; pero bien examina- 
da la causa, creo hallar mucha preocupacion de parte de to- 
das los Europeos contra las Franceses. Conozco, que el 
desenfreno de su juventud ; la mala conducta de algunos que 
viajan fuera de su pais, profesando un sumo desprecio de to^ 
do lo que no es Francia ; el lujo que ha corrompido la Euro- 
pa ; y otros motives semej antes repugnan a todos sus veci- 
nos mas sobrios ; a saber, al Espanol religioso, al Italiano 
politico, al Ingles soberbio, al Holandes avaro, y al Aleman 
aspero ; pero la nacion entera no debe padecer la nota por 
culpa de algunos individuos. En ambas vueltas, que he da- 
do por Francia, he hallado en sus provincias (que siempre 
mantienen las costumbres mas puras que la capital) un trato 
humano, cortes y afable para los estrangeros, no producido 
de la vanidad de que se les visite y admire, (como puede 
suceder en Paris), sino dimanado verdaderamente de un cora- 
zon franco y sencillo, que halla gusto en procurarselo al des- 
conocido. Ni aun dentro de su capital, que algunos pintan 
como el centro de todo desorden, confusion y lujo, faltan 
hombres verdaderamente respetables. Todos los que Ilegan 
4 cierta edad, son sin duda los mas sociables del Universo ; 
porque desvanecidas las tempestades de su juventud, les 
queda e\ fondo de una indole sincera, prolija educacion (que 
en este pais es comun) y esterior agradable, sin la astucia del 
Italiano, la soberbia del Ingles, la aspereza del Aleman^ la 
avaricia del Holandes, y el despego del Espanol. 

En llegando 4 los cuarenta afios, se transforma el Frances 
en otro hombre distinto de lo que era a los veinte. El mili- 
tar concurre al trato civil con suma urbanidad ; el rnagistra- 
do con sencillez, y el particular con sosiego ; todos con ade- 
manes de agasajar al estrangero que se halla medianamente 
introducido por su Embajador, calidad, talento u otro motive. 
Se eotiende todo esto entre la gente de forma ; que con la 
mediana y comun el mismo hecho de ser estrangero, es una 



404 Choice letters. 

recomendacion superior ^ cuantas puede Uevar el que 
viaja. 

La misma desenvoltura de los jovenes, insufrible a quien 
no los conocoj tiene un no se que, que los hacc amables. 
Por ella se descubre todo el hombre interior, incapaz de ren- 
cores, astucias bajas, ni intencion dafiada. Como procure 
indagar precisamente el caracter de las cosas verdadero, y 
no graduarlas por las apariencias, casi siempre enganosas, no 
me parece tan odioso aquel bullicio y descompostura, por lo 
que llevo dicho. Del mismo dicta men es mi amigo Nuno, 
no obstante lo quejoso que est4 de que los Franceses no sean 
jgualmente imparciales, cuando hablan de los Espanoles. 



CARTA IV. 

De Ben-Beley a GazeL 

Acabo de leer el ultimo libro de los que me has enviado 
>en los varios viages que has hecho por Europa ; con el cual 
llegan 4 algunos centenares las obras Europeas de distintas 
naciones y tiempos que he leido. Gazel ! Gazel ! sin duda 
tendras por grande lo que voy k decirte ; y si publicas este 
mi dictamen, no liabra Europeo que no me llame barbaro 
Africano ; pero la amistad que te profeso, es muy grande, 
para dejar de corresponder con mis observaciones d las tuyas; 
mi sinceridad es tanta, que en nada puede mi lengua hacer 
traicion ^ mi pecho. En este supuesto digo, que de los li- 
bros que he referido, he hecho la siguiente separacion. He 
escogido cuatro de matematicas, en los que admiro la esten- 
sion y acierto que tiene el entendimiento humane cuando va 
bien dirigido : otros taiitos de jfilosofia escol^stica, en que me 
asombra la variedad de ocurrencias estraordinarias que tiene 
el hombre, cuando no precede sobre principles ciertos y evi- 
dentes ; uno de medicina, al que falta un tratade complete de 
los simples, cuye cenocimiento es diez mil veces mayor en 
A'frica : etro de anatomla, cuya lectura fue sin duda la que 
die motive al cuento del loco, que se figuraba tan quebradizo 
come el vidrio : dos de los que rcforman las costumbres, en 
las que advierto lo mucho que aun tienen que refermar; 
cuatro del cenocimiento de la naturaleza, ciencia que llaman 
iilosofia 5 en los que note lo mucho que igneraren nuestros 
abuelos, y lo mucho mastc^ue tendran que aprender nuestros 



CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 405 

nietos. Algunos de poesia^ delicioso delirio del alma, que 
prueba la ferocidad en el hombre si la aborrece ; puerilidad, 
si la profesa toda la vida ; y suavidad, si la cultiva algun 
tiempo. 

Todas las demas obras de las ciencias hiimanas las he arro- 
jado 6 distribuidoj por parecerme inutiles estractos, conipen-. 
dios defectuosos, y copias imperfectas de lo ya dichoj y re- 
petido una y mil veces. 



CARTAS FAMILIARES. 

Del Padre Jose" Francisco de Isla, escritas a varios sugetos. 

CARTA L 

El Padre de Isla a su Jiermana. 

La Corufia 24 de Setiembre de 1755. 
Mi amada Maria Francisca : discurro que tus oraciones y 
ias de tu penitenciario me consiguieron un tiempo tan feliz 
hastauna legua antes de llegar a la Coruna, en que me llovio 
un poco, sin duda para que conociese lo mucho que debia ^ 
las devotas almas que me encomendaban 4 Dios ; y acaso 
sera efecto de lo mismo la descomposicion de vientre que 
me dura tres dias ha ; pues como no prosiga adelante, ser4 
mas beneficio que indisposicion, aunque sirva de molestia 
mientras persevere. Tu salud me tiene con mas cuidado de 
el que manifiesto, siendo razon que yo oculte mi dolor a quien 
por no aumentarmele me dissimula lo que padece, porque 
asi lo pide la buena correspondencia. Nunca he pretendido 
saber mas de lo que me quisieren decir, ni que me quieran 
mas de lo que me quisieren querer ; con que siendo en este 
punto sumamente facil la conformidad, solo aspirare a mani- 
festar en todas ocasiones que ninguno te ama ni puede 
amarte mas que 

Tu amante Jiermano y padrino, 

Jose" FRANCISCO. 



406 CHOICE LETTERS. 

CARTA II. 

Del mismo a su can ado. 

Villagarcia 2 de Enero de 1756. 

Amado hermano y amigo : no es de estranar que en cor- 
reo de pascuas (1) y en la misma vispera de ellas hubiesea 
tardado tanto en dar cartas. Si el mundo amaneciera un 
ano con juicio, en ningun tiempo se debiera tardar menos ; 
pero dejemosle correr su tren, pues no se puede remediar. 
No obstante yo he conseguido este ano no haber recibido 
hasta ahora mas que tres cartas de pascuas, y esas de gente 
novicia en mi correspondencia, 4 escepcion del Sefior Ta- 
ranco, a quien, por mas que he hecho, no he podido espeler 
del cuerpo este espiritu maligno, siendo las pascuas mas se- 
guras en su carta que en el calendario. 

Diviertete en leer esa necia satisfaccion que me da N . . . 
a la pieza que me jugo, suponiendo que yo habia de ir 4 Vil- 
lar de Frades a esperar el coche para dar las ordenes a los 
cocheros. Alia tiene una respuesta, cual la merece su bobe- 
ria, con el nuevo cargo de que su hijo pasase a vista de Vi- 
llagarcia sin entrar en ella ; y suponiendo que el por si no 
era capaz de hacerla, si no mediaran las instrucciones de su 
padrCj le pregunto que motivo le he dado para que le instru- 
yese tan mal ; el me ha dado malos ratos, pero no los llevar^ 
buenos con mis cartas, y estoy esperando las de padre e hijo 
para ver por donde parten. Este ultimo es natural que 
trueque el viage de Portugal por el de Paris, adonde dicen 
que ira el Conde de Aranda por embajador ordinario des- 
pues de haber evacuado ya su embajada estraordinaria, que 
parece se redujo precisamente a condolencia por la destruc- 
cion de Lisboa, y a socorrer a aquellos Principes con cau- 
dales y con generos. 

Recibi una carta atrasadisima de D. Miguel de Medina, 
en que me resume lo que le escribe Mascarerias, desde el cam* 
po delante de la quefut Lisboa^ a los diez y ocJio dias de su 
total destruccion. Dice que se salvo con toda su familia en- 
tre una espesa lluvia de piedras y de cascajo por especial 
proteccion de la santisima virgen, habiendo visto primero 
desplomarse toda su casa, y despues arder con todos los 

(1) Pdscua en Espanol significa todas las graiidcs fiestas, espe- 
cialmente las de Navidad. 



CARTAS ESC061DAJ5. 407 

I'nuebles, alhajas y papeles. Estos ultimos y los libros son 
los que mas le duelen, no habiendose eximido mas que unos 
pocos que tenia en una quinta, y un cajon de ellos 
que le Ilego de Madrid, el dia despues de la fatali- 
dad. Solo pide 4 Medina mas y mas libros, especial- 
mente de arquitectura, porque el rey de Portugal trata de 
edificar una nueva corte de planta en parage distinto de la 
antigua, aunque este todavia no se ha determinado. A mi aun 
no me ha escrito, no obstante tener tres 6 cuatro cartas mias, 
pero ni lo estrano, ni me quejo. 

Llegaron los diez y ocho barriles de escabeches y de dulce^ 
buenos todos, a escepcion de uno de sardinas, quedebiade es- 
tar mal calafeteado, y se abrio en el camino. Repito gracias, 
y renuevo todo lo que te supliqne en la posta pasada. 

Dime, si has recibido ese cajoncillo de cigarros de la Ha- 
bana, porque cada dia me confirmo mas en la sospecha de 
alguna maniobra del mpsonero de Villar de Frades, en cuyo 
poder los puso el P. Manuel de Barachaguren, administrador 
de esta iglesia ; y el picaro del mesonero no hay forma de 
decir como se llamaba el maragato a quien dice se los en- 
trego, y que se obli^o a llevarlos. A^ntes de ayer vino de 
alia Pinilla, que esta encargado de esta averiguacion, y solo 
me trajo razon de que el maragato habia vuelto a pasar a 
Madrid, y que a su regreso a Santiago le haria cargo el me- 
sonero de dicho cajoncillo. Yo hubiera ya ido en persona a 
Villar de Frades a liquidar este embuste y a escarmentar al 
mesonero, si el tiempo lo hnbiera permitido ; pero a reserva 
de dos dias que por fuerza eran ocupados en la iglesia, todos 
los demas han sido intratables. 

Hubo carta de Roma de 17 de noviembre ; pero nada 
dice de congregacion ni del P. Idiaquez. Tampoco me 
ocurre m^s anadir, sino rogar a Dios te me guarde como ha 
menester, 

Tu amante hermano y ami^o. 

JOSE% 



CARTA III. 

Del mismo al mismo. 

Burgos 21 de Enero de 1757- 
Amado hermano y amigo : sail de Villagarcia el dia 15 : 
ea el se estanco dos veces la calesa sobre el hielo, y la segun- 



408 CHOICE LETTERS. * 

pa vez estuvo encima de el desde las cuatro de la tarde hasta 
las once del dia siguiente, y nosotros dentro de ella por espa- 
cio de tres horas. Socorrieronnos caritativamente de un lu- 
gar vecino, enviandonos caballerlas para que subiesemos a 
elj y llegamos como puedes considerar. Alii tomamos otras 
dos raulas para que ayudasea a romper el hielo y nieve hasta 
Palencia : pero aun asi no quise entrar en la calesa, y fui a 
caballo hasta la misma ciudad. En ella me detuve dia y me- 
dio : tome otra calesa, mejoro el tiempo, y voy caminando. 
gracias a Dios, con felicidad, despues de haber padecido 
muchns tentaciones de volverme a mi colegio. 

No ten2:o tiempo de escribir a Maria Francisca^ ni a las 
deraas personas que me hacen merced, y sirva esta para to- 
das. Hoy llegue a Burgos entre mil trabajosy peligros. 
Pvlanana parto tomando de aqui otras dos mulas para pasar 
los montes de Oca, que son lo mas peligroso del camino. La 
salud bnena, a escepcion del pecho, que se me cerro el dia 
que estuve sobre el hielo. Af Dios. 

Tu hermano JOSE^ 



CARTA IV. 

Del mismo al mismo. 

Zaragoza 18 de Marzo de 1756. 
Amado hermano y amigo ; segun lo que me dices en la 
tuya de dos del corriente, contemplo ya a madre en la otra 
vida, y a padre muy cerca de ella : cumplase en todo la vo- 
luntad del Senor. Yo voy continuando con felicidad mi car- 
rera, teniendo ya andado mas de la mitad de ella. Me han 
pedido varios serraones para imprirairlos, pero no lo conse- 
guiran. La salud se ha resentido un poco, porque no soy de 
alabastre ; pero no me ha estorbado, gracias a Dios, cumplir 
con mi ministerio 

Un abrazo a Maria Francisca, y vive como necesita 
Tu amante hermano y amigo, 

JOSE^ FRANCISCO. 



CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 409 

CARTA V. 

Del mismo al mismo. 

Zaragoza 22 de Marzo de 1757. 
Amado hermano y amigo : cuando esperaba la noticia de 
la muerte de nuestros dos enfermos, me hallo gustosamente 
sorprendido con la que me das de su recobro en la tuya de 9 
del corriente. Bendito sea Dios por este nuevo beneficio. 
Solo si me da cuidado la salud de Maria Francisca, cuyos 
escesos de amor son incorregibles. Yo estoy raolido y me- 
dio reventado despues de veinte y ocho sermones, faltan- 
dome todavia diez y seis. El fruto es grande, y este es mi 
unico consuelo. A^ Dios, que te guarde como ha menester, 
Tu atnante hermano y amigo, 

JOSE^ FRANCISCO. 



CARTA VI. 

Del mismo a su hermana. 

Villagarcia 17 de Junio de 1757. 
Hija mia : tus cartas de primero y ocho del corriente que 
llegaron juntas, porque asi lo quieren los senores estafeteros. 
me dejan con la misma alternativa de afectos que tu esperi- 
mentas en tu salud. De buena gana partiria contigo mi ro- 
bustez, porque aunque no me sobra mucha, menos me basta- 
ria para mis tareas ordinarias y estraordinarias. Los banos 
casi fueron las primeras medicinas que se conocieron 
en el mundo. y por muchos siglos las unicas ; por eso tengo 
mucha fe con ellos. La dificfltad estu en atinar que especie 
de banos son los que se oponen k tal especie de enfermedades, 
y cuales achaques son los que no pueden resistir a tales ba- 
nos. En todo caminan a tientas los medicos ; mas por lo 
mismo puede ser que acierten, porque tal vez hace la casuali- 
dad lo que no puede hacer la eleccion y el discernimiento. 
Ya estamos en el mejor tiempo de tomarlos, que es el mes de 
junio y cercanias de S. Juan, especialmente si por all^ comi.- 
enzan a esplicarse los calores, que por aca todavia estan muy 
remisos. Mi parecer es que no pierdas dia, pues si surtiesen 
buen efecto, tendras iugar para recobrar las fuerzas que son 
35 



410 CHOICE LETTERS. 

menester para repetirlos por setiembre. Yo no abandonaria 
el uso de los polvos de Aix, habiendolos esperimentado tan 
propicios, sin estranar que hasta ahoia no hubiesen desarrai- 
gado la causa, porque cuando las raices son profundas, es 
menester no dejar el azadon de la mano hasta arrancarlas, y 
eso no se hace en un dia. 

No puedo negar que cuanto mas largas son tus cartas, mas 
me gustan ; pero tampoco me puede gustar fineza tuya que 
sea en detrimento de tu salud ; y asi mientras Dios no te la 
mejore, me contentare con una fe de vida, paramo cual basta ' 
tu firma, y me daras que sentir siempre que tuvieres que pade- 
cer por consolarme. Las memorias acostumbradas ; y A^ 
Dios hija. Tu amante hermano^ 

JOSE^ FRAxNCISCO. 



CABTA VII. 

Del mismo a la misma. 

Leon 4 de Mayo de 1759. 
Hija mia : hoy hace ocho dias que llegue a esta ciudad, 
habiendo gastado cuatro en el camino, porque me detuve dos 
en el monasterio de Vega con mi prima. La mitad del viage 
fue con gran calor, y la otra mitad con escesivo frio, el que 
ha continuado desde que llegue acompanado de agua, de vi- 
entos fuertes, y tambien de algo de nieve. Pague la patente 
en la primera noche con un fuerte dolor colico que me obligo 
a guardar cama todo el dia siguiente ; pero como rorapio por 
ambas vias, quede presto desahogado. Lo mismo sucedio 
al General de S. Benito, que se halla en esta ciudad ; solo 
que k este le acometio a la despedida, y a mi a la entra- 
da ; por cuya razon y por el mal tiempo suspendio el viage, 
que ya tenia echado k Espinareda. Visitome al dia siguiente 
de mi arribo : comi con su Reverendisima otro dia. Me 
ha visitado toda la ciudad, y como con el Intendente los dias 
que me dejan libres otros convites. He celebrado mucho 
ver la fabrica de tolas, aunque temo que se atrase por la de- 
sunion de los que principalmente la manejan. Luego que el 
tiempo lo permita, me restituire a mi celdita, cuya quietud se 
me hace mas apetecible, siempre que carezco de ella. 

Vive tanto como tu amante^ 
JOSE^ 



CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 411 

CARTA VIII. 

Del mismo al S": D. G. R, 

Pontevedra 25 de Mayo de 1764. 

Muy Senor mio y mi diieno: tengo la fortuna deque 
V. S. me conozca muchos aiios ha. Si no se le ha borrado 
de la memoria mi caracter, tendra muy presente mi reahdad 
y mi entereza. La carne y sangre no me hacen fuerza. ni 
las pasiones humanas me ban cegado nunca la razon. Con- 
cederesela a mi mayor enemigo, siempre que la tenga ; ne- 
garesela. y se la negue alguna vez a mi mismo padre^ cuan- 
do concebi que no la tenia. 

Hermano mio es Don Jose Joaquin de Isla y Losada. Si 
en el injusto, voluntario y empermdo pleito criminal que le 
suscita-ron sus contrarios, no hubiera sido testigo ocular de su 
inocenciaj e yo hubiese de sentenciarle, el primer voto que 
tendria contra si seria el mio, y no seria el mas benigno. 
Sobradas esperiencias tiene el mismo de esta mi entereza en 
los varios sucesos de su vida. En los mas me tuvo contra si, 
pero en el presente no puedo desampararle, ni es razon que 
niegue a un hermano mio lo que en iguales circunstancias 
concederia a quien hubiese quitado violentamente la vida a 
mi padre y a mi mad re. 

Pasd.ron a mi vista todos los lances, porque me hallaba en 
Santiago en aquel turbado dia. No halle que condenar en 
este mozo, y lo que mas es, ni tampoco lo hallaron sus mismos 
contrarios. EUos formaron los primeros autos, y por estos 
mismos autos le absolvieron los Senores jueces del recta 
tribunal de que V. S. es digno miembro. Me aseguran que 
la segimda probanza nada aiiade a la primera, sino confirmar 
mas y mas el empefio de acabar de arruinar a ese mozo, para 
cubrir una inconsideracion con la perdida de un inocente. 

Alegan los contrarios su honor y el de una comunidad ver- 
daderamente muy respetable. Esta le tendra siempre muy 
resguardado, y nunca podra depender de la precipitacion de 
algunos particulares menos detenidos. Pero supongamos que 
dependa : y no se interesara tambien el honor del tribunal de 
V. S. en que sin nuevos, grandes y evidentes documentos no 
reforme lo que pronuncio con tanto examen y con tanta ma- 
durez? Mas nada de esto es del caso. El dictamen de que 
conviene que perezca un inocente, para que no perezcan 
muchos culpadosj ya sabemos todos la baja cuna que tuvo. 



412 CHOICE LETTERS. 

Nunca le adoptaron por suyo los tribunales crlstianos. En 
ellos reina y reinara la maxima contraria : menos malo es 
absolver a muchos culpadosj que condenar a un inoceiite. 

Estalo sin duda mi hermano en el feo delito que le impu- 
tan. Todos los esfuerzos de sus contrarios, siendo tantos, 
tan poderosos y tan empefiadoSj no pudieron conseguir que 
dejase de conocerlo y de definirlo asi el rectlsimo tribunal. 
Grande es la fuerza de la inocencia, cuando no bastan a 
oprimirla las maquinas del poder. Mejor dire : siempre es 
muy debil el poder con los tribunales donde prreside la jus- 
ticia. Este es lioy todo mi consuelo y toda mi esperanza. 

Nada mas tengo que esponer a V. S. Pedirle que haga gra- 
cia a mi hermano, seria suponerle reo, pues en pleitos crimi- 
nales no cabe otra que moderar el rigor de las leyes. Supli- 
carle otra cosa^ seria agraviar su integridadj que tengo muy 
conocida. Con que en suma esta carta solo se reduce a dar 
testimonio de que mi profundo silencio no ha dependido de 
que tenga por culpado a Jose Joaquin, como alguno ha queri- 
do sonar ; sino precisamente de haber descansado y decansar 
en la justicia de la causa, y en la equidad de los jueces. 
Tampoco he querido malograr esta oportuna y casi necesaria 
ocasion de renovar a V. S. todo mi antiguo respeto. Nues- 
tro Senor guarde a V. S. muchos afios como puede y le 
suplico. B. L. M. de V. S. 

Su mas atento servidor y capellan^ 

JosE^ Francisco de ISLA 



CARTA IX. 

Del misnio a su hermana, 

Bclonia 8 de Junio de 1780. 
Amada hija, hermana y Sefiora mia : recibo tu estimadisi- 
ma carta de 2 del pasado, acompaiiada con la gaceta de 
Madrid ; su fecha 23 del mismo, con que me regala siempre 
nuestro amantisimo sobrino. Segun estas dos fechas tu carta 
se detuvo veinte y un dias en Madrid 6 en Parma, porque si 
hubieran caminado juntas la gaceta y ella, no pudiera la una 
ganar ^ la otra las enormes ventajas que la ganoen el camino. 
El que las recibe en Parma, no es capaz de detenerlas ni un 
solo momento, porque deseoslsimo de servirte 4 ti, y de com- 
placerme a mi, e mformado tambien de que ni d ti ni ^ mi 



CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 413 

lios ha queclado otro consuelo igual a el de nuestra inocente 
conversacion, tampoco el tiene otro mayor que el de cooperai' 
4 que lo logremos con toda la posible puntualidad y prudente 
ffecuencia. Resta pues, que dicha carta se hubiese quedado 
traspapelada en tu escritorio 6 en el buro de el que nos hace 
el singular favor de dirigirlas. Pareciome que debia adver- 
tirte esto para tu gobierno. 

He celebrado mucho que hayas abandonado la casa hu- 
meda, fria y sin ventilacion que habitabas, atribuyendo a ella 
con sobrada razon, ^ lo menos gran parte de lo que has pa- 
decido en el pasado invierno. Alegrareme infinito de que te 
trate mejor^ como lo espero, la calle de Atocha, junto a Lore- 
tOj donde te has pasado. Si no tengo trastornada la memo- 
ria, (como lo temo) pareceme que la calle de Atocha hace 
parte del cuartel del oriente de Madrid, reputado por el mas 
sano ; lo que si fuere asi. no contribuira poco 4 tu recobro. 
No me dices el numero de la casa, ni el cuarto que en ella ha- 
bitas, lo que dicen es necesario para guia de los sobrescritos. 

Al Sefior Conde de Aranda solamente le escribi desde 
Calvi sobre los manuscritos qne me habian embargado en 
Espafia, suplicandole que si despues de examinados no se 
hallase en ellos cosa que ofendiese a la religion ni al estado, 
se sirviese su Escelejicia disponer que aquellos inocentes 
hijos viniesen a hacer companla a su pobre y desterrado 
padre. Kespondiome aquel Senor que eso ya no estaba en 
su mano ; pero que estuviese sin cuidado, porque aquellos 
hijos qlfaban a cargo de quien haria que fuesen tratados como 
los trataria su mismo padre, sin permitir que ninguno se me- 
tiese con ellos. Esto fue en suma la respuesta. 

Correspondd cordialisimamente a la memoria que hacen 
de mi los amigos Ramirez y Casaus. Deseo con las mayores 
ansias que el primero triunfe cuanto antes, y no ceso de rogar 
a Dios por el recobro del segundo. 

Dias ha que esta concluida la version de Gil Bias ; pero 
ni mi cabeza ni mi pulso me ban permitido emprender todavia 
el prologo y dedicatoria. Los calores son escesivos, y con 
ellos se hace mayor cada dia mi dejamiento y mi suma 
debilidad. 

A^ Dios, hija mia : a Dios, y manda a este tu amante 
hermano, 

Padrino y servidor^ 

JOSE^ FRANCISCO, 
35* 



414 CHOICE LSTTEKSV 



CARTA X. 



Del mismo a un amigo suyo» 

Quien siendo poco mas rico que el Padre de Isla, pero habi- 
endo oido que este estaba niuy necesitadoj le escribioj ofre- 
ciendole partir con el lo poco que le quedaba. 

Querido amigo : que sobrehuraana fuerza ;es esta ! que 
alma ha jamas sido capaz de tan heroicas acciones ! Temes, 
te persuades que estoy necesitado^ y quieres partir conmigo lo 
poco que te queda ! Mereces que te erijan estatuas : y si fuera 
este el tiempo de la gentilidad, te adorarian como a Dios de 
la amistad. Yo no puedo esplicarte mi reconocimiento a la 
piedad que usas conmigo. Es cosa deplorable el verse en 
estado de necesitarla ; pero cuan dulce y consolante es en- 
•contrar almas tan tiernas y tan grandes como la tuya, que lo 
compadezcan ! Todos mis infortunios, todos mis males son 
nada en comparacion de la satisfaccion que me causa tu hu- 
manidad y afecto. Y quieres condenar mi gratitud al silen- 
cio ! ya se, amigo, si, ya se que tu corazon ejercita su bene- 
ficencia, no para recibir el lisongero tributo del reconocimi- 
ento, sino para satifacer su noble inclinacion. Pero, como 
quieres que deje de ser reconocido a tan singulares beneficios, 
como he recibido de tu generosa amistad ? Eso no puede ser, 
amigo : con que, permitiras que, obedeciendo a la vo:Wmperi- 
osa de mi corazon, te diga que mi gratitud sera indeleble, y 
que mi afecto para ti tendra un siempre por termino de su 
duracion, 

Enviame solo la mitad de lo que me ofreces, y sobrara para 
hacer de muy pobre muy rico a 

Tufino amigo ^ JOSE^ 



REFLEXlOxNES MORALES. 
MORAL REFLECTIONS. 



I Oh honibre, seas el que fueres noble 6 artesano ; rieo 6 
pobre ; docto 6 ignorante ; eclesi^stico 6 secular ; religioso 
6 militar ; soberano 6 subdito ; desciende dentro de ti mis- 
mo, y en un silencio profundo, y no interrumpido, reflexiona 
sobre los horrores de la nada, que precedieron a tu concep- 
cion ! I Como de la nada has pasado a ser ? corao en un 
instante has llegado a ser espiritu y cuerpo, esto es ; con- 
junto de dos sustancias, cuya union parece incompatible, y 
cuya accion es us prodigio continuado ? 

Ni tu padre, ni tu madre tuvieron conocimiento ni poder 
para coordinar tus musculos, para diluir ni liquidar tu sangre, 
ni para endurecer tus huesos. Una inteligencia suprema, 
superior a todas las potencias de la tierra, y superior k todas 
tus ideas, quiso, y comenzo tu existencia ; quiso, y creciste at 
estado en que te hallas. j Ay de mi ! ^ Y quien es esta in- 
teligencia ? j Ay ! Quien puede ser, sino el motor universal, 
el principle de todo lo que vegeta y respira, y el infinite ser, 
al que Uamamos Dios? Su mano omnipotente te bosquejaba, 
cuando tu no podias conocerle, y te conserva y mantiene en 
un siglo en el que se hace vanidad de ultrajarle. Pero si na 
eras ayer, y puede ser dejes de ser hoy ; ; possible es que se 
te pase el dia, que tan rapidamente se huye, sin peusar ei> 
este criador y conservador, sin darle gracias, y sin adorarle ? 

EL MARQUES CARACCIOLO. 



La verdad es la que rige los Cielos, alumbra la tierra, sus- 
tentala justicia, gobierna las Republicas, confirma lo que es 
claro, y aclara lo que es dudoso ; con ella todas las viitudes 
tienen su perfeccion. Ella es un homenage que nunca cae, 
un escudo que no se pasa, un tiempo que no se turba, una 
flota que no perece, una flor que no se marchita, una mar 
que no se altera, y un puerto en donde nadie peligra. La 
Verdad tiene en si tan gran fuerza, que sin ella la fortaleza es 
flaca, la prudencia es malicia, la temperancia es miseria, la 
justicia es sanguinolenta, la humildad es traidora, la pacien-> 



4l6 MORAL REFLECTIONS. 

cia fingicla, la castidad vana, la riqueza perdida, y la piedad 
supeiflua. La verdad es im centro adonde todas las cosas 
reposan, el iiorte por donde el mundo se rige, el antidoto con 
que todos se curan : es la sombra adonde todos descansan, el 
terrero adonde todos tiran, pero el bianco adonde pocos 
aciertan. don pedro de Medina. 



El temor de la justicia divina es el principio que hizo na- 
cer en la imaginacion de varios libertinos las horribles ideas 
filosoficas, ya de negar a Dios la existencia, y/a de despojar 
de su inmortalidad al alma. Toda la desdicha de estos mi- 
serables viene de que, lejos de contemplar al Omnipotente 
como a un padre carinoso^ solo se figuran en el un juez severo ; 
y para sacudir de si el temor, que esta calidad les inspira, 
forcejan a persuadirse, 6 con la primera de estas dos quime- 
ras, que no hay Dios que los castigue ; 6 con la segunda, 
que solo pueden temer de el un castigo leve, y de corta dura- 
cion, como lo es cualquiera pena temporal. ^ Pero que lo- 
gran con esto ? Puntualmeiite lo que el reo, que huyendo de 
la justicia, se arroja por un despenadcro, y por evitar un su- 
plicio contingente, abraza una muerte indubitable. Por el 
precipico mayor de todos, que es el de la impiedad, procu- 
ran huir de la justicia divina. Y aun los que niegan a Dios 
la existencia, no tanto aspiran a huir de la justicia divina, 
como que la justicia divina huya de ellos, pretendiendo que 
el soberano juez se desaparezca de aquel augusto trono, en 
que los ha de sentenciar. feijoo. 



El avaro ya se sabe que es un martir del demonio, 6 un 
anacoreta, que con su abstinencia y su retiro hace meritos 
para ir al infierno. El corazon, partido entre los dos deseos 
de conservar y adquirir, padece una continua fiebrOj mezcla- 
da con un mortal frio ; pues, se abrasa con la ansia de conse- 
guir lo ageno, y tiembla con el susto de perder lo propio. 
Tiene hambre^y no come ; tiene sed, y no bebe : tiene necesi- 
dad, y no reposa : jamas se ve libre de sobresaltos. Ningun 
raton se mueve en el silencio de la noche, que con el ruido 
no le de especie de ser un ladron que le escala. Ningun 
viento sopla que en su imaginacion no amenace naufragio al 
navio que tiene puesto en comercio : Ninguna guerra se sus- 
cita, que no considere ya a los enemigos talando sus tierras : 



REFLEXIONES MORALES. 41? 

cualquier rencilla de particulares, dentro de su idea viene ii 
parar en popular turaulto, que lleva a saco el caudal. No 
hay uubecilla que no imagine tempestuosa para sus vinas y 
mieses : no hay intemperie, que no amague corrupcion a lo 
que tieue recogido en las trojes. feijoo. 



El Ambicioso es un esclavo de todo el minido : del princi- 
pe. porque conceda el empleo : del valido, porque interceda": 
de los demas, porque no estorben. Tiene el alma y el 
cuerpo en continuo movimientO; porque es menester no per- 
der instante. A todos teme. porque ninguuo hay que con 
una acusacion no pueda desvanecer toda su solicitud. : O 
cuanto force] a con su semblante porque muestre agrado a los 
mismos a quienes prolesa mortal odio ! j Cuanto trabajo le 
cuesta reprimir todas aquellas inclinaciones viciosas que pue- 
den diticultar sus medras ! De la pasion dorainante son victi- 
rnas todas las demas pasiones ; y el vicio de la anibicion. co- 
mo tirano dueiio, sobre atormentarle por si mismo, le prohibe 
Todos aq-iellos gustos a que le lleva el deseo. Ve al que va a 
la ccmedia, al que logra el paseo honesto. al que asiste al 
banquete, al que goza el sarao. todo lo ve. y lo envidia : pero 
los apetitos estan en el, annque furiosos. aprisionados como 
los vientos en la carcel de Eolo. feijoo. 



Cuanto mas abulta "el cuer-po de un hombre, tanto mas tiene 
donde le hiera el enemigo : y cuanto mas es la amplitud de 
la fortuna, tanto mas hay donde hiera la adversidad. Son 
las ricas torres elevadas, y las pobres chozas humildes ; y el 
rayo mas veces descarga en la torre su furia, que en k cho- 
za. Uno de los mayores males que hay en lo temporal, sino 
el mayor de todos, es la salud qiiebrada ; como el mayor 
bien la salud robusta. Y no tiene duda que, en igualdad de 
temperaraento, mucho mas sano es el pobre que el rico : por- 
que este con los escescs se estraga la salud, y aquel se la con- 
serva con su sobriedad. 

Que bella digresion hace Lucano en el libro quinto de la 
guerra civil, sobre la felicidad del pobre Barquero Amintas, 
cuando pinta a Cesar en el silencio de la noche pulsando la 
puerta de su choza. para que le conduzca prontamente a la 



418 MORAL REFLECTIONS. 

Calabria. Todo ei mundo esta conmovido y temblando coo 
los movimientos de la guerra civil ; y dentro de la misraa 
Grecia, que es el teatro de la guerra, vecino a los mismos 
ejercitos, duerme, sin temor alguno, un pobre barquero sobre 
enjutas ovas. Despiertanle los golpes que da a su puerta el 
generoso Caudillo, sin introducir en su pecho el menor susto : 
pues, aunque no ignora que esta toda la campana cubierta de 
tropas, sabe tambien que no hay en su choza cosa que pueda 
brindar los militares insultos, j O vida del pobre, esclama el 
poeta, que tienes la felicidad de eslar exenta de las violen- 
cias ! j O pobreza, beneficio grande de los Dioses, aunque 
no reconocida de los homhres ! Que muros 6 que templos 
gozaran el privilegio que tienen Amintas y su choza de no 
temblar a los golpes de la robusta mauo de Cesar ! 

FEIJOO. 



La modestia es la prenda mas amable de una doncella, 
aun en cotejo de la hermosura. Esta, no hay duda, halaga y 
solicita mucho mas la pasion del hombre, pero aquella se 
grangea su mayor estimacion y aprecio, La pasion nace de 
los atractivos que la hacen amar aquello que la provoca : mas 
el aprecio y estimacion que infunde el decoro de la modestia, 
proceden del respeto que adora en la esterior compostura de 
un rostro la belleza interior del alma, a quien aquella retrata. 
Aquella misma es tambien seguro indicio de la dulzura de 
genio, y de la suavidad del caracter, a quien sirve de alma, 
de la cual espora su mayor satisfaccion y dicha en el casa- 
miento el hombre que pretende poseerla. La hermosura es 
don accidental de la naturaleza, que entre pocos la reparte ; 
pero la hermosura interior del alma la da la virtud sola, a 
cualquiera que desea conseguirla. 

PEDRO DE MONTENGON. 



En todas aquellas cosas, que esencialmente componen la 
felicidad temporal, conviene a saber ; Vida, Salud, Honra y 
Hacienda, es muy mejorado el virtuoso, respecto de el que 
no lo es. La Honra nadie ignora que es parto legitimo de la 
Virtud. Por eso los Romanos ediiicaron unidos los templos 
de estas dos dichas, que veneraban como deidades, de modo 
que solo por el templo de la Virtud se podia entrar al templo 



REFLEXIONES MORALES. 419 

del Honor. Los niismos que huyen de la practica dela Vir- 
tudj la miran con estimacion y reverencia. La Salud y larga 
vida es mas natural y posible en el hombre virtuoso, por la 
templanza con que vive, al paso que el vicioso con sus esce- 
sos se estraga la salud, y se acorta la vida. La Hacienda tiene 
una gran maestra de economla en la Virtud, siendo cierto que 
se conserva evitando toda superiluidad. 

La suavidad y dulzura que al alma ocasiona la buena con- 
ciencia, coloca en muy eminente grado lafortuna de los jus- 
tos sobre la de los pecadores. Es esta una felicidad de poco 
bulto, pero de mucha monta ; una piedra preciosa, que en 
breves dimensiones encierra grandes quilates. Es la concien- 
cia espejo del alma, y sucede al justo y al pecador, cuando 
se miran en este espejo, lo que a la hermosa y a la fea al 
verse en el cristal : aquella se complace, porque ve perfec- 
ciones ; esta se entristece, porque no registra sino lunares. 

FEIJOO. 



I O MUERTE, cuan amarga es tu memoria ! Cuan presta tu 
venida ! Cuan secretos tus caminos ! Cuan dudosa tu bora ! 
Cuan universal tu senorio ! Los poderosos no te pueden huir ; 
los sabios no te saben evitar ; los fuertes contigo pierden las 
fuerzas ; para contigo ninguno hay rico ; pues, ninguno 
puede coraprar la vida, ni aun por tesoros. Todo lo andas, 
todo lo cercas, y en todo lugar te hallas. TA paces las yer- 
bas ; bebes los yientos ; corrompes los aires ; mudas los si- 
glos ; truecas el mundo, y no dejas de sorber la mar. Todas 
las cosastlenen sus crecientes y menguantes ; mas tu, siempre 
permaneces en un mismo ser. Eres un martillo que siempre 
hiere ; espada que nunca se embota ; lazo en que todos 
caen ; carcel en que todos entran ; mar donde todos peli- 
gran ; pena que todos padecen ; y tributo que todos pagan. — 
I O muerte cruel ! ^ Como no tienes lastima de venir al me- 
jor tierapo e impedirlos negocios encaminados a bien ? Ro- 
bas en una bora, en un minuto, lo pue se gano en muchos 
anos ; cortas la sucesion de los linages ; dejas los Reinos 
sin herederos ; hinches el mundo de orfandades ; cortas el 
hilo de los estudios ; haces malogrados los buenos ingenios ; 
juntas el fin con el principio, sin dar lugar a los juedios. — 
I O muerte, muerte ! O implacable enemiga del genero hu- 
mano ! ^j Porque tuviste entrada en el mundo ?. . . 

LUIS DE GRACIAN, 



REFRANES DE LA LENGUA ESPANOLA CON 
SUS ESPLICACIONES. 



Quien mucho abarca poco aprieta. Que esplica, que 
quien emprende 6 toma 4 su cargo muchas cosas a un tienipo, 
ordinariamente no cumple con ninguna. 

Ahajanse los estados^ y dlzanse los establos. Que advierte 
la poca constancia de la fortuna. 

Quien mal anda^ mal acaba. Que se dice de el que ni tiene 
orden ni cuidado en sus negocios, que ordinariamente se le 
sigue desgracia. 

Si el corazon fiiera de acero^ no le venciera el dinero. 
Que da a entender la dificultad que hay en resistir las tenta- 
ciones de la codicia. 

Quien el aceite mesura, las manos se unta. Que da ^ en- 
tender que los que manejan dependencias 6 intereses agenoSj 
suelen aprovecharse de ellos mas de lo justo. 

Quien no adoba^ 6 quita gotera^ tiene que hacer casa 
entera. 

La muger del ciego, para quien se afeita ! Que vitupera 
el demasiado adorno de lasraugeres, con el fin de "kgradar ^ 
otros que a sus maridos. 

fj/ buen pagadovj amo es de lo ageno. Que denota que el 
que paga bien y exactamente lo que debe, tiene mucho 
credito. 

Agaa ni enferma, ni embeoda^ ni adeiida. Que recomien- 
da los buenos efectos del agua, por contraposicion 4 los del 
vino. 

Quien en un mes quiere ser rico, al medio le ahorcnn. Que 
amonesta a los que por medios ilicitos quieren hacerse ricos 
en poco tiempo. 

Por el alabado d(jt al conocidoj y vime arrepentido. 

Dime con quien and as ^ y te dirt quien eres. Que advierte 
lo mucho que influyen ^ las costumbres las buenas 6 malas 
companias. 



^ 



TREATISE ON SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 



Spanish versification is the art of making Spanish Verses 
according to certain rules. 

These rules regard, 1st. the structure of the verses ; 2d. 
the mixture of the verses with one another. 

ARTICLE I. 

Of the structure of verses. 

SECTION I. ij 

Of the different kinds of verses. 

The Spanish verses are measured by the number of sylla- 
bles. Variety in the number of syllables produces different 
kinds of verses. 

1st. The verses of eleven syllables or endecasilabo^ hen- 
decasyllabe. 

Saiga mi trabajada voz y rompa 
El son confuso y misero lamento 
Con eficacia y fuerza, que interrompa 
El celeste y terrestre raovimiento : 
La fama con sonora y clara trompa, 
Dando mas furia ^ mi cansado aliento, 
Derrame en todo el orbe de la tierra 
Las armasj el furor y nueva guerra. 

Alonso de Ercilla. 

2d. The verse often syllables or c?ecasfZa6o,decasy liable. 

Los que andais empoUando obras de otros 
Sacad, pues, i volar vuestra cria. 
Ya diri cada autor : esta es mia ; 
Y veremos que os queda 4 vosotros. 

T. DE Yriarte. 
3d. The verse of nine syllables. 

Si querer entender de todo 
Es ridicula presuncion, 
Servir solo para una cosa 

Suele ser falta no menor. T. de Yriartje. 

36 



422 



SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 



4th. The verse of eight syllables or de redondilla mayor 
(large roundelay.) 

Al infierno el Tracio Orfeo 
Su muger bajo a buscar, 
Que no pudo a peor lugar 
Llevarle tan mal deseo. 

Canto, y al mayor tormento 
Puso suspension y espanto, 
Mas que lo dulce del canto. 
La novedad del intento. 

El Dios adusto ofendido, 
Con un estrano rigor, 
La pena que hallo mayor 
Fue volverle ^ ser marido. 

Y aunque su muger le dio 
Por pena de su pecado ; 
Por premio de lo cantado, 
Perderla facilito. F. de Quevedo. 

5th. The verse of seven syllables. 

I Quien es aquel que baja 
Por aquella colina, 
La botella en la mano, 
En el rostro la risa ; 
De p^mpanos e yedra 
La cabeza cenida ; 
Cercado de zagales, 
Rodeado de ninfas ; 
Que al son de los panderos 
Dan voces de alegrla, 
Celebran sus hazauas, ^ 
Aplauden su venida ? 
Sin duda sera Baco, 
El padre de las vinas ; 
Pues no, que es el poeta, 
Autor de esta letrilla, J. Cadalso*^ 

6th. The verse of six syllables or de redondilla menor 
(small roundelay.) 

De amores me muero^ 
Mi madre acudid, 



^^ 



VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 42S 

Si no Uegais pronto 
Vereisme morir. 
Catorce anos tengo, 
Ayer los cumpli. 
Que fue el primer dia 
Del florido abril ; 

Y chicos y chicas 
Me suelen decir : 

; Por que no te casan, 

Mariquilla? di. 

De amores me muero, etc. J. Cadalsct. 

7tli. The verse oijlve syllables. 

Poderoso caballero 

Es don DinerOy 

Nunca vi almas ingratas 

A su gusto y aficion, 

Que a las caras de un doblon, 

Hacen sus caras baratas ; 

Y pues las hace bravatas 
Desde una bolsa de cuero, 
Poderoso caballero 

Es don Dinero. F. de Quevedo. 

8th. The verse of four syllables. 

I Quien los jueces con pasion, 
Sin ser ungiiento, hace humanos, 
Pues untandoles las manos ' 
Les ablanda el corazon ; 
Quien gasta su opilacion 
Con oro y no con acero ? 
El dinero. 

Quien procura que se aleje 
Del suelo la gloria vana ; 
Quien siendo toda cristiana 
Tiene la cara de herege ; 
Quien hace que al hombre aqueje 
El desprecio y la tristeza? 
Lapobreza, F. de Quevedo. 



424 SPAmSH VERSIFICATION. 

9th. The verse of three syllables* 

Dineros son calidad, 

Verdad : 

Mas ama, quien mas suspira^ 

Mentira L. de Gongora» 

10th. The verse of two syllables. 

Ingrata, hermosa Antandra^ 

En cuyas centellas / 

Bellas^ 

El alma es sa^amandra. 

Que respira encendida, 

Dulce ardor, blando incendio, ardiente vida. 

11th. The verse of fourteen syllables, which is nothing 
more than the union of two verses of seven syllables. 

Yo lei, no se donde, que en la lengua herbolaria, 
Saludando a un tomillo la yerba parietaria. 
Con socarroneria le dijo de esta suerte : 
Dios te guarde, Tomillo : lastima me da verte ; 
Que aunque mas oloroso que todas estas plantas, 
Apenas medio palmo del suelo te levantas. 

T. DE Yriarte. 

12th. The verse of thirteen and tioelve syllables, a la 
francesa (after the French fashion.) 

En cierta catedral una campana habia 
Que solo se tocaba algun solemne dia. 
Con el mas recio son, con pausado compas 
Cuatro golpes 6 tres solia dar no mas. 
Por esto, y ser mayor de la ordinaria marca, 
Celebrada fue siempre en toda la comarca. 

T. DE Yriarte. 

13th. The verse of ticelve syllables or de arte mayor (of 
gr**at art,) which is only the union of two verses of six syl- 
lables. 

I No heraos de reirnos siempre que chochea 
Con ancianas frases un novel autor ? 
Lo que es afectado juzga que es primor ; 



^^ 



VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 425 

Habla puro a costa de la claridad, 

Y no halla voz baja para nuestra edad, 

Si fue noble en tiempo del Cid campeador. 

T. DE Yriarte. 

The verses of fourteen^ ten and 7iine syllables, are not fre- 
quently used. Those a la francesa and de arte mayor, 
which were often used in the early times of Spanish poetry, 
are but seldom used at present. 

The verses of ei^ht^ six^ jive., four ^ three and two syllables 
are known under the general denomination of versos de re- 
dondilla (roundelay verses,) and the verses of eleven andseye?i 
syllables under that of versos italianos (Italian verses.) 

The Spaniards call versos enteros (entire verses; the verses 
oi eleven, eight and six syllabtes, and versos de pie quebrado 
(verses of broken measure) or simply versos quehrados 
(broken verses) the verses oi seven, Jive, four, three and two 
syllables. 

SECTION II. 

Of the Accent, o 

In every Spanish word there is a long syllable, that is. upon 
which more stress is laid than upon the others. This sylla- 
ble is said to bear the accent, and though this accent is not 
always marked, it is, however, not the less sensible for it. 
The word accent is then synonymous with long. 

We call aguda (acute) the syllable that bears the accent. 

All the syllables which precede or follow the long S3dlable 
are brief. 

The monosyllables are naturally long, but they are brief 
when they are placed next to another word, or when they 
piecede a word with which they have an immediate relation. 

The accent generally falls upon the antepenultima, penul- 
tima or last syllable of words, but most commonly upon the 
penultima. 

The words which have the accent upon the antepenultima 
syllable are called esdrujulos (gliding) and those which have 
it upon the last syllable agudos (acute.) 

The Spaniards call versos llanos (plain verses) the verses 
terminated with a word which has the accent upon the pe- 
nultima syllable ; versos esdrujulos (gliding verses) the verses 
36* 



426 



SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 



terminated with a word esdriijulo^ and versos ctgudoc (acute 
verses) the verses terminated with a word agudo. 

In the verses llanos the number of syllables is equal to that 
determined by the kind to which they belong ; thus a verse 
llano of eleven syllables has eleven syllables, a verse llano of 
eight syllables has eight syllables, &c. &c. 

123 4567 89 10 11 

Sal|ga|mijtralba|ja|da|voz|y|r6m|pa... 

12345678 , 

La|no|ve|dad|del|in|tenlto... 

12 3 4 5 6 7 

El|pa|dre|de|las|vi|nas... 

The verses esdriijulos have one syllable more than the 
kind to which they belong indicates ; thus a verse esdrvjnlo 
of eleven syllables has twelve^ a verse Qsdrujolo of eight 
syllables has nine, &c. &c. 

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

Un|ga|to|pe|dan|ti|si|mo|re|t6|ri|co... 
123 456789 
•o A|to|dos|los|a|ca | de|mi|cos... 

The verses agndos have a syllable less than the kind to 
which they belong indicates ; thus a verse agvdo of eleven 
syllables has only ten, and a verse agudo of eight syllables 
has only seven, &c. &c. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

Con|un|es|tra|rio|ri|g6r^ 

12 3 4 5 
Ve|reis|me|mo|rir... 

The verses which are formed of the union of two smaller 
verses may have more or less syllables, according as these 
verses are either llanos or agndos ; thus a verse of ar^e wa- 
?/ory which is formed of the union of two verses of six sylla- 
bles, will have twelve syllables if these two verses are llanos ; 
it will have onl}^ eleven if one is agudo and the other llano, 
and it will have only ten if both are agudos, 

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

Dijcho|sosjvos|c|tros — a|quien|los|cui|dd|dos 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
Del|mun|do|no|tur|ban— -el|dullce|re|p6|so... 



VERSfFICACION ESPAliOLA. 427 

12345 6 7 89 10 11 
El|ros|tro|cu|bier|to — con|tris|te|pe|sar 

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lu 11 
De|no|ta|la|pe|na — del|gra|ve|do|16r... 

12 345 6789 10 
No|quie|rolvi|vir — vi|cla|con|do|16r... 

The verses llanos are those of general use in Spanish po- 
etry. The verses agudos are only used mixed with the 
verses llanos and solely in light poetry, for they are avoided 
in elevated poetry. The verses tsdrujulos are seldom used 
alone, they are most often mingled with verses llanos^ and 
this mixture is not common. • 

The Spanish verses, of whatsoever kind they may be, be- 
ing most always llanos^ it may be said that they require an 
accent upon the penultimate syllable. 

Independently of this final accent, the hendecasyllable 
verses, or of eleven syllables, require also an accent upon 
theii fourth or sixth syllable. 

As to the number of accents which may also enter into the 
hendecasyllable verses, and the place which they should oc- 
cupy, it is impossible to determine it by fixed rules, nothing 
but the harmony of the verse can serve as a guide. Be it su^ 
ficient to observe 1st. that, the more accents are introduced 
in a verse, the more its harmony is slow and sustained ; 2d. 
that there may be introduced in a hendecasyllable verse, be- 
sides the final accent and that of the 4th. or 5th. syllable 
which are indispensable, one, two and even three accents ; 
3rd. that they are placed nearly at an equal distance from 
each other and not unfrequently upon the syllables which are 
paired. 



Di|ch6|so|quien 
Ce|le|bra|ias|ha 
Y el|vi|gor|y el 



en|ver|so|ge|ne|r6|so 
za|nas|injmor|ta|les, 
es|fuerlzo|va|le|r6lso. 



In the verses which are not Eendecasyllable, the final ac-^ 
cent is the only one indispensable | one or many other ac- 
cents may be in truth introduced in them, as the measure 
permits or harmony requires, but the place which they should 
occupy is not fixed, and the ear alone should be consulted. 

The verses of arte mayor require, besides the final accent^ 
an accent upon the second and upon the eighth syllable. 



428 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 



SECTION III. 



Of the elision. 

When a word ends in a verse with a vowel and the follow- 
ing word begins with a vowel or an h, there is an elision of 
the final vowel, that is, it is not counted as any thing. 

0|bel|la in|gra|ta a|quien|e]|al|rna «|do|ra! 

If there should be a monosyllable consisting of a single 
vo\vel between two words, one of which ends and the other 
begins with a vowel, the three syllables shall be blended so as 
to make only one syllable. 

En|vi|dia a rv|que|llos|pra|doe|la /«er|mo|su|ra..» 
Fal|tan|Jo a £s|pa|ria|su|ma|yor|te|so|ro... 

The initial y being a consonant cannot occasion an elisioUj 
it is not so with the final y and the conjunction y. 

Di|cho|s |//o|qup|vi|n6? a|tan|buen|puer|to... 

De|lan|te|'h es|ta|pe|ria|tos|ca|//|du|ra... 

The elision may be omitted, 1st when the first word con- 
sists of a single vowel or is terminated with an accented vow- 
el, 2d. when the second word begins with an A, 3d. when 
there is a natural pause or the conjunction y stands between the 
two words. 

Dijcho|so|-?om|bre|que|vi|ves... 
0|-7l|ma|rJe.-|ven|tujra|da !... 

Un|per|r.'>|y i/n|bor|ri|colca|mi|na|ban, 
Sir|vien|do a z/n|mis|mo|due|no. 

SECTION IV. 

Of the vowels which for^m or do not form diphthongs. 

When several vowels are in succession in the same word, 
sometimes they form a single syllable and at others two. 

The vowels A A, AE, AT, when the accent bears upon tlie 
I, and AO, form two syllables ; AI when the accent does not 
bear upon the I, AU and AY form but one. Ex. Sa-avedra^ 
a-ereoy distra4do^ cstais, hay^ aurora* 



VfiRSIFlCACION ESPAnOLA. 429 

The vowels EA, EE, and EG form two syllables, but when 
EA and EG are final and the accent bears upon the prece- 
ding syllable, they form but one; EI, EU and EY form but 
one syllable. Ex. Oce-uno^ pose-er^ trofe-o^ linea^ eterea^ 
Tnomentdneo, deidad, deuda, rey. 

The vowels I A, IE, IG, lU form but one syllable, but 
when the accent bears upon the I, they form two. Ex. Glo- 
ria^ siempre^ contrarioj triunfo^ alegri-a, tenii-a. 

The vowels GA,GE,GI,when the accent bears upon the 1, 
and GG, form two syllables ; GI when the accent does not 
bear upon the I, GU and GY form but one. Ex. Bo ato^ 
po-eta, O'ido, bo-otes^ estoy. In Mroe GE forms but one 
syllable. 

The vowels UA, UE, UI, UG, UY, UIE, UEY, form but 
one syllable ; but when the accent bears upon the U, they 
form two. Ex. Igual^ fi^^gOj guirnalda, monstruo^ muy^ 
quien, quietud, buey, gahzu-a. 

The preceding rules are general, and liable to few excep- 
tions ; nevertheless the poets do not always strictly confine 
themselves to them, and sometimes unite vowels to form but 
one syllable which ought to form two, while at others they 
separate vowels in order to form two syllables which ought 
not to form but one. In this manner we find poeta forming 
two syllables instead of three, real forming one syllable in- 
stead of two, didlogo forming four syllables instead of three j 
triunfo forming three syllables instead of two, &c. &c. 

Of Rhyme. 

The Spaniards have two kinds of rhymes, the rhyme conso- 
nant and the rhyme assonant. 

The rhyme consonant (consonancia) is the perfect agree- 
ment of two sounds which terminate two verses. 

The rhyme consonant always begins at the vowel upon 
which the accent bears ; thus in the verses esdrujulos it will 
begin at the vowel of the antepenultima, in the verses llanos 
at the vowel of the penultima and in the verses agudos at the 
vowel of the last syllable. 

The rhyme consonant being only made for the ear, regard 
should be had to the pronunciation rather than the orthography 
of the final syllables ; thus kijo will rhyme well with Jixo. 
(now Jijo^) iniquo with chicop &c. 



430 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

The rhyme assonant (asonancia) consists in the resem- 
blance of the vowels found in the final syllables of two words 
the consonants of which are different. 

The rhyme assonant always begins in the same manner as 
the rhyme consonant at the vowel upon which the accent 
bears; thus /2^6r«, cubiertay mesa^ avmtnta^ ptna^ lUva^ 
tr^gua^ which have the accent upon the penuUimate syllable, 
may rhyme by assonance^ and the same will happen with 
caracdl, doUr^ corazdn, dids^ v6z,amd,.nacidy which have the 
accent upon the last syllable, which shows 1st, that no regard 
fe had for the rhyme assonant but to the resemblance of the 
vowelsj and that in diphthongs, nothing is regarded but the 
last vowel ; 2d. that the consonants must be diflerent, and 
that when there are two consonants in succesion, it is suffi- 
cient that one of the two should not be found in the other word. 

In the words esdnijulos^ one may be content for the rhyme 
assonant with the resemblance of the vowels of the antepe- 
nultima and of the last syllable of the two words, thus, ord- 
culo and tdrtago will form a good rhyme assonant^ though 
the vowel of the penultima of the one be not similar to that 
of the penultima of the other. 

The use of the rhyme consonant is much more common 
than that of the rhyme assonant^ therefore whenever in 
speaking of rhyme the kind shall not be designated, the rhyme 
consonant will be the one meant. 

Rhyme is not indispensable in the Spanish verses as it is in 
the French, and the Spaniards have verses not rhymed or 
blank verses which are called versos sueltos (free verses) in 
which it is necessary carefully to avoid the least final con- 
sonance, 

SECTION VI. 

Of the ENJAMBEMENT, or running of one verse into another 
to complete the sense. 

In Spanish the enjamhement of verses is permitted even in 
elevated poetry, that is, that the sense may remain in sus- 
pense at the end of a verse, and end only at the beginning of 
the following verse ; which happens principally whenever 
the beginning of a verse is the regimen or necessary depen- 
dance of what is found at the end of the preceding verse^ 



VERSIPICACION ESPAfiOLA. 431 

Volved las armas y dnimo furioso 

A los pechos de aquellos que os han puesto 

En dura sujecion, con afrentoso 

Partido a todo el mundo manifiesto. 

Alonso de Ercilla. 
Even sometimes the Spanish poets transport the syllable 
mente of an adverb to the following verse, or make an elision 
of the final vowel of the word that terminates the verse with 
the vowel of the word which begins the other verse, but these 
enjambefnens, which can only take place between an entire 
verse and a broken one, are so uncommon, that they should 
be considered as poetical hcenses. 

Y mientras miserable — 

Mente se est^n los otros abrasando 

Con sed insaciable 

Del peligroso mando, 

Tendido yo a la sombra este cantando. 

Fray Luis de Leox. 

SECTION VII. 

Of poetical licenses, and what should be avoided in verses. 

Though the language of Spanish poetry be not different 
from that of prose, and the same expressions be commonly 
used in it, nevertheless it is permitted to make in the construc- 
tion of the phrase certain transpositions which prose would 
not admit of, and which contribute in a high degree to the 
harmony and nobleness of verses. It is always necessary to 
make these transpositions with intelligence and taste, so as 
they may not occasion any harshness or obscurity. 

Harmony also requires us generally to avoid in all kinds of 
verses, words too long and of a difficult pronunciation, or 
which may have too great a conformity of sound with words 
already used ; those having the guttural letters should be em- 
ployed sparingly ; the too frequent meeting of vowels, and 
that of rough or hissing consonants, such as the s or 7*, &c. 
should not often recur. 

In short, no use should be made in poetry, particularly in 
high poetry, of low and prosaic words ; but taste and discern- 
ment, supported by deliberate reading, will teach, better than 
all the rules that can be given, the choice of words that should 
be made ; for, often, an able poet uses happily a word which 
seemed proscribed from poetry. 



432 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

Article ii. 

Of the mixture of verses with one another. 

The mixture of verses, either as to measure or rhyme 
being generally arbitrary in Spanish poetry, it evidentl}^ mus 
be extremely various ; we shall therefore limit ourselves to 
make known the combinations used by the best poets, anc 
give examples of those which particularly deserve to be known 

SECTION I. / 

Of successive rhymes. 

Parejas or pareados are called the verses of which the 
rhymes are successive, that is, the 1st of which rhymes with 
the 2d, the 3d with the 4th, and so on, taking care to vary the 
rhyme every two verses. 

The successive rhymes are used in the verses imitated from 
the French, which are called for this reason versos a lafran- 
cesa ; and in order to supply the want of masculine and fem- 
inine rhymes, the verses llanos are caused alternately to be 
followed by two verses agiidos^ as may be seen in the exam- 
ple which we have before cited when speaking of this kind 
of verse, which is now seldom used. 

Entire pieces of verses r/e redondilla^ and even of Itahan 
verses may be composed in successive rhyme, by intermixing 
arbitrarily with hendecasyllables small verses of seven sylla- 
bles which rhyme with the following hendecasyllable ; but 
these compositions are rare, unless it be to set them to music, 
and the successive rhymes are but seldom used except for 
proverbs, distichs and epitaphs. 

SECTION II. 

Of rhymes crossed and intermixed. 

The Spaniards dve the ^enerick name of coplas to all 
kinds of assemble jjes or combinations of verses, but this de- 
nomination is particularly appropriate to what we call stanzas. 

The Span'sh stavzas are not strictly bound to any pause, 
and may run into one another ; however, when they 
consist of more than four verses, one or more pauses are 
introduced, according as harmony requires it ; and generally 
the e^ijnmbemmi or running of one stanza into another is 
carefully avoided. 



VERSIPICACIOK ESPANOLA. 433 



Of stanzas of three verses or Tercets, 

The tercets are stanzas commonly composed of three 
verses either hendecasyllables or of redondiUa may or ^ the 
arrangement of which may take place in several manners. 

1st. The first verse may be free, suelto, and the 2d. 
rhyme with the 3d. 2d. The first verse may rhyme with 
the 3d. and the 2d. be free. These two kinds of mixtures 
are used in the villancicos, 3d. Sometimes the 1st verse 
rhymes with the 2d. and the 3d. is free. 4th. Finally in the 
pieces of verses composed of tercetos. the 1st. and 3d. verses 
rhyme together, the 1st. verse of the second terceto rhymes 
with the 2d. verse of the preceding tercet, and so on to 
the last terceto which consists of four verses to complete the 
rhyme. 

Should there be but one or two successive tercetos of Ital- 
ian verses, there might be admitted among the hendecasylla- 
bles a small verse, verso quebrado of seven syllables, which 
would be the 1st. or 2d. 

The Satyres, epistles and elegies are composed in hendec- 
asyllable tercetos ; they are also sometimes used in descrip- 
tive poems, eclogues and idyls. 

Hendecasyllahle Tercetos. 

En aquel prado alii nos reclinamos, 
Y del Cefiro fresco recogiendo 
El agradable espirtu (l) respiramos. 

Las flores d los ojos ofreciendo 
Diversidad estrana de pintura, 
Diversamente asi estaban oliendo ; 

Y en medio aquesta fuente clara y pura, 
Que como de cristal resplandecia 
Mostrando abiertamente su hondura, 

El arena que de oro parecia 
De blancas pedrezuelas variada, 
Por do raanaba el agua se buUia. 

(1) Espirtu for espiritu, (poet, lie.) 
S7 



434 SPANISH VERSIFICATIOK. 

En derrededor ni sola una pisada 
De fiera, 6 de pastor, 6 de ganado 
A' la sazon estaba senalada. 

Despues que con el agua resfriado 
Hubimos el calor y juntamente 
La sed de todo punto mitigado : 

Ella, que con cuidado diligente 
A^ conocer mi mal tenia el intento, 

Y 4 escudrinar el animo doliente : 

Con nuevo ruego y firme juramento 
Me conjuro, y rogo que le coniase 
La causa de mi grave pensamiento.... 

Garctlaso de la Vega, E'gloga^ 2* 

2. Of stanzas of four verses^ or quatrains. 

The quatrains are stanzas of four verses, the 1st of which 
rhymes with the 4th. and the 2d. with the 3d., or the 1st of 
which rhymes with the 3d. and the 2d with the 4th. 

The verses that enter in the composition of quatrains are 
commonly verses of redondilla mayor ^ verses of redondilla 
menor or hendecasyllables. 

The quatrains in verses of redondilla are called cuartillas 
or cuartetas and those in hendecasyllable verses cuartetes. 

In the quatrains in verses oi redondilla menor^ the 1st. and 
3d. verses may be free (sueltos.) 

Though all kinds of stanzas may be composed in verses of 
redondilla menor ^ nevertheless they are seldom used except 
in the quatrains^ and it is for this reason that sometimes the 
name of redondilla menor is given to the quatrains composed 
with this kind of verse. 

Cuartillas de redondilla mayor. 

Deseais, senor Sarmiento, ^ 

Saber en estos mis anos 
Sujetos k tantos danos, 
Como me porto y sustento. 

Yo OS lo dire en brevedad, 
Porque la historia es bien breve^ 

Y el daros gusto se os debe 
Con toda puntualidad. 



VERSIFICACION ESPAflOLA. 435 

Salido el sol por oriente 
De rayos acompanado. 
Me dan un huevo pasado 
Por aguaj blando y caliente, 

Con dos tragos del (l) que suelo 
Llamar yo nectar divino, 

Y a quien otros llaman vino, 
Porque nos vino del cielo. 

Cuando el lumiuoso vase 
Toca en la meridional, 
Distando por un igual 
Del oriente y del ocaso ; 

Me dan asada y cocida 
De una gruesa y gentil ave, 
Con tres veces del suave 
Licor que alegra la vida. 

Despues que cayendo viene 
A^ dar en el mar Hesperio, 
Desamparando el imperio 
Que en este h orizonte tiene ; 

Me suelen dar 4 comer 
Tostadas en vino mulso, 
Que el enflaquecido pulso 
Restituyen 4 su ser. 

Luego me cierran la puerta, 
Yo me entrego al dulce sueno ; 
Dormido soy de otro dueno, 
No se de mi nueva cierta. 

Hasta que habiendo sol nuevo, 
Me cuentan como he dormido, 

Y asi de nuevo les pido, 
Que me den nectar y huevo. 

Ser vieja la casa es esto, 
Veo que se va cayendo, 
Voyle puntales poniendo, 
Porque no caiga tan presto. 

(1) Del for de «/, (poet He.) 



436 SPAmSH VERSIFICATION, 

Mas todo es vano artificio. 
Presto me dicen mis males. 
Que han de faltar los puntales, 
Y allanarse el edificio. 

BalTASAR de ALCAZARr 

3. Of the stanzas of Jive verses. 

The stanzas of five verses, called coplas redondillas or 
quintillasy are commonly composed in verses of redondilla 
mayor^ they also might however be composed in hendeca- 
syllable verses. In these stanzas, the verses are intermixed 
in all manners, provided they should all be upon two rhymes, 
and that there may never be more than two successively 
i]pon the saa\e rhyme. 

4. Of stanzas of six verses^ or sixains. 

The stanzas of six verses, called redondillas de seis versos 
are commonly composed in verses of redondilla mayor ; they 
might also be composed in hendecasyllable verses. In these 
stanzas, the verses are intermixed in all manners, provided 
they should all be upon two rhymes, and that there may 
never be more than two successively upon the same rhyme* 

5. Of the stanzas of seven verses. 

The stanzas of seven verses, redondillas de siete versos^ are 
little used ; they are composed of verses of rfdondilla mayor, 
the 1st. of which rhymes with the 4th. and the 5th.; the 2d. 
with the 3d., and the 6th. with the 7th. Stanzas of seven 
liendecasyllable verses might also be composed. 

6. Of the stanzas of eight verses, or octaves. 

The stanzas of eight verses are commonly composed in 
hendecasyllable verses, or in verses of redondilla mayor, the 
rhymes of which are intermixed in different manners. 

Tst. The 1st. verse may rhyme with the 4th. 5th. and 8th.; 
the 2d with the 3d., and the 6th. with the 7th. 

2d. The first verse may rhyme with the 3d., the 2d. with 
the 4th. 6th. and 8th., the 5th. with the 7th, 

3d. The rhymes may be crossed. 

4th. Finally the rhymes of the six first verses may be 
crossed, and the two last rhyme tos^ether, which commonly 
happens in the stanzas of eight hendecasyllable verses. 



VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA* 437 

We call octavas the stanzas of eight hendecasyllable verses, 
and redondillas de ocho versos the stanzas of eight verses of 
redondilla. 

The octaves serve principally in epic and didactic poems, 
they are also used in descriptive poems, eclogues and idyls. 

Octavas. 

I Porque con tanta safia procuramos 
Ir nuestra sangre y fuerzas apocando, 

Y envueltos en civiles armas damos 
Fuerza y derecho al enemigo bando ? 
£ Porque con tal furor despedazamos 
Esta union invencible, condenando 
Nuestra causa aprobada y armas justas 
Justificando en todo las injustas ? 

I Que rabia 6 que furor desatinado 
Habeis contra vosotros concebido. 
Que asi quereis que el Araucano estado 
Venga a ser por sus manos destruido, 

Y en su virtud y fuerzas ahogado 
Quede con nombre infame* sometido 
A las estranas leyes y gobierno 

Y en dura servidumbre e yugo etemo ? 

Volved sobre vosotros, que sin tiento 
Correis a toda prisa 4 despenaros, 
Refrenad esa furia y movimiento 
Que es la que puede en esto mas danaros : 
I Sufris al enemigo en vuestro asiento 
Que quiere como a brutos conquistaros, 

Y no podeis sufrir aqui impacientes 
Los consejos y avisos convenientes ?... 

Alonso de Ercilla. 

The copla de arte mayor ^ thus called because it was com- 
posed in verses of twelve syllables or of ar^e mayor ^ was a 
stanza of eight verses, the 1st. of which commonly rhymed 
with the 4th. 5th. and 8th., the 2d. with the 3d., and the 6th. 
with the 7th, This stanza is no more used at present. 
Parejasy tercetos, cuartetes, &c. might be made in verses of 
arte mayor as also in hendecasyllable. 
37^ 



438 SPANISH VERSIFICATION", 

7. Of stanzas of nine verses. 

The stanzas of nine verses bear the name in Spanish of 
redondillas mistas^ because they are composed of the reunion 
of a stanza of four verses and of a stanza of five verses of 
redondilla mayor. Stanzas of nine verses might also be 
composed of a stanza of four verses and of a stanza of five 
hendecasyllable verses. 

8. Of the stanzas of ten verses^ or dizains. 

The d6cimas are stanzas of ten verses, commonly of 
redondilla mayor ^ the 1st. of which rhymes with the 4th. and 
5th.; the 2d. with the 3d., the 6th. with the 7th. and 10th., 
and the 8th. with the 9th. 

The dtcima may also be composed of the union of two 
stanzas of five verses quintillas^ in each of which the mixture 
of the rhymes may be uniform, but it is better that it should 
be different. This kind of dtcima is called copla reaL 

Copla reaL 

Aqui la envidia y mentira 
Me tuvieron encerrado. 
j Dichoso el humilde estada 
Del sabio que se retira 
De aqueste mundo malvado^ 

Y con pobre mesa y casa 
En el campo deleitoso 
Con solo Dios se compasa^ 

Y a solas su vida pasa, 
Ni enviado, ni envidioso ! 

Fray Luis de Leon. 

Remark. The stanzas of more than ten verses are not 
composed of entire verses only, but of entire verses, versos 
enterosj mixed with broken verses, versos quebrados. 

SECTION lllc 

Of the mixture of entire with broken verses. 

Commonly the hendecasyllable verses are mixed with the 
verses of seven syihibles, those of eight syllables whh those of 
tV>ur, .and those of six syllables with those of thre'e. Some- 



VERSIFICACION ESPAfiOLA. . 439 

times also entire verses of different measure are mixed with 
broken rerses of different measure. 

There is nothing determined however in such cases, as to 
the number of verses of each kind that may be mixed togeth- 
er. The verses thus mixed sometimes form stanzas, and at 
others do not form any. When they form stanzas of less 
than ten verses, the mixture of rhymes is the same as in 
the stanzas composed only of entire verses. But when they 
form stanzas of more than ten verses, and when they are not 
disposed in stanzas, the mixture of rhymes is absolutely arbi- 
trary ; even unrhymed verses may be admitted among the 
verses rhymed. It is however proper to remark, 1st. that in 
mixed verses, whether they form stanzas or not, the corres- 
ponding rhymes must never be too distant from one another ; 
2d. that in the stanzas in mixed verses as in the stanzas in en- 
tire verses, the mixture adopted for the rhymes in the 1st. 
stanza must generally be followed in all the other stanzas of 
the same piece, and that it is the same with the mixture of the 
verses of different measure ; 3d. that the stanzas in mixed 
verses do not contain commonly more than twenty verses. 

The following examples will give an idea of the great va- 
riety of the mixture of the entire and kroken verses, which is 
commonly used in odes, light poetry and pieces destined to be 
set to music. 

Iba cogiendo flores 

Y guardando en la falda 

Mi ninfa para hacer una guirnalda ; 

Mas primero las toca 

A los rosados labios de su boca, 

Y les da de su aliento los olores. 

Y estaba (por su bien) entre una rosa 
Una abeja escondida, 

Su dulce humor hurtando ; 

Y como en la hermosa 

Flor de los labios se hallo, atrevida 

La pico, saco miel, fuese volando. L. Martin. 

Profecia del Tajo, 

Folgaba (l^i el rey Rodrigo 

Con la hermosa Caba en la ribera 

(1) Folgaba ior Ho l^aba, (obsolete.) 



440 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

De Tajo sin testigo ; 

El pecho saco fuera 

El rio, y le hablo de esta manera : 

En mal punto te goces 
Injusto forzador, que ya el sonido 
Oyo (1) ya, y las voces, 
Las armas y el branndo 
De Marte, de furor y ardor ceiiido. 

j Ay ! esa tu alegria / 

j Que llantos acarrea ! y esa hermosa 
Que vio el sol el mal dia 
A^ Espana ! Ay ! cuan llorosa, 
Y al cetro de los Godos cuan costosa ! 

LlamaSj dolores, guerras, 
Muertes, asolamientos, fieros males 
Entre tus brazos cierras, 
Trabajos inmortales 
A^ ti y a tus vasallos naturales, 

A" los que en Constantina 
Rompen el fertil suelo, 4 los que bafia 
El Ebro, a la vecina 
Sansuena, 4 Lusitana, 
A^ toda la espaciosa y triste Espana. 

Ya dende (2) Cadiz llama 
El injuriado conde a la venganza 
Atento y no a la fama 
La birbara pujanza 
En quien para tu dafio hay tardanza. 

Oye, que al cielo toca 
Con temeroso son la trompa fiera, 
Que en A^frica convoca 
El Moro ^ la bandera, 
Que al aire desplegada va ligera. 

La lanza ya blandea 
El A^rabe cruel, e hiere el viento 
Llamando ^ la pelea, 
i numerable cuento 

De escuadras juntas veo en un momento; 
•- 111 1 ^ — ■ — — ——————« 

(1) Oyo for OigOy (obsolete.) 

(2) Dende for dcsde^ (idem.) 



f 



VERSIFICACION ESPAHOLA. 441 

Cubre la gente el suelo, 
Debajo de las velas desparece (l) 
La mar, la voz a) cielo 
Confusa y varia crece. 
El polvo roba el dia, y le oscurece. 

j Ay ! que ya presurosas 
Suben las largas naves, j Ay ! que tienden 
Los brazos vigorosos 
A^ los remos, y encienden 
Las mares espumosas por do hienden. 

El Eolo derecho 
Hinche la vela en popa, y larga entrada 
Por el Herculeo estrecho 
Con la punta acerada 
El gran padre Neptuno da ^ la armada. 

J Ay triste ! i Y aun te tiene 
El mal dulcc regazo ? ^ Ni llamado 
Al mal que sobreviene 
No acorres ? ^ ocupado 
No ves ya el puerto 4 Hercules sagrado ? 

Acude, corre, vuela 
Traspasa el alta sierra, ocupa el llano, 
No perdones la espuela. 
No des paz 4 la mano, 
Menea fulminando el hierro insano. 

J Ay cuanto de fatiga. 
Ay cuanto de dolor estapresente 
A' el que viste loriga, 
Al infante valiente, 
A^ hombres y caballos juntamente ! 

Y tu, Betis divino, 
De sangre agena y tuya amancillado, 
Daras al mar vecino, 
j Cuanto yelmo quebrado ! 
j Cuanto cuerpo de nobles destrozado ! 

(1) Desparece for desaparecCj (poet, lie.) 



442 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

El furibundo Marte 
Cinco luces las haces desordena 
Igual a cada parte ; 
La sesta j Ay ! te condena, 
O cara patria, ^ birbara cadena. 

Fray Luis de Leon, Oda. 

Fonsecaj ya las boras 
Del invierno aterido, 
Aunque tarde, se fueron ' 

Y su vez agradable permitieron 
Al Cefiro florido. 

Ya el verano 

Nos descubre su frente, 

De rosas y de purpura cenido : 

Remite el aire el desabrido ceiio, 

Y el sol libra sus rayos 
De las nubes oscuras ; 

Y con luces mas vivas y mas puras, 
Regalando las nieves, 

Al blando pie de los parados rios 
Las prisiones de yelo alegre quita, 

Y su antiguo correr les solicita... F. de Rioja* 

i Cuan presto se va el placer, 

Como despues de acordado. 

Da dolor ; 

Como ^ nuestro parecer 

Cualquiera tiempo pasado, 

Fue mejor ! Jorge Manrique. 

section IV. 
Of blank verses. 

We have just seen that blank verses, sueltoSy that is, which 
are not subject to rhyme, are mixed with the rhymed verses; 
they are likewise mixed, with the assonant verses, as will be 
seen hereafter ; but they may also be used alone without 
mixture of any other kind of verse. 

Concision in thought, force of expression, and above all 
elegance and harmony in versification resulting from the sym- 
metrical disposition of long and brief syllables ; this is, what 
constitutes the beauty of blank verses and gives them a great 



VERSIPICACION ESPAnOLA. 443 

analogy with the Greek and Latin verses : thus the Spaniards 
without rigorously observing, however, the rhythm of the an- 
cients, have imitated it in blank verses with considerable 
success. 

The hendecasyllable is the verse most used in works in 
blank verse ; it is called heroic^ not because it is used in 
preference in the heroic poem and other works of a serious 
kind ; for, these are composed commonly in octaves or ter- 
cetos of rhymed verses, but because it imitates best the har- 
mony of the gieat Greek and Latin verses, and seems there- 
fore more proper to be used in the translations of the master 
works of antiquity. 

In mixing hendecasyllables with broken verses of different 
measures, almost all the lyrick combinations of the ancients. 
may be imitated. In the following ode, the cuartptos of which 
are composed of three hendecasyllable verses and a broken 
verse of five syllables, the harmony of the sapphick strophe 
may be easily discovered, which is one of the most beautiful 
of these combinations. 

Al Cifiro. 

Dulce vecino de la verde selva, 
Huesped eterno del abril florido^ 
Vital aliento de la madre Venus, 
Cefiro blando, 

Si de mis insias el amor supiste, 
Tu, que las quejas de mi voz Uevaste, 
Oye, no temas, y a mi ninfa dile, 
Dile que muero. 

Filis un tierapo mi dolor sabia, 
Filis un tiempo mi dolor Uoraba, 
-Quisome un tiempo ; m£LS ahora temo, 
Temo sus iras. 

Asl lor Dioses con amor paterno, 
Asi los cielos con amor benigno 
Nieguen al tiempo que feliz volares, 
Nieve 4 la tierra. 

Jamas el peso de la nube parda, 
Cuando amanece en la elevada cumbre, 
Toque tus hombros, ni su mal granizo 

Hiera tus alas. Esteban de Villegas. 



444 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

SECTION V. 

Of works in verse. 

The principal works in verse are ; epic poems, didactic 
and descriptive ; theatrical pieces, odes, epistles, elegies, ec- 
logues, idyls and fables. As these different kinds of works 
are common to the Spanish literature and that of other na- 
tions, we shall not consider them. It is true that the Span- 
iards deviating sometimes in their composition, and particu- 
larly in that of theatrical pieces, from the precepts dictated 
by good taste, would seem to require some details ; but these 
details are foreign to a treatise on versification and would 
exceed its limits. It will be sufficient to remark that the 
Spanish theatrical pieces are sometimes in prose, and at others 
in rhymed or unrhymed verses, and that all kinds of stanzas, 
sonnets, romances, &c. are introduced in the plays ; in short, 
that all the other works in verse are generally composed of 
stanzas. As to the kind of stanzas which is proper for every 
class of works, we have indicated it as far as possible when 
speaking of the different kinds of stanzas ; the choice of 
them however being often left to the fancy of the poets, it is 
the works of those who have excelled in each class that 
ought to be taken as models. We shall only treat here of 
the small works in verse which are in some manner peculiar 
to the Spanish language, or which at least are subject in that 
language to some particular rules, and we shall pass over 
those, such as the sonnets in echos, salades, labyrinths, cubic 
poems, &c. the whole merit of which consisted in a ridiculous 
difficulty, and which good taste has proscribed long ago. 

1. Sonetos. 

The sonnet, soneto^ occupies yet in Spanish poetry the 
rank which it formerly occupied in French poetry. 

The Spaniards have several kinds of sonnets which are ; 
the simple sonnet, the double sonnet, the crossed sonnet, the 
sonnet with a tail, and the continued sonnet. 

The simple sonnet, soneto simple^ is composed of fourteen 
hendecasyllable verses, the first eight of which named pies 
are divided in two quatrainSy and the last six form two ter- 
cets which are called vueltas. The two quatrains are made 
upon the same rhymes, and in each of them the first verse 
rhymes with the fourth, and the two intermediary one's 



VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 445 

together. The verses of the two tercets rhyme together upon 
two or three rhymes, which must not resemble those used in 
the two quatrains. 

The double sonnet, soncto doblado, is subject to the same 
rules as the simple sonnet ; the only difference there is betu een 
the two consists in this, that, in the double sonnet, broken 
verses of seven syllables are interposed among hendecasylla- 
bles, namely ; one or several in each quatrain and one alone 
in each tercet. Every one of these broken verses having 
the same rhyme as the entire verse which precedes it, this 
rhyme is double, and is the reason why this sonnet is 
named a double sonnet. 

The crossed sonnet, soneto terciado, is thus called, because 
the rhymes of the two quatrains are crossed ; in other re- 
spects it is like the simple sonnet. 

The sonnet with a tail, soneto con cola, differs from the 
simple sonnet because there is interposed after the second and 
fourth verses of each quatrain, and after each tercet, a broken 
verse called cola. The broken verses thus interposed are of 
four or five syllables ; those of the quatrains rhyme with each 
other, and their rhyme must be different from the rhymes of 
the quatrains ; those of the tercets rhyme also with each oth- 
er and their rhymes must be different from the rhymes of thq 
quatrains and tercets 

The continued sonnet, soneto continuo, is similar as to the 
quatrains to the simple sonnet or to the crossed sonnet, but 
the rhymes of the tercets are crossed and the same as those 
of the quatrains. 

The simple sonnet is more used than the others, we shall 
give two of them, the French imitations of which are well 
known. 

Un soneto me manda hacer Violante, 
Que en mi vida me he visto en tal aprieto, 
Catorce versos dicen que es soneto, 
Burla burlando van los tres delante. 
Yo pense que no hallara consonante, 

Y estoy 4 la mitad de otro cuarteto, 
Mas si me veo en el primer terceto 

No hay cosa en los cuartetos que me espante. 
Por el primer terceto voy entrando, 

Y aun parece que entre con pie derecho, 
Pues fin con este verso le voy dando. 

38 



446 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

Ya estoy en el segundo, y aim sospecho 
Que estoy los trece versos acabando : 
Contad si son catorce^ y esta hecho. 

Lope de Vega. 

Soberbias torres, altos edificios, 
Que ya cubristes (l) siete escelsos montes; 

Y ahora en descubiertos horizontes 
Apenas de haber sido dais indicios : 

Griegos liceos, celebres hospicios 
De Plutarcos, Platones, Xenofontes, 
Teatro que lidio Rinocerontes, 
Olimpiasj lustres^ bafios, sacrificios ; 

ji Que fuerzas deshicieron peregrinas 
La mayor pompa de la gloria humana, 
Imperios, triunfos, armas y doctrinas ? 

j O gran consuelo 4 mi esperanza vana. 
Que el tiempo que os volvio breves ruinas, 
No es mucho que acabase mi sotana ! 

Lope pe Vega. 

2. Silvcts, 

The Spaniards give tbe name ofsilva to a piece of hende- 
casyllable verses mixed at pleasure with broken verses of se- 
ven syllables, in which no order is observed for the distribu- 
tion of the rhymes, and in which some blank verses may 
even be introduced. There are also silvasin verses of seven 
syllables. The silva is a composition after the manner of 
the ode, which is proper for all sorts of subjects. 

A la Riqaeza, 

I O mal seguro bien ! j O cuidadosa 
Riqueza, y como d sombra de alegria. 

Y de sosiego enganas ! 
El que vela en tu alcance, y se desvia 
Del pobre estado, y la quietud dichosa, 
Ocio y seguridad pretende en vano. 
Pues tras el luengo (2) errar de agua y montafias, 
Cuando el metal precioso coja a mano, 
No ha do ver sin cuidado abrir el dia. 

(1) Cubristes for cuhrisieis (poet, lie.) 

(2) Luengo for largo, (poet, lie.) 



VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 447 

No sin causa los dioses te escondieron 

En las entrafias de la tierra dura : 

I Mas que hallo diflcil y encubierto 

La sedienta codicia ? 

Turbo la paz segura. 

Con que en la antigua selva florecieron 

El abeto y el pino, 

Y trajolos al puerto 

Y por campos de mar les dio camitio. 
Abriose el mar, y abriose 
Altamente la tierra, 

Y salistes del centro al aire claro, 
Hija de la avaricia, 
A^ hacer 4 los hombres cruda guerra. 
Saliste tu, y perdiose 
La piedad que no habita en pecho avaro. 

J A cu^ntos arm 6 el oro de crueza ! 

j Y 4 cuintos ha dejado 

En el ultimo trance ! j o dura suerte I 

Pierde su flor la virginal pureza 

Por ti y vese manchado 

Con adulterio el lecho no esperado. 

Al menos animoso 

Para que te posea. 

Das riqueza, ardimiento licencioso, 

Ninguno hay que se vea 

Por ti tan abastado y poderoso, 

Que carezca de miedo. 

I Que cosa habr4 de males tan cercada, 

Pues ora pretendida, ora alcanzada, 

Y aun estando en deseos, 

Pena ocultan tus ciegos devaneos? 

Pero cansome en vano, decir puedo. 

Que si sombras de bien en ti se vieran^ 

Los inmortales Dioses te tuvieran. F. de Rioja. 

3. Romances. 

They call romance a piece of verse destined to be set to 
music, composed of a series of quatrains, the 1st. and 3d. 
verses of which are blank, whilst the 2d> and 4tL rhyme by 8 

assonance. Assonance is the greatest difficulty of romances, i 



448 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

because it must be the same in all the quatrains. Romances 
are commonly in verses of redondilln mayor or menor^ and 
sometimes in hendecasyllable verses, for which reason they 
are then called romances keroicos, They are also in verses 
of seven syllables, and one of the verses of each quatrain 
may be hendecasyllable, this is commonly the fourth ; one or 
two broken verses of any kind, particularly of five or four 
syllables may likewise be mixed with the verses of redondilla ; 
in short, romances may be composed in quatrains of verses 
esdrvjulos and even of arte mayor^ pure or mixed ; in a 
word, nothing is more varied than the versification of roman- 
ces, but it is necessary that the mixture adopted in the first 
quatrain be followed in all the others. The romances com- 
monly have no burden^ there are however some romances in 
which the last or the two last verses of the first quatrain are 
repeated after the second, and so on after each quatrain, 
or every other quatrain. The burden sometimes begins only 
in the middle of the romance and does not always continue 
till the end, neith^T is it necessary that it should be composed 
of the last or of the two last verses of the 1st. quatrain, it may 
be formed of one or two verses which are added. 

The romance is the favourite kind of poetry of the Span- 
iards, it is really their national lyrick poetry, it equally ac- 
commodates itself to the accents of joy and to those of sorrow. 
They sing in them alternately the exploits of warriors, love, 
adventures, &c. They call Jacara a romance sang upon a 
popular air bearing that name. 

De las Africanas playas 
Alejado de sus huertas, 
Mira el forzado hortelano 
De Espafia las altas tierras. 
Mira las golosas cabras 
En las peladas laderas, 
Que apenas se determina 
Si son cabras 6 son penas : 
Tiende laenvidiosa vista 
Por las abundosas vegas 
Y comarcanas cabanas. 
Que casi a la par humean. 
Miraba por Gibraltar 
Las heladas rocas yertas 
Azotadas de las ondas^ 



^' 



^ VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 449 

Y arrancadas de la arena. 
Mira el estrecho cubierto, 

Y las hervientes arenas. 
Que le parece que braman, 

Y por mil partes resuenan. 
O sagrado roar, le dice, 

Haz con mis suspiros treguas ; 
Perdona si ellos 6 el viento 
Son causa de tu tormenta. 
Pasame en esotra playa ; 
Que si en ella me presentas, 
Te ofrecere unjblanco toro 
El mejor de mis dehesas. 
No quiero que mis deseos 
Vajan a tierras agenas ; 
Da vida a un nuevo Leandro, 
Que en tus raanos se encomienda. 
Esto diciendo el forzado, 
En las blandas ondas se echa 
Con los brazos k remar, 
Hiende, rompe,rasga y huella. 
Mas alia ^ la media noche, 
Cuando los miembros le aquejan, 
Temeroso de su dano 
Hablo asi a las ondas : 
Queridas y amadas ondas ; 
Pues determinais que muera, 
Dejadme salir amigas, 
Que yo os pagare esta deuda. 
Fuele el viento favorable, 
Oyo fortuna sus quejas, 

Y al nacer el rubio sol, 
Hizo pie sobre la arena. 
Dio gracias al mar piadosoj 
Al viento, norte y estrellas, 

Y con ceremonia humilde 
Beso y adoro la tierra. 

The verses of seven syllables disposed in cuartetos of 
blank and assonant verses as in the romances^ and which for 
this reason are often called versos de romance are those gen- 
erally used in anacreontic odes. 
38* 



450 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. ^ 

No con mi blanda lira 

Seran en ayes tristes 

Lloradas las fortunas 

De reyes infelices ; 

Ni el grito del soldado 

Feroz en crudas lides, 

O el trueno con que arroja 

La bala el bronce horrible. 

Yo tiemblo, y me estremezco; ^ 

Que el numen no perraite 

A el (l) labio temeroso 

Canciones tan subliijies. 

Muchacho soy. y quiero 

Decir mas apacibles 

Querellas, y gozarme 

Con danzas y convites. 

En ellos eoronado 

De rosas y alelies ; 

Entre risas y versos 

Menudeo los brindis. 

En coros las muchachas 

Se juntan por oirme, 

Y al punto mis cantares 

Con nuevo ardor repiten ; 

Pues Baco y el de Venus 

Me dieron, que felice 

Celebre en dulces himnos 

Sus glorias y festines. J. Melendez Valdes*, 

Quiero cantar de Cadmo, 
Quiero cantar de Atridas, 
! Mas ay ! que de amor solo 
Solo canta mi lira. 
Renuevo el instrumento. 
Las cuerdas mudo a prisa^ 
Pero si yo de Alcides, 
Ella de amor suspira. 
Pues, heroes valientes, 
Quedaos desde este dia ; 
Porque ya de amor solo, 
Solo canta mi lira. 

E. DE ViLLEGAs, Imitacion de Anacreonte. 



(1) Ji ef for al, (poet, lie.) 



T 



VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 451 

Vuelve, mi duke lira, 
Vuelve a tu estilo humilde 

Y deja a los Homeros, 
Cantar a los Aqiiiles. 
Canta tu la cabana 
Con tonos pastoriles. 

Y los epicos metros 

A Virgilio no eavidies. 
No esperes en la corte 
Gozar dias felices, 

Y vuelvete a la aldea, 
Que tu presencia pide. 
Ya te aguardan zagales 
Que con flores se visten 

Y adornan sus cabezas 

Y cuellos juveniles. 
Ya te esperan pastores 
Que deseosos viven 

De escuchar tus canciones 
Que con gusto repiten. 

Y para que sus voces 
A los ecos admiren, 

Y repitan tus versos 
Los melodiosos cisnes ; 
Vuelve ; mi dulce lira, 
Vuelve, a tu tono humilde ; 

Y deja a los Homeros 

Cantar a los Aquiles. J. Cadaljd. 

4. Endeehas. 

The endeehas are elegies or funeral songs in praise of the 
dead, they are a kind of romance commonly in verses of sev- 
en syllables. The endeehas^ in which the last verse of each 
quatrain is a hendecasy liable, are called endeehas reales ; 
there are also rhymed endeclias, 

5. Seguidillas, 

The seguidilla is composed of a series of quatrains in 
crossed verses of seven and five syllables. The seguidilla 
has a great resemblance with the romance; the only differ- 
ence existing, is that the couplets of the seguidilla being com- 
monly detached, the assonance may change at every couplet. 



452 SPANISH VERSIFICATION* 

There is a kihd of seguidilla called chamherga^ from the 
name of the air upon which it is sung, each quatrain of 
which is followed by six verses alternately of three and seven 
syllables, rhyming by assonance two by two, that is, every 
verse of three syllables rhymes with the verse of seven 
which immediately follows it. 

6. Letrillas* 

The letrilla is a kind of lyric poetry of a simple and 
graceful style. It is commonly composed of a series of 
quatrains in verses of six or eight syllables. The letrilla 
has a great resemblance with the romance ; but it is shorter. 
The 1st. and the 3d. verse of each quatrain are blank 
or rhymed, the 2d. and the 4th. are assonants ; all 
the verses may nevertheless be also rhymed. It is requisite, 
as in romances^ that the assonance be the same in all the 
quatrains. There are some letrillas which have a burden^ 
others have none, sometimes the burden forms a part of the 
quatrain, sometimes it is added. 

No alma primavera 

Bella y apacible 

O el dulce Favonio 

Que ^mbares respire ; 

No rosada Aurora 

Tras la noche triste, 

Ni el pincel que en flores 

Bello se matice; 

No nube que Febo 

Su pabellon pinte, 

O alamo que abrace 

Dos emulas vides ; 

No fuente que perlas 

A cien canos fie, 

Ni lirio entre rosas, 

Clavel en jazmines ; 

Al romper el dia 

Son tan apacibles 

Como el pastorcillo 

Que en mi pecho vive. Yglesias. 



¥ 



VERSIFICACION ESPAflOLA. 453 

De este modo ponderaba 
Ud inocente pastor 
A la ninfa a quien amaba 
La eficacia de su amor. 

iVes cuantas floras al prado 
La primavera presto? 
Plies raira. duefio adorado, 
Mas veces te quiero yo. 

; Ves cuanta arena dorada 
Tajo en sus aguas llevo ? 
Pues raira, Filis amada, 
Mas veces te quiero } o. 

; Ves al salir de la aurora 
Cuanta avecilla canto r 
Pues mira, hermosa pastora^ 
Mas veces te quiero yo. 

; Ves la nieve derretida 
Cuanto arro}njielo formo ? 
Pues mira, bien de mi vida, 
Mas veces te quiero yo. 

; Ves cuanta abeja industriosa 
De esa colmena salio ? 
Pues mira, ingrata y hermosa, 
Mas veces te quiero yo, 

; Ves cuantas gi'acias la mano 
De las deidades te dio ! 
Pues mira, duefio tirano, 
Mas veces te quiero yo. J. Cadalso. 

The lira is a small piece of hendecasyllable verses mixed 
with broken verses, composed to be sung with the accompa- 
niment of a guitar or lyre. The liras are composed of five 
or six verses. In the Urafi of five verses, the four first are 
broken verses of seven syllables and the fifth is a hendeca- 
svllable ; the 1st. verse rhymes witli the 3d., the 2d. 4th. 
and 5th. rhyme together. In the liras of six verses, the odd 
verses are broken verses of seven syllables and the others 
are hendeo ^syllables ; the rhymes of the four first verses are 
crossed, and the two last verses rhyme together. There are 



454 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

also liras of six verses the 1st. 2d. 4th. and 5th. of which are 
broken verses of seven syllables, the 3d. a broken verse of 
two syllables and the 6th a hendecasyllablcj then the 1st. 
verse rhymes with the 4th., the !2d. with the 3d. and the 
5th. with the 6th. 

8. Canciones. 

The cancion is a kind of lyric poetry, which is composed 
of several estanzas or estancias, in hendecasyllable verses 
mixed with broken verses of seven syllables. The cancion 
has not commonly more than fiom ten to twelve stanzas, and 
is often terminated by a shorter stanza called remate or 
represa. The mixture of rhymes as well ps that of entire 
and broken verses is arbitrary, it varies even sometimes from 
/)ne stanza to the other, but in general the mixture adopted 
in the 1st. stanza is followed in all the others. The mixture 
of the verses and rhymes is not the same in the remate as in 
the other stanzas, it is likewise arbitrary. 

O libertad preciosa, 
No comparada al oro, 
Ni al bien mayor de la espaciosa tierra, 
Mas rica y mas gozosa 
Que el precioso tesoro 
Que el mar del Sur entre su ndcar cierra. 
Con armas, sangre y guerra. 
Con las vidas y famas, 
Conquistado en el mundo, ^ 

Paz dulce, amor profundo, 
Que el mal apartas y ^ tu bieii nos llamas, 
En ti solo se anida 
Oro, tesoro, paz, bien, gloria y vida. 

Cuando de las humanas ^ 

Tinieblas vi del cielo 
La luz, principio de mis dulces dias, 
Aquellas tres hermanas, 
Que nuestro humano velo 
Tejiendo llevan por inciertas vias, 
Las duras penas mias 
Trocdron en la gloria, 
Que en libertad poseo 
Con siempre igual deseo ; 
Donde verd por mi dichosa historia, 



/ T 



VERSIFICACION ESPAHOLA. 455 

Quien mas leyere en ella, 

Que es dulce libertad lo menos deila.(l) 

Yo piles J sen or, exento 
De esta niontafia y prado, 
Gozo la gloria y libertad que tengo ; 
Soberbio pensamiento 
Jamas ha derribado 

La vida humilde y pobre que entretengo ; 
Cuando ^ las manos vengo 
Con el muchacho ciego, 
Haciendo rostro embisto, 
Venzo, triunfo y resisto 
La flecha, el arco, la ponzona, el fuegOj 

Y con libre aldedrlo 

Lloro el ageno mal, y espanto el mio. 

Cuando la aurora bafia 
^on helado rocio, 
De aljofar celestial el monte y prado, 
Salgo de mi cabana 
Riberas deste (2) rio 
A dar el nuevo pasto a mi ganado : 

Y cuando el sol dorado 
Muestra sus fuerzas graves, 
Al suefio el pecho inclino 
Debajo un sauce 6 pino, 
Oyendo el son de las parleras aves, 
O ya gozando el aura, 

Donde el perdido aliento se restaura. 

Cuando la noche oscura 
Con su estrellado manto 
El claro dia en su tiniebla encierra, 

Y suena en la espesura 
El tenebroso canto 

De los nocturnos hijos de la tierra. 
Al pie de aquesta sierra 
Con rusticas palabras 
Mi ganadillo cuento, 

Y el corazon contento 
Del gobierno de ovejas y de cabras. 
La temerosa cuenta 
Del cuidadoso rey me representa. 



I 

11 

(1) Delia for de ella, (poet, lie.) fj' 

(2) Deste for de este, (poet. He.) 



456 SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 

Aqui la verde pera 
Con la manzana hermosa 
De gualda y roja sangre matizada, 

Y de color de cera. 
La cermena olorosa 

Tengo, y la endrina de cole morada : 
Aqui de la enramada 
Parra que el olmo enlaza 
Melosas ubas cojo, 

Y en cantidad recojo, / 
Al tiempo que las ram as desenlaza 

El caluroso estio, 

]Membrillos que coronan este rio. 

No me da descontento 
El habito costoso 

Que de lascivo el pecho noble infama : 
Es mi dulce sustento 
Del campo generoso 
Estas silvestres frutas que derrama : 
Mi regalada cama 
De blandas pieles y hojas, 
Que dlgun rey la envidiara, 

Y de ti, fuente clara. 

Que bullendo el arena y agua arrojas, 

Estos cristales puros, 

Sustentos pobres, pero bien seguros. 

Estese el cortesano . 
Procurando a su gusto 
La blanda cama y el mejor sustento, 
Bese la ingrata mano 
Del poderoso injusto, 
Formando torres de esperanza al viento ; 
Viva y muera sediento 
Por el honroso oficio, 

Y goce yo del suelo 

Al aire, al sol, al hielo 

Ocupado en mi rustico ejercicio, 

Que mas vale pobreza 

En paz, que en guerra misera riqueza. 

Ni temo al poderoso, 
Ni al rico lisongeo, 
Ni soy camaleon del que gobierna ; 
Ni me tiene envidioso 



VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 457 

La ambicion y deseo 

De agena gloria, ni de fama eterna : 

Carne sabrosa y tierna, 

Vino aromatizado. 

Pan bianco de aquel dia, 

En prado, en fuente fria, 

Halla un pastor con h^mbre fatigado, 

Que el grande y el pequefio 

Somos iguales lo que dura el suefio. Lope de VegAi 

9. Balata. 

The ballad, balaia, is a sraall piece of verse which is now 
but little in use, its name comes from this, that it was origin- 
ally sung while dancing. The ballad is composed in pure 
hendecasyllable verses, or mixed with broken verses of seven 
syllables, and it is divided in four parts, the 1st. of which is 
called represa (repetition,) because it is wholly or partly re- 
peated at the end of the ballad ; the 2d, primera mudanza 
(1st. change,) the 3d. segunda mudanza (2d. change) be- 
cause the tone of the represa is changed in it, and the 4th. 
vuelta (return,) because they return to the 1st. tone. The 
represa and vuelta are commonly composed of three or four 
verses, and each mudanza almost always has one verse less. 

C Tras su manada Elisio lamentando 
Represa, } Mil veces este verso repetia 

^ J Ay ! quien se viera cual se vio algun dia I 

l.a Mu' 3 Vime yo tan sefior de mi fortuna, 
danza. ^ Tan libre de dolor, tan prosperado, 

2,a Mu- k Que no temi jamas mudanza alguna 
danza, (_ De aquel primero y venturoso estado : 

C Ya toda mi ventura se ha trocado ; 
Vuelta, < No soy ni ya sere quien ser solia : 

^ j Ay ! quien se viera cual se vio algun dia ! 

10. Villancicos, 

The villancico (country lay) has a great relation to the 
ballad, and is likewise made for singing. It begins with a 
cabeza^ which is repeated as the burden of the ballad. The 
cabeza, is a kind of introduction containing a sentence of two, 
three or four verses. It is followed by a stanza of six verses 
39 



458 



SPANISH VERSIFICATION. 



called pi^5, which is its comment. The two first piis form 
the 1st. mudanza^ the two following the 2d. muclanza^ and the 
two last the vuelta, after which the last or the two last of the 
cabeza are repeated. The villancicos are composed in ver- 
ses of pure redondilla mayor or menor^ or mixed with broken 
verses. The two following villancicos will serve as exam- 
ples for the mixture of the verses and rhymes. 



Gaheza. 

l.a Mudanza 

2.a Mudanza. 

Vuelta, 
Hepeticion. 



En lo prosper© y adverse 
Lo que solo satisface, / 

Es pensar que Dios lo hace. 
5 Q"^ ^^^ suba 6 baje el mundo, 
' ^ O que me ponga fortuna 
^ Sobre el cuerno de la luna, 
^ O me hunda hasta el profundo : 

5 La razon en que me fundo 
\ Para que todo lo abrace, 
Es saber que Dios lo hace. 



Cabeza 




Cuando el corazon se abrasa. 

Echa luego 
Por las ventanas de casa 

Vivo fuego. 

No se puede reprimir 

El amor 
Aunque mas quiera encubrir 

Su fervor, 
Que como es nifio y ciego, 

Da sin tasa 
Por las ventanas de casa 

Vivo fuego. 
Suspires y insias estranas 

Van saliendo, 
Cuando se estan las entrafias 

Derritiendo, 

Que el alma hecha una brasa 

Envia luego 
Por las ventanas de casa 

Vivo fuego. 



A 

TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



Common Spanish Abbreviations - - 9 

Introduction ----- 13 

CHAPTER I. 
OF PRONUNCIATION AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Oficords considered as Sounds - - 14 

Of the proiumciaiion of VoweU - - 15 

Of Dipththongs - - - - iQ 

Of Triphthongs - - - - ib. 

Of the pronunciation of Consonants - - 17 

Observations upon Orthography - - 19 

Syllahical Table - - - - 20 

Of the Accent - - - . - 21 

Of Punctuation - - - - 24 

CHAPTER II. 

OF WORDS. 

Of words considered as signs of our thoughts - 24 
CHAPTER IlL 

OF THE ARTICLE. 

Of the Article " - - - 25 

Declension of the Articles " - - 26 

Of the use of the Articles - - - 27 

CHAPTER IV. 

OF NOUNS. 

Of Nouns - - - ^ . 20 

Of the Substantive " " - - ib 

Of Genders - - . . . oq 

Of Numbers " " - - - ib 

Of the formation of the plural of Nouns - 31 

Declension of Nouns " - - - ib. 

Declension of a neuter Noun - - - 33 

Of proper Nouns " - - - 34 



460 ' CONTENTS. 

Declension of the *irticle un, una, a ov an - 35 

General observations upon the genders - - ^6 
Of the gender of Nouns considered in their terminations 37 

Substantives of both genders - - - ib. 

Of Nouns Adjective - - - - 38 

Formation of the feminine of Nouns Adjective - ib. 
Collocation arid agreement of the Adjective tvith the Sub- 

stantive ----- ib. 

Of Nouns diminutive and augmentative - - 39 

Degrees of comparison in Adjectives - ^ - 40 

Of comparatives in relation to Adjectives - ib. 

Comparative of superiority - - - 41 
Of comparatives in relation to Substantives j Verbs and 

Adverbs ----- ib. 

Comparative of inferiority - - - ib. 

Comparative of equality - - . 42 

Of Superlatives - - - - 43 
Observations upon the Comparatives and Superlatives 44 

Of numeral Adjectives and Substantives of number 45 
Adjectives which^ joined to a Substantive ^ lose one or 

more letters - - - - - 48 

CHAPTER V. 

OF PRONOUNS. 

Declension of personal Pronouns - - 51 

Pronoun reflective - - - - 54 

Table of Pronouns as regimen or objective - 54 

Construction of Pronouns as regimen or objective 55 

Of Pronouns possessive - - - 56 

Declension of Pronouns possessive - . 57 

Declension of Pronouns possessive relative - 59 

Of Pronouns demonstrative - - - 61 

Of Pronouns relative - - - - 62 

Of Pronouns interrogative - * - 64 

Of Pronouns indefinite - - - ib. 

Observations upon the indefinite Pronouns - &'o 

CHAPTER VI. 
OF VERBS. 

Of Conjugations ^ - - - 68 

Of Modes - . . . - ib. 

Of Tenses - - - - ^? 



CONTENTS. 461 

Of the Tenses of the Infinitive - - - 70 

Verbs which have two Farticiples past - - 71 

Of the Tenses of the Indicative - - 73 

Of the Future Tenses - . - - 75 

Rules for using the Future Conjunctive - 7^ 

Of the Conditional - - - - 77 

Rules for using the Conditional Tenses - - ib. 

Use of the hnperatice - - - - 80 

Use of the Subjunctive - - - - ib. 

Rules for using the Tenses of the Subjunctive mode ib. 

Of the Persons and Numbers of Verbs - - 81 

Conjugations - - - - - 82 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Haber - ib. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Vei^b Tener - 86 

Conjugation (f the Auxiliary Verbs Ser a??cfEstar 91 

Rules for usitig Ser and Estar - - - 95 
•/3 general Scheme of the termination of Regular Verbs 96 

Paradigms of the three Conjugations 97 

First Conjugation in Ar - - - ib. 

Second Conjugation in Er - - - 101 

Third Conjugation in Ir - - - 105 

Paradigm of Passive Verbs - - - 110 

Paradigm of Neuter Verbs - - - 114 

Paradigm of Refective and Reciprocal Verbs - 117 

Paradigm of Impersonal Verbs - - - 119 
List and Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs arranged 

in alphabetical order - - - 121 
Important observations - - - - ib. 
Agreement of verbs loith their Subject - - 151 
Of the Regimen of Verbs - - - 153 
Of the Verb as a RegimeJi - - - ib. 
Of the Noun Substantive as P^egimen of the Verb 154 
Of Pronouns as Regimen of Verbs - - ib. 
Observations upon Verbs - - - 155 
Of the agreement of the Participle past with the Sub- 
ject arid wzih its Regimen - - - 156 

CHAPTER VII. 
OF ADVERBS. 

Of Adverbs - - - - . 1 57 
Observations upon jamasj nunca, no, maSj menos. inuj 159 
39* 



462 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER VIIL 



OF PREPOSITIONS. 

Of Prepositions - - - - 160 

Observations upon para a7id por - - ib. 

V repositions which govern the Genitive - 162 

Prepositions which govern the Dative - - ib. 

Table of Prepositions published bi/ the Royal Acadernij 163 

CHAPTER IX. 

OP CONJUNCTIONS. 

Of Conjunctions - - - . 188 

Of the Conjunctions that govern the Subjunctive 194 

CHAPTER X. 
OF INTERJECTIONS. 

Of Interjections - - - - 194 



Names of Countries, Islands, Capes and Seas - 195 

Names of Cities^ Mountains and Rivers - 198 

Christian Names most used in S2Jain - - 199 



SPANISH EXERCISES. 

Upon the rules of the Grammar and their application^ 
with remarks and observations. 

Exercise I. Upon the Articles - - 203 

„ H. ilpon the Articles - - 204 

J, III. Upon the gender and nuwher of Nouns 205 
,, IV. Upon the coUocatio7i of Adjectives and 
their agreement with the Substantives - 207 

Exercise V. Upon the partitive Article - 208 

5j VI. Upon Diminutive and Augmentative 
Nouns and Degrees of Comparison - - 209 

Exercise VII. Upon the preceding Rides - 210 

5, VIII. Continuation of the degrees of Com- 
parison - - - - - 211 
Exercise IX. Upon observations on the Compara- 
tives and Superlatives - - - 212 
Exercise X. Upon the Numeral Adjectives - 214 



CONTEXTS. 465 

Exercise XI. Continitation of the same subject 215 

J, XII. Upon the Pronouns personal and pos- 
sessivej and on the Auxiliary Verbs ser and estar, to 
he; Imber and tenei J to have ; In-finitive and Indica- 
tive present - - - - - 21. r 

Exercise XTII. Upon the Imperfect and Preterites 219 
„ XIV. Upon the Pluperfect and Futures of 
the Indicative - - - - 220 

Exercise XV. Upon the Futures Conjunctive and 

Conditionals simple - - - - 221 

Exercise XVI. Upon the Conditionals past - 222 

„ XVII. Upon the Imperative ; Subjunctive 

Present and Imperfect . - - 224 

Exercise XVIII. Upon the Preterite and Pluperfect 225 

„ XIX. Upon the Regular Verbs - 226 

jj XX. Upon the same subject - 227 

,, XXI. Upon the same subject - 229 

^, XXII. Upon the same subject - 230 

,, XXIII. Upon the preceding Rules - 232 

„ XXIV. Upon the preceding Rules - 233 

„ XXV. Upon the preceding Rules - 235 

55 XXVI. Upon the preceding Rules - 236 

55 XXVJI. Upon the preceding Pufles ' 237 

55 XXVIII. Up)on the preceding Rules 238 

55 XXIX. Upon Pronouns - - 240 

55 XXX. Upon the preceding Rules - 241 

y, XXXI. Upoji the preceding Rules - 242 

y, XXXTI. Upon the Pronouns Demonstrative, 

Relative, Intei^ogative and Indefinite - 243 

Exercise XXXIII. Upo7i the preceding Rules 244 

5, XXXIV. Upon the preceding Pronouns 245 

55 XXXV. Upon the preceding Rules 246 

Observations upon the use of\m.j vms.5 usted5 ustedes, 

ijou, 8fc. - ' ' - ' 248 

Exercise XXXVI. Upon the Neuter, Reflective, Re- 
ciprocal and Impersonal Verbs - - 250 
Exercise XXXVII. Upon the preceding, and the Ir- 
regular Verbs - - - - 251 
Exercise XXXVIII. Upon the preceding Rules 252 
55 XXXIX. Upon the agreement of Verbs 
with their subject, ^c, - - - 253 
Exercise XL. Upon the agreement of the Participle 
past icith the subject, ^"c, - - - 255 



464 



CONTENTS. 



Exercise XLI. Upon the Adverbs and Prepositions 256 

j^ XLII. Upon the Conjunctions - 257 

,, XLIII. Upon the preceding a7idInteijections 259 

„ XLIV. Upon the preceding Rules - 260 

„ XLV. U2^on the preceding Rules - 261 



VOCABULARY. 

The parts of the human 

body 
The interior parts of the 

human body 
The five senses 
Ages 

Qualities of the body 
Defects in the human body 

Virtues and viceSy good 
and bad qualities of men 

Of eating and drinking 

Of clothes 

Of idem for women 

Beasts 

Creatures that creep on the 

earth 
Amphibious creatures 
Insects 
Birds 

Farts of a bird 
Fishes 

Farts of a fish 
Trees 
Shrubs 
Fruits 

Corn and its parts 
Roots, plants and herbs 
Flowers 
Colours 

Farts of a kingdom 
Fai'ts of a city 



VOCABULARIO. 

Las partes del cuerpo bu- 
rn ano ^ 264 
Partes interiores del cuerpo 

humano 265 
Los cinco sentidos 266 
Edades ib. 
Calidades del cuerpo ib. 
Defectos del cuerpo hu- 
mano ib. 
Virtudes y vicios, buenas y 
malas calidades de los 
hombres ib. 
Del comer y beber 268 
De los vestidos 270 
De idem para mugeres 271 
Bestias 272 
Animales que se arrastran 274 

Animales anfibios ib. 

Sabandijas 275 

Aves ib. 

Partes de una Ave 276 

Peces 277 

Partes de un pez ib. 

A^rboles ib. 

Matas 278 

Frutas ib. 

Trigos y sus partes 279 

Raices, plantas e yerbas 280 

Flores ^82 

Colores ib. 

Partes de un reino ib. 

Partes de una ciudad 283 



CONTENTS. 



465 



Of the inhabitants of 

cities 
Of a house and all things 

belonging to it 
Of country affairs 
Of the church and things 

belonging to it 
Things relating to war 



De los moradores de una 

ciudad 283 

De una casa y todo lo per- 

teneciente a ella 285 

De las eosas del campo 288 
De la Iglesia y cosas per- 

tenecientes a ella 290 

Cosas pertenecientes a la 

guerra 291 



Commercial terms and Voces mercantiles y frases 294 

phrases 
Vessels and navigation 



y navega- 



Tlie year and its part s, 8fc. 
The months 
The days of the tceek 
The holidays of the year 
Winds 

Table of the current money 
in Spain 



Embarcaciones 

cion 

El ano y sus partes, (^'C. 
Los meses 

Los dias de la semana 
Dias de fiesta del ano 
Vientos 
Tabla de las monedas 

Espana 



de 



299 
301 

ib. 

ib. 

ib. 
302 

ib. 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. FRASES, FAMILLVRES. 



I. Acerca de pedir algo 

II. Espresiones tiernas 

III. Acerra de agradecer, 
cumplimentar y mostrar 
amistad 

IV. Acerca de afirmar^ ne- 
gar, consentir^ ^c, 

V. Acerca de consuliar 6 
considerar 

VI. Del comer y del beber 

VII. Del iry venir^ mo- 
verse^ S(c, 

VIII. Del hablar^ decir, 
obrar, ^x. 

IX. Dd oir^ escuchar, ^'c. 

X. Del entender y com- 
prender 

XI. Acerca de preguntar 



About asking any tbing 303 

Expressions of kindness 304 

Of thanking, compliment- 
ing and showing kind- 
ness ib. 

Of affirming, denying, con- 
senting, &c. 306 

Of consulting or consid- 
ering 307 

Of eating and drinking ib. 

Of going, coming, mov- 
ing, &;c. 308 

Of speaking, saying, act- 
ing. &c. ^ 309 

Of hearing, listening, &:c. 310 

Of understanding and com- 
prehendinsf 311 

About asking a question ib* 



466 



CONTENTS. 



XII. Acerca de saber 

LIII. Del cone 
y acordarse 



XIII. Del conocer^ olvidar 



XIV. De la edad, de la 
vida, de la mnerte^ 8{c. 

XV. De una aya y su Se- 
nor it a 

XVI. Del paseo 

XVII. Deltiempo 

XVIII. Delahora 

XIX. De las esiaciones 
del ano 

XX. De la ida a la escuela 

XXI. En la escuela 



Of knowing or having a 
knowledge of things 

Of knowing or being ac- 
quainted with persons^ 
forgetting and remem- 
bering 

Of age, life, death, &€. 



312 



ib. 

313 



Of a governess and her 

young lady 
Of walking 
Of the weather 
Of the time of day 
Of the seasons of the year 324 



314 
318 
321 
323 



Of going to school 326 

In the school ib. 



Para hahlar Ingles 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 

Didlogo 

I. Acerca de saludar t in- 
formalise de la salud de 
alguno 

II. Acerca del hahlar Es- 
panol 

III 

IV. Del hacer una 
por la manana 

V. Del almorzar 

VI. A'ntes de la comida 

VII. Comiendo 

VIII. Para comprar libros 

IX. Del aquilar un aloja- 
miento 

X. Del informarse de al- 
guno 

XI. Del pariir 

XII. De noticias 

XIII. Entre dos amigos 

XIV. Del escribir mm 
carta 



DIA LOGOS FAMILIARES. 

Of saluting and inquiring 
after any one's health 328 

Of speaking Spanish 331 

To speak English 336 

visiia Of making a morning visit 3^3^ 



Of breakfasting 


339 


Before dinner 


340 


At dinner 


341 


To buy books 


345 


Of hiring a lodging 


347 


Of inquiring after one 


350 


Of departing 


353 


Of news 


354 


Between two friends 


357 


Of writing a letter 


358 



CONTENTS. 



46r 



Didlogo 

XV. Del trocar 

XVI. De los juegos en ge- 
neral; y primero de el de 
los dados 

XVII. Deljugar al agt- 
drez 

XVIII. Deljugar a la pe- 
lota 

XIX. De las diversiones 
del campo^ particular- 
mente de la caza y de 
la pesca 

XX. Del ir a la comedia 

XXI. Del vestirse 

XXII. Del hablar a un 
mozo de cahallos 

XXIII. De ir d un viage 

XXIV. En una posada 

XXV. Para hablar con los 
empleados en unaAduana 

XXVI. Para una persona 
estraviada en una ciudad 

XXVII. Un militar vence- 
dor^ Sfc. 



Of exchanging 360 

Of gaming in general ; and 
first of that of dice 36l . 

Of playing at chess 363 

Of playing at tennis 365 

Of country sports, especial- 
ly of hunting and fishing S66 



Of going to the play 568 

Of dressing oneself 370 

Of speaking to a groom or 

hostler 372 

Of going a journey 373 

In an inn 374 

To speak with the officers 

in a Custom-house 377 

For a person who has lost 

his way in a city 37B 

A victorious military man, 

&c. 379 



Fdbidas 381 

Epitome de la historia de Espana - - 385 

Chistes - - - - - 387 

Correspondencia Mercantil - - - 389 

Docnmentos Mercantiles - - - 392 

Cartas criticaSy por Cadalso - - - 400 

Cartas Familiares, por Tsla . - - 405 

Rejlexiones Morales, por Feijoo, Montengon, &c. 415 

Refranes Espanoles - - - - 420 

Versificacwn Espanola - - - 421 



468 




ERRATA* 








ERRATA. 




Page, 


Ltne» 


Errors. 


Corrections. 


6Q 


13 


adplicacion, 


aplicacion. 


67 


6 


amaddodj 


amado. 


97 


6 


irds, 


irias. 


125 


30 


anduviere, 


anduviere^ irr. 


136 


27 


pret. def. irguio, 


irguio, irr. 


137 


9 


yerren, 


yerran. 


160 


8,9 


Itganiementej 


elegantemente 


163 


37 


pesado, 


pasado. 


204 


note 


las, 


la. 


207 


8 


pason, digniOj 


pasion, digpdO;. 


214 


21 


decredato, 


decretado. 


215 


note 2. 


J. 


Y. 


217 


9 


it* 


te« 


254 


note 1. 


xr. 


LI. 


338 


24 


polido. 


podido. 


341 


last line 


la debajoj 


la de debajo. 


346 


23 


tamnoj 


tamano. 


384 


7 


dordf 


dara. 


400 


13 


Qnedo, 


Quedo. 


415 


9 


us, 


un. 


419 


33 


pue, 


que. 


441 


17 


dulcc. 


dulce. 



FINIS. 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper procesi 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologiei 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATlOt 
1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 213 089 6 



